Sanskrit Dictionary

Select your preferred input and type any Sanskrit or English word. Enclose the word in “” for an EXACT match e.g. “yoga”.

Root Search

gr has 4 results

Root Word (Pāṇini Dhātupāṭha:)	Full Root	Marker	Sense	Class	Sutra
√gṛ	gṛ		vijñāne	10	151
√gṛ	gṛ		secane	1	658
√gṝ	gṝ		nigaraṇe	6	115
√gṝ	gṝ		śabde	9	29

gr has 4 results

Root Word	IAST	Meaning	Monier Williams Page	Class
√गृ	gṛ	sprinkling / secana	1246/1	Cl.1
√गृ	gṛ	sounding, calling out, invoking, proclaiming / śabda	1052/2	Cl.9
√गृ	gṛ	swallowing / nigaraṇa	546/1	Cl.6
√गृ	gṛ	making known, relating, reading / vijñāna	916/2	Cl.10

Amarakosha Search

124 results

Word	Reference	Gender	Number	Synonyms	Definition

abandhyaḥ	2.4.5	Masculine	Singular	phalegrahiḥ

abhihāraḥ	2.4.17	Masculine	Singular	abhigrahaṇam

abhiyogaḥ	3.4.13	Masculine	Singular	abhigrahaḥ

agresaraḥ	2.8.73	Masculine	Singular	purogamaḥ, purogāmī, purogaḥ, praṣṭhaḥ, agrataḥsaraḥ, puraḥsaraḥ

ajamodā		Masculine	Singular	brahmadarbhā, yavānikā, ugragandhā

apradhānam	3.1.59	Neuter	Singular	aprāgryam, upasarjanam

avagrāhaḥ		Masculine	Singular	avagrahaḥ	draught

avanatānatam	3.1.70	Masculine	Singular	avāgram, ānatam

balabhadraḥ	1.1.23-24	Masculine	Singular	baladevaḥ, balaḥ, saṅkarṣaṇaḥ, tālāṅkaḥ, halāyudhaḥ, revatīramaṇaḥ, pralambaghnaḥ, kālindībhedanaḥ, halī, rauhiṇeyaḥ, kāmapālaḥ, acyutāgrajaḥ, ānakadundubhiḥ, sīrapāṇiḥ, musalī, nīlāmbaraḥ, rāmaḥ	balaram

bāliśaḥ	3.3.226	Masculine	Singular	pragraham, raśmiḥ

bhakṣitaḥ		Masculine	Singular	glastam, annam, khāditam, liptam, bhuktam, grastam, abhyavahṛtam, gilitam, carvitam, aśitam, jagdham, psātam, pratyasitam

bhūtikam	3.3.8	Neuter	Singular	mahendraḥ, guggulu, ulūkaḥ, vyālagrāhī

bukkā	2.6.65	Feminine	Singular	agramāṃsam

citrā		Feminine	Singular	mūṣikaparṇī, pratyakśreṇī, dravantī, raṇḍā, vṛṣā, nyagrodhī, sutaśreṇī, śambarī, upacitrā

dundubhiḥ	3.3.143	Masculine	Singular	kiraṇaḥ, pragrahaḥ

ekāgraḥ	3.1.79	Masculine	Singular	ekatālaḥ, ananyavṛttiḥ, ekāyanaḥ, ekasargaḥ, ekāgryaḥ, ekāyanagataḥ

goṣpadam	3.3.101	Neuter	Singular	pratyagraḥ, apratibhaḥ

grāhaḥ		Masculine	Singular	avahāraḥ	a shark

grahaḥ	03.04.2008	Masculine	Singular	grāhaḥ

grahaḥ	3.3.244	Masculine	Singular	striyāḥśroṇiḥ

grahaṇī	2.6.55	Feminine	Singular	pravāhikā

graiveyakam	2.6.105	Neuter	Singular	kaṇṭhabhūṣā

grāmadhīnaḥ	2.10.9	Masculine	Singular	grāmādhīnaḥ

grāmaṇīḥ	3.3.55	Masculine	Singular	jugupsā, karuṇā

grāmāntam		Neuter	Singular	upaśalyam

grāmatā	2.4.42	Feminine	Singular	padyaḥ, yaśaḥ

grāmyam	1.6.19	Masculine	Singular	aślīlam	rustic

grāmyasūkaraḥ	2.10.23	Masculine	Singular

granthiḥ		Masculine	Singular	parva, paruḥ

granthitam	3.1.85	Masculine	Singular	sanditam, dṛbdham

grāvan	3.3.113	Masculine	Singular	sārathiḥ, hayārohaḥ

gṛhayāluḥ	3.1.25	Masculine	Singular	grahītā

grīṣmaḥ	1.4.19	Masculine	Singular	tapaḥ, ūṣmakaḥ, nidāghaḥ, uṣṇopagamaḥ, uṣṇaḥ, ūṣmāgamaḥ	summer

grīvā	2.6.89	Feminine	Singular	śirodhiḥ, kandharā

kapitthaḥ	2.4.21	Masculine	Singular	dantaśaṭhaḥ, dadhitthaḥ, grāhī, manmathaḥ, dadhiphalaḥ, puṣpaphalaḥ

karīraḥ		Masculine	Singular	krakaraḥ, granthilaḥ

karṇaḥ	2.6.95	Masculine	Singular	śrotram, śrutiḥ, śravaṇam, śravaḥ, śabdagrahaḥ

kavalaḥ	2.9.55	Masculine	Singular	grāsaḥ

khaḍgaḥ	2.8.90	Masculine	Singular	kṛpāṇaḥ, asiḥ, riṣṭiḥ, kaukṣethakaḥ, maṇḍalāgraḥ, nistriṃśaḥ, karavālaḥ, candrahāsaḥ

luptavarṇapadam		Masculine	Singular	grastam	spoken fast

mahīdhraḥ	2.3.1	Masculine	Singular	giriḥ, parvataḥ, kṣmābhṛt, acalaḥ, gotraḥ, dharaḥ, śikharī, śiloccayaḥ, grāvā, adriḥ, ahāryaḥ, śailaḥ

manaḥśilā	2.9.109	Feminine	Singular	yavāgrajaḥ, ‍pākyaḥ

māraṇam	2.8.118	Neuter	Singular	nirbahaṇam, pravāsanam, nihiṃsanam, nirgranthanam, nihānanam, nirvāpaṇam, pratighātanam, krathanam, piñjaḥ, unmāthaḥ, nikāraṇam, parāsanam, nirvāsanam, apāsanam, kṣaṇanam, viśasanam, udvāsanam, ujjāsanam, viśaraḥ, pramāpaṇam, viśāraṇam, niṣūdanam, saṃjñapanam, ni‍starhaṇam, parivarjanam, māraṇam, pramathanam, ālambhaḥ, ghātaḥ

mārgaśīrṣaḥ		Masculine	Singular	sahāḥ, mārgaḥ, āgrahāyaṇikaḥ	agrahayana

marutaḥ	3.3.65	Masculine	Singular	grahabhedaḥ, dhvajaḥ

mātrā	3.3.185	Feminine	Singular	nideśaḥ, granthaḥ

mauthunam	2.7.61	Neuter	Singular	nidhuvanam, ratam, vyavāyaḥ, grāmyadharmaḥ

moraṭam	2.9.111	Neuter	Singular	‍pippalīmūlam, granthikam

mṛgaśīrṣam		Neuter	Singular	mṛgaśiraḥ, āgrahāyaṇī	the wing of pegasus

mūrkhaḥ	3.3.112	Masculine	Singular	lipsā, upagrahaḥ

musalaḥ	2.9.26	Masculine	Singular	ayograḥ

muṣṭibandhaḥ	3.4.14	Masculine	Singular	saṃgrāhaḥ

nāyakaḥ	3.3.19	Masculine	Singular	grāmaḥ, phalakaḥ

nīlī		Feminine	Singular	dolā, śrīphalī, grāmīṇā, droṇī, rañjnī, klītakikā, nīlinī, tutthā, madhuparṇikā, kālā

parighaḥ	3.3.32	Masculine	Singular	mṛdbhedaḥ, dṛgruk, śikyam

pāṣāṇaḥ		Masculine	Singular	upalaḥ, aśmaḥ, śilā, dṛṣat, prastaraḥ, grāvā

patram	3.3.187	Neuter	Singular	mukhāgram(śūkarasya), kroḍam, halam

pradhānam	3.1.58	Neuter	Singular	agryaḥ, agraḥ, pravarhaḥ, mukhyaḥ, pravekaḥ, agriyaḥ, prāgryaḥ, parārdhyaḥ, vareṇyaḥ, uttamaḥ, pramukhaḥ, agrīyaḥ, prāgraharaḥ, anavarārdhyaḥ, varyaḥ, anuttamaḥ

pratigrāhaḥ	1.2.140	Masculine	Singular	patadgrahaḥ

puraḥ	2.4.7	Masculine	Singular	purataḥ, agrataḥ

pūrvajaḥ	2.6.43	Masculine	Singular	agrajaḥ, agriyaḥ

rāṣṭaḥ	3.3.192	Masculine	Singular	padmam, karihastāgram, tīrthaḥ, vādyabhāṇḍamukham, oṣadhiviśeṣaḥ, jalam, vyoma, khaḍgaphalam

raudram	1.7.20	Masculine	Singular	ugram	wrath or anger

samāhṛtiḥ		Feminine	Singular	saṅgrahaḥ	compilation

śaṃbhuḥ		Masculine	Singular	kapardī, kapālabhṛt, virūpākṣaḥ, sarvajñaḥ, haraḥ, tryambakaḥ, andhakaripuḥ, vyomakeśaḥ, sthāṇuḥ, ahirbudhnyaḥ, paśupatiḥ, mahānaṭaḥ, maheśvaraḥ, īśānaḥ, bhūteśaḥ, giriśaḥ, kṛttivāsāḥ, ugraḥ, śitikaṇṭhaḥ, mahādevaḥ, kṛśānuretāḥ, nīlalohitaḥ, bhargaḥ, gaṅgādharaḥ, vṛṣadhvajaḥ, bhīmaḥ, umāpatiḥ, īśaḥ, gajāriḥ, śūlī, śarvaḥ, candraśekharaḥ, girīśaḥ, mṛtyuñjayaḥ, prathamādhipaḥ, śrīkaṇṭhaḥ, vāmadevaḥ, trilocanaḥ, dhūrjaṭiḥ, smaraharaḥ, tripurāntakaḥ, kratudhvaṃsī, bhavaḥ, rudraḥ, aṣṭamūrtiḥ, śivaḥ, īśvaraḥ, śaṅkaraḥ, khaṇḍaparaśuḥ, mṛḍaḥ, pinākī(51)	shiva, god

saṃvasathaḥ		Masculine	Singular	grāmaḥ

śarīram	2.6.71	Neuter	Singular	tanūḥ, dehaḥ, varṣma, gātram, tanuḥ, kāyaḥ, saṃhananam, kalevaram, mūrtiḥ, vigrahaḥ, vapuḥ

śaśvat	3.3.251	Masculine	Singular	prācī, prathamaḥ, purā, agrataḥ

śaṭī		Feminine	Singular	gandhamūlī, ṣaḍgranthikā, karcūraḥ, palāśaḥ

śiraḥ		Neuter	Singular	agram, śikharam

śivā	2.2.5	Feminine	Singular	jambukaḥ, kroṣṭā, mṛgradhūrtakaḥ, pheravaḥ, vañcalaḥ, gomāyuḥ, pheruḥ, sṛgālaḥ, bhūrimāyaḥ

śobhāñjanaḥ		Masculine	Singular	tīkṣṇagandhakaḥ, akṣīvaḥ, mocakaḥ, śigruḥ

sūraḥ	1.3.28-30	Masculine	Singular	sahasrāṃśuḥ, raviḥ, chāyānāthaḥ, jagaccakṣuḥ, pradyotanaḥ, lokabāndhavaḥ, aryamā, dhāmanidhiḥ, divākaraḥ, braghnaḥ, bhāsvān, haridaśvaḥ, arkaḥ, aruṇaḥ, taraṇiḥ, virocanaḥ, tviṣāṃpatiḥ, haṃsaḥ, savitā, tejasāṃrāśiḥ, karmasākṣī, trayītanuḥ, khadyotaḥ, sūryaḥ, bhagaḥ, dvādaśātmā, abjinīpatiḥ, ahaskaraḥ, vibhākaraḥ, saptāśvaḥ, vikartanaḥ, mihiraḥ, dyumaṇiḥ, citrabhānuḥ, grahapatiḥ, bhānuḥ, tapanaḥ, padmākṣaḥ, tamisrahā, lokabandhuḥ, dinamaṇiḥ, inaḥ, ādityaḥ, aṃśumālī, bhāskaraḥ, prabhākaraḥ, vivasvān, uṣṇaraśmiḥ, mārtaṇḍaḥ, pūṣā, mitraḥ, vibhāvasuḥ, aharpatiḥ(53)	the sun

sūryasūtaḥ		Masculine	Singular	aruṇaḥ, anūruḥ, kāśyapiḥ, garuḍāgrajaḥ	the dawn

svādukaṇṭakaḥ	2.4.37	Masculine	Singular	sruvāvṛkṣaḥ, granthilaḥ, vyāghrapāt, vikaṅkataḥ

svatantraḥ	3.1.14	Masculine	Singular	apāvṛtaḥ, svairī, svacchandaḥ, niravagrahaḥ

talinam	3.3.134	Masculine	Singular	aparāddhaḥ, abhigrastaḥ, vyāpadgataḥ

ucchratāḥ	3.1.69	Masculine	Singular	uccaḥ, prāṃśuḥ, unnataḥ, udagraḥ, tuṅgaḥ

upahāraḥ	2.8.28	Masculine	Singular	upadā, upāyanam, upagrāhyam

uparāgaḥ		Masculine	Singular	grahaḥ	an eclipse

vacā		Feminine	Singular	golomī, śataparbikā, ugragandhā, ṣaḍgrandhā

vandī		Feminine	Singular	pragrahaḥ, upagrahaḥ

varṇaḥ	3.3.54	Masculine	Singular	grāmādhipaḥ, nāpitaḥ, śreṣṭhaḥ

vidheyaḥ	3.1.23	Masculine	Singular	vinayagrāhī, vacanesthitaḥ, āśravaḥ

vipraḥ	2.7.4	Masculine	Singular	vāḍavaḥ, brāhmaṇaḥ, dvijātiḥ, agrajanmā, bhūdevaḥ

vistāraḥ	2.4.22	Masculine	Singular	vigrahaḥ, vyāsaḥ

viviktaḥ	3.3.89	Masculine	Singular	pūjitaḥ, arātiḥ, abhiyuktaḥ, agrataḥkṛtaḥ

vṛndārakaḥ	3.3.16	Masculine	Singular	sūcyagram, kṣudraśatruḥ, romaharṣaḥ

yatiḥ	2.7.47	Masculine	Singular	nirjitendriyagrāmaḥ, yatī

yuddham	2.8.107	Neuter	Singular	āyodhanam, pravidāraṇam, saṃkhyam, ‍samaraḥ, kalahaḥ, abhisaṃpātaḥ, saṃyogaḥ, saṃgrāmaḥ, ‍saṃyat, samit, janyam, mṛdham, samīkam, a‍nīkaḥ, ‍vigrahaḥ, kaṃliḥ, abhyāmardaḥ, āhavaḥ, ‍samitiḥ, yut, pradhanam, āskandanam, ‍sāṃparāthikam, raṇaḥ, saṃprahāraḥ, saṃsphoṭaḥ, ‍samāghātaḥ, samudāyaḥ, ājiḥ

avagrāhaḥ		Masculine	Singular	avagrahaḥ	draught

vyālagrāhī	1.8.11	Masculine	Singular	ahituṇḍakaḥ	a snake charmer

gṛhāvagrahaṇī		Feminine	Singular	dehalī

madhuśigruḥ		Masculine	Singular

nyagrodhaḥ	2.4.32	Masculine	Singular	vaṭaḥ, bahupāt

agredidhiṣūḥ	2.6.23	Masculine	Singular

vigraḥ	2.6.46	Masculine	Singular	gatanāsikaḥ

pādāgraḥ	2.6.72	Neuter	Singular	prapadam

kucāgram	2.6.78	Neuter	Singular	cūcukam

kambugrīvā	2.6.89	Feminine	Singular

pratigrāhaḥ	1.2.140	Masculine	Singular	patadgrahaḥ

yūpāgram	2.7.21	Neuter	Singular	tarma

pādgrahaṇam	2.7.45	Neuter	Singular	abhivādanam

pārṣṇigrāhaḥ	2.8.9	Masculine	Singular

avagrahaḥ	2.8.38	Masculine	Singular

agresaraḥ	2.8.73	Masculine	Singular	purogamaḥ, purogāmī, purogaḥ, praṣṭhaḥ, agrataḥsaraḥ, puraḥsaraḥ

pratigrahaḥ	2.8.81	Masculine	Singular	sainyapṛṣṭhaḥ

saṃgrāhaḥ	2.8.91	Masculine	Singular

sarvarasāgre	2.9.49	Masculine	Singular	maṇḍam

śikhigrīvam	2.9.102	Neuter	Singular	dārvikā, tuttham

śigrujam	2.9.111	Neuter	Singular

ugraḥ	2.10.2	Masculine	Singular

samagram	3.1.66	Masculine	Singular	pūrṇam, akhilam, kṛtsnam, sarvam, anūnakam, sakalam, nikhilam, aśeṣam, samam, akhaṇḍam, niḥśeṣam, samastam, viśvam

pratyagraḥ	3.1.77	Masculine	Singular	nūtanaḥ, navaḥ, nūtnaḥ, abhinavaḥ, navyaḥ, navīnaḥ

ekāgraḥ	3.1.79	Masculine	Singular	ekatālaḥ, ananyavṛttiḥ, ekāyanaḥ, ekasargaḥ, ekāgryaḥ, ekāyanagataḥ

anugrahaḥ	3.4.13	Masculine	Singular	abhyupapattiḥ

nigrahaḥ	3.4.13	Masculine	Singular	nirodhaḥ

nyagrodhaḥ	3.3.103	Masculine	Singular	cetaḥpīḍā, adhiṣṭhānam, bandhakam, vyasanam

ekāgraḥ	3.3.198	Masculine	Singular	svāduḥ, priyaḥ

vyagraḥ	3.3.198	Masculine	Singular	kaṭhinaḥ, nirdayaḥ

pragrāhaḥ	3.3.245	Masculine	Singular	vṛtraḥ

parigrahaḥ	3.3.245	Masculine	Singular	arkaḥ, agniḥ, induḥ

patadgrahaḥ	3.5.21	Masculine	Singular

pragrīvam	3.5.35	Masculine	Singular

Monier-Williams Search

3771 results for gr

ग्र

See tuvi-gr/a-.

ग्रभ्

gr/abha-, etc. See grah-.

ग्रभ

m. the taking possession of

ग्राभ

m. "one who seizes", a demon causing diseases

ग्राभ

m. what is seized, grasp

(see uda--, grāva--, tuvi--,and hasta-grābh/a-.)

ग्रभण

See a-grabhaṇ/a-.

ग्रभणवत्

(gr/abh-) mfn. yielding any hold or support

ग्रभीतृ

mfn. one who seizes

ग्रह्

([

in a few passages only

etc.]) or grabh- ([

;rarely

]) cl.9 P. gṛbhṇāti- gṛhṇ/āti- (also A1. gṛhṇīte-,irreg. gṛhṇate-

;3. plural gṛbhṇate-

; imperative 2. sg. gṛhāṇ/a-,[ ṇ/ā-, saṃhitā-pāṭha-, parasmE-pada Passive voice Nominal verb plural n.

]

etc.; gṛbhṇān/a-& gṛhṇ-[Ved.]; gṛhṇa-

; -gṛhṇāhi-, -gṛbhṇīhi-See prati-grabh-; A1. gṛbhṇīṣva-[

] or gṛhṇ-;3. sg. P. gṛhṇītāt-;Ved. imperative gṛbhāy/a-etc.See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order ya- confer, compare gṛhaya-; perf. jagrāha-

etc.;1. sg. gr/abhā-

; gṛbhm/a-

; A1. gṛhe-,

;3. plural gṛbhr/e-& gṛbhrir/e-

; P. Potential gṛbhyāt-,

; parasmE-pada gṛbhv/as-,

; future 2nd grahīṣyati-, te-

etc.[ confer, compare

];sometimes wrongly spelt gṛh-

; grahiṣy-

; Conditional agrahaiṣyat-

; future 1st grahītā-

; Aorist agrabham-

; bhīt-

etc.; hīt-[

]

etc.; -/ajagrabhīt-etc.See saṃ-grah-; subjunctive 2. plural grabhīṣṭa-

; A1. agrahīṣṭa-

; aghṛkṣata-

[not in

];Ved. 3. plural agṛbhran-[

] and agṛbhīṣata-; ind.p. gṛbhītv/ā-

; gṛhītv/ā-,

; grahāya-

; infinitive mood grahītum-[

etc.; confer, compare

;wrongly spelt gṛh-

]; Passive voice gṛhyate-[ future 1st grahītā-or grāhitā- future 2nd grahīṣyate-or grāhiṣy- Aorist agrāhi-,3. dual number agrahīṣātām-or agrāhiṣ-

];Ved. subjunctive 3. plural gṛhyāntai-

;Ved. Passive voice 3. sg. gṛhate-[

]or gṛhe-[

] or gṛhaye-[

; confer, compare gṛhaya-]; subjunctive 1. plural gṛhāmahi-

; Potential gṛhīta-

) to seize, take (by the hand, pāṇau-or kare-,exceptionally pāṇim-(double accusative)

; confer, compare

), grasp, lay hold of (exempli gratia, 'for example' pakṣaṃ-,to take a side, adopt a party

; pāṇim-,"to take by the hand in the marriage ceremony", marry

etc.)

etc. ; to arrest, stop

; to catch, take captive, take prisoner, capture, imprison

etc. ; to take possession of, gain over, captivate

; to seize, overpower (especially said of diseases and demons and the punishments of varuṇa-)

etc. ; to eclipse

; to abstract, take away (by robbery)

; to lay the hand on, claim

; to gain, win, obtain, receive, accept (from ablative,rarely genitive case), keep

etc. (with double accusative

) ; to acquire by purchase (with instrumental case of the price)

etc. ; to choose

; to choose any one (accusative) as a wife ; to take up (a fluid with any small vessel), draw water

; to pluck, pick, gather

; to collect a store of anything

; to use, put on (clothes)

i etc. ; to assume (a shape)

; to place upon (instrumental case or locative case)

; to include

; to take on one's self, undertake, undergo, begin

etc. ; to receive hospitably (a guest), take back (a divorced wife)

; "to take into the mouth", mention, name

etc. ; to perceive (with the organs of sense or with m/anas-), observe, recognise

etc. ; (in astronomy) to observe

; to receive into the mind, apprehend, understand, learn

; (in astronomy) to calculate

; to accept, admit, approve

; to obey, follow

; to take for, consider as

etc. ; (Passive voice) to be meant by (instrumental case)

and Scholiast or Commentator : Causal grāhayati-, to cause to take or seize or lay hold of

; to cause to take (by the hand[ pāṇim-]in the marriage ceremony)

; to cause to marry, give away a girl (accusative) in marriage to any one (accusative)

; to cause any one to be captured

; to cause any one to be seized or overpowered (as by varuṇa-'s punishments or death etc.)

; to cause to be taken away

; to make any one take, deliver anything (accusative) over to any one (accusative; exempli gratia, 'for example' āsanam-with accusative"to cause to take a seat, bid any one to sit down"

)

; to make any one choose

(Aorist ajigrahat-) ; to make any one learn, make acquainted or familiar with (accusative)

etc.: Desiderative jighṛkṣati- (confer, compare

), also te-, to be about to seize or take

; to be about to eclipse

; to be about to take away

; to desire to perceive (with the organs of sense), strive to apprehend or recognise

: Intensive jarīgṛhyate-

; ([ confer, compare Zend gerep,geurv; Gothic greipa; German greife; Lithuanian gre1bju; Slavonic or Slavonian grablju1; Hibernian or Irish grabaim,"I devour, stop."])

ग्रह

mfn. (

; gaRa vṛṣādi-) in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' (

Va1rtt. 1) seizing, laying hold of, holding

(see aṅkuśa--, dhanur--,etc.)

ग्रह

mfn. obtaining,

ग्रह

mfn. perceiving, recognising,

ग्रह

m. "seizer (eclipser)", rāhu- or the dragon's head

etc.

ग्रह

m. a planet (as seizing or influencing the destinies of men in a supernatural manner;sometimes 5 are enumerated, viz. Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus, and Saturn

;also 7 id est the preceding with rāhu- and ketu-

;also 9 id est the sun[ see

] and moon with the 7 preceding

;also the polar star is called a graha-,

(

);the planets are either auspicious śubha--, sad--,or inauspicious krūra--, pāpa--

;with jaina-s they constitute one of the 5 classes of the jyotiṣka-s)

ग्रह

m. the place of a planet in the fixed zodiac

ग्रह

m. the number"nine"

ग्रह

m. Name of particular evil demons or spirits who seize or exercise a bad influence on the body and mind of man (causing insanity etc.;it falls within the province of medical science to expel these demons;those who especially seize children and cause convulsions etc. are divided into 9 classes according to the number of planets

)

etc.

ग्रह

m. any state which proceeds from magical influences and takes possession of the whole man

ग्रह

m. a crocodile

(in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).)

ग्रह

m. any ladle or vessel employed for taking up a portion of fluid (especially of soma-) out of a larger vessel

ग्रह

m. Name of the 8 organs of perception (viz. the 5 organs of sense with manas-, the hands and the voice)

ग्रह

m. (equals gṛha-) a house

(see a--, khara--, -druma-and -pati-)

ग्रह

m. "anything seized", spoil, booty

(see hāluñcana-)

ग्रह

m. as much as can be taken with a ladle or spoon out of a larger vessel, ladleful, spoonful (especially of soma-)

etc.

ग्रह

m. the middle of a bow or that part which is grasped when the bow is used

(su--,

)

ग्रह

m. the beginning of any piece of music

ग्रह

m. grasp, seizing, laying hold of (often in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

etc.

ग्रह

m. keeping back, obstructing

ग्रह

m. imprisoning, imprisonment (haṃ-gam-,"to become a prisoner"

)

ग्रह

m. seizure (by demons causing diseases exempli gratia, 'for example' aṅga--,spasm of the limbs)

ग्रह

m. seizure of the sun and moon, eclipse

ग्रह

m. stealing, robbing

ग्रह

m. effort

ग्रह

m. insisting upon, tenacity, perseverance in (locative case or in compound)

ग्रह

m. taking, receiving, reception

ग्रह

m. taking up (any fluid)

ग्रह

m. choosing

ग्रह

m. "favour" See -nigraha-

ग्रह

m. mentioning, employing (a word)

ग्रह

m. apprehension, perception, understanding

and

ग्राह

mf(ī-)n. (

) in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' seizing, holding, catching, receiving

ग्राह

mf(ī-)n. taking (a wife)

(see karṇa--, gila--, dhanur--, pāṇi--, pārṣṇi--, vandi--, vyāla--, hasta--)

ग्राह

m. a rapacious animal living in fresh or sea water, any large fish or marine animal (crocodile, shark, serpent, Gangetic alligator, water elephant, or hippopotamus)

etc. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).,

)

ग्राह

m. a prisoner

ग्राह

m. the handle (of a sword etc.)

ग्राह

m. seizure, grasping, laying hold of

(varia lectio for graha-)

ग्राह

m. morbid affection, disease

ग्राह

m. paralysis (of the thigh, ūru-grāh/a-

[ ur- manuscripts ]

)

ग्राह

m. "mentioning" See nāma--

ग्राह

m. fiction, whim

ग्राह

m. conception, notion of (in compound)

ग्राह

haka-, etc. See grah-.

ग्रहभक्ति

f. division (of countries) with respect to the presiding planets

ग्रहभक्ति

f. plural Name of

ग्रहभीतिजित्

m. "conquering the fear of the demons", Name of a perfume

ग्रहभोजन

m. a horse

ग्रहचरितविद्

m. "knowing the course of planets", an astrologer,

ग्रहचिन्तक

m. idem or 'm. "knowing the course of planets", an astrologer, .'

ग्रहदशा

f. the aspect of the planets

ग्रहदाय

m. the length of life as granted by the planets

ग्रहधार

m. equals grahādh-

ग्रहाधार

m. "planet-support", the polar star

ग्रहाधीन

mfn. subject to planetary influence

ग्रहाधिपति

m. the chief of the demons causing diseases

ग्रहाधिष्ठापन

n. Name of work

ग्रहाध्याय

m. Name of work

ग्रहादि

a gaṇa- of

(

)

ग्रहादि

another gaṇa-, 445

ग्रहदीपिका

f. Name of work

ग्रहद्रुम

for gṛha-d-

ग्रहागम

m. demoniacal possession

ग्रहागमकुतूहल

n. Name of work

ग्रहगण

m. a whole number of demons causing diseases

ग्रहगण

m. a whole number of planets taken collectively

ग्रहगणित

n. "calculation of the planets", the astronomical part of a jyotiḥ-śāstra-

ग्रहगोचर

n. Name of work

ग्रहग्रामणी

m. "planet-chief", the sun

ग्रहग्रस्त

mfn. possessed by a demon

ग्रहाग्रेसर

m. "planet-chief", the moon

ग्रहाह्वय

m. "called after the demons", the plant bhūtāṅkuśa- (bhūta- equals graha-?)

ग्रहक

m. a prisoner

ग्राहक

mf(ikā-)n. one who seizes or takes captive

ग्राहक

mf(ikā-)n. one who seizes (the sun or moon), who eclipses

ग्राहक

mf(ikā-)n. one who receives or accepts

ग्राहक

mf(ikā-)n. a purchaser

ग्राहक

mf(ikā-)n. containing, including

and

ग्राहक

mf(ikā-)n. perceiving, perceiver, (in philosophy) subject

ग्राहक

mf(ikā-)n. captivating, persuading

ग्राहक

m. a hawk, falcon (catching snakes)

ग्राहक

m. Marsilea quadrifolia

ग्राहक

m. Name of a demon causing diseases

ग्राहक

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' the taking hold of

(varia lectio grah-).

ग्राहककृकर

m. a partridge used as call-bird

ग्रहकल्लोल

m. "wave (? or enemy) of the planets", rāhu-

ग्रहकाण्ड

n. "section treating of graha-s of soma- which are taken up by a ladle", Name of

ग्राहकत्व

n. the power of perception or comprehension,

n. Name of work

m. a call-bird

n. Name of work

for gṛha-kṣ-

f. the mutual relation of planets and prophecy derived from it

ग्रहलाघव

n. Name of an astronomical work of the 16th century.

ग्रहालुञ्चन

n. pouncing on prey

ग्राहम्

ind. See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order

ग्राहम्

ind. so as to seize, (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

ग्राहम्

ind. (with locative case or instrumental case or in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') 50

ग्राहम्

ind. (with accusative or in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') 53

(see nāma-gr/āh-.)

ग्रहमर्द

m. (friction id est) opposition between certain planets.

ग्रहमर्दन

n. idem or 'm. (friction id est) opposition between certain planets.'

ग्रहमातृका

f. Name of a Buddhist goddess.

ग्रहमय

mfn. consisting of planets

ग्रहामय

m. equals hāgama-

ग्राहमेलक

m. conjunction of planets,

ग्रहमुष्

m. (? for -puṣ- equals -puṣa-) the sun

ग्रहण

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' seizing, holding

ग्रहण

mfn. resounding in (?)

n. the hand

n. an organ of sense

n. a prisoner

n. a word mentioned or employed (exempli gratia, 'for example' vacana--,"the word vacana-")

and

ग्रहण

n. seizing, holding, taking

etc.

ग्रहण

n. taking by the hand, marrying,

ग्रहण

n. catching, seizure, taking captive

etc.

ग्रहण

n. seizure (as by a demon causing diseases), demoniacal possession

ग्रहण

n. seizure of the sun or moon, eclipse

etc.

ग्रहण

n. gaining, obtaining, receiving, acceptance

ग्रहण

n. choosing

ग्रहण

n. purchasing

ग्रहण

n. taking or drawing up (any fluid)

ग्रहण

n. the taking up of sound, echo

ग्रहण

n. attraction

ग्रहण

n. putting on (clothes)

ग्रहण

n. assuming (a shape)

ग्रहण

n. undertaking, devoting one's self to (in compound)

ग्रहण

n. service

ग्रहण

n. including

ग्रहण

n. mentioning, employing (a word or expression)

vArttika

and

ग्रहण

n. mentioning with praise, acknowledgment

ग्रहण

n. assent, agreement

ग्रहण

n. perceiving, understanding, comprehension, receiving instruction, acquirement of any science

etc.

ग्रहण

n. acceptation, meaning

Va1rtt. 5

and

ग्रहण

n. equals ṇī-gada-

(see kara--, keśa--, garbha--, cakṣur--, nāma--, pāṇi--, punar--.)

ग्रहणगत

mfn. eclipsed

ग्रहणक

containing, including,

ग्रहणान्त

mfn. being at the close of study

ग्रहणान्तम्

ind. until (the veda-) has been thoroughly apprehended or learned,

ग्रहणान्तिक

mfn. idem or 'ind. until (the veda-) has been thoroughly apprehended or learned, '

ग्रहणपञ्चाङ्ग

n. Name of two astronomical works.

ग्रहणफल

n. Name of two astronomical works.

ग्रहनाश

m. "destroying (the influence of) planets", Alstonia scholaris

ग्रहणसम्भवाधिकार

m. Name of an astronomical work.

ग्रहनाशन

m. idem or 'm. "destroying (the influence of) planets", Alstonia scholaris '

ग्रहनाशन

m. for gṛha-n- (a pigeon)

ग्रहणवत्

mfn. meant in reality, not to be taken in a different way

vArttika 1 and iv, 1, 4 Va1rtt. 2.

ग्रहनायक

m. equals -grāmaṇī-

ग्रहनायक

m. the planet Saturn

ग्रहनेमि

m. the moon

ग्रहनेमि

m. the section of the moon's course between the asterisms mūla- and mṛga-śiras-

ग्रहणी

f. an imaginary organ supposed to lie between the stomach and the intestines (the small intestines or that part of the alimentary canal where the bile assists digestion and from which vital warmth is said to be diffused)

ग्रहणि

f. equals ṇī-

ग्रहणी

f. of ṇa- q.v

ग्रहणीदोष

m. idem or 'm. a morbid affection of the grahaṇī-, dysentery '

("constipation"Scholiast or Commentator)

ग्रहणीगद

m. a morbid affection of the grahaṇī-, dysentery

ग्रहनिग्रह

m. dual number favour and punishment

ग्रहणीहर

n. "removing dysentery", cloves

ग्रहणीकपाट

m. a kind of mixture (for curing diarrhoea etc.)

ग्रहणीप्रदोष

m. idem or 'm. idem or 'm. a morbid affection of the grahaṇī-, dysentery ' ("constipation"Scholiast or Commentator) '

ग्रहणिरोग

See ṇī-r-.

ग्रहणीरोग

m. idem or 'f. idem or 'm. idem or 'm. idem or 'm. a morbid affection of the grahaṇī-, dysentery ' ("constipation"Scholiast or Commentator) ' ' '

(metrically also ṇi-r-).

ग्रहणीरोगिन्

mfn. affected with dysentery

ग्रहणीरुज्

f. idem or 'm. idem or 'm. idem or 'm. a morbid affection of the grahaṇī-, dysentery ' ("constipation"Scholiast or Commentator) ' '

ग्रहणीय

mfn. to be accepted as a rule or law, to be taken to heart

ग्रहणीयता

f. acceptableness

ग्रहणीयत्व

n. idem or 'f. acceptableness '

ग्रहान्तरुक्थ्य

n. a particular ekāha-,

ग्रहापहा

f. "removing (the influence) of planets", the bile-stone of cattle

ग्रहपति

m. equals -grāmaṇī-

ग्रहपति

m. the moon

(gṛha-p-,B)

ग्रहपति

m. for gṛha-p-,

ग्रहपति

m. Calotropis gigantea

ग्रहपीडा

f. idem or 'n. "pain by rāhu-", an eclipse '

ग्रहपीडन

n. "pain by rāhu-", an eclipse

ग्रहपूजा

f. worship of the planets.

ग्रहपुष

m. "cherishing the planets (with light)", the sun

ग्रहराज

m. equals -grāmaṇī-

ग्रहराज

m. the moon

ग्रहराज

m. the planet Jupiter

ग्रहारामकुतूहल

n. Name of an astronomical work by bhāskara-.

ग्रहसमागम

m. equals -yuti-,

ग्रहशान्ति

f. propitiation of the planets (by sacrifices etc.),

ग्रहसारणी

f. Name of work

ग्रहाशिन्

m. equals ha-nāśa-

ग्रहाश्रय

m. equals hādhāra-

ग्रहशृङ्गाटक

n. triangular position of the planets with reference to each other,

ग्रहशृङ्गाटक

n. Name of

(treating also of many other positions of the planets) .

ग्रहस्थितिवर्णन

n. Name of work

ग्रहस्वर

m. the 1st note of a musical piece.

ग्रहता

f. the state of being a planet,

ग्रहतिलक

m. Name of work

ग्रहत्व

n. equals -tā-

ग्रहत्व

n. the state of a ladleful or spoonful

ग्रहावमर्दन

n. equals ha-marda-

ग्रहवर्मन्

varia lectio for guha-v-.

ग्रहवर्ष

m. a planetary year

ग्रहवर्षफल

n. Name of

(describing the good and evil fortune belonging to certain days, months, or years ruled over by particular planets) .

ग्रहावर्त

m. equals lagna-, horoscope etc.

ग्राहवत्

mfn. containing or abounding with large marine animals

ग्रहविचारिन्

m. equals -cintaka-

ग्रहविमर्द

m. equals -marda-

ग्रहविनोद

m. Name of work

ग्रहविप्र

m. equals -cintaka-

ग्रहाय

ind. (āya-) dative case equals gṛhītvā- See grah- (see guda--, śiro--, hanu--, hṛd--.)

ग्रहयाग

m. equals -yajña-

ग्रहयागतत्त्व

n. Name of work

ग्रहयज्ञ

m. a sacrifice offered to the planets

ग्रहयज्ञतत्त्व

n. Name of part of

ग्रहयालु

varia lectio for gṛh-, 148.

ग्रहयामलतन्त्र

n. Name of a tantra-.

ग्रहयाय्य

varia lectio for gṛh-

ग्राहयितव्य

mfn. to be urged to undertake anything (accusative)

ग्रहयोग

m. equals -yuti-

ग्रहयुद्ध

n. equals -marda-

ग्रहयुद्ध

n. Name of

ग्रहयुति

f. conjunction of planets.

ग्रहेश

m. equals ha-grāmaṇī-

ग्रहेष्टक

n. sg. a ladleful (of any fluid) and the bricks

ग्रहि

m. anything that holds or supports

(see phala--, le--.)

ग्राही

f. a female marine animal or crocodile

ग्राहि

f. a female spirit seizing men (and causing death and diseases, swoon, fainting fit)

(Sleep is described as her son, xvi, 5, 1)

ग्राहि

in compound for hin-.

ग्रहिका

f. See grāh-.

ग्राहिका

f. with vali-, one of the 3 folds which lead off the feces from the body,

ग्राहिक

mfn. insisting upon with tenacity

ग्रहिल

mf(ā-)n. (gaRa kāśādi-) taking interest in, inclined to (in compound)

ग्रहिल

mf(ā-)n. (equals grathika-) possessed by a demon

ग्राहिन्

mfn. (

) in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' seizing, taking, holding, laying hold of

(varia lectio)

ग्राहिन्

mfn. catching, engaged in catching,

ग्राहिन्

mfn. picking, gathering

ग्राहिन्

mfn. containing, holding

ग्राहिन्

mfn. gaining, obtaining, acquiring

ग्राहिन्

mfn. keeping

(

)

ग्राहिन्

mfn. purchasing

ग्राहिन्

mfn. drawing, attracting, fascinating, alluring

ग्राहिन्

mfn. choosing

ग्राहिन्

mfn. searching, scrutinizing

ग्राहिन्

mfn. "perceiving, acknowledging" See guṇa--

ग्राहिन्

mfn. astringent, obstructing, constipating

ग्राहिन्

m. equals hi-phala-

ग्राहिणी

f. (iṇī-) a variety of the Alhagi plant

ग्राहिणी

f. a variety of Mimosa

ग्राहिणी

f. a great kind of lizard

ग्राहिफल

m. "having astringent fruits", Feronica elephantum

ग्रहिष्णु

mfn. See phala--.

ग्राहित

mfn. made to take or seize

ग्राहित

mfn. made to accept or take (a seat etc.)

ग्राहित

mfn. made to undertake or to be occupied with (instrumental case)

ग्राहित

mfn. taught

ग्रहीतव्य

mfn. to be taken or received

ग्रहीतव्य

mfn. to be taken up or down (a fluid)

ग्रहीतव्य

mfn. to be perceived

ग्रहीतव्य

mfn. to be learned

ग्रहीतव्य

n. obligation to take or receive

ग्रहीतृ

mfn. one who takes or seizes

ग्रहीतृ

mfn. one who receives

ग्रहीतृ

mfn. a purchaser

ग्रहीतृ

mfn. one who perceives or observes

ग्रहीतृ

mfn. one who notices or hears

(see pāṇi--.)

ग्रहोक्थ

n. a hymn sung while a ladleful (of soma-) is being taken up

ग्राहुक

mfn. seizing (with accusative)

ग्रह्य

mfn. belonging to or fit for a graha- (ladleful of any fluid)

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be seized or taken or held

etc.

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be clasped or spanned

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be captured or imprisoned

etc.

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be overpowered

ग्राह्य

mfn. (a-- negative)

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be picked or gathered

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be received or accepted or gained

etc.

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be taken in marriage,

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be received in a friendly or hospitable manner,

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be insisted upon

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be chosen or taken account of

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be perceived or recognised or understood

etc. (see a--)

ग्राह्य

mfn. (in astronomy) to be observed

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be considered

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be understood in a particular sense, meant

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be accepted as a rule or law, to be acknowledged or assented to, to be attended to or obeyed, to be admitted in evidence

etc.

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be undertaken or followed (a vow)

ग्राह्य

mfn. to be put (as confidence) in (locative case),

ग्राह्य

m. an eclipsed globe (sun or moon)

ग्राह्य

n. poison (

;"a present"

)

ग्राह्य

n. the objects of sensual perception

ग्राह्या

f. archery exercise

(see dur--, suhha--, svayaṃ--.)

ग्राह्यगिर्

mfn. one whose words are to be accepted or followed

ग्राह्यक

See a--.

ग्राह्यरूप

mfn. to be taken to heart

ग्राह्यत्व

n. perceptibleness

ग्राह्यवाच्

mfn. idem or 'mfn. equals -gir- '

ग्राह्यवत्

mfn. equals -gir-

ग्रैष्म

mf(ī- gaRa utsādi-)n. (fr. grīṣm/a-) relating to or belonging to the summer

iv etc.

ग्रैष्म

mf(ī- gaRa utsādi-)n. produced by the hot season (as a disease)

ग्रैष्म

mf(ī- gaRa utsādi-)n. sown in summer

ग्रैष्मक

mfn. sown in summer

ग्रैष्मक

mfn. to be paid in summer (a debt),

ग्रैष्मायण

m. patronymic fr. grīṣma- gaRa aśvādi-.

ग्रैष्मी

f. equals grīṣmī-

ग्रैष्मिक

mfn. equals grīṣmam adhīte veda vā- gaRa vasantādi-

ग्रैष्मिक

n. anything that grows in summer

ग्रैष्मिक

ग्रैष्मिकधान्य

n. equals grīṣma-dh-,

ग्रैव

mfn. (fr. grīv/ā-

) representing the neck

ग्रैव

n. a necklace

ग्रैव

n. a chain worn round the neck of an elephant

ग्रैवाक्ष

m. patronymic fr. grīv- gaRa śivādi- (varia lectio)

ग्रैवेय

n. (

) a necklace

ग्रैवेय

m. n. a chain worn round the neck of an elephant

ग्रैवेयक

n. (m.

) a necklace

ग्रैवेयक

n. a chain worn round the neck of an elephant

ग्रैवेयक

m. plural a class of deities (9 in number) who have their seat on the neck of the loka-puruṣa- or who form his necklace

ग्रैव्य

mfn. relating to the neck

ग्राम

m. an inhabited place, village, hamlet

etc.

ग्राम

m. the collective inhabitants of a place, community, race

etc.

ग्राम

m. any number of men associated together, multitude, troop (especially of soldiers)

ग्राम

m. the old women of a family

ग्राम

m. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' (see

) a multitude, class, collection or number (in general) see indriya--, guṇa--, bhūta--, etc.

ग्राम

m. a number of tones, scale, gamut

ग्राम

m. equals indriya--

ग्राम

m. plural inhabitants, people

ग्राम

n. a village

ग्राम

n. ([ confer, compare ariṣṭa--, mahā--, śūra--, saṃ--; confer, compare Hibernian or Irish gramaisg,"the mob";gramasgar,"a flock."])

ग्रामबालजन

m. a young peasant

ग्रामभृत

m. equals -preṣya-.

ग्रामचैत्य

n. the sacred tree of a village

ग्रामचर

m. inhabitant of a village, husbandman

ग्रामाचार

m. equals ma-dharma-

ग्रामचर्या

f. "village custom", sexual intercourse

ग्रामचटक

m. a domestic sparrow

ग्रामदशेश

m. the head of 10 villages

ग्रामदेव

m. (= - devatā-),

ग्रामदेवता

f. the tutelar deity of a village

ग्रामदेवता

f. (

)

ग्रामाधान

n. a small village

ग्रामधरा

f. "village-supporter", Name of a rock

ग्रामधर्म

m. the observances or customs of a village

ग्रामाधिकृत

m. superintendent or chief of a village

ग्रामाधिप

m. idem or 'm. superintendent or chief of a village '

ग्रामाधिपति

m. idem or 'm. idem or 'm. superintendent or chief of a village ' '

ग्रामाधिपति

m. (grāmasyādh-

)

ग्रामाध्यक्ष

m. idem or 'm. (grāmasyādh- )'

ग्रामाध्ययन

n. study in a village

ग्रामद्रुम

m. a single tree in a village held sacred by the inhabitants

ग्रामग

mfn. going to a village

ग्रामगमिन्

mfn. equals -ga-

Va1rtt. 1

ग्रामगामिन्

mfn. idem or 'mfn. equals -ga- Va1rtt. 1 '

ग्रामगत

mfn. gone to a village

ग्रामगेय

n. "to be sung in a village", Name of one of the 4 hymn-books of the

ग्रामगेयगान

n. idem or 'n. "to be sung in a village", Name of one of the 4 hymn-books of the '

ग्रामघात

m. plundering a village

ग्रामघातक

m. plunderer of a village

ग्रामघातिन्

mfn. plundering a village

ग्रामघातिन्

m. a village slaughterer

ग्रामघोषिन्

mfn. sounding among men or armies (as a drum)

ग्रामाग्नि

m. "village fire", the common fire

ग्रामगोदुह्

-dhuk- m. a village herdsman gaRa yuktārohy-ādi-.

ग्रामगृह्य

mfn. "adjoining the houses of a village", being outside a village (an army),

ग्रामगृह्यक

m. a village carpenter

ग्रामहासक

m. a sister's husband

ग्रामजा

f. "growing in villages (id est in cultivated ground)", a kind of bean

ग्रामजाल

n. a number of villages, district

ग्रामजालिन्

m. the governor of a district

ग्रामजनिष्पावी

f. "pulse grown in cultivated ground", Phaseolus radiatus

ग्रामजात

mfn. village-born, rustic

ग्रामजात

mfn. grown in cultivated ground

ग्रामजित्

mfn. conquering troops

m. a small village

m. a village

m. Name of a town

n. equals ma-caryā-

ग्रामकाम

mfn. (gr/āma--) one who wishes to possess a village

ग्रामकाम

mfn. desirous of villages, fond of living in villages

ग्रामकन्द

m. a kind of bulbous plant

ग्रामकण्टक

m. "village-thorn", a boor (?)

ग्रामखण्ड

varia lectio for -ṣaṇḍa-.

ग्रामकोल

m. a domestic pig

ग्रामक्रोड

m. idem or 'm. a domestic pig '

ग्रामाक्षपटलिक

m. a village archivist

ग्रामकुक्कुट

m. a domestic cock

ग्रामकुलाल

m. a village potter

ग्रामकुलालिका

f. the state or business of a village potter gaRa manojñādi- (not in

)

ग्रामकुमार

m. a village boy gaRa manojñādi-.

ग्रामकुमारिका

f. the state or life of a village boy

ग्रामकूट

m. equals -kūṭaka-

ग्रामकूट

m. Name of an author of Prakrit verses

ग्रामकूटक

m. the chief of a village (belonging to the śūdra- caste)

(varia lectio for -kaṇṭaka-).

ग्रामलेखक

m. a village copyist

ग्रामलुण्ठक

m. a village robber,

ग्रामलुण्ठन

n. equals -ghāta-

ग्राममद्गुरिका

f. equals mya-m-

ग्राममद्गुरिका

f. equals -yuddha-

ग्राममहिषी

f. a tame buffalo-cow

ग्राममर्यादा

f. the boundary of a village,

ग्राममौख्य

("head of a village"?)

ग्राममृग

m. "village animal", a dog

ग्राममुख

m. n. a market place

ग्रामण

mf(ī-)n. coming from grāmaṇī- gaRa takṣaśilādi-.

ग्रामनापित

m. the village barber

ग्रामणि

n. grāmaṇī

ग्रामणि

m. metrically for -ṇī-

ग्रामणि

n. of ṇī- q.v

ग्रामणी

m. (fr. -nī-

; genitive case plural -ṇyām-,or Vedic or Veda -ṇīnām-,

, not in

; grāmaṇi ṇi- n."leading, chief",

) the leader or chief of a village or community, lord of the manor, squire, leader of a troop or army, chief, superintendent

ग्रामणी

mfn. (See before -ṇi- n.) chief, pre-eminent

ग्रामणी

m. a village barber (chief person of a village)

ग्रामणी

m. a groom (bhogika-)

ग्रामणी

m. a yakṣa-

ग्रामणी

m. Name of a gandharva- chief

ग्रामणी

m. of a demon causing diseases

ग्रामणी

m. of one of śiva-'s attendants

ग्रामणी

m. of a locality gaRa takṣaśilādi-

ग्रामणी

f. a female peasant or villager

ग्रामणी

f. a harlot

ग्रामणी

f. (for miṇī-) the Indigo plant

ग्रामणिभोगीन

mfn.

Va1rtt. 3

ग्रामणीपुत्र

m. the son of a harlot

ग्रामणीसव

m. Name of an ekāha- rite

ग्रामणीथ्य

(gr/āma--) n. (fr. -nīthya-) the station of the chief of a village or community

ग्रामणीत्व

n. the condition or office of a chief or leader

ग्रामनिवासिन्

mfn. living in villages (birds)

ग्रामणीय

n. (fr. ma-ṇ/ī-) equals ma-ṇīthya-

ग्रामणीय

m. plural Name of a people

ग्रामान्त

m. the border of a village

ग्रामान्तर

n. another village

ग्रामान्ते

ind. in the neighbourhood of a village

ग्रामान्तिक

n. the neighbourhood of a village

ग्रामान्तीय

n. place near a village

ग्रामपाल

m. a village guardian

ग्रामपालक

m. idem or 'm. a village guardian '

ग्रामपति

m. the chief of a village

ग्रामपात्र

n. idem or 'm. the chief of a village '

ग्रामपिष्ट

mfn. ground at home

ग्रामप्रेष्य

m. the messenger or servant of a village or community

ग्रामप्रेष्य

m. (preṣya grāmasya-

)

ग्रामपुरुष

m. the chief of a village or town

ग्रामपुत्र

m. equals -kumāra- gaRa manojñādi-.

ग्रामपुत्रिका

f. equals gr/āmakumārikā-

ग्रामरजक

m. a village dyer

ग्रामारण्य

n. a forest belonging to a village

ग्रामारण्य

n. dual number village and forest

ग्रामरथ्या

f. a village street

ग्रामसद्

mfn. abiding or residing in villages

ग्रामशकटिक

n. a village cart,

ग्रामसंघ

m. a village corporation, municipality

ग्रामसंकर

m. the common sewer or drain of a village

ग्रामषण्ड

m. gaRa manojñādi- (-khaṇḍa-

; -saṇḍa-

; -sāṇḍa-

)

ग्रामषण्डिका

f. the state of a grāma-ṣaṇḍa-

ग्रामशत

n. 100 villages, province

(plural = sg.)

ग्रामशताध्यक्ष

m. the governor of a province, 119

ग्रामशतेश

m. idem or 'm. the governor of a province, 119' , 117.

ग्रामसीमा

f. village boundary or village field

ग्रामसीमन्त

(= - sīmā-),

ग्रामसिंह

m. "village-lion" equals mṛga-

ग्रामस्थ

mfn. equals -sad-

ग्रामस्थ

mfn. belonging to a village, rustic

ग्रामस्थ

m. a village

ग्रामसूकर

m. equals -kola-

ग्रामसुख

n. equals grāmya-s-

ग्रामता

f. plural (

) a multitude of villages

ग्रामतक्ष

m. equals -gṛhyaka-

ग्रामतस्

ind. from a village

ग्रामटिका

f. a miserable village

ग्रामत्व

n. idem or 'f. plural () a multitude of villages '

ग्रामवास

m. living in a village

ग्रामवासिन्

mfn. (

) living in villages, tame

ग्रामवासिन्

m. equals -vāstavya-

ग्रामवास्तव्य

m. the inhabitant of a village, villager

ग्रामवत्

mfn. furnished with villages

ग्रामविशेष

m. variety of the scales in music

ग्रामवृद्ध

m. an old villager

ग्रामय

Nom. P. yati-, to invite

ग्रामयाजक

mfn. offering sacrifices or conducting the ceremonies for every member of a community including unworthy persons (doing it out of avarice)

ग्रामयाजन

n. sacrificing for many,

ग्रामयाजिन्

mfn. idem or 'n. sacrificing for many, '

ग्रामयुद्ध

n. a riot, village tumult

ग्रामे

locative case of ma- q.v

ग्रामेचर

m. a villager, householder

ग्रामेगेय

mfn. to be sung in the village

(see ma-g-.)

ग्रामेश

m. the head man of a village

ग्रामेश्वर

m. idem or 'm. the head man of a village '

ग्रामेवास

m. equals ma-v-

ग्रामेवासिन्

mfn. equals ma-v-

ग्रामेय

m. a villager

ग्रामेया

f. a female villager

ग्रामेयक

m. (

vArttika) equals ya-

(5th century?)

ग्रामेयका

f. equals yā-

ग्रामि

in compound for m/in- q.v

ग्रामिक

m. rustic

ग्रामिक

m. (in music) chromatic

ग्रामिक

m. a villager

ग्रामिक

m. equals meśa-

ग्रामिक्य

n. the condition or life of a grāmika- gaRa purohitādi-.

ग्रामिन्

mfn. surrounded by a village or community or race

ग्रामिन्

mfn. pertaining to a village, rustic

ग्रामिन्

m. a villager, peasant (miṇāṃ rati- equals ma-caryā-

)

ग्रामिन्

m. equals meśa-

ग्रामीण

mfn. (

) produced in or peculiar to a village

ग्रामीण

mfn. rustic, vulgar, rude

ग्रामीण

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' See eka--

ग्रामीण

mfn. equals grāmaiḥ sambhṛta-

(mīna-)

ग्रामीण

mfn. (in music) chromatic

ग्रामीण

m. a villager, peasant

etc.

ग्रामीण

m. a dog

ग्रामीण

m. equals ma-kola-

ग्रामीण

m. a crow

ग्रामीणा

f. equals miṇī-

ग्रामीणा

f. equals mya-vallabhā-

ग्रामीन

for mīṇa- q.v

ग्रामिणी

f. (see ma-ṇī-) the Indigo plant

ग्रामिपुत्र

m. a rustic boy

ग्रामीय

See samāna--.

ग्रामीयक

m. the member of a community

ग्रामोपाध्याय

m. the religious instructor of a village

ग्राम्य

(according to to some also) venereal disease,

ग्राम्य

mfn. (

) used or produced in a village

ग्राम्य

mfn. relating to villages

ग्राम्य

mfn. prepared in a village (as food)

ग्राम्य

mfn. living (in villages id est) among men, domesticated, tame (an animal), cultivated (a plant;opposed to vanya-or araṇya-,"wild")

etc.

ग्राम्य

mfn. allowed in a village, relating to the sensual pleasures of a village

ग्राम्य

mfn. rustic, vulgar (speech)

ग्राम्य

mfn. (See -tā-and -tva-)

ग्राम्य

mfn. relating to a musical scale

ग्राम्य

m. a villager

etc.

ग्राम्य

m. a domesticated animal See -māṃsa-

ग्राम्य

m. equals ma-kola-

ग्राम्य

n. rustic or homely speech

ग्राम्य

n. the Prakrit and the other dialects of India as contra-distinguished from the Sanskrit

ग्राम्य

n. food prepared in a village

ग्राम्य

n. sensual pleasure, sexual intercourse

ग्राम्या

f. equals miṇī-

ग्राम्य

n. equals ma-ja-niṣpāvī-

ग्राम्यबुद्धि

mfn. clownish, ignorant

ग्राम्यधर्म

m. a villager's duty

ग्राम्यधर्म

m. "a villager's right (opposed to the right of a recluse)", sexual intercourse

ग्राम्यधर्मिन्

mfn. addicted to sexual intercourse

ग्राम्यगज

m. a village-born or tame elephant

ग्राम्यकाम

m. plural idem or 'n. equals ma-caryā- '

ग्राम्यकन्द

m. (or a-gr-?) a kind of bulbous plant

ग्राम्यकर्कटी

f. Benincasa cerifera

ग्राम्यकर्मन्

n. equals ma-caryā-

ग्राम्यकोल

m. equals ma-k-

ग्राम्यकोशातकी

f. Name of a cucurbitaceous plant

ग्राम्यक्रोड

m. equals ma-k-

ग्राम्यकुक्कुट

m. equals ma-k-

ग्राम्यकुङ्कुम

n. safflower

ग्राम्यमद्गुरिका

f. (equals ma-m-) the fish Silurus Singio

ग्राम्यमांस

n. the flesh of domesticated animals

ग्राम्यमृग

m. equals ma-m-

ग्राम्यपशु

m. a domestic animal

ग्राम्यपशु

m. (applied contemptuously to a man)

ग्राम्यराशि

m. Name of several signs of the zodiac

ग्राम्यसूकर

m. equals -kola-

ग्राम्यसुख

n. "a villager's pleasure", sleep, sexual intercourse

(grāmya sukha-,ix, 18, 40) .

ग्राम्याश्व

m. "village-horse", an ass

ग्राम्यता

f. rustic or vulgar speech

ग्राम्यत्व

n. idem or 'f. rustic or vulgar speech '

ग्राम्यत्व

n. (a-- negative,"urbanity")

m. a village bailiff

f. Beta bengalensis

f. local gossip

m. (gaRa tikādi-) patronymic fr. mya-

(varia lectio ṇa-).

ग्राम्येहोपरम

m. ceasing from sexual desires

ग्रन्थ्

or grath- cl.9 P. grathn/āti- (future parasmE-pada granthiṣyat-

; perf. 3. plural jagranthur-or grethur-

; ind.p. granthitvā-or grath-,

), to fasten, tie or string together, arrange, connect in a regular series

; to string words together, compose (a literary work)

: cl.1 P. A1. grathati-, te-

(varia lectio) ; P. granthati-,

; A1. granthate- (Aorist agranthiṣṭa-), to be strung together or composed (a literary work),

: Causal P. A1. granthayati-, te-, to string together

; ([ confer, compare ; Latin glut-en?])

ग्रन्थ्

or grath- cl.1 A1. grathate- or granth-, to be crooked (literally and figuratively)

ग्रन्थ

m. tying, binding, stringing together

ग्रन्थ

m. equals th/i-, a knot

(varia lectio)

ग्रन्थ

m. honeycomb

vArttika

ग्रन्थ

m. an artificial arrangement of words (especially of 32 syllables equals śloka-

), verse, composition, treatise, literary production, book in prose or verse, text (opposed to artha-"meaning"

)

etc.

ग्रन्थ

m. a section (of

)

ग्रन्थ

m. the book or sacred scriptures of the Sikhs containing short moral poems by Nanak Shah and others (see

pp. 158-177)

ग्रन्थ

m. wealth, property

(see uttara--, nir--, ṣaḍ--.)

ग्रन्थकार

m. idem or 'm. a book-maker, author '

ग्रन्थकरण

n. composition of books or treatises

ग्रन्थकर्तृ

m. a book-maker, author

ग्रन्थकृत्

m. equals -kartṛ-

f. a library

f. a study

for -kuṭī-.

n. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') stringing, tying or connecting together (as a chapter or book), arranging, composing

Va1rtt. 15

(varia lectio gaḍu-or gaḍuka-)

ग्रन्थना

f. idem or 'n. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') stringing, tying or connecting together (as a chapter or book), arranging, composing Va1rtt. 15 (varia lectio gaḍu-or gaḍuka-) '

ग्रन्थपर्णी

f. "knot-leaved", a kind of dūrvā- grass

ग्रन्थसंधि

m. a section of a work, chapter

ग्रन्थविस्तर

m. a voluminous text

ग्रन्थविस्तर

m. a multitude of grantha-s (of 32 syllables each)

ग्रन्थविस्तार

m. diffuseness of style, voluminousness

ग्रन्थवृत्ति

f. a quotation (?)

ग्रन्थि

m. a knot, tie, knot of a cord, knot tied in the end of a garment for keeping money (

), bunch or protuberance of any kind (especially if produced by tying several things together)

etc.

ग्रन्थि

m. the joint of a reed or cane

ग्रन्थि

m. joint of the body

ग्रन्थि

m. a complaint, (knotting id est) swelling and hardening of the vessels (as in varicocele)

ग्रन्थि

m. "a knot tied closely and therefore difficult to be undone", difficulty, doubt

etc.

ग्रन्थि

m. a bell

ग्रन्थि

the point of a moustache,

ग्रन्थि

m. Name of several plants and bulbous roots (granthi-parṇa-, hitāvalī-, bhadra-mustā-, piṇḍālu-)

(see udara--, kaṭu--, kāla--, kṛmi--, keśa--, go--, dāma--,etc.)

ग्रन्थि

m. crookedness (literally and figuratively)

ग्रन्थिबन्धम्

ind. (with grath-) so as to form a knot (in tying)

ग्रन्थिबन्धन

n. tying a knot

ग्रन्थिबन्धन

n. tying together the garments of the bride and bridegroom at the marriage ceremony

ग्रन्थिबर्हिन्

m. equals -parṇaka-

ग्रन्थिभेद

m. equals -cchedaka-

ग्रन्थिभेदक

m. idem or 'm. equals -cchedaka- '

(in PrakritgaNThi-bheyaga)

(varia lectio for granthi-cchedaka-).

ग्रन्थीभू

to become bulbous

ग्रन्थिच्छेदक

m. (equals -bheda-) a purse-cutter, pickpocket

(in Prakrit)

ग्रन्थिदल

m. "knotty-leaved", a kind of perfume (coraka-)

ग्रन्थिदला

f. a kind of bulbous root

ग्रन्थिदूर्वा

f. a kind of dūrvā- grass

ग्रन्थिहर

m. removing difficulties

ग्रन्थिक

m. a relater, narrator (?,"one who understands the joints or divisions of time, of the year, etc."[fr. granthi- see kāla-granthi-],an astrologer, fortune-teller

)

Va1rtt. 15

ग्रन्थिक

m. a kind of disease of the outer ear

ग्रन्थिक

m. a kind of plant or substance

ग्रन्थिक

m. a N. assumed by nakula- (when master of the horse to king virāṭa-)

ग्रन्थिक

m. equals saha-deva-

ग्रन्थिक

mn. Capparis aphylla

ग्रन्थिक

mn. a kind of resin, bdellium

ग्रन्थिक

n. equals nthīka-, pepper

ग्रन्थिक

n. equals nthiparṇaka-

ग्रन्थिक

n. a kind of disease of women

ग्रन्थीक

n. the root of long pepper

ग्रन्थिल

mfn. knotted, knotty gaRa sidhmādi-

ग्रन्थिल

m. Name of several plants and roots (Flacourtia sapida, Capparis aphylla, Amaranthus polygonoides, Asteracantha longifolia, Cocculus cordifolius, hitāvalī-)

ग्रन्थिल

m. a kind of perfume

ग्रन्थिल

n. equals nthīka-

ग्रन्थिल

n. green or undried ginger

ग्रन्थिला

f. Name of two kinds of dūrvā- grass and of a kind of Cyperus

ग्रन्थिलीभू

to become bulbous

ग्रन्थिमत्

mfn. tied, bound

ग्रन्थिमत्

m. "knotty", Heliotropium indicum

ग्रन्थिमत्फल

m. "bulb-fruited", Artocarpus Lacucha

ग्रन्थिमोचक

m. equals -cchedaka-

ग्रन्थिमूल

n. "bulb-rooted", garlic

ग्रन्थिमूला

f. equals -dūrvā-

ग्रन्थिन्

mfn. strung together (?)

ग्रन्थिन्

mfn. one who reads books, well-read

ग्रन्थिनिका

f. a kind of bulbous plant

(see chinna-g-.)

ग्रन्थिपर्ण

m. idem or 'm. equals -dala- (coraka-) '

ग्रन्थिपर्ण

n. equals -parṇaka-

ग्रन्थिपर्णा

f. the plant jatukā-

ग्रन्थिपर्णक

a kind of fragrant plant

ग्रन्थिपर्णमय

mfn. made of the perfume thiparṇa-

ग्रन्थिपर्णी

f. equals nthap-

ग्रन्थिपत्त्र

m. equals -dala- (coraka-)

ग्रन्थिफल

m. "knotty-fruited", Feronia elephantum

ग्रन्थिफल

m. Vanguiera spinosa

: the plant sākuruṇḍa-

ग्रन्थित

mfn. for grath-

ग्रन्थित्व

n. the becoming knotty, hardening

ग्रन्थिवज्रक

m. a kind of steel

ग्रन्थिवीसर्प

m. a kind of erysipelas

ग्रन्थिवीसर्पिन्

mfn. having the rpa- disease

ग्रप्स

See grathna-.

ग्रस्

cl.1 P. A1. gr/asati-, te- (perf. Potential A1. jagrasīta-

; parasmE-pada A1.and Passive voice jagrasān/a-

), to seize with the mouth, take into the mouth, swallow, devour, eat, consume

etc. ; to swallow up, cause to disappear

; to eclipse

etc. ; to swallow or slur over words, pronounce indistinctly

(

) 27 ; to suppress, stop or neglect (a lawsuit)

: Causal P. grāsayati-, to cause to swallow or devour

; to consume, swallow

; ([ confer, compare ; Latin gra1-men; German gras; English grass.])

ग्रस्

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' "swallowing" (exempli gratia, 'for example' piṇḍa-- q.v)

ग्रास

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' swallowing

ग्रास

m. a mouthful, lump (of rice etc. of the size of a peacock's egg)

etc.

ग्रास

m. food, nourishment

Va1rtt. 4

ग्रास

m. the quantity eclipsed, amount of obscuration

ग्रास

m. (in geometry) a piece cut out by the intersection of 2 circles

ग्रास

m. the erosion, morsel bitten

ग्रास

m. equals grasti-

ग्रास

m. the act of eclipsing

ग्रास

m. an eclipse

ग्रास

m. the first contact with an eclipsed disk

ग्रास

m. slurring, inarticulate pronunciation of the gutturals

ग्रासाच्छादन

n. sg. food and clothing, bare subsistence

ग्रासाछादन

n. food and raiment,

ग्रासाम्बु

n. sg. food and drink

ग्रसन

n. swallowing

ग्रसन

n. a kind of partial eclipse of the sun or moon

ग्रसन

n. seizing

ग्रसन

n. the mouth, jaws

ग्रासपात्रीकृ

P. - karoti-, to swallow anything as a good morsel,

ग्रासप्रमाण

n. the size of a morsel

ग्रासप्रमाण

n. a kind of process applied to mercury

ग्रासशल्य

n. any extraneous substance lodged in the throat

ग्रसती

f. (irreg. pr. p. f.), Name of a nāga- virgin

ग्रासावरार्ध्य

n. at least one morsel,

ind.

f. See agra--.

to swallow

mfn. swallowed

mfn. accustomed to swallow or absorb

ग्रसिष्ठ

mfn. (superl.) swallowing most

ग्रस्त

mfn. swallowed, eaten

ग्रस्त

mfn. taken, seized

ग्रस्त

mfn. surrounded or absorbed

ग्रस्त

mfn. possessed (by a demon)

ग्रस्त

mfn. involved in

ग्रस्त

mfn. tormented, affected by

etc.

ग्रस्त

mfn. eclipsed

etc.

ग्रस्त

mfn. inarticulately pronounced, slurred

(

) 35

ग्रस्त

mfn. (a-- negative)

ग्रस्त

n. inarticulate pronunciation of the vowels

Introd. on Va1rtt. 18.

ग्रस्तास्त

m. the setting of the sun or moon while eclipsed

ग्रस्तत्व

n. the being refuted (by arguments)

ग्रस्ति

f. the act of swallowing

ग्रस्तोदय

m. the rising of the sun or moon while eclipsed

ग्रस्तृ

m. an eclipser

ग्रस्य

mfn. devourable

ग्रथ्

or granth- cl.9 P. grathn/āti- (future parasmE-pada granthiṣyat-

; perf. 3. plural jagranthur-or grethur-

; ind.p. granthitvā-or grath-,

), to fasten, tie or string together, arrange, connect in a regular series

; to string words together, compose (a literary work)

: cl.1 P. A1. grathati-, te-

(varia lectio) ; P. granthati-,

; A1. granthate- (Aorist agranthiṣṭa-), to be strung together or composed (a literary work),

: Causal P. A1. granthayati-, te-, to string together

; ([ confer, compare ; Latin glut-en?])

ग्रथ्

or granth- cl.1 A1. grathate- or granth-, to be crooked (literally and figuratively)

ग्रथन

n. tying, binding-stringing together

ग्रथन

n. thickening, becoming obstructed or clogged with knotty lumps

ग्रथन

n. (in dramatic language) intimation of the issue of a plot

ग्रथना

f. tying, binding, ensnaring

ग्रथनीय

mfn. to be tied or strung or bound

ग्रथिल

mfn. possessed by an evil spirit

(see grahila-.)

ग्रथिन्

See 2. grath-.

ग्रथिन्

mfn. false

ग्रथित

mfn. strung, tied, bound, connected, tied together or in order, wound, arranged, classed

etc.

ग्रथित

mfn. set with, strewn with

etc.

ग्रथित

mfn. artificially composed or put together (the plot of a play)

ग्रथित

mfn. closely connected with each other, difficult to be distinguished from each other

ग्रथित

mfn. having knots, knotty

ग्रथित

mfn. coagulated, thickened, hardened,

ग्रथित

mfn. hurt, injured

ग्रथित

mfn. seized, overcome

ग्रथित

n. the being strung Scholiast or Commentator

ग्रथित

n. a tumour with hard lumps or knots

ग्रथितव्य

mfn. equals thanīya-

ग्रथ्न

m. a bunch, tuft

ग्रथ्न

m. (grapsa-

; glapsa-

)

ग्रथ्य

mfn. equals thanīya-

ग्राव

in compound for van-.

ग्रावग्राभ

m. one who handles the soma- stones

ग्रावहस्त

(gr/āv-) mfn. equals -grābh/a-

ग्रावन्

m. a stone for pressing out the soma- (originally 2 were used

;later on 4[

] or 5 [Sch. on

etc.])

ग्रावन्

m. a stone or rock

etc.

ग्रावन्

m. a mountain

ग्रावन्

m. a cloud

ग्रावन्

m. equals grāva-st/ut-

ग्रावन्

mfn. hard, solid

ग्रावरोहक

m. "growing on stones", Physalis flexuosa

ग्रावस्तोत्रिया

f. (scilicet hotrā-) the praise addressed to the soma- stones

ग्रावस्तोत्रीय

mfn. relating to the praise of the soma- stones (hotrā-)

ग्रावस्तोत्रीय

n. the duties of the grāva-stut-

ग्रावस्तोत्रीया

f. equals triyā-

ग्रावस्तुत्

m. (

)"praising the soma- stones", one of the 16 priests (called after the hymn[

] addressed to the soma- stones)

ग्रावस्तुत्

ग्रावायण

m. patronymic fr. van-

ग्रि

See tuvi-gr/i-.

ग्रीष्म

m. ( gras-

) the summer, hot season (the months śuci- and śukra-

;or jyeṣṭha- and āṣāḍha-, from the middle of May to the middle of July)

etc.

ग्रीष्म

m. summer heat, heat

ग्रीष्म

m. Name of a man gaRa aśvādi-

ग्रीष्मा

f. Symplocos racemosa

ग्रीष्मभवा

f. "growing in summer", Jasminum Sambac

ग्रीष्मधान्य

n. summer corn

ग्रीष्महास

n. "summer-smiles", the flocculent seeds, down, etc. blown about in the air in summer

ग्रीष्महेमन्त

m. dual number summer and winter

ग्रीष्मजा

f. "growing in summer", Anona reticulata

ग्रीष्मकाल

m. the hot season

ग्रीष्मपुष्पी

f. "blossoming in summer", the plant karuṇī-

ग्रीष्मसमय

m. equals -kāla-

ग्रीष्मसुन्दरक

m. Erythraea centaureoides (or Mollugo spergula)

ग्रीष्मवन

n. a grove frequented in summer

ग्रीष्मी

f. equals ṣma-bhavā-

; ([ confer, compare Hibernian or Irish gris,"fire";griosgaim,"I fry, boil";griosach,"burning embers."])

ग्रीष्मोद्भवा

f. equals ṣma-bh-

ग्रीव

m. the neck

ग्रीव

m. a corridor (?)

ग्रीवा

f. the back part of the neck, nape, neck (in the earlier literature generally plural; see also

)

etc. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' [ see

] f(ā-).

)

ग्रीव

m. the tendon of the trapezium muscle

ग्रीव

m. the neck part of the hide of an animal

ग्रीव

m. the neck of a bottle

ग्रीव

m. ([ confer, compare /asita--, /ṛkṣa--, kambu--, kalm/āṣa--, kṛṣṇ/a--, tuvi--, niṣk/a--,etc.; confer, compare also Lithuanian galwa7; Russian glava& golova-.])

ग्रीवा

f. of va- q.v

ग्रीवबद्ध

mfn. fastened round the neck,

ग्रीवाबिल

n. the hollow in the nape of the neck

ग्रीवच्छिन्न

mf(/ā-)n. one whose neck is cut

ग्रीवदघ्न

mfn. reaching up to the neck

ग्रीवाघण्टा

f. a bell hanging down from the neck of a horse

ग्रीवाक्ष

m. "having (eyes id est) spots in the neck " gaRa śivādi- (varia lectio)

ग्रीवालिका

f. the neck

ग्रीविन्

m. "long-necked", a camel

ग्रुच्

(= gluc-) cl.1 P. grocati- (Aorist agrucat-,or agrocīt-

;in derivatives k-for c-,

) to steal

; to go

ग्रुमुष्टि

m. equals guru-m-

अभिग्रह्

-grihṇāti-, to take hold of, take up (from the soil)

etc. ; to accept, receive

; to set (as a blossom)

; to lay together, to fold (the hands) See abhigṛhīta-pāṇi- below: Caus. -grāhayati-, to catch, surprise exempli gratia, 'for example' rūpābhigrāhita-, taken in the very act

अभिग्रह

m. seizing taking hold of

अभिग्रह

m. attack, onset

अभिग्रह

m. defiance, challenge

अभिग्रह

m. robbing, plundering

अभिग्रह

m. authority

अभिग्रह

m. a vow

अभिग्रहण

n. robbing

अभिग्राहिन्

mfn. seizing,

अभिग्रहीतृ

mfn. one who seizes

अभिग्रस्त

mfn. equals abhi-panna- (overcome)

अभिपरिग्रह्

to clasp, embrace

अभिसंग्रह्

to grasp at once with several fingers

अभिशिरोग्र

mfn. turned with the points towards the head,

अभ्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. having the point turned or directed towards (accusative)

अभ्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. quick,

अभ्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. constant, perpetual

अभ्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. fresh (as blood)

अभ्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. near

अभ्यग्र

n. proximity

अभ्यात्माग्र

mfn. having the points turned towards one's self,

अच्युताग्रज

m. (viṣṇu-'s elder brother) , balarāma-

अच्युताग्रज

m. indra-.

अधाराग्रह

m. a ladleful or cupful not drawn from flowing water,

अधिग्रीवम्

ind. upon the neck, up to the neck.

अधिकारसंग्रह

m. Name (also title or epithet) of a work on bhakti- (rāmānuja- school).

आदिग्रन्थ

m. Name (also title or epithet) of the first division or principal section of the sacred book of the Sikhs,

IW, 325, note 1

आदित्यग्रह

m. a particular ladle-full of soma- in the evening-oblation

अद्याग्रेण

ind. henceforth,

आगमतत्त्वसंग्रह

m. Name (also title or epithet) of work (confer, compare

-208)

आगीग्राम

m. Name (also title or epithet) of a family,

अग्निग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

अग्र

mfn. (fr. aṅg-

), foremost, anterior, first, prominent, projecting, chief, best

अग्र

mfn. supernumerary

अग्रा

f. ([ scilicet rekhā-]) measure of amplitude (id est the distance from the extremity of the gnomon-shadow to the line of the equinoctial shadow)

अग्र

n. foremost point or part

अग्र

n. tip

अग्र

n. front

अग्र

n. uppermost part, top, summit, surface

अग्र

n. point

अग्र

n. and hence, figuratively, sharpness

अग्र

n. the nearest end, the beginning

अग्र

n. the climax or best part

अग्र

n. goal, aim

अग्र

n. multitude

अग्र

n. a weight, equal to a pala

अग्र

n. a measure of food given as alms

अग्र

n. (in astronomy) the sun's amplitude

अग्र

n. (also) rest, remainder,

अग्रभाग

(or agrāṃśa-) m. fore part, (in astronomy) degree of amplitude

अग्रभण

mfn. ( grabh-= grah-), having nothing which can be grasped

आग्रभोजनिक

mfn. (fr. agrabhojana-), one to whom food is first offered

commentator or commentary

अग्रभोज्य

mfn. enjoying the best of anything,

अग्रभू

mfn. being at the top, at the head of.

अग्रभुज्

mfn. having the precedence in eating

अग्रभुज्

mfn. Name of the sun

अग्रभूमि

f. a goal

अग्रभूमि

f. the top-floor (of a house)

अग्रबीज

mfn. (said of plants) propagated by cuttings

अग्रबीज

m. a viviparous plant.

अग्रबोधि

m. Name (also title or epithet) of a king of Ceylon,

अग्रच्छद

n. the point of a leaf,

अग्रदानिन्

m. a degraded Brahman who receives presents from śūdra-s, or takes things previously offered to the dead

अग्रदातृ

mfn. offering the best bits (to the gods)

अग्रदेवी

f. a chief queen,

अग्रधर्म

m. high spiritual state,

अग्रदिधिषु

m. equals agre-didhiṣu-

अग्रद्रवसंहति

f. the thin upper part of milk or curds,

अग्राद्वन्

mfn. having precedence in eating

अग्रग

m. a leader.

अग्रगामिन्

mfn. preceding, taking the lead.

अग्रगणना

f. the reckoning or placing uppermost,

, Scholiast or Commentator

अग्रगण्य

mfn. to be counted or regarded as the foremost, principal.

अग्राग्र

mf(ā-)n. pointed in front,

अग्रग्रासिका

f. the claim or right to the first morsel

आग्रह्

(1. sg. A1. -gṛbhṇe-; imperative 2. dual number -gṛhṇītam-) to hold in (as horses)

अग्रह

mfn. equals mukhya- (Comm.)

propose to read agra-ha-, destroying the best part

अग्रह

m. non acceptance, a houseless man id est a vānaprastha-, a Brahman of the third class

अग्रह

mfn. (also) where no ladleful is drawn,

आग्रह

m. insisting on, strong or obstinate inclination for, obstinacy, whim

आग्रह

m. (equals grahaṇa-) seizing, taking

आग्रह

m. favour, affection

अग्रहण

n. not meaning,

अग्रहण

mfn. not afflicted by disease,

अग्रहार

m. royal donation of land to Brahmans

अग्रहार

m. land or village thus given

आग्रहारिक

mfn. one who appropriates to himself an agra-hāra- or an endowment of lands or villages conferred upon Brahmans

अग्रहस्त

m. equals -pāṇi-

अग्रहस्त

m. the tip of an elephant's trunk

अग्रहस्त

m. finger

आग्रहात्

ind. ablative obstinately

अग्रहायण

m. "commencement of the year", Name of a Hindu month (mārgaśīrṣa-,beginning about the 12th of November) .

आग्रहायण

m. equals agra-hāyaṇa- (q.v)

commentator or commentary

आग्रहायण

m. a kind of pāka-yajña-

आग्रहायण

m. Name of the constellation mṛga-śiras-

आग्रहायण

etc. See above.

आग्रहायणक

mfn. to be paid (as a debt) on the day of full moon of the month agrahāyaṇa-

आग्रहायणम्

ind. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound'

)

आग्रहायणी

f. (gaRa gaurādi- q.v; scilicet paurṇamāsī-) the day of full moon in the month agrahāyaṇa-

etc.

आग्रहायणि

ind. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound'

)

आग्रहायणिक

mfn. idem or 'mfn. to be paid (as a debt) on the day of full moon of the month agrahāyaṇa- '

आग्रहायणिक

mfn. containing a full moon of agrahāyaṇa- (as a month or half a month or a year)

आग्रहेण

ind. instrumental case obstinately

अग्राहिन्

mfn. not taking, not holding (said of a leech and of tools)

अग्राह्य

mfn. not to be conceived or perceived or obtained or admitted or trusted, to be rejected.

अग्राह्यक

mfn. not to be perceived, impalpable

अग्रज

mfn. (see j/ā-) born first or earlier

अग्रज

m. the first-born, an elder brother

etc.

अग्रज

m. a brahman-

अग्रजा

f. an elder sister.

अग्रजा

mfn. first-born

अग्रजङ्घा

f. the fore part of the leg, the shin-bone

अग्रजन्मन्

m. the first-born, an elder brother, a brahman-

etc.

अग्रजन्मन्

m. a member of one of the three highest castes

अग्रजन्मन्

m. brahmā-

अग्रजातक

m. a brahman-

अग्रजाति

m. a brahman-

अग्रजिह्व

n. tip of the tongue

अग्रज्या

f. sine of the amplitude

अग्रकर

m. the fore part of the hand, finger

अग्रकर

m. first ray

अग्रकाय

m. the fore part of the body.

अग्राक्षन्

n. a side-look

अग्रलोहिता

f. a kind of vegetable, similar to the spinage.

अग्रम्

ind. in front, before, ahead of

अग्रमहिषी

f. the principal queen

अग्रमांस

n. the heart

अग्रमांस

n. morbid protuberance of the liver.

अग्रांश

equals agrabhāga-.

अग्रांशु

m. the end of a ray of light, the focal point.

अग्राम्य

mfn. not rustic, town-made

अग्राम्य

mfn. not tame, wild.

अग्रनख

m. tip of a nail

अग्रनख

m. see nakhāgra-.

अग्रनासिका

f. tip of the nose

अग्रनासिका

f. see nāsikāgra-.

अग्राङ्गुलि

m. the finger-tip.

अग्रणी

mfn. taking the lead, foremost

अग्रणी

mfn. Name of an agni-

अग्रानीक

n. the front of an army, vanguard

अग्रणीकृ

P. - karoti-, to send before,

अग्रनिरूपण

n. determining beforehand, prophecy.

अग्रणीति

(/agra--) f. the first offering

अग्रान्त

m. or n. the product added to the ultimate term,

आग्रन्थ्

P. to twine round.

आग्रन्थम्

ind.p. twining round

आग्रन्थन

n. a knot (= granthi-),

अग्रपा

mfn. drinking first

अग्रपाद

m. fore part of the foot

अग्रपाक

m. the firstlings of fruit,

अग्रपाणि

m. fore part of the hand

अग्रपाणि

m. the right hand

अग्रपर्णी

f. cowage, Carpopogon Pruriens.

अग्रपेय

n. precedence in drinking

अग्रप्रदायिन्

mfn. offering first

अग्रप्रशिर्ण

mfn. broken at the top

अग्रपूजा

f. highest act of reverence

आग्रस्

to devour

अग्रसंधानी

f. the register of human actions (kept by yama-)

अग्रसंख्या

f. (accusative with Causal of sam-- ā-- ruh-,"to put at the head"),

अग्राशन

mfn. eating before another (ablative)

अग्रासन

n. seat of honour.

अग्रसन्ध्या

f. early down.

अग्रसानु

m. the front part of a table-land

अग्रसर

mf(ī-)n. going in front, taking the lead.

अग्रसारा

f. a short method of counting immense numbers.

अग्रशस्

ind. from the beginning

अग्रसेन

m. Name of janamejaya-'s son.

अग्रशिख

mfn. having a pointed flame,

अग्रश्रावक

m. (and f(ikā-))"chief disciple", Name (also title or epithet) of some followers of buddha-,

अग्रस्त

mfn. not swallowed (said of sounds),

आग्रस्त

mfn. bored, perforated by (in compound) commentator or commentary on

अग्रसूची

f. point of a needle,

अग्रतःकृ

to place in front or at the head, to consider most important.

अग्रतःसर

mf(ī-)n. going in front, taking the lead.

अग्रतलसंचार

m. a partic, posture in dancing,

अग्रतस्

ind. See column 3.

अग्रतस्

ind. in front, before

अग्रतस्

ind. in the beginning, first

अग्रतस्

ind. (with genitive case) before, in presence of.

आग्रथन

n. tying round, girding,

अग्रतीर्थ

m. Name of a prince

अग्रवक्त्र

n. Name of a surgical instrument

अग्रवत्

(/agra--) mfn. being at the top

अग्रयान

n. stepping in front to defy the enemy.

अग्रयान

n. the first vehicle,

आग्रयण

m. (fr. /agra-), the first soma- libation at the agniṣṭoma- sacrifice (See gr/aha-)

etc.

आग्रयण

m. a form of agni-

आग्रयण

n. oblation consisting of first-fruits at the end of the rainy season

etc.

आग्रयण

libation

आग्रायण

m. (gaRa naḍādi- q.v) "descendant of agra-", Name of a grammarian

आग्रायण

m. of a dārbhāyaṇa-

आग्रायण

n. (

commentator or commentary) equals āgrayaṇa- n. above

आग्रायण

n. (varia lectio for āgray-

)

आग्रयणाग्र

mfn. beginning with the

आग्रयणक

n. oblation consisting of the first-fruits

आग्रयणक

n. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

आग्रयणपात्र

n. the vessel used for the āgrayaṇa- libation

आग्रयणस्थाली

f. idem or 'n. the vessel used for the āgrayaṇa- libation '

आग्रयणेष्टि

f. oblation of the first-fruits (in harvest)

आग्रयणी

f. (scilicet iṣṭi-) an oblation consisting of first-fruits commentator or commentary on

अग्रायणीय

n. title of the second of the fourteen oldest (but lost) jaina- books, called pūrva-s.

आग्रयणीय

m. plural the first fruits destined for oblation,

अग्रयावन्

mfn. going before

अग्रयायिन्

mfn. going before, taking the lead

अग्रयायिन्

m. a leader

अग्रयोधिन्

m. the foremost man or leader in a fight

अग्रयोधिन्

m. a champion.

अग्रे

ind. in front, ahead of, in the beginning, first

अग्रे

ind. further on, subsequently, below (in a book)

अग्रे

ind. from - up to (ā-)

, before (in time)

([ confer, compare Greek ]) .

अग्रे

ind. (locative case) See /agra-.

अग्रेभ्रू

( bhram-) m. wandering in front

commentator or commentary

अग्रेदधिषु

([

]) m. a man who at his first marriage takes a wife that was married before, (agre-didhiṣu-or -didhiṣu-)

अग्रेदधिषु

f. a married woman whose elder sister is still unmarried.

अग्रेदधुस्

([

]) m. a man who at his first marriage takes a wife that was married before, (agre-didhiṣu-or -didhiṣu-)

अग्रेदधुस्

f. a married woman whose elder sister is still unmarried.

अग्रेदिधिषु

([

]) m. a man who at his first marriage takes a wife that was married before, (agre-didhiṣu-or -didhiṣu-)

अग्रेदिधिषु

f. a married woman whose elder sister is still unmarried.

अग्रेग

etc. See /agre- below.

अग्रेग

([

]) ([

etc.]) mfn. going in front or before.

अग्रेगा

([

etc.]) mfn. going in front or before.

अग्रेगू

mfn. (said of the waters) moving forwards

अग्रेण

ind. in front, before (without or with accusative)

अग्रेणी

m. a leader

अग्रेपा

([

iv, 34, 7 and 10]) ([

]) mfn. having the precedence in drinking.

अग्रेपू

([

]) mfn. having the precedence in drinking.

अग्रेसर

mf(ī-)n. going in front, preceding, best

अग्रेसरिक

m. a leader

अग्रेतन

mfn. occurring further on, subsequently (in a book).

अग्रेत्वन्

mf(arī-)n. going in front

अग्रेवध

m. hitting or killing whatever is in front

अग्रेवण

n. the border of a forest (gaRa rājadantādi- q.v)

आग्रेय

varia lectio for āgneya- (Name of a people) q.v

अग्रि

m. a word invented for the explanation of agn/i-

अग्रिम

mfn. being in front, preceding, prior, furthest advanced

अग्रिम

mfn. occurring further on or below (in a book see /agre-)

अग्रिम

mfn. the foremost

अग्रिम

mfn. eldest, principal

अग्रिमा

f. the fruit Annona Reticulata.

अग्रिमवती

f. the verse

(beginning with p/avasva- vāc-/ o- agriy-/ aḥ-),

अग्रिय

mfn. foremost, principal

अग्रिय

mfn. oldest, first-born

अग्रिय

m. elder brother

अग्रिय

n. the first-fruits, the best part

अग्रीय

mfn. best

अग्रीय

m. elder brother

अग्रियवत्

mfn.

अग्रियवत्

f. vatī- (scilicet ṛc-), Name of the hymn ṛg-- veda- ix, 62, 25, quoted in

अग्रोपहरणीय

mfn. that which has to be first or principally supplied

अग्रु

m. unmarried

अग्रू

f. a virgin

अग्रू

Nominal verb f. plural agr/uvas- poetical Name of the ten fingers

अग्रू

f. and also of the seven rivers

अग्रू

f. see Zend aghru-.

अग्र्य

mf(ā-)n. foremost, topmost, principal, best

अग्र्य

mf(ā-)n. proficient, well versed in (with locative case)

अग्र्य

mf(ā-)n. intent closely attentive

अग्र्य

m. an elder or eldest brother

अग्र्या

f. equals tri-phalā- q.v

अग्र्य

n. roof

अग्र्यतपस्

m. Name of a muni-

अहमग्रिका

f. equals ahaṃśreṣṭhikā- below

अइकाग्र्य

n. (fr. ekāgra-), intentness or concentration on one object

अजिह्माग्र

mfn. having a straight point.

आज्ञापरिग्रह

m. receiving an order

आज्यग्रह

m. a vessel of clarified butter

आज्यग्रह

m. plural Name of certain formulae

आखुवग्राम

m. Name of a village

अक्षाग्र

n. end of an axle, or of the pole of a car

अक्षाग्र

n. an axle.

अक्षाग्रकील

m. a linch-pin

अक्षाग्रकील

m. the pin fastening the yoke to the pole.

अक्षाग्रकीलक

m. a linch-pin

अक्षाग्रकीलक

m. the pin fastening the yoke to the pole.

अनासादितविग्रह

mfn. unused to war.

अनवग्रह

mfn. resistless

अनवग्रह

mfn. not to be intercepted.

अनवराग्र

mfn. without beginning or end (?),

अनायसाग्र

mfn. having no iron point.

अनेकाग्र

mfn. engaged in various pursuits.

अनेकार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of two works on words.

अङ्गग्रह

m. "limb-seizure", spasm

अङ्गुलीग्रन्थि

m. a finger-Joint,

अङ्गुल्यग्र

n. the tip of the finger

अनिग्रह

mfn. unrestrained

अनिग्रह

m. non-restraint, non-refutation, not owning one's self refuted.

अनिग्रहस्थान

n. (in philosophy) occasion of non-refutation.

अनिष्टग्रह

m. an evil planet.

अङ्कुशग्रह

m. an elephant-driver.

अन्तर्यामग्रह

m. idem or 'speaking to one's self, unheard by another, '

अनुदग्र

mfn. not lofty, low

अनुदग्र

mfn. not projecting.

अनुग्र

or an-ugr/a- mf(ā-)n. not harsh or violent, mild, gentle

अनुग्रह्

to follow in taking or plundering

, to support ; to uphold ; to receive, welcome ; to treat with kindness, favour, oblige ; to foster.

अनुग्रह

m. favour, kindness, showing favour, conferring benefits, promoting or furthering a good object

अनुग्रह

m. assistance

अनुग्रह

m. facilitating by incantations

अनुग्रह

m. rear-guard

अनुग्रह

m. Name of the eighth or fifth creation

अनुग्राहक

mf(ikā-)n. favouring, furthering, facilitating

अनुग्राहक

mf(ikā-)n. favourable, kind, gracious.

अनुग्रहकातर

mfn. anxious to please or for favour.

अनुग्रहण

n. anu-graha-.

अनुग्रहण

practising, practice,

अनुग्रहसर्ग

m. (in sāṃkhya- philosophy) creation of the feelings or mental conditions.

अनुग्रहिन्

m. proficient in magic skill.

अनुग्राहिन्

mfn. gracious, favourable.

अनुग्रहित

mfn. occupied, engaged

अनुग्रहीतृ

m. a favourer, furtherer,

अनुग्राह्य

mfn. to be favoured or furthered.

अनुग्रामम्

ind. village after village

, into, a village

आनुग्रामिक

mfn. (fr. anu-grāma-), belonging or conformable to a village, rustic, rural

अनुग्रासक

m. a mouthful (of boiled rice, etc.)

अनुग्रासक

m. the equivalent of a mouthful.

अनुपरिग्रह्

to grasp all round, surround,

अनुपरिग्रह्

to favour, befriend,

अनुराधग्राम

m. the ancient capital of Ceylon founded by the above-named anurādha-.

अनुसंग्रह्

to oblige, favour ; to salute by laying hold of the feet.

अन्वग्रम्

ind. from below to above, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

अन्वर्थग्रहण

n. the literal acceptation of the meaning of a word (as opposed to the conventional).

अन्यपरिग्रह

m. the wife of another,

आपद्ग्रस्त

mfn. seized by misfortune, unfortunate, in misfortune.

अपग्रह्

to take away, disjoin, tear off.

अपग्राम

mfn. ejected from a village or community,

अपाणिग्रहण

n. celibacy.

अपाणिग्रहण

mfn. unmarried,

अपरिग्रह

m. not including commentator or commentary on

अपरिग्रह

m. non-acceptance, renouncing (of any possession besides the necessary utensils of ascetics)

अपरिग्रह

m. deprivation, destitution, poverty

अपरिग्रह

mfn. destitute of possession

अपरिग्रह

mfn. destitute of attendants or of a wife

अपरिग्राह्य

mfn. unfit or improper to be accepted, not to be taken.

अपिग्रह्

(with or without mukham-, nāsike-,etc.), to close (the mouth, nose, etc.)

अपिग्राह्य

([ib. commentator or commentary ]) n. impersonal or used impersonally (with ablative) the mouth to be closed before (a bad smell, etc.)

अप्रग्रह

([

]) or a-pragṛhya- ([

]) m. not a vowel called pragṛhya- (q.v)

अप्रग्राह

mfn. unrestrained

अप्राग्र्य

mfn. secondary

अप्राप्यग्रहण

n. perception of an object though the senses are not in any direct connection with it

अप्रतिग्राहक

mf(ikā-)n. not accepting

अप्रतिग्रहण

n. not accepting (a girl into marriage), not marrying

अप्रतिग्राह्य

mfn. unacceptable.

आराग्र

n. the point of an awl

आराग्र

n. the iron thong at the end (of a whip)

आराग्र

n. the edge of a semicircular arrow-head

आराग्र

mfn. sharpened, sharp at the top and broad at the bottom like an awl

आराग्रा

f. an arrangement of 11 sacriflcial posts (making the middlemost, and the others lower by degrees on both sides),

आरामपरिग्रह

m. landed property (of monasteries),

अरिष्टग्राम

(/ariṣṭa-.) mfn. (said of the marut-s) whose troop is unbroken id est complete in number

अर्काग्रा

f. the sun's measure of amplitude,

अर्कग्रह

m. eclipse of the sun

अर्कग्रीव

m. Name of a sāman-.

अर्थग्रहण

n. abstraction, of money

अर्थग्रहण

n. (in grammar) apprehension of meaning

अर्थग्रहण

n. signification.

अर्थग्राहिन्

mfn. choosing advantage

अर्थपरिग्रह

m. possession of wealth

अर्थपरिग्रह

mfn. dependent on money

अर्थसंग्रह

m. accumulation of wealth

अर्थसंग्रह

m. treasury

अर्थसंग्रह

m. "compendium of objects (treated of)", Name of one of the pūrva-mīmāṃsā- texts.

अर्थसंग्रहिन्

mfn. accumulating wealth

अरुणाग्रज

m. "the first of aruṇa-", garuḍa- (the bird of viṣṇu-)

(see aruṇ/anuja-below.),

असदाग्रह

mfn. equals -graha- mfn.

असद्ग्रह

mfn. performing mischievous or malignous tricks

असद्ग्रह

m. caprice, idle or childish desire

असद्ग्राह

mfn. equals -graha- mfn.

असद्ग्राह

m. equals -graha- m.

असद्ग्राहिन्

mfn. equals -graha- mfn.

(varia lectio -grahin-).

असमग्र

mfn. incomplete, unentire, partial

etc.

असमग्रम्

ind. incompletely.

असमानग्राम

mfn. not belonging to or being born in the same village

आसंग्रह्

(imperative 2. sg. -s/aṃgṛbhāya-

) to seize.

असंग्रह

m. refraining from begging,

असंग्राह

mfn. not prancing (said of a horse),

(

असम्परिग्रह

mfn. not accepted, refused,

अशनिग्रावन्

m. a diamond,

असत्परिग्रह

mfn. receiving unfit presents, or from improper persons

असत्प्रतिग्रह

m. (= - parigraha-),

आशीर्ग्रहण

n. accepting a benediction.

असितग्रीव

mfn. (/asita--) having a black neck

(

)

असितग्रीव

m. a peacock

असृग्ग्रह

m. "the blood-planet", Mars

अस्त्रग्राम

m. a heap or collection of different missile weapons,

अशुष्कग्र

mf(ā-)n. not having a dry point

अश्वग्रीव

m. "horse-neck", Name of an asura-

अश्वग्रीव

m. of a son of citraka-

आश्विनाग्र

mfn. beginning with a cup etc.,

अस्यग्र

n. the point of a knife,

अस्यग्र

etc., see under asi- (column 2).

अतिग्रह्

to take beyond or over the usual measure

; to surpass

अतिग्रह

m. act of taking over or beyond surpassing, one who takes or seizes to an extraordinary extent, (in philosophy) equals atigrāha-.

अतिग्राह

m. the object of a graha- (q.v) or organ of apprehension (these are eight, and their corresponding ati-grahas-or objects, are apāna-,"fragrant substance"; nāman-"name"; rasa-"flavour"; rūpa-"form"; sabda-"sound"; kāma-"desire"; karman-"action"; sparśa-"touch")

अतिग्राह्य

m. Name of three successive libations made, (or cups filled) at the jyotiṣṭoma- sacrifice

आत्मग्राहिन्

mfn. taking for one's self, selfish

आत्मत्राणपरिग्रह

m. a body guard

अत्यग्र

mfn. whose point is jutting over

अत्यष्टिसामग्री

f. Name of work

अत्युग्र

mfn. very fierce

अत्युग्र

mfn. very pungent

अत्युग्र

n. Asa Foetida.

अउद्गात्रसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

अउद्ग्रभण

n. (fr. ud-grabhaṇa-), Name of a particular offering

अउद्ग्रभणत्व

n. the being such an offering

अउद्ग्रहण

n. idem or 'n. the being such an offering '

अउग्रसैन्य

m. idem or 'm. idem or 'm. a descendant of ugra-sena- ' on vArttika 7 on ' , Name of yudhāṃśrauṣṭi-

अउग्रसेनि

m. a descendant of ugra-sena-

अउग्रसेन्य

m. idem or 'm. a descendant of ugra-sena- '

on vArttika 7 on

अउग्रेय

m. a descendant of ugra- gaRa śubhrādi-

अउग्र्य

n. (fr. ugra-), horribleness, dreadfulness, fierceness

अउपग्रहिक

m. (fr. upagraha-) idem or 'm. (fr. upagrasta-), the sun or moon in eclipse '

अउपग्रस्तिक

m. (fr. upagrasta-), the sun or moon in eclipse

अउर्वकल्पग्रन्थ

m. Name (also title or epithet) of work on medicine.

अउषधकल्पग्रन्थ

m. Name (also title or epithet) of work on medicine.

अवाचीनाग्र

mfn. equals avāg.agra- q.v

अवागग्र

mfn. having the point turned downwards

(wrongly written avāṅ-agra-).

अवाग्र

mfn. having the point turned aside

(see avāg-agra-.)

अवग्रह्

-gṛhṇāti- (Potential -gṛh ṇīyāt-) to let loose, let go

; to keep back from (ablative), impede, stop

; to divide

; (in grammar) to separate (as words or parts of a word)

etc. (see ava-grāham-below) ; to perceive (with one's senses), distinguish

: Causal (ind.p. -grāhya-) to separate (into pieces).

अवग्रह

m. separation of the component parts of a compound, or of the stem and certain suffixes and terminations (occurring in the pada- text of the veda-s)

etc.

अवग्रह

m. the mark or the interval of such a separation

अवग्रह

m. the syllable or letter after which the separation occurs

, the chief member of a word so separated

अवग्रह

m. obstacle, impediment, restraint

etc.

अवग्रह

mark of the elision of an initial a-

अवग्रह

m. (equals varṣa pratibandha-

) drought

अवग्रह

m. nature, original temperament

अवग्रह

m. "perception with the senses", a form of knowledge

अवग्रह

m. an imprecation or term of abuse

अवग्रह

m. an elephant's forehead

अवग्रह

m. a herd of elephants

अवग्रह

m. an iron hook with which elephants are driven

अवग्राह

m. obstacle, impediment (used in imprecations)

अवग्राह

m. (

; see also ava-graha-) drought

अवग्राह

m. (varia lectio for avagāha- q.v) a bucket

अवग्राह

m. the forehead of an elephant

अवग्राहम्

ind. so as to separate (the words)

, (see padāvagrāham-)

अवग्रहण

n. the act of impeding or restraining

अवग्रहण

n. disrespect

अवग्रहणी

f. equals gṛhāva-- grahaṇī- q.v

अवग्रहान्तर

n. (equals ava-graha-) the interval of the separation called avagraha-

अवग्रहशक

Name (also title or epithet) of a pariśiṣṭa- of the

अवाङग्र

See avāgagra-.

अविग्रह

m. (said of a word) the not occurring in a separate form (but only in a compound)

अविग्रह

m. bodiless

अविग्रह

m. indisputable (as the dharma-)

अव्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. unconfused, steady, cool, deliberate

etc.

अव्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. unoccupied

अव्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. not in danger, undisturbed, safe

अव्यग्रम्

ind. coolly, deliberately

अयनग्रह

m. a planet's longitude as corrected for ecliptic deviation

अयोअग्र

(/ayo-.) mf(ā-)n. iron pointed

अयोग्र

n. a pestle

अयोग्रक

n. a pestle

अयुगपद्ग्रहण

n. apprehending gradually and not simultaneously

बदरिकामाहात्म्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

बद्धग्रह

mfn. insisting on something

बाधपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थक्रोड

बाधपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थानुगम

बाधपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थप्रकाश

बाधपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थटीका

बाधपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थविवेचन

बाधसिद्धान्तग्रन्थक्रोड

m. Name of work

बाधसिद्धान्तग्रन्थानुगम

m. Name of work

बाधसिद्धान्तग्रन्थप्रकाश

m. Name of work

बाधसिद्धान्तग्रन्थटीका

f. Name of work

बाधसिद्धान्तग्रन्थविवेचन

n. Name of work

बहिर्ग्रामम्

ind. outside the village

बहिर्ग्राममप्रतिश्रय

mfn. living outside the village

बहुग्रह

mfn. receiving or holding much (said of a minister and a water-jar)

बहुग्रन्थि

m. "many-knotted", Tamarix Indica

बाहुलग्रीव

m. "having a variegated neck", a peacock

बहुप्रतिग्राह्य

mfn. one who is able to give presents to many,

बलाग्र

n. the utmost strength, extreme force

बलाग्र

n. the head of an army

बालाग्र

n. (vāl-?) a dove-cot

(Scholiast or Commentator)

बालग्रह

m. "seizer of children", a kind of demon (said to cause 9 kinds of possession)

बालग्रहप्रतिषेध

m. Name of work

बालग्रहयोगशान्ति

f. Name of work

बालग्रहोपशमन

n. Name of work

बलनिग्रह

m. reducing strength, weakening

बलासग्रथित

n. a kind of ophthalmia

बलिप्रतिग्राहक

mf(ikā-)n. receiving oblations

बन्धनग्रन्थि

m. a noose, rope for tying cattle

बन्दिग्रह

m. taking prisoner, capture

बन्दिग्राह

(

) m. "plunder-seizer", a housebreaker (especially one breaking into a temple or place where sacred fire is preserved), burglar, robber.

बन्दीग्रह

m. plunder, spoil

बार्हस्पत्यज्योतिर्ग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

बाष्पग्रथित

mfn. choked by tears,

बौधायनसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भगवद्भक्तिसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भगवद्गीतार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भगवद्गीतासारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भगवद्गुणसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भगवन्नाममाहात्म्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भागवतकथासंग्रह

m. Name of work

भागवतपुराणभावार्थदीपिकाप्रकरनक्रमसंग्रह

m. Name of work connected with the

भागवतपुराणभावार्थदीपिकासंग्रह

m. Name of work connected with the

भागवतपुराणबृहत्संग्रह

m. Name of work connected with the

भागवतपुराणतत्त्वसंग्रह

m. Name of work connected with the

भागवतसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भागवतसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भागवतसिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भगवत्सिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भैरवाग्रतस्

ind. in the presence of bhairava-

भक्ताग्र

m. or n. a refectory

भक्तमालाग्रग्रन्थ

m. bhaktamālā

भक्तिसारसंग्रह

m. bhaktisāra

भक्तिविवृद्ध्युपायग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

भल्लालसंग्रह

m. Name of bhallāla-'s work.

भरताग्रज

m. "elder brother of bharata-varṣa-", Name of rāma-

भारतसंग्रहदीपिका

f. Name of work

भारततात्पर्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भस्मग्रह

m. "taking ashes", a particular part of a Brahman's education

भस्मोद्धूलितविग्रह

m. "whose body is smeared with ashes", Name of śiva-

भाष्यार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भटबलाग्र

m. a hero

भटबलाग्र

n. an army

भाट्टदीपिकासंग्रह

m. Name of work

भाट्टसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भवाग्र

n. the farthest end of the world

भावग्राहिन्

mfn. understanding the sense, appreciating the sentiment

भावग्राह्य

mfn. to be conceived with the heart

भवग्रामीणवाद्योक्त

m. Name of a poet

भावग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

भवानन्दसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भावनासारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भेषजकल्पसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भीमग्राहवत्

mfn. having formidable crocodiles

भीमविग्रह

mfn. of fearful form, terrific in appearance

भिषग्राजमिश्र

m. Name of an author

भोगग्राम

m. Name of a village

भोजनव्यग्र

mfn. occupied or engaged in eating

भोजनव्यग्र

mfn. distressed or straitened for want of food

भूगोलसंग्रह

m. Name of work

भूतबालग्रहोन्माद

m. madness produced by the action of bhūta-s or demons inimical to children

भूतग्राम

m. equals -gaṇa- (in both meanings)

भूतग्राम

m. a multitude of plants

भूतग्राम

m. any aggregate or elementary matter, the body

भूतग्रस्त

mfn. possessed by an evil spirit

बिल्मग्रहण

n. grasping or understanding by bits id est by degrees

बिन्दुसंग्रह

m. Name of work

बिसग्रन्थि

m. a knot on a lotus-stalk

(used for filtering or clearing water

)

बिसग्रन्थि

m. a particular disease of the eyes

ब्रह्माग्रभू

m. a horse

(see next and brahmātma-bhū-).

ब्रह्मग्रह

m. equals -rākṣasa-

ब्रह्मग्राहिन्

mfn. worthy to receive that which is holy

(varia lectio mārgha-).

ब्रह्मग्रन्थि

m. Name of the knot which ties together the 3 threads forming the sacred cord

(

)

ब्रह्मग्रन्थि

m. of a particular joint of the body

बृहद्ग्रावन्

(brih/ad-.) mfn. like a huge stone

बृहत्मञ्जरीसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

बृहत्परिभाषासंग्रह

m. Name of work

बुद्धिग्राह्य

mfn. to be apprehended by the intellect, intelligible

बुक्काग्रमांस

n. the heart

(prob. a wrong blending of bukkā-and agramāṃsa-).

चक्रदत्तनामकग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

चक्रग्रहणी

f. "army-keeper", a rampart (Scholiast or Commentator)

चक्षुर्ग्रहण

n. morbid affection of the eyes,

चामरग्राह

m. a chowrie-bearer gaRa revaty-ādi-.

चामरग्राहिक

m. patronymic fr. ha-

चामरग्राहिणी

f. a female chowrie-bearer

चण्डग्राहवत्

mfn. filled with fierce crocodiles (a river)

चन्दनाग्र्य

m. Name of a man

चण्डोग्रा

f. Name of one of the 8 nāyikā-s or śakti-s of durgā-

चण्डोग्रशूलपाणि

m. "holding a powerful and formidable trident", a form of śiva-

चन्द्राग्र

mf(ā-)n. brilliant-peaked

चन्द्राग्र

mf(ā-)n. brilliant-surfaced (a liquid),

चन्द्राग्र

according to to some,"having gold as the chief part, containing or yielding gold"

चन्द्रग्रह

m. an eclipse of the moon

चन्द्रग्रहण

n. idem or 'm. an eclipse of the moon '

चन्द्रग्रहणोदाहरण

n. Name of work

चरकग्रन्थ

m. caraka-'s book (on med.)

चरणग्रन्थि

m. "foot-joint", the ancle

चर्मग्रीव

m. Name of one of śiva-'s attendants

चाटिग्राम

m. Name of a place.

चटुग्राम

m. Name of a village (dwelling-place of the lexicographer jaṭādhara-).

चतुर्ग्राम

"containing 4 villages", Name of a country.

छन्दःसंग्रह

m. "summary of metres", Name of a work

छन्दोग्रन्थ

m. "metre-book"

छत्त्रग्राहिणी

f. a female parasol-bearer

छायाग्रह

m. "receiving the image or the gnomon's shadow", a mirror or equals -yantra-

छायाग्राह

mf(ī-)n. depriving of the shadow

छिन्नग्रन्थिनिका

f. a kind of bulbous plant

चिन्त्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

चिपिटग्रीव

mfn. short-necked

चित्रग्रावन्

mfn. stony

चित्रग्रीव

m. (equals -kaṇṭha-) Name of a pigeon-king

चूचुकाग्र

n. a nipple (of the breast)

चूडाप्रतिग्रहण

n. Name of a caitya-

दधिग्रह

m. a cup with d/adhi-

दधिग्रहपात्र

n. the vessel used for taking up d/adhi-

दध्यग्र

n. equals dhi-maṇḍa-

दाक्षिग्राम

m. Name of place.

दाक्षिग्रामीय

mfn. relating to dākṣi-grāma-

दक्षिणाग्र

mfn. having the points turned to the south

दक्षिणाप्रागग्र

mfn. having the points turned to the south-east

दक्षिणाप्रतिग्रह

m. Name (also title or epithet) of particular mantra-s,

दलाग्रलोहित

a sort of spinage

दामग्रन्थि

m. N. assumed by nakula-

(see granthika-).

दण्डग्राह

m. "staff-bearer" gaRa revaty-ādi-.

दण्डग्रहण

n. "taking the staff", becoming an ascetic

दाण्डग्राहिक

m. patronymic fr. daṇḍa-grāha- (gaRa revaty-ādi-).

दन्ताग्र

n. the top of a tooth

दन्तग्राहिता

f. the state of injuring the teeth

दन्ताग्रीय

mfn. fr. gra- gaRa gahādi-.

दारग्रहण

equals -karman-

दारपरिग्रह

m. equals -karman-

दारपरिग्रहिन्

m. one who takes a wife

दारसंग्रह

m. equals -karman-

दर्भग्रुमुष्टि

m. a firmily closed hand full of darbha- grass,

(Scholiast or Commentator)

दारोपसंग्रह

m. "wife-taking", marriage

दर्शनग्रिह

n. an audience-chamber

दशग्र

(d/aś-) m. "Decimus", Name of an aṅgiras-

(plural) his family (named with that of nava-gva-; worshipping indra-)

दशग्राम

gaRa 1. kumudādi- and kāśy-ādi-

दशग्रामपति

m. a chief of 10 villages

दशग्रामी

f. 10 villages

दाशग्रामिक

mf(ī-and ā-)n. (gaRa kumudāi-and kāśy-ādi-).

दशग्रामिक

mfn. gaRa 1. kumudādi-.

दशग्रामिन्

m. equals ma-pati-

दशग्रीव

m. (

) equals -kaṇṭha-

दशग्रीव

m. Name of a demon

दशग्रीव

m. of a son of damaghoṣa-, 6601

दशग्रीव

m. of an enemy of vṛṣa-,

दशकण्ठनिग्रह

m. Name of

दायाधिकारक्रमसंग्रह

m. Name of work

दायक्रमसंग्रह

m. Name of work

देहग्रहण

n. assuming a body or visible form

देशीशब्दसंग्रह

m. equals -nāma-mālā-

देशीयशब्दसंग्रह

m. equals śī-ś-

देवदत्त्ताग्रज

m. "the elder brother of deva-datta-", Name of gautama- buddha-

(see above)

देवग्रह

m. "divine seizer", a class of demons who cause harmless madness

देवग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

देवग्रन्थि

m. a divine knot or tie

देवासुरगणाग्रणी

m. Name of śiva-

धनंजयसंग्रह

m. Name of work

धनुर्ग्रह

m. bearing a bow, an archer

धनुर्ग्रह

m. the art of managing a bow

धनुर्ग्रह

m. Name of a son of dhṛta-rāṣṭra-

धनुर्ग्राह

(

) m. an archer.

धनुर्ग्राहिन्

(

) m. an archer.

धन्वन्तरिग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

धन्वन्तरिग्रस्ता

f. Helleborus Niger

धान्यसंग्रह

m. a store or magazine of grain

धाराग्र

(rāg-) n. the broad-edged head of an arrow

धाराग्रह

m. a cup filled from flowing soma-

धरणिग्राम

m. Name of a village.

धर्ममीमांसासंग्रह

m. Name of work

धर्ममीमांसासारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

धर्मसंग्रह

m. Name of a collection of

technical terms

धर्मसंग्रहनिवृत्ति

f. Name of a jaina- work

धर्मशास्त्रसंग्रह

m. Name of work

धर्मशास्त्रसंग्रहश्लोक

m. plural Name of work

धर्मतत्त्वसंग्रह

m. Name of work

धर्मविचारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

धातुग्राहिन्

m. calimine

धातुसंग्रह

m. Name of work on verbal roots.

धूमग्रह

m. Name of rāhu-

ध्वजाग्र

n. the top of a standard (See below)

ध्वजाग्र

m. a particular samādhi-

ध्वजाग्र

m. a particular roma-vivara-

ध्वजाग्रकेयूर

m. "the ring on the top of a standard", Name of a particular samādhi-

ध्वजाग्रनिशामणि

ध्वजाग्रवती

f. Name of 2 modes of reckoning

ध्वजग्रीव

m. "banner- (id est high-)necked", Name of a rakṣas-

ध्वनिग्रह

m. "sound-catcher", the ear

ध्वनिसिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

दिग्ग्रहण

n. observing and fixing the quarters of the compass

दिनग्रह

m. day-planet

दिन्नाग्राम

m. Name of a village

(see dharma--.)

दीप्ताग्र

mfn. flame-pointed,

दीर्घग्रन्थि

m. "having long knots or joints", Scindapsus Officinalis (equals gaja-pippalī-)

दीर्घग्रीव

mfn. "long-necked"

दीर्घग्रीव

m. a camel

दीर्घग्रीव

m. a kind of curlew

दीर्घग्रीव

m. plural Name of a people

दीर्घाङ्कग्राम

m. Name of a village.

दिव्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

दोर्ग्रह

mfn. "seizing with the arms", strong

दोर्ग्रह

m. pain in the arm

दोषग्राहिन्

mfn. fault-finding, censorious, susceptible of evil

(see guṇa--).

दोषग्रस्त

mfn. involved in guilt, guilty

द्रव्यगुणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

द्रव्यपरिग्रह

m. the acquirement or possession of property or wealth

द्रव्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

द्रव्यसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

दृढग्राहिन्

mfn. seizing firmly, pursuing an object with untiring energy

दृढग्रन्थि

m. "hard-knotted", a bamboo

दृग्रुध्

mfn. obstructing the sight

दृग्रुज्

f. disease of the eye

द्रुमाग्र

n. treetop

दुग्धाग्र

n. upper part or surface of milk, cream

दुःखग्रह

mfn. difficult to be conceived

दुन्दुभिग्रीव

mfn. "drum-necked"(ox)

दुरभिग्रह

mfn. difficult to be laid hold of

दुरभिग्रह

m. Achyranthes Aspera

दुरभिग्रहा

f. Mucuna Pruritus

दुरभिग्रह

m. Alhagi Maurorum

दुराग्रह

m. equals -avagraha- m.

दूरग्रहण

n. seizing or perceiving objects from afar (a supernatural faculty)

दुरवग्रह

mfn. difficult to be kept back or restrained

दुरवग्रह

m. wicked obstinacy, stubbornness

दुरवग्रहग्राह

(Bombay edition) mfn. difficult to be attained (

) .

दुरवग्रहग्राह्य

mfn. difficult to be attained (

) .

दुर्दिनग्रस्तभास्कर

mfn. having the sun obscured by dark clouds

दुर्ग्रह

m. "seizing badly", the evil demon of illness, spasm, cramp

दुर्ग्रह

m. obstinacy, insisting upon (locative case), whim, monomania

दुर्ग्रह

mfn. difficult to be seized or caught or attained or won or accomplished or understood

दुर्ग्राह्य

mfn. equals -graka- mfn.

etc.

दुर्ग्राह्यहृदय

mfn. whose heart is difficult to be gained

दुर्ग्राह्यत्व

दुर्मोचहस्तग्राह

mfn. "whose hand's grasp is hard to unloose", holding fast

दुर्निग्रह

mfn. difficult to be restrained or conquered

दुष्परिग्रह

mfn. difficult to be seized or kept

दुष्पार्ष्णिग्रह

mfn. having a dangerous enemy in the rear

दुष्पार्ष्णिग्राह

mfn. having a dangerous enemy in the rear

दुष्प्रतिग्रह

mfn. difficult to be taken or laid hold of.

द्वैतनिर्णयसिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. dvaitanirṇaya

द्वैतनिर्णयशिवपूजासंग्रह

m. dvaitanirṇaya

द्वैतसिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

द्विजाग्र्य

m. equals ja-mukhya-

द्विजाग्र्य

m. a chief or respectable Brahman

द्वीन्द्रियग्राह्य

mfn. dvīndriya

द्विरदकराग्र

n. the tip of an elephant's trunk

द्व्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. 2-pointed, ending in 2 extremities

एकाग्र

mfn. one-pointed, having one point, fixing one's attention upon one point or object, closely attentive, intent, absorbed in

etc.

एकाग्र

mfn. undisturbed, unperplexed

एकाग्र

mfn. known, celebrated

एकाग्र

n. (in mathematics) the whole of the long side of a figure which is subdivided

एकाग्रचित्त

mfn. having the mind intent on one object

एकाग्रधी

mfn. fixing one's mind on one object, closely attentive

एकाग्रदृष्टि

mfn. fixing one's eyes on one spot

एकाग्रम्

ind. with undivided attention

एकग्राम

m. the same village gaRa gahādi-

एकाग्रमनस्

mfn. fixing one's mind on one object, closely attentive

एकाग्रमति

mfn. idem or 'mfn. fixing one's mind on one object, closely attentive '

एकाग्रमति

m. Name of a man

एकग्रामीण

mfn. inhabiting the same village

एकग्रामीय

mfn. idem or 'mfn. inhabiting the same village '

एकग्रन्थ

m. an aggregate of 32 letters,

एकाग्रता

f. intentness in the pursuit of one object, close and undisturbed attention

एकाग्रतस्

ind. with undivided attention

एकाग्रत्व

n. intentness in the pursuit of one object, close and undisturbed attention

एकाग्र्य

mfn. closely attentive

एकाग्र्य

n. close attention

एकाङ्गग्रह

m. paralysis,

एकान्तग्रहण

n. partial comprehension

एकान्तग्राहिन्

mfn. comprehending partially

गदाग्रज

m. "elder brother of gada-", Name of kṛṣṇa-

गदाग्रणी

m. "chief of all diseases", consumption

गदाग्रपाणि

(dāg-) mfn. having a mace in the right hand

गदनिग्रह

m. Name of work

गगनाग्र

n. summit or highest part of heaven

गजाग्रणी

m. "the most excellent among the elephants", Name of indra-'s elephant airāvata-

गलग्रह

m. seizing by the throat, throttling

गलग्रह

m. compression of the throat (a kind of disease)

गलग्रह

m. a fish-sauce (prepared with salt, pepper, ghee etc.)

गलग्रह

m. Name of certain days in the dark fortnight (viz. the 4th, 7th, 8th, 9th, 13th, and 3 following days)

गलग्रह

m. begun but immediately interrupted study,

गलग्रनिहि

m. a noose or sling for the neck,

गणाग्रणी

m. (equals ṇa-nāyaka-) Name of gaṇeśa-

गण्डग्राम

m. any large village

गन्धग्राहक

mfn. perceiving odour (the nose).

गन्धग्राहिन्

mfn. perfumed

गान्धारग्राम

m. a kind of musical scale.

गन्धर्वग्रह

m. the being possessed by a gandharva-

गर्भग्रह

m. conception

गर्भग्रहण

n. equals ha-

गर्भग्रहार्तव

n. time fit for conception

गर्भग्राहिका

f. a midwife

गरुडाग्रज

m. "elder brother of garuḍa-", Name of aruṇa- (charioteer of the sun)

गात्रिकाग्रन्थि

m. a particular knot

गौडग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

गौरग्रीव

m. plural "white-necked", Name of a people

गौरग्रीवि

m. patronymic fr. va-

गौरग्रीवीय

mfn. belonging to vi- gaRa raivatikādi-.

गौतमन्यग्रोध

m. " gautama-'s nyagrodha-"Name of a fig-tree near vaiśālī-

गवाग्र

n. equals g/o-agra-

घटग्रह

m. a water-bearer

Va1rtt. 1.

घटीग्रह

m. equals ṭa-gr-

Va1rtt. 1.

गिलग्राह

m. a crocodile

गीतपुस्तकसंग्रह

m. idem or 'n. Name of a collection of songs '

गोअग्र

(g/o--) mf(ā-)n. (

) headed by cows, having cows or milk as the chief or most excellent part

गोडकग्राम

m. Name of a village

गोग्रह

m. capture of cattle, booty

गोग्रहतीर्थ

n. Name of a tīrtha-

गोग्रन्थि

m. dried cow-dung

गोग्रन्थि

m. equals -goṣṭha-

गोग्रन्थि

m. equals -jihvā-

गोग्रास

m. equals -ghāsa-

गोग्रास

m. the ceremony of presenting a mouthful of grass to a cow when performing an expiatory rite

गोग्रास

m. the feeding like a cow

गोलग्राम

m. Name of a village (situated on the godāvarī-).

गोपाग्रहार

m. plural Name of several agrahāra-s

गोपुच्छाग्र

"end of a cow's tail", a kind of dramatic composition,

गृहावग्रहणी

f. equals ha-taṭī-

गृहावग्रहिणी

f. idem or 'f. equals ha-taṭī- '

गृह्यग्रन्थ

m. Name of work on domestic rites.

गृह्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work on domestic rites (by the son of gobhila-).

गृह्यासंग्रह

m. equals hya-s-.

गुदग्रह

m. spasm of the rectum

गुडशिग्रु

m. a Moringa with red blossoms

गुणाग्रधारिन्

m. "endowed with the best qualities", Name of a man,

गुणग्राहक

mfn. appreciating merit

गुणग्रहण

n. acknowledging or appreciating merit or good qualities

गुणग्राहिन्

mfn. idem or 'mfn. appreciating merit '

गुणग्रहीतृ

mfn. "receiving ropes"and"acknowledging merit"

गुणग्राम

m. an assemblage of virtues or merits

गुणाग्र्य

n. the best of the 3 chief qualities id est sattva- (q.v)

गुणसंग्रह

m. a collection of merits or properties

गुणसंग्रह

m. equals -grahaṇa-

हाडिग्राम

m. Name of a village

हामिग्राम

m. Name of a village

हनुग्रह

m. "jaw-seizure", lock-jaw

हरिधारितग्रन्थ

(?) m. Name of work

हरिलीलाविवरणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

हर्म्याग्र

n. equals harmya-tala-

हर्षकुलाग्रणीकुशल

m. Name of authors.

हस्ताग्र

n. "tip of the hand", the fingers ( hastāgralagnā -lagnā- f.[with genitive case ]="clasping the fingers of." id est"married to")

हस्ताग्र

n. the tip of the trunk of an elephant

हस्तग्राभ

mfn. one who takes or has taken a girl's hand (="one who marries or has married a wife")

हस्तग्रह

m. the taking of the hand

हस्तग्रह

m. the marriage ceremony

हस्तग्रह

m. the putting hand to or engaging in,

हस्तग्राह

mfn. taking (or able to take) any one by the hand ("being in the immediate neighbourhood"

; hasta-grāhaṃ- grah-,"to take any one by the hand"

)

हस्तग्राह

m. a husband (see -grābh/a-)

हस्तग्राहक

mfn. taking any one by the hind (= very importunate)

हस्ताग्रलग्ना

f. hastāgra

हठयोगसंग्रह

m. Name of work

हथिनावग्राम

m. Name of a village

हविर्ग्रहणी

f. a sacrificial ladle

हयग्रीव

m. "horse-necked", Name of a form of viṣṇu- (manifested according to to one legend, in order to recover the veda- carried off by two daitya-s called madhu- and kaiṭabha-)

हयग्रीव

m. of a daitya- (also called brahma-veda-prahartṛ-,as having carried off the veda-s at the dissolution of the universe caused by brahma-'s sleep at the end of the past kalpa-;in order to recover them, viṣṇu- became incarnate as a matsya- or fish, and slew haya-grīva-)

etc.

हयग्रीव

m. of a rākṣasa-

हयग्रीव

m. of a tantra- deity

हयग्रीव

m. of a rājarṣi-

हयग्रीव

m. of a wicked king of the videha-s

हयग्रीव

m. of a muni-

हयग्रीव

m. of the supposed author of the chāndogya- upaniṣad- and various other writers etc.

हयग्रीवा

f. Name of durgā-

हयग्रीवदण्डक

n. Name of stotra-s

हयग्रीवगद्य

n. Name of stotra-s

हयग्रीवहन्

m. "slayer of haya-", Name of viṣṇu-

हयग्रीवपञ्चरात्र

n. Name of work

हयग्रीवपञ्जर

n. Name of work

हयग्रीवप्रोक्त

mfn. proclaimed or taught by haya-

हयग्रीवरिपु

m. "enemy of haya-", Name of viṣṇu-

हयग्रीवसहस्रनामस्तोत्र

n. Name of work

हयग्रीवसंहिता

f. Name of work

हयग्रीवस्तोत्र

n. Name of work

हयग्रीववध

m. Name of a poem by bhartṛ-meṇṭha-

हयग्रीवोपनिषद्

f. Name of an upaniṣad-.

हायनग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

हयसंग्रहण

n. the restraining or curbing or checking of horses

हेलुग्राम

m. the village helu-

हिल्लाजग्रहफल

n. Name of work

ह्रदग्रह

m. "lake-monster", a crocodile, alligator

ह्रस्वशिग्रुक

m. a species of Moringa

हृदयाग्र

mfn. having the heart as its point

हृदयग्रह

m. seizure or spasm of the heart

हृदयग्राह

m. learning the secret of (genitive case)

हृदयग्राहक

mfn. seizing id est convincing the mind

हृदयग्राहिन्

mfn. captivating the heart

हृदयग्रन्थि

m. "heart-knot", anything which binds the soul or grieves the heart

हृद्ग्रह

m. "heart-seizure", spasm of the heart

हृद्ग्रन्थ

m. equals -vraṇa-

हृषितस्रग्रजोहीन

mfn. having fresh garlands and free from dust

हुलाग्रका

f. a kind of weapon

इन्द्रियग्राम

m. the assemblage of the organs, the senses or organs of sense collectively

इन्द्रियनिग्रह

m. restraint of the organs of sense.

इष्वग्र

n. the point of an arrow

इष्वग्रग्रीय

mfn. ([ gaṇa- gahādi-

]) belonging to the point of an arrow.

जगत्समग्र

n. equals -kṛtsna-

जाग्रद्

for rat-.

जाग्रदवस्था

f. a state of wakefulness

जाग्रद्दशा

f. idem or 'f. a state of wakefulness '

जाग्रद्दुष्वप्न्य

n. a disagreeable dream in a waking state

जाग्रन्

for rat-.

जाग्रन्मिश्र

mfn. half awake and half asleep

जाग्रत्

mfn. pr. p. jāgṛ- q.v

जाग्रत्

m. waking

जाग्रत्प्रपञ्च

m. the world as it appears to one who is awake,

जाग्रत्स्वप्न

mfn. in a state of waking and sleep

जाग्रत्स्वप्न

m. dual number a state of waking and sleep

जाग्रिया

f. =

जलग्रिह

n. a house built in or near water

जन्मपरिग्रह

m. birth (accusative with kṛ-,"to be born"),

जातकसंग्रह

m. Name (also title or epithet) of work

जवाग्रज

for yav- q.v

जिह्वाग्र

(vāg-) n. the tip of the tongue

जीवग्रह

m. filling (a cup) with living (or unpressed soma-)

जीवग्राहम्

ind. with grah-, (

) to capture alive

जीवितग्रिध्नुता

f. great desire for life

जुहूमग्रीय

m. Name of

ज्योतिरग्र

(jy/ot-) mf(ā-)n. preceded by light or life

ज्योतिषसंग्रह

m. the whole science of astronomy

कचग्रह

m. seizing or grasping the hair

कचग्रहण

n. idem or 'm. seizing or grasping the hair '

कालग्रन्थि

m. "a joint of time", year

कलापग्राम

m. Name of a village

कालसंग्रह

m. period of time, term

कलिधर्मसारसंग्रह

m. Name of a work.

कालिकाग्रन्थ

m. a medical work.

कल्माषग्रीव

(kalm/āṣa--) mfn. having a variegated neck

कमलाग्रजा

f. "born before lakṣmi-", Name of a-lakṣmī- or Bad Luck.

कम्बुग्रीव

mf(ā-)n. equals -kaṇṭha- above

etc.

कम्बुग्रीव

m. "shell-neck", Name of a tortoise

कम्बुग्रीवा

f. a shell-like neck (id est one marked with three lines, see above)

कणादरहस्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

कनकविग्रह

m. Name of a king of viśālapurī-.

कण्ठग्रह

m. "clinging to the neck", embracing, embrace

कण्ठग्रहण

n. idem or 'm. "clinging to the neck", embracing, embrace '

कन्याग्रहण

n. taking a girl in marriage.

करभग्राम

m. Name of a village

करभग्रीव

m. Name of a fortress in the vindhya- mountain

कराग्र

n. (for 2.See) the tip of an elephant's trunk

कराग्र

n. tip of the finger

कराग्र

(for 1.See) n. point of a ray.

करग्रह

(1. kara-graha-;for 2.See) m. taking the hand (of the bride;one part of the ceremony being the placing of the bride's right hand with the palm uppermost in the right hand of the bridegroom), marriage

करग्रह

m. (2. kara-graha-;for 1.See) levying or gathering taxes

करग्रह

m. a tax-gatherer.

करग्राहम्

ind.p. so as to take the hand

करग्रहण

(1. kara-grahaṇa-;for 2.See) n. idem or '(1. kara-graha-;for 2.See) m. taking the hand (of the bride;one part of the ceremony being the placing of the bride's right hand with the palm uppermost in the right hand of the bridegroom), marriage '

(see pāṇi-gr-.)

करग्रहण

(2. kara-grahaṇa-) n. levying or gathering taxes.

करग्राहिन्

mfn. (1. kara-grāhin-;for 2.See) taking the hand

करग्राहिन्

mfn. a bridegroom

करग्राहिन्

(2. kara-grāhin-) mfn. levying a tax, a tax-collector.

कराग्रपल्लव

m. "hand-shoot", a finger

कराग्रपल्लवज

m. a finger-nail.

करग्रिहीति

f. levying taxes (and"shaking hands"),

करणग्राम

m. the senses collectively

कर्मग्रन्थ

m. Name of a jaina- work.

कर्मग्रन्थिप्रथमविचार

m. idem or 'm. Name of a jaina- work.'

कर्मसंग्रह

m. assemblage of acts (comprising the act, its performance, and the performer)

कर्मविपाकसंग्रह

m. Name of work

कर्णग्राह

m. a helmsman gaRa revaty-ādi-

कर्णग्राहवत्

mfn. furnished with a helmsman (as a ship)

काषायग्रहण

n. Name of a caitya-

कश्यपग्रीव

n. Name of a sāman-

कटेरकग्राम

m. Name of a village.

कथासंग्रह

m. a collection of tales or fables.

कटुग्रन्थि

m. dried ginger

कटुग्रन्थि

m. the root of long pepper

कवलग्रह

m. the taking a mouthful of water for swallowing

कवलग्रह

m. water for rinsing the mouth

कवलग्रह

m. a weight equals karṣa-

कवलग्राह

m. water enough for swallowing or for rinsing the mouth, gargle

काव्यसंग्रह

m. Name (also title or epithet) of work

काव्यसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

केशाग्र

n. the top of a hair

केशग्रह

m. pulling the hair

केशग्राहम्

ind. so as to pull the hair

केशग्रहण

n. idem or 'm. pulling the hair '

केशग्रन्थि

m. a tie of hair

केशप्रतिग्रह

m. a barber,

केशराग्र

n. the tips of a mane

केसरग्राम

m. Name of a village

केतुग्रह

m. the descending node (See above sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order ketu-)

केतुग्रहवल्लभ

m. equals tu-ratna-

केवलान्वयिग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

खड्गग्राहिन्

m. "a sword-bearer", a particular dignitary

खण्डितविग्रह

mfn. "one whose body is injured", maimed, mutilated

खरग्रह

m. idem or 'n. a pair of donkeys Va1rtt. 3 '

खरग्रह

Name (also title or epithet) of various kings and chiefs,

खारग्रीवि

m. plural (patronymic fr. kharagrīvan-) Name of a family

खारिग्रीवि

varia lectio for ragr-.

खिलग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

खुराग्र

n. the tip of a hoof,

कीदृग्रूप

mfn. of what shape?

कोकाग्र

m. Name of a shrub (samaṣṭhila-)

कोलकग्राम

m. Name of a village.

कोशग्रहण

n. "drinking the water used at an ordeal", undergoing an ordeal

क्रमसंग्रह

m. Name of a treatise.

क्रतुसंग्रह

m. Name of a pariśiṣṭa- of the

क्रतुसंग्रहपरिशिष्ट

n. idem or 'm. Name of a pariśiṣṭa- of the '

कृमिग्रन्थि

m. a disease of the eyes (caused by animalculae generated at the roots of the eye-lashes)

कृषिग्राम

m. an agricultural village

कृषिसंग्रह

m. Name of work (said to be written by parāśara-).

कृष्णाग्रज

m. "elder brother of kṛṣṇa-", Name of bala-deva-

कृष्णग्रीव

(kṛṣṇ/a--) mf(/ī-)n. black-necked

कृष्णाजिनग्रीव

mfn. having a skin of the black antelope round the neck

कृष्णशिग्रु

m. the plant Moringa pterygosperma

कृतासनपरिग्रह

mfn. one who has taken a seat.

क्षत्रसंग्रहीतृ

m. plural See kṣāttra-saṃg-.

क्षात्त्रसंग्रहीतृ

m. plural charioteers and drivers

क्षात्त्रसंग्रहीतृ

m. (kṣatra-s-

)

कुचाग्र

n. a nipple

कुचतटाग्र

n. "point of the breast", a nipple.

कुड्मलाग्रदन्त

mfn. one whose teeth look like buds

कुड्मलाग्रदत्

mfn. one whose teeth look like buds

कुग्रह

m. an unpropitious planet (five are reckoned, viz. maṅgala-, ravi-, śani-, rāhu-, and ketu-)

कुग्राम

m. a petty village (without a rājā-, an agnihotrin-, a physician, a rich man, or a river).

कुण्डमण्डपसंग्रह

m. Name of work

कुञ्जरग्रह

m. an elephant-catcher

कुशाग्र

n. the sharp point of a blade of the kuśa- grass

कुशाग्र

n. Name of a prince (the son of bṛhad-ratha-)

कुशाग्र

mfn. sharp, shrewd

कुशाग्रबुद्धि

mfn. one whose intelligence is as sharp as the point of kuśa- grass, shrewd, intelligent

कुशाग्रबुद्धि

f. shrewdness

कुशाग्रीय

mfn. sharp as the point of kuśa- grass, penetrating

कुशाग्रीयमति

mfn. of subtle intellect, possessing mental acumen

कुशिग्रामक

m. Name of a village of the malla-s

कूटग्रन्थ

m. Name of work (attributed to vyāsa-).

लघुग्रहमञ्जरि

f. Name of work

लघुसंग्रह

m. Name of work

लघुसंग्रहणीसूत्र

n. Name of work

लग्नग्रह

mfn. insisting firmly on anything, persistent, obtrusive

लग्नग्रहण

n. the computation of the moment favourable for any undertaking,

लक्षणग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

लक्षणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

लक्ष्यग्रह

m. taking aim

ललितविग्रहराज

Name (also title or epithet) of a nāṭaka-.

लाङ्गलग्रह

m. "plough-holder", a ploughman, peasant

लाङ्गलग्रहण

n. the act of holding or guiding the plough, ploughing

लस्तकग्रह

m. seizing the middle of a bow

लौकिकन्यायसंग्रह

m. Name of work

लीलामानुषविग्रह

mfn. having or taking a human form merely for amusement or in mere semblance (said of kṛṣṇa-)

लिङ्गाग्र

n. the end or glans of the penis

लोहितग्रीव

mfn. red-necked

लोहितग्रीव

m. Name of agni-

लोकानुग्रह

m. the welfare of the world, prosperity of mankind

लोकानुग्रहप्रवृत्त

m. Name of gautama- buddha-

लोकसंग्रह

m. experience gained from intercourse with men

लोकसंग्रह

m. the propitiation or conciliation of men

(varia lectio)

लोकसंग्रह

m. the whole of the universe, aggregate of worlds

लोकसंग्रह

m. the welfare of the world

लोकसंग्रह

m. Name of work

लोकसंग्राहिन्

mfn. propitiating men

मदनाग्रक

m. Paspalum Scrobiculatum

माधवसंग्रह

m. Name of work

मधुग्रह

m. a libation of honey

मधुशिग्रु

(

) or

मधुशिग्रुक

(

) m. Moringa Pterygosperma (Rubriflora).

मध्वमतसंग्रहटीका

f. Name of work

मध्यग्रहण

n. the middle of an eclipse

मध्यमग्राम

m. (in music) the middle scale

मध्यमसंग्रह

m. the middle method of intriguing with another's wife (presenting flowers etc.)

मदोदग्र

mf(ā-)n. much excited, furious

मदोदग्र

mf(ā-)n. arrogant, haughty

माघमाहत्म्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

महाभारतसंग्रह

m. Name of work

महाभारतसंग्रहदीपिका

f. Name of work

महाभारतसारसंग्रह

m. (?) Name of work

महाभारततात्पर्यनिर्णयप्रमाणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

महाभारततात्पर्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

महाग्रह

m. "the great planet", Name of rāhu-

महाग्रह

m. of the planet Saturn

महाग्राह

m. a great shark

महाग्रहायणी

(hāgr-) f. Name of the 15th day of the first half of the month āgrahāyaṇa-

महाग्राम

m. a great multitude

महाग्राम

m. a great village

महाग्राम

m. Name of the ancient capital of Ceylon (said to be the of Ptolemy and the modern Magama)

महाग्राम

m. plural Name of a people

महाग्रन्थिक

mfn. (in med.) forming great knots

महाग्रीव

mfn. long-necked (said of śiva-)

महाग्रीव

m. a camel

महाग्रीव

m. Name of one of śiva-'s attendants

महाग्रीव

m. plural Name of a people

महाग्रीविन्

m. "long-necked", a camel

महासंधिविग्रह

m. the office of prime minister of peace and war

(see -sāṃdhivigrahika-).

महासांधिविग्रहिक

m. the prime minister of peace and war

(see -saṃdhi-vigraha-).

महायानपरिग्रहक

m. a follower of the mahā-yāna- doctrines

महायानसंग्रह

m. Name of work

महायानसम्परिग्रहशास्त्र

n. Name of work

महोग्रतन्त्र

n. Name of a tantra-.

मैथिलसंग्रह

m. Name of work

मलग्रहि

mfn.

मालाग्रन्थि

m. equals -dūvā-

मल्लानकग्राम

m. Name of a village

माल्यग्रथन

n. the stringing together or winding of garland

मांसग्रन्थि

m. flesh-swelling, a gland

मानग्रहण

n. fit of sulkiness,

मानग्रन्थि

m. violent or lasting anger

मननग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

मण्डलाग्र

mfn. round-pointed (as a sword)

मण्डलाग्र

m. (n.) a bent or rounded sword, scimitar

मण्डलाग्र

n. (scilicet śastra-) a surgeon's circular knife

माण्डूक्योपनिषद्भाष्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

मङ्गलग्रह

m. an auspicious planet, a lucky star

मणिग्राम

m. Name of a place

मणिग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

मणिग्रीव

mfn. "jewel. necked", wearing a necklace

मणिग्रीव

m. Name of a son of kubera-

मणिकाञ्चनप्रमेयसंग्रह

m. Name of work

मनीमुषग्राम

m. Name of a village

मनोग्रहण

m. the act of seizing or captivating the mind

मनोग्राहिन्

mfn. captivating the mind, fascinating

मनोग्राह्य

mfn. to be grasped by the mind

मनोग्राह्य

mfn. equals prec.

मन्थ्यग्र

mfn. beginning with mixed soma-

मन्त्रशास्त्रसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

मनुष्यग्रन्थि

m. a knot formed by men

मन्याग्रह

m. spasm or contraction of the neck

मरणाग्रेसर

mfn. preceding in death

मथुरामाहात्म्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

मातृग्राम

m. "the aggregate of mother", the female sex

मातृग्राम

m. any woman

मातृग्राम

m. Name of a village

मातृग्रामदोष

m. plural the faults of woman kind

मयग्राम

m. Name of a village

मयसंग्रह

m. Name of work

मयूरग्रीव

n. "peacock's neck", a kind of blue vitriol

मयूरग्रीवक

n. "peacock's neck", a kind of blue vitriol

मेढ्रनिग्रह

m. Name of work

मेदोग्रन्थि

m. a fatty tumour

मीमांसार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

मीमांसासंग्रह

m. Name of work equals sārtha-saṃgraha-.

मीमांसासारसंग्रह

m. Name of work (see sā-bāla-prakāśa-)

मिताक्षरसिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work connected with the mitākṣarā-

मित्रानुग्रहण

n. the act of favouring friends or causing them prosperity

मृदुग्रन्थि

m. a species of grass

मृद्ववग्रह

m. a particular slight separation of the members of a compound

मृगग्रहण

n. the capture of a deer

मूढग्राह

m. confused notion, misconception, infatuation

मुद्राराक्षसकथासंग्रह

m. Name of work

मुग्धाग्रणी

m. the chief of fools

मुहूर्तग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

मुहूर्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

मुखाग्र

n. the extremity of a nose or snout

मुखाग्र

n. any extremity

मुखग्रहण

n. kissing the mouth

मुक्तिग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

मुकुलाग्र

n. a particular surgical instrument with a bud-like point

मूलग्र

wrong reading

(grau-for gnau-).

मूलग्रन्थ

m. "original text", Name of the very words uttered by gautama- buddha-

मूलग्रन्थि

f. a species of dūrvā- grass

मुमुक्षुसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

मुमुक्षुसर्वस्वसारसंग्रह

m. mumukṣusarvasva

मुञ्जग्राम

m. Name of a village

(Bombay edition ramya-gr-).

मुष्टिग्रह

m. clasping with one hand

मुष्टिग्राह्य

mfn. to be clasped with one hand (as a waist)

मूत्रग्रन्थि

m. a knot or induration at the neck of the bladder

नाडीग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

नाडीविग्रह

m. equals -deha-

नगाग्र

n. mountain-top

नागरयायिग्रह

m. plural planets opposed to each other in various particular ways

(see above) .

नग्नभूपतिग्रह

m. Name of a drama.

नैर्ग्रन्थ्य

n. (fr. nir-grantha-)

नैयग्रोध

mfn. (fr. nyag-rodha-; see

) belonging to or made of the Indian fig-tree

नैयग्रोध

n. the fruit of it gaRa plakṣādi- (see naiyyagrodha-).

नैय्यग्रोध

naiyyamika-, naiyyāyika- wrong reading for naiyagrodha- etc.

नखाग्र

n. nail-point

नक्षत्रग्रहयुत्यधिकार

m. Name of chapter of

नक्षत्रग्रहोत्पात

m. Name of the 63rd pariśiṣṭa- of

नक्षत्रग्रामयाजक

m. equals tra-y-

नामधेयग्रहण

n. the mentioning of the name (of particular sacrificers),

नामग्रह

m. mentioning a name, naming

नामग्राह

m. (

) idem or 'n. ( ) idem or 'm. mentioning a name, naming ' '

नामग्राहम्

ind. equals -gṛhya-

नामग्रहण

n. (

) idem or 'm. mentioning a name, naming '

नामजातिग्रह

m. (

)

नामजातिग्रहण

n. (

) mentioning the name and race.

नाममालासंग्रह

m. Name of a stotra-.

नामसंग्रह

m. collection of, nouns

नामसंग्रहमाला

f. Name of vocabulary.

नामसंग्रहनिघण्टु

m. Name of vocabulary.

नानाग्रह

m. taking separate (used to explain avagraha-)

नानार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of dictionary

नानावादसंग्रहग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

नन्दिग्राम

m. Name of a village near Daulatabad (where bharata- resided during rāma-'s banishment)

etc.

नन्दिग्रामदर्शन

n. Name of chapter of

नपुंसकलिङ्गसंग्रह

m. Name of chapter of the nāmaliṅgānuśāsana-.

नरग्राह

m. "murdered-crocodile", Name of a kind of kirāta-

नरान्तकनिग्रहवर्णन

नारायणधर्मसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

नारायणसारसंग्रब

m. Name of work

नासाग्र

(sāg-) n. the tip of the nose

नासिकाग्र

(kāg-) n. the point of the nose

( nāsikāgratas -tas- ind.)

नासिकाग्रतस्

ind. nāsikāgra

नाशितसंग्रह

m. intercourse with an outcast

नास्यग्रासम्

ind. putting into the mouth as if it were an errhine (to be put into the nose), swallowing easily

नताग्रनास

mfn. equals ta-nāsika-

नट्टपट्टग्राम

m. Name of a village

नवग्रह

mfn. (for 2.See 4. n/ava-) recently caught. kad-.

नवग्रह

m. plural the 9 planets (id est sun, moon, 5 planets with rāhu- and ketu-)

नवग्रहबलिदानप्रयोग

m. Name of work

नवग्रहचक्र

n. Name of work

नवग्रहचिन्तामणि

m. Name of work

नवग्रहदान

n. Name of work

नवग्रहदशालक्षण

n. Name of work

नवग्रहाधिदेवतास्थापन

n. Name of work

नवग्रहाधिपत्याहिदेवतास्थापन

n. Name of work

नवग्रहध्यान

n. Name of work

नवग्रहध्यानप्रकार

m. Name of work

नवग्रहगणित

n. Name of work

नवग्रहहोम

m. Name of work

नवग्रहकवच

mn. Name of work

नवग्रहमख

m. Name of work

नवग्रहमखशान्ति

f. Name of work

नवग्रहमङ्गलाष्टक

n. Name of work

नवग्रहमन्त्र

m. plural Name of work

नवग्रहनामावलि

f. Name of work

नवग्रहानयनकोष्ठक

n. plural Name of work

नवग्रहपद्धति

f. Name of work

नवग्रहफल

n. Name of work

नवग्रहप्रश्न

m. Name of work

नवग्रहप्रयोग

m. Name of work

नवग्रहपूजा

f. Name of work

नवग्रहपूजापद्धति

f. Name of work

नवग्रहपूजाविधि

m. Name of work

नवग्रहशान्ति

f. Name of work

नवग्रहस्तव

m. Name of work

नवग्रहस्थापन

n. Name of work

नवग्रहस्तोत्र

n. Name of work

नवग्रहस्तुति

f. Name of work

नवग्रहसूक्त

n. Name of work

नवग्रहविधान

n. Name of work

नवग्रहयाग

m. Name of work

नवग्रहयन्त्रोद्धरणक्रम

m. Name of work

नयसंग्रह

m. "summary of political wisdom", Name of work

नय्यग्रोध

mf(ī-)n. (fr. nyagrodha-) relating to the sacred fig-tree

(varia lectio naiyagr-).

नेपथ्यग्रहण

n. making the toilet

निबन्धनग्रन्थ

m. Name of a class of works.

निबन्धसंग्रह

m. Name of work

निदानसंग्रह

m. Name of a medicine work

निघण्टुसंग्रहनिदान

n. Name of work

निग्राभ

m. pressing down, letting sink

निग्राभ

m. suppressing (the voice, opp. to ud-grābha-,elevating)

, Va1rtt. 3

निग्राभ

m. Name of a verse recited when the soma- plants are pressed

निग्राभ

m. of a particular gift or oblation

निग्रभीतृ

m. one who holds fast or binds

निग्राभ्य

mfn. (with āpas-) the water with which the soma- plants are sprinkled before they are pressed

निग्रह्

P. A1. -gṛhṇāti-, ṇīte- (dative case infinitive mood -gr/abhe-

), to hold down, lower, depress

; to keep or hold back, draw near, attract

etc. ; to seize, catch, hold, hold fast, stop, restrain, suppress, curb, tame, punish

etc. ; to contract, close (as the eyes)

Causal -grāhayati-, to cause to be apprehended or seized

: Causal of Desiderative -jighṛkṣayati- (parasmE-pada ṣayat-), to cause any one to desire to overpower or excel

निग्रह

m. keeping down or back, restraining, binding, coercion, suppression, subjugation

etc.

निग्रह

m. defeat, overthrow, destruction

निग्रह

m. seizing, catching, arresting, holding fast

etc.

निग्रह

m. suppression of an illness id est healing, cure

निग्रह

m. confinement, imprisonment, any punishment or chastisement

etc. (vadhanigt-,pain of death

)

निग्रह

m. reprimand, blame

निग्रह

m. aversion, ill-will, dislike, disgust

निग्रह

m. anything for catching hold of. a handle (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).)

निग्रह

m. a place or occasion for being caught hold of, (especially in nyāya- philosophy) an occasion for refutation, a weak point in an argument or fault in a syllogism (see -sthāna-)

निग्रह

m. a boundary, limit

निग्रह

m. Name of śiva- and viṣṇu-kṛṣṇa-

निग्राह

m. punishment, chastisement

(especially used in imprecations exempli gratia, 'for example' ni-grāhas te bhūyāt-,confusion seize thee

)

निग्राहक

mfn. suppressing, injuring ( nigrāhakatva -tva- n.

)

निग्राहकत्व

n. nigrāhaka

निग्रहण

mfn. holding down, suppressing (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

निग्रहण

n. subduing, suppression

निग्रहण

n. capture, imprisonment, punishment

निग्रहण

n. war, fight

निग्रहसाधन

n. Name of work

निग्रहाष्टक

n. Name of work

निग्रहस्थान

n. (in philosophy) the position of being unfit to carry on an argument from impossibility of agreeing about first principles

निग्रहस्थानसूत्रटीका

f. Name of work

निग्रहस्तोत्र

n. Name of work

निग्रहीतव्य

mfn. to be punished

निग्रहीतृ

m. one who seizes or lays hold of.

निग्रहीतृ

m. one who keeps back or prevents

निग्राह्य

mfn. to be (or being) suppressed or punished

निग्रन्थ्

P. -granth- See punar-nigrantham-.

निग्रन्थन

n. (wrong reading for ni-kr-?; see nir-gr-) killing, slaughter

निग्रन्थि

m. the cover of a book

निग्रिहीति

f. restraint, check

निग्रिहीति

f. overpowering

निःसुग्रीव

mf(ā-)n. freed from sugrīva-

निकषग्रावन्

m. the touchstone.

नीलग्रीव

m. (n/ī-) "blue-necked", Name of śiva-

नीलग्रीव

m. of a prince,

नीलशिग्रु

m. Moringa Pterygosperma

निमित्तग्रहण

n. taking aim,

निमृग्र

(n/i--) mf(ā-)n. attached or devoted to (locative case with /ā-)

निरग्र

mfn. divisible without remainder

निराग्रह

mfn. not insisting upon, not obstinate

नीरग्रह

m. taking up water in a ladle (See under graha-).

निरग्रक

mfn. divisible without remainder

निरन्तरग्रिहवासिन्

mfn. living in the next house

निरनुग्रह

mfn. ungracious, unkind

निरवग्रह

mfn. unrestrained, independent, free

etc. ( niravagrahe he- ind.where there is room to move freely

)

निरवग्रह

mfn. self-willed, headstrong

निरवग्रहे

ind. niravagraha

निर्ग्राह्य

mfn. ( grah-) to be traced or found out, perceivable

निर्ग्रन्थ

mfn. free from all ties or hindrances

निर्ग्रन्थ

mfn. without possessions, poor

निर्ग्रन्थ

mfn. a saint who has withdrawn from the world and lives either as a hermit or a religious mendicant wandering about naked

निर्ग्रन्थ

mfn. a fool, idiot

निर्ग्रन्थ

mfn. a gambler

निर्ग्रन्थ

mfn. murder, manslaughter

निर्ग्रन्थ

etc. See .

निर्ग्रन्थक

mfn. unattended, deserted, alone

निर्ग्रन्थक

mfn. fruitless

निर्ग्रन्थक

mfn. clever, expert

निर्ग्रन्थक

m. a naked jaina- or Buddhist mendicant

निर्ग्रन्थक

n. (?) Jainism or Buddhism

निर्ग्रन्थन

n. killing, slaughter

निर्ग्रन्थशास्त्र

n. Name of work

निर्ग्रन्थि

mfn. free from knots, knotless

निर्ग्रन्थि

mfn. without blemish, perfect (thi-ramaṇīyatā-,

)

निर्ग्रन्थिक

mfn. clever, conversant

निर्ग्रन्थिक

mfn. equals hīna-

निर्ग्रन्थिक

m. equals thaka- m.

निर्ग्रन्थिसिरता

f. the having veins without knots (one of the 80 minor marks of a buddha-),

निर्जितेन्द्रियग्राम

mfn. one who has subdued (the whole assemblage of) his passions or feelings (also m."a muni-, a saint")

निर्णयसंग्रह

m. Name of work

निर्व्यग्र

mfn. unconfused, calm

निषादग्राम

m. a village of the Ni-shad

निष्कग्रीव

mfn. wearing a golden ornament round the neck

निष्परिग्रह

mfn. having no property

etc.

निष्परिग्रह

m. an ascetic without family or dependants

निष्प्रतिग्रह

mfn. not accepting gifts

निष्प्रतिग्रहता

निष्टिग्री

f. (2. gṝ-?) Name of indra-'s mother

नीतिसंग्रह

m. Name of work

नीतिसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

नियोग्यर्थग्रहोपाय

m. the resource of confiscating the property of men in office

न्यग्रोध

m. ( rudh- equals ruh-),"growing downwards"the Banyan or Indian fig-tree, Ficus Indica (it belongs to the kṣīra-vṛkṣas- q.v;fibres descend from its branches to the earth and there take root and form new stems)

etc.

न्यग्रोध

m. Prosopis Spicigera or Mimosa Suma

न्यग्रोध

m. a fathom (measured by the arms extended)

न्यग्रोध

m. Name of a son of kṛṣṇa-

न्यग्रोध

m. of a son of ugra-sena- (also dhaka-)

न्यग्रोध

m. of a Brahman, a monastery and a village

न्यग्रोधा

f. Salvinia Cucullata or some other plant

न्यग्रोध

f(ī-, ikā-). idem or 'f. Salvinia Cucullata or some other plant '

न्यग्रोधक

mfn. gaRa ṛśyādi- (see also above)

न्यग्रोधक्षीर

n. the milky juice of the Indian fig-tree

न्याग्रोधमूल

(

) mfn. (fr. nyagr-) being or situated at the roots of the Ficus Indica.

न्याग्रोधमूलिक

(

) mfn. (fr. nyagr-) being or situated at the roots of the Ficus Indica.

न्यग्रोधपाद

m. Name of a man

न्यग्रोधपरिमण्डल

mfn. being a fathom in circumference

न्यग्रोधपरिमण्डला

f. an elegant woman

न्यग्रोधपरिमण्डलता

f. the having a waist like a fig-tree, (with

one of the 32 signs of perfection

)

न्यग्रोधपरिमण्डलता

f. the having a waist like a fig-tree (one of the 32 signs of perfection),

न्यग्रोधिक

mfn. gaRa kumudādi-and prekṣādi-.

न्यग्रोधिन्

mfn. gaRa kumudādi-and prekṣādi-.

न्यवग्रह

m. the accentless vowel at the end of the first member of a compound

न्यायग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

न्यायमालावार्त्तिकसंग्रह

m. Name of work

न्यायमञ्जरीग्रन्थभङ्ग

m. Name of work

न्यायसदर्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

न्यायसंग्रह

m. Name of work

न्यायसंग्रहदिपिका

f. Name of work

न्यायसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

ओम्कारग्रन्थ

m. Name of work of nārāyaṇa-

पादाग्र

n. the point or extremity of the foot

पादग्रहण

n. laying hold of or clasping the feet (of a Brahman or superior, as a mark of respectful salutation)

पादग्रन्थि

m. "foot-knot", the ankle

पादाग्रस्थित

mfn. standing on tip-toe,

पदार्थधर्मसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पदार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पदावग्राहम्

ind. making a pause after every quarter of a verse

पदवाक्यरत्नाकरकारिकासंग्रह

m. Name of work

पदविग्रह

(

) m. separation of words.

पादविग्रह

m. plural (prob.) a mode of reading (see pāda-v-)

(varia lectio kāma-[for krama-?] -v-)

पादविग्रह

mfn. one-footed (opp. to catuṣpāda-)

पदोपसंग्रहण

n. clasping the foot (of a teacher)

पद्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पाकादिसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पक्षग्राह

(

) mfn. one who takes the side or chooses the party of (genitive case or compound)

पक्षग्रहण

n. taking the side of (genitive case)

पक्षग्राहिन्

(

) mfn. one who takes the side or chooses the party of (genitive case or compound)

पक्षताग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

पक्षतासिद्धान्तग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

पक्षोद्ग्राहिन्

mfn. equals kṣa-grāhin-

पल्लवग्राहिन्

mfn. putting forth young shoots, sprouting in all directions, diffusive, superficial (as knowledge)

पल्लवग्राहिन्

m. (with doṣa-) the fault of prolixity or diffusiveness

पल्लवग्राहिता

f. superficial knowledge, sciolism

पणग्रन्थि

m. a fair, market

पञ्चग्रहयोगशान्ति

f. Name of work

पञ्चग्रामी

f. a collection of 5 villages

पञ्चग्रन्थी

f. Name of work

पञ्चाङ्गसाधनग्रहोदाहरण

n. Name of work

पञ्चनिर्ग्रन्थीसूत्र

n. Name of work =

पाञ्चरात्रसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पञ्चास्तिकायसंग्रहसूत्र

n. Name of work

पञ्चविग्राहम्

ind. by distributing 5 times or by a fivefold distribution

पाञ्चिग्राम

m. Name of a village

पञ्चोपाख्यानसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पङ्गुग्रह

m. the sea-monster makara- (see paṅka-g-)

पङ्गुग्रह

m. one of the signs of the zodiac (see makara-)

पाणिग्रह

m. taking (the bride) by the hand, marriage.

पाणिग्राह

m. idem or 'm. "hand-taker", a bridegroom, husband '

पाणिग्राह

m. hand taking, marriage

पाणिग्रहादिकृत्यविवेक

m. Name of work

पाणिग्राहक

m. equals -grahītṛ-

पाणिग्राहम्

ind. taking by the hand

पाणिग्रहण

n. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) equals -graha-

etc.

पाणिग्रहणमन्त्र

m. a nuptial verse or hymn

पाणिग्रहणसंस्कार

m. the ceremony of hand-taking

पाणिग्रहणिक

mfn. relating to marriage, nuptial

पाणिग्रहणिक

n. a welding present

पाणिग्रहणीय

mfn. idem or 'n. a welding present '

पाणिग्रहणीया

f. Name of

पाणिग्राहवत्

m. a bridegroom

पाणिग्रहीतृ

m. "hand-taker", a bridegroom, husband

पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्त्यर्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पाणिसंग्रह

पाणिसंग्रहण

n. clasping the hand (in confirmation of a promise)

पङ्कग्राह

m. the marine monster makara-

पङ्क्तिग्रीव

m. "ten-necked", Name of rāvaṇa-

पापग्रह

m. an inauspicious planet (as Mars, Saturn, rāhu-, ketu-), Var.

पापविनिग्रह

m. restraining wickedness

परदारपरिग्रह

m. one who takes or approaches or enjoys another's wife or wives, an adulterer

(

)

पारग्रामिक

mf(ī-)n. (-grāma-) "belonging to another village", hostile, inimical

पारग्रामिक

m. (with vidhi-) hostile action, hostility

परग्रन्थि

m. "extreme point of a limb", an articulation, joint

परगुणग्राहिन्

mfn. paraguṇa

परहितग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

परमहंसपरिव्राजकधर्मसंग्रह

m. Name of work

परमरहस्यजपसंग्रह

m. Name of work

परमरहस्योपदेशसंग्रह

m. Name of work

परामर्शग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

परामर्शग्रन्थरहस्य

n. Name of work

परामर्शपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थदीधितिटीका

f. Name of work

परामर्शपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थक्रोड

m. Name of work

परामर्शपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थानुगम

m. Name of work

परामर्शपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थप्रकाश

m. Name of work

परामर्शपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थटीका

f. Name of work

परामर्शपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थविवेचन

n. Name of work

परामर्शसिद्धान्तग्रन्थक्रोड

m. Name of work

परामर्शसिद्धान्तग्रन्थालोक

m. Name of work

परामर्शसिद्धान्तग्रन्थप्रकाश

m. Name of work

परामर्शसिद्धान्तग्रन्थटीका

f. Name of work

परामर्शसिद्धान्तग्रन्थविवेचन

n. Name of work

परमार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

परमार्थसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

परमतखण्डनसंग्रह

m. Name of work

परपरिग्रह

m. another's property

परपरिग्रह

m. another's wife

पराशरस्मृतिसंग्रह

m. Name of work

परस्वग्रह

m. seizing another's property

परिभाषार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

परिभाषासंग्रह

m. Name of work

परिभाषासारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

परिभाषेन्दुशेखरसंग्रह

m. Name of work

परिग्रह्

P. A1. -gṛhṇāti-, ṇīte- (imperative 2. sg. -gṛhāṇa-

; imperfect tense -agṛhṇāḥ-

;3. sg. -agṛhṇat-

;3. plural -agṛhṇan-

; A1. -agṛhṇanta-

; perfect tense 1. sg. -jagr/abha-

;3. sg. -jagrāha-

etc.; ind.p. -gṛhya-

etc.) , to take hold of on both sides, embrace, surround, enfold, envelop

etc. ; to fence round, hedge round

; to occupy on both sides (sarasvatīm-)

; to seize, clutch, grasp, catch

; to put on, wear (as a dress or ornament)

; to take or carry along with one

etc. ; to take possession of, master, overpower

; to take (in war), take prisoner, conquer

; to take (food)

; to receive, (also as a guest) accept

; to take, adopt, conform to, follow

etc. ; to take by the hand, assist

; to take (a wife), marry

; to surpass, excel

; (in Vedic or Veda gram.) to enclose (iti-) between a word twice repeated

(see pari-graha-).

परिग्रह

m. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) laying hold of on all sides, surrounding, enclosing, fencing round (especially the vedi- or sacrificial altar by means of three lines or furrows)

etc.

परिग्रह

m. wrapping round, putting on (a dress etc.), assuming (a form etc.)

परिग्रह

m. comprehending, summing up, sum, totality,

परिग्रह

m. taking, accepting, receiving or anything received, 2 gift or present

etc.

परिग्रह

m. getting, attaining, acquisition, possession, property (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound'"being possessed of or furnished with")

परिग्रह

m. household, family, attendants, retinue, the seraglio of a prince

परिग्रह

m. a house, abode

परिग्रह

m. root, origin, foundation

परिग्रह

m. admittance (into one's house), hospitable reception

परिग्रह

m. taking (a wife), marrying, marriage

etc.

परिग्रह

m. a wife (also collect.)

etc.

परिग्रह

m. choice, selection

परिग्रह

m. understanding, conception

परिग्रह

m. undertaking, beginning, commission or performance of, occupation with

परिग्रह

m. homage, reverence, grace, favour, help, assistance

etc.

परिग्रह

m. dominion, control (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound'"dependent on, subject to")

परिग्रह

m. force, constraint, punishment (opp. to anu-graha-)

परिग्रह

m. claim on, relation to, concern with (locative case)

etc.

परिग्रह

m. (in Vedic or Veda gram.) the double mention of a word both before and after iti-

परिग्रह

m. the form which precedes iti-

परिग्रह

m. a curse, imprecation, oath

परिग्रह

m. an eclipse of the sun

परिग्रह

m. the rear or reserve of an army

(varia lectio prati-gr-)

परिग्राह

m. the surrounding or fencing round of the vedi- or sacrificial altar with three lines or furrows

परिग्रहबहुत्व

n. multitude of wives

परिग्रहद्वितीय

mfn. accompanied by one's wife or family

परिग्रहक

mfn. grasping, taking hold of, undertaking (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

परिग्राहक

mfn. favouring, befriending

परिग्रहमय

mf(ī-)n. consisting of a family

परिग्रहण

n. wrapping round, putting on

परिग्रहार्थीय

mfn. having the sense of comprehension id est generalization

परिग्रहत्व

n. state of a wife, marriage

परिग्रहवत्

mfn. possessed of, wealth, having property

परिग्रहिन्

mfn. possessed of, wealth, having property

परिग्रहीतव्य

mfn. to be admitted or supposed,

परिग्रहीतव्य

mfn. to be ruled or controlled

परिग्रहीतव्य

mfn. to be taken hold of or got into possession

परिग्रहीतृ

mfn. taking hold of, seizing

परिग्रहीतृ

m. assister, helper

परिग्रहीतृ

m. ruler

परिग्रहीतृ

m. an adoptive father

परिग्रहीतृ

m. a husband

परिग्राह्य

mfn. to be treated or addressed kindly

पारिग्रामिक

mf(ī-)n. (-grāmam-) situated round a village

परिग्रस्

P. A1. -grasati-, te-, to devour

परिग्रेध

(!) m. excessive greediness

परिप्रग्रह्

P. -gṛhṇāti-, to hand or pass round

परिशिष्टसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पर्णशालाग्र

m. Name of a mountain in bhadrāśva-

पार्ष्णिग्रह

mfn. seizing or threatening from behind

पार्ष्णिग्रह

m. a follower, either an ally who supports or an enemy who attacks the rear of a king

पार्ष्णिग्राह

mfn. attacking in the rear

पार्ष्णिग्राह

mfn. "heel-catcher", an enemy in the rear or a commander in the rear of an army (applied also to hostile planets)

पार्ष्णिग्रहण

n. attacking or threatening an enemy in the rear

पर्वसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पर्वताग्र

n. mountains-top

पर्यङ्कग्रन्थिबन्ध

m. the bending of the legs crossways under the body in sitting

पतद्ग्रह

m. "receiving what falls", a receptacle for alms

पतद्ग्रह

m. a spittoon (also -grāha-)

(also n.)

पतद्ग्रह

m. the rear of an army

पतंगग्राम

m. Name of a village

पौराग्रगण्य

m. equals paura-mukhya-

पवनयोगसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पयोग्रह

m. an oblation of milk

पयोग्रहसमर्थनप्रकार

m. Name of work

फलाग्र

n. "fruit-beginning", fruit-time,

फलग्रह

mfn. "receiving fruits", deriving profit or advantage

फलग्रह

m. the act of doing so

फलग्रहि

(

) mfn. fruit-bearing, fruitful.

फलग्राहिन्

m. a fruit tree

फलग्रहिष्णु

(

) mfn. fruit-bearing, fruitful.

फलग्रन्थ

m. a work describing the effects (of celestial phenomena on the destiny of men)

फलग्रन्थ

m. Name of works.

फलाग्रशाखिन्

mfn. having fruits at the ends of its branches

फलेग्रहि

mfn. bearing fruit, fruitful, successful (equals phala-g-)

(see

) .

फलेग्राहि

mfn. bearing fruit

फलेग्राहिन्

mfn. bearing fruit

फेनाग्र

n. "point of foam", a bubble on the water

पिण्डाग्र

n. a small morsel of a piṇḍa-

पिष्टपशुसाधकग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

पितृग्रह

m. "Pitri-demon", a particular demon causing diseases

पितृग्राम

m. " pitṛ- village", place of the dead

प्लक्षन्यग्रोध

m. dual number Ficus Infectoria and Ficus Indica

प्रबोधचन्द्रोदयसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रचण्डोग्रा

f. Name of a yoginī-

प्राचीनाग्र

mfn. having its points turned eastward (said of sacred grass)

प्राचीनग्रीव

(prāc/īna--.) mfn. having the neck turned eastward

प्रागग्र

mf(ā-)n. having the tip. or point turned forward or eastward ( prāgagratā -tā- f.)

प्रागग्रता

f. prāgagra

प्राग्ग्रामम्

ind. before the village or to the east of the village

प्राग्ग्रन्थि

mfn. having the knots turned eastward

प्राग्ग्रीव

mfn. having the neck turned eastward

प्राग्र

(pra-agra-) n. the highest point, summit

प्रग्रह्

P. A1. -gṛhṇāti-, ṇīte-, to hold or stretch forth, hold

etc. ; to offer, present

; to seize, grasp, take hold of, take

etc. ; to accept, receive

; to draw up, tighten (reins), stop (horses)

; to befriend, favour, further, promote

; to keep separated or isolated (see below) : Causal (infinitive mood -grāhitum-) to receive, accept

प्रग्रह

m. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) holding in front, stretching forth

प्रग्रह

m. seizing, clutching, taking hold of (haṃ gataḥ-,seized, taken)

प्रग्रह

m. a particular manner of fighting

(= śatror uttānapā-tanārtham pādākarṣaṇam-,or equals gala-hastakaḥ-

)

प्रग्रह

m. the seizure of the sun or moon, beginning of an eclipse (see graha-)

प्रग्रह

m. friendly reception, kindness, favour

प्रग्रह

m. obstinacy, stubbornness (haṃgataḥ-,obstinate, stubborn)

प्रग्रह

m. a rein, bridle

etc.

प्रग्रह

m. a ray of light (like all words meaning"rein"or"bridle")

प्रग्रह

m. a rope, halter, cord, string, thong

प्रग्रह

m. the cord or string suspending a balance

प्रग्रह

m. a guide, leader, ruler (also as Name of viṣṇu-kṛṣṇa-)

प्रग्रह

m. a companion, satellite

प्रग्रह

m. binding

प्रग्रह

m. taming, breaking (a horse)

प्रग्रह

m. the arm

प्रग्रह

m. a species of plant

(Cassis Fistula

)

प्रग्रह

m. a vowel not subject to the rules of saṃdhi-

( pragrahatva -tva- n. Scholiast or Commentator; see 1. pra-gṛhya-)

प्रग्रह

m. Name of a particular sacrificial rite (also -homa-

)

प्रग्रह

mf(ā-)n. receiving, kind, hospitable (with sabhā- f.a hall of reception, an audience hall)

(Bombay edition)

प्रग्रह

mf(ā-)n. equals ūrdhvabāhu- (?)

(see pr/añjali-pragr-)

प्रग्राह

m. (only

) seizing, taking, bearing, carrying (see

)

प्रग्राह

m. a rein, bridle (see

)

प्रग्राह

m. the string of a balance (see

)

प्रग्रहादिदर्पण

m. Name of work

प्रग्राहम्

ind. taking the words separately, not pronouncing them according to the rules of saṃdhi-

प्रग्रहण

m. a leader, guide (only in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' [f(ā-).]"led by")

प्रग्रहण

m. stretching forth, offering

प्रग्रहण

m. taking, seizing, holding

प्रग्रहण

m. the seizure of the sun and moon, commencement of an eclipse

प्रग्रहण

m. a means for taming or breaking in

प्रग्रहण

m. the being a leader or guide, authority, dignity

प्रग्रहण

m. a rein, bridle

प्रग्रहण

m. a check, restraint

प्राग्रहर

mfn. taking the best share, chief principal among (genitive case or compound)

प्रग्रहत्व

n. pragraha

प्रग्रहवत्

mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') one who has seized, holding

प्रग्रहवत्

mfn. receiving, kindly, obliging

(Scholiast or Commentator"keeping down the wicked"or"controlling the organs of sense")

प्रग्राहवत्

mfn. having the string of a balance

प्रग्रहिन्

mfn. guiding the reins

प्रग्रहीतव्य

mfn. to be checked or controlled

प्रग्रस्

P. -grasati-, to eat up, devour, swallow

प्राग्रसर

mfn. going in the forefront, foremost in (compound)

प्राग्रसर

mfn. chief among (genitive case)

(varia lectio -hara-).

प्राग्राट

n. thin coagulated milk

प्रग्रथ्

P. -grathnāti-, or -grathati-, to string together, join, connect

प्रग्रथन

n. connecting or stringing together, intertwining

प्रग्रीव

mfn. (gaRa ardharcādi-;also -ka- in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound'

) a wooden balustrade or fence round a building

प्रग्रीव

m. a window, lattice, balcony (projecting like a neck; see grīvā-)

प्रग्रीव

m. a summer-house, pleasure-house

प्रग्रीव

m. a painted turret

प्रग्रीव

m. a stable

प्रग्रीव

m. the top of a tree

प्राग्रूप

n. previous symptom (of disease)

प्राग्र्य

mfn. chief principal, most excellent

प्रागुदगग्र

mfn. having the tips turned somewhat east and somewhat north

(Scholiast or Commentator)

प्रागुद्धारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रज्ञाताग्र

mfn. "having the top-end conspicuous", thinner at the top,

(Scholiast or Commentator).

प्राकाराग्र

n. the top of a wall

प्रकीर्णसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रक्रियासंग्रह

m. Name of gram. work

प्रक्रियासंग्रह

m. Name (also title or epithet) of gram. work

प्रमाणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रामाण्यवादसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रमेयसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रमेयसंग्रहविवरण

n. Name of work

प्रमेयसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्राणग्रह

m. "breath-catcher", the nose,

प्राणग्रह

m. plural Name of particular soma- vessels

प्राणनिग्रह

m. restraint of breath

प्राणपरिग्रह

m. possession of breath or life, existence

प्राञ्जलिप्रग्रह

mfn. holding the hands joined and outstretched

(varia lectio liḥ pragr-).

प्रपञ्चसारसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्राप्तार्थाग्रहण

n. the not securing an advantage gained

प्रासादाग्र

n. equals da-tala-

प्रासादाग्र्य

n. plural most excellent palaces

प्रसारिताग्र

mfn. (fingers) with extended tips

प्रशिथिलभुजग्रन्थि

mfn. one who loosens the clasp of the arms

प्रश्नग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

प्रश्नसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रसृताग्रभुज्

mfn. eating the best etc.

प्रसृताग्रप्रदायिन्

mfn. offering the best of all that has grown

प्रथमग्रन्थ

m. Name of a poem by jagaj-jīvana-dāsa-.

प्रतीचीनग्रीव

(pratīc/īna--) mfn. having the neck turned westward

प्रतिग्रह्

P. A1. -gṛhṇāti-, -gṛhṇīte- (irreg. 2. sg. imperative -gṛhṇa-

; Aorist -ajagrabhat-

), to take hold of, grasp, seize (in astrology = to eclipse, obscure)

etc. ; to take (as a present or into possession), appropriate, receive, accept

etc. (śirasā-,"with the head"i e."humbly, obediently"

) ; to gain, win over

; to take as a wife, marry

etc. ; to take = eat, drink

; to receive (a friend or guest)

etc. ; to receive (anything agreeable as a good word or omen)

; to assent to, acquiesce in, approve

; (rarely) to receive (an enemy) , oppose, encounter

: Causal -grāhayati-, to cause to accept, present with (2 accusative)

; to answer, reply

: Desiderative -jighṛkṣati-, to wish to accept

प्रतिग्रह

m. receiving, accepting, acceptance of gifts (as the peculiar prerogative of Brahmans; see

)

etc. (grahaṃ-kṛ-,to receive presents

)

प्रतिग्रह

m. friendly reception

प्रतिग्रह

m. favour, grace

प्रतिग्रह

m. taking a wife, marrying

प्रतिग्रह

m. receiving with the ear id est hearing

प्रतिग्रह

m. a grasper, seizer (keśa--,a hair-cutter, barber)

a receiver

प्रतिग्रह

m. a chamber-vessel or any similar convenience for sick persons

प्रतिग्रह

m. a spittoon

प्रतिग्रह

m. a gift, present (especially a donation to a Brahman at suitable periods)

etc. (instrumental case"as a present"

)

प्रतिग्रह

m. Name of the objects or functions corresponding to the 8 graha-s

प्रतिग्रह

m. equals kriyā-kāra-

प्रतिग्रह

m. the reserve of an army (a detachment posted with the general 400 yards in the rear of a line)

प्रतिग्रह

m. the sun near the moon's node

प्रतिग्राह

m. a spittoon

प्रतिग्राह

m. accepting gifts

प्रतिग्रहधन

n. money received as a present

प्रतिग्रहधन

mfn. one whose wealth consists only in presents

प्रतिग्राहक

mfn. one who receives or accepts (See /a-pratig-).

प्रतिग्रहकल्प

m. Name of pariśiṣṭa- of

प्रतिग्रहण

mfn. accepting

(perhaps wrong reading)

प्रतिग्रहण

n. receipt, acceptance

प्रतिग्रहण

n. taking a wife, marrying

(see /a-pratig-)

प्रतिग्रहण

n. a vessel

प्रतिग्रहणीय

mfn. to be taken or accepted, acceptable

प्रतिग्रहप्राप्त

mfn. received as a present

प्रतिग्रहप्रायश्चित्तप्रकार

m. Name of work

प्रतिग्रहिन्

mfn. one who receives, a receiver (opp. to dātṛ-)

प्रतिग्राहिन्

mfn. idem or 'mfn. one who receives or accepts (See /a-pratig-).'

प्रतिग्रहीतव्य

mfn. to be received

प्रतिग्रहीतृ

mfn. idem or 'mfn. to be received '

etc.

प्रतिग्रहीतृ

m. one who takes a wife, one who marries (Nominal verb tā-,also as 3. sg. future)

प्रतिग्राह्य

mfn. to be taken or accepted, acceptable

(see a-pratig-)

प्रतिग्राह्य

mfn. one from whom anything may be received

(see gṛhya-and

)

प्रतिग्राह्य

m. Name of particular graha-s

प्रतिग्रामम्

ind. in every village

प्रतिग्राममसमीपम्

ind. near every village

प्रतिनामग्रहणम्

(pr/ati--) ind. mentioning each individual name

प्रतिनिग्रह्

A1. -gṛhṇīte-, to take up (liquids), ladle out

प्रतिनिग्राह्य

mfn. to be ladled out

(see nirgr-).

प्रतिनिर्ग्राह्य

mfn. ( grah-) to be taken up with a ladle

(see prati-nigr-).

प्रतिपक्षग्रह

m. the taking of the opposite side (haṃ cakruḥ-,they took the opposite side)

प्रतिप्रग्रह्

P. -gṛhṇāti-, to take up or receive again

प्रतिसंग्रह्

P. A1. -grihṇāti-, ṇīte-, to receive, accept

; to meet with, find

प्रतिष्ठासंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रतिष्ठासारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रत्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. fresh, recent, new, young

etc.

प्रत्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. repeated, reiterated

प्रत्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. pure

प्रत्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. (in the beginning of a compound and pratyagram am- ind.) recently

प्रत्यग्र

m. Name of a son of vasu- uparicara- and prince of the cedi-s

(see agraha-below)

प्रत्यग्रगन्धा

f. a species of shrub, Rhinacanthus Communis

प्रत्यग्रह

m. Name of a son of vasu- and king of the cedi-s

प्रत्यग्रह

m. (equals -agra-;prob. a contracted form for pratyaggraha-).

प्रत्यग्रक्षरत्

mfn. fresh-flowing, flowing freshly

प्रत्यग्रम्

ind. pratyagra

प्रत्यग्रप्रसवा

f. recently delivered, having lately brought forth

प्रत्यग्ररूप

mf(ā-)n. juvenile, young

प्रत्यग्रशोधित

mfn. recently purified, pure

प्रत्यग्रता

f. newness, freshness

प्रत्यग्रथ

m. Name of a prince

प्रत्यग्रथ

m. plural Name of a warrior-tribe (also called ahi-cchattra-; see prātyagrathi-)

प्रात्यग्रथि

m. patronymic fr. pratyagratha-

प्रत्यग्रत्व

n. newness, freshness

प्रत्यग्रवयस्

mfn. young in age, youthful

प्रत्यग्रवयस्

n. youth

प्रत्यग्रयौवन

mf(ā-)n. being in the bloom of youth

प्रत्याख्यानसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रत्यवग्रह्

P. -gṛhṇāti-, to draw or put back

; to retract, revoke, recall

प्रत्युद्ग्रह्

P. -gṛhṇāti-, to set aside, dismiss

प्रत्युद्ग्रह

प्रत्युद्ग्रहण

n. setting aside, dismissing

प्रौढतात्पर्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रविग्रह

m. ( grah-) separation of words by dividing or breaking up the saṃdhi-

प्रायश्चित्तादिसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रायश्चित्तग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

प्रायश्चित्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रायश्चित्तसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रायश्चित्त्तेन्दुशेखरसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रयतपरिग्रहद्वितीय

mfn. accompanied by a pious or chaste wife

प्रयोगग्रहण

n. acquirement of practice

प्रयोगसंग्रह

प्रयोगसंग्रहविवेक

m. Name of work

प्रयोगविवेकसंग्रह

m. Name of work

प्रोद्ग्रीवम्

(pra-udg-) ind. while stretching out the neck

पृष्ठग्रन्थि

m. "back-knot", a hump on she back

पृष्ठग्रन्थि

m. a kind of swelling

पृष्ठग्रन्थि

mfn. hump-backed

पृथग्रसमय

mf(ī-)n. made of a distinct or special sap or essence

पृथग्रूप

mfn. variously shaped, diverse, different, manifold

पृथिवीग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

पृथुग्रीव

m. "broad-necked", Name of a rākṣasa-

पुच्छाग्र

n. tip of the tail

पुच्छाग्र

n. (prob. m.) Name of a mountain

पुग्रोद्भव

(for 1.See under purā-) m. (orf(ā-).) "growing in towns", Name of a plant

पुंस्त्वविग्रह

m. Andropngon Schoenanthus

पुनराग्रन्थम्

ind. by repeatedly twining round

पुनर्ग्रहण

n. repeatedly taking up (with a ladle etc.)

पुनर्ग्रहण

n. repetition

पुनर्निग्रन्थम्

ind. intertwining again

पुराणपदार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पुराणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पुराणसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पुरस्ताद्ग्रन्थि

(r/ast-) mfn. having the knot turned towards the east

पुरातनयोगसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पुरीषनिग्रहण

mfn. stopping or obstructing the bowels

पुरीषसंग्रहणीय

mfn. making the feces more solid

पुरोग्रन्थि

mfn. equals purastādg-

पूर्वग्रामिन्

m. Name of a family

पूर्वमीमांसार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

पूर्वपक्षग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

पूर्वपक्षग्रन्थानुगम

m. Name of work

पूर्वपक्षग्रन्थप्रकाश

m. Name of work

पूर्वपक्षग्रन्थरहस्य

n. Name of work

पूर्वपक्षग्रन्थटीका

f. Name of work

पूर्वापरग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

पूर्वपरिग्रह

m. first claim, prerogative, precedence

पूर्वपरिग्रह

mf(ā-)n. claimed as first privilege by (genitive case)

पुष्कराग्र

n. the tip or extremity of an elephant's trunk

पुष्पाग्र

n. "flower-point", a pistil

पुष्पग्रन्थन

n. wearing a wreath or garland of flower

पुष्पिताग्र

mfn. covered at the extremities with flowers or blossoms

पुष्पिताग्रा

f. Name of a metre.

पुटग्रीव

m. "hollow-necked", a churn

पुटग्रीव

m. a copper vessel

पुत्रप्रतिग्रहविधि

m. Name of work

पुत्रसंग्रह

m. Name of work

रागग्रहवत्

mfn. containing passions compared to crocodiles

रहस्यत्रयसंग्रह

m. Name of work

रहस्यत्रयसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

राहुग्रह

m. the demon (literally"seizer") rāhu-

राहुग्राह

m. equals -grasana- or -grahaṇa-

राहुग्रहण

n. "seizure by rāhu-", an eclipse

राहुग्रास

m. equals -grasana- or -grahaṇa-

राहुग्रसन

n. "the being swallowed by rāhu-", an eclipse

राहुग्रस्त

mfn. "swallowed by rāhu-", eclipsed

राहुग्रस्तनिशाकर

mfn. (a night) whose moon has been swallowed by rāhu-

राजधर्मसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

राजग्रीव

m. a species of fish

राजसिंहसुधासंग्रह

m. Name of a medical work (written by mahādeva-, at the request of king rāja-siṃha-, and also called -sudhā-sindhu-).

राजतरंगिणीसंग्रह

m. Name of work

राजावलीफलग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

रजोग्रहि

mfn.

राक्षसग्रह

m. " rākṣasa--demon", Name of a particular kind of insanity or seizure

रक्तग्रह

m. a kind of demon

रक्तग्रन्थि

m. a kind of Mimosa

रक्तग्रन्थि

m. a particular form of urinary disease

रक्तग्रीव

m. "red-necked", a kind of pigeon

रक्तग्रीव

m. a rākṣasa-

रक्तशिग्रु

m. red-flowering śigru-

रामग्राम

m. Name of a kingdom

रामकथासंग्रह

m. rāmakathā

रमलग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

रमलरहस्यसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

रामानुजग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

रामानुजसिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

रामसिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work on bhakti-.

रामायणभारतसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

रामायणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

रामायणसारसंग्र

m. Name of work

रामायणतात्पर्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

रम्यग्राम

m. Name of a village

रणाग्र

n. the front or van of a battle

रणविग्रह

m. idem or 'm. Name of a man '

रसग्रह

mfn. apprehending flavours, having a taste for enjoyments

रसग्रह

m. the organ of taste

रसग्राहक

mfn. apprehending or perceiving flavours

रसाग्रज

n. an ointment prepared from the calx of brass

रसनानिग्रह

m. Name of work

रससंग्रह

m. Name of work

रससंग्रहसिद्धान्त

m. Name of work

रससंग्राही

f. Name of a yoginī-

रससारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

रससिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

रसेन्द्रसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

रथाग्र

m. wrong reading for thāgrya- below

रथाग्र

n. the fore-part of a chariots

रथग्रन्थि

m. the knot of a chariots

रथाग्रतस्

ind. in the fore-part of a chariots

रथाग्र्य

m. the chief or best warrior

रतिसंग्रहव्याख्या

f. Name of work

रत्नग्रीवतीर्थ

n. Name of a tīrtha-

रत्नसंग्रह

m. Name of various works.

रत्नसारजातकेज्योतिषसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

रविग्रह

रविग्रहण

n. an eclipse of the sun

रविग्रावन्

m. equals -kānta-

रेवतीग्रह

m. Name of a demon presiding over diseases

रिक्थग्राह

mfn. receiving an inheritance, inheriting property

रिक्थग्राह

m. an inheritor, heir

ऋक्षग्रीव

m. "bear-necked", a kind of demon

ऋक्थग्राह

mfn. one who inherits or receives property

ऋक्थग्राह

m. inheritance of property

ऋक्थग्रहण

n. inheriting property.

ऋणग्रह

mfn. getting into debt, borrowing

ऋणग्रह

m. the act of borrowing

ऋणग्राहिन्

mfn. borrowing

ऋणग्राहिन्

m. a borrower

ऋणोद्ग्रहण

n. recovering a debt in any way from a creditor (by friendly or legal proceedings, by strategem or arrest)

रोगग्रस्त

mfn. seized with any disease or sickness

रोगनिग्रहण

n. suppression of disease

ऋतुग्रह

m. a libation offered to the ṛtu-s or seasons

रूढग्रन्थि

mfn. forming a knot

रुद्रयामलादिसंग्रह

m. Name of work

रूपाभिग्राहित

mfn. caught in the act, caught red-handed

रूपग्रह

mfn. apprehending forms, perceiving colours

रूपग्रह

m. the eye

शब्दबाणाग्रवेधिन्

mfn. hitting (an unseen object) with an arrow's point by (aiming at) the mere sound

(see śabda-vedhin-).

शब्दग्रह

m. "receiver of sounds", the ear

शब्दग्रह

m. receiving or catching sound

शब्दग्रह

m. Name of a fabulous arrow

शब्दग्राम

m. the totality of sounds

शब्दसद्रूपसंग्रह

m. Name of a nyāya- work

शब्दसंग्रहनिघण्टु

m. Name of work

सच्छलजातिनिग्रहमय

mf(ī-)n. consisting of defeat (in disputation) accompanied by self-refuting objections and unfair arguments

सदाचारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सदाचारसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सदनुग्रह

m. favour towards the good

षड्दर्शनसंग्रहवृत्ति

f. Name of work

षड्दर्शनसिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सद्धर्मसम्परिग्रह

m. Name of work

सद्ग्रह

m. a good or auspicious planet

सद्ग्रह

mfn. clinging or attached to what is good or true (with kṛṣṇe-,"attached to kṛṣṇa- as to the really true")

षड्ग्रहशान्ति

f. Name of work

षड्ग्रहयोगशान्ति

f. Name of work

षड्ग्रन्थ

m. a kind of karañja-

षड्ग्रन्थ

m. a variety of the Caesalpinia Bonducella

षड्ग्रन्था

f. a kind of aromatic root (equals vacā-or śveta-v-

)

(wrong reading -grandhā-)

षड्ग्रन्था

f. Galedupa Piscidia

षड्ग्रन्था

f. Curcuma Zedoaria

षड्ग्रन्थी

f. equals vacā-

षड्ग्रन्थि

mfn. six-knotted

षड्ग्रन्थि

n. the root of long pepper

षड्ग्रन्थिका

f. Curcuma Zedoaria

साधारणग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

साधारणप्रायश्चित्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

साधारणासाधारणानुपसंहारिविरोधग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

साधारणासाधारणानुपसंहारिविरोधग्रोधिन्

n. Name of work

साधुनिग्रह

mf(ā-)n. having a convenient handle

षड्जग्राम

m. (in music) a particular scale

साग्र

mf(ā-)n. with the tip or point

साग्र

mf(ā-)n. equals sam-agra-, whole, entire

साग्र

mf(ā-)n. having a surplus, more than,

सग्रह

mfn. filled with crocodiles (as a river)

सग्रह

mfn. taken up by means of ladles or other vessels (See graha-)

सग्रह

mfn. seized by the demon rāhu-, eclipsed (as the moon)

साग्रह

mfn. with pertinacity, insisting on anything, persistent ( sāgraham am- ind.)

साग्रहम्

ind. sāgraha

साग्रम्

ind. for a longer period, for a whole life

साग्रयणाग्न्याधानप्रयोग

m. Name of work

सहचारग्रन्थप्रकाश

m. Name of work

सहचारिग्रन्थरहस्य

n. Name of work

सहर्षमृगयुग्रामनिनादमय

mf(ī-)n. resounding with the shouts of the joyful troop of hunters

साहित्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

शैग्रव

m. (fr. śigru-) a patronymic gaRa bidādi-

शैग्रव

n. the fruit of Moringa Pterygosperma gaRa plakṣādi-.

शैलाग्र

n. a mountain top

सैन्यनिग्राहिका

f. (used in explaining cakra-grahaṇī-)

शैवसिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

शैवतात्पर्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सकलागमसंग्रह

m. Name of a tantra- work

सकलग्रन्थदीपिका

f. Name of a lexicon by sanat-kumāra-.

सकलप्रबन्धवर्णसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सकलप्रमाणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सकलशान्तिसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सखिविग्रह

m. war of friends, civil war

शकृद्ग्रह

wrong reading for sakṛd-gr- q.v

सकृद्ग्रह

(

) m. plural Name of peoples.

सकृद्ग्राह

(

) m. plural Name of peoples.

शक्तिग्रह

mf(ā-)n. (only

) (see

Va1rtt. 1

) holding a spear or lance

शक्तिग्रह

mf(ā-)n. taking hold of the force or meaning (of a word or sentence etc.)

शक्तिग्रह

m. a spearman, lancer

शक्तिग्रह

m. Name of kārttikeya- and śiva-

शक्तिग्रह

m. perception or apprehension of the force or sense (of a word etc.)

शक्तिग्राहक

m. who or what causes to apprehend the force or signification (of a word or phrase), determining or establishing the meaning of words (as a dictionary, grammar etc.)

शक्तिग्राहक

m. equals -graha-

शकुनिग्रह

m. Name of a demon causing children's diseases

शालग्राम

m. Name of a village situated on the river gaṇḍakī- and regarded as sacred by the vaiṣṇava-s (its name comes from the Sal trees growing near it)

शालग्राम

m. Name of viṣṇu- as worshipped at śāla-grāma- or as identified with the Salgram stone

शालग्राम

mn. a sacred stone worshipped by the vaiṣṇava-s and supposed to be pervaded by the presence of viṣṇu- (it is a black stone which contains a fossil ammonite and is chiefly found near the above village in the gaṇḍakī-)

शालग्राम

etc. See 1. śāla-, column 1.

सालग्राम

sālaṅka- etc. See śāl-, p.1067, columns 1 and 3.

शालग्रामदानकल्प

m. Name of work

शालग्रामगिरि

m. Name of a mountain producing the Salgram stone

शालग्रामकल्प

m. Name of work

शालग्रामक्षेत्र

n. the district of Salgram

शालग्रामलक्षण

n. Name of work

शालग्राममाहात्म्य

n. Name of work

शालग्रामनिर्णय

m. Name of work

शालग्रामपरीक्षा

f. Name of work

शालग्रामशिला

f. the Salgram stone

शालग्रामस्तोत्र

n. Name of a stotra-.

शालग्रामतीर्थ

n. Name of a tīrtha-

शालग्रामी

f. Name of the river gaṇḍakī-

षलाग्रु

Name of a place

शलालुग्रप्स

(

), m. = - udumbara-- phala-- stabaka- (Scholiast or Commentator).

समाधिविग्रह

m. embodiment of meditation

समग्र

mf(/ā-)n. (See 2. sam-) all, entire, whole, complete, each, every (in the beginning of a compound ="fully","entirely"; n."all, everything")

etc. etc.

समग्र

mf(/ā-)n. fully provided with (instrumental case or compound)

समग्र

mf(/ā-)n. one who has everything or wants nothing

समग्रभक्षणशिल

mfn. eating everything

समग्रधन

mfn. possessing the whole of one's property

समग्रमलहारक

mfn. taking (upon one's self) all impurity

समग्राङ्ग

mfn. one who has his body or limbs complete

समग्रणी

mfn. the very first among (genitive case)

समग्रशक्ति

mfn. possessing full force

समग्रसम्पद्

mfn. one who has every happiness

समग्रसौवर्ण

mfn. entirely golden

समग्रवर्तिन्

mfn. entirely resting or fixed upon (locative case)

समग्रय

Nom. P. yati-, to make full or complete, restore

समग्रेन्दु

m. the full moon

समग्रेन्दुनिभानन

mfn. having a face like the full moon

सामग्री

f. (fr. sam-agra-) totality, entirety, completeness, (especially) a complete collection or assemblage of implements or materials, apparatus, baggage, goods and chattels, furniture, effects

सामग्री

f. a means for (kā te sāmagrī-,"what means have you at your disposal?")

सामग्रीप्रतिबध्यता

f. Name of work

सामग्रीप्रतिबन्धकतावाद

m. Name of work

सामग्रीसहचार

m. Name of work

सामग्रीवाद

m. Name of work

सामग्रीवादार्थ

m. Name of work

सामग्रीविचार

m. Name of work

सामग्रीव्याप्ति

f. Name of work

सामग्रीव्याप्तिविचार

m. Name of work

सामग्र्य

n. equals sāmagrī-

समानग्राम

m. the same village

सामानग्रामिक

mfn. (fr. samānagrāma-) belonging to or being in the same village etc.

Va1rtt. 1.

समानग्रामीय

mfn. dwelling in the same village

समानप्रवरग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

समनुग्रह्

P. A1. -gṛhṇāti-, -gṛhṇīte-, to collect or gather together, arrange or put in order

; to show favour or grace to (accusative)

समनुग्राह्य

mfn. to be favoured or treated graciously

सामान्यभावग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

सामान्याभावग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

सामान्यलक्षणग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

सामान्यनिरुक्तिग्रन्थरहस्य

n. Name of work

सामान्यनिरुक्तिग्रन्थार्थ

m. Name of work

समराग्र

n. the front of battle

समरसारसंग्रह

m. samarasāra

समाससंग्रह

m. Name of work

समस्यासंग्रह

m. Name of work

शम्भलग्राम

m. the town śambhala-

(also -grāmaka-)

शम्भलग्राममाहात्म्य

n. (or śambhala-m-) "glory of śambhala-", Name of part of the

संदर्भग्रन्थ

m. (?) Name of work on the worship of kṛṣṇa-

संधिग्रन्थि

m. a gland which connects (and lubricates) a joint

संधिविग्रह

m. dual number peace and war

संधिविग्रहाधिकार

m. superintendence over the affairs of peace and war

संधिविग्रहाधिकारिन्

m. superintendent over the affairs of peace and war, a chief foreign minister

संधिविग्रहक

m. a minister presiding over the above

संधिविग्रहकार्याधिकारिन्

m. dual number the ministers presiding over the above affairs

संधिविग्रहकायस्थ

m. a secretary for managing (foreign) affairs in making peace and war

संधिविग्रहयानद्वैधीभावसमाश्रयग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

संधिविग्रहिक

m. idem or 'm. a minister presiding over the above '

सांधिविग्रहिक

m. (fr. saṃdhi-vigraha-) a minister who decides upon peace and war

संगीतसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

संग्रभ्

See saṃ-grah-, column 2.

संग्रह्

(or grabh-) P. A1. -gṛhṇāti-, -gṛhṇīte- (Ved. generally -gṛbhṇāti-, -gṛbhṇīte-), to seize or hold together, take or lay hold of. grab, grasp, gripe, clasp, clench, snatch

etc. ; to take, receive (kindly or hospitably), encourage, support, favour, protect

; to seize on, attack (as an illness)

; to apprehend, conceive, understand

; to carry off

etc. ; to gather together, assemble, collect, compile

etc. ; to include, comprehend, contain

; to draw together, contract, make narrower, abridge

; to draw together (a bow in order to unstring it)

; to hold in, restrain, check, govern

; to constrain, force

; to keep together, close, shut (as the mouth)

; to concentrate (the mind)

; to take in marriage, marry

; to mention, name

; Causal -grāhayati-, to cause to grasp or take hold of or receive or comprehend or understand, impart, communicate (with accusative of thing and accusative or dative case of person)

: Desiderative jighṛkṣati-, to wish to take hold of etc. ; to wish to collect

; to wish to take in marriage, desire to marry

संग्रह

m. holding together, seizing, grasping, taking, reception, obtainment

etc.

संग्रह

m. taking (in the sense of eating or drinking food, medicine etc.)

संग्रह

m. the fetching back of discharged weapons by magical means

संग्रह

m. bringing together, assembling (of men)

संग्रह

m. collecting, gathering, conglomeration, accumulation (as of stores)

etc.

संग्रह

m. (in philosophy) agglomeration (equals saṃyoga- q.v)

संग्रह

m. a place where anything is kept, a store-room, receptacle

संग्रह

m. complete enumeration or collection, sum, amount, totality (eṇa-,"completely","entirely")

etc.

संग्रह

m. drawing together, making narrower, narrowing, tightening, making thin or slender, the thin part of anything

संग्रह

m. a compendium, summary, catalogue, list, epitome, abridgment, short statement (eṇa-or āt-,"shortly","summarily","in few words")

etc.

संग्रह

m. inclusion, comprehension

संग्रह

m. check, restraint, control

संग्रह

m. keeping, guarding, protection

etc.

संग्रह

m. a guardian, ruler, manager, arranger

संग्रह

m. obstruction, constipation (See -grahanī-)

संग्रह

m. attracting, winning, favouring, kind treatment, propitiation, entertaining, entertainment

etc.

संग्रह

m. taking to wife, marriage (See dāra-s-)

संग्रह

m. perception, notion

संग्रह

m. mention, mentioning

संग्रह

m. elevation, loftiness

संग्रह

m. velocity

संग्रह

m. Name of śiva-

संग्रह

m. Name of various works (especially of a gram. work in 100,000 śloka-s by vyāḍi-;also often in compound)

संग्राह

m. grasping, laying hold of. forcible seizure

संग्राह

m. the fist or clenching the fist

(see

)

संग्राह

m. the handle of a shield

संग्रहचूडामणि

m. Name of work

संग्रहग्रहणी

f. a particular form of diarrhoea (alternating with constipation)

संग्राहग्राह्य

mfn. to be grasped or seized or clasped or embraced

संग्राहग्राह्य

mfn. to be stopped (as bleeding)

संग्राहग्राह्य

mfn. to be appointed (to an office)

संग्राहग्राह्य

mfn. to be attracted or won or propitiated

संग्राहग्राह्य

mfn. to be accepted or taken to heart (as words)

संग्रहग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

संग्राहक

mf(ī-)n. putting together, summing up

संग्राहक

mf(ī-)n. astringent, obstructing, constipating

संग्राहक

mf(ī-)n. drawing or attracting to one's self,

संग्राहक

m. a charioteer

संग्राहक

m. a gatherer, collector, compiler

संग्रहकार

m. the composer or author of the saṃgraha-

संग्रहण

mf(ī-)n. grasping, seizing, taking

संग्रहण

n. the act of grasping or taking (See pāṇi-s-)

संग्रहण

n. receiving, obtaining, acquisition

संग्रहण

n. gathering, compiling, accumulating

संग्रहण

n. encasing, inlaying (of a jewel)

संग्रहण

n. complete enumeration

संग्रहण

n. stopping, restraining, suppressing

संग्रहण

n. attraction, winning over, propitiation

संग्रहण

n. sexual intercourse with (compound), adultery

सांग्रहण

mf(/ī-)n. (fr. saṃgrahaṇa-) relating to the act of taking possession or occupying

सांग्रहणेष्टि

f. Name of a śrauta- work

संग्रहणी

f. equals saṃgraha-grahaṇī-

संग्रहणीरत्न

n. Name of work

संग्रहणीय

mfn. to be taken hold of

संग्रहणीय

mfn. to be taken as a remedy against (any disease exempli gratia, 'for example' diarrhoea),

संग्रहणीय

mfn. to be directed towards (locative case)

संग्रहणीय

mfn. to be drawn together or contracted or restrained

संग्रहपर्वन्

n. Name of work (

)

संग्रहप्रकाशिका

f. Name of work

संग्रहरामायण

n. Name of work

संग्रहरत्नमाला

f. Name of work

संग्रहश्लोक

m. a verse recapitulating what has been explained before (in prose intermixed with sūtra-s).

सांग्रहसूत्रिक

mfn. (fr. saṃgraha-sūtra-) equals saṃgraha-sūtram adhīte veda vā-

संग्रहवैद्यनाथीय

n. Name of work

संग्रहवस्तु

n. an element of popularity

संग्रहवत्

mfn. provided with a short summary of a subject

संग्रहविवरण

n. Name of work

सांग्राहिक

mfn. (fr. saṃ-graha-) equals saṃgrehe sādhuḥ- gaRa kathādi-

सांग्राहिक

mfn. equals -saṃ-graham adhite veda vā- gaRa ukthādi-.

सांग्राहिक

mfn. obstructing, constipating

संग्रहिन्

m. a collector, procurer

(varia lectio)

संग्राहिन्

mfn. grasping, collecting, gathering, accumulating

संग्राहिन्

mfn. astringent, constipating

संग्राहिन्

mfn. winning over, propitiating (See loka-s-)

संग्राहिन्

m. Wrightia Antidysenterica

संग्राहित

mfn. (fr. Causal) caused to be grasped or received, bestowed, imparted, communicated

संग्रहीतव्य

mfn. to be retained

Va1rtt. 6.

संग्रहीतृ

mfn. one who lays hold of etc., one who wins over or propitiates

संग्रहीतृ

m. a charioteer

संग्राम्

(rather Nom.fr. saṃgrāma-below) A1. saṃgrāmayate- (according to to

also P. tī-), to make war, fight

: Desiderative See siṣaṃgrāmayiṣu- and sisaṃgrāmayiṣu-.

संग्राम

m. (and n.

; see, grāma-) an assembly of people, host, troop, army

संग्राम

m. battle, war, fight, combat, conflict, hostile encounter with (instrumental case with and without samam-, saka-, sārdham-,or compound)

etc.

संग्राम

m. Name of various men

सांग्राम

mfn. (fr. saṃ-grāma-) gaRa vyuṣṭādi-.

संग्रामभूमि

f. a field of battle

संग्रामचन्द्र

m. "excelling in battle", Name of a man

संग्रामदत्त

m. Name of a Brahman

संग्रामदेव

m. "war-god", Name of a king

संग्रामाग्र

m. the van of battle

संग्रामगुप्त

m. Name of a man

संग्रामजित्

mfn. victorious in battle (-tama-,superl.)

संग्रामजित्

m. Name of a man

संग्रामजित्

m. of a son of kṛṣṇa-

सांग्रामजित्य

n. (fr. saṃ-grāma-jit-) victory in battle

संग्रामकर्मन्

n. the work or turmoil of battle

संग्राममृत्यु

m. death in battle (varia lectio me mṛ-)

संग्राममूर्धन्

m. the van or front of battle

संग्रामनगर

n. Name of a city

संग्रामाङ्गन

n. battle-field

संग्रामपाल

m. Name of a king

संग्रामपटह

m. a war-drum

संग्रामापीड

m. Name of two kings

संग्रामराज

m. Name of two kings

संग्रामार्थिन्

mfn. desirous of war or battle, pugnacious

संग्रामसाहि

m. Name of a king

संग्रामसिद्धि

m. Name of an elephant

संग्रामसिंह

m. "lion in battle", Name of an official in the lower regions

संग्रामशिरस्

n. equals -mūrdhan-

संग्रामाशिस्

f. a prayer for aid in battle (personified)

संग्रामतुला

f. the ordeal of battle

संग्रामतूर्य

n. a war-drum

संग्रामवर्धन

m. Name of two men

संग्रामवर्ष

m. Name of two men

संग्रामविजय

m. "victory in battle", Name of a poem.

संग्रामिक

wrong reading for sāṃgr-.

सांग्रामिक

mf(ī-)n. relating to war, warlike, martial (with ratha- m."a war-chariot";with mṛtyu- m."death in battle";with vitta- n."spoils of war")

etc.

सांग्रामिक

m. a commander, general

सांग्रामिक

n. plural (scilicet sū- ktāni-) hymns containing charms for use in battle,

सांग्रामिकगुण

m. the martial qualities of a king (consisting of the 3 śakti-s, the ṣāḍguṇya-, and the astrādy-abhyāsa-)

सांग्रामिकपरिच्छद

m. implements of war

सांग्रामिकत्व

n. state of war, militarism

सांग्रामिकविधिज्ञ

mfn. familiar with war affairs or military concerns

संग्रामिन्

mfn. engaged in war

संग्राम्य

mfn. fit for war or battle

संग्राम्य

n. = (or wrong reading for) saṃ-grāma-

संग्रन्थन

n. tying together etc.

संग्रन्थन

n. (with kalahasya-) beginning a quarrel

संग्रस्

P. A1. -grasati-, te-, to swallow up, devour, consume

संग्रसन

n. eating up, devouring

संग्रथन

n. tying together, repairing or restoring by tying together

संग्रथित

mfn. strung or tied or knotted together

शंकरभाष्यन्यायसंग्रह

m. Name of work

संकेतग्रह

m. (

) making an agreement.

संकेतग्रहण

n. (

) making an agreement.

संख्यामङ्गलग्रन्थि

m. the auspicious ceremony of tying knots in a thread corresponding to the number of the past years of one's life

संक्षिप्तसारसंग्रह

m. Name of a grammar (by pītāmbara-śarman-)

संनिग्रह्

P. -gṛhṇāti-, to hold down, keep under, overcome, subdue

; to lay hold of, seize

; to check, curb, restrain, suppress

संनिग्रह

m. restraint, punishment

संन्यासधर्मसंग्रह

m. Name of work

संन्यासग्रहण

n. assuming or practising asceticism

संन्यासग्रहणपद्धति

f. Name of work

संन्यासग्रहणरत्नमाला

f. Name of work

संन्यासग्राह्यपद्धति

f. Name of work

सम्परिग्रह्

P. A1. -gṛhṇāti-, -gṛhṇīte-, to accept, receive

; to receive in a friendly manner

; to embrace

; to undertake, accomplish, perform

; to take in or understand thoroughly

सम्परिग्रह

m. receiving with kindness

सम्परिग्रह

m. property

सम्प्रग्रह्

P. A1. -gṛhṇāti-, -gṛhṇīte-, to hold forth or stretch forth together

; to seize or take hold of together

; to take hold of

; to accept, receive (with vacanam-,"to receive any one's words well or kindly")

सम्प्रतिग्रह्

P. A1. -gṛhṇāti-, -grihṇīte-, to receive hospitably, welcome

सम्प्रतिग्रह

m. kind reception, predilection for

सम्प्रोक्षणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

समुद्ग्रह्

P. -gṛhṇāti-, to raise or lift up, take hold of. seize on

समुद्ग्रन्थ्

(only ind.p. -grathya-), to bind up together, tie or fasten up

शम्याग्राह

m. (prob.) one who plays the cymbals

साम्यग्राह

m. one who beats time

सम्यक्त्वमिथ्यात्वसर्वसंग्रसन

m. a particular samādhi-

सनामग्राह

mf(ā-)n. together with mention of the name

सनिग्रह

mfn. furnished with a handle

षण्मुखाग्रज

m. Name of gaṇeśa-

शान्तिग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

शान्तिशतकसंग्रह

m. Name of work (?)

शान्त्यग्निपरीक्षादिग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

शापग्रस्त

mfn. seized by or suffering from a curse

शफग्रह

m. the hoof or claw of an animal used as a kind of receptacle

सप्तग्रही

f. the meeting of the 7 planets under one sign

सप्तग्रन्थनिबर्हणशैववैष्णवविचार

m. Name of work

सप्तग्रन्थी

f. Name of work

सप्तर्षिस्मृतिसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सारग्राह

m. (with karma-vipāka-) Name of work on dharma- (composed by kāṃhadasūnu- in 1384 A.D.)

सारग्रहमञ्जरी

f. Name of work

सारग्राहिन्

mfn. capable of extracting or apprehending the essence or best part of anything

सारग्रीव

m. "strong-necked", Name of śiva-

शराग्र्य

m. an excellent arrow

सारार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of a commentator or commentary on the bhagavad-gītā-.

सारसमग्रह

m. "concentration of the essence of any work", Name of various compendiums (also sārasamagrahajñānabhūṣaṇabhāṣya -jñāna-bhūṣaṇa-bhāṣya- n. sārasamagrahanighaṇṭu -nighaṇṭu- m. sārasamagrahasaṃgraha -saṃgraha-,m. )

सारसमग्रहज्ञानभूषणभाष्य

n. sārasamagraha

सारसमग्रहनिघण्टु

m. sārasamagraha

सारसमग्रहसंग्रह

m. sārasamagraha

सारस्वतसारसरसमग्रह

m. Name of work

सारात्सारसुसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सारात्सारतत्त्वसंग्रह

m. Name of work

शरीरग्रहण

n. assumption of a bodily form

शारीरकमीमांसान्यायसंग्रह

m. Name of Comm. on it.

शारीरकन्यायसंग्रह

m. an abridgment in verse of rāmānuja-'s commentator or commentary on the brahma-sūtra- by bādhūla- śrī-nivāsācārya-.

शारीरकसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सारोद्धारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सर्पिर्ग्रीव

mf(/ī-)n. having a neck composed of clarified butter

सर्वभूतरुतग्रहणी

f. "comprising the sounds of all beings", a kind of writing (see sarva-ruta-saṃgrahiṇi-lipī-)

सर्वदर्शनसंग्रह

m. "compendium of all the darśana-s", Name of a treatise on the various systems of philosophy (not including the vedānta-) by mādhavācārya- or his brother sāyaṇa-

सर्वदेशवृत्तान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सर्वदेवताप्रतिस्थ्ठासारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सर्वग्रह

m. eating or swallowing all at once

सर्वग्रहरूपिन्

mfn. (perhaps) having the form of (or pervading) all the planets (said of kṛṣṇa-)

सर्वग्रन्थि

m. the root of long pepper

सर्वग्रन्थिक

n. the root of long pepper

सर्वग्रास

mfn. swallowing all

सर्वग्रासम्

ind. (with, gras-) so as to entirely devour

सर्वाग्रयणकालनिर्णय

m. Name of work

सर्वज्योतिषसंग्रह

m. Name of work T

सर्वपुराणार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सर्वार्थसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सर्वरुतसंग्रहिणिलिपि

(?) f. a particular mode of writing

सर्वसंग्रह

m. a general or universal collection

सर्वसंग्रह

m. Name of various works.

सर्वसंग्रह

mfn. possessed of everything

सर्वसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सर्वसारसंग्रहणी

f. a particular mode of writing

सर्वसिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सर्वस्मृतिसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सर्वश्रुतिपुराणसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सर्वातोद्यपरिग्रह

m. "comprehending every musical instrument", Name of śiva-

सर्ववैदल्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सर्वविग्रह

m. "all-shaped", śiva-

ससंग्रह

mfn. one who studies the saṃgraha- (q.v) together (id est subsidiarily)

शशिग्रह

m. "moon-seizure", an eclipse of the moon

शशिग्रहसमागम

m. a conjunction of the moon with asterisms or planets

शस्त्रग्रह

m. taking arms, battle, fight

शस्त्रग्राहक

mfn. taking arms, armed

शस्त्रग्राहवत्

mfn. having sea-monsters for weapons (said of a river)

शस्त्रग्राहिन्

mfn. taking arms

शस्त्रग्राहिन्

m. an armed man

शास्त्रसंग्रह

m. Name of work

शास्त्रसिद्धान्तलेशसंग्रह

m. Name of work

शास्त्रसिद्धान्तलेशसंग्रहसार

m. Name of work

शताग्र

mfn. hundred-pointed

शताग्र

mfn. the first among hundred (in śatāgramahiṣī -mahiṣī- f.the first wife among a hundred)

शताग्रमहिषी

f. śatāgra

शतग्रन्थि

"having a hundred knots", dūrvā- grass

शतग्रीव

m. Name of a goblin

सततपरिग्रहधर्मकाङ्क्षिणी

f. Name of a kiṃnarī-

सततपरिग्रहम्

ind. continually, incessantly

षट्चक्रादिसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सत्परिग्रह

m. acceptance (of gifts) from a proper person

सत्प्रतिग्रह

m. acceptance of gifts from virtuous men

सत्प्रतिपक्षबाधग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

सत्प्रतिपक्षग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

सत्प्रतिपक्षग्रन्थरहस्य

n. Name of work

सत्प्रतिपक्षपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थदीधितिटीका

f. Name of work

सत्प्रतिपक्षपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थप्रकाश

m. Name of work

सत्प्रतिपक्षपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थरहस्य

n. Name of work

सत्प्रतिपक्षपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थटीका

f. Name of work

सत्प्रतिपक्षसिद्धान्तग्रन्थदीधितिटीका

f. Name of work

सत्प्रतिपक्षसिद्धान्तग्रन्थटीका

f. Name of work

शत्रुविग्रह

m. "war of enemies", hostile invasion

सत्संग्रह

mfn. being understood by the good

सत्यग्रन्थिन्

mfn. binding or tying securely (with knots)

सत्यमुग्र

(saty/a--) mfn. truly powerful

सात्यमुग्र

m. plural the school of sātyamugri-

सात्यमुग्रि

mf(grī-or gryā-). patronymic fr. satyam-ugra-

सात्यमुग्र्य

m. plural Name of a school of the sāma-veda- (q.v)

शौचसंग्रहविवृति

f. Name of work

सौधाग्र

n. idem or 'mn. equals -mūrdhan- '

सौम्यग्रह

m. an auspicious or benign planet (such as Mercury, Jupiter, Venus, and the full moon)

सौवग्रामिक

mfn. (fr. sva-grāma-) belonging or relating to one's own village

सावग्रह

mfn. having an obstacle, having restraint, restrained, limited

सावग्रह

mfn. (in gram.) having the mark of separation or elision called avagraha- (q.v), being separated into its component parts or analyzed (as a word in the pada-pāṭha- q.v)

सावग्रह

mfn. withholding (its water, as a cloud)

सविग्रह

mfn. having body or form, embodied

सविग्रह

mfn. having meaning or import, meaning, importing

सावित्रग्रहहोम

m. Name of a particular oblation

सव्यभिचारग्रन्थरहस्य

n. Name of work

सव्यभिचारपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थदीधितिटीका

f. Name of work

सव्यभिचारपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थलोक

m. Name of work

सव्यभिचारपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थटीका

f. Name of work

सव्यभिचारसिद्धान्तग्रन्थदीधितिटीका

f. Name of work

सव्यभिचारसिद्धान्तग्रन्थलोक

m. Name of work

सव्यभिचारसिद्धान्तग्रन्थप्रकाश

m. Name of work

सव्यभिचारसिद्धान्तग्रन्थरहस्य

n. Name of work

सव्यभिचारसिद्धान्तग्रन्थटीका

f. Name of work

सव्यापग्राहण

mfn. that which is laid aside or to rest on the left

सायुधप्रग्रह

mfn. holding weapons in the hand

सेनाग्र

n. (nāgra-) the front or van of an army

सेनाग्रग

m. "going at the front of an army", a general

सेनाग्रगामिन्

m. "going at the front of an army", a general

सेनानिग्रामणी

m. dual number the leader of an army and the chief of a village

शेषसंग्रहनाममाला

शेषसंग्रहसारोद्धार

m. Name of supplements to hema-candra-'s abhidhāna-cintāmaṇi-.

सेतुसंग्रह

m. Name of a commentator or commentary on the mugdha-bodha-.

सिद्धग्रह

m. Name of a demon causing a particular kind of seizure or madness

सिद्धान्तचिन्तारत्नसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सिद्धान्तग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

सिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सिद्धान्तसंग्रहटीका

f. Name of work

सिद्धान्तसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सिद्धौषधसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सिद्धयोगसंग्रह

m. Name of work

शिग्रु

m. (of unknown derivation) Moringa Pterygosperma (a kind of horse-radish equals śobhāñjana-;the root and leaves and flowers are eaten)

etc.

शिग्रु

m. Name of a man gaRa bidādi-

शिग्रु

m. plural Name of a people

शिग्रु

n. the seed of the above tree

शिग्रु

n. any potherb or vegetable

शिग्रुबीज

n. the seed of the Moringa tree

शिग्रुज

n. "growing on or produced by the Moringa" equals next

शिग्रुक

m. equals śigru- m.

शिग्रुक

n. any potherb

शिग्रुमूल

n. the pungent root of the Moringa

शिखाग्रदन्त

(śikhāg-) mfn.

शिखाग्रदत्

(śikhāg-) mfn.

शिखिग्रीव

n. blue vitriol

शिल्पसर्वस्वसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सिंहग्रीव

mfn. lion-necked

शिरोग्रह

m. "head-seizure", disease or affection of the head

शिरोग्रीव

n. sg. the head and neck

सिषंग्रामयिषु

mfn. equals sisaṃgr- below

सिसंग्रामयिषु

mfn. (fr. Desiderative of saṃgrām-) wishing or intending to make war, eager or desirous to fight

सिताग्र

m. or n. a thorn (for śil-)

शिवाचारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

शिवपूजासंग्रह

m. Name of work

शिवसूत्रजालग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

स्कन्दग्रह

m. the demon skanda- (causing disease)

स्कन्दकग्राम

m. Name of a village

स्कन्धोग्रीवी

f. Name of a particular form of the bṛhatī- metre (varia lectio vā-)

श्लक्ष्णतीक्ष्णाग्र

mfn. having a thin and sharp point

श्लेषार्थपदसंग्रह

m. Name of a dictionary of ambiguous words (by śrīharṣa-kavi-).

श्लोकसंग्रह

m. Name of various works.

स्मरणानुग्रह

m. the favour of remembrance, kind remembrance

स्मार्तपदार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

स्मृतिग्रन्थराज

m. Name of work

स्मृतिसागरसंग्रह

m. Name of work

स्मृतिसंग्रह

m. Name of an ancient law-book (often quoted) and of other compilations

स्मृतिसंग्रहरत्नव्याख्यान

n. Name of work

स्मृतिसंग्रहसार

m. Name of work

स्मृतिसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

स्मृतिसिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

षोडशिग्रह

m. a libation consisting of 16 graha-s

सोहलग्राम

m. Name of a village

सोमग्रह

m. a cup or bowl of soma-

सोमग्रह

m. an eclipse of the moon

सोमग्रहण

mf(ī-)n. holding or containing soma-

सोमग्रहण

n. an eclipse of the moon

सोपग्रहम्

ind. with conciliation, in a conciliatory or friendly manner

स्फ्याग्र

mfn. having a point like the sphya- (said of a sacrificial post)

श्राद्धगुणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

श्राद्धकाण्डसंग्रह

m. Name of work

श्राद्धसंग्रह

m. Name of work

श्राद्धवचनसंग्रह

m. Name of work

श्राद्धविवेकसंग्रह

m. Name of work

श्रौतग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

श्रौतकर्मपदार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

श्रौतपरिभाषासंग्रहवृत्ति

श्रीभाष्यसंग्रह

m. Name of Comm.

श्रीग्रह

m. a trough or place for supplying birds with water (equals śakunīprapā-)

श्रीग्राम

m. "village of Fortune", Name of a place

श्रीग्रामर

m. (fr. prec.) Name of the astronomer nārāyaṇa-

श्रीपतिग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

श्रीसंग्राम

m. Name of a particular maṭha- (q.v)

श्रीवैष्णवाचारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

शृङ्गग्राहिका

f. "taking by the horns" id est in a direct manner (instrumental case"directly","without any intervening agent")

शृङ्गग्राहिका

f. (in logic) taking singly (all the particulars included under a general term) Scholiast or Commentator on

शृङ्गाग्रप्रहरणाभिमुख

mfn. ready to strike with the points of the horns

श्रुतग्रह

m. the perception of sacred knowledge,

श्रुतप्रकाशिकासंग्रह

m. Name of vedānta- work

श्रुतिपुराणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

श्रुतिसंग्रह

m. Name of two vedānta- works.

श्रुतिवाक्सारसंग्रह

m. Name of a vedānta- work

स्रुवप्रग्रहण

mfn. taking with a ladle, id est taking all to one's self, appropriating all

स्तनाग्र

n. equals naśikhā-

स्तनग्रह

m. the sucking or drawing of the breast

स्तेननिग्रह

m. the restraining or punishing of thieves

स्तेननिग्रह

m. suppression of theft

स्थलविग्रह

m. a land-fight

स्थालीग्रह

m. a ladleful taken out of a cooking-vessel

स्थूलग्रीव

mfn. thick-necked

स्त्रीग्रह

m. a female planet (see -kṣetra-),

स्त्रीग्राहिन्

mfn. (in law) accepting (the guardianship over) a women.

स्त्रीसंग्रहण

n. the act of embracing a women (criminally), adultery, seduction

(

) .

सुबालाग्राम

m. Name of a village

सुबन्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सुबर्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

शुभग्रह

m. an auspicious planet, lucky star (such as Jupiter, Venus, Mercury, and the moon when more than half full)

शुभग्रहोदय

m. the rising of an auspicious planet

सुभाषितसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सूचीमुखाग्रसम्भेद्य

mfn. very thick or dense (equals sūcibhedya-, q.v)

सूच्यग्र

n. the point of a needle

सूच्यग्र

n. as much land as is pierced by the point of a needle id est very little (equals grabhedyam bhūmi-talam-)

सूच्यग्र

m. "pointed or sharp as a needle", a thorn

सूच्यग्रस्थूलक

m. Saccharum Cylindricum

सूच्यग्रविद्ध

mfn. pierced by the point of a needle

सुधासंग्रह

m. Name of a medical work

शूद्राचारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

सुघोषग्राम

m. Name of a village

सुग्रह

mfn. having a good handle

सुग्रह

mfn. easy to be obtained

सुग्रह

mfn. easy to be learnt or understood

सुग्रहण

n. reverential clasping (of a person's feet)

सुग्राह्य

mfn. easy to be taken, easily apprehensible etc.

सुग्राम

m. Name of a village in magadha-

सुग्रन्थि

mfn. well knotted

सुग्रन्थि

mfn. having beautiful joints

सुग्रन्थि

m. a kind of perfume (equals coraka-)

सुग्रन्थि

n. the root of Piper Longum

सुग्रास

m. a dainty morsel

सुग्रथित

(s/u--) mfn. well fastened

सुग्रीष्म

m. a fine summer

सुग्रीव

mfn. handsome-necked, having a beautiful neck

सुग्रीव

m. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) Name of a monkey-king (who, with his army of monkeys headed by hanumat-, assisted rāmacandra- in conquering rāvaṇa-;he was believed to be the son of the Sun, and was re-established by rāma- in the throne of kiṣkindha- [ q.v ], usurped by his brother vālin-)

etc.

सुग्रीव

m. of one of the four horses of kṛṣṇa- or viṣṇu- (the other three being balāhaka-, megha-puṣpa-, and śaivya-)

सुग्रीव

m. of a divine being

सुग्रीव

m. of the father of the ninth arhat- of the present avasarpiṇī-

सुग्रीव

m. a kind of pavilion

सुग्रीव

m. (only

) a conch

सुग्रीव

m. Name of śiva- or indra-

सुग्रीव

m. a goose

सुग्रीव

m. a hero

सुग्रीव

m. a piece of water

सुग्रीव

m. Name of a mountain

सुग्रीव

m. a sort of weapon

सुग्रीव

m. the countenance of a friend

सुग्रीव

m. a serpent of pātāla-

सुग्रीव

f(ā-or ī-). Name of an apsaras-

सुग्रीवाग्रज

m. "elder brother of su-grīva-", Name of vālin-

सुग्रीवेश

m. "lord of su-grīva-", Name of rāma-

सुग्रीवी

f. Name of a daughter of dakṣa- and wife of kaśyapa- (regarded as the mother of horses, camels, and asses)

सुखग्राह्य

mfn. easy to be grasped

सुखग्राह्य

mfn. easy to be comprehended or understood (See compound)

सुखग्राह्यनिबन्धन

n. a composition easy to be comprehended, easily intelligible language

सूक्तिसंग्रह

m. Name of a kāvya- by kṛṣṇa-dāsa- kāyastha-.

शूलाग्र

n. the point of a pike or stake

शूलाग्र

mfn. pointed like a pike

शूलग्रह

(

Scholiast or Commentator) (

) m. "spear-bearer", Name of śiva-.

शूलग्राहिन्

(

) m. "spear-bearer", Name of śiva-.

शूलग्रन्थि

m. or f. a kind of dūrvā- grass (wrong reading for mūla-g-)

शुल्कग्राहक

mfn. receiving a toll or duty

शुल्कग्राहिन्

mfn. receiving a toll or duty

सुनिग्रह

mfn. well controlled, easily restrained

सुपद्मसमाससंग्रह

m. Name of work

सुप्तविग्रह

mfn. "having sleep for a body", appearing as sleep (said of kṛṣṇa-)

सुराग्रह

m. a cupful of surā-

सुराग्रह

m. equals -kumbha-

शूरग्राम

(ś/ūra--) mfn. having a multitude of heroes

सुरग्रामणी

m. "chief of the gods", Name of indra-

सुराग्र्य

(rāg-) n. "best liquor", nectar

सुरसाग्रज

n. (prob.) equals next

सुरसाग्रणी

m. white basil

सुरससंग्रह

m. Name of work

शूर्पग्राह

mf(ī-)n. holding a winnowing basket

सूर्यचन्द्रग्रहण

n. Name of work

सूर्यादिग्रहफलकुण्डली

f. Name of work

सूर्यदिग्रहप्रीत्यर्थदान

n. Name of work

सूर्यादिग्रहसाधन

n. Name of work

सूर्यग्रह

m. "sun-planet", the sun

सूर्यग्रह

m. "sun-seizure", an eclipse of the sun

सूर्यग्रह

m. "sun-seizer", Name of rāhu- and ketu-

सूर्यग्रह

m. the bottom of a water-jar

सूर्यग्रहण

n. "sun-seizure", a solar eclipse

सूर्यग्रहण

n. Name of work

सुसंग्रह

m. an excellent compendium

शुष्काग्र

mf(ā-)n. having a dry tip or point

शुष्कविग्रह

m. a useless contest

सूतग्रामणी

m. plural (see

) an equerry and the chief of a village

सूतसंहितासंग्रह

m. Name of work

सुतीक्ष्णाग्र

mfn. very sharp-pointed

सूत्रग्रह

mfn. holding a thread

Va1rtt. 2

सूत्रग्राह

mfn. seizing a thread (but not holding it)

सूत्रग्रन्थ

m. a book of aphorisms, sūtra- work

सूत्रसंग्रह

m. one who grasps or holds the reins

सूत्रसंग्रह

m. collection of sūtra-s (in next)

सूत्रसंग्रहदीपिका

f. Name of works.

सुवर्णग्रन्थि

m. a pocket for keeping gold

सुविग्रह

mfn. having a beautiful body or figure

सुविग्रह

m. Name of a messenger

स्वभ्यग्र

mfn. very imminent or impending or near at hand

स्वभ्यग्र

mfn. very swift

(Scholiast or Commentator)

स्वच्छन्दसंग्रह

m. Name of work

स्वच्छन्दसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

श्वाग्र

n. a dog's tail

श्वग्रह

m. "dog-seizer", Name of a demon hostile to children

स्वग्रह

m. Name of a demon attacking children,

श्वग्रहगृहीत

mfn. attacked by the dog-demon (epilepsy),

श्वग्रहप्रायश्चित्त

n. expiation for epilepsy,

स्वग्राम

m. one's own village

(see sauvagrāmika-).

स्वाग्रयण

mfn. forming a good āgrayaṇa- (graha-)

स्वरग्राम

m. the musical scale, gamut

स्वरसंग्रह

m. Name of work on suppression of the voice and breath (for attaining beatitude).

स्वर्णग्राम

m. Name of a country situated to the east of Dacca

स्वर्णग्रीव

m. "gold-necked"Name of one of skanda-'s attendants

स्वर्णग्रीवा

f. Name of a river issuing from the eastern side of the nāṭaka- mountain

स्ववग्रह

mfn. easily checked or restrained

स्वविग्रह

m. one's own body (ham-,"one's self")

स्वयंग्रह

m. the taking for one's self (without leave), forcible seizure

स्वयंग्राह

m. idem or 'n. idem or 'm. the taking for one's self (without leave), forcible seizure ' '

स्वयंग्राह

mf(ā-)n. one who takes or seizes forcibly

स्वयंग्राह

mf(ā-)n. spontaneous, voluntary (See compound)

स्वयंग्राहम्

ind. forcibly, violently

स्वयंग्रहण

n. idem or 'm. the taking for one's self (without leave), forcible seizure '

स्वयंग्राहनिषक्तबाहु

mfn. putting the arms spontaneously round (locative case), embracing ardently

स्वयंग्राहप्रणय

mfn. spontaneously or ardently affectionate

स्वयंग्राह्य

mfn. suffering force or constraint

श्वेतशिग्रु

m. a white-flowering variety of Moringa

स्वीकारग्रह

m. robbery, forcible seizure

श्यामग्रन्थि

f. a kind of dūrvā- grass

श्यामाकाग्रयण

n. the firstlings of millet

श्यामाकाग्रयणेष्टि

f. an oblation of the firstlings of millet

तादृग्रूप

mf(ā-)n. of such a shape, such like

तादृग्रूपवत्

mf(tī-)n. of such beauty

तन्तुविग्रहा

f. equals tata-pattrī-

तन्त्वग्र

n. the end of thread gaRa gahādi-.

तन्त्वग्रीय

mfn. fr. gra-

तपुरग्र

(t/ap-) mf(ā-)n. burning-pointed (a spear)

ताराग्रह

m. "star-planet", one of the 5 lesser planets exclusive of the sun and moon

तर्कग्रन्थ

m. a treatise on reasoning, manual of logic

तर्कसंग्रह

m. Name of a manual of the vaiśeṣika- branch of the nyāya- philosophy by annam-bhaṭṭa-

तर्कसंग्रहदीपिका

f. Name of a commentator or commentary on that work by its author.

तत्त्वनिकषग्रावन्

m. the touchstone of truth

तत्त्वसंग्रह

m. Name of work

तौग्र्य

m. "son of tugra-", bhujyu-

तीक्ष्णाग्र

mfn. equals ṇa-vaktra-

तीक्ष्णाग्र

mfn. (/a--)

तीक्ष्णाग्र

mfn. (su--)

तीक्ष्णाग्र

m. Zingiber Zerumbet.

तीक्ष्णशिग्रु

m. equals -gandhaka-

तिलग्राम

m. Name of a village

तीरग्रह

m. plural Name of a people

तिर्यग्ग्रीवम्

ind. so as to have the neck turned aside

तिथिनिर्णयसंग्रह

m. Name of another work on astronomy

तोमरग्रह

m. a lance-bearer

Va1rtt. 1

तोमरग्रह

m. lance-throwing

तोमरग्रह

त्रिग्राहिन्

mfn. extending to the length of 3 (padyā-s)

त्रिग्रामी

f. "3 villages", Name of a place

त्रिहलिकाग्राम

m. Name of a tīrtha-

त्रिपादविग्रह

mfn. three-footed

तृणग्राहिन्

m. "attracting grass (electrically when rubbed)", sapphire or another gem

तृणग्रन्थि

f. Name of a plant

तुग्र

m. Name of bhujyu-'s father (saved by the aśvin-s)

तुग्र

m. of an enemy of indra-, 20 and 26

तुग्र

तुग्रिय

Ved. equals rya-

तुग्र्य

m. (fr. ra-,115) patronymic of bhujyu-

तुग्र्या

f. plural (scilicet v/iśas-) tugra-'s race ["the waters"

]

तुग्र्यावृध्

mfn. favouring the tugrya- (indra-, soma-),

तुलाप्रग्रह

m. the string of a balance

तुलाप्रग्राह

m. the string of a balance

तुषग्रह

m. "husk-seizer", fire

तुविग्र

mfn. swallowing much (agni-)

तुविग्र

mfn. (according to to some ="roaring loud", from 2. grī-).

तुविग्राभ

mfn. seizing powerfully (indra-),

तुविग्रि

mfn. equals -gr/a- (indra-)

तुविग्रीव

mfn. powerful-necked

त्वग्रोग

m. equals -doṣa-.

त्युग्र

m. for t/ugra-

उदगग्र

mfn. having the points turned to the north (as grass)

उदग्र

mfn. having the top elevated or upwards, over-topping, towering or pointing upwards, projecting

उदग्र

mfn. high, tall, long

etc.

उदग्र

mfn. increased, large, vast, fierce, intense

etc.

उदग्र

mfn. haughty

उदग्र

mfn. advanced (in age)

उदग्र

mfn. excited, enraptured

etc.

उदग्र

mfn. loud

उदग्राभ

m. holding or surrounding water

उदग्रदत्

mfn. having projecting teeth, large-toothed

उदग्रदत्

m. (an-) an elephant with a large tusk.

उदग्रप्लुतत्व

n. lofty bounding

उदरग्रन्थि

m. "knot in the abdomen", disease of the spleen (a chronic affection not uncommon in India).

उदवग्रह

mfn. having the udātta- on the first part of a compound which contains an ava-graha-

उद्ग्राभ

m. taking up, raising, elevating

उद्ग्रभण

n. the act of taking up, raising

उद्ग्रह्

P. A1. -gṛhṇāti- (or Vedic or Veda -gṛbhṇāti-), -ṇīte- (imperative 2. sg. -gṛbhāya-

; parasmE-pada -gṛhṇ/at-

) to lift up, keep above

; to set up, erect, raise, elevate

: (A1.) to raise one's self

; to take out, draw out ; to tear away, take away

; to take away from, preserve, save

; to intercept, cause (the rain) to cease

; to break off, discontinue (speaking)

; to concede, grant, allow

: Causal -grāhayati-, to cause to take up or out, cause to pay

; to bespeak, describe, set forth

उद्ग्रह्

to comprehend,

उद्ग्राह

m. (

) taking up, reception

उद्ग्राह

m. "taking away", Name of a saṃdhi- rule (which causes the change of aḥ-, e-,and o-,to a-before a following vowel)

उद्ग्राह

m. replying in argument, objection

उद्ग्राह

m. (in music) the introductory part of a piece.

उद्ग्रहण

n. the act of taking out

उद्ग्रहण

n. recovering (a debt see ṛṇodgr-)

उद्ग्रहण

n. taking up, lifting up

उद्ग्रहण

n. describing.

उद्ग्रहणिका

f. replying in argument, objection commentator or commentary on

उद्ग्राहणिका

f. replying in argument, objection

उद्ग्राहपदवृत्ति

f. the udgrāha- saṃdhi- before a long vowel

उद्ग्राहवत्

n. a kind of saṃdhi- (causing the change of ā-and a-to a-before ṛ-)

उद्ग्राहिणी

f. replying in argument, objection

उद्ग्राहित

mfn. taken away, lifted up

उद्ग्राहित

mfn. deposited, delivered

उद्ग्राहित

mfn. seized

उद्ग्राहित

mfn. bound, tied

उद्ग्राहित

mfn. described, set forth

उद्ग्राहित

mfn. excellent, exalted

उद्ग्राहित

mfn. recalled, remembered, recited

उद्ग्रन्थ्

P. -grathnāti-, or -granthati-, to bind up, tie into bundles, tie up, truss

etc. ; to fasten, wind

; to unbind, loosen

: Causal -grathayati-, to unbind, loosen

उद्ग्रन्थ

m. section, chapter

उद्ग्रन्थ

m. Name of a man (

)

उद्ग्रन्थि

mfn. untied, free (from worldly ties)

उद्ग्रन्थ्य

ind.p. having tied up

उद्ग्रन्थ्य

having wound etc.

उद्ग्रासक

mfn. ( gras-), devouring

उद्ग्रथन

n. (varia lectio for ā-grathana-

) the act of winding round.

उद्ग्रथित

mfn. tied up

उद्ग्रथित

mfn. fastened, wound, interlaced

उद्ग्रथित

mfn. unbound, loosened.

उद्ग्रथ्य

mfn. ind.p. having tied up

उद्ग्रथ्य

having wound etc.

उद्ग्रीव

mfn. one who raises or lifts up the neck (in trying toSee anything)

etc.

उद्ग्रीव

mfn. having the neck turned upwards (as a vessel)

उद्ग्रीविका

f. lifting up the neck,

उद्ग्रीविन्

mfn. raising or lifting up the neck,

उग्र

mfn. (said to be fr. uc-[

] , but probably fr. a uj-,or vaj-,fr. which also ojas-, vāja-, vajra-may be derived; Comparative degree ugratara-and /ojīyas-;superl. ugratama-and /ojiṣṭha-), powerful, violent, mighty, impetuous, strong, huge, formidable, terrible

उग्र

mfn. high, noble

उग्र

mfn. cruel, fierce, ferocious, savage

उग्र

mfn. angry, passionate, wrathful

उग्र

mfn. hot, sharp, pungent, acrid

etc.

उग्र

m. Name of rudra- or śiva-

उग्र

m. of a particular rudra-

उग्र

m. Name of a mixed tribe (from a kṣatriya- father and śūdra- mother;the ugra-, according to

, is of cruel or rude[ krūra-]conduct[ ācāra-]and employment[ vihāra-],as killing or catching snakes etc.;but according to the tantra-s he is an encomiast or bard)

etc.

उग्र

m. a twice-born man who perpetrates dreadful deeds commentator or commentary on

उग्र

m. the tree Hyperanthera Moringa

उग्र

m. Name of a dānava-

उग्र

m. a son of dhṛta-rāṣṭra-

उग्र

m. the Guru of narendrāditya- (who built a temple called ugreśa-)

उग्र

m. a group of asterisms (viz. pūrva-phālgunī-, pūrvāṣāḍhā-, pūrva-bhādrapadā-, maghā-, bharaṇī-)

उग्र

m. Name of the Malabar country

उग्रा

f. Name of different plants, Artemisia Sternutatoria, Coriandrum Sativum, etc.

उग्र

n. a particular poison, the root of Aconitum Ferox

उग्र

n. wrath, anger; ([ confer, compare Zend ughra: Greek , Latin augeoetc.: Gothic auka,"I increase"; Lithuanian ug-is,"growth, increase";aug-u,"I grow", etc.])

उग्रबाहु

mfn. one whose arms are large or powerful

उग्रभैरव

m. Name of a kāpālika-.

उग्रभट

m. Name of a king

उग्रचण्डा

f. Name of a goddess,

उग्रचारिन्

mfn. moving impetuously (said of the moon)

उग्रचारिणी

f. Name of durgā-.

उग्राचार्य

m. Name of an author.

उग्रचय

m. strong desire.

उग्रदंष्ट्र

mfn. having terrific teeth.

उग्रदण्ड

mfn. "stern-sceptred or holding a terrible rod"

उग्रदण्ड

mfn. relentless, remorseless, severe

उग्रदन्त

mfn. having terrific teeth

उग्रदर्शन

mfn. of a frightful appearance, frightful, terrible

उग्रदेव

m. Name of a man

उग्रादेव

m. "having mighty deities", Name of a ṛṣi-

उग्रधन्वन्

(ugr/a-) m. having a powerful bow Name of indra-

उग्रधृतायुध

mfn. armed with terrible weapons,

उग्रदुहितृ

f. daughter of a powerful man

उग्रगाध

m. any unfathomable or dangerous depth (of a river etc.)

उग्रगन्ध

mfn. strong-smelling

उग्रगन्ध

m. the plant Michelia Champaca

उग्रगन्ध

m. garlic

उग्रगन्धा

f. orris root

उग्रगन्ध

m. a medicinal plant

उग्रगन्ध

m. Artemisia Sternutatoria

उग्रगन्ध

m. Pimpinella Involucrata

उग्रगन्ध

m. the common cara-way (Carum Carui etc.)

उग्रगन्ध

m. Ligusticum Ajowan

उग्रगन्ध

n. Asa Foetida

उग्रगन्धिका

f. a species of caraway

उग्रगन्धिन्

mfn. strong-smelling, stinking

उग्रजाति

mfn. base-born.

उग्रजित्

f. Name of an apsaras-

उग्रक

m. Name of a nāga-

उग्रकाली

f. a form of durgā-.

उग्रकाण्ड

m. a sort of gourd, Momordica Charantia

उग्रकर्मन्

mfn. fierce in action, violent

उग्रकर्णिक

mfn. having an exceedingly big ornament for the ear

(edition Gorr.) iv, 40, 29.

उग्रमय

m. Name of a demon causing diseases

उग्रनासिक

mfn. large-nosed

उग्रान्न

n., the food of an ugra-, Mn, iv, 212.

उग्रपश्य

mfn. frightful, hideous, fierce-looking

उग्रपश्य

mfn. malignant, wicked (said of dice)

उग्रपश्या

f. Name of an apsaras-

उग्रपूति

mfn. excessively fetid

उग्रपुत्र

m. son of a powerful man

उग्रपुत्र

mfn. having mighty sons

उग्रपुत्री

f. equals -duhitṛ- above

उग्ररेतस्

m. a form of rudra-

उग्ररुष्

mfn. dreadfully enraged,

उग्रशक्ति

m. "of terrible might", Name of a son of king amaraśakti-.

उग्रशासन

mfn. severe in command, strict in orders.

उग्रशेखरा

f. "crest of śiva-", Name of the gaṅgā-.

उग्रसेन

m. Name of several princes exempli gratia, 'for example' of a brother of janam-ejaya-

etc.

उग्रसेनज

m. Name of kaṃsa- (the uncle and enemy of kṛṣṇa-).

उग्रसेनानी

m. Name of kṛṣṇa-

उग्रसेनी

f. Name of the wife of akrūra-

उग्रसेवित

mfn. inhabited by violent beings

उग्रशोक

mfn. sorely grieving.

उग्रश्रवणदर्शन

mfn. terrible to hear and see.

उग्रश्रवस्

m. Name of a man

उग्रता

f. violence, passion, anger

उग्रता

f. pungency, acrimony

उग्रातप

mfn. dreadfully hot,

उग्रतपस्

m. Name of a muni-.

उग्रतारा

f. Name of a goddess,

उग्रतेजस्

mfn. endowed with great or terrible energy

उग्रतेजस्

m. Name of a nāga-

उग्रतेजस्

m. of a buddha-

उग्रतेजस्

m. of another divine being

उग्रत्व

n. violence, passion, anger

उग्रत्व

n. pungency, acrimony

उग्रवेग

mfn. of terrible velocity

उग्रवीर

mfn. having powerful men.

उग्रवीर्य

mfn. terrible in might

उग्रव्यग्र

m. Name of a dānava-

उग्रायुध

mfn. having powerful weapons

उग्रायुध

m. Name of a prince.

उग्रेश

m. the mighty or terrible lord, Name of śiva-

उग्रेश

m. Name of a sanctuary built by ugra-

उग्री

f. a being belonging to the class of demons

उपाधिन्यायसंग्रह

m. Name of work

उपाधिसिद्धान्तग्रन्थ

m. Name of works.

उपाग्र

n. the part which is next to the end or top commentator or commentary on

उपाग्र

n. a secondary member

उपग्रह्

P. -gṛhṇāti- (Aorist -agrabhīt-

) to seize from below ; to hold under, put under ; to support

etc. ; to collect a fluid (by holding a vessel under)

; to seize, take possession of, take, obtain ; to subdue, become master of

etc. ; to draw near (to one's self) ; to conciliate, propitiate ; to take as one's ally

; to comprehend

; to take up again, renew

; to accept, approve

उपाग्रह्

उपग्रह

m. (for 2.See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order) seizure, confinement

उपग्रह

m. a prisoner

उपग्रह

m. a handful (of kuśa- grass)

उपग्रह

m. adding, addition (of a sound) commentator or commentary on

उपग्रह

m. an e- used as nidhana- (q.v) at the end of a sāman-

उपग्रह

m. alteration, change

उपग्रह

m. propitiation, conciliation, coaxing

उपग्रह

m. a kind of saṃdhi- or peace (purchased by the cession of everything)

उपग्रह

m. the pada- or voice of a verb commentator or commentary on

उपग्रह

m. a kind of demon causing diseases (supposed to preside over the planets)

उपग्राह

m. a complimentary gift, present to a superior

उपग्रह

m. (fr. graha-with upa-implying inferiority) , a minor planet or any heavenly body of a secondary kind, a comet, meteor, falling star etc.

उपग्रहण

n. the act of seizing from below, holding under, supporting

उपग्रहण

n. comprehending, learning

उपग्रहण

n. the taking any one prisoner, seizure, capture

उपाग्रहण

n. commencement of reading the veda- (after the performance of initiation etc.See upā-karaṇa-)

उपाग्रहायणम्

ind. (fr. āgrahāyaṇī-with upa-

), near the day of full moon in the month a-grahāyaṇa-.

उपाग्रहायणि

ind. idem or 'ind. (fr. āgrahāyaṇī-with upa- ), near the day of full moon in the month a-grahāyaṇa-.'

उपग्राह्य

n. idem or 'm. a complimentary gift, present to a superior '

उपग्रामम्

ind. towards the village,

उपग्रन्थ्

P. (1. sg. -granthāmi-for -grathnāmi-?) to intwine or wind round commentator or commentary on

उपग्रन्थ

m. "minor work", a class of writings.

उपग्रस्

P. (imperfect tense upāgrasat-) to swallow down, devour (as rāhu- the sun) ; to eclipse

उपाग्र्य

n. a secondary member

उपांशुग्रह

m. the first graha- or ladle-full of soma- pressed out at a sacrifice

उपनिग्रह्

P. A1. -gṛhṇāti-, ṇīte-, to press down upon

; to bring or push near to

उपनिग्राहम्

ind. placing near to (locative case),

उपप्रतिग्रह्

P. to conciliate again

उपसंग्रह्

Desiderative P. -jighṛ-kṣati-, to wish or intend to embrace (the feet of)

उपसंग्रह

m. the act of clasping round, embracing, embrace (especially of the feet of a revered person)

उपसंग्रह

m. respectful salutation, polite address (performed by touching the feet of the addressed person with one's hands)

उपसंग्रह

m. clasping (a womanSee dāropa-)

उपसंग्रह

m. bringing together, collecting, joining

उपसंग्रह

m. a pillow, cushion

उपसंग्रहण

n. the act of clasping round, embracing (exempli gratia, 'for example' the feet), respectful salutation (by embracing the feet)

उपसंग्राह्य

mfn. (one whose feet are) to be embraced

उपसंग्राह्य

mfn. to be saluted reverentially, respectable, venerable

उपस्थनिग्रह

m. restraint of sexual desire

उपोद्ग्रह्

P. -gṛhṇāti-, to bring near (to the mouth) after (others have done so)

; to perceive, know [Comm.]

ऊर्ध्वाग्र

mf(ā-)n. with the point upwards,

(- romatā-, f. having the hairs of the body erect [one of this 32 signs of perfection],

ऊर्ध्वाग्ररोमता

f. having the hairs of the body erect [one of this 32 signs of perfection],

ऊर्ध्वग्रावन्

mfn. (ūrdhv/a-) one who has raised the stone for pressing the soma-

ऊर्ध्वग्रावन्

m. (ā-) Name of a ṛṣi-,

उरोग्रह

m. "chest-seizure", pleurisy,

उरोग्रीव

n. sg. breast and ueck,

उरुग्राह

m. far-spreading sickness (?)

ऊरुग्रह

m. paralysis of the thigh

ऊरुग्राह

m. (= - graha-),

ऊरुग्रहिन्

mfn. suffering from the above

उष्ट्रग्रीव

m. hemorrhoids

उत्तमसंग्रह

m. intriguing with another man's wife, addressing her privately, casting amorous looks etc.

उत्तमस्त्रीसंग्रहण

equals -saṃgraha- above.

उत्तरग्रन्थ

m. Name of a supplement of the yoni-grantha-.

वचनग्राहिन्

mfn. accepting or obeying orders, obedient, submissive, humble

वचनसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वचनसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वचोग्रह

m. "receiving words", the ear

वादग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

वादसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वधनिग्रह

m. capital punishment

वाद्यवादकसामग्री

f. the whole collection of musical instrument and those who play upon them

वाग्रोध

m. equals -bandhana-

वैद्यबोधसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वैद्यकग्रन्थपत्त्र

n. plural Name of work

वैद्यकसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वैद्यकसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वैद्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वैद्यसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वैद्यशास्त्रसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वैग्रहि

(fr. vi-graha-) gaRa sutaṃgamādi-.

वैग्रहिक

mf(ī-)n. belonging to the body, corporeal, bodily

वैग्रेय

m. patronymic fr. vigra- gaRa śubhrādi-.

वैग्रि

(fr. vigra-) gaRa sutaṃ-gamādi-.

वैशम्पायननीतिसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वैष्णवाचारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वैष्णवकर्णाभरणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वैष्णवप्रमाणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वैयग्र

n. (fr. vy-agra-) distraction or agitation of mind, perplexity

वैयग्र

n. the being totally absorbed or wholly engaged (in any occupation)

वैयग्र्य

n. perplexity

वैयग्र्य

n. devotion to, absorption in (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

वैयाकरणभूषणसंग्रह

वाजपेयग्रह

m. a ladleful taken at the vājapeya-

वाजिग्रीव

m. Name of a prince

वक्राग्र

n. Name of a plant

वक्रग्रीव

m. "having a curved neck", a camel

वक्राङ्घ्रिसंग्राम

m. (prob.) a treacherous fight

वक्षोग्रीव

m. Name of a son of viśvāmitra-

वाक्यग्रह

m. paralysis of speech

वाक्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वालाग्र

n. the point of a hair (as a measure rāga-s = 8 rāga-s = 64 paramāṇu-s)

वालाग्र

mfn. having a hair-like point

वालाग्र

n. a kind of dove-cot

(see bālāgra-)

वालाग्रपोतिका

f. a kind of pleasure-house floating on a lake

वालखिल्यग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

वलितग्रीव

mfn. idem or 'mfn. having the neck bent '

वल्लिकाग्र

n. coral

वल्मीकाग्र

n. Name of a peak of rāma-giri-

वंशाग्र

n. the point or end of a bamboo cane, the shoot of a bamboo

वनग्रहण

n. the act of occupying a forest (see -grāhin-)

वनग्रहणकोलाल

m. or n. the din of occupying a forest, hunting cries

वनग्राहिन्

m. "occupying or searching a forest", a hunter

(see -grahaṇa-).

वनग्रामक

m. a forest village, a poor small village

वणथलग्राम

m. (prob. for vana-sthala-gr-) Name of a village

वनेचराग्र्य

m. "chief of forest-dwellers", an ascetic, anchorite, sage

वणिग्ग्राम

m. an association or guild of merchants

वणिग्ग्रिह

n. a merchant's house

वाराहीनिग्रहाष्टक

n. Name of work

वाराह्यनुग्रहाष्टक

n. Name of work

वर्चोग्रह

m. obstruction of the feces, constipation

वर्चोविनिग्रह

m. equals -graha-

वारिखेडग्राम

m. Name of a village

वार्कग्राहिक

m. patronymic fr. vṛka-grāha- gaRa revaty-ādi-.

वर्णग्रथणा

f. a particular artificial method of writing verses

वर्णमालाप्रश्नग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

वर्णिकापरिग्रह

m. varṇikā

वर्षग्रणितपद्धति

f. Name of work

वार्त्तिकसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वरुणग्रह

m. "seizure by varuṇa-", paralysis

वरुणग्राह

m. seizure by varuṇa- (in /a-v-)

वसाग्रह

m. a ladleful of melted fat

वासवग्राम

m. Name of a village

वासवग्रामक

m. Name of a village

वासिष्ठनवग्रहपद्धति

f. Name of work

वस्त्रग्रन्थि

m. a piece of cloth wrapped round the waist

वस्त्रग्रन्थि

m. the knot which fastens the lower garments above the hips

वास्तुसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वाताग्र

n. the point of the wind

वातग्रह

m. "wind-seizure", a particular disease

वातग्रस्त

mfn. "wind-seized", epileptic or rheumatic

वायुग्रन्थि

m. a lump or swelling caused by disturbance of the air in the body

वायुग्रस्त

mfn. "wind-seized", affected by wind, mad

वायुग्रस्त

mfn. flatulent

वायुग्रस्त

mfn. gouty

वेदाग्रणी

f. "leader of the veda-", Name of sarasvatī-

वेदान्ताचार्यविग्रहध्यानपद्धति

f. Name of work

वेदान्तग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

वेदान्तपदार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वेदान्तार्थसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वेदान्तार्थसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वेदान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वेदान्तसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

वेदान्तश्रुतिसारसंग्रह

Name of work m.

वेदार्थसंग्रह

m. an abstract of the more important upaniṣad-s by rāmānuja-.

वेदवेदाङ्गविग्रहिन्

mfn. one whose body consists of the veda- and vedāṅga- (said of viṣṇu-)

वेदवेदान्ततत्त्वसारेशालग्राममाहात्म्य

n. Name of work

वेदोपग्रहण

n. an addition or supplement to the veda-

(Bombay edition pabṛṃhaṇa-).

वेगोदग्र

mfn. having rapid or intense effect (as venom)

वेल्लिताग्र

mfn. curly at the end or point (as hair)

वेल्लिताग्र

m. hair

वेङ्कटाद्रिनाथीयग्रहतन्त्र

n. Name of work

वेणुग्रध

(?) m. a species of plant

वेत्राग्र

n. the point of a reed

वेत्रग्रहण

n. "grasping the staff", the office of a door-keeper

विभूतिग्रहण

n. taking up ashes (at the vaiśvadeva- ceremony)

विचारार्कसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विड्ग्रह

m. stoppage or obstruction of the feces, constipation

विधानसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विद्वद्भूषणपद्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विद्याग्रहण

n. acquisition of science

विद्यारण्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विग्र

mfn. (perhaps) strong, vigorous (according to

equals medhāvin-)

विग्र

mfn. noseless (prob. for vi-ghra- see jighra-)

विग्र

mfn. (perhaps) strong, vigorous (according to

equals medhāvin-)

विग्र

mfn. noseless (prob. for vi-ghra- see jighra-)

विग्रह्

P. A1. -gṛhṇāti-, ṇīte- (Ved. also -gṛbhṇāti-, ṇīte-), to stretch out or apart, spread out

; to distribute, divide (especially to draw out fluids at several times)

; to hold apart, separate, isolate

; (in gram.) to analyse (see vi-graha-) ; to wage war, fight against (accusative)

; to quarrel, contend with (instrumental case with or without saha-,or sārdham-)

etc. ; to seize, lay hold of (accusative or locative case)

; to receive in a friendly manner, welcome

; to perceive, observe

: Causal -grāhayati-, to cause to fight, cause to wage war against, das-.

: Desiderative -jighṛkṣati-, to wish to fight against

विग्रह

mfn. (for 2.See vi-grah-) freed from"the Seizer" id est rāhu- (said of the moon)

विग्रह

m. (for 1.See p.950. column 2) keeping apart or asunder, isolation

विग्रह

m. division,

विग्रह

m. distribution (especially of fluids see vi-grah-)

विग्रह

m. (in gram.) independence (of a word, as opp. to composition)

विग्रह

m. separation, resolution, analysis, resolution of a compound word into its constituent parts, the separation or analysis of any word capable of separation (such words are kṛdanta-s, taddhita-s, all samāsa-s or compound words, ekaśeṣa-s, and all derivative verbs like desideratives etc.;the only words incapable of resolution being the simple verb, the singular of the noun, and a few indeclinables not derived from roots;all compounds being called nitya-or"fixed", when their meaning cannot be ascertained through an analysis of their component parts; see jamad-agni-)

etc.

विग्रह

m. discord, quarrel, contest, strife, war with (instrumental case with or without saha-, sārdham-or sākam- locative case genitive case with upari-,or compound)

etc.

विग्रह

m. (one of the 6 guṇa-s or measures of policy

[ see under guṇa-],also applied to the conflict of hostile planets, in this sense also n.

; accusative with kṛ-,to make or wage war)

विग्रह

m. separate id est individual form or shape, form, figure, the body

etc. (also applied to the shape of a rainbow; accusative with grah-, pari-grah-, kṛ-, upā-dā-,to assume a form)

विग्रह

m. an ornament, decoration

विग्रह

m. (in sāṃkhya-) an element

विग्रह

m. Name of śiva-

विग्रह

m. of one of skanda-'s attendants

विग्राह

m. a particular kind of recitation

विग्रहध्यान

n. Name of a stotra-

विग्रहग्रहण

n. the assumption of a form

विग्राहम्

ind. in portions, successively

विग्रहण

n. diffusion, distribution

विग्रहण

n. taking hold of, seizure

विग्रहपालदेव

m. Name of a king

विग्रहपर

mfn. intent on war, engaged in fighting

विग्रहपरिग्रह

m. equals -grahaṇa-

विग्रहराज

m. Name of various kings

विग्रहराज

m. of a poet

विग्रहावर

n. "hinder part of the body", the back

विग्रहवत्

mfn. having form or figure, embodied, incarnate

etc.

विग्रहवत्

mfn. having a handsome form or shape, fine, beautiful

विग्रहव्यावर्तनी

f. Name of work

विग्रहय

Nom. P. yati-, to contend or fight with (sārdham-)

विग्रहेच्छु

mfn. eager for combat

विग्रहिन्

mfn. waging war

विग्रहिन्

mfn. a minister of war

विग्राहित

mfn. "taken hold of", prejudiced

विग्राह्य

mfn. to be warred upon or contended with

विग्रथ्

(or granth-) P. -grathnāti-, to connect, tie or bind together, wind round

विग्रथित

mfn. (v/i--) tied together

विग्रथित

mfn. bound up (as a wound)

विग्रथित

mfn. having knots or tubercles

विग्रथित

mfn. hindered, impeded

विग्रीव

(v/i--) mfn. having the neck twisted or cut off

विजयक्षेत्रभट्टाग्रहार

m. plural

विजिग्राहयिषु

mfn. (fr. Desiderative of Causal) to cause to fight or wage war

विजिग्राहयिषु

vi-jighṛkṣu- See under vi-grah-, .

विज्ञानभैरवोद्द्योतसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विकटग्राम

m. Name of a village

विमलाग्रनेत्र

m. Name of a future buddha-

विमुक्तप्रग्रह

mfn. with slackened reins

विनयग्राहिन्

mfn. conforming to rules of discipline, compliant, tractable

विनयग्राहिन्

m. an elephant which obeys orders

विनायकशान्तिसंग्रह

m. Name of work or chapter from work

विनिग्रह्

(only ind.p. -gṛhya-), to lay hold of, seize, keep back, restrain, impede

विनिग्रह

m. separation, division

विनिग्रह

m. restraining, checking, stopping, subduing, controlling

etc.

विनिग्रह

m. restriction, limitation

विनिग्रह

m. disjunction, mutual opposition, an antithesis which implies that when two propositions are antithetically stated peculiar stress is laid on one of them

विनिग्रहार्थ

m. the sense of the above antithesis

विनिग्रहार्थीय

mfn. standing in the sense of the above antithesis

विनिग्राह्य

mfn. to be stopped or restrained

विनियोगसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विपद्ग्रस्त

mfn. seized by misfortune, unfortunate

विपरीतग्रहप्रकरण

n. Name of. work

विपुलग्रीव

mfn. long-necked

वीरमहेश्वराचारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विरोधिग्रन्थ

m. Name of work

विरुद्धग्रन्थपूर्वपक्षरहस्य

n. Name of work

विरुद्धग्रन्थरहस्य

n. Name of work

विरुद्धपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थालोक

m. Name of work

विरुद्धपूर्वपक्षग्रन्थटीका

f. Name of work

विरुद्धसिद्धान्तग्रन्थालोक

m. Name of work

विरुद्धसिद्धान्तग्रन्थरहस्य

n. Name of work

विरुद्धसिद्धान्तग्रन्थटीका

f. Name of work

विषाग्रज

m. "elder brother of poison", a sword

विषग्रन्थि

Name of a plant (?)

विशालग्राम

m. Name of a village

विसामग्री

f. the absence of means

विसामग्री

f. (in philosophy) the absence of causes calculated to produce an effect

विसर्पखिन्नविग्रह

mfn. one whose body is moist with the exudation caused by the visarpa- disease

विषयग्राम

m. the multitude or aggregate of objects of sense

विषयवाक्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विष्णुग्रन्थि

m. a particular joint of the body

विष्णुनाममाहात्म्यसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विष्णुविग्रहशंसनस्तोत्र

n. Name of work

विश्रान्तविग्रहकथ

mfn. one in whom,"war"or"a body" (see vi-graha-) is out of the question id est "unwarlike"and"bodiless"(applied to king udayana- and to the god of love)

विषूचीनाग्र

mfn. with tops or points diverging in all directions

विश्वग्रन्थि

m. a kind of plant (equals haṃsa-padī-)

विश्वकर्मपुराणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विश्वपादसिरोग्रीव

mfn. one whose feet and head and neck are formed of the universe

विवाहग्रिह

n. "marriage-house", the house in which a wedding is celebrated

विवरणप्रमेयसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विवरणसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विवरणसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विवेकसंग्रह

m. Name of work

विविधविधिप्रयोगसंग्रह

m. Name of work

व्रणग्रन्थि

m. a scar, cicatrix

व्रतग्रहण

n. the taking upon one's self of a religious vow, becoming a monk

व्रतसंग्रह

m. the undertaking of any religious obligation

व्रतसंग्रह

m. Name of work

व्रतोपवाससंग्रह

m. Name of work

व्रीह्याग्रयण

n. an offering of firstfruits of rice

वृकग्राह

m. Name of a man gaRa revaty-ādi-.

वृक्षाग्र

n. the top of a tree

वृत्तिसंग्रह

m. Name of a concise commentator or commentary on pāṇini-'s sūtra-s (by rāma-candra-, a pupil of nāgoji-).

व्याचिख्यासितग्रन्थ

m. one who is about to explain a book,

व्याधिग्रस्त

mf(ā-)n. seized or afflicted with disease

व्याधिनिग्रह

m. suppression of disease

व्याघ्रग्रीव

m. plural Name of a people

व्यग्र

See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order

व्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. not attending to any one particular point (opp. to ekāgra-), distracted, inattentive

व्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. bewildered, agitated, excited, alarmed

etc.

व्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. diverted from everything else, intent on, engrossed by, eagerly occupied with or employed in (instrumental case locative case,or compound;sometimes said of hands and fingers)

etc.

व्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. tottering, unsteady, exposed to dangers (See a-vy-)

व्यग्र

mf(ā-)n. being in motion (as a wheel)

व्यग्र

m. Name of viṣṇu-

व्यग्रहस्त

mfn. having the hands occupied with (compound)

व्यग्रम्

ind. in an agitated manner, with great excitement

व्यग्रमनस्

mfn. perplexed or bewildered in mind

व्यग्रपुरंध्रिवर्ग

mfn. having companies of matrons zealously occupied

व्यग्रता

f. intense occupation, eagerness, intentness (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

etc.

व्यग्रता

f. perplexity, confusion

व्यग्रत्व

n. distraction

व्यग्रत्व

n. confusion, agitation

व्यग्रत्व

n. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') intentness on,

व्यग्रय

Nom. P. yati-, to divert or distract any one's thoughts

व्याकरणसंग्रह

m. Name of gram. work

व्याकरणवादग्रन्थ

m. Name of gram. work

व्यालग्राह

m. a snake-catcher

व्यालग्राहिन्

m. idem or 'm. a snake-catcher '

(in Prakrit) etc.

व्यालग्राहिणी

f. a female snake-catcher

व्यालग्रीव

m. plural Name of a people

व्याप्तिग्रह

m. apprehension of a general proposition or of universal concomitance, induction

व्याप्तिग्रह

m. Name of work (also vyāptigrahopāya hopāya- m. vyāptigrahopāyaṭippaṇī hopāya-ṭippaṇī- f. vyāptigrahopāyapūrvapakṣaprakāśa hopāya-pūrva-pakṣa-prakāśa- m. vyāptigrahopāyarahasya hopāya-rahasya- n.)

व्याप्तिग्रहोपाय

m. vyāptigraha

व्याप्तिग्रहोपायपूर्वपक्षप्रकाश

m. vyāptigraha

व्याप्तिग्रहोपायरहस्य

n. vyāptigraha

व्याप्तिग्रहोपायटिप्पणी

f. vyāptigraha

व्यवगृहीतवग्राहम्

ind. having taken separately, singly

व्यवस्थासारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

व्युद्ग्रन्थन

n. ( grath-) binding up with several strings

याजनप्रतिग्रह

m. dual number the performance of sacrifices for others and the acceptance of gifts (as the two privileges of Brahmans)

यज्ञसिद्धान्तसंग्रह

m. Name of work

यज्ञसिद्धान्तविग्रह

m. Name of work

यक्षग्रह

m. "the being possessed by yakṣa-s", a particular kind of insanity

यक्षग्रहपरिपीडित

mfn. afflicted with it

यक्ष्मग्रह

m. an attack of consumption, consumption

यक्ष्मग्रस्त

mfn. attacked by consumption

यन्त्रसंग्रह

m. Name of work

यष्टिग्रह

mfn. carrying a stick or staff

Va1rtt. 1.

यष्टिग्राहम्

ind. seizing sticks

यष्टिग्राम

m. Name of a district

(varia lectio -gṛhaka-).

यथाग्रहणम्

ind. according to any statement, according to what was mentioned

यथावद्ग्रहण

n. right comprehension

यतिधर्मसंग्रह

m. Name of work

यत्याचारसंग्रहीययतिसंस्कारप्रयोग

m. Name of work

यावद्ग्रहणम्

ind. until taking

यावद्ग्रहनं

ind. (also) until understanding,

यावद्ग्रहनं

as long as possible,

यवाग्रज

m. equals yava-kṣāra-

यवाग्रज

m. Ptychotis Ajowan

यवाग्रयण

n. the first-fruits of barley

यवग्रीव

mfn. having a neck like a barley-corn

योगदानप्रतिग्रह

n. a fraudulent gift or acceptance

योगग्रन्थ

m. Name of two works.

योगसंग्रह

m. Name of several works.

योगसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

योगवासिष्ठसारसंग्रह

m. Name of work

योगवृत्तिसंग्रह

m. Name of work

योग्यताग्रन्थरहस्य

n. Name of work

योनिग्रन्थ

m. equals -gāna-

योषिद्ग्राह

m. one who takes the wife of a deceased man

युक्तग्रावन्

(yukt/a--) mfn. having set the stones (for bruising the soma-) in motion

यूपाग्र

n. the top of a sacrificial post

युष्टग्राम

m. Name of a village

यूथाग्रणी

m. the leader of a herd or band

Apte Search

199 results


grah	ग्रह् 9 U. (In Vedic literature ग्रभ्; गृह्णति, जग्राह, अग्र- हीत्, ग्रहीतुम्, गृहीत caus. ग्राहयति; desid. जिवृक्षति) 1 To seize, take, take or catch hold of, lay hold of, catch, grasp; तयोर्जग्रहतुः पादान् राजा राज्ञी च मागधी R.1.57; आलाने गृह्यते हस्ती वाजी वल्गासु गृह्यते Mk.1.5; तं कण्ठे जग्राह K.363. पाणिं गृहीत्वा, चरणं गृहीत्वा &c. -2 To receive, take, accept, exact; प्रजानामेव भूत्यर्थं स ताभ्यो बलिमग्रहीत् R.1.18; Ms.7.124; 9.162. -3 To apprehend, capture, take prisoner. बन्दिग्राहं गृहीत्वा V.1; यांस्तत्र चोरान् गृह्णीयात् Ms.8.34. -4 To arrest, stop, catch; अभ्यासेन तु कौन्तेय वैराग्येण च गृह्यते Bg.6.35. -5 To captivate, attract; महाराजगृहीत- हृदयया मया V.4; हृदये गृह्यते नारी Mk.1.5; माधुर्यमीष्टे हरिणान् ग्रहीतुम् R.18.13. -6 To win over, persuade, induce to one's side; लुब्धमर्थेन गृह्णीयात् Chāṇ.33; Pt.1.69,184. -7 (Hence) To please, gratify, satisfy, propitiate; ग्रहीतुमार्यान् परिचर्यया मुहुर्महानुभावा हि नितान्तमर्थिनः Śi.1.17,33. -8 To affect; seize or possess (as a demon, spirit &c.); as in पिशाचगृहीत, वेतालगृहीत. -9 To assume, take; द्युतिमग्रहीद् ग्रहगणः Śi.9.23; Bk.19.29. -1 To learn, know, recognize, understand; युवतीजनैर्जग्रहे मुनि- प्रभावः Ki.1.8; Pt.1.43. -11 To regard, consider, believe, take for; मयापि मृत्पिण्डबुद्धिना तथैव गृहीतम् Ś.6; परिहासविजल्पितं सखे परमार्थेन न गृह्यतां वचः Ś.2.19; एवं जनो गृह्णाति M.1; Mu.3. -12 To catch or perceive (as by an organ of sense); ज्यानिनादमथ गृह्णती तयोः R.11.15. -13 To master, grasp, comprehend; न्यस्ताक्षरामक्षरभूमि- कायां कार्त्स्न्येन गृह्णाति लिपिं न यावत् R.18.46. -14 To guess, conjecture, infer; नेत्रवक्त्रविकारैश्च गृह्यते$न्तर्गतं मनः Ms.8.26. -15 To utter, mention (as a name); यदि मयान्यस्य नामापि न गृहितम् K.35; न तु नामापि गृह्णीयात् पत्यौ प्रेते परस्य तु Ms.5.157. -16 To buy, purchase; कियता मूल्येनैतत्पुस्तकं गृहीतम् Pt.2; Y.2.169; Ms.8.21. -17 To deprive (one) of, take away from, rob or seize away; यथा रणे प्राणान् बहूनामग्रहीद् द्विषाम् Bk.9.9;15.63. -18 To wear, put on (as clothes &c.); वासांसि जीर्णानि यथा विहाय नवानि गृह्णाति नरो$पराणि Bg.2.22. -19 To conceive. -2 To observe (as a fast). -21 To eclipse. -22 To undertake, undergo, begin. -23 To take up, draw (water.); अपस्फुरं गृभायत सोममिन्द्राय पातवे Rv.8.69.1. -24 To stop, intercept. -25 To withdraw, draw back; यथोर्ण- नाभिः सृजते गृह्णते Muṇḍa.1.7. -26 To include. -27 To receive hospitably (as a guest). [The senses of this root may be variously modified according to the noun with which it is joined]. -Caus. 1 To cause to take, catch, seize or accept. -2 To give away in marriage; अयाचितारं न हि देवदेवमद्रिः सुतां ग्राहयितुं शशाक Ku.1.52. -3 To teach, make one acquainted with. -4 To make one take, deliver over to. -5 To become familiar with; -With अनुसम् to salute humbly. -अप to take away, tear off. -अभि to seize forcibly. -II. 1 P., 1 U. (ग्रहति, ग्राहयति-ते) To take, receive, &c.

grāha	ग्राह a. (-ही f.) [ग्रह् भावे घञ्] Seizing, clutching; taking, holding, receiving &c. -हः 1 Seizing, grasping; हस्तग्राहं तु तं मत्वा Rām.7.34.2. -2 A crocodile, shark; रागग्राहवती Bh.3.45. -3 A prisoner. -4 Accepting. -5 Understanding, knowledge. -6 Persistence, importunity; तव मातुरसद्ग्राहं विद्म पूर्वं यथा श्रुतम् Rām.2.35.18. -7 Determination, resolve; मूढग्राहेणात्मनो यत्पीडया क्रियते तपः Bg. 17.19. -8 A disease. -9 Any large fish or marine animal; जग्राहाजगरो ग्राहो भुजयोरुभयोर्बलात् Mb.3.178.28; Ki.13.24. -1 Morbid affection, disease. -11 Beginning, undertaking. -12 The handle (of a sword &c.). -13 Paralysis. -ही A female crocodile.

grahaḥ	ग्रहः [ग्रह्-अच्] 1 Seizing, grasping, laying hold of, seizure, रुरुधुः कचग्रहैः R.19.31. -2 A grip, grasp, hold; विक्रम्य कौशिकं खड्गं मोक्षयित्वा ग्रहं रिपोः Mb.3.157.11; कर्कटक- ग्रहात् Pt.1.26. -3 Taking, receiving, accepting; receipt. -4 Stealing, robbing; अङ्गुलीग्रन्थिभेदस्य छेदयेत्प्रथमे ग्रहे Ms.9.277; so गोग्रहः. -5 Booty, spoil. -6 Eclipse; see ग्रहण. -7 A planet, (sometimes more particularly 'Rāhu'; वध्यमाने ग्रहेणाथ आदित्ये मन्युराविशत् Mb.1.24.7.) (the planets are nine :-- सूर्यश्चन्द्रो मङ्गलश्च बुधश्चापि बृहस्पतिः । शुक्रः शनैश्चरो राहुः केतुश्चेति ग्रहा नव ॥); नक्षत्रताराग्रहसंकुलापि (रात्रिः) R.6.22;3.13;12.28; गुरुणा स्तनभारेण मुखचन्द्रेण भास्वता । शनैश्चराभ्यां पादाभ्यां रेजे ग्रहमयीव सा ॥ Bh.1.17. -8 Mentioning; utterance, repeating (as of a name) नामजातिग्रहं त्वेषामभिद्रोहेण कुर्वतः Ms.8.271; Amaru.85. -9 A shark, crocodile. -1 An imp in general. -11 A particular class of evil demons supposed to seize upon children and produce convulsions &c. cf. Mb. Crit. ed. 3.219.26; कृष्णग्रहगृहीतात्मा न वेद जगदीदृशम् Bhāg.7.4.38. -12 Apprehension, perception; ज्योतिश्चक्षुर्गुणग्रहः. ...... श्रोत्रं गुणग्रहः Bhāg.2.1.21-22. -13 An organ or instrument of apprehension; Bṛi. Up.3.2.1. -14 Tenacity, perseverance, persistence; नृणां स्वत्वग्रहो यतः Bhāg.7.14.11. -15 Purpose, design. -16 Favour, patronage. -17 The place of a planet in the fixed zodiac. -18 The number 'nine'. -19 Any state of mind which proceeds from magical influences. -2 A house. -21 A spoonful, ladleful; ग्रहान्त्सोमस्य मिमते द्वादश Rv.1.114.5. -22 A ladle or vessel; चमसानां ग्रहाणां च शुद्धिः प्रक्षालनेन तु Ms.5.116. -23 The middle of a bow. -24 A movable point in the heavens. -25 Keeping back, obstructing. -26 Taking away, depriving; प्राण˚ Pt.1.295. -27 Preparation for war; ग्रहो$वग्रहनिर्बन्धग्रहणेषु रणोद्यमे । सूर्यादौ पूतनादौ च सैंहिकेये$पि तत् त्रिषु । Nm. -28 A guest (अतिथि); यथा सिद्धस्य चान्नस्य ग्रहायाग्रं प्रदीयते Mb.13.1.6. -29 Imprisoning, imprisonment; Mb.13.136.11. -Comp. -अग्रेसरः the moon; Dk.8.1. -अधीन a. subject to planetary influence. -अवमर्दनः an epithet of Rāhu. (-नम्) friction of the planets. -अधीशः the sun. -आधारः, -आश्रयः polar star (as the fixed centre of the planets). -आमयः 1 epilepsy. -2 demoniacal possession. -आलुञ्चनम् pouncing on one's prey, tearing it to pieces; श्येनो ग्रहालुञ्चने Mk.3.2. -आवर्तः horoscope. -ईशः the sun. -एकत्वन्यायः the rule according to which the gender and number of उद्देशपद is not necessarily combined along with the action laid down in the विधेयपद. This is discussed by जैमिनि and शबर at MS. III.1.13-15 (opp. of अरुणान्याय or पश्वेकत्वन्याय). -कल्लोलः an epithet of Rāhu. -कुण्डलिका the mutual relation of planets and prophecy derived from it. -गणितम् the astronomical part of a ज्योतिःशास्त्र. -गतिः the motion of the planets. -ग्रामणी the sun. -चिन्तकः an astrologer. -दशा the aspect of a planet, the time during which it continues to exercise its influence. -देवता the deity that presides over a planet. -नायकः 1 the sun. -2 an epithet of Saturn. -निग्रहौ (du.) reward and punishment. -नेमिः 1 the moon. -2 the section of the moon's course between the asterisms मूल and मृगशीर्ष. -पतिः 1 the sun. -2 the moon; तस्य विस्तीर्यते राज्यं ज्योत्स्ना ग्रहपतेरिव Mb.12.118.15. -पीडनम्, -पीडा 1 oppression caused by a planet. -2 an eclipse; शशिदिवाकरयोर्ग्रहपीडनम् Bh.2.91; H.1.51; Pt.2.19. -पुषः the sun. -भक्तिः f. division of countries &c. with respect to the presiding planets. -भोजनः 1 oblation offered to the planets. -2 a horse. -मण्डलम्, -ली the circle of the planets. -यज्ञः, -यागः worship or sacrifice offered to the planets. -युतिः, -योगः conjunction of planets. -युद्ध opposition of planets. -राजः 1 the sun. -2 the moon. -3 Jupiter. -लाघवम् N. of an astronomical work of the 16th century. -वर्षः the planetary year. -विप्रः an astrologer. -शान्तिः f. propitiation of planets by sacrifices &c. -शृङ्गाटकम् triangular position of the planets with reference to one another. -सङ्गमः conjunction of planets. -स्वरः the Ist note of a musical piece.

grāhaka	ग्राहक a. (हिका f.) [ग्रह् ण्वुल्] 1 One who receives, takes &c. -2 Captivating, persuading; हेतुमद्- ग्राहकम् (वाक्यम्) Mb.12.113.7. -कः 1 A hawk, falcon. -2 A curer of poison. -3 A purchaser. -4 A policeofficer.

grahakaḥ	ग्रहकः A prisoner.

grāhakatvam	ग्राहकत्वम् Sensibility, power of feeling; Māl.1.41.

grāham	ग्राहम् ind. (At the end of comp.) Taking, seizing; बन्दिग्राहं गृहीता V.1.

grahaṇaka	ग्रहणक a. Containing, involving.

grahaṇam	ग्रहणम् [ग्रह् भावे ल्युट्] 1 Seizing, catching, seizure; श्वा मृगग्रहणे$शुचिः Ms.5.13. -2 Receiving, accepting, taking; आचारधूमग्रहणात् R.7.27. -3 Mentioning, uttering; नामग्रहणम्. -4 Wearing putting on; सोत्तरच्छदमध्यास्त नेपथ्यग्रहणाय सः R.17.21. -5 An eclipse; ग्रहणं चन्द्रसूर्ययोः Y.1.218. -6 Understanding, comprehension, knowledge; यस्य नु ग्रहणं किंचित्कर्मणो$न्यन्न दृश्यते Rām.2.22.21; न परेषां ग्रहणस्य गोचराम् N.2.95 -7 Learning, acquiring, grasping mentally, mastering; विपेर्यथावद्ग्रहणेन वाङ्- मयं नदीमुखेनेव समुद्रमाविशत् R.3.28. -8 Taking up of sound, echo; अद्रिग्रहणगुरुभिर्गर्जितैर्नर्तयेथाः Me.46. -9 The hand. -1 An organ of sense. -11 A prisoner, captive. -12 Taking by the hand, marrying; तद्दारग्रहणे यत्नं सन्तत्यां च मनः कुरु Mb.1.13.26. -13 Taking captive, imprisonment; न दोषो ग्रहणे तस्याः Ks.91.37. -14 Gaining, obtaining, purchasing. -15 Choosing. -16 Taking or drawing up. -17 Attraction. -18 Containing, enclosing. -19 Undertaking, undergoing. -2 Service; अजस्य जन्मोत्पथनाशनाय कर्माण्यकर्तुर्ग्रहणाय पुंसाम् Bhāg.3.1.44. -21 Mentioning with praise, respecting; प्रमाणं सर्वभूतेषु गत्वा च ग्रहणं महत् Mb.12.15.1. -22 Acceptation, meaning. -23 Assent, agreement. -24 Inviting, calling, addressing; name; अलसग्रहणं प्राप्तो दुर्मेधावी तथोच्यते Mb.12.266.6. -Comp. -अन्तः close of study.

grahaṇiḥ	ग्रहणिः णी f. 1 An imaginary organ supposed to lie between the stomach and the intestines. -2 The small intestine or that part of the alimentary canal where the bile assists digestion and from which vital warmth is diffused. -3 Diarrhœa, dysentery. -Comp. -कपाटः a kind of mixture (for curing diarrhœa &c.). -हरम् cloves.

grahaṇīya	ग्रहणीय a. Acceptable.

grāhiḥ	ग्राहिः 1 A female evil spirit; ग्राहिर्जग्राह यदि वैतदेनम् Rv. 1.161.1. -2 A swoon.

grahila	ग्रहिल a. 1 Taking, accepting. -2 Unyielding, relentless, obstinate; न निशाखिलयापि वापिका प्रससाद ग्रहिलेव मानिनी N.2.77.

grāhin	ग्राहिन् a. [ग्रह् णिनि] 1 Seizing, taking, holding. -2 Picking, gathering. -3 Containing. -4 Drawing, attracting, alluring. -5 Obtaining, gaining. -6 Searching through, scrutinizing. -7 Choosing, selecting. -8 Perceiving, observing. -9 Accepting. -1 Astringent. -11 Obstructing. -12 Purchasing; मूल्येन रत्नग्रही च Ks. 57.2. -m. The wood-apple tree. -णी Adverse fate (प्रतिकूला).

grāhita	ग्राहित a. Made to take or seize; made to accept or take (a seat &c.); तेनर्षिणा समाश्वास्य तत्रैव ग्राहिता स्थितिम् Ks.51.71.

grahītavya	ग्रहीतव्य a. 1 To be taken, seized or received, acceptable. -2 To be taken up or drawn (as a fluid). -3 To be apprehended or perceived, to be learnt or acquired.

grahītṛ	ग्रहीतृ a. (-त्री f.) [ग्रह्-तृच् इटो दीर्घः] 1 A taker, an accepter; as in गुणग्रहीतृ q. v. -2 Perceiver, observant; Ms.1.15. -3 Debtor; ग्रहीता यदि वै नष्टः कुटुम्बार्थे कृतो व्ययः Ms.8.166. -4 Purchaser. -5 One who seizes; Śvet. Up.3.19.

grāhuka	ग्राहुक a. Seizing, laying hold of; उदावर्तः प्रजा ग्राहुकः स्यात् Ts.6.4.1.1.

grāhya	ग्राह्य a. [ग्रह् ण्यत्] 1 To be taken or seized &c., see ग्रह्. -2 To be understood; इन्द्रियग्राह्यः Ms.1.7. -3 Acceptable; सा सेवा या प्रभुहिता ग्राह्या वाक्यविशेषतः Pt.1.46. -3 To be received in a hospitable manner. -5 To be admitted in evidence; स्वभावेनैव यद्ब्रूयुस्तद् ग्राह्यं व्यावहारिकम् Ms.8.78. -ह्यम् 1 A present. -2 The object of sensual perception. -ह्यः An eclipsed globe (sun or moon).

graiṣmaka	ग्रैष्मक a. (-ष्मिका f.) 1 Sown in summer. -2 To be paid in summer (as a debt).

graiva	ग्रैव (-वी f.). ग्रैवेय (-यी f.) a. [ग्रीवायां भवः; अण् ढञ् वा] Being on or belonging to the neck; ग्रैवेयाणा- मारवो बृंहितानि Śi.18.1. -वम्, -यम् 1 A collar or necklace; Mb.6.96.7. -2 A chain worn round the neck of an elephant; नास्रसत् करिणां ग्रैवं त्रिपदीच्छेदिनामपि R.4.48,75; तूर्णवर्माण्यथो कक्षान् ग्रैवेयाण्यथ कम्बलान् Mb.

graiveyakam	ग्रैवेयकम् [ग्रीवायां बद्धो$लंकारः, ढकञ्] 1 A neck-ornament; e. g. अस्माकं सखि वाससी न रुचिरे ग्रैवेयकं नोज्ज्वलम् Ś. D.3; सा हि चन्दनवर्णाभा ग्रीवा ग्रैवेयकोचिता Rām.3.6.32. -2 A chain worn round the neck of an elephant. -m. (pl.) a class of deities (9 in number) sitting on the neck of Loka-puruṣa. (Jaina.) ग्रैष्म graiṣma ग्रैष्मिक graiṣmika ग्रैष्म ग्रैष्मिक a. Relating to summer; ग्रैष्मौ मासौ गोप्तारावकुर्वन् Av.15.4.2.

grāmaḥ	ग्रामः [ग्रस्-मन् आदन्तादेशः] 1 A village, hamlet; पत्तने विद्यमाने$पि ग्रामे रत्नपरीक्षा M.1; त्यजेदेकं कुलस्यार्थे ग्रामस्यार्थे कुलं त्यजेत् । ग्रामं जनपदस्यार्थे स्वात्मार्थे पृथिवीं त्यजेत् ॥ H.1.129; R.1.44; Me.3. -2 A race, community; कथा ग्रामं न पृच्छसि Rv.1.146.1. -3 A multitude, collection (of anything); e. g. गुणग्राम, इन्द्रियग्राम; Bg.8.19;9.8. शस्त्रास्त्र- ग्रामकोविदः Bm.1.611,613. -4 A gamut, scale in music; स्फुटीभवद्ग्रामविशेषमूर्च्छनाम् Śi.1.1. -Comp. -अक्षपटलिकः a village archioist; Hch.7.23. -अधिकृतः, -अधिपः, -अधिपतिः, -अध्यक्षः, -ईशः, -ईश्वरः superintendent, head, chief of a village; ग्रामाधिपस्य तरुणीमहं भार्यां सदा भजे Ks.64.115; Ms.7.115. -अन्तः the border of a village, space near a village; Ms.4.116;11.78. -अन्तरम् another village. -अन्तिकम् the neighbourhood of a village. -अन्तीय a. situated in the neighbourhood of a village; Ms.8.24. -यम् space near a village. -आचारः a village custom. -आधानम् hunting. -उपाध्यायः the village priest. -कण्टकः 1 'the village-pest', one who is a source of trouble to the village. -2 a tale-bearer. -काम a. 1 one wishing to take possession of a village. -2 fond of living in villages. -कायस्थ a village scribe. -कुक्कुटः a domestic cock; Ms.5.12,19. -कुमारः 1 one beautiful in a village. -2 a village-boy. -कूटः 1 the noblest man in a village. -2 a Śūdra. -गृह्य a. being outside a village. -गृह्यकः a village-carpenter. -गोदुहः the herdsman of a village. -घातः plundering a village; Ms.9.274. -घोषिन् a. sounding among men or armies (as a drum); प्रवेदकृद् बहुधा ग्रामघोषी Av. 5.2.9. -m. an epithet of Indra. -चर्या sexual intercourse; (स्त्रीसंभोग). -चैत्यः a sacred fig-tree of a village; नीडारम्भैर्गृहबलिभुजामाकुलग्रामचैत्याः Me.23. -ज, -जात a. 1 village-born, rustic. -2 grown in cultivated ground; Ms.6.16. -जालम् a number of villages, a district. -णीः 1 the leader or chief of a village or community; तयोर्युद्धं समभवद्रक्षोग्रामणिमुख्ययोः Mb.7.19.3. -2 a leader or chief in general. -3 a barber. -4 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -5 a libidinous man. -6 a yakṣa; उन्नह्यन्ति रथं नागा ग्रामण्यो रथयोजकाः Mb.12.11.48. (-f.) 1 a whore, harlot. -2 the indigo plant. ˚पुत्रः a bastard, the son of a harlot. -तक्षः a village-carpenter; P.V.4.95. -देवता the tutelary deity of a village. -द्रुमः a sacred tree in a village. -धर्मः 1 the observances or customs of a village. -2 sexual intercourse. -धान्यम् a cultivated grain (like rice); ग्रामधान्यं यथा शून्यं यथा कूपश्च निर्जलः Mb.12.36.48. See ग्राम्यधान्यम्. -पालः 1 the guardian of a village. -2 army for the protection of a village. -पुरुषः the chief of a village. -प्रेष्यः the messenger or servant of a community or village. -मद्गुरिका 1 a riot, fray, village tumult. -2 N. of a fish (or a plant) -मुखम् a market. -मृगः a dog. -याजकः, -याजिन् m. 1 'the village priest,' a priest who conducts the religious ceremonies for all classes and is consequently considered as a degraded Brāhmaṇa; Ms.4.25. -2 the attendant of an idol. -युद्धम् a riot, fray. -लुण्ठनम् plundering a village. -वासः (ग्रामेवासः also) 1 a villager. -2 residence in a village. -विशेषः a variety of scales in music; स्फुटीभवद्ग्रामविशेषमूर्च्छना Śi. -वृद्धः an old villager; प्राप्यावन्तीनुदयनकथाकोविदग्रामवृद्धान् Me.3. -षण्डः an impotent man (क्लीब). -संकरः the common sewer or drain of a village. -संघः a villagecorporation. -सिंहः a dog; व्यमुञ्चन्विविधा वाचो ग्रामसिंहास्त- तस्ततः Bhāg.3.17.1. -स्थः a. 1 a villager. -2 a covillager. -हासकः a sister's husband.

grāmakaḥ	ग्रामकः 1 A villager. -2 The collective department of celestial pleasures.

grāmaṭikā	ग्रामटिका A wretched or miserable village; कतिपय- ग्रामटिकापर्यटनदुर्विदग्ध P. R.1.

grāmayati	ग्रामयति Den. P. To invite or call.

grāmerukam	ग्रामेरुकम् A variety of sandal; Kau. A.2.11.

grāmeya	ग्रामेय a. (-यी f.) Village-born, rustic. -यी A harlot, prostitute.

grāmika	ग्रामिक a. (-की f.) 1 Rural, rustic. -2 (In music) Chromatic. -3 Rude. -कः 1 The headman of a village; Ms.7.116,118. -2 A villager.

grāmin	ग्रामिन् a. 1 Rustic, rural. -2 Libidinous. -m. 1 A villager, peasant. -2 The head of a village. -णी The indigo plant.

grāmīṇa	ग्रामीण a. [ग्रामे भवः खञ्] 1 Vulgar, rude. -2 Chromatic. -3 Belonging to a village. -णः 1 A villager; ग्रामीण- वध्वस्तमलक्षिता जनैश्चिरं वृतीनामुपरि व्यलोकयन् Śi.12.37; Amaru.13. -2 A dog. -3 A crow. A hog.

grāmīya	ग्रामीय a. Belonging to a village. -यः A villager, boor, churl.

grāmīyakaḥ	ग्रामीयकः A villager; ग्रामीयककुलानां च समक्षं सीम्नि साक्षिणः Ms.8.254.

grāmya	ग्राम्य a. [ग्राम-यत्] 1 Relating to or used in a village; संत्यज्य ग्राम्यमाहारम् Ms.6.3;7.12. -2 Living in a village, rural, rustic; अल्पव्ययेन सुन्दरि ग्राम्यजनो मिष्टमश्नाति Chand. M.1. -3 Domesticated, tame (as an animal). -4 Cultivated (opp. वन्य 'growing wild'). -5 Low, vulgar, used only by low people (as a word); चुम्बनं देहि मे भार्ये कामचाण्डालतृप्तये R. G., or कटिस्ते हरते मनः S. D.574, are instances of ग्राम्य expressions; तस्मात्संप्रति- पत्तिरेव हि वरं न ग्राम्यमत्रोत्तरम् Mu.5.18; Bhāg.5.2.17. -6 Indecent, obscene. -7 Relating to sexual pleasures. -8 Relating to a musical scale. -म्यः 1 A villager; Y.2.166. -2 A tame hog. -3 The first two signs of the zodiac, Aries and Taurus. -म्या The Indigo plant. -म्यम् 1 A rustic speech. -2 Food prepared in a village. -3 Sexual intercourse. -4 Acceptance. -5 The Prakṛit and other dialects. -Comp. -अश्वः an ass. -कर्मन् n. 1 the occupation of a villager -2 sexual pleasure; ग्राम्यकर्मणैव विस्मृतकालावधिः Bhāg.5.14.31. -कुङ्कुमम् safflower. -धर्मः 1 the duty of a villager. -2 sexual intercourse, copulation. -3 the right of a villager (as opp. to that of a 'recluse'). -धान्यम् crops growing in a village; दश ग्राम्याणि धान्यानि भवन्ति व्रीहियवा- स्तिलमाषा अणुप्रियङ्गवो गोधूमाश्च मसूराश्च खल्वाश्च खलकुलाश्च ... । Bṛi. Up.6.3.13. -पशुः a domestic animal; Bhāg. 6.15.16. -बुद्धि a. boorish, clownish, ignorant. -मृगः a dog; ग्राम्यमृग इव हविस्तदयं (न भजते) Śi.15.15. -वल्लभा a harlot, prostitute. -वादिन् m. a village bailiff; Ts.2.3.1.3. -सुखम् sexual intercourse, copulation; cf. अविदित्वा सुखं ग्राम्यं वैतृष्ण्यं नैति पूरुषः Bhāg.9.18.4.

granth	ग्रन्थ् 1, 9 P., 1 U., 1 Ā. (ग्रन्थति, ग्रथ्नाति, ग्रन्थयति- ते, also ग्रथति, ग्रथते) 1 To fasten, tie or string together; ग्रन्थित्वेव स्थितं रुचः Bk.7.15; स्रजो ग्रथयते &c. -2 To arrange, class together, connect in a regular series. -3 To wind round. -4 To write, compose; ग्रथ्नामि काव्य- शशिनं विततार्थरश्मिम् K. P.1. -5 To form, make, produce; ग्रथ्नन्ति बाष्पबिन्दुनिकरं पक्ष्मपङ्क्तयः K.6; Bk.17.69. -6 To set or strew with.

granthaḥ	ग्रन्थः [ग्रन्थ् संदर्भे भावे घञ्] 1 Binding, stringing together (fig. also). -2 A work, treatise, composition, literary production, book; ग्रन्थारम्भे, ग्रन्थकृत्, ग्रन्थसमाप्ति &c. -3 Wealth, property. -4 A verse consisting of 32 syllables, written in the Anuṣṭubh metre. -Comp. -कर्तृ, m. -कारः -कृत् m. a writer, an author; ग्रन्थारम्भे समुचितेष्टदे- वतां ग्रन्थकृत्परामृशति K. P.1. -कुटी, -कूटी 1 a library. -2 a studio. -विस्तरः, विस्तारः voluminousness, diffuse style; Bṛi S.1.2. -संधिः a section or chapter of a work; (for the several names by which sections, or chapters of works in Sanskṛit, are called, see under अध्याय).

granthanam	ग्रन्थनम् ना [ग्रन्थ भावे ल्युट्] 1 Stringing or tying together. -2 Composing, writing.

granthiḥ	ग्रन्थिः 1 A knot, bunch, protuberance in general; स्तनौ मांसग्रन्थी कनककलशावित्युपमितौ Bh.3.2; so मेदोग्रन्थि. -2 A tie or knot of a cord, garment &c; इदमुपहितसूक्ष्म- ग्रन्थिना स्कन्धदेशे Ś.1.19; Mk.1.1; Ms.2.4; Bh.1. 57. -3 A knot tied in the end of a garment for keeping money; hence, purse, money, property; कुसीदाद् दारिद्य्रं परकरगतग्नन्थिशमनात् Pt.1.11. -4 The joint or knot of a reed, cane &c. Mv.3.32. -5 A joint of the body. -6 Crookedness, distortion, falsehood, perversion of truth. -7 Swelling and hardening of the vessels of the body. -8 A difficult portion; ग्रन्थग्रन्थिं तदा चक्रे मुनिर्गूढं कुतूहलात् Mb.1.1.8. -9 A bell, gong; गृहीत्वा ग्रन्थिमुसलं मूढो भिक्षुरवादयत् Ks.65.135. -Comp. -छेदकः, -भेदः, -मोचकः a cut-purse, a pick pocket; अङ्गुलीग्रन्थिभेदस्य छेदयेत् प्रथमे ग्रहे Ms.9.277; Y.2.274; Ś.6. -पर्णः, -र्णम् 1 N. of a fragrant tree; न ग्रन्थिपर्णप्रणयाश्चरन्ति कस्तूरिकागन्धमृगा- स्तृणेषु Vikr.1.17. -2 a kind of perfume. -बन्धनम् 1 tying together the garments of the bride and the bridegroom at the marriage ceremony. -2 tying a knot. -3 a ligament. -मूलम् garlic. -वज्रकः a kind of steel. -हरः a minister.

granthikaḥ	ग्रन्थिकः 1 An astrologer, a fortuneteller; ग्रन्थिकस्तु करीरे स्याद्दैवज्ञे गुग्गुलुद्रुमे' इति विश्वलोचनः; Mb.14.7.7. -2 The name assumed by Nakula when at the palace of Virāṭa. -3 A kind of disease of the outer ear. -4 A Bamboo-shoot; L. D. B. -कम् 1 The plant Piper longum (Mar. गांठी पिंपळमूळ). -2 The gum-resin (गुग्गुलु).

granthīkam	ग्रन्थीकम् The root of long pepper.

granthila	ग्रन्थिल a. [ग्रन्थिर्विद्यते$स्य सिध्मा˚लच्] Knotted, knotty. -लम् 1 The root of long pepper. -2 Undried ginger.

granthimat	ग्रन्थिमत् a. Knotty, tied by a knot; कृष्णत्वचं ग्रन्थिमतीं दधानम् Ku.3.46.

granthin	ग्रन्थिन् m. 1 One who reads books, bookish; अज्ञेभ्यो ग्रन्थिनः श्रेष्ठा ग्रन्थिभ्यो धारिणो वराः Ms.12.13. -2 Learned well-read. -3 Relating to books.

granthita	ग्रन्थित See ग्रथित.

gras	ग्रस् I. 1 Ā. [ग्रसते, ग्रस्त] 1 To swallow, devour, eat up, consume; स इमां पृथिवीं कृत्स्नां संक्षिप्य ग्रसते पुनः Mb.; Bg.11.3. -2 To seize. -3 To eclipse; द्वावेव ग्रसते दिनेश्वरनिशाप्राणेश्वरौ भासुरौ Bh.2.34; हिमांशुमाशु ग्रसते तन्म्रदिम्नः स्फुटं फलम् Śi.2.49. -4 To slur over words. -5 To destroy. -With सं to destroy; संग्रस्यते$सौ पुरुषा$ धिपेन Bk.12.4. -II. 1 P., 1 U. (ग्रसति, ग्रासयति-ते) To eat, devour.

grāsaḥ	ग्रासः [ग्रस् कर्मणि घञ्] 1 A mouthful, a quantity of anything equal to a mouthful; Ms.3.133;6.28; Y.3.55. -2 Food, nourishment; ग्रासाच्छादनमात्रं तु दद्या- दिति निदर्शनम् Mb.12.165.63. -3 The part of the sun or the moon eclipsed. -4 The morsel bitten. -5 The act of swallowing. -6 Slurring, indistinct pronunciation; fault in a pronunciation of the gutturals. -7 (In geom.) A piece cut out by the intersection of two circles -8 An eclipse. -Comp. -आच्छादनम् food and clothing; i. e. bare subsistence; see ग्रास (2); Ms.9.22. -प्रमाणम् the size of a morsel. -शल्यम् any extraneous substance lodged in the throat. -ग्रासीकृ To swallow; ग्रासीकर्तुं प्रवृत्तो$भूदुत्थायाजगरो महान् Ks.9.57.

grasanam	ग्रसनम् [ग्रस् भावे ल्युट्] 1 Swallowing, eating. -2 Seizing. -3 A partial eclipse of the sun or moon; Bṛi. S.5.43,46. -4 A mouth, jaw; प्राशित्रमास्ये ग्रसने ग्रहास्तु ते Bhāg.3.13.36.

grasiṣṇu	ग्रसिष्णु a. Accustomed to swallow; भूतभर्तृ च यज्ज्ञेयं ग्रसिष्णु प्रभविष्णु च Bg.13.16. -m. The Supreme Soul.

grasta	ग्रस्त p. p. [ग्रस् कर्मणि क्त] 1 Eaten, devoured. -2 Seized, stricken, affected, possessed; ग्रह˚, विपद्˚, जरा˚ U.6. 39. -3 Slurred; ˚मुक्तम् U.5.13; ˚आमिषम् Pt.1.193. -4 Eclipsed. -5 Taken, seized. -6 Tormented, afflicted; Y.3.245. -स्तम् A word or sentence half-uttered or slurred over. -Comp. -अस्तम् the setting of the sun or moon while eclipsed. -उदयः rising of the sun or moon while eclipsed.

grastiḥ	ग्रस्तिः f. The act of swallowing or devouring.

grath	ग्रथ् or ग्रन्थ् 1 Ā. (also 9, 1 P. L. D. B.) (ग्रथते, ग्रन्थते) 1 To be crooked. -2 To be wicked. -3 To bend.

grathanam	ग्रथनम् 1 Coagulation, thickening, becoming obstructed or clogged with knotty lumps. -2 Stringing together. -3 Composing, writing; (ना also in these senses).

grathin	ग्रथिन् a. False; न्यक्रतून् ग्रथिनो मृध्रवाचाः Rv.7.6.3.

grathita	ग्रथित p. p. [ग्रन्थ् संदर्भे क्त नलोपः] 1 Strung or tied together. -2 Composed; कालिदासग्रथितवस्तुना नाटकेन Ś.1; वर्णैः कतिपयैरेव ग्रथितस्य स्वरैरिव Śi.2.72. -3 Arranged, classed. -4 Thickened, coagulated. -5 Knotty. -6 Hardened. -7 Hurt, injured. -8 Seized, taken possession of. -9 Overcome. -तम् A tumor with hard knots.

grathnaḥ	ग्रथ्नः [ग्रन्थ् बा˚ नङ्] A cluster, bunch, tuft.

grāvan	ग्रावन् a. Hard, solid. -m. 1 A stone or rock; किं हि नामैतदम्बुनि मज्जन्त्यलाबूनि ग्रावाणः संप्लवन्त इति Mv.1; अपि ग्रावा रोदित्यपि दलति वज्रस्य हृदयम् U.1.28; Śi.4.23. -2 A mountain. -3 A cloud.

grīṣma	ग्रीष्म a. [ग्रसते रसान्; ग्रस्-मनिन् Uṇ.1.147] Hot, warm. -ष्मः 1 The summer, the hot season, corresponding to the months of Jyeṣṭha and Āṣāḍha; ग्रीष्म- समयमधिकृत्य गीयताम् Ś.1; R.16.54; Bv.1.35. -2 Heat, warmth. -ष्मी The नवमल्लिका plant. -Comp. -कालीन a. pertaining to summer. -उद्भवा, -जा, -भवा the Navamallikā creeper, (double jasmine). -वनम् a grove frequented in summer; अत्रान्तरे ग्रीष्मवनं मल्लिकामोदि मारुतम् Ks.122.65. -हासम् The flocculent seeds, down &c. blown about in the air in summer.

grīvā	ग्रीवा [गिरत्यनया, गॄ-वनिप् नि˚ Uṇ.1.152] The neck, the back part of the neck; ग्रीवाभङ्गाभिरामं मुहुरनुपतति स्यन्दने दत्तदृष्टिः Ś.1.7. -Comp. -अङ्कुशः a camel. -घण्टा a bell hanging down from the neck of a horse.

grīvālikā	ग्रीवालिका See ग्रीवा.

grīvin	ग्रीविन् a. Long-necked, handsome-necked. -m. A camel.

gruc	ग्रुच् 1 P. (ग्रोचति) 1 To steal, rob. -2 To go.

agra	अग्र a. [अङ्ग्-रन् नलोपः Uṇ.2.28] 1 First, foremost, chief, best, prominent, principal, pre-eminent; ˚महिषी chief queen; ˚वातमासेवमाना M.1. front (and hence, fresh) breeze; ˚आसनम् chief seat, seat of honour; माम- ग्रासनतो$वकृष्टमवशं ये दृष्टवन्तः पुरा Mu.1.12. -2 Excessive, over and above, surplus; supernumerary, projecting (अधिक). -ग्रः Setting mountain; अग्रसानुषु नितान्तपिशङ्गैः Ki.9.7. -ग्रम् 1 (a) The foremost or topmost point, tip, point (opp. मूलम्, मध्यम्); (fig.) sharpness, keenness; धर्मस्य ब्राह्मणो मूलम् मग्रं राजन्य उच्यते Ms.11.83; दर्व्याम् अग्रं मूलम् मध्यम् &c.; नासिका˚ tip of the nose; सूचि˚ &c.; समस्ता एव विद्या जिह्वाग्रे$भवन् K.346 stood on the tip of the tongue; अमुष्य विद्या रसनाग्रनर्तकी N.1.5. (b) Top, summit, surface; कैलास˚, पर्वत˚, &c. -2 Front, van; अग्रे कृ put in the front or at the head; तामग्रे कृत्वा Pt.4. See अग्रे. -3 The best of any kind; स्यन्दनाग्रेण with the best of chariots; प्रासादाग्रैः Rām. -4 Superiority, excellence (उत्कर्ष); अग्रादग्रं रोहति Tāṇḍya. -5 Goal, aim, resting place (आलम्बनम्); मनुमेकाग्रमासीनम् Ms.1.1, See ˚भूमि also. -6 Beginning, See अग्रे. -7 A multitude, assemblage. -8 Overplus, excess, surplus; साग्रं स्त्रीसहस्रम् Rām. 1 women and more; so साग्रकोटी च रक्षसाम्. -9 A weight = पल q. v. -1 A measure of food given as alms (ब्राह्मणभोजनम् occurring in अग्रहार); प्रयतो ब्राह्मणाग्रे यः श्रद्धया परया युतः । Mb.13.65.13. -11 (Astr.) Amplitude of the sun (˚ग्रा, अग्रका also). cf. ...अग्रमालम्बने$धिके । पुरोपरिप्रान्ताद्येषु न पुंसि प्रमिताशने । Nm. -12 Forepart of time; नैवेह किंचनाग्र आसीत् Bṛi. Up.1.2.1. In compounds as first member meaning 'the forepart', 'front', 'tip' &c.; e. g. ˚अक्चयः First procurement (cf. Daṇḍa-viveka G. O. S.52, p.43). ˚पादः -चरणः the forepart of the foot, toe; so ˚हस्तः, ˚करः, ˚पाणिः &c.; ˚सरोरूहम् the topmost lotus. पद्मानि यस्याग्रसरोरुहाणि Ku.1.16. ˚कर्णम् Tip-ear; top of the ear; Mātaṅga L.5.7. ˚कायः forepart of the body; so ˚नखम्, ˚नासिका tip of the nail, nose &c., -adv. In front, before, ahead. -Comp. -अंशुः [अग्रम् अंशोः] the focal point. -अक्षि n. [कर्म.] sharp or pointed vision, side-look (अपाङ्गवीक्षण); अग्राक्ष्णा वीक्षमाणस्तु तिर्यग् भ्रातरमब्रवीत् Rām. -अद्वन् a. having precedence in eating. -अनी (णी) कः (कम्) vanguard; दीर्घाल्लँघूंश्चैव नरानग्रानीकेषु योधयेत् Ms.7.193; [अग्राणीकं रघुव्याघ्रौ राक्षसानां बभञ्जतुः Rām. -अयणीयम [अग्रं श्रेष्टं अयनं ज्ञानं तत्र साधु छ]. 1 N. of a Buddhistic tenet (उत्पादपूर्वमग्रायणीयमथ वीर्यता प्रवादः स्यात् -हेमचन्द्रः). -2 title of the second of the fourteen oldest Jain books (Pūrvas). -अवलेहितम् [अग्रम् अव- लेहितम् आस्वादितं यस्य] food at a Śrāddha ceremony, the chief part of which has been tested. -आसनम् First seat of honour; मामग्रासनतो$वकृष्टमवशम् Mu.1.12. -उत्सर्गः taking a thing by leaving its first portion in conformity with the rule of laying by nothing for the next day (i. e. the rule of non hoarding); cf. Daṇḍaviveka G. O. S.52, pp.43-44. -उपहरणम् first supply. -उपहरणीय a. [अग्रे उपह्रियते कर्मणि अनीयर्] 1 that which is first offered or supplied. -2 [अग्रम् उपह्रियते यस्मै हृ- संप्रदाने अनीयर्] श्राद्धाद्यर्थमुपकल्पितस्य अन्नादेरग्रे दानोद्देश्यः वास्तु- देवादिः Tv. -करः 1 = अग्रहस्तः q. v. -2 the focal point. -केशः front line of hair; ˚शेषु रेणुः अपहरति K.86. -गः [अग्रे गच्छतीति, गम्-ड] a leader, a guide; taking the lead; marching foremost. -गण्य a. [अग्रे गण्यते$सौ] foremost, to be ranked first; शमनभवनयाने यद्भवानग्रगण्यः Mahān. -गामिन् a. [अग्रे गच्छति] a leader; प्रष्ठो$ग्रगामिनि P.VIII.3.92. -ज a. [अग्रे जायते; जन्-ड.] first born or produced; आनन्देनाग्रजेनेव R.1.78. (-जः) 1 the first born, an elder brother; सुमतिं ममाग्रजमवगच्छ M.5; अस्त्येव मन्युर्भरताग्रजे मे R.14.73. -2 a Brāhmaṇa. (-जा) an elder sister; so ˚जात, ˚जातक, ˚जाति. -जङ्घा the forepart of the calf. -जन्मन् m. [अग्रे जन्म यस्य सः] 1 the first-born, an elder brother; जनकाग्रजन्मनोः शासनमतिक्रम्य Dk.2. -2 a Brāhmaṇa (वर्णेषु मध्ये अग्रजातत्वात्, or अग्रात् प्रधानाङ्गात् मुखात् जातत्वात्, ब्राह्मणो$स्य मुखमासीत्, तस्मात् त्रिवृत् स्तोमानां मुखम... अग्निर्देवतानां ब्राह्मणो मनुष्याणाम्; तस्माद् ब्राह्मणो मुखेन वीर्यं करोति मुखतो हि सृष्टः Tāṇḍya); अतिवयसमग्रजन्मानम् K.12; अवो- चत् ˚न्मा Dk.13.3; N. of Brahmā, as he was the first to be born in the waters. cf. अग्रजन्मा द्विजे ज्येष्ठभ्रातरि ब्रह्मणि स्मृतम् Nm. -जिह्वा the tip of the tongue. -ज्या (astr.) the sign of the amplitude. -दानिन् [अग्रे दानम् अस्य; अग्र- दान-इनि] a (degraded) Brāhmaṇa who takes presents offered in honour of the dead (प्रेतोद्देशेन यद्दानं दीयते तत्प्रति- ग्राही); लोभी विप्रश्च शूद्राणामग्रेदानं गृहीतवान् । ग्रहणे मृतदानानां (ग्रहणात्तिलदानानां Tv.) अग्रदानी बभूव सः ॥ -दानीयः [अग्रे दानमर्हति छ] = अग्रदानिन्. -दूतः a harbinger; कृष्णाक्रोधा- ग्रदूतः Ve.1.22; ˚दूतिका Dk.2; महीपतीनां प्रणयाग्रदूत्यः R.6.12; -देवी the chief queen; समग्रदेवीनिवहाग्र- देवी... । Bu.ch.1.15. -धान्यम a cereal grain. (Mar. जोंधळा), Holcus soraghum or Holcus spicatus. (Mar. बाजरी). -निरूपणम् predestination; prophecy, determining beforehand. -नीः (णीः) [अग्रे नीयते असौ नी-क्विप्, णत्वम्] 1 a leader, foremost, first, chief; ˚णी- र्विरागहेतुः K.195; अप्यग्रणीर्मन्त्रकृतामृषीणाम् R.5.4. chief. -2 fire. -पर्णी [अग्रे पर्णं यस्याः सा-ङीप्] cowage, Carpopogon Pruriens (अजलोमन्). [Mar. कुयली]. -पातिन् a. [अग्रे आदौ पतति; पत्-णिनि] happening beforehand, antecedent; [˚तीनि शुभानि निमित्तानि K.65. -पादः the forepart of the foot; toes; नवकिसलयरागेणाग्रपादेन M.3.12; ˚स्थिता standing on tiptoe. Ś.5. -पाणिः = ˚हस्तः q. v. -पूजा the highest or first mark of reverence or respect; ˚जामिह स्थित्वा गृहाणेदं विषं प्रभो Rām. -पेयम् precedence in drinking. -प्रदायिन् a. giving in advance; तेषामग्र- प्रदायी स्याः कल्पोत्थायी प्रियंवदः Mb.5.135.35. -बीज a. [अग्रं शाखाग्रं बीजमुत्पादकं यस्य] growing by means of the tip or end of branches, growing on the stock or stem of another tree, such as 'कलम' in Mar. (-जः) a viviparous plant. -भागः [कर्म.] 1 the first or best part (श्राद्धादौ प्रथममुद्धृत्य देयं द्रव्यम्) -2 remnant, remainder (शेषभाग). -3 fore-part, tip, point. -4 (astr.) a degree of amplitude. -भागिन् a. [अग्र- भागो$स्यास्ति; अस्त्यर्थे इनि] first to take or claim (the remnant); अलङ्क्रियमाणस्य तस्य अनुलेपनमाल्ये ˚गी भवामि V. 5, claiming the first share of the remnant etc. -भावः precedence. उदारसंख्यैः सचिवैरसंख्यैः कृताग्रभावः स उदाग्रभावः Bu.ch.I.15. -भुज् a. 1 having precedence in eating. स तानग्रभुजस्तात धान्येन च धनेन च Mb.1.178.12. -2 gluttonous, voracious (औदरिक). -भूः [अग्रे भवति भू-क्विप्] = ˚ज. -भूमिः f. 1 goal of ambition or object aimed at; ततो$ग्रभूमिं व्यवसायासिद्धेः Ki.17.55; त्वमग्र- भूमिर्निरपायसंश्रया Śi.1.32 (प्राप्यस्थानम्). -2 the topmost part, pinnacle; विमान˚ Me.71. -महिषी the principal queen. -मांसम् [अग्रं भक्ष्यत्वेन प्रधानं मांसम्] flesh in the heart, the heart itself; ˚सं चानीतं Ve.3.2. morbid protuberance of the liver. -यणम् [अग्रम् अयनात् उत्तरायणात् णत्वं शकं˚ तद्विधानकालो$स्य अच् (?) Tv.] a kind of sacrificial ceremony. See आग्रयण. -यान a. [अग्रे यानं यस्य, या-ल्युट्] taking the lead, foremost. (-नम्) an army that stops in front to defy the enemy. मनो$ग्रयानं वचसा निरुक्तं नमामहे Bhāg.8.5.26. -यायिन् a. [अग्रे यास्यति या-णिनि] taking the lead, leading the van; पुत्रस्य ते रणशिरस्ययमग्रयायी Ś.7.26. मान- धनाग्रयायी R.5.3,5.62.18.1. -योधिन् [अग्रे स्थित्वा युध्यते] the principal hero, champion राक्षसानां वधे तेषां ˚धी भविष्यति Rām.; so ˚वीर; कर्मसु चाग्रवीरः. -रन्ध्रम् opening fore-part; त्रासान्नासाग्ररन्ध्रं विशति Māl.1.1. -लोहिता [अग्रं लोहितं यस्याः सा] a kind of pot-herb (चिल्लीशाक). -संख्या the first place or rank; पुत्रः समारोपयदग्रसंख्याम् R.18.3. -वक्त्रम् N. of a surgical instrument, Suśr. -वातः fresh breeze; अग्रवातमासेवमाना M.1. -शोमा towering beauty or the beauty of the peaks; कैलासशैलस्य यदग्रशोभाम् । Bu. ch.1.3. -संधानी [अग्रे फलोत्पत्तेः प्राक् संधी- यते ज्ञायते $नया कार्यम् Tv.] the register of human actions kept by Yama (यत्र हि प्राणिवर्गस्य प्राग्भवीयकर्मानुसारेण शुभा- शुभसूचकं सर्वं लिख्यते सा यमपञ्जिका). -सन्ध्या early dawn; कर्कन्धूनामुपरि तुहिनं रञ़्जयत्यग्रसन्ध्या Ś.4. v.1. -सर = यायिन् taking the lead; आयोधनाग्रसरतां त्वयि वीर याते R.5.71. -सारा [अग्रं शीर्षमात्रं सारो यस्याः सा] 1 a sprout which has tips without fruits. -2 a short method of counting immense numbers. -हर a. [अग्रे ह्रियते दीयते$सौ; हृ-अच्] 1 that which must be given first. -2 = अग्रहारिन्. -हस्त (˚कर; ˚पाणिः,) the forepart of the hand or arm; अग्रहस्तेन गृहीत्वा प्रसादयैनाम् Ratn.3; forepart of the trunk (of an elephant); often used for a finger or fingers taken collectively; शीतलस्ते ˚स्तः Mk.3; अतिसाध्वसेन वेपते मे ˚स्तः Ratn.1; कुसुमित इव ते ˚स्तः प्रतिभाति M.1.; प्रसारिते ˚स्ते M.4; ˚हस्तात्प्रभ्रष्टं पुष्पभाजनम् Ś.4. slipped from the fingers; also the right hand; अथ ˚हस्ते मुकुलीकृताङ्गुलौ Ku.5.63. (अग्रश्चासौ हस्तश्च Malli.). Ki.5.29. -हायनः (णः) [अग्रः श्रेष्ठः हायनो व्रीहिः अत्र, णत्वम्] the beginning of the year; N. of the month मार्गशीर्ष; (मासानां मार्गशीर्षो$हम् Bg. 1.35.); ˚इष्टिः नवशस्येष्टिर्यागभेदः. -हारः 1 a grant of land given by kings (to Brāhmaṇas) for sustenance (अग्रं ब्राह्मणभोजनं, तदर्थं ह्रियन्ते राजधनात् पृथक् क्रियन्ते ते क्षेत्रादयः- नीलकण्ठ; क्षेत्रोत्पन्नशस्यादुद्धृत्य ब्राह्मणोद्देशेन स्थाप्यं धान्यादि, गुरुकुला- दावृत्तब्रह्मचारिणे देयं क्षेत्रादि, ग्रामभेदश्च Tv.); अग्रहारांश्च दास्यामि ग्रामं नगरसंमितम् Mb.3.64.4. कस्मिंश्चिदग्रहारे Dk.8.9. -2 the first offering in वैश्वदेव Mb.3.234.47.

agrataḥ	अग्रतः adv. [अग्रे अग्राद्वा, अग्र-तसिल्] (with gen.) 1 Before (opp. पृष्ठतः), in front of, at the head of; forward; अग्रतश्चतुरो वेदान् प्रष्ठतः सशरं धनुः । इदं ब्राह्ममिदं क्षात्रं शापादति शरादपि ॥ Subhās. न गणस्याग्रतो गच्छेत् H.1.29. गच्छाग्रतः lead the way; ˚तो विलोक्य seeing before him. -2 In the peresence of; मेघनादस्य˚ Pt.1; अमात्यस्याग्रतः Mu.5; धनुर्भृतामग्रत एव रक्षिणाम् R.3.39 in the very presence of. -3 First; पुरुषं जातमग्रतः Rv.1.2.7; अग्रतः कृ to give precedence to, consider most important; to put in front or at the head of पुरस्तात्प्रथमे प्राच्यां पुरो$र्थे$ग्रत इत्यपि Nm.4. From; तदग्रतः स्वकर्मस्थं स्मृत्वा Rām 6.79.11. -Comp. -सर a. [अग्रतः सरति; सृ-ट] going in front, taking the lead. (-रः) a leader.

agrima	अग्रिम a. [अग्रे भवः; अग्र-डिमच् P.IV.3.23. Vārt.] 1 First (in order, rank &c.); foremost, best, excellent, preferable, superior; वीराणामग्रिमो मूत्वा युयुधे पार्थिवैः सह Mb. -2 Prior, preceding. -3 Elder, eldest. -4 Furthest, advanced, first ripe. -5 Further. -मः An elder brother. -मा A kind of fruit, Annona Reticulata. (Mar. रामफळ.)

agriya	अग्रिय a. [अग्रे मवः; अग्र-घ] Foremost, best &c. -यः An elder brother. -यम् The first fruits; the best part.

agrīya	अग्रीय a. [अग्रे-भवः; अग्र-छ] Foremost, best &c.

agre	अग्रे adv. 1 In front of, before (in time or space); अग्रे यान्ति स्थस्य रेणुपदवीं...घनाः V.1.5,2.7; R.2.56; Bh.3.36. -2 In the presence of, before; ममाग्रे स्तुवन्ति H.1; तं मे त्वमग्रहीरग्रे वृणोमि त्वामहं ततः Mb.1.81.21. -3 At the head, ahead; बलाग्रे तिष्ठते वीरो नलः Rām. -4 Further on, subsequently, in the sequel; एवमग्रे वक्ष्यते, एवमग्रे$पि द्रष्टव्यम् &c. -5 In the beginning; at first, first; प्रतापो$ग्रे ततः शब्दः परागस्तदनंतरम् R.4.3; आत्मैवेदमग्र आसीत् Bṛi. _x001F_+Ār. Up.4.1.1.; Ms.2.169. -6 First, in preference to others; सवर्णाग्रे द्विजातीनां प्रशस्ता दारकर्मणि Ms.3.12. अतिथिभ्यो$ग्र एवैतान् भोजयेत् 3.114. -Comp. -गः a leader; सेनाग्रगः Rām.7.35.6. -गाः going in front or before. -गूः Going in front. -दिधिषुः -षूः a man (of one of the first three castes) who marries a wife married before (पुनर्भूविवाहकारी). (-षूः) f. a married woman whose elder sister is still unmarried (ज्येष्ठायां यद्यनूढायां कन्यायामुह्यते$नुजा । सा चाग्रेदिधिषूर्ज्ञेया पूर्वा च दिधिषूः स्मृता); ˚पतिः the husband of such a woman. -पाः [अग्रे स्थित्वा पाति, अलुक्] first to protect. -पूः [अग्रे पूयते, पू-क्विप्] purifying in one's presence; having precedence in drinking. -वनम्-णम् [वनस्याग्रं राजदन्ता˚ ˚पूर्वनिपातः; अलुक् णत्वम् P.VIII.4.4.] the border or skirt of a forest. -सर a. [अग्रमग्रेणाग्रे वा सरति सृ. ट. अलुक्-पुरो$ग्रतो$ग्रेषु सर्त्तेः । P.III. 2.18.] going in front, taking the lead, a leader, foremost, first; निरपत्रपाणाम् अग्रेसरीकृतास्मि K.169; मरण˚रो भवामि Pt.1; Māl.9. first to die; मानमहतामग्रेसर: केसरी Bh.2.29. -सरिकः [अग्रेसरे अग्रगतौ प्रसृतः ठन्] 1 a servant (who precedes his master. -2 a leader.

agrabhaṇa	अग्रभण a. Ved. Having nothing acceptable; अनारम्भणे तदवीरयेथामनास्थाने अग्रभणे समुद्रे । Rv.1.116.5.

agraha	अग्रह a. Without any escort, retinue etc. A vānapra-stha etc.

agrāmya	अग्राम्य a. 1 Not rustic or rural, town-made; अग्राम्य- शब्दाभिधानमौदार्यम् Kau. A.2.1. -2 Note tame, wild.

agrāhya	अग्राह्य a. Not acceptable, that which ought not to be taken or accepted as a gift, present &c.; ˚ह्यम् शिवनिर्माल्यं पत्रं पुष्पं फलं जलम्; not to be perceived, admitted or trusted; not to be considered or taken into account. -ह्या N. of the clay or मृत्तिका which ought not to be taken for purposes of purification.

agruḥ	अग्रुः ग्रूः f. [अङ्ग-क्रु नलोपः वा ऊङ्] Ved. 1 A finger. -2 A river; सप्त स्वसारो अग्रुवः Rv.1.191.14. (according to others) single, unmarried (as a young woman); Rv.5.44.7;7.96.4.

atigrah	अतिग्रह् 9 P. To take beyond the usual measure.

atigraha	अतिग्रह a. [अतिक्रान्तो ग्रहम्] Difficult to be comprehended, incomprehensible. -हः, -ग्राहः 1 Object of an apprehensive organ, such as स्पर्श 'touch' the object of त्वच्, रस of जिह्वा &c. The Grahas are eight in number; प्राण, वाच्, जिह्वा, चक्षुस्, श्रोत्र, मनस्, हस्तौ, & त्वच्; the corresponding atigrāhas being अपान, नामन्, रस, रूप, शब्द, काम, कर्मन् & स्पर्श. अथ हैनं जारत्कारव आर्तभागः पप्रच्छ याज्ञवल्क्येति होवाच कति ग्रहाः कत्यतिग्रहा इति । अष्टौ ग्रहा अष्टावतिग्रहा इति Bṛi. Up.3.2.1. -2 Right knowledge, correct apprehension. -3 Act of overtaking, surpassing &c. -4 One who siezes or takes to a very great extent.

atyugra	अत्युग्र a. Very fierce. -ग्रम् Asafœtida. (Mar. हिंग).

anavagraha	अनवग्रह a. [न. ब.] Irresistible, uncotrolled, impetuous, resistless; सुकुमारकायमनवग्रहः स्मरः (अभिहन्ति) Māl.1.39.

anigraha	अनिग्रह a. Unrestrained, invincible, unconquerable. -हः 1 Non-restraint. -2 Non-refutation. -3 Not admitting one's defeat in argument; ˚स्थानम् occasion of non-refutation.

anugrah	अनुग्रह् 9 P. (Ved. -गृभ्णाति). 1 To favour, oblige, treat with kindness; शिलातलैकदेशमनुगृह्णातु वयस्यः Ś.3 our friend will be so good as to, or kindly, take a seat on the stone; अयं विष्टरो$नुगृह्यताम् V.5 be pleased to sit down &c.; महेन्द्रेण पुनरनुगृहीता V.3 favoured (by modifying the curse); with instr. or abl. of that which is an obligation; अनुगृहीतो$हमनया मघवतः सम्भावनया S.6; कतर- त्कुलमनुगृहीतं भगवत्या जन्मना K.135, अनुगृहीतो$स्मि अहमुपदेशा- द्भवतः V.4. I am much obliged to you &c. (अनुगृहीत is oft. used by itself in the sense of 'much obliged', 'many thanks', 'I thank you', 'I esteem it as a favour'.) -2 To foster, cherish, protect, maintain (as fire); अग्निर्नित्यानुगृहीतः स्यात् Āśval. -2 To receive, welcome. -4 To hold up, support, uphold. त्रिभिस्तीक्ष्णैर्महावेगैर- न्वगृह्णाच्छिरः शरैः Mb.6.12.45. -5 To follow in robbing, seizing or depriving. -6 To keep to, conform or correspond to, follow, take after; आकृतिमनुगृह्णन्ति गुणाः Vb.2; क्षात्रधर्मश्चानुगृहीतो भवति U.5. -Caus. To cause to favour, or to favour; आर्यस्य दर्शनेनात्मानमनुग्राहयितुम् Mu.4. अनुग्रहः, -हणम् 1 A favour, kindness, obligation; showing favour, obliging, rewarding (opp. निग्रह); निग्रहानुग्रहकर्ता Pt.1; पादार्पणानुग्रहपूतपृष्ठम् R.2.35; अनुग्रह इवेयमभ्यर्थना Ś.1; अनुग्रहं संस्मरणप्रवृत्तम् Ku.3.3. -2 Assistance, help (shown to the poor in feeding them &c. दरिद्रादिपोषणम्). -3 Facilitating by spells. -4 Acceptance. -5 Rear-guard. -Comp. -कातर a. anxious to please or for favour. -सर्गः creation of feelings or mental conditions.

anugrāhya	अनुग्राह्य pot. p. Fit to be favoured or obliged; ततः कथनेनात्मानमनुग्राह्यमिच्छामि K.134; न वयमनुग्राह्याः प्रायो देवतानाम् 61.

anugrāhaka	अनुग्राहक a. 1 Favouring, furthering, promoting. -2 Gracious, kind.

anugrāsakaḥ	अनुग्रासकः A mouthful; the equivalent of a mouthful.

anudagra	अनुदग्र a. 1 Not lofty, low. -2 Soft, tender; weak, not sharp.

aparigraha	अपरिग्रह a. Without possessions or belonging, attendants &c; Without a wife; तदाप्रभृत्येव विमुक्तसङ्गः पतिः पशूनामपरिग्रहो$भूत Ku.1.53. quite destitute, as in निराशीर- परिग्रहः Bg.6.1. -हः 1 Non-acceptance, rejection, renunciation, one of the several kinds of yamas (mental restraints) stated in Yogaśāstra by Patañjali. -2 Destitution, poverty. अपरिचयिन् aparicayin परिचेय paricēya अपरिचयिन् परिचेय a. Having no acquaintance; unsocial, misanthropic.

apāṇigrahaṇam	अपाणिग्रहणम् Celibacy.

apragrāha	अप्रग्राह a. Unrestrained, unbridled.

apratigrāhaka	अप्रतिग्राहक a. Not accepting.

apratigrāhya	अप्रतिग्राह्य a. Unacceptable.

abhigrah	अभिग्रह् (Ved. ग्रभ्) 9 U. 1 To take or seize, catch, catch hold of, seize forcibly, attack; रिपुणाभिगृह्य Dk.5, 98.13. -2 To accept, take. -3 To receive (as a guest). -4 To fold, lay or bring together (as the hands). -5 To set, show or bring forth (as blossom, fruit &c.). -Caus. To catch or surprise one in the very act, to let oneself be so caught; अर्यवर्यस्य कस्यचिद् गृहे चोरयित्वा रूपाभिग्राहितो बद्धः Dk.96.

abhigrahaḥ	अभिग्रहः 1 Seizing, robbing, plundering शङ्कारूपकर्मा- भिग्रहः Kau. A.4. -2 Attack, assault, onset. यातव्यामित्र- योरभिग्रहचिन्ता Kau. A.7. -3 Challenge. -4 Complaint. -5 Authority, power, weight.

abhigrahaṇam	अभिग्रहणम् Robbing, seizing in the presence of the owner.

abhiśirogra	अभिशिरोग्र a. With the top and bottom inverted.

abhyagra	अभ्यग्र a. [अभिमुखं अग्रं यस्य] 1 Near, proximate; अभ्यग्रं च प्रपश्यन्ति युद्धमानन्दिनो द्विजाः Mb.6.2.18. -2 Fresh, new; -ग्रम proximity; vicinity. It is used adverbially also in इदं शोणितमभ्यग्रं संप्रहारे$च्युतत् तयोः Bk.4.28.

ānugrāmika	आनुग्रामिक a. (-की f.) [अनुग्रामं भवः ठञ्] Rural, rustic.

ugra	उग्र a. [उच्-रन् गश्चान्तादेशः Uṇ.2.28] 1 Fierce, cruel, ferocious, savage (as a look &c.); ˚दर्शनः having a fierce or cruel look. -2 Formidable, terrific, frightful; सिंहनिपातमुग्रम् R.2.5; Bg.11.3; Ms.6.75,12.75; ˚दन्तः, ˚नासिकः &c. -3 Powerful, mighty, strong, violent, intense; उग्रातपां वेलाम् Ś.3 intensely hot. उग्रशोकाम् Me.115 v. l.; निखिलरसायनराजो गन्धेनोग्रेण लशुन इव Bv. Sharp, pungent, hot, -5 High, noble. यत्र भगवानास्ते वाल्मीकिसुग्रधीः Rām.7.49.1. -6 Angry, passionate, wrathful. -7 Ready to do any work, industrious. -ग्रः 1 N. of Śiva or Rudra; जघ्ने$द्भुतैणवपुषा$$श्रमतो$- पकृष्टो मारीचमाशु विशिखेन यथा कमुग्रः Bhāg.9.1.1. -2 N. of a mixed tribe, descendant of a Kṣatriya father and Śūdra mother (his business being to catch or kill animals dwelling in holes, such as snakes; cf. क्षत्रियाच्छूद्रकन्यायां क्रूराचारविहारवान् । क्षत्रशूद्र- वपुर्जन्तुरुग्रो नाम प्रजायते ॥ Ms.1.9,13,15.). -3 N. of a tree शोभाञ्जनवृक्ष (Mar. शेवगा). -4 A group of five asterisms; their names are :- पूर्वाफल्गुनी, पूर्वाषाढा, पूर्वाभाद्रपदा, मघा and भरणी. -5 N. of a country called Kerala (Modern Malabar). -6 The sentiment called रौद्र. -7 Wind. -8 A royal attendant (like उग्र tribe); उग्राः प्रत्येनसः सूतग्रामण्यः Bṛi. Up.4.3.37. -ग्रा 1 N. of different plants; वचा, यवानी, धन्याक. (Mar. वेखंड, ओवा, मेथी). -2 A cruel woman. -ग्री A kind of being belonging to the class of demons; य उग्रीणामुग्रबाहुर्ययुः Av.4.24.2. -ग्रम् 1 A certain deadly poison, the root of Aconitum Ferox (वत्सनाभविषम्; Mar. बचनाग). -2 Wrath, anger. -Comp. -ईशः the mighty or terrible lord, N. of Śiva. -कर्मन् n. fierce in action, cruel. -काण्डः a sort of gourd (कारवेल). -काली form of Durgā. -गन्ध a. strongsmelling. (-न्धः) 1 the Cahmpaka tree. -2 N. of other trees also; कटुफल, अर्जकवृक्ष. -3 garlic. (-न्धा) 1 Orris root. -2 a medicinal plant. -3 N. of various plants; यवानी, वचा, अजमोदा. (-न्धम्) Asafœtida. -गन्धिन् a. strong-smelling. -चयः a strong desire. -चारिणी, -चण्डा N. of Durgā. -जाति a. base-born. -तारा N. of a goddess. -तेजस् a. endowed with powerful or terrible energy. -दंष्ट्र a. having terrific teeth. -दण्ड a. ruling with a rod of iron, stern, cruel, relentless; Pt.3. -ण्डः Stern rule; तस्योग्रदण्डसंविग्नाः सर्वे लोकाः सपालकाः । अन्यत्रालब्धशरणाः शरणं ययुरच्युतम् ॥ Bhāg.7.4.21. -दर्शन, -रूप a. frightful in appearance, fierce-looking, grim, terrible. -दुहितृ f. the daughter of a powerful man. -धन्वन् a. having a powerful bow. (m.) N. of Śiva and Indra; पिङ्गस्तमुग्रधन्वा कृणोतु हृदयाविधम् Av.8.6.18. -नासिक a. large-nosed. -पीठम् A ground plan in which the whole area is divided into 36 equal parts (Mānasāra 7.7). -पुत्र a. born in a mighty family. (-त्रः) N. of Kārttikeya. -पूति a. horribly stinking; Māl.5.16. -रेतस् m. a form of Rudra. -वीर a. having powerful men. -वीर्यः Assafœtida (Mar. हिंग). -शासन a. strict in orders, severe in commands. -शेखरा 'crest of Śiva'. N. of the Ganges. -शोक a. sorely-grieving, deeply afflicted. -श्रवस् (see वृद्धश्रवस्) N. of the son of रोमहर्षण. उग्रश्रवाः पुरा सूतो रोमहर्षणसंभवः Bm.1.2. -श्रवणदर्शन a. terrible to hear and see. -सेनः 1 N. of a son of Dhṛitarāṣṭra. -2 N. of a king of Mathurā and father of Kaṁsa. He was deposed by his son; but Kṛiṣṇa after having slain Kaṁsa restored him to the throne. (-ना) N. of the wife of Akrūra; ˚जः N. of Kaṁsa, the uncle and enemy of Krisna.

ugraka	उग्रक a. Brave, powerful &c.

ugratā	उग्रता त्वम् Violence, fearfulness, passion, anger, pungency, acrimony.

ugraṃpaśya	उग्रंपश्य a. [उग्रं पश्यति, उग्रं-दृश्, खश्-मुम् P.III.2.37] 1 Fierce-looking, frightful, hideous. -2 Malignant, wicked.

udagra	उदग्र a. [उद्गतमग्रं यस्य] 1 With elevated top, projecting, pointing upwards; as in ˚दन्त. आवर्तनाभिरोजस्वी काञ्च- नोरुरुदग्रपात् Bhāg.4.21.16. -2 Tall, lofty, high, elevated, exalted (fig. also); स वृक्षशिखरोदग्रः प्रविवेश रसाजलम् Rām. 5.56.49 उदग्रदशनांशुभिः Śi.2.21,4.19; उदग्रः क्षत्रस्य शब्दः R.2.53; उदग्रप्लुतत्वात् Ś.1.7 high leaps Śi.12.65; ˚ग्रावन् Dk.6; विक्रमोदग्रं शिरः R.15.27 exalted; गन्धोदग्रं पुष्पम् 16.87 rich in odour. -3 Large, broad, vast, big; अवन्तिनाथोयमुदग्रबाहुः R.6.32; Mu.6.12. -4 Noble, good-looking (उदार); हरिन्मणिश्याममुदग्रविग्रहम् Ki.14.41. -5 Advanced in age. -6 Conspicuous, distinguished, exalted, magnified, increased; स मङ्गलोदग्रतरप्रभावः R.2.71,9.64,13.5. -7 Intense, unbearable (as heat); अखिद्यतासन्नमुदग्रतापम् (रविम्) Śi.4.12. -8 Fierce, fearful; संदधे दृशमुदग्रतारकाम् R.11.69. -9 Excited, furious, enraptured; मदोदग्राः ककुद्मन्तः R.4.22. -1 Mighty, strong; तत उदग्र इव द्विरदे Ki.18.1; वेगोदग्रं विषम् V.5.18 strong or sharp (deadly). -Comp. -दत् a. having projecting teeth, large toothed. (m) A tusked elephant. -प्लुतत्वम् A lofty bounding. पश्योदग्रप्लुतत्वाद् वियति बहुतरं स्तोकमुर्व्यां प्रयाति । Ś1.7. -नखः Folded hand (अञ्जलि); कायेन विनयोपेता मूर्ध्नोदग्रनखेन च Mb.7.54.6.

udagrayati	उदग्रयति Den. P. To display prominently; अन्तः शरीरपरिशोषमुदग्रयन्तः (वृक्षाः) Mu.6.13.

udavagrahaḥ	उदवग्रहः A Svarita accent depending on an Udātta which stands in the Avagraha q. v.

udgrath	उद्ग्रथ् 1, 9. U. 1 To bind up, tie into bundles. -2 To tie up, put or sew together (as garlands &c.); इयमुद्ग्रथते स्रजो विचित्राः Mu.1.4; tie or fasten, intertwine; लताप्रतानोद्ग्रथितैः स केशैः R.2.8. -3 To unbind, loosen (as a knot &c.). -Caus कर्माशयं ग्रथितमुद्ग्रथयन्ति सन्तः Bhāg.4.22.39; ग्रन्थिमुद्ग्रथयितुं हृदयेशे वाससः स्पृशति मानधनायाः Śi.1.63.

udgrantha	उद्ग्रन्थ a. Unbound, loosened. -थः A section, chapter.

udgrathanam	उद्ग्रथनम् The act of winding, binding; साभिवीक्ष्य दिशः सर्वा वेण्युद्ग्रथनमुत्तमम् (मणिम्) Rām.5.67.3.

udgranthi	उद्ग्रन्थि a. 1 Untied (fig. also). -2 Free from worldly ties or attachments.

udgraha	उद्ग्रह 9 P. 1 To take up, lift up; शक्तिं चोग्रामुदग्रहीत् Bk.15.52; elevate, erect, raise; उद्गृहीतालकान्ताः Me.8. -2 To take or draw out, take away. स यथा सैन्धवखिल्य उदके प्रास्त उदकमेवानुविलीयेत न हास्योद्ग्रहणायेव स्यात् Bṛi. Up. 2.4.12. -3 To deposit. -4 To preserve. -5 To cease (to rain). यद् गृह्णाति तन्निधनम् Ch. Up.2.3.2. -6 To break off, discontinue (speaking); उद्गृह्णन् निधनम् Av. 9.6.47. -7 To concede, grant, allow; मायां मदीयामुद्गृह्य वदतां किं नु दुर्घटम् Bhāg.11.22.4. -Caus. 1 To cause to take up or out; cause to pay. -2 To state, place before, adduce; विशेषविदुषः शास्त्रं यत्तवोद्ग्राह्यते पुरः Śi.2.75. -4 To extol, laud up. उद्ग्रभणम् udgrabhaṇam उद्ग्राभः udgrābhḥ उद्ग्रभणम् उद्ग्राभः [उद्-ग्रह-अन् or अ 'ग्रहोर्भे- च्छन्दसि' Sk. on P.III.1.84. Vārt.] 1 Ved. Taking up, raising; उद्ग्राभं च निग्राभं ब्रह्मदेवा अवीवृधन् Ts.1.1.13. -2 Giving, donation.

udgrahaṇam	उद्ग्रहणम् 1 Taking up, raising. -2 An object that can be accomplished by religious or other acts. -3 Eructation.

udgrāhaḥ	उद्ग्राहः उदि ग्रहः P.III.3.35. 1 Lifting or taking up. -2 (In the Prātiśākhyas) The rule of Sandhi which causes the change of the terminations अः, ए and ओ to अ before a following vowel. -3 Replying in argument; rejoinder. -4 An objection. -Comp. -पदवृत्तिः f. the Sandhi called Udgrāha; see above.

udgrāhaṇikā	उद्ग्राहणिका Replying in argument.

udgrāhita	उद्ग्राहित p. p. 1 Lifted or taken up. -2 Taken away. -3 Excellent; exalted. -4 Deposited, delivered. -5 Bound, tied. -6 Recalled, remembered. उद्ग्रीव udgrīva उद्ग्रीविन् udgrīvin उद्ग्रीव उद्ग्रीविन् a. With the neck uplifted; उद्ग्रीवैर्मयूरैः M.1.21; Amaru.99.

upagranthaḥ	उपग्रन्थः A subsidiary writing or a class of such writings.

upagras	उपग्रस् 1 P. To swallow down, devour, eclipse; Mb.2.

upagrah	उपग्रह् 9 U. 1 To hold under, seize or collect from below; as रसम्. -2 To seize, take, take possession of; तवैव पादावुपगृह्य Rām.; उपगृह्यास्पदं चैव Ms.7.184. -3 To meet with, obtain; स मृत्युमुपगृह्णाति गर्भमश्वतरी यथा Chāṇ. 19. -4 To subdue, vanquish. -5 To provide. -6 To conciliate, take as one's ally, favour, support; तदुपगृहीतेन म्लेच्छराजबलेन Mu.1. -7 To conceive with one's mind, grasp mentally; धियोपगृह्णन्स्मितशोभितेन Bhāg.3.22.21. -8 To decide, determine. -9 To accept, approve.

upagrahaḥ	उपग्रहः 1 Confinement, seizure. -2 Defeat, frustration; अपि च विहिते मत्कृत्यानां निकाममुपग्रहे Mu.4.2. -3 A prisoner. -4 Joining, addition. -5 (a) Favour, encouragement, assistance, conciliation; सोपग्रहम् K.156. परविषये कृत्याकृत्यपक्षोपग्रहः । Kau. A.1. अमित्रोपग्रहं चास्य ते कुर्युः क्षिप्रमापदि Mb.12.96.14. (b) Favourableness, kindness, complacence; सोपग्रहं K.264. -6 Use. -7 A kind of peace purchased by giving over every thing; cf. क्रियते प्राणरक्षार्थं सर्वदानादुपग्रहः H.4.121. -8 The voice or pada of a verb; सुप्तिङुपग्रहलिङ्गनराणां Mbh. III.1.85;1.4; and 2.127. -9 A pile or heap of kuśa grass. -1 The presiding spirit or cause which directs a planet's motion. -11 A minor planet राहु, केतु &c.), a secondary heavenly body, such as a comet, meteor.

upagrahaṇam	उपग्रहणम् 1 Seizing (from below); taking hold of; as in पादोपग्रहणम्. -2 Seizure, capture, taking one prisoner. -3 Supporting, furthering, promoting. -4 Holy study, study of the Vedas (after being initiated into them); वेदोपग्रहणार्थाय तावग्राहयत प्रभुः Rām.

upagrāhaḥ	उपग्राहः 1 Making a present. -2 A present; उच्चा- वचानुपग्राहान् राजभिः प्रापितान् बहून् Mb.2.

upagrāhya	उपग्राह्य pot. p. To be favoured or retained in service; Mu.5. -ह्यः 1 An offering or present. -2 Particularly, a present or offering to a great man or king; the modern Nazarāṇā.

upasaṃgrah	उपसंग्रह् 9 P. 1 To take upon oneself, experience, feel, suffer. -2 To receive, accept. -3 To seize, catch hold of; पाणिभ्यां तूपसंगृह्य Ms.3.224. -4 To take into custody or possession. -5 To win over, conciliate, make favourable; पिण्डदानादिनोपसंगृह्य Dk.58. -6 To clasp, embrace.

upasaṃgrahaḥ	उपसंग्रहः हणम् 1 Keeping pleased, supporting, maintaining; ताक्ष्णरसदायिनामुपसंग्रहार्थम् Mu.2. -2 Respectful salutation (as by touching the feet of the person saluted); स्फुरति रभसात्पाणिः पादोपसंग्रहणाय च Mv.2.3. -3 Accepting, adopting; Br. Sūt.1.4.41. -4 Polite address, obeisance. -5 Collecting, joining. -6 Taking, accepting (as a wife); दारोपसंग्रहः Y.1.56. -7 (An external) appendage, any necessary article either for use or decoration (उपकरण). -8 A pillow, cushion; Mb.4.

upasaṃgrāhya	उपसंग्राह्य a. To be respectfully saluted, respectable, venerable.

upāgram	उपाग्रम् 1 The part next to the end or top. -2 A secondary member.

upāgrahaṇam	उपाग्रहणम् Reading the Vedas after being initiated to them.

upodgrahaḥ	उपोद्ग्रहः Knowledge.

aikāgra	ऐकाग्र a. Intent on one object.

aikāgryam	ऐकाग्र्यम् Intentness on one object.

augrasenaḥ	औग्रसेनः Kaṁsa, the son of उग्रसेन.

augryam	औग्र्यम् [उग्र ष्यञ्] Formidableness, fierceness, dreadfulness, cruelty &c.

jāgrat	जाग्रत् a. 1 Watching, being awake. -2 Attentive, careful, watchful. -3 Clear, bright. -m. Ved. Dreaming in a waking state, day-dream.

daurgrahaḥ	दौर्ग्रहः The Asvamedha sacrifice.

nigranthanam	निग्रन्थनम् Killing, slaughter.

nigranthiḥ	निग्रन्थिः m. The cover of a book; Hch.

nigrah	निग्रह् 9 P 1 To keep or hold down, keep in check. -2 To curb, restrain, suppress, control; निगृह्य शोकम् K.25; स्वकं तेजो निगृह्य Pt.3.174; Bg.2.68; R.5.59; 14.85. -3 To stop, obstruct; निगृहीतो बलाद् द्वारि Mb. -4 To punish, chastise; अधार्मिकं त्रिभिर्न्यायैर्निगृह्णीयात् प्रयत्नतः Ms.8.31;9.38. -5 To seize, catch, apprehend, lay hold of; तमार्यगृह्यं निगृहीतधेनुः R.2.33. -6 To close or contract (as eyes); माथुरो$क्षिणी निगृह्य Mk.2. -7 To subdue, conquer, overpower; प्रज्ञया निग्रहीतुं शक्यः Mu.1; 1.28. -8 To draw in, restrain; निगृह्यन्तामभीशवः Ś.1.

nigrahaḥ	निग्रहः 1 Keeping in check, restraint, curbing, subjection; as in इन्द्रियनिग्रह Ms.6.92; Y.1.222; Bh.1.66; चञ्चलं मनः...... तस्याहं निग्रहं मन्ये वायोरिव सुदुष्करम् Bg.6.34; तस्य ता वपुषाक्षिप्ता निग्रहार्थं जजृम्भिरे Bu. Ch.4.6. -2 Suppression, obstruction, putting down; तथेन्द्रियाणां दह्यन्ते दोषाः प्राणस्य निग्रहात् Ms.6.71. -3 Overtaking, capturing, arresting; त्वन्निग्रहे तु वरगात्रि न मे प्रयत्नः Mk.1. 22; Śi.2.88. -4 Confinement, imprisonment. -5 Defeat, overthrow, vanquishing. -6 Dispelling, destruction, removing; दिनमुखानि रविर्हिमनिग्रहैर्विमलयन् मलयं नगम- त्यजत् R.9.25;15.6; Ku.5.53. -7 Arresting of disease, cure. -8 Punishment (opp. अनुग्रह) निग्राहानु- ग्रहस्य कर्ता Pt.1; निग्रहो$प्ययमनुग्रहीकृतः R.11.9,55;12. 52,63. -9 Rebuke, reprimand, blame. -1 Aversion, dislike, disgust. -11 (In Nyāya phil.) A flaw in an argument, a fault in a syllogism (by which a disputant is put down in argument); cf. Mu.5.1. -12 A handle. -13 A limit, boundary. -14 The Supreme Being. -15 Transgressing (अतिलङ्घन); निग्रहाद्धर्मशास्त्राणा- मनुरुद्ध्यन्नपेतभीः Mb.12.24.13. -Comp. -स्थानम् the reason of defeat, unfitness to be argued with, one of the 16 categories of the Naiyāyikas; एवमपि प्रकृतं दूषयितुमशक्नु- वतस्तत्सिद्धान्तान्तरदूषणे निग्रहस्थानमापद्यते । ŚB. on MS.1.1.5.

nigrahaṇa	निग्रहण a. Holding back or down, suppression. -णम् 1 Subduing, suppression. -2 Capture, confinement. -3 Chastisement, punishment in general. -4 Defeat. -5 War, fight.

nigrābhaḥ	निग्राभः Pressing down, letting sink, suppressing (the voice).

nigrāhaḥ	निग्राहः 1 Punishment. -2 An imprecation; as in निग्राहस्ते भूयात् 'confusion seize thee !'; Bk.7.43.

nirgrāhya	निर्ग्राह्य a. Perceivable; विदग्धैर्निर्ग्राह्यो न पुनरविदग्धैरतिशयः U.4.21.

nirgranthanam	निर्ग्रन्थनम् Killing, slaughter.

naiyagrodham	नैयग्रोधम् The fruit of न्यग्रोध, the Indian fig-tree.

nyagrodhaḥ	न्यग्रोधः 1 The (Indian) fig tree; जटाः कृत्वा गमिष्यामि न्यग्रोधक्षीरमानय Rām.2.52.68. -2 A fathom (measured by the arms extended). -3 The Śamī tree. -4 An epithet of Viṣṇu. -धी (-धिका) N. of a plant (Mar. उंदीरकानी). -Comp. -परिमण्डलः a man being a fathom in circumference; (thus described:-- महा- धनुर्धराश्चैव त्रेतायां चक्रवर्तिनः । सर्वलक्षणसंपन्ना न्यग्रोधपरिमण्डलाः ॥). -परिमण्डला an excellent woman; (she is thus described:-- स्तनौ सुकठिनौ यस्या नितम्बे च विशालता । मध्ये क्षीणा भवेद्या सा न्यग्रोधपरिमण्डला (Śabdak); दूर्वाकाण्डमिव श्यामा न्यग्रोधपरिमण्डला Bk.5.18.

nyavagrahaḥ	न्यवग्रहः The accentless vowel at the end of the first member of a compound.

parigrah	परिग्रह् 9. P. 1 To clasp round, embrace. -2 To encircle; surround, fence or hedge round; न्यविशन्त ततः सर्वे परिगृह्य सरस्वतीम् Mb.5.178.23. -3 To lay hold of, seize. -4 To take, assume. -5 To accept. -6 To favour, patronize; देवेन च परिगृहीतः M.1;1.13. -7 To support, assist, guide; राक्षसमतिपरिगृहीतः Mu.1. -8 To put on (a dress). -9 To take possession of, master, overpower. -1 To conceive, comprehend. -11 To undertake. -12 To receive hospitably; परिग्रहेण ब्राह्मेण परिगृह्य महाद्युतिः Mb.1.195.1. -13 To take (a wife), marry; प्रथमपरि- गृहीतं स्यान्न वेत्यव्यवस्यन् Ś.5.19. -14 To conform to, follow. -15 To surpass, excel.

parigrahaḥ	परिग्रहः 1 Seizing, holding, taking, grasping; आसन- रज्जुपरिग्रहे R.9.46; शङ्कापरिग्रहः Mu.1 'taking or entertaining a doubt'. -2 Surrounding, enclosing, encircling, fencing round. -3 Putting on, wrapping round (as a dress); मौलिपरिग्रहः R.18.38. -4 Assuming, taking; मानपरिग्रहः Amaru.97; विवाहलक्ष्मी˚ U.4. -5 Receiving, taking, accepting, acceptauce; भौमो मुनेः स्थानपरिग्रहो$यम् R.13.36; अर्ध्यपरिग्रहान्ते 7;12.16; Ku. 6.53; विद्यापरिग्रहाय Māl.1; so आसनपरिग्रहं करोतु देवः U.3 'your majesty will be pleased to take a seat or sit down'. -6 Possessions, property, belongings; त्यक्तसर्वपरिग्रहः Bg. 4.21; R.15.55; V.4.26. -7 Taking in marriage, marriage; नवे दारपरिग्रहे U.1.19; Māl.5.27; असंशयं क्षत्रपरिग्रह- क्षमा Ś.1.22; न हि गणयति क्षुद्रो जन्तुः परिग्रहफल्गुताम् Bh.1.9. -8 A wife, queen; प्रयतपरिग्रहद्वितीयः R.1.95,92;9.14; 11.33;16.8; Ś.5.28,31; परिग्रहबहुत्वे$पि Ś.3.19; प्राप श्रियं मुनिवरस्य परिग्रहो$सौ Rām. Ch. -9 Taking under one's protection, favouring; धन्याः स्मो वः परिग्रहात् U.7. 11; M.1.13; कुर्वन्ति पाण्डवपरिग्रहमेव पौराः Pañch.1.2. -1 Attendants, followers, train, retinue, suite; परिग्रहेण सर्वेण कोषेण च महीयसा Śiva.B.8.4. -11 A household, family, members of a family. -12 The seraglio or household of a king, harem. -13 Anything received, a present; राजपरिग्रहो$यम् Ś.1. -14 Assent, consent. -15 Taking possession of, acquiring. -16 A claim. -17 Entertaining, honouring, receiving (a guest &c.). Mb.1.195.1. -18 An entertainer. -19 Assistance. -2 A husband. -21 Respect, reverence. -22 Grace, favour. -23 Comprehension, understanding. -24 Undertaking, performing. -25 Subjugation; धर्षितो मत्परिग्रहः Mb.12.32.55. -26 Dominion. -27 Punishment. -28 Connection, relation. -29 Summing up, totality. -3 A house, residence. -31 Removing, taking away. -32 A curse; निर्मुक्तनिष्ठुरपरिग्रहपाशबन्धः Rām. Ch. (cf. पत्नीपरिजनादानमूलशापाः परिग्रहाः Ak.). -33 (In Ved. gram.) The double mention of a word both before and after इति. -34 The form which precedes इति. -35 Root, origin. -36 The eclipse of the sun or moon. -37 An oath. -38 The rear of an army. -39 N. of Viṣṇu. -4 The body; आश्रयन्त्याः स्वभावेन मम पूर्वपरिग्रहम् Mb.12. 32.57. (com. स्वभावेन चित्तेन मम परिग्रहं शरीरं आश्रयन्त्याः). -41 Administration; राज्यपरिग्रहः Mb.12.32.51. -Comp. -अर्थीय a. generalizing; having the sense of comprehension; Nir.1.7. -द्वितीय a. accompanied by one's wife or family. -बहुत्वम् multitude of wives.

parigrahaṇam	परिग्रहणम् Wrapping round, putting on.

parigrahītṛ	परिग्रहीतृ m. 1 A husband; तामद्य संप्रेष्य परिग्रहीतुः Ś.4.22. -2 An assistant. -3 An adoptive father.

parigrāhaḥ	परिग्राहः The fencing round of the sacrificial altar.

parigrāhaka	परिग्राहक a. Favouring, befriending; B.R.

parigrāhya	परिग्राह्य a. To be treated or addressed kindly.

pāragrāmika	पारग्रामिक a. (-की f.) Alien, hostile, inimical; यावदरिः पारग्रामिकं विधिमाचिकीर्षति Dk.2.2. ˚योगः Measures which are employed to capture the villages of a foreign king; Kau. A.1.18.

pārigrāmika	पारिग्रामिक a. (-की f.) Situated round a village; P.VI.3.61. पारिजातः pārijātḥ पारिजातकः pārijātakḥ पारिजातः पारिजातकः [पारमस्यास्तीति पारी समुद्रस्तत्र जातः, तस्य समुद्रोत्पन्नत्वात्] 1 N. of one of the five trees of Paradise, Nictanthus arbor-tristis (said to have been produced at the churning of the ocean and come into the possession of Indra, from whom it was wrested by Kṛiṣṇa and planted in the garden of his beloved Satyabhāmā), कल्पद्रुमाणामिव पारिजातः R.6.6;1.11;17.7; पञ्चैते देवतरवो मन्दारः पारिजातकः Ak. -2 The coral tree. -3 Fragrance. -Comp. -पुष्पकः A variety of gems. Kau. A.2.11.29.

pragrathanam	प्रग्रथनम् Stringing together, weaving.

pragrah	प्रग्रह् 9 U. 1 To take, hold, seize, grasp. -2 To receive, accept. -3 To curb, restrain. -4 To stretch forth, extend. -5 To favour, behave friendly with. -6 To keep separate (as the प्रगृह्य vowels). -7 To offer. -8 To unite with. -Caus. To receive, accept.

pragraha	प्रग्रह a. 1 Holding in front, stretching forth (hands); एवमुक्तस्तु मुनिना प्राञ्जलिः प्रग्रहो नृपः । अभ्यवादयत प्राज्ञः Rām. 7.82.14. -2 Seizing, taking. -हः 1 Holding or stretching forth, holding out. -2 Laying hold of, taking, grasping, seizing; न हि मे मुच्यते कश्चित् कथञ्चित् प्रग्रहं गतः Mb.3.179.16. -3 The commencement of an eclipse. -4 (a) A rein, bridle; धृताः प्रग्रहाः अवतरत्वायुष्मान् Ś.1; Śi.12.31. (b) A whip, lash, scourge. -5 A check, restraint; यः प्रग्रहानुग्रहयोर्यथान्यायं विचक्षणः Rām.2.1.25. -6 Binding, confinement; सो$स्माकं वैरपुरुषो दुर्मतिः प्रग्रहं गतः Mb.12.7.33. -8 A prisoner, captive. -8 Taming, breaking (as an animal). -9 A ray of light. -1 The string of a balance. -11 A vowel not subject to the rules of Sandhi or euphony; see प्रगृह्य. -12 N. of Viṣṇu. -13 The arm. -14 A leader, guide. -15 Kindness, favour, a reward; अपराधं सहेताल्पं तुष्येदल्पे$पि चोदये । महोप- कारं चाध्यक्षं प्रग्रहेणाभिपूजयेत् ॥ Kau. A.2.7.25. -16 The Karṇikāra tree. -17 The gains in the form of gifts to courtiers; राजोपजीविनां प्रग्रहप्रदेशभोगपरिहारभक्तवेतनलाभम् Kau. A.2.7.25. -18 Hoarding, collecting (संग्रह); असाधुनिग्रहरतः साधूनां प्रग्रहे रतः Mb.12.21.14. -19 Folding, joining (hands); श्वश्रूणामविशेषेण प्राञ्जलिप्रग्रहेण च Rām.7. 48.1. -2 Obstinacy, stubbornness. -21 A companion, satellite.

pragrahaṇam	प्रग्रहणम् 1 Taking, seizing, grasping. -2 The commencement of an eclipse. -3 A rein, bridle. -4 A check, restraint. -5 Binding, confining. -6 Offering. -7 Guiding.

pragrahin	प्रग्रहिन् a. One holding the rein; पथि प्रग्रहिणं कंस- माभाष्याहाशरीरवाक् Bhāg.1.1.34.

pragrāhaḥ	प्रग्राहः 1 Seizing, taking. -2 Bearing, carrying; प्रगाहैरिव पात्राणामन्वेष्या मैथिली कृतैः Bk.7.44. -3 The string of a balance. तुलासूत्रे$श्वादिरश्मौ प्रग्राहः प्रग्रहो$पि च Ak.3.236; वणिक् प्रग्राहवान् यद्वत् काले चरति सिद्धये Bk.7.49. -4 A rein, bridle.

pragrīvaḥ	प्रग्रीवः वम् 1 A painted turret. -2 A wooden fence round a building; Rāj. T.8.328. -3 A window. -4 A stable. -5 The top of a tree. -6 A pleasurehouse.

pratigrah	प्रतिग्रह् 9. U. 1 To hold, seize, take, support; वर्षधर- प्रतिगृहीतमेनम् M.4; Ms.2.48. -2 To take, accept, receive; ददाति प्रतिगृह्णाति Pt.2; अमोघाः प्रतिगृह्णन्तावर्ध्यानुपदमा- शिषः R.1.44;2.22. -3 To receive or accept as a present. -4 To receive inimically, oppose, encounter, resist; to attack, assault; प्रतिजग्राह कालिङ्गस्तमस्त्रैर्गजसाधनः R.4.4;12.47. -5 To take in marriage, marry; विधिवत् प्रतिगृह्यापि त्यजेत् कन्यां विगर्हिताम् Ms.9.72. -6 To obey, conform or listen to. -7 To resort to, betake oneself to. -8 To eclipse. -9 To assent to, admit. -1 To occupy, take possession of. -11 To deprive (one) of. -12 To welcome, receive; प्रत्यगृह्णाद्यथान्यायं विदुरश्च महामनाः Mb. 14.66.6. -13 To eat, drink. -Caus. 1 To cause to accept, give, present. -3 To allow to take or retain; मुष्टं प्रतिग्राहयता स्वमर्थं पात्रीकृतो दस्युरिवासि येन Ś.5.2.

pratigrahaḥ	प्रतिग्रहः 1 Receiving, accepting. -2 Receiving or accepting a donation; अयाचितोपपन्ने तु नास्ति दोषः प्रतिग्रहे -3 The right of receiving or accepting a donation. -4 The right of receiving gifts (which is a peculiar prerogative of Brāhmaṇas); अध्यापनमध्ययनं यजनं याजनं तथा । दानं प्रतिग्रहं चैव ब्राह्मणानामकल्पयत् ॥ Ms.1.88;4.86; Y.1.118 -5 A gift, present, donation; राज्ञः प्रतिग्रहो$यम् Ś.1; Śi.14.35. -6 A receiver (of a gift). -7 Kind or friendly reception; प्रतिग्रहाय पाण्डूनां प्रेषयामास कौरवान् Mb.1.27.12. -8 Favour, grace. -9 Marrying; तत्प्रतिग्रहलाभाय जित्वा भूपान् स्वयंवरे Bm.1.456. -1 Listening to. -11 The rear of an army. -12 A spitting-pot. -13 The sun near the moon's node. -14 a chambervessel (for sick persons). -15 a grasper, seizer; केश- प्रतिग्रहः = barber.

pratigrahaṇam	प्रतिग्रहणम् 1 Receiving presents. -2 Reception. -3 Marrying. -4 A vessel.

pratigrahin	प्रतिग्रहिन् m. A receiver.

pratigrahītṛ	प्रतिग्रहीतृ m. 1 A receiver. -2 A husband, one who marries.

pratigrāhaḥ	प्रतिग्राहः 1 Accepting gifts. -2 A spitting-pot, spittoon. प्रतिग्राहक pratigrāhaka हिन् hin प्रतिग्राहक हिन् a. One who receives or accepts gifts.

pratigrāhya	प्रतिग्राह्य a. Acceptable, admissible.

pratyagra	प्रत्यग्र a. 1 Fresh, young, new, recent; प्रत्यग्रहतानां मांसम् Ve.3; कुसुमशयनं न प्रत्यग्रम् V.3.1; Me.4; R.1. 54; Ratn.1.21. -2 Repeated. -3 Pure. -Comp. -वयस् a. young in age, in the prime of life, youthful. प्रत्यञ्च् pratyañc प्रत्यच् pratyac प्रत्यञ्च् प्रत्यच् a. (-प्रतीची f. or according to Vopadeva प्रत्यञ्ची also) 1 Turned or directed towards; turned inward; मनः प्रत्यक् चित्ते सविधमवधायात्तमरुतः Śivamahimna 25. -2 Being behind. -3 Following, subsequent; समेत्य तरसा प्रत्यग्द्वाभ्यां तद्भ्यां बलं बली । निहत्य Bhāg. 1.15.3. -4 Averted, turned away, turning back; Pt.3.181. -5 Western, westerly. -6 Inner, interior. -7 Equal to, a match for. -m. 1 The individual soul. -2 Future time. -Comp. -अक्षम् (प्रत्यगक्षम्) an inner organ. -आत्मन् m. (प्रत्यगात्मन्) the individual soul; कश्चिद्धीरः प्रत्यगात्मानमैक्षदावृत्तचक्षुरमृतत्वमिच्छन् Kaṭh.2.1.1. -आनन्द a. inwardly joyful. -आशापतिः (प्रत्यगाशापतिः) 'The lord of the western direction', an epithet of Varuṇa. -उदच् f. (प्रत्यगुदच्) the north-west. -चेतन a. 1 whose thoughts are turned upon himself. -2 intelligent. (-नः) 1 the supreme soul; the Puruṣa in the Sāṅkhya philosophy. -2 the soul. -दक्षिणतः (प्रत्यग्दक्षिणतः) ind. towards the south-west. -दृश् f. (प्रत्यग्दृश्) an inward glance, a glance directed inwards; स्वांशेन सर्वतनुभृन्मनसि प्रतीतप्रत्यग्दृशे भगवते बृहते नमस्ते Bhāg.8.3.17. -धामन् a. internally illuminated. -पुष्पा Achyranthes aspera (Mar. आघाडा); Mātaṅga L.11.26. -प्रवण a. devoted to the individual soul. -मुख a. (प्रत्यङ्मुख) 1 facing the west; श्रियं प्रत्यङ्मुखो भुङ्क्ते Ms.2.52. -2 having the face averted. -रथाः (Pl.) (प्रत्यग्रथाः) N. of the Ahichchhatra country; L. D. B. -स्रोतस् (प्रत्यक्स्रोतस्) flowing towards the west; Malli. on Śi.4.66. (-f.) an epithet of the river Narmadā.

prāgram	प्राग्रम् The highest point. -Comp. -सर a. first, foremost; त्वमर्हतां प्राग्रसरः स्मृतो$सि नः Ś.5.15. -हर a. chief, principal; विश्वावसुप्राग्रहरैः प्रवीणैः Ku.7.48; R.16.23.

prāgrāṭaḥ	प्राग्राटः Thin coagulated milk.

vigrah	विग्रह् 9 P. 1 To hold or seize, catch hold of; विजगृहे तिसृणां जयिनं पुराम् Ki.18.12. -2 To quarrel, fight, contend; विगृह्य चक्रे नमुचिद्विषा बली य इत्थमस्वास्थ्यमहर्दिवं दिवः Śi.1.51; Bk.6.86;17.23; Ki.14.24. -3 To divide into parts, separate (into constituent members). -4 To dissolve, analyse, resolve in general. -5 To receive, welcome (as a guest). -6 To preceive, observe. -7 To stretch or spread out.

vigrahaḥ	विग्रहः 1 Stretching out, extension, expansion. -2 Form, figure, shape; यथा लोहस्य निःस्यन्दो निषिक्तो बिम्ब- विग्रहम् Mb.14.18.9. -3 The body; त्रयी विग्रहवत्येव सम- मध्यात्मविद्यया M.1.14; गूढविग्रहः R.3.39;9.52; Ki.4.11; 12.43. -4 Resolution, dissolution, analysis, separation (as of a compound word into its component parts); वृत्त्यर्थ- (समासार्थ) -बोधकं वाक्यं विग्रहः. -5 Quarrel, strife (often, love-quarrel or प्रणयकलह); विग्रहाच्च शयने पराङ्मुखीर्नानुनेतु- मवलाः स तत्वरे R.19.38;9.47; Śi.11.35; शत्रौ मित्रे पुत्रे बन्धौ मा कुरु यत्नं विग्रहसन्धौ Śaṁkarāchārya. -6 War, hostilities, fighting, battle (opp. संधि); उग्राय विग्रहायास्मै त्वया प्रेषयता ह्यमुम् Śiva B.17.35; one of the six Guṇas or modes of policy; Ms.7.16; see गुण. -7 Disfavour; अनुग्रहं विग्रहं वा मन्यसे तद्विधेहि नः Bhāg.1.16.59. -8 A part, portion, division; परिमाणं च कालस्य कल्पलक्षणविग्रहम्. -Comp. -अवरम् the back. -इच्छु a. eager for combat. -ग्रहणम् the assumption of a form.

vigrahavat	विग्रहवत् a. Having body, incarnate, embodied; M.1.14.

vigrahin	विग्रहिन् A minister of war.

vigrīva	विग्रीव a. Decapitated.

vinigrah	विनिग्रह् 9 U. 1 To restrain, check; obstruct, impede. -2 To lay hold of, seize.

vinigrahaḥ	विनिग्रहः 1 Restraining, curbing, subduing; Bg. 13.7;17.16; न हि दण्डादृते शक्यः कर्तुं पापविनिग्रहः Ms.9. 263. -2 Mutual opposition or antithesis.

vaigrahika	वैग्रहिक a. (-की f.) Corporeal, bodily.

vyagra	व्यग्र a. [विगतमग्रं यस्य] 1 Bewildered, perplexed, distracted; तं व्यग्रचक्रं दितिपुत्राधमेन Bhāg.3.19.6. -2 Alarmed, frightened. -3 Eagerly or intently occupied (with loc., instr. or in comp.) स राजककुदव्यग्रपाणिभिः पार्श्ववर्तिभिः R.17.27; Mv.1.13;4.28; Ku.7.2; U.1. 23; Bv.1.123; आरभन्ते$ल्पमेवाज्ञाः कामं व्यग्रा भवन्ति च Śi.2.79. -4 Being in motion (as a wheel). -ग्रः N. of Viṣṇu.

śigruḥ	शिग्रुः [शि-रुक् गुक् च] 1 A pot-herb; also शिग्रुक; Ms. 6.14. -2 A kind of tree (Mar. शेवगा).

saṃgrah	संग्रह् 9 U. 1 To collect, gather, accumulate, hoard; संगृह्य धनम्, पाशान् &c. -2 To receive kindly. -3 To curb, restrain, check, control, rein in (as horses). -4 To unstring (as a bow). -5 To grasp, lay hold of. -6 To take, receive, accept. -7 To conceive, understand. -8 To contract, abridge, narrow. -9 To encou rage, support, favour. -1 To seize upon, attack (as an illness). -11 To include, comprise, contain. -12 To close, shut (as the mouth). -13 To concentrate. -14 To constrain, force; तैस्तैरुपायैः संगृह्य दापयेदधमर्णिकम् Ms. 8.48. -15 To marry. -16 To mention, name.

saṃgrahaḥ	संग्रहः 1 Seizing, grasping; taking; प्रज्वाल्य तत्र चैवाग्नि- मकरोत् पाणिसंग्रहम् Rām.7.12.2. -2 Clenching the fist, grasp, grip. -3 Reception, admission. -4 Guarding, protection; तथा ग्रामशतानां च कुर्याद्राष्ट्रस्य संग्रहम् Ms.7.114. -5 Favouring, propitiating, entertaining, supporting; धनैः कार्यो$स्य संग्रहः Ms.3.138;8.311. -6 Storing, accumulation, gathering, collecting; स्वधासंग्रहतत्पराः R.1.66; तैः कृतप्रकृतिसंग्रहैः 19.55;17.6. -7 Governing, restraining, controlling; एव वै परमो योगो मनसः संग्रहः स्मृतः Bhāg. 11.2.21. -8 Conglomeration. -9 Conjunction. -1 Agglomeration (a kind of संयोग). -11 Inclusion, comprehension. -12 Compilation. -13 Epitome, summary, abridgment, compendium; संग्रहेण प्रवक्ष्यन्ते Bg.8.11; so तर्कसंग्रहः; मय्यावेशितया युक्त एतावान् योगसंग्रहः Bhāg.11.23.61. -14 Sum, amount, totality; करणं कर्म कर्तेति त्रिविधः कर्मसंग्रहः Bg.18.18. -13 A catalogue, list. -16 A store-room. -17 An effort, exertion. -18 Mention, reference. -19 Greatness, elevation. -2 Velocity. -21 N. of Śiva. -22 A guardian, ruler, manager; ततो निक्षिप्य काकुत्स्थो लक्ष्मणं द्वारि संग्रहम् Rām.7.13.15. -23 The fetching back of discharged weapons by magical means; Mb. -24 Taking to wife, marriage. -25 Perception, notion, -Comp. -श्लोकः a verse summarizing what has been mentioned before.

saṃgrahaṇam	संग्रहणम् 1 Seizing, grasping. -2 Supporting, encouraging. -3 Compiling, collecting. -4 Blending. -5 Incasing, setting; कनकभूषणसंग्रहणोचितः (मणिः) Pt.1.75. -6 Sexual union, intercourse with a female. -7 Adultery; Ms.8.6.72; सर्वसाक्षी संग्रहेण चौर्यपारुष्यसाहसे Y.2.72. -8 Hoping. -9 Accepting, receiving. -णी Dysentery.

saṃgrahītṛ	संग्रहीतृ m. A charioteer.

saṃgrāhaḥ	संग्राहः 1 Laying hold of, grasping. -2 Forcible seizure. -3 Clenching the fist. -4 The fist. -5 The handle of a shield. -6 A particular jumping of the horse; Mb.5.155.2. (com. संग्राहः बृहदुद्रङ्गः हेषणपूर्वकमग्र- पादाभ्यामुत्प्लवनमिति; 'संग्राहो बृहदुद्रङ्गे' इति विश्वः).

saṃgrāhakaḥ	संग्राहकः 1 A collector, compiler. -2 A charioteer (संगृह्णाति नियच्छति रथ्यान्); उवाच संग्राहकमागतास्थस्तत्रैव निष्कम्प- निविष्टदृष्टिः Bu. Ch.3.27.

saṃgrāhin	संग्राहिन् m. The Kuṭaja tree.

saṃgrām	संग्राम् 1 Ā. (P. according to some) To fight.

saṃgrāmaḥ	संग्रामः War, battle, fight; संग्रामाङ्गणमागतेन भवता चापे समारोपिते K. P.1. -Comp. -कर्मन् n. the turmoil of battle. -जित् a. Conquering in battle. -तुला the ordeal of battle. -तूर्यम्, -पटहः a large military drum. -भूमिः a field of battle. -मूर्धन् m. the front of battle.

sanigraha	सनिग्रह a. Furnished with a handle; Suśr.

samagra	समग्र a. 1 All, whole, entire, complete; सर्वैरुस्रैः समःस्त्वमिव नृपगुणैर्दीप्यते सप्तसप्तिः M.2.12. -2 One who has everything; समग्रमिह संप्राप्तं मां द्रक्ष्यसि सुहृद्वृतम् Rām. 2.39.35.

samagraṇī	समग्रणी a. The very first among.

saṃparigrahaḥ	संपरिग्रहः 1 Receiving with kindness. -2 Property.

savigraha	सविग्रह a. 1 Possessing a body, embodied; सविग्रहं ग्रहमिव विगृह्यानय दुर्ग्रहम् Śiva. B.17.31. -2 Having meaning or import. -3 Engaged in strife, quarrelling. सवितर्क savitarka सविमर्श savimarśa सवितर्क सविमर्श a. Thoughtful. (-र्कम्, -र्शम् ind. Thoughtfully.

sāgra	साग्र a. 1 Entire; तेषां तु युद्धमानानां साग्रः संवत्सरो गतः Rām.7.23.9. -2 With a surplus, more than. -ग्रम् ind. For a longer period, for a whole life.

sāṃgrāmika	सांग्रामिक a. (-की f.) Relating to war, warlike, martial; एष साङ्ग्रामिको न्याय एष धर्मः सनातनः U.5.22. -कः A general, commander. -कम् Implements of war; सर्व- साङ्ग्रामिकोपेतम् Bhāg.8.1.17. -Comp. -गुणः the martial qualities of a king (i. e. शक्ति, षाङ्गुण्य and अस्त्राद्याभ्यास). -परिच्छदः implements of war.

sāṃgrāhika	सांग्राहिक a. Constipating; Charaka.

sādhivigrahikaḥ	साधिविग्रहिकः A minister (or Secretary of State) for foreign affairs (deciding upon pease and war).

sāmagrī	सामग्री [समग्रस्य भावः ष्यञ् स्त्रीत्वपक्षे ङीषि यलोपः Tv.] 1 A collection or assemblage of materials, apparatus, furniture; इतीयं सामग्री भवति हरभक्तिं स्पृहयताम् Bh.3.155. -2 Effects, goods. -3 Stock, provision.

sāmagryam	सामग्र्यम् 1 Entireness, perfection, completeness, totality; प्रायेण सामग्र्यविधौ गुणानां पराङ्मुखी विश्वसृजः प्रवृत्तिः Ku.3.28; पञ्चशरो भावरसानां सामग्र्यात् Dk.2.2. -2 Train, retinue. -3 A collection of implements, apparatus. -4 Stock, effects. -5 Welfare (क्षेम); अपि लक्ष्मण सीतायाः सामग्र्यं प्राप्नुयामहे Rām.3.57.2.

sāvagraha	सावग्रह a. 1 Having the mark called avagraha q. v. -2 Restrained, limited. -3 Analyzed.

sopagraham	सोपग्रहम् ind. In a conciliatory or friendly manner.

sauvagrāmika	सौवग्रामिक a. (-की f.) Belonging to one's own village.

Macdonell Vedic Search

9 results


grabh	grabh seize, IX. gṛbhṇá̄ti, gṛbhṇīté, vii. 103, 4. ánu- greet, vii. 103, 4.

grāma	grá̄ma, m. village, x. 127, 5; pl. = clans, ii. 12, 7.

grāmya	grām-yá, a. belonging to the village, x. 90, 8 [grá̄ma].

grīṣma	grīṣmá, m. summer, x. 90, 6.

grtsa	gṛ́t-sa, a. experienced, vii. 86, 7.

agra	ág-ra, n. front; beginning; top, x. 135, 6; lc. ágre in the beginning, x. 129. 3. 4.

agratas	agra-tás, adv. in the beginning, x. 90, 7.

ugra	ug-rá, a. mighty, ii. 33, 9; x. 34, 8; fierce, terrible, ii. 33, 11; viii. 29, 5.

yuktagrāvan	yuktá-grāvan, a. (Bv.) who has to work the stones, ii. 12, 6.

Macdonell Search

171 results


grābha	m. seizer; handful.

grabha	m. seizure; -î-tri, m. seizer.

graha	a. (--°ree;) seizing, holding; gaining; perceiving; m. seizer, esp. Râhu, who seizes and thus eclipses sun and moon; planet (which seizes men by magical influence: generally reckoned to be five in number: Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus, and Saturn, or seven: the same + Râhu and Ketu, or nine: the same + sun and moon); demon of disease; imp; crocodile; booty; vessel (for drawing Soma); draught (of Soma); organ (of which eight are enumerated); seizure, grasp, grip; draught (of a fluid); theft, robbery; insistence on (lc., --°ree;), endeavour; receipt; welcome; mention; perception, understanding.

grāha	a. (î) seizing, holding, taking, receiving (--°ree;); m. id.; mentioning; whim; beast of prey, crocodile, shark, serpent.

grahagrasta	pp. possessed by a demon.

grāhaka	a. (ikâ) receiving; appre hending, perceiving; m. bailiff; policeman; buyer: -tva, n. power of comprehension; -krikara, m. decoy partridge; -vihamga, m. decoy-bird.

grahaṇa	a. holding (--°ree;); n. gráhana, seizing, holding, capturing; eclipse; obtaining, receiving; buying; reverberation; catching, absorbing; putting on (clothes), assuming (a body); undergoing; pronouncing, mentioning; using an expression, employment, word mentioned; learning; perception, understanding; taking to mean.

grahaṇacatura	a. expert in seizing; -dvaya, n. eclipse of sun and (or) moon; -sambhava, a. arising from the taking away (of, g.); -½anta, a. done with learning; -½antika, a. id.

grahaṇīya	fp. to be accepted or pondered.

grahapīḍana	n., -pîdâ, f. cala mity caused by Râhu, eclipse; -maya, a. (î) consisting of planets; -yagña, m. sacrifice to the planets; -yuti, f. conjunction of the pla nets; -yuddha, (pp.) n. conflict --, opposition of the planets; -yoga, m.=graha-yuti; -var sha, m. planetary year; -samâgama, m. conjunction of the planets; -½agre-sara, m. ep. of the moon (chief of the planets).

grāhayitavya	(cs.) fp. to be caused to undertake (ac.).

grahila	a. sensible to (--°ree;); sensi tive; frantic.

grāhin	a. (--°ree;) seizing, holding; catching; containing; receiving, gaining, keeping; buying (with in. of price); searching through; perceiving; pondering; -yã, fp. to be seized, -clasped; -apprehended; -obtained; -accepted; -insisted on; -perceived, -comprehended; -learned; -understood; -recognised, -regarded.

grahītavya	fp. to be taken, received, -drawn (fluid); -î-tri, m. seizer; receiver; purchaser; perceiver; hearer.

grahoktha	n. hymn recited while drawing Soma.

graiṣma	a. referring to the hot season; i-ka, a. id.

graiva	n. neck-chain (of an elephant).

graiveya	m. n. id.: -ka, n. id.; necklace; -ya, a. relating to the neck.

grāma	m. inhabited place, village; community, clan; host; multitude, aggregate of (--°ree;); scale in music: pl. inhabitants, people.

grāmakāma	a. desirous of a village; fond of village life; -kukkuta, m. (village=) tame cock; -ghâta, m. plundering of a village; -karyâ, f. village ways= sexual enjoyment; -kaitya, m.sacred tree of the village; -gâta, pp. grown in a village or in cultivated soil; -nî, m. leader of a host; chief of a community; *barber (chief person in a village); -tâ, f. number of villages; -dasa½îsa, m. chief of ten villages;-dharâ, f. N. of a rock (supporting villages); -dharma, m. village custom; -nivâsin, a. dwelling in villages, tame (birds); -pishta, pp. ground at home; -yâgaka, -yâgin, a. sacrificing (through avarice) for all members ofthe community (whether admissible or not); -vâsin, a. living in villages, tame (animal); m. villager; -vriddha, m. old man of the village; -sîmâ, f. village field; -sûkara, m. domestic hog.

grāmika	m. village chief; -ín, a. ruling a community; m. villager; peasant: (i)-putra, m. peasant-boy.

grāmīṇa	n. rustic, illiterate; m. villager, peasant; -eya-ka, m. villager.

grāmya	a. referring to, coming from, prepared in or inhabiting villages; tame; cultivated; raised by cultivation; rustic, coarse; m. villager; domestic animal; n. sensuality.

grāmyakukkuṭa	m. domestic cock; -tâ, f., -tva, n. coarse diction; -dharma, m. villager's duty; sensuality; -mriga, m. (domestic animal), dog; -sûkara, m. domestic hog.

grantha	m. knot; composition; verse (of 32 syllables); treatise, book; text, word ing; chapter; -ana, n. connecting, tying.

granthi	m. knot; knot in a garment for keeping money, etc.; joint: -ka, m. narrator, rhapsodist; astrologer; -kkhedaka, m. cut-purse.

granthila	a. knotty.

granthin	a. reading books.

granthiparṇaka	n. (?) kind of fragrant plant; -bheda, m. cut-purse; -mat, a. tied, knit, entwined.

granthiśamana	n. (bringing a garment to an end with a knot =) money knot.

grāsa	m. swallowing; eclipse; mouth ful, morsel; food; --°ree;, a. swallowing; -pra mâna, n. size of a morsel; -½âkkhâdana, n. sg. food and clothing.

grasana	n. swallowing; kind of par tial eclipse; jaws; -ishnu, a. wont to swal low, -absorb; -tri, m. swallower, eclipser.

grathana	n. connexion; intricacy: â, f. tying, uniting; -anîya, fp. to be joined or united.

grathin	a. (knotty), unintelligible.

grāvagrābha	m. (handling the Soma stones), a priest, later grâvastut; -stút, m. a kind of priest; -stotra, n. invo cation of the pressing-stones at noon: î-ya, a. relating to the invocation of the pressing stones.

grāvan	m. rock, stone, esp. for pressing Soma.

grīṣma	m. summer, hot season: -sa maya, m. summer time.

grīva	m., &asharp;, f. [√ grî, swallow], neck.

akravyād a-kravya̮ad, degree;da	a. not eating flesh.

agāgra	n. mountain-top, peak.

agranakha	m.n. tip of the nail; -nâ sikâ, f. tip of the nose, -beak; -payodhara, m. teat; -pâda, m. toe; -pûgâ, f. precedence; -bindu, m. first drop; -bhâga, m. upper part, point, top; -bhûmi, f. top storey; highest aim; -mahishî, f. chief consort of a king; -yâyin, a. going before; best of (--°ree;); -vîra, m. chief hero, champion.

agratoratha	a. whose chariot is in front.

agratas	ad. in front, forward; at the head, in the beginning, first of all; --kri, place in front; prp. before, in presence of (g.).

agraṇī	a. (nm. m. -s, n. i) leading; foremost.

agrakara	m. finger; first ray; -ga, a. going in front; going through the end of (--°ree;); -ganya, fp. to be accounted the first of (g.); -ga, a. firstborn; m. elder brother; -ganman, m. Brâhman.

agra	n. front; beginning; point, tip, top, main thing: -m, before (g., --°ree;); in. before (ac.); lc. before, in presence of (g., --°ree;); in the beginning, at first, in the first place; after (ab.): -bhû, come forward.

agryatapas	m. N. of a sage; -ma hishî, f. chief consort.

agrya	a. foremost, best (of, g.,--°ree;); distinguished in (lc.).

agresara	a. (î) going before.

agrepā	a. drinking first; -p&usharp;, a. id.

agredidhiṣu	m. man united in first marriage with a widow; f. (ûbrev;) younger sister married before her elder sister.

agrega	a. going in front; -g&asharp;, a. id.; -g&usharp;, a. moving forward.

agru	a. (&usharp;) single, unmarried; f. pl. fingers.

agriya	a. foremost, best; firstborn; n. what is best.

agrima	a. leading, first; following (of sequence in writing or speaking).

agrāhya	fp. not to be grasped; imperceptible, incomprehensible; not to be approved.

agrāhin	a. not taking (leech).

agrāśana	a. eating in presence of (ab.).

agrāmyabhojin	a. eating no food prepared in the village.

agrānīka	n. van (of an army).

agrākṣan	n. side-glance.

agrahāra	m. land-grant to Brâhmans.

agrahasta	m. finger; tip of elephant's trunk.

agrahaṇa	n. non-taking; a. not specified.

agraha	m. no planet.

agrasara	a. going before; -tâ, f. precedence.

agrasaṃdhyā	f. dawn.

agraśas	ad. from the beginning.

aṅgulyagra	n. finger-tip: -nakha, m. tip of finger-nail.

ajanāgrīya	a. unexposed to public gaze.

ativigrahin	a. too bellicose.

atyugra	a. very mighty, very terrible.

anigraha	m. lack of restraint.

anugraha	m. favour: -krit, a. giving satisfaction; -na, n. showing favour; -½artham, ad. in favour of; î-kri, make a token of favour; -grâhaka, a. favouring, furthering; m. sup porter; -grâhya, fp.deserving favour; fa voured by (g.); -ghatana, n. continuation.

abhyagra	a. being in front; immi nent; -½a&ndot;ga, m. anointing; ointment; -½añg aka, a. anointing; -½añgana, n. anointing with fatty matter; -½añgyã, fp. to be anointed.

abhyātmāgra	a. with points turned towards oneself.

avigraha	a. indisputable.

avyagra	a. unconcerned, quiet: -m, ad. -ly.

asadgraha	m. foolish whim; evil in clination; -dharma, m. evil practice; -bhâva, m. non-existence, absence; -vritta, pp. not nicely rounded; not well-behaved.

asamagra	a. incomplete; not full; not all; °ree;-or -m, ad. not completely or quite.

āgrahāyaṇī	f. day of full-moon in the month Mârga-sîrsha; kind of pâka yagña.

āgrathana	n. putting on (girdle).

āgraha	m. pertinacity; favour.

āgrayaṇa	m. offering of new grain (a Soma libation); n. offering of first-fruits at the end of the rainy season; î, f. (sc. -ishti) sacrifice of first-fruits; (a)-ka, n. id. (--°ree;, a.).

ugra	a. mighty; violent; grim, dread ful, terrible, rigorous; m. mighty person, great --, violent person; ep. of Siva & Rudra; N. of a mixed caste (offspring of Kshatriya & Sûdrâ); -tâ, f., -tva, n. violence; rigour; -danda, a. stern-sceptered, relentless; -pûti, a. having a horrible stench; -prabhâva, a. high and mighty; -rush, a. terribly angry; -sâsana, a. stringent in his orders: -sena, m. N. of various kings; -½îsa, m. N. of a temple built by Ugra.

udagra	a. (having its top elevated), upraised, high; long; large; lofty, exalted; heightened or increased (by, --°ree;); advanced (age); excited, carried away by (--°ree;); exceedingly (°ree;--); -pluta, a.making high bounds: -tva, n. abst. n.

udagrīva	a. with outstretched neck (-m, ad.); having the neck uppermost; -ikâ, f. stretching out the neck; -in, a.=udgrîva.

udgrahaṇa	n. taking out.

udgrathana	n. girding on.

upagrāmam	ad. near the village.

upagraha	m. treaty or peace bought by the cession of everything.

aikāgrya	n. fixed attention to one object, concentration.

augrya	n. formidableness.

karāgra	n. tip of finger or ray; -½âghâta, m. blow of the hand; -½a&ndot;guli, f. finger of the hand.

kuśāgra	n. point of a blade of Kusa: -buddhi, a. whose intellect is as sharp as a needle.

keśāgra	n. tip of the hair; -½anta, m. edge of the hair; tuft or mass of hair; ceremony of clipping the hair; -½antika, a. reaching to the edge of the hair.

kesarāgra	n. tips of the mane.

khaḍgrāhin	m. sword-bearer; -dhara, a. wearing a sword; m. N.; -dhârâ, f. sword-blade: -vrata, n.=asidhârâ-vrata; -dhenu, f. knife; -pâni, a. having a sword in one's hand; -pâta, m. sword-cut; -prahâra, m. sword-stroke; -maya, a. consisting of swords; -vat, a. armed with a sword; -vâri, n. blood dripping from a sword; -vidyâ, f. art of fencing; -sakha, a. armed with a sword; -sena, m. N.; -hasta, a. having a sword in the hand.

goagra	a. having cattle as the chief thing, consisting chiefly of cattle; -ágana, a. meant for driving cattle.

gopāgrahāra	m. pl. N. of various Agrahâras; -½âditya, m. N. of a king of Cashmere; -½adri, m. N. of a mountain.

chāyāgraha	m. mirror or sun dial; -taru, m. shady tree; -½âtman, m. sha dowed self; -druma, m. shady tree; -dvitîya, a. having a shadow as a second, casting a shadow; -nâtaka, n. kind of play; -máya, a. shadow-like; -yantra, n. sun-dial; -vat, a. shady; -samgñâ, f. Shadow-Samgñâ.

jāgrat	pr.pt. watching; n. waking: -svapná, m. du. waking and sleep.

jihvāgra	n. tip of the tongue; -mûlîya, a. belonging to the root of the tongue (certain letters); -laulya, n. voracity.

jyotiragra	a. (preceded by=) radiating light; -îsa, -îsvara, m. N. of an author.

taugrya	m. son of Túgra (Bhugyu).

udgrāha	m. reception.

dantāgra	n. point of a tooth.

daśagrīva	m. ten-necked, ep. of Râvana.

dārasaṃgraha	m. marriage; -su ta, n. sg. wife and child; -½adhigamana, n. taking a wife, marriage.

dāraparigraha	m. taking a wife, marriage.

duṣparigraha	a. hard to re tain; -parihántu, a. hard to remove; -pari hara, a. hard to avoid; -pâra, a. hard to cross; -perform; -pârshni-graha, a. hav ing a bad enemy in the rear, -grâha, a. id.;-pûra, a. hard to fill; -satisfy; -prakriti, f. low nature; a. base; -prakriyâ, f. trifling dignity; -pragña, a. stupid: -tva, n. stu pidity; -pranîta, pp. led astray; n. indis cretion; -pradharsha, a. hard to assail; -prabhañgana, m.hurricane; -prayukta, pp. badly or wrongly employed; -pravâda, m. slander; -pravritti, f. bad news; -pra vesa, a. hard to enter; -prasaha, a. hard to endure, irresistible; -prasâda, a. hard to ap pease: -na, a. id.; -prasâdhana, a. hard to manage (person); -prasâdhya, fp. id.; -prâ pa, a. hard to attain; -preksha, a., -preksha- nîya, fp. hard to see; unpleasant to look at; -prekshya, fp. id.

dinnāgrāma	m. N. of a village.

dhanurgraha	m. bowman, archer; -grâha, -grâhin, m. id.; -gyâ, f. bowstring; -durga, a. inaccessible because of a desert; n. fortress protected by a desert; -dhara, a. bearing a bow; m. archer; -dhârin, -bhrit, a. m. id.; -yantra, n. bow; -yashti, f. id.; -yogyâ, f. practice in archery; -latâ, f. bow; -vidyâ, f. archery; -veda, m. id.

nagāgra	n. mountain-top; -½apagâ, f. mountain stream; -½asman, m. rock.

nakhāgra	n. nail-tip; -½âghâta, m. nail wound; -½a&ndot;ka, m. nail-mark.

navagraha	a. recently caught.

nāsāgra	n. tip of the nose; -½anti ka, a. reaching to the nose.

nimṛgra	a. subsiding, flowing away (waters).

niravagraha	a. unrestrained, un controlled, free, independent.

naiyagrodha	a. relating to the sacred fig-tree (ficus Indica).

nyagrodha	m. [growing down wards], Indian fig-tree, banyan (ficus Indica).

patadgraha	m. (catching what falls), spittoon.

pāñcigrāma	m. N. of a village.

pādopasaṃgrahaṇa	n. em bracing the feet (of a teacher).

pādāgra	n. tip of the foot; -½âghâ- ta, m. kick; -½a&ndot;guli or î, f. toe; -½a&ndot;gush- tha, m. great toe.

pragraha	m. holding forth, stretching out; grasping, seizing; seizure of the sun or moon, beginning of an eclipse; kindness; obstinacy (rare); rein, bridle (ord. mg.); leader, guide; companion, satellite; -grahana, m. leader, guide (only --°ree; a. = led by); n. grasping, seizing; commencement of an eclipse; -grâham, abs. keeping the words separate (i. e. not combining them according to the rules of Sandhi: Br.); -grîva, m.railing or fence enclosing a house.

paurāgragaṇya	m. chief of the city; -½a&ndot;ganâ, f. woman of the town, female citizen.

pratigraha	m. receipt, acceptance (of gifts), right to receive gifts (privilege of Brâhmans; the person from whom the pre sent is received is °ree;--, ab., or g.±sakâsât; the object is °ree;--); friendly reception; favour, grace; receiving with the ear, hearing; re ceiver; gift, present: in. as a present; -m kri, receive presents; -grahana, a. receiving; n. reception; acceptance (of gifts); -graha dhana, n. money received as a present; a. whose wealth consists in presents only; -gra ha-prâpta, pp. received as a present; -grah îtavya, fp. to be received, that may be ac cepted; -grahîtrí, m. receiver (of gifts); one who receives a girl, one who weds; nm. sg. used as ft.; -grâmam, ad. in every vil lage; -grâhaka, a. receiving gifts (only --°ree;); -grâhin, a. receiving, accepting; -grâhya, fp. to be received, from (ab.); from whom anything may be accepted.

pratyagra	a. [being at the beginning], new, fresh; young; early (rays); recent; renewed, repeated: °ree;-or -m, ad. recently; -prasavâ, a. f. having recently brought forth, -calved; -yauvana, a. being in early youth; -rûpa, a. youthful; -vayas, a. of youthful years.

pravigraha	m. distinct separation of words euphonically combined; -ghatana, n. breaking in pieces; -kâra, m.: -nâ, f. dis tinction, species; -kintaka, a. foreseeing; -ketana, n. comprehension; -dalana, n. shattering; -dâra, m. bursting asunder.

prāgagra	a. having the point di rected forwards or eastwards; -apavargam, ad. concluding in the east; -abhâva, m. pre vious non-existence; -abhihita, pp. pre viously discussed.

prāgrya	a. foremost, best, most ex cellent.

prāgra	n. extreme point: -sara, a. going in the forefront; foremost, chief, in (--°ree;), among (g.), -hara, a. (appropriating the best), chief, principal, among (--°ree;).

bandigraha	m. taking prisoner, capture; -grâha, m. burglar.

balāgra	n. excessive strength; head of an army.

phalegrahi	a. bearing fruit; successful.

bhujāgra	n. tip of the arm, hand; -½âghâta, m. blow with the arm; -½a&ndot;ka, m. embrace; -½antara, n. space between the arms, chest; -½antarâla, n. id.

maṇḍalāgra	a. having a rounded point; m. curved sword, scimitar; -½adhipa, -½adhîsa, m. sovereign of a country.

manīmuṣagrāma	m. N. of a village.

mayagrāma	m. N. of a village.

rāgagrahavat	a. possessed of the crocodiles of passion; -dravya, n. colour ing substance, dye; -prâpta, pp. conform able to desire, gratifying the senses; -bandha, m. (manifestation of) affection;-bhañgana, m. N. of a fairy; -mañgarî, f. N.: i-kâ, f. dim. of id.; -maya, a. red; enamoured; -raggu, m. god of love; -lekhâ, f. streak of colour; -vat, a. red; fond; enamoured.

vaṇiggrāma	m. merchants' gild; -gana, m. merchant: coll. merchants; -vîthî, f. market street, bazaar; -vritti, f. pl. trade, bargaining.

vadhanigraha	m. capital pun ishment; -bhûmi, f. place of execution.

vigrīva	a. having the neck twisted (V.).

vigrahin	a. waging war; m. minister of war; -grahî-tavya, fp. (corrupt); -graha½ikkhu, des. a. eager for battle; -grâh ya, fp. to be waged war with.

vigraharāja	m. N.; -vat, a. em bodied, incarnate.

vigrahaya	den. P. fight or contend with (sârdham).

vigraha	m. separation; division; independence of a word (opp. composition; gr.); analysis of a compound (gr.); discord, quarrel, strife, war (ord. mg.), with (in. ± saha, sârdham, sâkam, g. with upari,lc., --°ree;); (separate=) individual form or shape, body (common mg.; also of the shape of a rain bow); element (in Sâmkhya phil.); ornament (E.): -m kri, make war; -m kri, grah, or upa½â-dâ, assume a form.

vaiyagrya	n. [vyagra] devotion to, absorption in (--°ree;).

vyagra	a. attending to no particular point (opp. eka½agra), distraught, inattentive; bewildered, agitated; diverted from every thing else, intent on, engrossed by, entirely occupied with (in., lc., --°ree;; frequently said of fingers, hands, arms): -m, ad. with great excitement; -tâ, f. intentness on (--°ree;); -tva, n. id.; distraction.

vratagrahaṇa	n. taking of a religious vow, turning mendicant: -nimittam, ad. in order to fulfil a religious vow; -kary&asharp;, f. performance of a religious work or observance; -kâr-ín, a.practising a religious ob servance, observing a vow: (-i)-tâ, f. observance of a vow.

yuṣṭagrāma	m. N. of a village.

śirogrīva	n. sg. head and neck (V.); -ghâta, m. blow on the head; -ga, n. pl. hair of the head; -dhara, m., gnly. â, f. (head-bearer), neck; -dharanîya, fp. to be borne on the head, to be greatly honoured; -dhâman, n. head (of a bed); -dhi, m. neck; -dhûnana, n. shaking of the head; -nati, f. bowing the head; -bhâga, m. top (of a tree); head (of a bed); -bhûshana, n. head ornament; -mani, m. crest-jewel; chief of (g., --°ree;); T. of distinguished works or scholars; -mâtra½avasesha, a. of whom the head only remains (Râhu); -mukha, n. sg. head and face; -rakshin, m. body-guard; -rug, f. headache: -â, f. id.; -ruha, m. hair of the head; -(a)rti, f. (=-ârti) headache; -veda nâ, f. headache; -hrit-kamala, n. lotus of head and heart.

śūlāgra	n. point of a spear or stake; -½avatamsita, pp. impaled.

śailāgra	n. mountain top; -½adhi râga, m. sovereign of mountains, Himâlaya: -tanayâ, f. daughter of the Himâlaya, Pârvatî.

śvāgra	n. dog's tail; -½agina, n. dog's skin.

sagraha	a. filled with crocodiles (river).

saṃgraha	m. seizing, grasping; keeping, retaining; obtainment (pattra-, of leaves); taking (of food); magical with drawal of discharged missiles; collecting, gathering; accumulation, store; bringing together, assembling (of men); complete enumeration; collection, totality, complete compendium, summary, epitome (ord. mg.); inclusion (rare); restraining, controlling (rare); guarding, protection, of (g.); ruler (E.); propitiation, kind treatment, enter tainment: in. completely, entirely; in., ab. summarily, briefly; -grahana, n. acquisi tion; collecting, accumulation; encasing, setting in (--°ree;, of a jewel); restraining; pro pitiation (also V., -gráh-); adultery, with (--°ree;); -grahanîya, fp. to be directed towards (lc.); -grahin, m. collector; -grahîtrí, m. charioteer.

saṃgrāha	m. fist; clenching the fist: -ka, a. (î) summarising, epitomising; -grâhin, a. collecting, accumulating; propi tiating (--°ree;); -gr&asharp;hya, fp. to be clasped (Br.); (C.) -checked; -appointed (to an office); propitiated; -accepted or pondered (speech).

saṃgrāma	m. assembly, host (V., rare); V., C.: hostile encounter, battle, fight, with (samam, saha, sârdham, --°ree;); N. (C.): -karman, n. battle; -gupta, m. N.; -gít, a. vic torious in battle; -tulâ, f.ordeal of battle; -tûrya, n. battle-drum; -datta, m. N. of a Brâhman; -deva, m. N. of a king; -nagara, n. N. of a town; -pâla, m. N.; -bhûmi, f. battle-field; -mûrdhan, m. van of battle; -râga, m. N. of two kings; -vardhana, m. N.; -varsha, m. N.; -simha, m. N.: -sid dhi, m. N. of an elephant; -½agra, n. van of battle; -½a&ndot;gana, n. battle-field; -½âpîda, m. N. of two kings.

saṃdhinigrahadvāreṇa	in. by means of uniting and getting at variance with (g.); -mat, a. living in peace; leagued, allied; m. N.; -mati, m. N. of a minister; -vigraha-ka, m. minister of alliances (= foreign affairs) and of war; -vigraha-kây astha, m. secretary of foreign affairs and of war; -vigraha-kârya½adhikârin, m. du. ministers of foreign affairs and of war; -vid, a. acquainted with alliances; -velâ,f. time of twilight; -sambhava, a. produced by eu phonic combination; m. diphthong; -sarp ana, n. crawling through narrow passages.

samagra	a. (&asharp;) entire, complete, whole, all, every (very rare in V.); C.: abso lute (darkness); fully provided with (in., --°ree;); n. (C.) everything: °ree;--, entirely: -vartin, a. entirely resting orfixed (eyes) on (lc.); -sau varna, a. entirely golden; -½indu, m. full moon.

sāṃgrāmika	a. (î) relating to war or battle (samgrâma): w. ratha, m. war chariot; w. mrityu, m. death in battle; w. vitta, n. spoils of war; î vârttâ bhavishyâ, future warlike rumour=rumour that a war is imminent.

sāmagrī	f. [sam-agra] entireness, totality; completeness of materials, apparatus, means, for (g., --°ree;): kâ te sâmagrî, what means have you at your disposal? -ya, n. id.

sāṃdhivigrahika	m. minis ter of peace and war.

sūcyagra	n. point of a needle; -½âsya, a. having a mouth pointed like a needle; m. mosquito.

senāgra	n. van of an army: -ga, -gâmin, a. going at the head of an army; m. leader of an army; -½a&ndot;ga, n. component part of an army; division of an army: -pati, m. leader of a division;-kara, m. soldier; -gî vin, m. id.; -½adhipa, -½adhyaksha, m. com mander of an army; -n&isharp;, m. leader of an army, commander, general (V., C.); N. of Skanda, god of war (leader of the hosts of the gods; C.); -pati, m. leader of an army, general; -patya, n. office of a general (less correct for saina-); -½abhigoptri, m. guar dian of the army (a certain office); -mukhá, n. van of the army: î, f. N. of a goddess; -vyûha, m. battle-array; -samudaya, m. assembled army.

svagrāma	m. one's own village.

svavagraha	a. easy to restrain or guide.

hastāgra	n. tip of the hand, finger; tip of the trunk: -lagnâ, pp. f. clasping the fingers of=married to (g.); -½âlamba, m. hand as a support=sure refuge: -na, n. id.; -½a valamba, m. support of the hand; means of safety; -½âvâpa, m. hand-guard (against the bowstring).

hāmigrāma	m. N. of a village.

Vedic Index of
Names and Subjects

171 results28 results


grābha	(lit. grasping ’) designates the throw ’ of dice in the Rigveda. See also Glaha.

graha	(‘Seizing ’) is a term applied to the sun in the śatapatha Brāhmana, most probably not in the later sense of ‘ planet,’ but to denote a power exercising magical influence. The sense of ‘ planet ’ seems first to occur in the later literature, as in the Maitrāyanī Upanisad. The question whether the planets were known to the Vedic Indians is involved in obscurity. Oldenberg recognizes them in the Adityas, whose number is, he believes, seven : sun, moon, and the five planets. But this view, though it cannot be said to be impossible or even unlikely, is not susceptible of proof, and has been rejected by Hillebrandt, Pischel, von Schroeder,Macdonell, and Bloomfield, among others. Hillebrandt sees the planets in the five Adhvaryus mentioned in the Rigveda, but this is a mere conjecture. The five bulls (uksānah) in another passage of the Rigveda have received a similar interpretation with equal uncertainty, and Durga, in his commentary on the Nirukta, even explains the term bhūmija, ‘ earth-born,’ which is only mentioned by Yāska, as meaning the planet Mars.Thibaut, who is generally sceptical as to the mention of planets in the Veda, thinks that Brhaspati there refers to Jupiter; but this is extremely improbable, though in the Taittirīya Samhitā Brhaspati is made the regent of Tisya. A reference to the planets is much more probable in the seven suns (sapta sūryāh) of the late Taittirīya Áranyaka. On the other hand, Ludwig’s efforts to find the five planets with the sun, the moon, and the twenty-seven Naksatras (lunar mansions) in the Rigveda, as corresponding to the number thirty-four used in connexion with light19 (jyotis) and the ribs of the sacrificial horse, is far¬fetched. See also Sukra, Manthin, Vena.

grāha	The seizer,’ is the name of a disease in the śatapatha Brāhmana. In the Atharvaveda it perhaps means ‘ paralysis’ of the thigh.

grāhi	‘The seizer,’ appears in the Rigveda and the Atharvaveda as a female demon of disease. Her son is sleep (svapηa) .

graivya	In the Atharvaveda, appears to denote * tumours on the neck ’(grīvāh).

grāma	The primitive sense of this word, which occurs frequently from the Rigveda onwards, appears to have been village.’ The Vedic Indians must have dwelt in villages which were scattered over the country, some close together, some far apart, and were connected by roads.The village is regularly contrasted with the forest (

grāmyavādin	apparently means a ‘village judge’ in the Yajurveda. His Sabhā, ‘ court, is mentioned in the Maitrāyanī Samhitā.

grīṣma	See Rtu.

abhyagrii aitaśāyana	This man was, according to the Aitareya Brāhmana, unfortunate enough to quarrel with his father, Aitaśa. The result was that he and his progeny were called the worst of the Aurvas. In the version of the Kausītaki Brāhmana, the Aitaśāyana Ajāneyas take the place of the Abhyagnis and the Bhrgris of the Aurvas, the latter being probably a .branch of the former family.

ugra	In one passage of the Bṛhadāraṇyaka Upanisad seems to have a technical force, denoting ‘ man in authority,’ or according to Max Muller’s rendering, ‘policeman.’ Roth compares a passage in the Rigveda, where, however, the word has simply the general sense of ‘ mighty man.’ Bǒhtlingk, in his rendering of the Upaniṣad, treats the word as merely adjectival.

ugradeva	Is mentioned with Turvaśa and Yadu in the Rigveda apparently as a powerful protector. The name occurs also in the Pañcaviṃśa Brāhmaṇa and the Taittirīya Araṇyaka, where he is styled Rājani and called a leper (kilāsa).

ugrasena	Is mentioned in the Śatapatha Brāhmaṇa and in a Gāthā there cited as being, with Bhīmasena and Srutasena, a Pārikṣitīya and a brother of Janamejaya. The brothers were cleansed by the horse sacrifice from sin.

udagrayana	See Sūrya

augrasainya	‘Descendant of Ugrasena,’ is the patronymic of King Yuddhāmśrausti in the Aitareya Brāhmana.

kalmāṣagrīva	(‘ speckled-neck ’) is the name of a snake in the Atharvaveda.

tugra	Appears in the Rigveda as the name of the father of Bhujyu, a protege of the Aśvins, who is accordingly called Tugrya or Taugrya. A different Tugra seems to be referred to in other passages of the Rigveda as an enemy of Indra.

tugrya	Occurs in the Rigveda as a patronymic of Bhujyu, but also in a passage in which no reference to Bhujyu appears to be meant, and in which it may mean ‘ a man of the house of Tugra.’ A similar sense seems to occur in the locative plural feminine in the Rigveda, where (supplying viksu) the meaning must be ‘among the Tugrians.’ This explanation may also apply to the epithet of Indra or Soma, tugryā-vrdh, ‘ rejoicing among the Tugrians.

taugrya	‘Descendant of Tugra,’ is the patronymic of Bhujyu in the Rigveda.

nigrada pārṇavalki	(‘Descendant of Parnavalka ’) is mentioned in the Vamśa Brāhmana as a pupil of Giriśarman.

nyagrodha	Growing downwards,’ is the name of the Ficus indica, a tree remarkable for sending down from its branches fibres which take root and form new stems. Though the tree is not mentioned by name in the Rigveda, it appears to have been known, as Pischel has shown from a hymn in which its characteristics may be recognized. It is frequently mentioned in the Atharvaveda and the later literature. The sacrificial bowls (Camasa) were made of its wood. It was doubtless of the greatest importance, as in modern times, to the Vedic village. The sister tree, the Aśvattha (Ficus religiosa), already occurs in the Rigveda.

madhuka paiṅgrya	(‘ descendant of Pinga ’) is the name of a teacher mentioned in the śatapatha and the Kausītaki Brāhmaṇas.

yudhāmśrauṣti augrrasainya	(‘Descendant of Ugrasena ’) is the name, in the Aitareya Brāhmaṇa, of a king who was anointed by Parvata and Nārada.

rathagrtsa	In the Vājasaneyi Samhitā and the Aitareya Brāhmaṇa denotes a ‘ skilled charioteer.’

viṣphuliṅgra	Denotes a ‘spark’ of fire in the Upaniṣads.

śigru	Is the name of a tribe occurring in the passage of the Rigveda, in which they are mentioned with the Ajas and the Yakṣus as having been defeated by the Trtsus and King Sudās. It is impossible to say whether they were or were not under the leadership of Bheda, as Ludwig plausibly suggests. If śigru is connected with the later śigru, ‘horse-radish’ (Moringa pterygosperma), which is quite probable, it is possible that the tribe was totemistic and non-Aryan, but this is a mere matter of conjecture. The Matsyas ('Fishes') were probably Aryan.

saṃgrahītṛ	Is found in the later Samhitās and the Brāhmaṇas. He is an official who figures among the Ratnins of the king. The sense of ‘ charioteer ’ seems adequate for every passage, but Sāyaṇa in some passages inclines to think that the meaning is ‘treasurer’ of the king.

saṃgrāma	Denotes primarily, it seems, ‘assembly ’ either in peace or in war, when it means an ‘ armed band.’ Its normal sense in the Atharvaveda and later is ‘war,’ ‘battle.’ Little is known of Vedic warfare, but it seems to have been simple. A body of foot soldiers with charioteers composed every army, the two going together, and the foot soldiers being often overthrown by the charioteers, who were doubtless the Kṣatriyas and their foremost retainers. Probably the foot soldiers bore little armour, and used only the bow for offence, as is suggested by the account that Herodotus gives of the Indian contingent of the army with which Xerxes invaded Greece. The nobles, on the other hand, may have had cuirass (Varman), helmet (śiprā), and hand-guard (Hastaghna) as a protection from the friction of the bowstring. On the car was the charioteer, and on his left the warrior (Sārathi, Savya§thā). Riding is never mentioned in war, and would hardly have been suited to Vedic ideas, for the warrior mainly depended on his bow, which he could not have used effectively from horse¬back. The offensive weapon (Áyudha) was practically the bow; spear and sword and axe were very seldom used. Whether there was a strict tribal organization of the host, such as is once alluded to in the Homeric poems, and is also recognized in Germany by Tacitus, is uncertain (cf. Vrāta), but in the Epic relations (Jñāti) fight together, and this rule, no doubt, applied more or less in Vedic times also. Cities were besieged and invested (upa-sad, pra-bhid), probably as a rule by blockade, since the ineffective means of assault of the time would have rendered storming difficult and expensive. Hillebrandt thinks that the pur carisnū of the Rigveda was a kind of chariot; it may—like the Trojan horse—have been an Indian anticipation of the Roman means of assaulting a town. Besides ordinary wars of defence and conquest, raids into neighbouring territory seem to have been frequent and normal, no doubt because of the booty (Udāja, Nirāja) which wai to be won, and which the king had to share with the'people. Banners (Dhvaja) were borne in war, and musical instruments (Dundubhi, Bakura) were used by the combatants.

syūmagrabhasti	See Gabhasti.

Bloomfield Vedic
Concordance

171 results28 results362 results


grābhaṃ	gṛbhṇīta (SV. gṛbhṇāti) sānasim RV.9.106.3b; SV.2.46b.

graha	viśvajanīna niyantar viprāyāma te (KS. nyantar vipra ā satī) MS.1.11.4: 165.13; KS.14.3. Cf. next, and ye grahāḥ.

grahā	ūrjāhutayaḥ VS.9.4a; śB.5.1.2.8a. Cf. under prec.

grahai	stomāś ca viṣṭutīḥ VS.19.28b.

grahair	havirbhiś ca kṛtākṛtaś ca GB.1.5.24c.

grāhāṃ	śūraputrāṃ devīm AVP.9.10.9e.

grahān	somasya mimate dvādaśa RV.10.114.5d.

grahanakṣatramālinīm	RVKh.10.127.4b.

grāhiḥ	kila tvā grahīṣyati kilāsaśīrṣaḥ AVP.5.21.2d.

grāhiṃ	pāpmānam ati tāṃ ayāma AVś.12.3.18a. P: grāhiṃ pāpmānam Kauś.61.22.

grāhir	jagrāha yadi vaitad (AVś.3.11.1c, yady etad) enam RV.10.161.1c; AVś.3.11.1c; 20.96.6c. Cf. next but two.

graho	'sy amum anayārtyā gṛhāṇāsāv ado mā prāpat śB.4.6.5.5.

grāhyā	gṛbhīto yady eṣa etat AVP.1.62.1c. Cf. prec. but two.

grāhyā	gṛhāḥ saṃ sṛjyante AVś.12.2.39a.

grāhyā	bandhebhyaḥ pari pātv asmān AVś.19.45.5d; AVP.15.4.5d.

grāhyāḥ	pāśān nirṛtyāḥ pāśān mṛtyoḥ pāśāt AVP.2.80.5c.

grāhyāḥ	putro 'si yamasya karaṇaḥ AVś.16.5.1.

grāhyāmitrāṃs	tamasā vidhya śatrūn AVś.3.2.5d; AVP.3.5.5d. See andhenāmitrās.

graiṣmaṃ	nāśaya vārṣikam AVś.5.22.13d; AVP.1.32.5d.

graiṣmāv	ṛtū abhikalpamānāḥ VS.14.6c.

grāmajitaṃ	gojitaṃ vajrabāhum AVś.6.97.3c; 19.13.6c; AVP.7.4.6c. See gotrabhidaṃ.

grāmaṃ	sajānayo gachanti ApMB.2.13.11c. See grāmān.

grāmaṃ	pradakṣiṇaṃ kṛtvā HG.1.17.3c.

grāmān	sajātayo yanti HG.2.3.7c. See grāmaṃ sa-.

grāmaṇīr	asi grāmaṇīr utthāya (AVP. asi grāmanīthyāyāḥ) AVś.19.31.12a; AVP.10.5.12a.

grāmaṇyaṃ	gaṇakam abhikrośakaṃ tān mahase VS.30.20.

grāme	cāṇḍālasaṃyute Kauś.141.38d.

grāme	vasanta uta vāraṇye PG.1.12.4b.

grāme	vidhuram (HG. vikhuram) ichantī svāhā ApMB.2.14.1f; HG.2.3.7d.

grāmo	māraṇyāya pari dadātu śG.3.5.1.

grāmyāḥ	paśavo 'sṛjyanta VS.14.29; MS.2.8.6: 110.13; śB.8.4.3.11. See paśavo 'sṛjyanta.

grāmyamaṅkīradāśakau	(Mś. grāmyamāṅgīradāsakau) Apś.21.20.3b; Mś.7.2.7.10b. See vyāghraṃ maṅgī-.

grāmyāś	ca me paśava āraṇyāś ca yajñena kalpantām (VS.KS. āraṇyāś ca me) VS.18.14; TS.4.7.5.2; MS.2.11.5: 142.8; KS.18.10.

granther	jyāyā iṣvāḥ AVP.11.2.12c.

granthiṃ	na vi ṣya grathitaṃ punānaḥ RV.9.97.18a.

granthīṃś	cakāra te dṛḍhān AVś.9.3.3b.

grasetām	aśvā vi muceha śoṇā RV.3.35.3c.

grāvā	kṛṇotu vagnunā RV.1.84.3d; SV.2.379d; VS.8.33d; TS.1.4.37.1d; KS.37.9d; śB.4.5.3.9d.

grāvā	tvaiṣo 'dhi nṛtyatu AVś.10.9.2d. P: grāvā tvaiṣaḥ Kauś.65.2.

grāvā	yatra madhuṣud ucyate bṛhat RV.10.64.15c; 100.8c.

grāvā	yatra vadati kārur ukthyaḥ RV.1.83.6c; AVś.20.25.6c.

grāvā	vadann apa rakṣāṃsi sedhatu RV.10.36.4a.

grāvā	śumbhāti malaga iva vastrā AVś.12.3.21d.

grāvabhyaḥ	svāhā MS.4.9.9: 129.11; TA.4.10.3; 5.8.7.

grāvabhyo	vācaṃ vadatā vadadbhyaḥ RV.10.94.1b; N.9.9b.

grāvacyuto	dhiṣaṇayor upasthāt VS.7.26b; śB.4.2.5.2. See bāhucyuto.

grāvādhvarakṛd	etc. see grāvāsy etc.

grāvagrābha	uta śaṃstā suvipraḥ RV.1.162.5b; VS.25.28b; TS.4.6.8.2b; MS.3.16.1b: 182.6; KSA.6.4b.

grāvahastāso	adhvare RV.1.15.7b; N.8.2b.

grāvāṇa	upareṣv ā RV.10.175.3a.

grāvāṇa	ūrdhvā abhi cakṣur adhvaram RV.10.92.15b.

grāvāṇaḥ	savitā nu vaḥ RV.10.175.4a.

grāvāṇaḥ	soma no hi kam RV.6.51.14a.

grāvāṇaṃ	nāśvapṛṣṭhaṃ maṃhanā RV.8.26.24c.

grāvāṇaṃ	bibhrat pra vadāty agre RV.7.33.14b.

grāvāṇaś	ca me 'dhiṣavaṇe ca me VS.18.21; KS.18.11. See under adhiṣavaṇe.

grāvāṇaś	ca me svaravaś ca me TS.4.7.8.1.

grāvāṇeva	tad id arthaṃ jarethe RV.2.39.1a; AB.1.21.11. Ps: grāvāṇeva Aś.4.6.3; 15.2; śś.6.6.6; grāvāṇā Mś.4.2.32.

grāvāṇo	apa duchunām RV.10.175.2a.

grāvāṇo	ghnantu rakṣasa upabdaiḥ RV.7.104.17d; AVś.8.4.17d.

grāvāṇo	na sūrayaḥ sindhumātaraḥ RV.10.78.6a.

grāvāṇo	barhir adhvare RV.8.27.1b; SV.1.48b; MS.4.12.1b: 178.13; KS.10.13b.

grāvāṇo	yasyeṣiraṃ vadanti RV.5.37.2c.

grāvāṇo	vācā divitā divitmatā RV.10.76.6b.

grāvāsi	pṛthubudhnaḥ VS.1.14; śB.1.1.4.7. P: grāvāsi Kś.2.4.4. Cf. under adrir asi.

grāvāsy	adhvarakṛd (KS. grāvādhvarakṛd) devebhyaḥ TS.1.4.1.1; MS.1.3.3: 30.13; 4.5.4: 68.10; KS.3.10. Ps: grāvāsy adhvarakṛt Apś.12.9.2; grāvāsi Mś.2.3.3.2. See adhvarakṛtaṃ, and rāvāsi.

grāvāvādīd	(AVP.Apś. grāvā vaded) abhi somasyāṃśum (AVP.Apś. -śunā) AVP.1.96.2c; KS.40.5c; Apś.16.34.4c.

grāveva	sotā madhuṣud yam īḍe RV.4.3.3d.

grāvevocyate	bṛhat RV.5.25.8b; JB.3.269b.

grāvṇā	tunno abhiṣṭutaḥ RV.9.67.19a.

grāvṇā	parvatāḥ KS.35.15.

grāvṇā	some mahīyate RV.9.113.6c.

grāvṇāṃ	yoge manmanaḥ sādha īmahe RV.10.35.9b.

grāvṇām	ic chṛṇvan tiṣṭhasi RV.10.85.4c; AVś.14.1.5c.

grāvṇāṃśūn	iva somasya AVP.9.6.9c.

grāvṇo	brahmā yuyujānaḥ saparyan RV.5.40.8a.

grāvṇo	yujāno adhvare manīṣā RV.3.57.4b.

grīṣma	idhmaḥ śarad dhaviḥ RV.10.90.6d; AVś.19.6.10d; AVP.9.5.8d; VS.31.14d; TA.3.12.3d.

grīṣma	in nu rantyaḥ ArS.4.2b.

grīṣma	ṛtuḥ (TS. ṛtūnām) VS.10.11; TS.4.3.3.1; MS.2.7.20: 105.3; KS.39.7; śB.5.4.1.4.

grīṣmam	ṛtūnāṃ prīṇāmi TS.1.6.2.3; KS.4.14; Mś.1.4.1.27.

grīṣmas	te bhūme varṣāṇi AVś.12.1.36a. P: grīṣmas te bhūme Kauś.137.9.

grīṣmasyāhaṃ	devayajyayaujasvāṃs tejasvān (Mś. -aujasvān vīryavān) bhūyāsam KS.4.14; Mś.1.4.1.27.

grīṣmāya	kalaviṅkān VS.24.20; MS.3.14.1: 172.8; KSA.10.4; śB.13.5.1.13; Apś.20.14.5.

grīṣmāya	tvā śB.1.3.2.8.

grīṣmāya	namaḥ KSA.11.2.

grīṣmāya	svāhā Apś.20.20.6.

grīṣmeṇa	ṛtunā devāḥ (KSṭB. grīṣmeṇa devā ṛtunā) VS.21.24a; MS.3.11.12a: 159.3; KS.38.11a; TB.2.6.19.1a.

grīṣmeṇa	tvartunā (KSA. -nāṃ) haviṣā dīkṣayāmi TS.7.1.18.1; KSA.1.9.

grīṣmeṇa	devā etc. see prec. but one.

grīṣmeṇāvartate	saha TA.1.3.3b.

grīṣmo	dakṣiṇaḥ pakṣaḥ (MS. dakṣiṇaṃ pakṣam) MS.4.9.18: 135.8; TB.3.10.4.1; TA.4.19.1.

grīṣmo	mānasaḥ VS.13.55; TS.4.3.2.1; MS.2.7.19: 104.3; KS.16.19; śB.8.1.1.8.

grīṣmo	hemanta uta no (śG. vā) vasantaḥ TS.5.7.2.4a; śG.4.18.1a; SMB.2.1.11a; PG.3.2.2a. See next two, vasanto grīṣmo madhumanti, and hemanto vasanto.

grīṣmo	hemanta ṛtavaḥ śivā naḥ AG.2.4.14a. See under prec.

grīṣmo	hemantaḥ śiśiro vasantaḥ AVś.6.55.2a. P: grīṣmo hemantaḥ Vait.2.16. See under prec. but one.

grīvā	ādadhate veḥ RV.6.48.17d.

grīvābhyaḥ	svāhā TS.7.3.16.1; KSA.3.6.

grīvābhyas	ta uṣṇihābhyaḥ RV.10.163.2a; AVś.2.33.2a; 20.96.18a; AVP.4.7.2a; 9.3.10a; ApMB.1.17.2a (ApG.3.9.10). Cf. anūkād.

grīvābhyo	me skandhābhyāṃ me SMB.2.5.2a.

grīvās	te kṛtye pādau ca AVś.10.1.21a.

grīvāsu	prati muñcatu AVP.7.1.10d.

grīvāyāṃ	(KS. grīvāsu) baddho apikakṣa āsani (MS. apipakṣa āsan) RV.4.40.4b; VS.9.14b; TS.1.7.8.3b; MS.1.11.2b: 163.1; KS.13.14b; śB.5.1.5.19b; N.2.28b.

agnyagrā	indrabalāḥ # AVP.2.25.1a.

agra	imaṃ yajñaṃ nayatāgre yajñapatiṃ dhatta # TS.1.1.5.1. P: agra ... yajñapatim TB.3.2.5.3; 3.6.1. See next, and agraṃ yajñaṃ.

agra	imam adya yajñaṃ nayatāgre yajñapatiṃ sudhātuṃ yajñapatiṃ devayuvam # VS.1.12. See under prec.

agra	udbhindatām asat # TB.2.4.7.3b. See agram etc.

agra	eti yuvatir ahrayāṇā # RV.7.80.2c.

agraṃ	yajñaṃ nayatāgraṃ yajñapatim # MS.1.1.4: 2.13. See under agra imaṃ yajñaṃ.

agraṃ	yajñasya bṛhato nayantīḥ # RV.6.65.2c.

agraṃ	vṛkṣasya rohataḥ # VS.23.24b; TS.7.4.19.3b; MS.3.13.1b: 168.5; KSA.4.8b; śB.13.2.9.7; 5.2.5b; TB.3.9.7.4. Cf. agre vṛkṣasya.

agraṃ	gachatho vivare goarṇasaḥ # RV.1.112.18b.

agraṃ	jyeṣṭha pary agāmeha deva # AVP.1.51.1b.

agrato	'pasthāntike guroḥ # Kauś.141.40d.

agraṃ	nayat supady akṣarāṇām # RV.3.31.6c; VS.33.59c; MS.4.6.4c: 83.11; KS.27.9c; TB.2.5.8.10c; Apś.12.15.6c.

agrabhaṃ	sam agrabham # AVP.3.15.6a.

agrabhaṃ	hastyaṃ manaḥ # AVP.3.29.3c.

agrabhīt	# VS.28.23,46; Aś.3.4.15; śś.6.1.5. See agṛbhīt.

agrabhīṣata	# KS.19.13. Cf. agṛbhīṣata.

agrabhīṣuḥ	# TB.2.6.15.2; Aś.3.4.15 (comm.); śś.6.1.5.

agrabhīṣṭām	# MS.4.13.9: 211.8; TB.3.6.15.1; N.6.16.

agram-agram	id bhajate vasūnām # RV.1.123.4d.

agram	udbhindatām asat # AVP.6.9.5d. See agra etc.

agram	eṣy oṣadhīnām # AVś.4.19.3a. See agre 'sy etc.

agraṃ	pibā madhūnām # RV.4.46.1a; Aś.5.5.4. P: agraṃ pibā śś.7.2.4; 11.8.3. Cf. BṛhD.5.4.

agrādvānā	namasā rātahavyā # RV.6.69.6b.

agrāya	svāhā # TB.3.1.5.8.

agriyo	vāca īrayan # RV.9.62.26b; SV.2.126b; JB.3.20.

agrīvaḥ	pratyamuñcat # TA.1.11.5c.

agrego	rājāpyas taviṣyate # RV.9.86.45a; SV.2.966a.

agreṇa	pari ṇo nama # AVP.1.86.7b.

agreṇīr	asi svāveśa unnetṝṇām # VS.6.2; śB.3.7.1.9. P: agreṇīr asi Kś.6.2.19. See svāveśo 'sy.

agre	devānām idam attu no haviḥ # TB.2.5.1.1d.

agrepābhir	ṛtupābhiḥ sajoṣāḥ # RV.4.34.7c.

agre	budhāna uṣasāṃ sumanmā # RV.7.68.9b.

agre	(MS.3.2.1, KS.9.19, and Mś. agne) bṛhann uṣasām ūrdhvo asthāt # RV.10.1.1a; VS.12.13a; TS.4.2.1.4a; 5.2.1.5; MS.2.7.8a: 85.14; 3.2.1: 15.20; KS.16.8a; 19.11; śB.6.7.3.10; Apś.16.10.14. P: agre (MS.KSṃś. agne) bṛhan MS.4.10.2: 146.7; KS.9.19; Aś.4.13.7; śś.6.4.5; Kś.16.5.17; Mś.6.1.4.15; Rvidh.2.31.6; BṛhD.6.147.

agre	yajñasya śocataḥ (KS. cetataḥ) # RV.7.15.5c; KS.40.14c. See agne yajñasya.

agreyāvā	dhiṣaṇe yaṃ dadhāte # MS.4.14.9b: 228.5.

agre	rathānāṃ bhavati prajānan # RV.7.44.4b.

agre	rupa ārupitaṃ jabāru # RV.4.5.7d; N.6.17.

agre	rebho na jarata ṛṣūṇām # RV.1.127.10f.

agre	vatso ajāyata # AVP.4.1.9b.

agre	vācaḥ pavamānaḥ kanikradat # RV.9.106.10c; SV.1.572c; 2.290c; JB.3.78c; PB.12.11.3c.

agre	vāco agriyo goṣu gachati (SV.JB. gachasi) # RV.9.86.12b; SV.2.383b; JB.3.135b.

agre	vājasya bhajate mahādhanam (SV.JB. bhajase mahaddhanam) # RV.9.86.12c; SV.2.383c; JB.3.135c.

agre	vikṣu pradīdayat # RV.8.6.24c. See agne vikṣu.

agre	viṣkandhadūṣaṇam # AVś.19.35.1d; AVP.11.4.1d.

agre	vṛkṣasya krīḍataḥ (VSK.śś. krīlataḥ) # VS.23.25b; VSK.25.27b; śB.13.5.2.5b; Aś.10.8.10b,11b; śś.16.4.1b. Cf. agraṃ vṛkṣasya.

agre	samidham # see agne samidham.

agre	sindhūnāṃ pavamāno arṣati (SV.JB. arṣasi) # RV.9.86.12a; SV.2.383a; JB.3.135a.

agre	'sy oṣadhīnām # AVP.5.25.3a. See agram eṣy etc.

anugrāsaś	(PB. anugrābhaś) ca vṛtrahan # RV.8.1.14b; AVś.20.116.2b; PB.9.10.1b.

annasyāgraṃ	saṃ bharāma etat # AVP.5.15.1b.

anyatrogra	vi vartaya # AVś.11.2.21c.

ariṣṭagrāmāḥ	sumatiṃ pipartana # RV.1.166.6b.

asitagrīvaś	chāgaiḥ # VS.23.13; śB.13.2.7.2. See lohitagrīvaś.

asṛgraṃ	vājasātaye # RV.9.13.6b; SV.2.541b.

asṛgraṃ	vāre avyaye # RV.9.66.11b; SV.2.8b; JB.1.104.

asṛgran	(SV. -graṃ) devavītaye # RV.9.46.1a; 9.67.17a; SV.2.1162a.

asṛgram	inda ūtaye # RV.9.62.7b; SV.2.329b.

asṛgram	indavaḥ pathā # RV.9.7.1a; SV.2.478a.

asṛgram	indra te giraḥ # RV.1.9.4a; AVś.20.71.10a; SV.1.205a.

āgrayaṇaṃ	brahmaṇāṃ haviḥ # AVP.4.40.1c.

āgrayaṇaś	(MS.KS. āgrāyaṇaś) ca me vaiśvadevaś (KS. kṣullakavaiśvadevaś) ca me # VS.18.20; TS.4.7.7.1; MS.2.11.5: 143.5; KS.18.11.

āgrayaṇas	te dakṣakratū pātv asau # Aś.6.9.3. See ātmānaṃ ta āgra-.

āgrayaṇasya	pātram asi # TS.3.1.6.3.

āgrayaṇāt	(MS.KS. āgrāyaṇāt) triṇavatrayastriṃśau # VS.13.58; TS.4.3.2.3; MS.2.7.19: 104.13; KS.16.19; śB.8.1.2.8.

āgrayaṇo	'si svāgrayaṇaḥ (MSṃś. āgrāyaṇo 'si svāgrāyaṇaḥ) # VS.7.20; TS.1.4.10.1; 11.1; MS.1.3.13: 35.9; śB.4.2.2.9; Mś.2.3.5.9.

āgrāya#	see āgraya-.

ādāyogro	vi dhāraya # AVP.10.2.4d.

ādityagrahasāvitrau	# Aś.5.5.21c; Vait.20.4c.

iṣvagrāṇy	āñcatu # AVś.11.10.16b.

ugra	āpatikād adhi # AVP.12.5.1c.

ugra	āpatiko maṇiḥ # AVP.7.5.6d.

ugra	it te vanaspate # AVś.19.34.9a; AVP.11.3.9a.

ugra	iva vāto viśṛṇan sapatnān # AVP.12.5.8b.

ugra	īśānaḥ prati muñca tasmin # AVś.9.2.3c.

ugra	ugrābhir ūtibhiḥ # RV.1.7.4c; AVś.20.70.10c; SV.2.148c; ArS.2.4c; MS.2.13.6c: 155.6; KS.39.12c; TB.1.5.8.3c. Cf. ugrābhir.

ugra	ugrebhir ā gahi # RV.8.49 (Vāl.1).7d.

ugra	ugrebhi sthaviraḥ sahodāḥ # RV.1.171.5d.

ugra	ṛṣvebhir ā gahi # RV.8.3.17d; SV.1.301d.

ugra	ojmānam ā dadhat (AVP. dadhau) # AVś.4.19.8d; AVP.5.25.8d.

ugraḥ	paśupatiś ca yaḥ # AVP.15.13.10b. See rudraṃ paśupatiś.

ugraḥ	paśuvid vīravid vo astu # AVś.11.1.15d.

ugraḥ	prajayā saṃ sṛjainām # AVP.3.39.4d.

ugraṃ	yuyujma pṛtanāsu sāsahim # RV.8.61.12a.

ugraṃ	rājanyaiḥ saha # AVP.3.9.3b.

ugraṃ	lohitena # VS.39.9.

ugraṃ	va oja sthirā śavāṃsi # RV.7.56.7a.

ugraṃ	vaco apāvadhīt (SVṃS. apāvadhīḥ svāhā; TSṭB. apāvadhīm) # SV.1.353d; VS.5.8c (ter); TS.1.2.11.2; MS.1.2.7d: 17.5; KS.2.8 (bis); TB.1.5.9.5,6; śB.3.4.4.23c,24c,25c.

ugraṃ	vaniṣad ātatam # AVś.20.132.6; śś.12.18.14.

ugraṃ	varṣate svāhā # VS.22.26. Cf. ugraṃ stanayate.

ugraṃ	vahantībhyaḥ svāhā # TS.7.4.14.1; KSA.4.3.

ugraṃ	śarma mahi śravaḥ # RV.9.61.10c; SV.1.467c; 2.22c; VS.26.16c.

ugraṃ	śavaḥ patyate dhṛṣṇv ojaḥ # RV.3.36.4b.

ugraṃ	sahodām iha taṃ huvema (MS. huve) # RV.3.47.5d; VS.7.36d; TS.1.4.17.1d; MS.1.3.1d: 37.14; KS.4.8d; TB.2.8.3.4d; śB.4.3.3.14d.

ugraṃ	stanayate svāhā # TS.7.5.11.1; KSA.5.2. Cf. ugraṃ varṣate.

ugraṃ	huvema paramāt sadhastāt # MahānU.6.6b. See agniṃ huvema, and ukthair havāmahe.

ugraṃ	khadiram ojase # AVś.10.6.6c--10c.

ugraṃ	cit tvām avase saṃ śiśīmahe # AVP.3.36.2c. See tvām ugram avase saṃ.

ugraṃ	cit tvā mahimā sakṣad avase # RV.1.129.10b.

ugraṃ	cettāram adhirājam akran (AVś. akrata) # RV.10.128.9d; AVś.5.3.10d; AVP.5.4.14d; VS.34.46d; TS.4.7.14.4d; KS.40.10d. Cf. hvayāmy ugraṃ.

ugradhanvā	pratihitābhir astā # RV.10.103.3d; AVś.19.13.4d; SV.2.1201d; VS.17.35d. See ūrdhvadhanvā.

ugraṃ	tat patyate śava indro aṅga # RV.1.84.9c; AVś.20.63.6c; SV.2.692c.

ugraṃ	te pājo (AVP. śardho) nanv ā rurudhre # RV.10.84.3c; AVś.4.31.3c; AVP.4.12.3c.

ugraṃ	dakṣāya sādhanam # RV.9.62.29b.

ugraṃ	devaṃ vaniṣṭhunā # VS.39.8.

ugraṃ	devaṃ tarpayāmi # BDh.2.5.9.6.

ugraṃ	dhanur ojasvān ā tanuṣva # AVP.1.76.1b.

ugraṃ	na vīraṃ namasopa sedima # RV.8.49 (Vāl.1).6a.

ugraṃ	nidhātur anv āyam ichan # RV.5.30.2b.

ugraṃ	no 'vaḥ pārye ahan dāḥ # RV.6.26.1d.

ugraputre	jighāṃsataḥ # RV.8.67.11b.

ugra	praṇetar adhi ṣū vaso gahi # RV.8.24.7c.

ugrabāhur	mrakṣakṛtvā puraṃdaraḥ # RV.8.61.10a.

ugram	ayātam avaho ha kutsam # RV.5.31.8c.

ugram	ātapate svāhā # TS.7.5.11.2; KSA.5.2.

ugram	ugrasya tavasas tavīyaḥ # RV.6.18.4c.

ugram	ugrāsas taviṣāsa enam # RV.10.44.3b; AVś.20.94.3b.

ugram	ugreṇa śavasā # RV.8.1.21b.

ugram	eṣāṃ cittaṃ viśve 'vantu devāḥ # AVP.3.19.5d. See eṣāṃ cittaṃ etc.

ugram	ojiṣṭhaṃ tavasaṃ (SV. tarasaṃ) tarasvinam # RV.8.97.10d; AVś.20.54.1d; SV.1.370d; 2.280d.

ugraṃpaśyā	(MS. ugraṃ paśyāc) ca rāṣṭrabhṛc ca tāni # MS.4.14.17c: 245.12; TA.2.4.1c. See next but one, and dūrepaśyā ca.

ugraṃpaśyā	rāṣṭrabhṛto hy akṣāḥ # AVś.7.109.6b; AVP.4.9.1b.

ugraṃpaśye	ugrajitau tad adya # AVś.6.118.1c. See under prec. but one.

ugraṃpaśye	(MS. ugraṃ paśyed) rāṣṭrabhṛt kilbiṣāṇi # AVś.6.118.2a; MS.4.14.17a: 245.13; TA.2.4.1a.

ugraṃ	pūrvīṣu pūrvyam # RV.5.35.6c.

ugraṃ	phenam ivāsyam # SMB.2.6.18d.

ugraṃ	marudbhī rudraṃ huvema # RV.10.126.5c. See rudraṃ marudbhir.

ugraś	cakrāma yo dhṛṣat # RV.8.21.2b; AVś.20.14.2b; 62.2b; SV.2.59b.

ugraś	ca dhuniś ca # TA.4.25.1; KA.3.154. See next, dhuniś ca, and dhvāntaś ca.

ugraś	ca bhīmaś ca # VS.17.86; 39.7; MS.4.9.17: 135.5; Mś.4.4.43. Designated as vimukha-formula PG.2.15.6. See prec., and ugrā ca bhīmā ca.

ugraś	cettā pañca kṛṣṭīr vi rāja # AVP.1.75.1d.

ugraś	cettā vasuvit # TS.1.6.2.1; 2.3.9.1; MS.2.3.2 (quinq.): 29.10,11,13,14,15; KS.12.2 (bis). See abhibhūś.

ugraś	cettā sapatnahā # AVś.4.8.2b; AVP.4.2.2b; KS.37.9b; TB.2.7.8.1b; 16.1b.

ugras	tanticaro vṛṣā # Mś.1.3.4.3b. See rudras etc.

ugras	turāṣāḍ abhibhūtyojāḥ # RV.3.48.4a.

ugrasya	cid damitā vīḍuharṣiṇaḥ # RV.2.23.11d.

ugrasya	cin manyave nā namante # RV.10.34.8c.

ugrasya	cettuḥ saṃmanasaḥ sajātāḥ # AVś.6.73.1d.

ugrasya	devasya patnīṃ tarpayāmi # BDh.2.5.9.6.

ugrasya	devasya patnyai svāhā # HG.2.8.7; ApMB.2.18.27 (ApG.7.20.4).

ugrasya	devasya sutaṃ tarpayāmi # BDh.2.5.9.6.

ugrasya	manyor ud imaṃ nayāmi # AVś.1.10.1d; AVP.1.9.1d.

ugrasya	yūna (MS. yūnaḥ) sthavirasya ghṛṣveḥ # RV.3.46.1b; MS.4.14.14b: 238.7.

ugrasya	sakhye tava # RV.8.4.7b; SV.2.955b.

ugrasyeva	dhanvanaḥ # AVP.8.2.4d.

ugrā	iva pravahantaḥ samāyamuḥ # RV.10.94.6a.

ugrāḥ	puruṣajīvanīḥ # AVś.8.7.4e.

ugrā	ca bhīmā ca # TA.4.23.1. See ugraś ca bhīmaś ca.

ugrā	ca bhīmā ca pitṛṇāṃ yamasyendrasya # TS.4.4.11.2; KS.22.5.

ugrāṃ	jaitrīm uttamām ehi bhakṣām # Aś.4.13.2b.

ugrāṇām	inda ojiṣṭhaḥ # RV.9.66.16b.

ugrā	ta indra sthavirasya bāhū # AVś.19.15.4c; AVP.3.35.4c. See ṛṣvā ta.

ugrād	abhiprabhaṅgiṇaḥ # RV.8.45.35b.

ugrā	diśām abhibhūtir vayodhāḥ # AVP.15.1.3a; TS.4.4.12.1a; MS.3.16.4a: 188.2; KS.22.14a; Aś.4.12.2a.

ugrādevaṃ	havāmahe # RV.1.36.18b.

ugrā	nāma stha teṣāṃ vaḥ puro gṛhāḥ prācī dik teṣāṃ vo agnir iṣavaḥ # AVP.2.56.1. Cf. AVś.3.26; AVP.3.11.

ugrābhir	ugrotibhiḥ # RV.1.129.5c. Cf. ugra ugrābhir.

ugrām	ā tiṣṭha # TS.1.8.13.1; MS.2.6.10: 69.14; KS.15.7; TB.1.7.7.2. See dakṣiṇām ā roha.

ugrāya	te saho balaṃ dadāmi # RV.10.116.5c.

ugrāya	devāya svāhā # HG.2.8.6; ApMB.2.18.9 (ApG.7.20.4).

ugrāya	yaśaso dhiyaḥ # AVś.20.48.3a.

ugrā	yā viṣadūṣaṇīḥ # AVś.8.7.10b.

ugrāyudhā	abalān ugrabāhavaḥ # AVś.3.19.7d; AVP.3.19.6d.

ugrāyudhāḥ	pramatinaḥ pravīrāḥ # RVKh.7.55.11a.

ugrā	vaḥ santu bāhavaḥ # RV.10.103.13c; AVś.3.19.7b; AVP.1.56.1b; SV.2.1212c; VS.17.46c. See sthirā vaḥ etc.

ugrā	vighaninā mṛdhaḥ # RV.6.60.5a; SV.2.204a; VS.33.61a; JB.3.39; KS.4.15a.

ugrā	vai nāmaitā āpo yad dhrādunayas tāsāṃ maruto 'dhipatayaḥ # AVP.11.16.8.

ugrāḥ	śaṅkavo bṛhato rathasya # AVP.15.12.6b.

ugrā	santā havāmahe # RV.1.21.4a.

ugrā	hi kaṇvajambhanī # AVś.2.25.1c; AVP.4.13.1c.

ugrā	hi pṛśnimātaraḥ # RV.1.23.10c.

ugreṇa	ca devena ca kṣiptasya # AVP.15.17.1a.

ugreṇa	te (AVP. tam) vacasā bādha ād (AVP. vādha id) u te # AVś.5.13.3b; AVP.8.2.1b.

ugreṇa	vacasā mama # AVś.5.23.2d; AVP.7.2.9d; 8.7.7b. Cf. anena vacasā.

ugreva	rucā nṛpatīva turyai # RV.10.106.4b.

ugreṣv	in nu śūra mandasānaḥ # RV.2.11.17a.

ugro	jajñe vīryāya svadhāvān # RV.7.20.1a; KS.17.18a; KB.21.2; ā.5.2.2.3. P: ugro jajñe Aś.7.7.2; 9.2.5; śś.11.7.7.

ugro	jaitrāya tiṣṭhasi # AVP.6.9.12b.

ugro	devo 'bhi dāsatu # AVP.5.26.4d.

ugro	balavān (text valavān) bhavati mārutaṃ śardha ity enam āhur adhipatir bhavati svānāṃ cānyeṣāṃ ca ya evaṃ veda # AVP.11.16.8.

ugro	bāhubhyāṃ nṛtamaḥ śacīvān # RV.4.22.2b.

ugro	madhyamaśīr iva # RV.10.97.12d; AVś.4.9.4d; AVP.8.3.11d; 9.8.10d; 9.9.1d; 11.7.2d; VS.12.86d; TS.4.2.6.4d; MS.2.7.13d: 94.6; KS.16.13d.

ugro	marmaṇi vidhya # AVś.5.8.9b; AVP.7.18.9b.

ugro	yayiṃ nir apaḥ srotasāsṛjat # RV.1.51.11c.

ugro	yaḥ śambaḥ puruhūta tena # RV.10.42.7b; AVś.20.89.7b; MS.4.14.5b: 222.3; TB.2.8.2.7b; N.5.24.

ugro	rājā manyamānaḥ # AVś.5.19.6a.

ugro	valavān etc. # see ugro balavān etc.

ugro	vāṃ kakuho yayiḥ # RV.5.73.7a.

ugro	virājann apa vṛṅkṣva (ApMB. sedha) śatrūn # AVś.3.12.6b; ApMB.2.15.5b. See agne virājam, and ūrdhvo virājann.

ugro	vo devaḥ pra mṛṇat sapatnān # AVś.9.2.14d.

ugro	'sy ugras tvaṃ deveṣu edhy ugro 'haṃ sajāteṣu bhūyāsaṃ priyaḥ sajātānām (TS. ugro 'sy ugro 'haṃ sajāteṣu bhūyāsam) # TS.1.6.2.1; 10.1; MS.2.3.2: 29.10. P: ugro 'si Mś.5.2.1.13.

ugrau	te koṣau sahanisyadābhyām # AVP.15.12.7b.

ugrau	te nemī pavī ta ugrau # AVP.15.12.6a.

udagrābhasya	namayan vadhasnaiḥ (SV. vadhasnum) # RV.9.97.15b; SV.2.158b.

udgrahīṣyate	svāhā # TS.7.5.11.2; KSA.5.2.

udgrābhaṃ	ca nigrābhaṃ ca (MS.KSṃś. udgrābhaś ca nigrābhaś ca) # VS.17.64a; TS.1.1.13.1a; 6.4.2a; 4.6.3.4a; MS.1.1.13a: 8.15; 3.3.8: 41.12; KS.1.12a; 18.3a; śB.9.2.3.22a; Apś.3.5.5; Mś.1.3.4.7.

udgrābheṇod	agrabhīt (MS. ajigrabhat; KS.1.12b, ajīgrabham; KS.18.3b, ajīgṛbham) # VS.17.63b; TS.1.1.13.1b; 6.4.2b; 4.6.3.4b; 5.4.6.6b; MS.1.1.13b: 8.13; 3.3.8: 41.9; KS.1.12b; 18.3b; 21.8; śB.9.2.3.21b.

urugrāhair	bāhvaṅkaiḥ # AVś.11.9.12c.

ūrdhvagrāvāṇo	adhvaram ataṣṭa # RV.3.54.12d.

ṛkṣagrīvaṃ	pramīlinam # AVś.8.6.2d.

ṛtugrahāś	ca me 'tigrāhyāś ca me # TS.4.7.7.1.

kalmāṣagrīvo	rakṣitā # AVś.3.27.5; AVP.3.24.5; TS.5.5.10.2; MS.2.13.21: 167.9; ApMB.2.17.19.

kṛṣṇagrīva	āgneyo rarāṭe (MS. lalāṭe) purastāt # VS.24.1; MS.3.13.2: 168.10. See āgneyau kṛṣṇagrīvau, and cf. āgneyaḥ, and kṛṣṇagrīvā.

kṛṣṇagrīvaḥ	śitikakṣo 'ñjisakthas (MS. 'ñjiṣakthas) ta aindrāgnāḥ # VS.24.4; MS.3.13.5: 169.10.

kṛṣṇagrīvā	āgneyāḥ # VS.24.6,9,14; MS.3.13.7: 170.1; 3.13.10: 170.8; 3.13.12: 170.12; 3.13.13: 171.3; 3.13.15: 171.9; 3.13.16: 171.12; Apś.20.14.7. P: kṛṣṇagrīvāḥ Apś.20.14.8,11; 15.2. Cf. under kṛṣṇagrīva.

goagrayāśvāvatyā	rabhemahi # RV.1.53.5d; AVś.20.21.5d; MS.2.2.6d: 20.5; KS.10.12d.

jāgratīṃ	tvā sādayāmi # TS.1.4.34.1; MS.2.13.19: 165.10; KS.40.4; TA.3.19.1.

jāgrate	svāhā # VS.22.7; TS.7.1.19.2; MS.3.12.3: 160.15; KSA.1.10.

jāgratsvapnaḥ	saṃkalpaḥ pāpaḥ # RV.10.164.5c.

jāgradduṣvapnyaṃ	svapneduṣvapnyam # AVś.16.6.9.

jyotiragrā	uṣasaḥ prati jāgarāsi # AVś.14.2.31d.

tapuragrābhir	ṛṣṭibhiḥ (AVś. arcibhiḥ) # RV.10.87.23d; AVś.8.3.23d.

tasyāgre	tvaṃ vanaspate # AVś.14.2.50c.

tasyāgre	'rasaṃ viṣam # AVP.4.17.3c.

tugraṃ	kutsāya smadibhaṃ ca randhayam # RV.10.49.4b.

tugrasya	sūnum ūhathū rajobhiḥ # RV.6.62.6b.

tugro	ha bhujyum aśvinodameghe # RV.1.116.3a; TA.1.10.2a.

tuvigraye	vahnaye duṣṭarītave # RV.2.21.2c.

tuvigrābhaṃ	tuvikūrmiṃ rabhodām # RV.6.22.5c; AVś.20.36.5c.

tuvigrīvā	iverate # RV.1.187.5d; AVP.6.16.5d; KS.40.8d.

tuvigrīvo	anānataḥ # RV.8.64.7b; SV.1.142b.

tuvigrīvo	vapodaraḥ # RV.8.17.8a; AVś.20.5.2a.

tuvigrīvo	vṛṣabho vāvṛdhānaḥ # RV.5.2.12a.

tuvigrebhiḥ	satvabhir yāti vi jrayaḥ # RV.1.140.9b.

tvayāgre	nirakurvata (AVP. nirakṛṇvata) # AVś.4.19.4b; AVP.5.25.4b.

dāmagranthiṃ	sanisrasam # AVP.6.14.5c.

nakhograṃ	dantavīryam # AVP.6.14.3d.

nāmagrāhād	vāco heḍāt # AVP.7.8.6c.

nigrābheṇādharāṃ	(MS. -dharaṃ) akaḥ # VS.17.63d; TS.1.1.13.1d; 6.4.2d; 4.6.3.4d; MS.1.1.13d: 8.14; KS.1.12d; 18.3d; śB.9.2.3.21d.

nigrābhyā	(MS. -bhyāḥ; KS. -bhyās) stha devaśrutaḥ (KS. -śrutaś śukrāś śukrabhṛtaḥ) # VS.6.30; TS.3.1.8.1; MS.1.3.2: 30.5; KS.3.10; śB.3.9.4.7. P: nigrābhyā (MśṃG. nigrābhyāḥ) stha Kś.9.4.7; Mś.2.3.2.36; 2.4.4.2; MG.1.5.4; BDh.3.8.12.

niṣkagrīvo	bṛhadukthaḥ # RV.5.19.3c.

niṣṭigryaḥ	putram ā cyāvayotaye # RV.10.101.12c; AVś.20.137.2c.

nīlagrīvaṃ	vilohitam (AVP.14.3.1d and NīlarU.1d, śikhaṇḍinam) # AVP.14.3.1d,2d,10b; NīlarU.1d,2d,10b.

nīlagrīvā	vilohitāḥ # VS.16.58b; TS.4.5.11.1b; MS.2.9.9b: 128.15; KS.17.16b.

nīlagrīvāḥ	śitikaṇṭhāḥ # VS.16.56a,57a; TS.4.5.11.1a (bis). See ye nīla-.

nīlagrīvāsu	sīdatā # AVP.1.59.4b.

nīlagrīvo	vilohitaḥ # VS.16.7b; TS.4.5.1.3b; MS.2.9.2b: 121.11; KS.17.11b.

nyagrodham	aparād deśāt # GG.4.7.22c.

nyagrodhaś	camasaiḥ # VS.23.13; TS.7.4.12.1; KSA.4.1; śB.13.2.7.3.

nyagrodhāc	chastrasaṃpīḍām # GG.4.7.23c.

nyagrodhena	vanaspatīn # TS.7.3.14.1; KSA.3.4.

nyagrodho	vāruṇo vṛkṣaḥ # GG.4.7.24c.

pṛthugrāvāsi	vānaspatyaḥ # MS.1.1.6: 3.12; 4.1.6: 8.3. P: pṛthugrāvāsi Mś.1.2.2.10. Cf. under adrir asi.

pratigrahītre	gotamo vasiṣṭhaḥ # AVP.2.28.5c; 5.28.4e.

prāgruvo	nabhanvo na vakvāḥ # RV.4.19.7a.

progrāṃ	pītiṃ vṛṣṇa iyarmi satyām # RV.10.104.3a; AVś.20.25.7a; 33.2a; Aś.6.4.10. P: progrāṃ pītim śś.9.18.5; Vait.26.10.

phalagrahir	asi phalagrahir aham # Mś.5.2.8.16.

bṛhadgrāvāsi	(VSK. bṛhan grā-) vānaspatyaḥ # VS.1.15; VSK.1.5.4; MS.1.1.6: 3.13; 4.1.6: 8.6; KS.1.15; 31.4; śB.1.1.4.10. Ps: bṛhadgrāvāsi Mś.1.2.2.12; bṛhadgrāvā Kś.2.4.11. Cf. under adrir asi.

brahmāgre	jyeṣṭhaṃ divam ā tatāna # AVś.19.22.21b; 23.30b; AVP.8.9.1b; TB.2.4.7.10b.

madeṣūgrā	iṣaṇanta bhurvaṇi # RV.1.134.5b.

mandrāgretvarī	bhuvanasya gopāḥ # AVś.12.1.57c.

mahāgrāmo	na yāmann uta tviṣā # RV.10.78.6d.

mābrāhmaṇāgrataḥkṛtam	aśnīyāt # Kauś.74.12a.

yathāgre	tvaṃ vanaspate # AVś.19.31.9a; AVP.10.5.9a.

yathāgre	brahmaṇaspatiḥ # Kauś.3.2b.

yayāgre	asurā jitāḥ # AVś.11.10.15d.

yāgre	vāk samavadata # MG.1.10.15a. Cf. ūrdhvā vāk samabhavat and PG.1.7.2.

yuktagrāvā	jāyate devakāmaḥ # RV.3.4.9d; TS.3.1.11.2d; MS.4.13.10d: 213.6; NṛpU.2.4d.

yuktagrāvā	sutasomo jarāte # RV.5.37.2b.

yuktagrāvṇo	yo 'vitā suśipraḥ # RV.2.12.6c; AVś.20.34.6c; AVP.12.14.6c.

Dictionary of Sanskrit Search

"gr" has 1126 results

agra	the original Samhita text as opposed to pratṛṇna ( प्रतृण्ण ) or padapāṭha, (पदपाठ) which is the recital of separate words.

agravāla	(Vasudeva-Śarana Agravāla), a modern scholar of Sanskrit grammar, the author of "India as known to Pāṇini".

agrahaṇa	on-inclusion, non-comprehension. confer, compare विभक्तौ लिङ्गविशिष्टाग्रहणम् Par. Śekh. Par. 72, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). VII. 1.1 Vart. 13.

arthagrahaṇa	use of the word 'अर्थ'; confer, compare अर्थग्रहणं करोति तज्ज्ञापयत्याचार्यः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.11.

arthavadgrahaṇaparibhāṣā	a well known maxim or Paribha of grammarians fully stated as अर्थवद्ग्रहणे नानर्थकस्य ग्रहणम्, deduced from the phrase अर्थवद्ग्रहणात् frequently used by the Vārttikakāra. The Paribhāṣā lays down that 'when a combination of letters employed in Grammar, is possessed of a sense, it has to be taken as possessed of sense and not such an one as is devoid of sense.'

alaukikavigraha	the dissolution of a compound not in the usual popular manner. e. g. राजपुरुष: dissolved as राजन् ङस् पुरुष सु, as contrasted with the लौकिकविग्रह viz. राज्ञः पुरुष: । see also अधिहरि dissolved as हरि ङि in the अलौकिकविग्रह.

alpragrahaṇa(1)	the word अल् actually used in Pāṇini's rule e. g. अपृक्त एकाल् प्रत्ययः P.I.2.41.(2) the wording as अल् or wording by mention of a single letter exempli gratia, for example अचि श्रुधातुभ्रुवांय्वो P, VI.4.77.

avagraha(1)	separation of a compound word into its component elements as shown in the Pada-Pāṭha of the Vedic Saṁhitās. In the Padapāṭha, individual words are shown separately if they are combined by Saṁdhi rules or by the formation of a compound in the Saṁhitāpāṭha; exempli gratia, for example पुरोहितम् in the Saṁhitāpāṭha is read as पुरःsहितम्. In writing, there is observed the practice of placing the sign (ऽ) between the two parts, about which nothing can be said as to when and how it originatedition The AtharvaPrātiśākhya defines अवग्रह as the separation of two padas joined in Saṁhitā. (Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. II.3.25; II.4.5). In the recital of the pada-pāṭha, when the word-elements are uttered separately, there is a momentary pause measuring one matra or the time required for the utterance of a short vowel. (See for details Vāj. Prāt. Adhāya 5). (2) The word अवग्रह is also used in the sense of the first out of the two words or members that are compounded together. See Kāśikā on P.VIII.4.26; confer, compare also तस्य ( इङ्ग्यस्य ) पूर्वपदमवग्रहः यथा देवायत इति देव-यत. Tai. Pr. I. 49. The term अवग्रह is explained in the Mahābhāṣya as 'separation, or splitting up of a compound word into its constitutent parts; confer, compare छन्दस्यानङोवग्रहो दृश्येत पितामह इति ।(Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.2.36); also confer, compare यद्येवमवग्रहः प्राप्नोति । न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः। पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् । यथालक्षणं पदं कर्तव्यम् (Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.1.109) where the Bhāṣyakāra has definitely stated that the writers of the Padapāṭha have to split up a word according to the rules of Grammar. (3) In recent times, however, the word अवग्रह is used in the sense of the sign (ऽ) showing the coalescence of अ (short or long) with the preceding अ (short or long ) or with the preceding ए or ओ exempli gratia, for example शिवोऽ र्च्यः, अत्राऽऽगच्छ. (4) The word is also used in the sense of a pause, or an interval of time when the constituent elements of a compound word are shown separately; confer, compare समासेवग्रहो ह्रस्वसमकालः (Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V.1). (5) The word is also used in the sense of the absence of Sandhi when the Sandhi is admissible.

avagrahavirāma	the interval or pause after the utterance of the first member of a compound word when the members are uttered separately. This interval is equal to two moras according to Tait. Pr. while, it is equal to one mora according to the other Prātiśākhyas.

avyayasaṃgraha	name of a treatise ondeclinable words attributed to Sākaṭāyana.

asvapadavigraha	a term used for those compounds, the dissolution of which cannot be shown by the members of the compound: e. g. सुमुखी; confer, compare भवति वै कश्चिदस्वपदविग्रहोपि बहुव्रीहिः । तद्यथा । शोभनं मुखमस्याः सुमुखीति । M.Bh. on V.4.5.

aāgrāyaṇa	an ancient scholar of Nirukta quoted by Yāska confer, compare अक्षि अष्टेः । अनक्तेरिति आग्रायणः Nirukta of Yāska.I.9.

ugrabhūti	or उग्राचार्य writer of a gloss on the Nirukta, called Niruktabhāṣya believed to have lived in the 18th century A. D; writer also of a grammatical work Śiṣyahitāvṛtti or Śiṣyahitānyāsa, which was sent to kāshmir and made popular with a large sum of money spent upon it, by his pupil Ānanadpāla.

udgrāha	alleviation, ease, relief; name given to a Saṁdhi in the Prātiśākhya works when a visarga and a short vowel अ preceding it are changed into short अ, (e. g. यः + इन्द्र: = य इन्द्र:), as also when the vowel ए or ओ is changed into अ being followed by a dissimilar vowel; e. g. अग्ने + इन्द्रः = अग्न इन्द्रः; confer, compare R.Pr.II.10.

udgrāhapadavṛtti	name given in the Rk. Prātiśākhya to the Udgrāhasaṁdhi where the vowel अ is followed by a long vowel; e.g, कः ईषते =क ईषते R.Pr.II.10.

udgrāhavat	name given to a saṁdhi in the Rk. Prātiśākhya when the vowel अ or अा is changed into अ e. g. प्र ऋभुभ्यः=प्रऋभुभ्य: also मधुना + ऋतस्य=मधुन ऋतस्य confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II. 11.

upagraha	a term used by the ancient grammarians in the sense of the Parasmaipada and the Ātmanepada affixes. The word is not found in Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī.. The Vārttikakāra has used the word in his Vārttika उपग्रहप्रतिषेधश्च on P. III.2.127 evidently in the sense of Pada affixes referring to the Ātmanepada as explained by Kaiyaṭa in the words उपग्रहस्य आत्मनेपदसंज्ञाया इत्यर्थ: । The word occurs in the Ślokavārttika सुप्तिङुपग्रहलिङ्गनराणां quoted by Patañjali in his Mahābhāṣya on व्यत्ययो बहुलम् P. III. 1.85, where Nāgeśa writes लादेशव्यङ्ग्यं स्वार्थत्वादि । इह तत्प्रतीतिनिमित्ते परस्मै-पदात्मनेपदे उपग्रहशब्देन लक्षणयोच्येते । The word is found in the sense of Pada in the Mahābhāṣya on P. III. 1.40. The commentator on Puṣpasūtra explains the word as उपगृह्यते समीपे पठ्यते इति उपग्रहः. The author of the Kāśikā on P. VI. 2.134 has cited the reading चूर्णादीन्यप्राण्युपग्रहात् instead of चूर्णादीन्यप्राणिषष्ठ्याः and made the remark तत्रेापग्रह इति षष्ठ्यन्तमेव पूर्वाचार्योपचारेण गृह्यते. This remark shows that in ancient times उपग्रह meant षष्ठ्यन्त i. e. a word in the genitive case. This sense gave rise to, or was based upon, an allied sense, viz. the meaning of 'षष्ठी' i. e. possession. Possibly the sense 'possession' further developed into the further sense 'possession of the fruit or result for self or others' referring to the तिङ् affixes which possessed that sense. The old sense 'षष्ठ्यन्त' of the word 'उपग्रह' having gone out of use, and the sense 'पद' having come in vogue, the word षष्ठी' must have been substituted for the word 'उपग्रह' by some grammarians before the time of the Kāśikākāras. As Patañjali has dropped the Sūtra (VI. 2.134), it cannot be said definitely whether the change of reading took place before Patañjali or after him.

upasaṃgraha	inclusion of something, which is not directly mentioned; confer, compare प्रसिद्ध्युपसंग्रहार्थमेतत् Kāś.on P.I.3.48,also इतिकरणं एवंविधानामेप्यन्येषामुपसंग्रहार्थम् Kāś. on P VII.4.65.

kalāpasaṃgraha	a commentary on the Kalāpa Sūtras.

kṛdgrahaṇa	mention of a kṛt id est, that is of a word ending with a kṛt affix. The word mainly occurs in the Paribhāṣā कृद्ग्रहणे गतिकारकपूर्वस्यापि ग्रहणम् which occurs first as an expression of the Vārttikakāra (P.I.4.13 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 9) and has been later on given as a Paribhāṣā by later grammarians (Pari. Śek. Pari.28).The Paribhāṣā is referred to as वृद्ब्रह्मणपरिभाषा in later grammar works especially commentary works.

kṛdgrahaṇaparibhāṣā	a short term used by the grammarians for the maxim कृद्ग्रहणे गतिकारकपूर्वस्यापि ग्रहणम्. Par.Śek. Pari. 28. See कृद्ग्रहण.

grasta	a fault of pronunciation due to the utterance of a letter hindered or held back at the throat; confer, compare जिह्वामूलनिग्रहे ग्रस्तमेतत् R.Pr.XIV.3; confer, compare also ग्रस्तं निरस्तमवलम्बितम् । ग्रस्तः जिह्वामूले गृहीतः । अव्यक्त इत्यपरे । Pradipa on Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1.

grahaṇa(1)	technical term for a word or प्रातिपदिक in Veda; confer, compare ग्रहणस्य च । गृह्यते इति ग्रहणं वेदस्थः इाब्दः । तत् त्रिविधम् । कार्यभाक्, निमित्तम्, उपबन्ध इति । तस्यापि स्वरूपपूर्वकः अकारः आख्या भवति । Com. on T.Pr.I.22; (2) citing, quoting; confer, compare ग्रहणवता प्रातिपादिकेन न तदन्तविधिः Par.Sek. Pari. 3I ; confer, compare also गृह्णन्तीति ग्रहणाानि Com. on T.Pr.I.24. (3) mention, inclusion; (4) employment in a rule of grammar; confer, compare प्रातिपादिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम्. Par. Sek.Pari.71.

grahaṇaka	citing or instructing the inclusion ( ग्रहण) of certain other things by the mention of a particular thing; e. g. the rule अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः is a ग्रहणक rule as it advises that the citing of the letters अ, इ, उ, ऋ et cetera, and others includes the long and protracted forms of अ, इ, उ etc; confer, compare also ग्रहणकशास्त्रस्य सावर्ण्यविधिनिषेधाभ्यां प्रागनिष्पत्ते; Sid. Kau. on अकः सवर्णे दीर्धः V1. 1. 101.

grahaṇavat	specifically mentioned in a rule, individually mentioned; confer, compare ग्रहणवता प्रातिपदिकेन तदन्तविधिर्नास्ति Par. Sek.Pari.31. See the word ग्रहण.

grahādi	a class of roots headed by the root ग्रह् to which the affix इन् (णिनि), causing vrddhi to the preceding vowel of the root, is added in the sense of an agent: exempli gratia, for example ग्राही, उत्साही, स्थायी, मन्त्री et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III. 1.134.

grāsa	a fault in the utterance of a letter which makes it indistinct by being held up at the throat.Seeग्रस्त.

jāgrahitetivāda	a short disguisition on the correctness of the word जाग्रहीता, written by a grammarian named Cakrin; confer, compare भट्टोजिदीक्षितग्राहग्रस्तं माधवदिग्गजम्। अमूमुचत् सत्यवर्यश्चक्री चक्रिप्रसादभाक्, colophon.

nyavagraha	also नीचावग्रह, the vowel at the अवग्रह or end of the first member of a compound word which has got a grave accent; e. g. the vowel ऊ of नू in तनूनप्त्रे; confer, compare उदाद्यन्तो न्यवग्रहस्तथाभाव्यः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 120. See ताथाभाव्य.

nyāyasaṃgraha	a work enumerating the Paribhāsas in Hemacandra's grammar, numbering 140 nyāyas out of which 57 nyāyas are said to have been given by Hemacandra himself at the end of his comment बृहद्वृत्ति on his Śabdānuśāsana. The work is written by हेमहंसगणि who has added a commentary to it called Nyayārthamaňjūșa by him, which is also known by the name न्यायरत्नमञ्जूषा which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

paragrahaṇa	the use of the word पर;insertion of the word पर in a rule; confer, compare तेनापि परग्रहणं कर्तव्यम् : M.Bh. on I.4.1; confer, compare also परग्रहृणमनर्थकम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III. 1.2.

parigraha	also परिग्रहण. (1) acceptance, inclusion; confer, compare किं प्रयोजनम् \| प्रत्ययार्थे परिग्रहार्थम् M.Bh. on P.III.26.1 ; (2) repetition of a Samhita word in the Pada recital, technically named वेष्टक also; repetition of a word with इति interposed; e. g. सुप्राव्या इति सुप्रऽ अव्या: Rg Veda II.13.9, अलला भवन्तीरित्यललाSभवन्तीः Rg. IV.18.6; confer, compare परिग्रहेत्वनार्षान्तात् तेन वैकाक्षरीक्तात् \| परेषां न्यास-माचारं व्यालिस्तौ चेत्स्वरौ परौ; Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 14. confer, compare also, R.Pr.XI.32,36,42.

paribhāṣārthasaṃgrahṛ	a treatise on the Paribhasas in the system of Panini's grammar written by Vaidyanatha Sastrin.

paribhāṣāsegraha'	a work containing a collection of independent works on Paribhasas in the several systems of Sanskrit Grammar, compiled by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar. The collectlon consists of the following works (i) परिभाषासूचन containing 93 Paribhasas with a commentary by Vyadi, an ancient grammarian who lived before Patanjali; ( ii ) ब्याडीयपरिभाषापाठ, a bare text of 140 Paribhaasaas belonging to the school of Vyadi (iii) शाकटायनपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 98 Paribhasa aphorisms, attributed to the ancient grammarian Saka-tayana, or belonging to that school; [iv) चान्द्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 86 Paribhasa aphorisms given at the end of his grammar work by Candragomin; (v) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a gloss on 65 Paribhas aphorisms of the Katantra school by Durgasimha; (vi) कातन्त्रपारभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a short gloss on 62 Paribhasa aphorisms of the Katantra school by Bhavamisra; (vii) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 96 Paribhasa rules belonging to the Katantra school without any author's name associated with it; (viii) कालापपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 118 Paribhasa rules belonging to the Kalapa school without any author's name associated with it; (ix) जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति a gloss written by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar ( the compiler of the collection), on 108 Paribhasas or maxims noticeable in the Mahavrtti of Abhayanandin on the Jainendra Vyakarana of Pujyapada Devanandin; (x) भोजदेवकृतपरि-भाषासूत्र a text of 118 Paribhasa rules given by Bhoja in the second pada of the first adhyaaya of his grammar work named Sarasvatikanthabharana; (xi) न्यायसंग्रह a bare text of 140 paribhasas(which are called by the name nyaya) given by Hema-hamsagani in his paribhasa.work named न्यायसंग्रह; (xii) लधुपरिभाषावृत्ति a gloss on 120 Paribhasas of the Panini school written by Puruso-ttamadeva; (xiii) वृहत्परिभाषावृत्ति con-taining 130 Paribhasas with a commentary by Siradeva and a very short,gloss on the commentary by Srimanasarman ( xiv ) परिभाषावृत्ति a short gloss on 140 Paribhasas of the Panini school written by Nilakantha; (xv) परिभाषाभास्कर a collection of 132 Paribhasas with a commentary by Haribhaskara Agnihotri; (xvi) bare text of Paribhasa given and explained by Nagesabhatta in his Paribhasendusekhara. The total number of Paribhasas mentioned and treated in the whole collection exceeds five hundredition

punargrahaṇa	recital of a word again in the Krama and other Pāțhas for a special purpose, although such a recital after three times is generally discouraged; confer, compare एवमर्थविशेषात् पुनरुक्तस्य ग्रहणं भवति ... Uv Bhāşya on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 177.

prakaraṇagrantha	literary works in which the treatment is given in the form of topics by arranging the original sutras or rules differently so that all such rules as relate to a particular topic are found together: the Prakriykaumudi, the Siddhantakumudi and others are called प्रकरणग्रन्थs. Such works are generally known by the name प्राक्रयाग्रन्थ as opposed to वृतिग्रन्थ.

prakriyāsaṃgraha	a work on grammar by Abhayacandra in which the Sutras of Sakatayana's Sabdanusasana are arranged in the form of different sections dealing with the different topics of grammar.

pragraha	absence of euphonic change; the. term is frequently used in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya; confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I.60, IV.1.1-54.

pratyayagrahaṇaparibhāṣā	the guiding rule that when an affix ( प्रत्यय ) is given in a rule as a निमित्त (causing something), the affix denotes a word-form which begins with that to which that affix has been added and ends with the affix itself; confer, compare प्रत्ययग्रहणे यस्मात् स विहितस्तदादेस्तदन्तस्य च ग्रह्यणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 23. The rule यञियोश्च, which prescribes the affix फक् (आयन), has the word यञ् and इञ् which respectively mean यञन्त and इञन्त; in the word परमगार्ग्यायण from परमगार्ग्य the word गार्ग्य is looked upon as यञन्त to which फक् (अायन) is affixed and hence the word परमगार्ग्यायण is arrived at and not पारमगार्ग्य.

pravigraha	separate or distinct uterance of several words of a sentence which are joined together by Sandhi rules in a compound ( समास ) or otherwise, with a very short pause ( अवग्रह ) after each word. e. g. उद् उ एति instead of उद्वेति; confer, compare प्रविग्रहेण मृदूवग्रहेण चर्चयेयुः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XV.10, where Uvvata remarks प्रविग्रहेषु प्रश्लिष्टं विश्लिष्टं कुर्यात् । कालाधिक्येन कुर्यात्। तथा च उद् उ एति इति पठेन्न तु उद्वेति.

prātipadikagrahaṇa	express mention by wording of a noun-base as in दित्यदित्यादित्य , सुधातुरकङ् च et cetera, and others, and not by description as अदन्त in अत इञ् (P.IV.1.95) or in a group of words ( गण ) ; confer, compare प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 71, which recommends the feminine form of the base for an operation, provided the base is specifically expressed and not merely describedition e. g युवतिः खलतिः युवखलतिः, चटकस्यापत्यं चाटकैरः, वह्नीनां पूरणी बहुतिथी et cetera, and others

mitavṛtyarthasaṃgraha	name ofa grammatical work on the SUtras of Paanini by Udayana.

yathāśrutārthagrāhin	one who grasps the sense as given by the actual wording without going into details re: the use or application et cetera, and others: cf यथाश्रुतग्राहिप्रतिपत्रपेक्षोयम् यथोद्देशपक्षः इति कैयटः : Par. Sek. Pari. 2

lakṣaṇasaṃgraha	a work on grammar written by a grammarian named रत्नेश.

liṅgaviśiṣṭagrahaṇa	inclusion of the feminine form of a word when a word in the masculine gender is used in a rule, for certain operations such as the application of affixes and the like;confer, compare the usual dictum regarding this practice viz. the Paribhāșā प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 71. as also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. IV. 1. 1 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5 to Vārt, 15 for places of the application of the dictum and those of its rejection.

varṇagrahaṇa	mention of a grammatical operation concerning a single letter or caused by a single letter; confer, compare न वर्णग्रहणेषु (एषा अर्थवत्परिभाषा प्रवर्तते). Siradeva Pari 10.

vigraha	lit, separation of the two parts of a thing; the term is generally applied to the separation of the constituent words of a compound word: it is described to be of two kinds : ( a ) शास्त्रीयविग्रहृ or technical separation; e. g. राजपुरुष्: into राजन् ङस् पुरुष सु and ( 2 ) लौकिकविग्रहं or common or popular separation ; e. g. राजपुरूष: into राज्ञ: पुरुष:. It is also divided into two kinds according to the nature of the constituent words (a) स्वपदाविग्रह separation by means of the constituent words, exempli gratia, for example राजहितम् into राज्ञे हृितम्;(b) अस्वपदविग्रह, e. g. राजार्थम् into राज्ञे इदम् ;or exempli gratia, for example सुमुखीं into शोभनं मुखं अस्याः confer, compare M.Bh. on P.V.4.7. The compounds whose separation into constituent words cannot be shown by those words (viz. the constituent words) are popularly termed nityasamsa. The term नित्यसमास is explained as नित्यः समासो नित्यसमासः \| यस्य विग्रहो नास्ति । M.Bh. on P.II.2.19 Vart. 4. The upapadasamsa is described as नित्यसमास. Sometimes especially in some Dvandva compounds each of the two separated words is capable of giving individually the senses of both the words exempli gratia, for example the words द्यावा and क्षामा of the compound द्यावाक्षामा. The word विग्रह is found used in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of the separate use of a word as contrasted with the use in a compound; cf अच्छेति विग्रहे प्लुतं भवति R.Pr.VII.1. विग्रहृ is defined as वृत्यर्थावबोधकं वाक्यं विग्रहः in the Siddhantakaumudi.

vigrahaṇa	enclosure or closure(वेष्टन)by the use of the word इति as done in the Krama and other Veda-recitals.

vinigrahārthīya	meant to cause prohibition or opposition; cf अह इति च ह इति च विनिग्रहार्थीयौ इदं ह करिष्यति \| इदं न करिष्यतीति Nir.I.5.

vṛttigrantha	commentary works of the type of Vṛtti, which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare तथा च वृत्तिग्रन्थेषूपलभ्यते.

vṛtisaṃgraha	name of a gloss on Panini's Astadhyayi written by Ramacandra.

saṃgraha	name of a very vast work on grammar attributed to an ancient grammarian Vyadi who is supposed to have been a relative of Panini; confer, compare सेग्रहेस्तमुपागते Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya confer, compare also संग्रहप्रतिकञ्चुके: confer, compare संग्रहो नाम लक्षश्लोकात्मको त्याडिकृतो ग्रन्थः । Some quotations only are found from the Samgraha in grammar works, but the work is lost long ago.

sakṛdākhyātanirgrāhyā	capable of being understood on being mentioned only once just as the notion of genus or generality which is so understood; the phrase सकृदाख्यातनिर्ग्राह्या is cited as a definition of जाति; confer, compare सकृदाख्यातनिर्ग्राह्या गोत्रं च चरणैः सह, M.Bh. on P.IV.1.63.

sakṛdākhyātanirgrāhyā	capable of being understood on being mentioned only once just as the notion of genus or generality which is so understood; the phrase सकृदाख्यातनिर्ग्राह्या is cited as a definition of जाति; confer, compare सकृदाख्यातनिर्ग्राह्या गोत्रं च चरणैः सह, M.Bh. on P.IV.1.63.

savarṇagrahaṇa	taking or including the cognate letters; a convention of grammarians to understand by the utterance of a vowel like अ, इ or उ all the 18 types of it which are looked upon as cognate ( सवर्ण ), as also to understand all the five consonants of a class by the utterance of the first consonant with उ added to it: e. g. कु denoting all the five consonants क्, खू, ग्, घ् and ङ्; confer, compare अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्यय: P.I. 1.69.

sāṃgrahasūtrika	a student of संग्रहसूत्र; the word occurs in the Mahabhasya along with वार्तिकसूत्रिक, and it may therefore mean a student of the stupendous work named the Samgraha of व्याडि which is believed to have consisted of small numerous sutralike assertions, with an exhaustive gloss thereon. See संग्रह.

sāmānyagrahaṇa	mention of a term in such a general way as would include some varieties or specific forms of it to which the expression put is common: exempli gratia, for example the word आप् ( feminine. affix ) for the afixes टाप्, डाप् and चाप्; confer, compare सामान्य ग्रहणार्थो णकारः M.Bh. on P.III. 1.30 cf also च्ल्युत्सर्गः सामान्यग्रहणार्थः P. III 1.43 Vart. 1.

sāmānyagrahaṇāvighāta	the preservation of the inclusion of two or more terms by such a wording as is common to those two or more terms; exempli gratia, for example ङी for ङीप् ङीष् and ङीन्; आप् for टाप्, डाप् and चाप्: confer, compare अथवा अवश्यमत्र सामान्यग्रहणाविघातार्थः ककारोनुबन्धः कर्तव्यः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III, 1.83 Vart.. 7. The phrase सामान्यग्रहणाविघातार्थ is very frequently used in the Kasikavrtti.

supadmasamāsasaṃgraha	a treatise written by a grammarian named रूपनारायण, on the सुपद्मव्याकरण, which see below.

supadmasamāsasaṃgrahaṭīkā	a commentary by a grammarian named विष्णुमिश्र, on the सुपद्मसमाससंग्रह which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

setusaṃgraha	name of a commentary on Bopadeva's Mugdhabodha Grammar written by a grammarian named Gangadhara.

svarūpagrahaṇa	mention by the verbal form, and not by the description of characteristics; e. g. मृजेर्वृद्धिः P VII. 2.114; सृजिदृशेIर्झल्यमाकिति VI. l. 58; confer, compareधातोः स्वरूपग्रहणे तत्प्रत्यये कार्यविज्ञानम् M.Bh. on P.VI.1.58.

a(1)	the first letter of the alphabet in Sanskrit and its derived languages, representing the sound a (अ): (2) the vowel a (अ) representing in grammatical treatises, except when Prescribed as an affix or an augment or a substitute,all its eighteen varieties caused by accentuation or nasalisation or lengthening: (3) personal ending a (अ) of the perfeminine. second.pluraland first and third person.singular.; (4) kṛt affix c (अ) prescribed especially after the denominative and secondary roots in the sense of the verbal activity e. g. बुभुक्षा, चिन्ता, ईक्षा, चर्चा et cetera, and othersconfer, compare अ प्रत्ययात् et cetera, and others (P.III 3.102-106); (5) sign of the aorist mentioned as añ (अङ्) or cañ (चङ्) by Pāṇini in P. III i.48 to 59 exempli gratia, for example अगमत्, अचीकरत्; (6) conjugational sign mentioned as śap (शप्) or śa (श) by Pāṇini in P. III.1.68, 77. exempli gratia, for example भवति, तुदति et cetera, and others; (7) augment am (अम्) as prescribed by P. VI.1.58; exempli gratia, for example द्रष्टा, द्रक्ष्यति; (8) augment aṭ (अट्) prefixed to a root in the imperfeminine. and aorist tenses and in the conditional mood e. g. अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविष्यत् confer, compare P. VI.4.71; (8) kṛt affix a (अ) prescribed as अङ्, अच्, अञ्, अण्, अन्, अप्, क, ख, घ, ञ, ड् , ण, et cetera, and others in the third Adhyāya of Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī.; (9) taddhita affix. affix a (अ) mentioned by Pāṇini as अच्, अञ् अण्, अ et cetera, and others in the fourth and the fifth chapters of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini; (10) the samāsānta affix a (अ), as also stated in the form of the samāsānta affixes (डच् , अच्, टच्, ष्, अष् and अञ्) by Pāṇini in V.4.73 to 121;(11) substitute a (अश्) accented grave for इदम before case-affixes beginning with the inst. instrumental case. case: (12) remnant (अ) of the negative particle नञ् after the elision of the consonant n (न्) by नलोपो नञः P. vi.3.73.

aṃ(ं)	nasal utterance called अनुस्वार and written as a dot a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the vowel preceding it. confer, compare स्वरमनु संलीनं शब्द्यते इति; it is pronounced after a vowel as immersed in it. The anusvāra is considered (l) as only a nasalization of the preceding vowel being in a way completely amalgamated with it. confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V. 11,31; XV. 1; XXII. 14 ; (2) as a nasal addition to the preceding vowel, many times prescribed in grammar as nuṭ (नुट् ) or num (नुम् ) which is changed into anusvāra in which case it is looked upon as a sort of a vowel, while, it is looked upon as a consonant when it is changed into a cognate of the following consonant (परसवर्ण) or retained as n (न्). confer, compare P. VIII.4.58; (3) as a kind cf consonant of the type of nasalized half g(ग्) as described in some treatises of the Yajurveda Prātiśākhya: cf also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)1.22 V.Pr.14.148-9. The vowel element of the anusvāra became more prevalent later on in Pali, Prkrit, Apabhraṁśa and in the spoken modern languages while the consonantal element became more predominant in classical Sanskrit.

akāra	the letter a, (अ) inclusive of all its eighteen kinds caused by shortness, length, protraction, accentuation and nasalization in Pānini's grammar, in cases where a(अ) is not actually prescribed as a termination or an augment or a substitute. confer, compare अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः P. I.1.73. The letter is generally given as the first letter of the alphabet ( वर्णसमाम्नाय ) in all Prātiśākhya and grammar works except in the alphabet termed Varṇopadeśa, as mentioned in the Ṛk Tantra confer, compare ए ओ ऐ औ अा ॠ लॄ ई ऊ ऋ लृ इ उ अाः । रयवलाः । ङञणनमाः । अः ೱ क ೱ पाः । हुं कुं खुं गुं घुं अं अां एवमुपदेशे et cetera, and others Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya.I. 4.

akārya	not a grammatical positive operation: e. g. elision (लोप.) confer, compare ननु च लोप एवेत्कार्यं स्यात् । अकार्यं लोपः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.3.2.

akālaka(1)	not limited by any time-factors for its study such as certain periods of the day or the year. (2) not characterized by any technical terms expressive of time such as adyatanī, parokṣā occurring in the ancient Prātiśākhya and grammar works. The term akalika is used by the writers of the Kāśikāvṛtti in connection with the grammar of Pāṇini. confer, compare “पाणिन्युपज्ञमकालकं व्याकरणम्” Kās. on P. II.4.21 explained by the writer of the Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. as पूर्वाणि व्याकरणानि अद्यतनादिकालपरिभाषायुक्तानि तद्रहितम् ।

akṛt	not established; said of a grammatical operation which has not taken place e. g. अकृतसंधिकार्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on V. 2.100, W. 3.84, also कृताकृतप्रसङ्गि नित्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI.4.62.

akṛtakāri	doing or accomplishing what is not done or accomplished; the expression is used in connection with grammatical operations like ह्रस्वकरण or दीर्घकरण only in cases where it is necessary i, e. where already there is no hrasva or drgha confer, compare अकृतकारि खल्वपि शास्त्रमग्निवत् । तद्यथा । अग्निर्यददग्धं तद्दहति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI. 1.127. the rules of Grammar, like fire, are applied to places where they produce a change.

akṛtavyūha	short expression for the grammatical maxim अकृतव्यूहाः पाणिनीयाः which means "the followers of Pāṇini do not insist on the taking effect of a rule when its cause or causes disappear." See Par. śek. Par. 56.

akṛtrima	non-technical: not formed or not arrived at by grammatical operations such as the application of affixes to crude bases and so on; natural; assigned only by accident. cf the gram. maxim कृत्रिमाकृतिमयोः कृत्रिमे कार्यसंप्रत्ययः which means "in cases of doubt whether an operation refers to that expressed by the technical sense or to that which is expressed by the ordinary sense of a term, the operation refers to what is expressed by the technical sense." Par. śek. Par.9 also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.28.

akṣarasamāmnāya	alphabet: traditional enumeration of phonetically independent letters generally beginning with the vowel a (अ). Although the number of letters and the order in which they are stated differ in different treatises, still, qualitatively they are much the same. The Śivasūtras, on which Pāṇini's grammar is based, enumerate 9 vowels, 4 semi-vowels, twenty five class-consonants and 4 \| sibilants. The nine vowels are five simple vowels or monothongs (समानाक्षर) as they are called in ancient treatises, and the four diphthongs, (सन्ध्यक्षर ). The four semi-vowels y, v, r, l, ( य् व् र् ल् ) or antasthāvarṇa, the twenty five class-consonants or mutes called sparśa, and the four ūṣman letters ś, ṣ, s and h ( श् ष् स् ह् ) are the same in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works although in the Prātiśākhya works the semi-vowels are mentioned after the class consonants.The difference in numbers, as noticed, for example in the maximum number which reaches 65 in the VājasaneyiPrātiśākhya, is due to the separate mention of the long and protracted vowels as also to the inclusion of the Ayogavāha letters, and their number. The Ayogavāha letters are anusvāra, visarjanīya,jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya, nāsikya, four yamas and svarabhaktī. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya does not mention l (लृ), but adding long ā (अा) i (ई) ，ū (ऊ) and ṛ (ऋ) to the short vowels, mentions 12 vowels, and mentioning 3 Ayogavāhas (< क्, = प् and अं) lays down 48 letters. The Ṛk Tantra Prātiśākhya adds the vowel l (लृ) (short as also long) and mentions 14 vowels, 4 semivowels, 25 mutes, 4 sibilants and by adding 10 ayogavāhas viz. 4 yamas, nāsikya, visarjanīya, jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya and two kinds of anusvāra, and thus brings the total number to 57. The Ṛk Tantra makes a separate enumeration by putting diphthongs first, long vowles afterwards and short vowels still afterwards, and puts semi-vowels first before mutes, for purposes of framing brief terms or pratyāhāras. This enumeration is called varṇopadeśa in contrast with the other one which is called varṇoddeśa. The Taittirīya prātiśākhya adds protracted vowels and lays down 60 letters : The Ṣikṣā of Pāṇini lays down 63 or 64 letters, while the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya gives 65 letters. confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 1-25. The alphabet of the modern Indian Languages is based on the Varṇasamāmnāya given in the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya. The Prātiśākhyas call this enumeration by the name Varṇa-samāmnāya. The Ṛk tantra uses the terms Akṣara samāmnāya and Brahmarāśi which are picked up later on by Patañjali.confer, compare सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्समाम्नायः पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदितव्यो ब्रह्मराशिः । सर्ववेदपुण्यफलावाप्तिश्चास्य ज्ञाने भवति । मातापितरौ चास्य स्वर्गे लोके महीयेते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika.2-end.

agni	a term in the Kātantra grammar for a word ending in i ( इ ) or u ( उ ) confer, compare इदुदग्निः Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.II.1.8, अग्नेरमोs कारः Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.II.1.50.

agniveśya	an ancient writer of Vedic grammar mentioned in the Taittirīya prātiśākhya. confer, compare कपवर्गपरश्च (विसर्ग:) अग्निवेश्यवाल्मीक्योः ( मतेन ऊष्माणं न आपद्यते ) T.Pr. IX. 4.

agniveśyāyana	writer of Vedic grammar, mentioned in the Taittirīya prātiśākhya. confer, compare नाग्निवेश्यायनस्य ( मते उदात्तपरः स्वरितपरो वा अनुदात्तः स्वरितं नापद्यते इति न) Tait. Pr. XIV.32.

aṅga(1)	the crude base of a noun or a verb to which affixes are added; a technical term in Pāṇini's grammar for the crude base after which an affix is prescribed e. g. उपगु in औपगव,or कृ in करिष्यति et cetera, and others confer, compare यस्मात् प्रत्ययविधिस्तदादि प्रत्ययेSङ्गम् P.I.4.13; (2) subordinate participle. constituent part confer, compare पराङ्गवद् in सुबामन्त्रिते पराङ्गवत्स्वरे P. II.1.2, also विध्यङ्गभूतानां परिभाषाणां Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Par. 93.10: (3) auxiliary for an operation, e. g. अन्तरङ्ग, बहिरङ्ग et cetera, and others confer, compare अत्राङगशब्देन शब्दरूपं निमित्तमेव गृह्यते Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Par.50; (4) element of a word or of an expression confer, compare अङ्गव्यवाये चाङ्गपरः Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 190, अङ्गे च क्म्ब्यादौ R.T. 127. व्यञ्जनं स्वराङ्गम् Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.21.1.

ajitasena	author of the Cintāmaṇiprakāśika a gloss on Cintāmaṇi, the well known commentary by Yakṣavarman on the Sabdānuśāsana of Śākatāyana. Ajitasena was the grand pupil of Abhayadeva; he lived in the 12th century A.D.

añ(1)	taddhita affix. affix a ( अ ) with the mute letter ñ ( ञ्), prescribed (i) after the words उत्स and others in various senses like progeny, dyed in, produced in, come from et cetera, and othersP. IV.1.86, (ii) after the words विद and others in the sense of grandson and other descendents.P. IV.1.104. For other cases see P. IV. I. 141, 161; IV.2.12,14 et cetera, and others IV.3.7 et cetera, and others IV.4.49. The feminine is formed by adding i ( ई ) to words ending with this affix अञ्, which have the vṛddhi vowel substituted for their initial vowel which gets the acute accent also exempli gratia, for example औत्सः, औत्सी,औदपानः, बैदः, बैदी.

at(1)	tech. term in Pāṇini's grammar for short अ, cf तपरस्तत्कालस्य P. I. 1. 70; अदेङ् गुणः P.I.1.2; (2) personal ending अ for इ ( इट् ) of the Ist person. singular. or Ātmanep. Ātmanepada in the Potential, P III. 4. 106; (3) caseaffix in the case of युष्मद् and अस्मद् for ablative case. singular. and plural P.VII. 1.31,32: (4) tad-affix अत् (अ) prescribed after किम् in the sense of the locative case case before which किम् is changed to कु, क्व being the taddhita affix. formation; confer, compare P. V.3.12 and VII.2.105:(5) substitute अत्(शतृ) for लट् forming the present and future participles in the Parasmaipada. active voice confer, compare लटः शतृशानचौ. P.III. 2.124 and लृटः सद्वा P. III.3.14.

atantra	implying no specific purpose: not intended to teach anything, अविवक्षित; exempli gratia, for example ह्रस्वग्रहणमतन्त्रम् Kāś and Si. Kau. on तस्यादित उदात्तमर्धह्रस्वम् P.1.2.32: confer, compare also अतन्त्रं तरनिर्देशः ( the use of तरप् does not necessarily convey the sense of the comparative degree in Pāṇini's rules) Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.2.33. This statement has been given as a distinct Paribhāṣa by Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and Sākaṭāyana. The author of the Mahābhāṣya appears to have quoted it from the writings of Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and the earlier grammarians See also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on अल्पाच्तरम् P. II.2.34.

atideśa	extended application; transfer or conveyance or application of the character or qualities or attributes of one thing to another. Atideśa in Sanskrit grammar is a very common feature prescribed by Pāṇini generally by affixing the taddhita affix. affix मत् or वत् to the word whose attributes are conveyed to another. e. g. लोटो लङ्वत् P. III. 4.85. In some cases the atideśa is noticed even without the affix मत् or वत्; exempli gratia, for exampleगाङ्कुटादिभ्योऽञ्णिन् ङित् P. 1.2.1 . Atideśa is generally seen in all grammatical terms which end with 'vadbhāva' e. g. स्थानिवद्भाव (P.I.1.56-59), सन्वद्भाव (P.VII.4.93), अन्तादिवद्भाव (P. VI.1.85), अभूततद्भाव (P.IV.60) and others. Out of these atideśas, the स्थानिवद्भाव is the most important one, by virtue of which sometimes there is a full representation id est, that is substitution of the original form called sthānin in the place of the secondary form called ādeśa. This full representation is called रूपातिदेश as different from the usual one which is called कार्यातिदेश, confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). VIII.1.90 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1 and VIII.1.95. Vart.3. Regarding the use of अतिदेश there is laid down a general dictum सामान्यातिदेशे विशेषानतिदेशः when an operation depending on the general properties of a thing could be taken by extended application, an operation depending on special properties should not be taken by virtue of the same : e. g. भूतवत् in P. III.3.132 means as in the case of the general past tense and not in the case of any special past tense like the imperfect ( अनद्यतन ) , or the perfect ( परोक्ष ). See Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 101, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 3. 132. There is also a general dictum अतिदेशिकमनित्यम्whatever is transferred by an extended application, need not, be necessarily taken. See Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. 93.6 as also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.123 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).4, I.2.1 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3, II.3.69 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).2 et cetera, and others, Kaiyaṭa on II. 1.2 and VI.4.22 and Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on P. I.1.56 and P. I.2.58 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 8. The dictum अातिदेशिकमनित्यम् is given as a Paribhāṣā by Nāgeśa confer, compare Pari. Śek. 93. 6.

atiśaya	excess or excellence as shown by the affixes तर and तम confer, compare तरतमयोश्चातिशये V.Pr.V.2; क्रियाप्रधानमाख्यातं तस्मादतिशये तखुत्पद्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI. 2.139; VIII.1.71 ; (2) desire as shown by the affix क्यच् in Pāṇini's grammar; confer, compare यश्च अतिशये Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 126.

atiśāyana	excellence, surpassing; the same as अतिशय in Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V. 2 confer, compare अतिशायने तमबिष्ठनौ P. V. 3.55, also confer, compare भूमनिन्दाप्रशंसासु नित्ययोगेऽतिशायने । संसर्गेऽ स्तिविवक्षायां भवन्ति मतुबादय: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on V.2.94, where अतिशायन means अतिशाय. Patañjali, commenting on P. V.3.55 clearly remarks that for अतिशय, or for अतिशयन, the old grammarians, out of fancy only, used the term अतिशायन as it was a current term in popular usage; confer, compare देश्याः सूत्रनिबन्धाः क्रियन्ते यावद् ब्रूयात् प्रकर्षे अतिशय इति तावदतिशायन इति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on , P. V.3.55.

atyādigaṇa	the group of prepositions headed by अति which are compounded with a noun in the acc. case ; confer, compare अत्यादयः क्रान्ताद्यर्थे द्वितीयया Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). om P. II. 2.18.

atyuccanīca	characterized by a sharp utterance; a name of the grave accent

adarśana	a term in ancient grammars and Prātiśākhyas meaning nonappearance of a phonetic member वर्णस्यादर्शनं लोपः (V. Pr 1. 141),explained as अनुपलब्धिः by उव्वट. Later on, the idea of non-appearance came to be associated with the idea of expectation and the definition of लोप given by Pāṇini in the words अदर्शनं लोपः (as based evidently on the Prātiśākhya definition) was explained as non-appearance of a letter or a group of letters where it was expected to have been present. See Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.60 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 4 and Kaiyaṭa thereon.

adyatanī	tech. term of ancient grammarians signifying in general the present time of the day in question, the occurrence of the immediate past or future events in which is generally expressed by the aorist (लुड्) or the simple future ( लृट् ); the other two corresponding tenses imperfect and first future (viz. लड् and लुट्) being used in connection with past and future events respectively, provided the events do not pertain to that day which is in question; confer, compare 'वा चाद्यतन्याम्' M.Bh. P.III.2.102 Vār.6, वादृतन्याम् P, VI.4.114. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3; (2) term for the tense showing immediate past time called लुङ् in Pāṇini's grammar e. g. मायोगे अद्यतनी । मा कार्षीत् Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.III. 1.22, Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. III. 3.11.

adhika(1)	additional or surplus activity which a rule in grammar sometimes shows; अधिकः कारः or अधिकं कार्यम्; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.3.11, Kāś. on III.2.124, Bh. Vṛ. on III.4.72; ( 2 ) surplus subject matter e. g. अथाख्याः समाम्नायाधिकाः प्राग्रिफितात् (V.Pr. I.33.)

adhikaraṇa(1)	support: a grammatical relation of the nature of a location : place of verbal activity. confer, compare अाधारोsधिकरणम् P.I.4.45; (2) one of the six or seven Kārakas or functionaries of verbal activity shown by the locative case. cf सप्तम्यधिकरणे च P.II.4.36;(3)substance, 'dravya' confer, compare अनधिकरणवाचि अद्रव्यवाचि इति गम्यते M.Bh. on II.1.1.

adhyāsa	superimposition : a relation between a word and its sense according to the grammarians; confer, compare Vāk. Pad. II.240. (2) appendage; confer, compare आहुस्त्वेकपदा अन्ये अध्यासानेकपातिनः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)XVII.43.

anañ	a word without the negative particle ( नञ् ) before it, e. g. धेनुरनञि कमुत्पादयति, a sūtra in Āpiśali's grammar quoted in Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.2.45 see also P. II. 1. 60, VII. 1. 37.

anabhidhāna	inability to express the meaning desiredition The expression न वा अनभिधानात् frequently occurs in the Mahābhāṣya referring to such words or phrases as could be formed by rules of grammar or could be used according to rules but,are not found in current use recognized by learned persons or scholars; confer, compare तच्चानभिधानं यत्राप्तैरुक्तं तत्रैव, अन्यत्र तु यथालक्षणं भवत्येव Padamañj. on III. 2.1;also confer, compare अनभिधानाद् व्यधिकरणानां बहुव्रीहिर्न भविष्यति । यत्र त्वभिधानमस्ति तत्र वैयधिकरण्येपि भवत्येव समासः, कण्ठेकाल इति; Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on II. 2.24: for examples of अनभिधान, sec also M.Bh.अभिधानलक्षणाः कृत्तद्धितसमासाः अनभिधानान्न भविष्यन्ति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.3.19. also on III. 2.1. V.5, IV.2.1. See Kāś. on III,1.22, III.3.158.

anavayava	literally having no parts; impartite; without any concern with the individual component parts; application in totality; confer, compare सिद्धं तु धर्मोपदेशने अनवयवविज्ञानाद्यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु P. VI. 1.84 Vārt 5 and the Bhāṣya thereon; अस्मिञ् शास्त्रे अनवयवेन शास्त्रार्थसंप्रत्ययः स्यात् । a rule in grammar applies to all cases where its application is possible; it cannot be said to have its purpose served by applying to a few cases only.

aniṭ(1)	not admitting the augment इट् to be prefixed to it; the term is strictly to be applied to ārdhadhātuka affixes placed after such roots as have their vowel characterized by a grave accent ( अनुदात्तस्वर ); the term अनिट् being explained as अनिडादि qualifying the अार्धधातुक affix; (2) in a secondary way, it has become customary to call such roots अनिट् as do not allow the augment इट् to be prefixed to an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. Such roots are termed अनुदात्त verily because they are possessed of an anudātta vowel. e. g. कृ, भृ, जि, गम् , हन् et cetera, and others as against भु, धू, तॄ, श्वि, वृ, वद्, फल्, चल्, et cetera, and others which have their vowel characterized by an acute (उदात्त ) accent. For a complete list of such roots see the well-known stanzas given in the Siddhāntakaumudī incidentally on अात्मनेपदेष्वनतः P. VII.1.5. ऊदॄदन्तैर्यौतिरुक्ष्णुशीङ्स्नु....निहताः स्मृताः ॥ १ ॥ शक्लृपच्मुचिरिचवच्विच् .........धातवो द्व्यधिकं शतम् ॥ as also some lists by ancient grammarians given in the Mahābhāṣya on एकाच उपदेशेनुदात्तात्. P. VII. 2.10 or in the Kāśikā on the same rule P. VII.2.10.

aniṅgya	not separable into two padas or words by means of avagraha; confer, compare संध्य ऊष्माप्यनिङ्ग्ये: Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) V.41; confer, compare also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) IX.25, XIII.30. See इङ्ग्य below.

anudātta	non-udatta, absence of the acute accent;one of the Bāhyaprayatnas or external efforts to produce sound. This sense possibly refers to a stage or a time when only one accent, the acute or उदात्त was recognized just as in English and other languages at present, This udatta was given to only one vowel in a single word (simple or compound) and all the other vowels were uttered accentless.id est, that is अनुदात्त. Possibly with this idea.in view, the standard rule 'अनुदात्तं पदमेकवर्जम्'* was laid down by Panini. P.VI.1.158. As, however, the syllable, just preceding the accented ( उदात्त ) syllable, was uttered with a very low tone, it was called अनुदात्ततर, while if the syllables succeeding the accented syllable showed a gradual fall in case they happened to be consecutive and more than two, the syllable succeeding the उदात्त was given a mid-way tone, called स्वरितः confer, compare उदात्तादनुदात्तस्य स्वरितः. Thus, in the utterance of Vedic hymns the practice of three tones उदात्त, अनुदात्त and स्वरित came in vogue and accordingly they are found defined in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works;confer, compare उच्चैरुदात्तः,नीचैरनुदात्तः समाहारः स्वरितः P.I.2.29-31, T.Pr.I.38-40, V.Pr.I.108-110, Anudātta is defined by the author of the Kāśikāvṛtti as यस्मिन्नुच्चार्यमाणे गात्राणामन्ववसर्गो नाम शिथिलीभवनं भवति, स्वरस्य मृदुता, कण्ठविवरस्य उरुता च स: अनुदात्तः confer, compare अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता स्वस्येति नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.2.29,30. Cfeminine. also उदात्तश्चानुदात्तश्च स्वरितश्च त्रयः स्वराः । अायामविश्रम्भोक्षपैस्त उच्यन्तेSक्षराश्रयाः ॥ Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III.1. The term anudātta is translated by the word 'grave' as opposed to acute' (udātta,) and 'circumflex' (svarita); (2) a term applied to such roots as have their vowel अनुदात्त or grave, the chief characteristic of such roots being the non-admission of the augment इ before an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. ( See अनिट्, ).

anudāttatara	quite a low tone, completely grave; generally applied to the tone of that grave or anudātta vowel which is immediately followed by an acute ( उदात्त ) vowel. When the three Vedic accents were sub-divided into seven tones viz. उदात्त, उदात्ततर्, अनुदात्त, अनुदात्ततर, स्वरित, स्वरितस्थोदात्त and एकश्रुति corresponding to the seven musical notes, the अनुदात्ततर was the name given to the lowest of them all. अनुदात्ततर was termed सन्नतर also; confer, compare उदात्तस्वरितपरस्य सन्नतरः P.I.2.40; confer, compare also M, Bh. on I.2.33.

anudāttā	a term meaning 'having a grave accent,' used by ancient grammarians.Cfeminine. किमियमेकश्रुतिरुदात्ता उत अनुदात्ता Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on I. 2.33.

anudāttet	literally one whose mute significatory letter is uttered with a grave accent: a term applied to a root characterized by an indicatory mute vowel accented grave, the chief feature of such a root being that it takes only the Ātmanepada affixes c. g. आस्ते, वस्ते, et cetera, and others; confer, compare अनुदात्तङित आत्मनेपदम् P. I.3.12; such a root, in forming a derivative word in the sense of habit, takes the affix युच् e. g. वर्त्तनः, वर्धन: et cetera, and others provided the root begins with a consonant; confer, compare अनुदात्तेतश्र हलादेः P. III.2.149.

anudāttopadeśa(a root)	pronounced originally i. c. pronounced in the Dhātupāṭha with a grave accent; see the word अनुदात्त a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.: confer, compare अनुदात्तोपदेशवनतितनोत्यादीनामनुनासिकलोपो झलि ङ्किति P. VI.4.37. See also the word अनिट् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

anudeśa(1)	reference, mention, statement referring to a preceding element. confer, compare यथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् P.I. 3.10; confer, compare आसिद्धवचनात् सिद्धमिति चेद् उत्सर्गलक्षणानामनुदेशः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.57, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3. (2) declaration, prescription : the same as अतिदेश. confer, compare स्थान्यादेशपृथक्त्वादेशे स्थानिवद् अनुदेशो गुरुवद् गुरुपुत्र इति यथा P. I.1.56 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1; (3) a grammatical operation confer, compare यथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् ! समसंबन्धी विधिर्यथासंख्यं स्यात् Sid. Kau. on P.I. 8.10. See the word अनुद्देश in this sense confer, compare संख्यातानामनूद्देशो यथासंख्यम् V, Pr.I.143.

anubandha	a letter or letters added to a word before or after it, only to signify some specific purpose such as (a) the addition of an afix (e. g. क्त्रि, अथुच् अङ् et cetera, and others) or (b) the substitution of गुण, वृद्धि or संप्रसारण vowel or (c) sometimes their prevention. These anubandha letters are termed इत् (literally going or disappearing) by Pāṇini (confer, compare उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् et cetera, and others I.3.2 to 9), and they do not form an essential part of the word to which they are attached, the word in usage being always found without the इत् letter. For technical purposes in grammar, however, such as आदित्व or अन्तत्व of affixes which are characterized by इत् letters, they are looked upon as essential factors, confer, compare अनेकान्ता अनुबन्धाः, एकान्ता:, etc, Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 4 to 8. Although पाणिनि has invariably used the term इत् for अनुबन्ध letters in his Sūtras, Patañjali and other reputed writers on Pāṇini's grammar right on upto Nāgeśa of the 18th century have used the term अनुबन्ध of ancient grammarians in their writings in the place of इत्. The term अनुबन्ध was chosen for mute significatory letters by ancient grammarians probably on account of the analogy of the अनुबन्ध्य पशु, tied down at sacrifices to the post and subsequently slaughteredition

anubhūtisvarūpācārya	a writer of the twelfth century who wrote a work on grammar called सरस्वती-प्रक्रिया or सारस्वतप्रक्रिया, He has also written धातुपाठ and आख्यातप्रक्रिया. The grammar is a short one and is studied in some parts of India.

anuvṛtti	repetition or recurrence of a word from the previous to the subsequent rule or rules, which is necessary for the sake of the intended interpretation. The word is of common use in books on Pāṇini's grammar. This recurrence is generally continuous like the stream of a river ( गङ्गास्रोतोवत् ); sometimes however, when it is not required in an intermediate rule, although it proceeds further, it is named मण्डूकप्लुत्यानुवृत्ति. In rare cases it is taken backwards in a sūtra work from a subsequent rule to a previous rule when it is called अपकर्ष.

anuṣaṅga(1)	literally attaching, affixing: augment, अनुषज्यते असौ अनुषङ्गः; (2) a term for the nasal letter attached to the following consonant which is the last, used by ancient grammarians; confer, compare अव्यात्पूर्वे मस्जेरनुषङ्गसंयेगादिलोपार्थम् confer, compare P.I.1.47 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).2 and M.Bh. thereon; confer, compare थफान्तानां चानुषङ्गिणाम् Kat. IV. 1.13. The term अनुषङ्ग is defined in the kātantra grammar as व्यञ्जनान्नः अनुषङ्ग. The term is applied to the nasal consonant न् preceding the last letter of a noun base or a root base; penultimate nasal of a root or noun base: Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.II.1.12.

anekāc	having many vowels (two or more) in it; opp. to एकाच् : a term frequently used in Pāṇini's grammar meaning the same as अनेकस्वर or अनेकाक्षर, which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare P. VI.3.42,VI.4.82

anekānta(1)	not forming an integral part, the same as अनवयव; confer, compare अनेकान्ताः अनवयवा इत्यर्थः Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari 4. (2) absence of any definite view confer, compare अनेकान्तत्वाच्च । येषां चाप्यारभ्यते तेषामप्यनेकान्तः । .. मामहान उक्थपात्रम् । ममहान इति च । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI.I.7

antaraṅga	a highly technical term in Pāṇini's grammar applied in a variety of ways to rules which thereby can supersede other rules. The term is not used by Pāṇini himselfeminine. The Vārtikakāra has used the term thrice ( Sec I. 4. 2 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 8, VI.1.106 Vart.10 and VIII.2.6 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). I) evidently in the sense of immediate', 'urgent', 'of earlier occurrence' or the like. The word is usually explained as a Bahuvrīhi compound meaning 'अन्त: अङ्गानि निमित्तानि यस्य' (a rule or operation which has got the causes of its application within those of another rule or operation which consequently is termed बहिरङ्ग). अन्तरङ्ग, in short, is a rule whose causes of operation occur earlier in the wording of the form, or in the process of formation. As an अन्तरङ्ग rule occurs to the mind earlier, as seen a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., it is looked upon as stronger than any other rule, barring of course अपवाद rules or exceptions, if the other rule presents itself simultaneously. The Vārtikakāra, hence, in giving preference to अन्तरङ्ग rules, uses generally the wording अन्तरङ्गबलीयस्त्वात् which is paraphrased by अन्तरङ्गं बहिरङ्गाद् बलीयः which is looked upon as a paribhāṣā. Grammarians, succeeding the Vārtikakāra, not only looked upon the बहिरङ्ग operation as weaker than अन्तरङ्ग, but they looked upon it as invalid or invisible before the अन्तरङ्ग operation had taken placcusative case. They laid down the Paribhāṣā असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे which has been thoroughly discussed by Nāgeśa in his Paribhāṣendusekhara. The अन्तरङ्गत्व is taken in a variety of ways by Grammarians : (l) having causes of application within or before those of another e. g. स्येनः from the root सिव् (सि + उ+ न) where the यण् substitute for इ is अन्तरङ्ग being caused by उ as compared to guṇa for उ which is caused by न, (2) having causes of application occurring before those of another in the wording of the form, (3) having a smaller number of causes, (4) occurring earlier in the order of several operations which take place in arriving at the complete form of a word, (5) not having संज्ञा (technical term) as a cause of its application, ( 6 ) not depending upon two words or padas, (7) depending upon a cause or causes of a general nature (सामान्यापेक्ष) as opposed to one which depends on causes of a specific nature ( विशेषापेक्ष).

antargaṇa	a group of words mentioned inside another group of words (गण); confer, compare पुषादिदेवाद्यन्तर्गणो गृह्यते, न भ्वादिक्रयाद्यन्तर्गणः Kāś on III.1.55; also काण्वादिगर्गाद्यन्तर्गणः Kāś on IV.2.111.

antya(1)	final letter; अन्ते भवमन्त्यम् (2) final consonant of each of the five groups of consonants which is a nasal अन्त्योनुनासिकः R.T. 17.

anvarthasaṃjñā	A technical term used in accordance with the sense of its constituent parts; e. g. सर्वनाम, संख्या, अव्यय उपसर्जन,कारक, कर्मप्रवचनीय, अव्ययी-भाव, प्रत्यय, उपपद et cetera, and others All these terms are picked up from ancient grammarians by Pāṇini: confer, compare तत्र महत्याः संज्ञाया एतत् प्रयोजनम् । अन्वर्थसंज्ञा यथा विज्ञायेत । संख्यायते अनया संख्येति । confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.23; also confer, compare M.Bh.on I.1.27,I. 1.38,I.2.43, I.4.83, II.1,5, III. 1.1, III.1.92 et cetera, and others

anvavasarga	relaxation or wide opening of the sound-producing organs as done for uttering a vowel of grave accent. confer, compare अन्ववसर्गः गात्राणां विस्तृतता Tait. Pr. XXII.10.

anvācaya	aggregation of a secondary element along with the primary one: यत्रैकस्य प्राधान्यमितरदप्रधाने तदनुरोधेनान्वाचीयमानता अन्वाचयः Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on P.II 2.29. One of the four senses of च, exempli gratia, for exampleभिक्षामट गां चानय; confer, compare प्लक्षश्चेत्युक्ते गम्यत एतत्सापेक्षोयं प्रयुज्यत इति \|

apakarṣa(1)	deterioration of the place or instrument of the production of sound resulting in the fault called निरस्त; confer, compare स्थानकरणयेारपकर्षेण निरस्तं नाम दोष उत्पद्यते, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV.2; (2) drawing back a word or words from a succeeding rule of grammar to the preceding one; confer, compare "वक्ष्यति तस्यायं पुरस्तादपकर्षः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.2.8. (3) inferiority (in the case of qualities) न च द्रव्यस्य प्रकर्षापकर्षौ स्तः ।

apabhraṃśa	degraded utterance of standard correct forms or words: corrupt form: e. g. गावी, गोणी and the like, of the word गो, confer, compare गौः इत्यस्य शब्दस्य गावी गोणी गोता गोपोतलिका इत्येवमादयः अपभ्रंशाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.l.l ; cf शब्दसंस्कारहीनो यो गौरिति प्रयुयुक्षिते । तमपभ्रंशमिच्छन्ति विशिष्टार्थनिवेशिनम् Vāk. Pad I.149: सर्वस्य हि अपभ्रंशस्य साधुरेव प्रकृतिः commentary on Vāk. Pad I. 149.

apāṇinīya	not in conformity with the rules of Pāṇini's grammar; confer, compare सिध्यत्वेवमपाणिनीयं तु भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. I.1.

apoddhāra	disintegration of the constituent elements of a word; analysis; अपोद्धार पृथक्करणम् commentary on Vāk. Pad. II. 449: confer, compare अपोद्धारपदार्था ये ये चार्थाः स्थितलक्षणः Vāk. Pad.I.24.

appayadīkṣita	अप्पदीक्षित A famous versatile writer of the sixteenth century A. D. (1530-1600 ), son of रङ्गराजाध्वरीन्द्र a Dravid Brāhmaṇa. He wrote more than 60 smaller or greater treatises mainly on Vedānta, Mimāṁsā, Dharma and Alaṁkāra śāstras; many of his works are yet in manuscript form. The Kaumudi-prakāśa and Tiṅantaśeṣasaṁgraha are the two prominent grammatical works written by him. Paṇdit Jagannātha spoke very despisingly of him.

aprayeāga(1)	non-employment of a word in spite of the meaning being available: confer, compare संभावनेलमिति चेत्सिद्धाप्रयोगे P.III.3.154; (2) non-employment confer, compare उक्तार्थानामप्रयोगः a standard dictum of grammar not allowing superfluous words which is given in M.Bh. on P.I.1.4 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 16 and stated in Cāndra and other grammars as a Paribhāṣā.

aprasaṅga	non-application of a rule of grammar or of a technical term; confer, compare अन्यत्र सहवचनात् समुदाये संज्ञाsप्रसङ्गः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.1. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 11.

aprāpti(i)	non-occurrence for nonrealization of a grammatical operation or ruleअप्रतिषेधः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.56 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 8; (2) prohibition of the occurrence of a rule or operation, confer, compare अप्राप्तेर्वा । अथवानन्तरा या प्राप्तिः सा प्रतिषिध्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.I.43, I.1.63.

abhakta	not-forming an integral part of another; quite independent (used in connection with augments). confer, compare किं पुनरयं पूर्वान्त आहोस्वित् परादिराहोस्विद् अभक्ताः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1. 47, 1.1.51. एवं तर्ह्यभक्तः करिष्यते M. Bh on VI.1.71, VI.1.135, and VII.2.82.

abhayacandra	a Jain grammarian ， who wrote प्रक्रियासंग्रह, based on the Śabdānuśāsana Vyākaraṇa of the Jain Śākatāyana.His possible date is the twelfth century A. D.

abhyasta	repeated, redoubled word or wording or part of a word. The term अभ्यस्त is applied to the whole doubled expression in Pāṇini's grammar, confer, compare उभे अभ्यस्तम् P. VI.1.6; (2) the six roots with जक्ष् placed at the head viz. जक्ष् , जागृ, दरिद्रा , चकास्, शास्, दीधी and वेवी which in fact are reduplicated forms of घस् , गृ, द्रा, कास् , शस् , धी and वी.

abhyāhata	omission of any sound; a fault of utterance. अम् (1)a technical brief term in Panini's grammar including vowels, semivowels, the letter ह् and nasals; (2) a significant term for the accusative case showing change or substitution or modification: confer, compare अं विकारस्य Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I.28 explained as अमिति शब्दे विकारस्याख्या भवति । अमिति द्वितीय विभक्तेरुपलक्षणम् । (3) augment अ applied to the penultimate vowel of सृज् & दृश् (P. VI.1.58, 59 and VII.1.99) (4) substitute tor Ist person. singular. affix मिप्, by P.III.4.101 (5) Acc. singular. case affix अम् .

amara	called अमरसिंह an ancient grammarian mentioned in the कविकल्पद्रुम by बोपदेव. He is believed to have written some works on grammar such as षट्कारकलक्षण his famous existing work, however, being the Amarakoṣa or Nāmaliṅgānuśāsana.

amaracandra	a Jain grammarian who is believed to be the writer of स्यादिशब्दसमुच्चय, परिमल et cetera, and others

amṛtabhāratī	a grammarian who is believed to have written सुबोधिका, a gloss on the सारस्वतव्याकरण.

amoghavarṣa	A Jain grammarian of the ninth century who wrote the gloss known as अमोघावृत्ति on the Śabdānuśāsana of Śākaṭāyana; the वृत्ति is quoted by माधव in his धातुवृत्ति.

amoghā	also अमोघावृत्ति, a gloss on the grammar of Sākaṭāyana. See अमोघवर्ष a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

ar	a technical term for Ārdhadhātuka affixes in the Mugdhabodha grammar.

arīhaṇādi	a group of words given in P. IV.2.80 which get the taddhita affix घुञ् ( अक ) added to them as a cāturarthika affix e. g. अारीहणकम्, द्रौघणकम् et cetera, and otherssee Kāśikā on P.IV.2.80.

artha(1)	literally signification,conveyed sense or object. The sense is sometimes looked upon as a determinant of the foot of a verse: confer, compare प्रायोर्थो वृत्तमित्येते पादज्ञानस्य हेतवः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVII 16. It is generally looked upon as the determinant of a word (पद). A unit or element of a word which is possessed of an independent sense is looked upon as a Pada in the old Grammar treatises; confer, compare अर्थः पदमिति ऐन्द्रे; confer, compare also अर्थः पदम् Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III.2, explained by उव्वट as अर्थाभिधायि पदम् । पद्यते गम्यते ज्ञायतेSर्थोनेनेति पदम् । There is no difference of opinion regarding the fact that, out of the four standard kinds of words नाम, आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात, the first two kinds नाम and अाख्यात do possess an independent sense of their own. Regarding possession of sense and the manner in which the sense is conveyed, by the other two viz. the Upasargas (prepositions) and Nipātas (particles) there is a striking difference of opinion among scholars of grammar. Although Pāṇini has given the actual designation पद to words ending with either the case or the conjugational affixes, he has looked upon the different units or elements of a Pada such as the base, the affix, the augment and the like as possessed of individually separate senses. There is practically nothing in Pāṇini's sūtras to prove that Nipātas and Upasargas do not possess an independent sense. Re: Nipātas, the rule चादयोऽसत्वे, which means that च and other indeclinables are called Nipātas when they do not mean सत्त्व, presents a riddle as to the meaning which च and the like should convey if they do not mean सत्त्व or द्रव्य id est, that is a substance. The Nipātas cannot mean भाव or verbal activity and if they do not mean सत्व or द्रव्य, too, they will have to be called अनर्थक (absolutely meaningless) and in that case they would not be termed Prātipadika, and no caseaffix would be applied to them. To avoid this difficulty, the Vārtikakāra had to make an effort and he wrote a Vārtika निपातस्य अनर्थकस्य प्रातिपदिकत्वम् । P. I.2.45 Vār. 12. As a matter of fact the Nipātas च, वा and others do possess a sense as shown by their presence and absence (अन्वय and व्यतिरेक). The sense, however, is conveyed rather in a different manner as the word समूह, or समुदाय, which is the meaning conveyed by च in रामः कृष्णश्च, cannot be substituted for च as its Synonym in the sentence राम: कुष्णश्च. Looking to the different ways in which their sense is conveyed by nouns and verbs on the one hand, and by affixes, prepositions and indeclinables on the other hand, Bhartṛhari, possibly following Yāska and Vyāḍi, has developed the theory of द्योतकत्व as contrasted with वाचकत्व and laid down the dictum that indeclinables, affixes and prepositions (उपसर्गs) do not directly convey any specific sense as their own, but they are mere signs to show some specific property or excellence of the sense conveyed by the word to which they are attached; confer, compare also the statement 'न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयेगद्योतका भवन्ति । Nir 1.3. The Grammarians, just like the rhetoricians have stated hat the connection between words and their senses is a permanent one ( नित्य ), the only difference in their views being that the rhetoricians state that words are related; no doubt permanently, to their sense by means of संकेत or convention which solely depends on the will of God, while the Grammarians say that the expression of sense is only a natural function of words; confer, compare 'अभिधानं पुनः स्वाभाविकम्' Vārttika No.33. on P. I.2.64. For द्योतकत्व see Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari II. 165-206.

ardhamātrā	half of a mātra or 'mora'., confer, compare अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणाः Par. Śekh. Pari. 122, signifying that not a single element of utterance in Pāṇini's grammar is superfluous. In other words, the wording of the Sūtras of Pāṇini is the briefest possible, not being capable of reduction by even half a mora.

ardharcādi	a group of words given in P.II.4.31 which are declined in both the masculine and the neuter genders; c.g. अर्धर्चः,अर्धर्चमू, यूथः, यूथम्; गृहः गृहम्, et cetera, and others; cf अर्धर्चाः पुंसिं च P.II.4.31.

alākṣaṇika(1)	not used in a secondary sense; (2) not accomplished by the regular application of a grammar rule: confer, compareनिपातनैः सह निर्देशादत्रापि किंचिदलाक्षणिकं कार्यमस्ति Kāś. on III.2.59.

avarṇa	the letter अ; the first letter of the Sanskrit alphabet, comprising all its varieties caused by grades, ( ह्रस्व, दीर्घ, प्लुत) or accents of nasalization. The word वर्ण is used in the neuter gender in the Mahābhāṣya; confer, compare सर्वमुखस्थानमवर्णम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.9, मा कदाचिदवर्णं भूत् M.Bh. I.1.48 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1; cf also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.50 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 18 and I.1.51 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2: confer, compare also ह्रस्वमवर्णं प्रयोगे संवृतम् Sīradeva's ParibhāṣāvṛttiPari. 17. 6

avibhāgapakṣa	a view of grammarians according to which there are words which are looked upon as not susceptible to derivation. The terms अखण्डपक्ष and अव्युत्पन्नपक्ष are also used in the same sense.

avyayārthanirūpaṇa	a work on the meanings of indeclinable words written in the sixteenth century A. D. by Viṭṭhala Śeṣa, grandson of Ramacandra Śeṣa the author of the Prakriyā Kaumudi.

avyutpattipakṣa	the view held generally by grammarians that all words are not necessarily susceptible to analysis or derivation, an alternative view opposed to the view of the etymologists or Nairuktas that every word is derivable; confer, compare पाणिनेस्त्वव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष एवेति शब्देन्दुशेखरे निरूपितम् Pari. Śekh. Pari. 22; वाचक उपादान: स्वरूपवानिति अव्युत्पत्तिपक्षे Vyāḍi's Saṁgraha.

aśvādi(1)	a class of words headed by the word अश्व to which the affix फञ्(अायन) is added in the sense of गोत्र (grandchildren et cetera, and others); exempli gratia, for exampleआश्वायनः जातायनः, औत्सायनः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.IV.1. 110; (2) a class of words headed by the word अश्व to which the taddhita affix यत् is added in the sense of a cause of the type of a meeting or an accidental circumstance; exempli gratia, for example आश्विकम् अाश्मिकम् confer, compare P. V.1.39.

aṣṭaka	another name for the famous work of Pāṇini popularly called the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī.; confer, compare अष्टावध्यायाः परिमाणमस्य सूत्रस्य अष्टकं पाणिनीयम् । दशकं वैयाघ्रपदीयम् । त्रिंकं काशकृत्स्नम् । Kāś on P.IV. 1.58; (2) students of Pāṇini's grammar, e. g. अष्टकाः पाणिनीयाः; confer, compare सूत्राच्च कोपधात् । Kāś. on P.IV. 2. 65.

aṣṭama	a term used by ancient grammarians for the vocative case.

as(1)	case affix of the nominative and accusative plural and the ablative and genitive singular (जस् , शस्, ङसि and ङस् ) (2) taddhita affix अस् ( असि ) added to पूर्व, अधर and अवर, by P.V.3.39: (3) compoundending अस् ( असिच् ) applied to the words प्रजा and मेधा standing at the end of a Bahuvrīhi compound (P.V.4.122): (4) Uṇādi affix अस् prescribed by the rule सर्वधातुभ्योऽसुन् and subsequent rules (628-678) to form words such as मनस्,सरस् et cetera, and others(5) ending syllable अस्, with or without sense, of words in connection with which special operations are given in grammar; confer, compare P.VI.4.14; confer, compare also अनिनस्मन्ग्रहणान्यर्थवता चानर्थकेन च तदन्तविधिं प्रयोजयन्ति Par.Śek. Pari. 16.

asiddha	invalid; of suspended validity for the time being: not functioning for the time being. The term is frequently used in Pāṇini's system of grammar in connection with rules or operations which are prevented, or held in suspense, in connection with their application in the process of the formation of a word. The term (असिद्ध) is also used in connection with rules that have applied or operations that have taken place, which are, in certain cases, made invalid or invisible as far as their effect is concerned and other rules are applied or other operations are allowed to take place, which ordinarily have been prevented by those rules which are made invalid had they not been invalidatedition Pāṇini has laid down this invalidity on three different occasions (1) invalidity by the rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् VIII.2.1. which makes a rule or operation in the second, third and fourth quarters of the eighth chapter of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. invalid when any preceding rule is to be applied, (2) invalidity by the rule असिद्धवदत्राभात् which enjoins mutual invalidity in the case of operations prescribed in the Ābhīya section beginning with the rule असिद्धवत्राभात् (VI. 4.22.) and going on upto the end of the Pāda (VI.4.175), (3) invalidity of the single substitute for two letters, that has already taken place, when ष् is to be substituted for स्, or the letter त् is to be prefixed, confer, compare षत्वतुकोरसिद्धः (VI. 1.86). Although Pāṇini laid down the general rule that a subsequent rule or operation, in case of conflict, supersedes the preceding rule, in many cases it became necessary for him to set, that rule aside, which he did by means of the stratagem of invalidity given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. Subsequent grammarians found out a number of additional cases where it became necessary to supersede the subseguent rule which they did by laying down a dictum of invalidity similar to that of Pāṇini. The author of the Vārttikas, hence, laid down the doctrine that rules which are nitya or antaraṅga or apavāda, are stronger than, and hence supersede, the anitya, bahiraṅga and utsarga rules respectively. Later gram marians have laid down in general, the invalidity of the bahiraṅga rule when the antaraṅga rule occurs along with it or subsequent to it. For details see Vol. 7 of Vvyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya(D. E. Society's edition) pages 217-220. See also Pari. Śek. Pari. 50.

asiddhaparibhāṣā	the same as Antaraṅga Paribhāṣā or the doctrine of the invalidity of the bahiraṅga operation. See the word असिद्ध a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. For details see the Paribhāṣā 'asiddham , bahiraṅgam antaraṅge' Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 50 and the discussion thereon. Some grammarians have given the name असिद्धपरिभाषा to the Paribhāṣā असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे as contrasted with अन्तरङ्गं बहुिरङ्कगाद् वलीयः which they have named as बहिरङ्गपरिभाषा.

astha	अ, अा and अा३. This term is used in Ṛk Tantra confer, compare अस्थनामिनी सन्ध्यम् R.T.94, अस्थ possibly means 'belonging to अ i. e. all the three grades ह्रस्व, दीर्घ and प्लुत of अ'.

asmad	first person; the term is used in the sense of the first person in the grammars of Hemacandra and Śākaṭāyana. confer, compare त्रीणि त्रीण्यन्ययुष्मदस्मदि (Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. III.3.17);

ākusmīya	a group of 43 roots of the चुरादि class of roots beginning with the root चित् and ending with कुस्म् which are Ātmanepadin only.

aākṛtigaṇa	a class or group of words in which some words are actually mentioned and room is left to include others which are found undergoing the same operation; confer, compare श्रेण्यादयः कृतादिभिः । श्रेण्यादयः पठ्यन्ते कृतादिराकृतिगणः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.1.59. Haradatta defines the word as प्रयोगदर्शनेन आकृतिग्राह्यो गणः अाकृतिगण:। अत्र अादिशब्दः प्रकारे । अाकृतिगणेपि उदाहरणरूपेण कतिपयान् पठति कृत मत इत्यादि Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. on II.I.59 ; confer, compare Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.of Kaiyaṭa also on II.1. 59.Some of the gaṇas mentioned by Pāṇini are ākṛtigaṇas, exempli gratia, for example अर्शआदिगण, मूलविभुजादिगण, स्नात्व्यादिगण, शिवादिगण, पचादिगण, and others.

aākhyāta	verbal form, verb; confer, compare भावप्रधानमाख्यातं सत्त्वप्रधानानि नामानि Nirukta of Yāska.I.1; चत्वारि पदजातानि नामाख्यातोपसर्गनिपाताश्च Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1. Āhnika 1 ; also A.Prāt. XII. 5, अाकार अाख्याते पदादिश्च Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.2.37 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2, आख्यातमाख्यातेन क्रियासातत्ये Sid. Kau. on II.1.72, क्रियावाचकमाख्यातं Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V.1; confer, compare भारद्वाजकमाख्यातं भार्गवं नाम भाष्यते । भारद्वाजेन दृष्टत्वादाख्यातं भारद्वाजगोत्रम् V. Prāt. VIII. 52; confer, compare also Athar. Prāt.I.I.12, 18; 1.3.3,6; II.2.5 where ākhyāta means verbal form. The word also meant in ancient days the root also,as differentiated from a verb or a verbal form as is shown by the lines तन्नाम येनाभिदधाति सत्त्वं, तदाख्यातं येन भावं स धातुः R.Pr.XII.5 where 'आख्यात' and 'धातु' are used as synonyms As the root form such as कृ, भृ et cetera, and others as distinct from the verbal form, is never found in actual use, it is immaterial whether the word means root or verb.In the passages quoted a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. from the Nirukta and the Mahābhāṣya referring to the four kinds of words, the word ākhyāta could be taken to mean root (धातु) or verb (क्रियापद). The ākhyāta or verb is chiefly concerned with the process of being and bccoming while nouns (नामानि) have sattva or essence, or static element as their meaning. Verbs and nouns are concerned not merely with the activities and things in this world but with every process and entity; confer, compare पूर्वापूरीभूतं भावमाख्यातेनाचष्टे Nir.I.;अस्तिभवतिविद्यतीनामर्थः सत्ता । अनेककालस्थायिनीति कालगतपौर्वापर्येण क्रमवतीति तस्याः क्रियात्वम् । Laghumañjūṣā. When a kṛt (affix). affix is added to a root, the static element predominates and hence a word ending with a kṛt (affix). affix in the sense of bhāva or verbal activity is treated as a noun and regularly declined;confer, compareकृदभिहितो भावे द्रव्यवद् भवति M.Bh. on II.2.19 and III. 1.67, where the words गति, व्रज्या, पाक and others are given as instances. Regarding indeclinable words ending with kṛt (affix). affixes such as कर्तुं, कृत्वा, and others, the modern grammarians hold that in their case the verbal activity is not shadowed by the static element and hence they can be,in a way, looked upon as ākhyātas; confer, compare अव्ययकृतो भावे Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa.

aākhyātaviveka	a work dealing with verbs and their activity by KṛṣṇaShāstrī Āraḍe a great Naiyāyika of the 18th century.

aāgantuka	literally adventitious, an additional wording generally at the end of roots to show distinctly their form exempli gratia, for example वदि, एधि, सर्ति et cetera, and others; confer, compare इन्धिभवतिभ्यां च P I.2.6: confer, compare also भावलक्षणे स्थेण्कृञ्वदिचरिहृतभिजनिभ्यस्तोमुन्, P.III.4.16, सृपिवृदो. कसुन् P. III.4.17 and a number of other sūtras where इ or तिं is added to the root confer, compare इक्श्तिपौ धातुनिर्देशे, वर्णात्कारः, रादिफः P.III.3.108 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2.3. 4, where such appendages to be added to the roots or letters are given. The word अागन्तु is an old word used in the Nirukta, but the term आगन्तुक appears to be used for the first time for such forms by Haradatta; confer, compare ह्वरोरिति ह्वृ कौटिल्ये, आगन्तुकेकारे गुणेन निर्देशः Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. on VII.2.31. In the traditional oral explanations the second part of a reduplicated word is termed अागन्तुक which is placed second i. e. after the original by virtue of the convention आगन्तूनामन्ते निवेशः, although in fact, it is said to possess the sense of the root in contrast with the first which is called abhyāsa.A nice distinction can, however be drawn between the four kinds of adventitious wordings found in grammar viz.आगन्तु, इत्, अभ्यास and आगम which can be briefly stated as follows; The former two do not form a regular part of the word and are not found in the actual use of the word; besides, they do not possess any sense, while the latter two are found in actual use and they are possessed of sense. Again the agantu word is simply used for facility of understanding exactly and correctly the previous word which is really wanted; the इत् wording, besides serving this purpose, is of use in causing some grammatical operations. अभ्यास, is the first part of the wording which is wholly repeated and it possesses no sense by itself, while, āgama which is added to the word either at the beginning or at the end or inserted in the middle, forms a part of the word and possesses the sense of the word.

āgama	augment, accrement, a word element which is added to the primitive or basic word during the process of the formation of a complete word or pada. The āgama is an adventitious word element and hence differs from ādeśa, the substitute which wholly takes the place of the original or ( आदेशिन् ). Out of the several āgamas mentioned by Pāṇini, those that are marked with mute ट् are prefixed, those, marked with क्, are affixed, while those, marked with म्, are placed immediately after the last vowel of the word. The augments become a part and parcel of the word to which they are added, and the characteristics of which they possess;confer, compareयदागमास्तद्गुणीभूतास्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते, also आगमानां आगमिधर्मिवैशिष्ट्यम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari.11. Those grammarians, who hold the view that words are unproduced and eternal, explain the addition of an augment as only the substitution of a word with an augment in the place of a word without an augment; confer, compare आदेशास्तर्हिमे भविष्यन्ति अनागमकानां सागमकाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.20; I.1.46. The term āgama is defined as अन्यत्र विद्यमानस्तु यो वर्णः श्रुयतेधिकः । आगम्यमानतुल्यत्वात्स आगम इति स्मृतः Com. on Tait. Prāt.I. 23.

āgastya	name of an ancient writer of Vedic grammar and Prātiśākhya works; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)I.2.

ātideśika	applied by extension or transfer of epithet as opposed to औपदेशिक. See the word अतिदेश; the term is often used in connection with rules or operations which do not apply or occur by the direct expression of the grammarian; confer, compare यदि आतिदेशिकेन कित्वेन औपदेशिकं कित्वं बाध्येत. Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.2.1.; confer, compare also अातिदेशिकमनित्यम् Par.Śek. Pari. 93.6.

ādeśa(1)	substitute as opposed to sthānin, the original. In Pāṇini's grammar there is a very general maxim, possessed of a number of exceptions, no doubt, that 'the substitute behaves like the original' (स्थानिवदादेशः अनल्विधौ P.I.1.56.); the application of this maxim is called स्थानिवद्भाव; for purposes of this स्थानिवद्भाव the elision (लोप) of a phonetic element is looked upon as a sort of substitute;confer, compare उपधालेपस्य स्थानिवत्त्वात् Kāś. on P.I.1.58. Grammarians many times look upon a complete word or a word-base as a substitute for another one, although only a letter or a syllable in the word is changed into another, as also when a letter or syllable is added to or dropped in a word; confer, compare पचतु, पचन्तु ... इमेप्यादेशाः । कथम् । अादिश्यते यः स आदेशः । इमे चाप्यादिश्यन्ते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.56; cf also सर्वे सर्वपदादेशा दाक्षीपुत्रस्य पाणिनेः M.Bh. on P. I.1.20; confer, compare also अनागमकानां सागमका आदेशाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.20: (2) indication, assignment; confer, compare योयं स्वरादेशः अन्तोदात्तं, वधेराद्युदात्तत्वं, स्वः स्वरितमिति अादेशः R.Pr.I.30-32; confer, compare also अादेशः उपदेशः commentary on Tai.-Prāt. II.20: confer, compare also अनादेशे अविकारः V.Pr.IV.131, where Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.remarks यत्र उदात्तादीनां स्वराणां सन्धौ आदेशो न क्रियते तत्र अविकारः प्रत्येतव्यः । confer, compare also एकारो विभक्त्यादेशः छन्दसि A.Pr. II.1.2, where ए is prescribed as a substitute for a caseaffix and त्ये and अस्मे are cited as examples where the acute acent is also prescribed for the substitute ए.

aānandadatta	name of a Buddhist grammarian,the author of the work named Cāndra-vyākaraṇa Paddhati.

ānupūrvī	serial order, successive order of grammatical operations or the rules prescribing them as they occur; confer, compare अानुपूर्व्या सिद्धमेतत् M.Bh. on V.3.5; confer, compare also ययैव चानुपूर्व्या अर्थानां प्रादुर्भावस्तयैव शब्दानामपि । तद्वत् कार्यैरपि भवितव्यम् M.Bh. on. P.I.1.57.

aāntarya	proximity; close affinity ; close relationship. There are four kinds of such proximity as far as words in grammar are concerned; Re: the organs of speech (स्थानतः)as in दण्डाग्रम्, regarding the meaning(अर्थतः)as in वातण्ड्ययुवतिः, regarding the quality (गुण) as in पाकः रागः, and regarding the prosodial value (प्रमाण) as in अमुष्मै, अमूभ्याम्; confer, compare अनेकविधं अान्तर्यं स्थानार्थगुणप्रमाणकृतम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari.13. confer, compare also Kāś. on I.1.50.

āpiśala(1)	a work of अापिशलि, possibly his grammar; confer, compare आपिशलमधीते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.1.14; (2) a student of Āpiśali's grammar: आपिशलमधीते आपिशला ब्राह्मणी Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.1.14: अापिशलपाणिनीयव्याडीयगौतमीयाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI. 2.36.; confer, compare तथा चापिशलाः पाणिनीयाः पठन्ति-आगमोनुपघातेन विकारश्चोपमर्दनात् । आदेशस्तु प्रसङ्गेन लोपः सर्वापकर्षनात्.

āpiśali	an ancient grammarian mentioned by Pāṇini and his commentators like Patañjali, Helarāja and others; confer, compare वा सुप्यापिशलेः P. IV.3.98; तथा चापिशलेर्विधिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.2.45.

aāpya	to be obtained by an activity: (the same as vyāpya). The term is used in connection with the object of a verb which is to be obtained by the verbal activity. The word अाप्य is found used in the sense of Karman or object in the grammars of Jainendra, Śākaṭāyana, Cāndra and Hemacandra; confer, compare Cāndra II I. 43; Jainendra I. 2.119; Śāk.IV.3.120: Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. III.3.31. Hence, the term साप्य is used for a transitive root in these grammars.

ābhīyaprakaraṇa	a section of Pāṇini's grammar from VI.4.-2 to VI. 4.129, called अाभीय, as it extends to the rule भस्य VI.4.129, including it but as the governing rule भस्य is valid in every rule upto the end of the Pāda, the आभीयप्रकरण also extends upto the end of the Pāda.See अाभाच्छास्त्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

aāmantrita(1)	a word in the vocative singular. confer, compare सामन्त्रितम् P.II.3.48: a tech. term in Pāṇini's grammar, the peculiar features of which are पराङ्गवद्भाव (confer, compare P.II.1.2), अविद्यमानवद्भाव (confer, compare P.VIII.1.72), द्वित्व (confer, compare P.VIII. 1.8), अद्युदात्तत्व (confer, compare P.VI.1.198), सर्वानुदात्तत्व(confer, compare P.VIII.1.19), splitting of ए into अा and इ, exempli gratia, for example अग्रे into अग्ना ३ इ (confer, compare P.VIII.2.107 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3); (2) Vocative case, confer, compare ओकार अामन्त्रितजः प्रगृह्यः Ṛk. Prāt. I.28; Vāj. Pr. III.139: II.17: II.24 VI.1.

āmreḍita(1)	iterative: a repeated word, defined as द्विरुक्तं पदम् confer, compare द्विरुक्तमात्रेडितं पदम् exempli gratia, for example यज्ञायज्ञा वो अग्नये Vāj. Prāt. I. 146; (2). the second or latter portion, of a repeated word according to Pāṇini; c. तस्य (द्विरुक्तस्य) परमाम्रेडितम् P. VIII.1.2. The Āmreḍita word gets the grave accent and has its last vowel protracted when it implies censure; confer, compare P.VIII.1.3 and VIII. 2.95.Haradatta has tried to explain how the term आम्रेडित means the first member; confer, compare ननु अाम्रेडितशब्दे । निघण्टुषु प्रसिद्धः अाम्रेडितं द्विस्त्रिरुक्तमिति । सत्यमर्थे प्रसिद्धः इह तु शब्दे परिभाष्यते । महासंज्ञाकरणं पूर्वाचार्यानुरोधेन Padamañj. on VIII.1.2.

ārdhadhātukādhikāra	the topic or section in Pāṇini's grammar where operations, caused by the presence of an ārdhadhātuka affix ahead, are enumerated, beginning with the rule आर्धधातुके VI.4.46 and ending with न ल्यपि VI.4.69, Such operations are summed up in the stanza अतो लोपो चलोपश्च णिलोपश्च प्रयोजनम् । आल्लोप इत्वमेत्वं च चिण्वद्भावश्च सीयुटि; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). as also Kāś, on VI.4.46.

ārhīya	tad-affixes ठक्, ठञ् et cetera, and others as also the senses in which the affixes are applied, given in the section of Pāṇinis grammar P.V.1.19-71.

āśubodha(1)	name of a work on grammar written by Tārānātha called Tarka-vācaspatī, a reputed Sanskrit scholar of Bengal of the 19th century A.D. who compiled the great Sanskrit Dictionary named वाचस्पत्यकेाश and wrote commentaries on many Sanskrit Shastraic and classical works. The grammar called अाशुबोध is very useful for beginners; (2) name of an elementary grammar in aphorisms written by रामकिंकरसरस्वती, which is based on the Mugdhabodha of Bopadeva.

i(1)	the vowel इ, representing all its eighteen forms viz. short, long protracted, acute, grave, circumflex, pure and nasalised; exempli gratia, for example इ in यस्येति च P.VI.4.128;(2) Uṅādi affix ई(3)tad-affix इच्(इ)applied to Bahuvrihi compounds in the sense of exchange of action or as seen in words like द्विदण्डि exempli gratia, for example केशाकेशि, दण्डादण्डि, द्विमुसलि et cetera, and others confer, compare इच् कर्मव्यतिहारे P.V.4. 127,also V.4.128; (4) kṛt (affix). affix कि (इ) confer, compare उपसर्गे घोः किः P.III.3.92; (5) augment इट् (इ); see इट् (6) conjugational affix इट् of the 1st person. singular. or Ātmanep. Ātmanepada

iṅgya	a separable word as opposed to अनिङ्ग्य; part of a compound word which is separated or may be separated from the remaining part when the word is split up into its constituent parts. Generally the word is applied to the first part of a compound word when it is split up in the recital of the padapāṭha. The 'iṅgya' word is shown by a pause or avagraha after it which is shown in writing by the sign (ऽ): confer, compare इङ्गयेत विभागेन चाल्यते इति इङ्गयम् । इङ्गयमिति विभागपदस्य संशा commentary on Tait. Prāt. 1.48. सावग्रहं पदमिङ्गयम् Com.on T.Pr. I.48.

it(1)	a letter or a group of letters attached to a word which is not seen in actual use in the spoken language: cf अप्रयोगी इत्, Śāk. I.1.5, Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana.1.1.37. The इत् letters are applied to a word before it, or after it, and they have got each of them a purpose in grammar viz. causing or preventing certain grammatical operations in the formation of the complete word. Pāṇini has not given any definition of the word इत् , but he has mentioned when and where the vowels and consonants attached to words are to be understood as इत्; (confer, compare उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् , हलन्त्यम् । et cetera, and others P. I.3.2 to 8) and stated that these letters are to be dropped in actual use, confer, compareP.I.3.9. It appears that grammarians before Pāṇini had also employed such इत् letters, as is clear from some passages in the Mahābhāṣya as also from their use in other systems of grammar as also in the Uṇādi list of affixes, for purposes similar to those found served in Pāṇini 's grammar. Almost all vowels and consonants are used as इत् for different purposes and the इत् letters are applied to roots in the Dhātupāṭha, nouns in the Gaṇapāṭha, as also to affixes, augments and substitutes prescribed in grammar. Only at a few places they are attached to give facility of pronunciation. Sometimes the इत् letters, especially vowels, which are said to be इत्, when uttered as nasalized by Pāṇini, are recognised only by convention; confer, compare प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः(S.K.on P.I.3.2).The word इत्, which literally means going away or disappearing, can be explained as a mute indicatory letter. In Pāṇini's grammar, the mute vowel अ applied to roots indicates the placing of the Ātmanepada affixes after them, if it be uttered as anudātta and of affixes of both the padas if uttered svarita; confer, compare P.I.3. 12, 72. The mute vowel आ signifies the prevention of इडागम before the past part, affixes; confer, compare P. VII. 2. 16. Similarly, the mute vowel इ signfies the augment न् after the last vowel of the root; confer, compareP.VII.1.58; ई signifies the prevention of the augment इ before the past participle.affixes cfP.VII.2.14;उ signifies the inclusion of cognate letters; confer, compareP.I.1.69, and the optional addition of the augment इ before त्वा; confer, compare P.VII.2. 56; ऊ signifies the optional application of the augment इट्;confer, compareP.VII. 2.44; क signifies the prevention of ह्रस्व to the vowel of a root before the causal affix, confer, compareVII.4.2: लृ signifies the vikarana अङ् in the Aorist cf P.III.1.55; ए signifies the prevention of vrddhi in the Aorist,confer, compare P.VII.2.55; ओ signifies the substitution of न् for त् of the past participle. confer, compare P VIII.2.45; क् signifies the Prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compareP, I. 1.5; ख् signifies the addition of the augment मुम्(म्)and the shortening of the preceding vowel: confer, compareP.VI.3 65-66: ग् signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5 घ् signifies कुत्व, confer, compare P.VII.3.62; ङ्, applied to affixes, signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5; it causes संप्रसारणादेश in the case of certain roots, confer, compare P. VI.1.16 and signifies आत्मनेपद if applied to roots; confer, compare P.I. 3.12, and their substitution for the last letter if applied to substitutes. confer, compare P I.1.53. च् signifies the acute accent of the last vowel;confer, compareP.VI.1. 159; ञ् signifies उभयपद i.e the placing of the affixes of both the podas after the root to which it has been affixed;confer, compareP.I.3.72, ट् in the case of an augment signifies its application to the word at the beginning: confer, compareP I.1.64, while applied to a nominal base or an affix shows the addition of the feminine. affix ई (ङीप्) confer, compareP.IV.1. 15;ड् signifies the elision of the last syllable; confer, compare P.VI.4.142: ण् signifies वृद्धि, confer, compareP.VII.2.115;त् signifies स्वरित accent, confer, compare VI.1.181, as also that variety of the vowel ( ह्रस्व, दीर्ध or प्लुत) to which it has been applied confer, compare P.I.1.70; न् signifies आद्युदात्त, confer, compare P.VI.1.193:प् signifies अनुदात्त accent confer, compare अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III.1.4. as also उदात्त for the vowel before the affix marked with प् confer, compare P.VI.1.192: म् signifies in the case of an augment its addition after the final vowel.confer, compareP.I.1.47,while in the case of a root, the shortening of its vowel before the causal affix णि,confer, compare P.VI.4.92: र् signifies the acute accent for the penultimate vowel confer, compare P.VI.1.217，ल् signifies the acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix marked with ल्; confer, compareP.VI. 193; श् implies in the case of an affix its सार्वधातुकत्व confer, compare P. II1.4.113, while in the case of substitutes, their substitution for the whole स्थानिन् cf P.I.1.55; प् signifies the addition of the feminine. affix ई ( ङीप् ) confer, compareP.IV-1.41 ;स् in the case of affixes signifies पदसंज्ञा to the base before them, cf P.I.4.16. Sometimes even without the actual addition of the mute letter, affixes are directed to be looked upon as possessed of that mute letter for the sake of a grammatical operation exempli gratia, for example सार्वधातुकमपित् P.I.2.4; असंयेागाल्लिट कित् P.I.2.5: गोतो णित् P.VII.1.90 et cetera, and others (2) thc short vowel इ as a substitute: confer, compare शास इदङ्हलोः P.VI.4.34.

itkārya	a grammatical operation caused by इत् i. e. by a mute letter which is purely indicatory; confer, compare एवं तर्हि इत्कार्याभावादत्र इत्संज्ञा न भविष्यति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.3.2. See इत् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

indra	name of a great grammarian who is believed to have written an exhaustive treatise on grammar before Pāṇini; confer, compare the famous verse of Bopadeva at the commencement of his Dhātupāṭha इन्द्रश्चन्द्र: काशकृत्स्नापिशली शाकटायनः । पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्रा जयन्त्यष्टादिशाब्दिका: ॥ No work of Indra is available at present. He is nowhere quoted by Pāṇini. Many quotations believed to have been taken from his work are found scattered in grammar works, from which it appears that there was an ancient system prevalent in the eastern part of India at the time of Pāṇini which could be named ऐन्द्रव्याकरणपद्धति, to which Pāṇini possibly refers by the word प्राचाम्. From references,it appears that the grammar was of the type of प्रक्रिया, discussing various topics of grammar such as alphabet, coalescence, declension, context, compounds, derivatives from nouns and roots, conjugation, and changes in the base. The treatment was later on followed by Śākaṭāyana and writers of the Kātantra school.For details see Mahābhāṣya edition by D. E. Society, Poona, Vol. VII pages 124-127.

ip	a technical term for द्वितीया (accusative case ) in the Jainendra grammar; confer, compare कर्मणीप् Jain. 1.4.2.

iṣṭatantravyākaraṇa	a short treatise on grammar ascribed to Jayadeva.

iṣṭhavadbhāva	possession of the same properties for causing grammatical operations as the taddhita affix. affix इष्ठन् possesses, as for instance, the elision of the syllable beginning with the last vowel ( टिलोप ), substitution of the masculine gender. base for the feminine. base (पुंवद्भाव) et cetera, and others, before the denom affix णिच्; exempli gratia, for example एतयति in the sense of एनीं आचष्टे; similarly प्रथयति, पटयति, दवयति, confer, compare M.Bh. on. P.VI.4. 155 Vārt, 1.

u(1)	labial vowel standing for the long ऊ and protracted ऊ3 in Pāṇini's grammar unless the consonant त् is affixed to it, उत् standing for the short उ only: (2) Vikaraṇa affix उ of the 8th conjugation ( तनादिगण ) and the roots धिन्व् and कृण्व्;confer, compareP.III. 1.79-80; (3) substitute (उ) for the vowel अ of कृ,exempli gratia, for example कुरुतः, कृर्वन्ति before weak Sārvadhātuka affixes, confer, compareP.VI 4.110; (4) kṛt (affix). affix उ added to bases ending in सन् and the roots आशंस्, भिक्ष्, विद्, इष् as also to bases ending in क्यच् in the Vedic Literature,exempli gratia, for example चिकीर्षुः भिक्षुः, बिन्दुः,इच्छुः,सुम्नयु; confer, compare P. III. 2.168-170; (5) Uṅādi affix उ ( उण् ) e.g, कारुः, वायुः, साधुः, et cetera, and others; confer, compare Uṅādi I.1; (6) mute vowel उ added to the first letters of a class of consonants in Pāṇini's grammar to show the whole class of the five letters; exempli gratia, for example कु, चु, टु, तु, पु which stand for the Guttural, the palatal the lingual, the dental and the labial classes respectively; confer, compare also ष्टुना ष्टुः P.VIII.4.41(7) उ added to न् showing the consonant न् as nasalized n; cf, नुः V.Pr. III.133.

uktārtha	a word or expression whose sense has been already expressedition The expression उक्तार्थानामप्रयोगः is frequently used in the Mahābhāṣya and the Vārttikas and cited as a Paribhāṣā or a salutary conventional maxim against repetition of words in the Paribhāṣāpāṭhas of Vyādi (Par. 51), Candragomin (Par 28) and Kātantra (Par. 46) and Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra. (Par. 46) grammars.

uktiratnākara'	a short grammar work, written by साधुसुन्दर, explaining declension, cases and their meanings, compounds, et cetera, and others and giving a list of Prākṛta words with their Sanskrit equivalents.

uccarita	pronounced or uttered; the phrase उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः is used in connection with the mute indicatory letters termed इत् in Pāṇini's grammar, as these letters are not actually found in use in the language and are therefore supposed to vanish immediately after their purpose has been servedition The phrase 'उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनोSनुबन्धा:' has been given as a Paribhāṣā by Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.(Pari.11), in the Cāndra Vyākaraṇa ( Par. 14), in the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa (Pari.54) and also in the Kalāpa Vyākaraṇa ( Par. 71). Patañjali has used the expression उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः in connection with ordinary letters of a word, which have existence for a moment and which also vanish immediately after they have been uttered; confer, compare उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः खल्वपि वर्णा: ...न वर्णो वर्णस्य सहायः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.4. 109.

uṇādi	affixes headed by the affix उण्, which are similar to kṛt affixes of Pāṇini, giving derivation mostly of such words as are not derived by rules of Pāṇini. No particular sense such as agent, object et cetera, and others is mentioned in connection with these affixes, but, as Pāṇini has stated in 'ताभ्यामन्यत्रोणादयः P.III. 4.75, the various Uṇādi affixes are applied to the various roots as prescribed in any Kāraka sense, except the संप्रदान and the अपादान; in other words, any one of the senses, agent, object, instrument and abode, is assigned to the Uṇādi affix as suits the meaning of the word. Although some scholars believe that the Uṇādi affixes are given by a grammarian later than Pāṇini as there are words like ताम्बूल, दीनार and others included in the list of Uṇādi words and that there are many interpolated Sūtras, still the Uṇādi collection must be looked upon as an old one which is definitely mentioned by Pāṇini in two different rules; confer, compare Pāṇini उणादयो बहुलम् P. III.3.1 and ताभ्यामन्यत्रोणादयः III.4.76. Patañjali has given a very interesting discussion about these Uṇādi affixes and stated on the strength of the Vārttika, तत्रोणादिप्रतिषेधः, that these affixes and the words given in the Uṇādi collection should not be considered as genuinely deriveditionThe derivation is not a very systematic and logically correct one and therefore for practical purposes, the words derived by the application of the affixes उण् and others should be looked upon as underived; confer, compare उणादयोSव्युत्पन्नानि प्रातिपदिकानि. Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on. P.I.1.16, III.4.77, IV.1.1, VI.1.62, VII.1.2, VII.2.8 et cetera, and others There is a counterstatement also seen in the Mahābhāṣya उणादयो व्युत्पन्नानि, representing the other view prevailing at the time; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.I.133; but not much importance seems to be attached to it. The different systems of grammar have different collections of such words which are also known by the term Uṇādi. Out of the collections belonging to Pāṇini's system, three collections are available at present, the collection into five pādas given in the printed edition of the Siddhānta Kaumudi, the collection into ten Pādas given in the printed edition of the Prakriya-Kaumudi and the collection in the Sarasvatīkaṇthābharaṇa of Bhoja forming Pādas 1, 2 and 3 of the second Adhyāya of the work.

uṇādiprātipadika	word form or crude base, ending with an affix of the uṇ class, which is looked upon as practically underived, the affixes un and others not being looked upon as standard affixes applied with regular meanings attached to them and capable of causing operations to the preceding base as prescribed by rules of grammar; confer, compare उणादयोS व्युत्पन्नानि प्रातिपदिकानि । व्युत्पन्नानीति शाकटायनरीत्या । पाणिनेस्त्वव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष एवेति शब्देन्दुशेखरे निरूपितम्. Pari. Śek. on Paribhāṣa 22.

uṇādisūtra,uṇādisūtrapāṭha	the text of the Sūtras which begins with the Sūtras prescribing the affix उण् after the roots कृ, वा, पा, जि, स्वद्, साध् and अश्; cf Uṅādi Sūtras 1.1. for the different versions of the text See उणादि. Similar Sūtras in Kātantra, Āpiśali, Sakaṭāyana and other systems of grammar are also called Uṇādi Sūtras.

utpatti(1)	production: confer, compare वर्णोत्पत्तिः production of a phonetic element Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.23.1 ; (2) production of a grammatical element such as the application of an affix or addition of an augment or substitution of a letter or letters during the process of word-formation: confer, compare गतिकारकोपपदानां कृद्भिः सह समासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्पत्तेः Pari. Śek. Par. 75; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). II.2.19. Vārt, 4.

udayakīrti	author of a treatise giving rules for the determination of the pada or padas of roots; the treatise is named पदव्यवस्थासूत्रकारिकाटीका He was a Jain grammarian, and one of the pupils of Sādhusundara.

udātta	the acute accent defined by Pāṇini in the words उचैरुदात्त: P.I.2. 29. The word उच्चैः is explained by Patañjali in the words 'आयामो दारुण्यं अणुता स्वस्य इति उचैःकराणि शब्दस्य' where आयाम (गात्रनिग्रह restriction of the organs), दारुण्य (रूक्षता rudeness ) and स्वस्य अणुता ( कण्ठस्य संवृतता closure of the glottis) are given as specific characteristics of the acute accent. The acute is the prominent accent in a word-a simple word as also a compound word-and when a vowel in a word is possessed of the acute accent, the remaining vowels have the अनुदात्त or the grave accent. Accent is a property of vowels and consonants do not possess any independent accent. They possess the accent of the adjoining vowel connected with it. The acute accert corresponds to what is termed 'accent' in English and other languages.

udāttaśruti	the same as एकश्रुति, accentless tone, mentioned in connection with the latter half of a circumflex vowel as also with a grave vowel or vowels, if not followed by another acute or circumflex vowel; confer, compare नोदात्तस्वरितोदयं. P.VIII.4.67.

udāharaṇa	a grammatical example in explanation of an interpretation; confer, compare नैकमुदाहरणमसवर्णग्रहणं प्रयोजयति P.VI. 1.11.

uddhāra(1)	elision, a term used in the sense of 'lopa' in the ancient grammar works; (2) name of a commentary on the Haima-liṅgānuśāsana.

uddeśya	referred to; pointed out, subject, as contrasted with the predicate मानान्तरप्राप्तमुद्देश्यम् ; confer, compare उद्दश्यप्रतिनिर्दिश्यमानयोरैक्यमापद्यत् सर्वनाम पर्यायेण तत्तल्लिङभाक् । तद्यथा \| शैत्यं हि यत्सा प्रकृतिर्जलस्य, शैत्यं हि य यत्तत्प्रकृतिर्जलस्य वा । उद्देश्य in grammar refers to the subjectpart of a sentence as opposed to the predicate-participle. In the sentence वृद्धिरादैच् the case is strikingly an opposite one and the explanation given by Patañjali is very interesting;confer, compare तदेतदेकं मङ्गलार्थं आचार्यस्य मृष्यताम् । माङ्गलिक अाचार्यः महतः शास्त्रौघस्य मङ्गलार्थं वृद्धिशब्दमादितः प्रयुङ्कते, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.1.

uddyota	the word always refers in grammar to the famous commentary by Nāgeśabhaṭṭa written in the first decade of the 18th century A. D. om the Mahābhāṣyapradīpa of Kaiyaṭa. The Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.appears to be one of the earlier works of Nāgeśa. It is also called Vivaraṇa. The commentary is a scholarly one and is looked upon as a final word re : the exposition of the Mahābhāṣya. It is believed that Nāgeśa wrote 12 Uddyotas and 12 Śekharas which form some authoritative commentaries on prominent works in the different Śāstras.

upakādi	a class of words headed by the word उपक after which the taddhita affix, added in the sense of गोत्र ( grand-children et cetera, and others ) is optionally elided, provided the word is to be used in the plural number; confer, compare उपकलमकाः भ्रष्टककपिष्ठलाः also उपकाः, औपकायनाः; लमकाः, लामकायना ; भ्रष्टकाः भ्राष्टकयः । Kāś. on P. II.4.69.

upajīvya	a term used by later grammarians in connection with such a rule on which another rule depends confer, compare उपजीव्यादन्तरङ्गाच्व प्रधानं प्रबलम् Pari. Śekh. on Pari. 97, as also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on हेतुमति च P. III.1.26. The relationship known as उपजीव्योपजीवकभाव occurs several times in grammar which states the inferiority of the dependent as noticed in the world.

upapada	literallya word placed near; an adjoining word. In Pāṇini's grammar, the term उपपद is applied to such words as are put in the locative case by Pāṇini in his rules prescribing kṛt affixes in rules from 1 II. 1, 90 to III. 4 end; confer, compare तत्रोपपदं सप्तमीस्थम् P.III.1.92; exempli gratia, for example कर्मणि in कर्मण्यण् P. III.2.1. The word is also used in the sense of an adjoining word connected in sense. e. g. युष्मद्युपपदे as also प्रहासे च मन्योपपदे P.I.4.105,106; confer, compare also क्रियार्थायां क्रियायामुपपदे धातोर्भविष्यति काले तुमुन्ण्वुलौ भवतः Kāś. on P.III.3.10; confer, compare also इतरेतरान्योन्योपपदाच्च P.I.3.10, मिथ्योपपदात् कृञोभ्यासे P.I.3.71, as also उपपदमतिङ् P.II.2.19; and गतिकारकोपपदात्कृत् P. VI.2.139. Kaiyaṭa on P.III.1. 92 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2 explains the word उपपद as उपोच्चारि or उपोच्चारितं पदं उपपदम्. The word उपपद is found used in the Prātiśākhya literature where it means a word standing near and effecting some change: confer, compare च वा ह अह एव एतानि चप्रभृतीनि यान्युपपदानि उक्तानि आख्यातस्य विकारीणिo Uvaṭa on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VI. 23.

upapadavidhi	a grammatical operation caused by a word which is near; cf उपपदविधौ भयाढ्यादिग्रहणं P. I.1.72 Vārt 9, also अतिप्रसङ्ग उपपदविधौ P. IV 1.1. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 8 where rules such as 'कर्मण्यण्' and the following are referred to as उपपदविधि, the words कर्मणि, स्तम्ब, कर्ण, et cetera, and others being called उपपद by the rule तत्रोपपदं सप्तमीस्थम्; P. III.1.92.

upapadavibhakti	a case termination added to a word on account of the presence of another word requiring the addition;confer, compare the well-known Paribhāṣā,उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभक्तिर्बलीयसी. Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 94; and M.Bh. on I.4. 96 stating the possession of greater force in the case of a kāra-kavibhakti than in the case of an upapadavibhakti.

upamanyu(1)	the famous commentator on the grammatical verses attributed to Nandikeśvarakārikā. which are known by the name नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका and which form a kind of a commentary on the sūtras of Maheśvara; (2) a comparatively modern grammarian possibly belonging to the nineteenth century who is also named Nandikeśvarakārikā.kārikābhāṣya by Upamanyu.and who has written a commentory on the famous Kāśikāvṛtti by Jayāditya and Vāmana. Some believe that Upa-manyu was an ancient sage who wrote a nirukta or etymological work and whose pupil came to be known as औपमन्यव.

upavarṣa	an ancient grammarian and Mīmāmsaka believed to have been the brother of Varṣa and the preceptor of Pāṇini. He is referred to, many times as an ancient writer of some Vṛttigranthas.

upasamasta	compounded together, joined together by special grammatical connection called समास; confer, compare न केवल; पथिशब्दः स्त्रियां वर्तते । उपसमस्तस्तर्हि वर्तते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VII.1.1. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 18.

upasargayoga	connection with a prefix; joining of the prefix. Some scholars of grammar hold the view that the Upasarga is prefixed to the root and then the verbal form is arrived at by placing the desired terminations after the root, while others hold the opposite view: confer, compare पूर्वं धातुः साधनेनोपयुज्यते पश्चादुपसर्गेण । अन्ये तु पूर्वं धातुरुपसर्गेण युज्यते पश्चात्साधनेनेत्याहुः Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti Pari. 131, 132; cf also vol. VII. Mahābhāṣya edited by the D. E. Society, Poona, pages 371-372.

upāntya	see उपान्त; the word is generally found used in the grammars of Śākaṭāyana and Hemacandra.

ubhayatra	in both the ways literally in both the places; confer, compare उभयत्र च P. I. 1. 44 V rt. 22. The word उभयत्रविभाषा is used in grammar referring to the option ( विभाषा) which is प्राप्त as also अप्राप्त; confer, compareM.Bh.on P.1.1.26 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).22.

ṛ	fourth vowel in Pāṇini's alphabet; possessed of long and protracted varieties and looked upon as cognate ( सवर्ण ) with लृ which has no long type in the grammar of Pāṇini; confer, compare R.Pr.I,9: V.Pr.VIII.3. (2) uṇādi suffix च् applied to the root स्था to form the word स्थृ; e. g. सव्येष्ठा सारथिः; confer, compare सव्ये स्थश्छन्दसि Uṇ Sū, II. 101.

ṛkāra	the letter ऋ with its 18 varieties made up of the ह्रस्व, दीर्घ, प्लुत, and सानुनासिक varieties and characterized by the three accents. ऋ and लृ are looked upon as cognate in Pāṇini's grammar and hence, ऋ could be looked upon as possessed of 30 varieties including 12 varieties of लृ.

e	diphthong vowel ए made up of अ and इ, and hence having कण्ठतालुस्थान as its place of origin. It has no short form according to Pāṇini. In cases where a short vowel as a substitute is prescribed for it in grammar, the vowel इ is looked upon as its short form. Patañjali in his Mahābhāṣya has observed that followers of the Sātyamugri and Rāṇāyanīya branches of the Sāmaveda have short ए ( ऍ ) in their Sāmaveda recital and has given सुजाते अश्वसूनृते, अध्वर्यो अद्रिभिः सुतम् as illustrations; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1-48; as also the article on.

eka(1)	Singular number, ekavacana: confer, compare नो नौ मे मदर्थं त्रिह्येकेषु. V. Pr.II.3: the term is found used in this sense of singular number in the Jainendra, Śākaṭāyana and Haima grammars ( 2 ) single ( vowel ) substitute (एकादेश) for two (vowels); cf एकः पूर्वपरयोः P.VI. 1.84; अथैकमुभे T.Pr. X.1; ( 3 ) many, a certain number : (used in plural in this sense), confer, compare इह चेत्येके मन्यते， Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I. 4.21 .

ekadeśavikṛtanyāya	the maxim that ' a thing is called or taken as that very thing although it is lacking in a part,'stated briefly as एकदेशविकृतमनन्यवत् Pari. Śek. Pari. 37. The maxim is given in all the different schools of grammar: confer, compare Śak Pari. 17: Cāndra Pari. 15, Kat. Par. Vr. l, Jain. Par.Vr.l l, Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana.Pari.7 et cetera, and others

ekavacana	singular number; affix of the singular numberin Pāṇini's grammar applied to noun-bases ( प्रातिपदिक) and roots when the sense of the singular number is to be conveyed; the singular sense can be of the form of an individual or collection or genus. The word एकवचन in the technical sense of singular number is found used in the Prātiśākhyas and Nirukta also.

ekavākya	an expression giving one idea, either a single or a composite one. A positive statement and its negation, so also, a general rule and its exception are looked upon as making a single sentence on account of their mutual expectancy even though they be sometimes detached from each other confer, compare विदेशस्थमपि सदेकवाक्यं भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.4.67; confer, compare also निषेधवाक्यानामपि निषेध्यविशेषाकाङ्क्षत्वाद्विध्येकवाक्यतयैव अन्वयः । तत्रैकवाक्यता पर्युदासन्यायेन । संज्ञाशास्त्रस्य तु कार्यकालपक्षे न पृथग्वाक्यार्थबोधः । Par. Śek on Pari. 3. Such sentences are, in fact, two sentences, but, to avoid the fault of गौरव, caused by वाक्यभेद, grammarians hold them to be composite single sentences.

ekavṛtti	single vṛtti or gloss on the Vedic as well as classical portions of grammar. Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva has used this term in his Bhāṣāvṛtti to contrast his Vṛtti (भाषावृत्ति) with the Kāśikāvṛtti and the Bhāgavṛtti which deal with both the portions; confer, compareअनार्ष इत्येकवृत्तावुपयुक्तम् Bhāṣāvṛtti on I.1.16, confer, comparealso Bhāṣāvṛtti on III. 4.99, IV.3.22 and VI.3.20.एकवृत्ति is possibly used by Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva in the sense of मुख्यवृत्ति or साधारणवृत्ति i. e. the common chief gloss on both the portions.

ekaśeṣa	a kind of composite formation in which only one of the two or more words compounded together subsists, the others being elided; confer, compare एकः शिष्यते इतरे निवर्तन्ते वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च वृक्षौ । Kāśikā on सरूपाणामेकशेष एक-विभक्तौ P.I.2.64; confer, compare also सुरूपसमुदायाद्धि विभक्तिर्या विधीयते । एकस्तत्रार्थवान् सिद्धः समुदायस्य वाचकः ।। Bhāṣāvṛtti on P. I. 2.64. There is a dictum of grammarians that every individual object requires a separate expression to convey its presence. Hence, when there is a dual sense, the word has to be repeated, as also the word has to be multiplied when there is a plural sense. In current spoken language, however, in such cases the word is used only once. To justify this single utterance for conveying the sense of plurality, Pāṇini has laid down a general rule सरूपाणामेकशेष एकविभक्तौ and many other similar rules to cover cases of plurality not of one and the same object, but plurality cased by many objects, such as plurality caused by ideas going in pairs or relations such as parents, brothers and sisters, grand-father and grand-son, male and female. For example, see the words वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च वृक्षौ; Similarly वृक्षाः for many trees, पितरौ for माता च पिता च; देवौ for देवी च देवश्च; confer, compare also the words श्वशुरौ, भ्रातरौ, गार्ग्यौ (for गार्ग्य and गार्ग्यायण),आवाम् (for त्वं च अहं च), यौ (for स च यश्च) and गावः feminine. अजा feminine. अश्वाः masculine gender. irrespective of the individuals being some males and some females. Pāṇini has devoted 10 Sūtras to this topic of Ekaśeṣa. The Daiva grammar has completely ignored this topic. Patanjali has very critically and exhaustively discussed this topic. Some critics hold that the topic of एकशेघ did not exist in the original Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini but it was interpolated later on, and adduce the long discussion in the Mahābhāṣya especially the Pūrvapakṣa therein, in support of their argument. Whatever the case be, the Vārttikakāra has commented upon it at length; hence, the addition must have been made immediately after Pāṇini, if at all there was any. For details see Mahābhāṣya on I.1.64 to 73 as also,Introduction p. 166-167, Vol.7 of the Mahābhāṣya published by the D. E. Society, Poona.

ekaśruti	that which has got the same accent or tone; utterance in the same tone; monotone. The word is applied to the utterance of the vocative noun or phrase calling a man from a distance, as also to that of the vowels or syllables following a Svarita vowel in the Saṁhitā id est, that is the continuous utterance of Vedic sentences; confer, compare एकश्रुति दूरात्संबुद्वौ and the foll. P.I.2.33-40 and the Mahābhāṣya thereon. In his discussion on I.2.33 Patañjali has given three alternative views about the accent of Ekaśruti syllables : (a) they possess an accent between the उदात्त (acute) and अनुदात्त (grave), (b) they are in the same accent as is possessed by the preceding vowel, (c) Ekaśruti is looked upon as the seventh of the seven accents; confer, compare सैषा ज्ञापकाभ्यामुदात्तानुदात्तयोर्मध्यमेकश्रुतिरन्तरालं ह्रियते। ... सप्त स्वरा भवन्ति \| उदात्तः, उदात्ततर:, अनुदात्तः, अनुदात्ततर:, स्वरितः स्वरिते य उदात्तः सोन्येन विशिष्टः, एकश्रुतिः सप्तमः । M.Bh. on P.I.2.33.

ekasvara	possessed of one vowel,monosyllabic; a term used by Hemacandra in his grammar for the term एकाच् of Pāṇini: confer, compare आद्योंश एकस्वरे Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana.IV.1.2, which means the same as एकाचेा द्वे प्रथमस्य P.VI.1.1.

ekācpāda	name given by Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛttiand other grammarians to the first pāda of the sixth adhyāya cf Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī., as it begins with the sūtra एकाचो द्वे प्रथमस्य VI.1.1.

ekādeśa	a single substitute in the place of two original units; exempli gratia, for example ए in the place of अ and इ,or ओ in the place of अ and उ. The ādeśas or substitutes named पूर्वरूप and पररूप are looked upon as ekadeśas in Pāṇini's grammar although instead of them, the omission of the latter and former vowels respectively, is prescribed in some Prātiśākhya works. गुण and वृद्धि are sometimes single substitutes for single originals, while they are sometimes ekadeśas for two original vowels exempli gratia, for example तवेदम्, ब्रह्मौदनः, उपैति, प्रार्च्छति, गाम्, सीमन्तः et cetera, and others; see P.VI.1.87 to ll l, confer, compare also A.Pr.II 3.6.

ec	a short term (प्रत्याहार) in Pāṇini's grammar standing for diphthongs or letters ए,ऐ,ओ, औ, exempli gratia, for example एचोयवायावः P.VI.1.78, एच इग् ह्रस्वादेशे P.I.1.48.

ai	diphthong vowel ऐ; composite form of आ and ए, also termed वृद्धि in Pāṇini's grammar.

aikapadika	given in the group of ekapadas or solitarily stated words as contrasted with anekapadas or synonymanuscript. See एकपद a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

aindra	name of an ancient school of grammar and of the treatise also, belonging to that school, believed to have been written under instructions of Indra. The work is not available. Patañjali mentions that Bṛhaspati instructed Indra for one thousand celestial years and still did not finish his instructions in words': (Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.1 ). The Taittirīya Saṁhitā mentions the same. Pāṇini has referred to some ancient grammarians of the East by the word प्राचाम् without mentioning their names, and scholars like Burnell think that the grammar assigned to Indra is to be referred to by the word प्राचाम्. The Bṛhatkathāmañjarī remarks that Pāṇini's grammar threw into the background the Aindra Grammar. Some scholars believe that Kalāpa grammar which is available today is based upon Aindra,just as Cāndra is based upon Pāṇini's grammar. References to Aindra Grammar are found in the commentary on the Sārasvata Vyākaraṇa, in the Kavikalpadruma of Bopadeva as also in the commentary upon the Mahābhārata by Devabodha.Quotations, although very few, are given by some writers from the work. All these facts prove that there was an ancient pre-Pāṇinian treatise on Grammar assigned to इन्द्र which was called Aindra-Vyākaraṇa.For details see Dr.Burnell's 'Aindra School of Sanskrit Grammarians' as also Vol. VII pages 124-126 of Vyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya, edited by the D.E.Society, Poona.

o(1)	diphthong vowel made up of the vowels अ and उ, termed as guṇa in Pāṇini's grammar and prescribed sometimes in the place of the vowel उ; ( 2 ) affix ओ applied to the root गम् or गा to form a noun; confer, compare ओकारो नामकरणः Nir.II.5.

oraṃbhaṭṭ	a scholar of grammar of the nineteenth century who wrote a Vṛtti on Pāṇini sūtras called पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति. He has written many works on the Pūrvamīmāmsa and other Śāstras.

oṅ	a term used by ancient grammarians for the affix औ of the nominative case. and the acc. dual number The vowel ई (शी) is substituted for औ in the case of nouns of the feminine and neuter genders; confer, compare औङः शी P. VII. 1.18, 19.

aauṇādika	an afix mentioned in the class of affixes called उणादि in treatises of Pāṇini and other grammarians; confer, compare नमुचि । मुचेरौणादिकः केिप्रत्ययः Kāś.on P.VI.3.75; फिडफिड्डौ अौणादिकौ प्रत्ययौ M.Bh. on Māheśvarasūtras. 2. See the word उणादि a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

aut(1)	the letter औ included in the वृद्धि vowels अा, ऐ and औ, and hence called वृद्धि in Pāṇini's grammar, (2) substitute for the caseending इ ( ङि ) in Pāṇini's grammar; confer, compare P. VII.3.118, 119.

k(1)	the consonant क्; the first con. sonant of the consonant group as also of the guttural group; (2) substitute क् for consonants ष्， and ढ् before the consonant स्;confer, compareV.P.2.41. For the elision ( लोप ) of क् on account of its being termed इत् see P.I.3.3 and 8.

k(1)	taddhita affix.affix क applied to the words of the ऋश्य group in the four senses called चातुरर्थिक e. g. ऋश्यकः, अनडुत्कः, वेणुकः et cetera, and others, confer, compare P.IV.2.80; (2) taddhita affix. affix क applied to nouns in the sense of diminution, censure, pity et cetera, and others e. g. अश्वक्रः, उष्ट्रकः, पुत्रकः, confer, compare P.V. 3.70-87: (3) taddhita affix. affix क in the very sense of the word itself ( स्वार्थे ) exempli gratia, for example अविकः, यावकः, कालकः; confer, compare P.V.4.2833; (4) Uṇādi affix क exempli gratia, for example कर्क, वृक, राका, एक, भेक, काक, पाक, शल्क et cetera, and others by Uṇādi sūtras III. 40-48 before which the angment इट् is prohibited by P. VII.2.9; (5) kṛt affix क ( अ ) where क् is dropped by P. I. 3.8, applied, in the sense of agent, to certain roots mentioned in P.III.1.135, 136, 144, III. 2.3 to 7, III.2.77 and III.3.83 exempli gratia, for example बुध:, प्रस्थः, गृहम्, कम्बलदः, द्विपः, मूलविभुजः, सामगः, सुरापः et cetera, and others; (6) substitute क for the word किम् before a case affix, confer, compare P.VII.2.103; (7) the Samāsānta affix कप् (क) at the end of Bahuvrīhi compounds as prescribed by P.V.4.151-160.

kaṃsavijayagaṇi	a Jain grammarian who wrote a commentary by name शब्दचन्द्रिकोद्धार on the सारस्वतव्याकरण.

kaṇṭhya	produced at the throat or at the glottis; the vowel अ, visarga and the consonant ह् are called कण्ठ्यं in the Prātiśākhyas, while later grammarians include the guttural consonants क्, ख् ग्, घ् and ङ् among the Kaṇṭhya letters; confer, compare अकुहविसर्जनीयानां कण्ठः Sid. Kau.on तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवर्णम् P.I.1.9. See कण्ठ.

kaṇḍvādi	a group of words which are headed by the word कण्डू and which are either nouns or roots or both to which the affix यक् is added to arrive at the secondary roots exempli gratia, for example कण्डूयति, कण्डूयते; हृणीयति, हृणीयते, महीयते confer, compare धातुप्रक्ररणाद्धातुः कस्य चासञ्जनादपि । आह चायमिमं दीर्घं मन्ये धातुर्विभाषितः ॥ Kāś. on P.III.1.27.

karmaṇipāda	name given by Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛttiand other grammarians to the second pāda of the third adhyāya of Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī., which begins with the sūtra कर्मण्यण् P. III.2.1 .

kamenāman	literally noun showing action, participle. कर्मप्रवचनीय a technical term used in connection with a preposition which showed a verbal activity formerly, although for the present time it does not show it; the word is used as a technical term in grammar in connection with prefixes or उपसर्गs which are not used along.with a root, but without it confer, compare कर्म प्रोक्तवन्तः कर्मप्रवचनीयाः इति M.Bh. on P.I.4.83; exempli gratia, for example शाकल्यस्य संहितामनु प्रावर्षत्, अन्वर्जुनं योद्धारः, अा कुमारं यशः पाणिनेः; confer, compare Kāś. on P.I.4.83 to 98.

karmavadbhāva	the activity of the agent or kartā of an action represented as object or karman of that very action, for the sake of grammatical operations: e. g. भिद्यते काष्ठं स्वयमेव;. करिष्यते कटः स्वयमेव. To show facility of a verbal activity on the object, when the agent or kartā is dispensed with, and the object is looked upon as the agent, and used also as an agent, the verbal terminations ति, त; et cetera, and others are not applied in the sense of an agent, but they are applied in the sense of an object; consequently the sign of the voice is not अ (शप्), but य (यक्) and the verbal terminations are त, आताम् et cetera, and others (तङ्) instead of ति, तस् et cetera, and others In popular language the use of an expression of this type is called Karmakartari-Prayoga. For details see Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on कर्मवत्कर्मणा तुल्यक्रियः P.III.1.87. Only such roots as are कर्मस्थक्रियक or कर्मस्थभावक id est, that is roots whose verbal activity is noticed in the object and not in the subject can have this Karmakartari-Prayoga.

kalāpa(कलाप-व्याकरण)	alternative name given to the treatise on grammar written by Sarvavarman who is believed to have lived in the days of the Sātavāhana kings. The treatise is popularly known by the namc Kātantra Vyākaraṇa. The available treatise,viz. Kalpasūtras, is much similar to the Kātantra Sūtras having a few changes and additions only here and there.It is rather risky to say that Kalāpa was an ancient system of grammar which is referred to in the Pāṇini Sūtra कलापिनोण् P. IV.3.108. For details see कातन्त्र.

kalāparatna	a commentary on the kāraka portion of the Kalāpa grammar ascribed to the famous commentator Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti..

kalāpin	the author of the work referred to as Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra. in the Mahābhāṣya which perhaps was a work on grammar as the word कालाप is mentioned with the word in the Mahābhāṣya, confer, compare M.Bh. on कलापिनोSणू P. IV.3. 108. Kalāpin is mentioned as a pupil of Vaiśampāyana in the Mahābhāṣya; confer, compare वैशम्पायनान्तेवासी कलापी M.Bh. on P. IV.3.104.

kalman	the same as karman or object of an action especially when it is not fully entitled to be called karman, but looked upon as karman only for the sake of being used in the accusative case; subordinate karman, as for instance the cow in गां पयो दोग्धि. The term was used by ancient grammarians; confer, compare विपरीतं तु यत्कर्म तत् कल्म कवयो विदुः M.Bh. on P.I.4.51. See कर्मन्.

kalyāṇasarasvatī	author of the Laghusārasvata, a small grammar work. He lived in the 18th century A. D.

kasuna	Hemacandra's grammar. He lived in the 16 th century A. D.

kavikalpadruma	a treatise on roots written by Bopadeva, the son of Keśava and the pupil of Dhaneśa who lived in the time of Hemādri, the Yādava King of Devagiri in the thirteenth century. He has written a short grammar work named Mugdhabodha which has been very popular in Bengal being studied in many Tols or Pāṭhaśālās.

kavicandra	author of a small treatise on grammar called Sārasatvarī. He lived in the seventeenth century A.D. He was a resident of Darbhaṅgā. Jayakṛṣṇa is also given as the name of the author of the Sārasatvarī grammar and it is possible that Jayakṛṣṇa was given the title, or another name, Kavicandra.

kā	a technical term used in the Jainendra Vyākaraṇa for the term पञ्चमी used in Pāṇini's grammar.

kātantra	name of an important small treatise on grammar which appears like a systematic abridgment of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini. It ignores many unimportant rules of Pāṇini, adjusts many, and altogether omits the Vedic portion and the accent chapter of Pāṇini. It lays down the Sūtras in an order different from that of Pāṇini dividing the work into four adhyāyas dealing with technical terms, saṁdhi rules,declension, syntax compounds noun-affixes ( taddhita affixes ) conjugation, voice and verbal derivatives in an order. The total number of rules is 1412 supplemented by many subordinate rules or Vārttikas. The treatise is believed to have been written by Śarvavarman, called Sarvavarman or Śarva or Sarva, who is said to have lived in the reign of the Sātavāhana kings. The belief that Pāṇini refers to a work of Kalāpin in his rules IV. 3.108 and IV.3.48 and that Patañjali's words कालापम् and माहवार्तिकम् support it, has not much strength. The work was very popular especially among those who wanted to study spoken Sanskrit with ease and attained for several year a very prominent place among text-books on grammar especially in Bihar, Bengal and Gujarat. It has got a large number of glosses and commentary works, many of which are in a manuscript form at present. Its last chapter (Caturtha-Adhyāya) is ascribed to Vararuci. As the arrangement of topics is entirely different from Pāṇini's order, inspite of considerable resemblance of Sūtras and their wording, it is probable that the work was based on Pāṇini but composed on the models of ancient grammarians viz. Indra, Śākaṭāyana and others whose works,although not available now, were available to the author. The grammar Kātantra is also called Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra.. A comparison of the Kātantra Sūtras and the Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra. Sūtras shows that the one is a different version of the other. The Kātantra Grammar is also called Kaumāra as it is said that the original 1nstructions for the grammar were received by the author from Kumāra or Kārttikeya. For details see Vol. VII Patañjala Mahābhāṣya published by the D.E. Society, Poona, page 375.

kātantrapañjikā	a name usually given to a compendium of the type of Vivaraṇa or gloss written on the Kātantra Sūtras. The gloss written by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. on the famous commentary on the Kātantra Sūtras by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. ( the same as the the famous Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. or another of the same name ) known as दौर्गसिंही वृत्ति is called Kātantra Pañjika or Kātantravivaraṇa. A scholar of Kātantra grammar by name Kuśala has written a Pañjika on दुर्गसिंहृ's वृत्ति which is named प्रदीप, Another scholar, Trivikrama has written a gloss named Uddyota.

kātantraparibhāṣāpāṭha	name given to a text consisting of Paribhāṣāsūtras, believed to have been written by the Sūtrakāra himself as a supplementary portion to the main grammar. Many such lists of Paribhāṣāsūtras are available, mostly in manuscript form, containing more than a hundred Sūtras divided into two main groups-the Paribhāṣā sūtras and the Balābalasūtras. See परिभाषासंग्रह edition by B. O. R. I. Poona.

kātantraprakriyā	a name given to the Kātantra Sūtras which were written in the original form as a Prakriyāgrantha or a work discussing the various topics such as alphabet, euphonic rules, declension, derivatives from nouns, syntax, conjugation derivatives from roots et cetera, and others et cetera, and others

kātantrapradīpa	a grammar work written by a scholar named Kuśala on the Kātantrasūtravṛtti by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti.. See कातन्त्रपञ्जिका.

kātantrabālabodhinī	a short explanatory gloss on the Kātantra Sūtras by Jagaddhara of Kashmir who lived in the fourteenth century and who wrote a work on grammar called Apaśabdanirākaraṇa.

kātantrarūpamālā	a work, explaining the various forms of nouns and verbs according to the rules of the Kātantra grammar, ascribed to Bhāvasena of the fifteenth century.

kātantravṛttivyākhyā	named Aṣṭamaṅgalā on Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti.'s Kātantravṛtti written by Rāmakiśora Cakravartin who is believed to have written a grammatical work शाब्दबोधप्रकाशिका.

kātya(1)	another name sometimes given to Katyāyana to whom is ascribed the composition of the Vārttikas on Pāṇini-sūtras; (2) an ancient writer Kātya quoted as a lexicographer by Kṣīrasvāmin, Hemacandra and other writers.

kātyāyana	the well-known author of the Vārttikas on the sūtras of Pāṇini. He is also believed to be the author of the Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya and many sūtra works named after him. He is believed to be a resident of South India on the strength of the remark प्रियतद्धिता दाक्षिणात्याः made by Patañjali in connection with the statement 'यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु' which is looked upon as Kātyāyana's Vārttika. Some scholars say that Vararuci was also another name given to him, in which case the Vārttikakāra Vararuci Kātyāyana has to be looked upon as different from the subsequent writer named Vararuci to whom some works on Prakrit and Kātantra grammar are ascribedition For details see The Volume of the introduction in Marathi to the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya, written by K. V. Abhyankar and published by the O. E. Society, Poona.. pages I93-223 published by the D. E.Society, Poona.See also वार्तिकपाठ below.

kāmacāra	option; permission to do as desired liberty of applying any of the rules of grammar that present themselves; confer, compare तत्र कामचारो गृह्यमाणेन वा विभक्तिं विशेषयितुं अङ्गेन वा Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.27 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 6.

kāraka	literally doer of an action. The word is used in the technical sense ; 1 of ’instrument of action'; cf कारकशब्दश्च निमित्तपर्यायः । कारकं हेतुरिति नार्थान्तरम् । कस्य हेतुः । क्रियायाः Kāś. on P.I. 4.23: confer, compare also कारक इति संज्ञानिर्देशः । साधकं निर्वर्तकं कारकसंज्ञं भवति । M.Bh. on P. I. 4.28. The word 'kāraka' in short, means 'the capacity in which a thing becomes instrumental in bringing about an action'. This capacity is looked upon as the sense of the case-affixes which express it. There are six kārakas given in all grammar treatises अपादान, संप्रदान, अधिकरण, करण , कर्मन् and कर्तृ to express which the case affixes or Vibhaktis पञ्चमी, चतुर्थी, सप्तमी, तृतीया, द्वितीया and प्रथमा are respectively used which, hence, are called Kārakavibhaktis as contrasted with Upapadavibhaktis, which show a relation between two substantives and hence are looked upon as weaker than the Kārakavibhaktis; confer, compare उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभक्तिर्बलीयसी Pari. Śek. Pari.94. The topic explaining Kārakavibhaktis is looked upon as a very important and difficult chapter in treatises of grammar and there are several small compendiums written by scholars dealing with kārakas only. For the topic of Kārakas see P. I. 4.23 to 55, Kat, II. 4.8-42, Vyākaraṇa The Volume of the introduction in Marathi to the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya, written by K. V. Abhyankar and published by the O. E. Society, Poona.. pp.262-264 published by the D. E. Society, Poona.

kārakakārikā	possibly another name for the treatise on Kārakas known as कारकचक्र written by Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva the reputed grammarian of Bengal who lived in the latter half of the twelfth century A. D. See कारकचक्र.

kārakakaumudī	a work on the Kātantra grammar discussing the Kāraka portion.

kārakakhaṇḍanamaṇḍana	also called षट्कारक-खण्डनमण्डन which is a portion of theauthor's bigger work named त्रिलो-चनचन्द्रिका. The work is a discourse on the six kārakas written by Maṇikaṇṭha, a grammarian of the Kātantra school. He has also written another treatise named Kārakavicāra

kārakacakra(1)	written by Puruṣotta madeva a reputed grammarian of Bengal who wrote many works on grammar of which the Bhasavrtti, the Paribhāṣāvṛtti and Jñāpakasamuccya deserve a special mention. The verse portion of the Kārakacakra of which the prose portion appears like a commentary might be bearing the name Kārakakaumudī.

kārakatattva	a treatise on the topic of Kārakas written by Cakrapāṇiśeṣa, belonging to the famous Śeṣa family of grammarians, who lived in the seventeenth century A. D.

kārakanirṇaya	a work discussing the various Kārakas from the Naiyāyika view-point written by the well-known Naiyāyika, Gadādhara Chakravartin of Bengal, who was a pupil of Jagadīśa and who fourished in the 16th century A. D. He is looked upon as one of the greatest scholars of Nyāyaśāstra. His main literarywork was in the field of Nyāyaśāstra on which he has written several treatises.

kārakapāda	name given by Śivadeva and other grammarians to the fourth pāda of the first adhyāya of Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. which begins with the Sūtra कारके I. 4. 1 and which deals with the Kārakas or auxiliaries of action.

kārita(1)	ancient term for the causal Vikaraṇa, (णिच् in Pāṇini's grammar and इन् in Kātantra); (2) causal or causative as applied to roots ending in णिच् or words derived from such roots called also 'ṇyanta' by the followers of Pāṇini's grammar; confer, compare इन् कारितं धात्वर्थे Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.III.2.9, explained as धात्वर्थक्रियानाम्न इन् परो भवति धात्वर्थे स च कारितसंज्ञक;।

kārmanāmika	the word is found used in Yāska's Nirukta as an adjective to the word संस्कार where it means belonging to nouns derived fromroofs (कर्मनाम)"like पाचक,कर्षक et cetera, and othersThe changes undergone by the roots in the formation of such words i. e. words showing action are termed कार्मनामिकसंस्कार; confer, compare कर्मकृतं नाम कर्मनाम। तस्मिन् भवः कार्मनामिकः Durgavṛtti on Nirukta of Yāska.I.13. कार्य(l) brought.into existence by activity (क्रियया निर्वृत्तं कार्यम् ) as oppo- sed to नित्य eternal; confer, compare एके वर्णाञ् शाश्वतिकान् न कार्यान् R.Pr. XIII.4 confer, compare also ननु च यस्यापि कार्याः ( शब्दाः ) तस्यापि पूजार्थम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.44 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 17;(2) which should be done, used in connection with a grammatical operation: confer, compare कार्य एत्वे सयमीकारमाहुः ।\| अभैष्म इत्येतस्य स्थाने अभयीष्मेति । R.Pr. XIV.16; confer, compare also विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P. I.4.2; (3) a grammatical opera- tion as for instance in the phrases द्विकार्ययोगे, त्रिकार्ययोगे et cetera, and others; confer, compare also गौणमुख्ययोर्मुख्ये कार्यसंप्रत्ययः Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 15;(4) object of a transitive verb: confer, compare शेषः कार्ये Śāk.

kāla	notion of time created by different contacts made by a thing with other things one after another. Time required for the utterance of a short vowel is taken as a unit of time which is called मात्रा or कालमात्रा, literally measurement of time; (2) degree of a vowel, the vowels being looked upon as possessed of three degrees ह्रस्व,दीर्घ,& प्लुत measured respectively by one, two and three mātrās; confer, compare ऊकालोSझ्रस्वदीर्घप्लुतः P.I.2.27; (3) time notion in general, expressed in connection with an activity in three ways past (भूत), present (वर्तमान), and future (भविष्यत्) to show which the terms भूता, वर्तमाना and भविष्यन्ती were used by ancient grammarians; cf the words पूर्वकाल, उत्तरकाल; also confer, compare पाणिन्युपज्ञमकालकं व्याकरणम् Kāś. on P. II. 4.21 ; (4) place of recital ( पाठदेश ) depending on the time of recital, confer, compare न परकालः पूर्वकाले पुनः (V.Pr.III. 3) a dictum similar to Pāṇini's पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P. VIII.2.1.

kāladuṣṭa	a word not sanctioned by rules of grammar. The word probably refers to the corruption taking place in connection with the use of a word on account of lapse of time: confer, compare कालदुष्टा अपशब्दाः Durgh. Vr. on II.2.6.

kāśakṛtsna(1)	an ancient grammarian and philosopher referred to in the Mahābhāṣya; (2) the work on grammar by Kāśakṛtsna; confer, compareपाणिनिना प्रोक्तं पाणिनीयम् । आपिशलम् । काशकृत्स्नम् । M.Bh. on I.1. Āhnika 1.

kāśikā(1)	name given to the reputed gloss (वृत्ति) on the Sūtras of Pāṇini written by the joint authors.Jayāditya and Vāmana in the 7th century A.D. Nothing definitely can be said as to which portion was written by Jayāditya and which by Vamana, or the whole work was jointly written. Some scholars believe that the work was called Kāśikā as it was written in the city of Kāśī and that the gloss on the first five Adhyāyas was written by Jayāditya and that on the last three by Vāmana. Although it is written in a scholarly way, the work forms an excellent help to beginners to understand the sense of the pithy Sūtra of Pāṇini. The work has not only deserved but obtained and maintained a very prominent position among students and scholars of Pāṇini's grammar in spite of other works like the Bhāṣāvṛtti, the Prakriyā Kaumudi, the Siddhānta Kaumudi and others written by equally learned scholars. Its wording is based almost on the Mahābhāṣya which it has followed, avoiding, of course, the scholarly disquisitions occurring here and there in the Mahābhāṣya. It appears that many commentary works were written on it, the wellknown among them being the Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā or Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. written by Jinendrabuddhi and the Padamañjari by Haradatta. For details see Vyākaraṇamahābhāṣya Vol.VII pp 286-87 published by the D. E. Society, Poona. ( 2 ) The name Kāśikā is sometimes found given to their commentaries on standard works of Sanskrit Grammar by scholars, as possibly they were written at Kāśī; as for instance, (a) Kāśikā on Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāra by Hari Dīkṣita, and ( b ) Kāśikā on Paribhāṣenduśekhara by Vaidyanātha Pāyaguṇḍe.

kāśyapa	name of an ancient grammarian quoted by Pāṇini, possibly an author of some Prātiśākhya work now lost.

kāṣṭhādi	a class of words headed by the word काष्ठ after which a word standing as a second member in a compound gets the grave accent for it,e. g. काष्ठाध्यापकः, परमाध्यापक et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VIII.1.67.

kuk	augment क् (1) added to ङ् at the end of a word before a sibilant letter; e.g प्राङ्क्शेते confer, compare P.VIII. 3.28; (2) added to the words वात and अतीसार before the affix इन्, confer, compare P.V.2.129; (3) added to words of the नड group before the taddhita affix. affix छ (ईय), exempli gratia, for example नडकीयम्, प्लक्षकीयम् confer, compare P.IV.2.91.

kuñjādi	a class of words headed by कुञ्ज to which the taddhita affix अायन (च्फञ्) is applied in the sense of गोत्र i. e. grandchildren etc e. g. कौञ्जायनाः confer, compare Kāś, on P.IV.1.9.

kuṭādi	a group of roots headed by the root कुट् of the VIth conjugation after which an affix which is neither ञित् nor णित् becomes ङित्,and as a result prevents the substitution of गुण or वृद्धि for the preceding vowel e. g. कुटिता, कुटितुम् । confer, compare गाङ्कुटादिभ्योञ्णिन्डित् I.2.1.

kuṭādipāda	name given by Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛttiand later grammarians to the second pāda of the first adhyāya of Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī., as the pāda begins with the Sūtra गाङ्कुटादिभ्यो ञ्णिन्डित् P.I.2.1.

kuṇap	taddhita affix. affix कुण added to words of पीलु group in the sense of 'ripened condition';exempli gratia, for exampleपीलुकुणः=पीलूनां पाकः; confer, compare P.V.2.24.

kuṇaravāḍava	name of an ancient granmarian who lived possibly after Pāṇini and before Patañjali and who is referred to in the Mahābhāṣya as giving an alternative forms for the standard form of certain words; confer, compare कुणरवाडवस्त्वाह नैषां शंकरा शंगरैषा M.Bh. on III.2.14; cf also कुणरवस्त्वाह नैष वहीनरः । कस्तर्हि । विहीनर एषः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VII.3.1.

kuppuśāstrin	a famous grammarian of the eighteenth century who wrote some works on grammar of which the परिभाषाभास्कर is an independent treatise on Paribhāṣās.

kumārīstanayugākṛti	a phrase used in the gloss on the कातन्त्र by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. to give along with the definition of र्विसर्जनीय or विसर्ग a graphic description of it as shown in script confer, compare Kāt, I.1.16 commentary

kurvat	a term found in the Brāhmaṇa works and used by ancient grammarians for the 'present tense'.

kuśala	name of a grammarian who wrote a commentary on the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa; see कातन्त्रपञ्जिक्रा.

kṛt	literally activity; a term used in the grammars of Pāṇini and others for affixes applied to roots to form verbal derivatives; confer, compare कृदतिङ् । धातोः ( ३ ।१।९१ ) इत्यधिकारे तिङ्कवर्जितः प्रत्ययः कृत् स्यात् । Kāś. on III.1.93, The kṛt affixes are given exhaustively by Pāṇini in Sūtras III.1.91 to III.4. I17. कृत् and तद्धित appear to be the ancient Pre-Pāṇinian terms used in the Nirukta and the Prātiśākhya works in the respective senses of root-born and noun-born words ( कृदन्त and तद्धितान्त according to Pāṇini's terminology), and not in the sense of mere affixes; confer, compare सन्त्यल्पप्रयोगाः कृतोप्यैकपदिकाः Nirukta of Yāska.I.14: अथापि भाषिकेभ्यो धातुभ्यो नैगमाः कृतो भाष्यन्ते Nirukta of Yāska.II.2; तिङ्कृत्तद्धितसमासा: शब्दमयम् V.Pr. I.27; also confer, compare V.Pr. VI.4. Patañjali and later grammarians have used the word कृत् in the sense of कृदन्त; confer, compare गतिकारकोपपदानां कृद्भिः सह समासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्पत्तेः Pari Śek.Pari.75. The kṛt affixes are given by Pāṇini in the senses of the different Kārakas अपादान, संप्रदान, करण, अाधकरण, कर्म and कर्तृ, stating in general terms that if no other sense is assigned to a kṛt affix it should be understood that कर्ता or the agent of the verbal activity is the sense; confer, compare कर्तरि कृत् । येष्वर्थनिर्देशो नास्ति तत्रेदमुपतिष्ठते Kāś. on III.4.67. The activity element possessed by the root lies generally dormant in the verbal derivative nouns; confer, compare कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति, क्रियावदपि । M.Bh.on V.4.19 and VI. 2.139

kṛta(१)	a term used by ancient grammarians in the sense of 'past tense';(2) effected, done. The word is mostly used in this sense in grammar.works;exempli gratia, for example किं तेन कृतं स्यात् ; नानुबन्धकृतमनेकात्त्वम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa.Pari. 6.

kṛtya	literally that which should be done; the word कृत्य is used as a tech nical term in grammar in the sense of kṛt affixes which possess the sense 'should be done'. Pāṇini has not defined the term कृत्य but he has introduced a topic ( अधिकार ) by the name कृत्य (P. III.1.95), and mentioned kṛt afixes therein which are to be called कृत्य right on upto the mention of the affix ण्वुल्. in P.III. 1.133; confer, compare कृत्याः प्राङ् ण्वुलः P. III. 1.95 The kṛtya affixes, commonly found in use, are तव्य, अनीय and य ( यत्, क्यप् and ण्यत् ).

kṛtrima	artificial; technical, as opposed to derivative. In grammar, the term कृत्रिम means 'technical sense', as contrasted with अकृत्रिम 'ordinary sense'; confer, compare कृत्रिमाकृत्रिमयोः कृत्रिमे कार्यसंप्रत्यय: Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 9.

kṛtrimākṛtrimaparibhāṣā	a term popularly used by grammarians for the परिभाषा or maxim that out of the two senses, the technical and the derived ones, the technical sense should be preferred; in rare cases, the other too, is preferred confer, compare Pari. Śek. Pari.9.

kṛdanta	the word ending with a kṛt affix; the term कृत् is found used in the sūtras of Pāṇini for कृदन्त; confer, compare कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च P. I.2.46. The term कृदन्त for root-nouns, or nouns derived from roots, is found in the Atharvaprātiśākhya (I.1.10, II.3.8, II1.2.4), the Mahābhāṣya and all the later works on grammar. See the word कृत्.

kṛdvṛtti	a short treatise by a grammarian named मोक्षेश्वर who lived in the fifteenth century. The work deals with verbal derivatives.

kṛṣṇakiṃkaraprakriyā	an alternative name for the well-known grammar-work क्रियाकौमुदी written by Rāmacandra Śeṣa. See प्रक्रियाकौमुदी.

kṛṣṇamitra	a scholar of grammar and nyāya of the 17th century A.D. who wrote many commentary works some of which are (l) a commentary called Ratnārṇava on the Siddhānta-Kaumudī, (2) a commentary named Kalpalata on Bhaṭṭoji's Prauḍhamanoramā, (3) a commentary named Bhāvadīpa on Bhaṭṭoji's Śabdakaustubha of Bhaṭṭojī Dīkṣita., (4) a commentary on Nagojibhaṭṭa's Laghumañjūṣā of Nāgeśa.by name Kuñcikā and (5) a commentary on Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa.

kṛṣṇaśāstrin( आरडे )	a famous grammarian and logician of the 18th century who wrote Ākhyātaviveka and Kārakavāda. See अारडे.

kṛṣṇaśeṣa	a famous grammarian of the Śeṣa family who wrote a commentary named the Gūḍhabhāvavivṛti on the Prakriyā Kaumudī of Rāmacandra Śeṣa.See कृष्णपण्डित

keśavadatta	writer of the commentary named दुर्धटोद्धाट on the grammar संक्षिप्तसार written by Goyicandra,

kaiyaṭa	name of the renowned commentator on the Mahābhāṣya, who lived in the 11th century. He was a resident of Kashmir and his father's name was Jaiyaṭa. The commentary on the Mahābhāṣya was named महाभाष्यप्रदीप by him, which is believed by later grammarians to have really acted as प्रदीप or light, as without it, the Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali would have remained unlit, that is unintelligible, at several places. Later grammarians attached to प्रदीप almost the same importance as they did to the Mahābhāṣya and the expression तदुक्तं भावकैयटयोः has been often used by commentators. Many commentary works were written on the Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.out of which Nageśa's Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.is the most popular. The word कैयट came to be used for the word महाभाष्यप्रदीप which was the work of Kaiyaṭa. For details see Vyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya published by the D. E. Society, Poona, Vol. VII. pp. 389-390.

koṇḍabhaṭṭa	a reputed grammarian who wrote an extensive explanatory gloss by name Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa on the Vaiyākaraṇasiddhāntakārikā of Bhaṭṭoji Dīkṣita. Another work Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāra. which is in a way an abridgment of the Bhūṣaṇa, was also written by him. Koṇḍabhaṭṭa lived in the beginning of the l7th century. He was the son of Raṅgojī and nephew of Bhaṭṭojī Dīkṣita. He was one of the few writers on the Arthavicāra in the Vyākaraṇaśāstra and his Bhūṣaṇasāra ranks next to the Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari. Besides the Bhūṣaṇa and Bhūṣaṇasāra, Koṇḍabhaṭṭa wrote two independent works viz. Vaiyākaraṇsiddhāntadīpika and Sphoṭavāda.

kauṇḍinya	an ancient grammarian referred to in the Taittirīya Prātiśākhya(Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V. 38) and Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī., (P.II.4.70).

kauhalīputra	an ancient grammarian referred to in the Taittirīya Prātiśākhya: confer, compare T.Pr. XVIII.2.

kta	kṛt affix त in various senses, called by the name निष्ठा in Pāṇini's grammar along with the affix क्तवतू confer, compare क्तक्तवतू निष्ठा P.I.1.26.The various senses in which क्त is prescribed can be noticed below : (1) the general sense of something done in the past time as past passive voice.participle e. g. कृत:, भुक्तम् et cetera, and others: cf P. III.2.102; (2) the sense of the beginning of an activity when it is used actively: e. g. प्रकृतः कटं देवदत्तः, confer, compare P.III.2.102 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3; (3) the sense of activity of the present tense applied to roots marked with a mute ञ् as also to roots in the sense of desire, knowledge and worship; exempli gratia, for exampleमिन्नः, क्ष्विण्ण:, धृष्ट: as also राज्ञां मतः, राज्ञामिष्टः, राज्ञां बुद्धः; confer, compare P.III.2.187, 88; (4) the sense of mere verbal activity (भाव) e. g. हसितम् , सहितम् , जल्पितम् , (used always in the neuter gender); confer, compare P.III.3. 114: (5) the sense of benediction when the word ending in क्त is used as a technical term, exempli gratia, for example देवदत्तः in the sense of देवा एनं देयासुः. The kṛt affix क्तिन् is also used similarly exempli gratia, for example सातिः भूतिः मन्ति:; confer, compare Kāś. on P. III.3.174.

krama(1)	serial order or succession as contrasted with यौगपद्य or simultaneity. The difference between क्रम and यौगपद्य is given by भर्तृहरि in the line क्रमे विभिद्यते रूपं यौगपद्ये न भिद्यते Vāk. Pad. II. 470. In order to form a word by the application of several rules of grammar, a particular order is generally followed in accordance with the general principle laid down in the Paribhāṣā पूर्वपरनित्यान्तरङ्गापवादानामुत्तरोत्तरं बलीयः, as also according to what is stated in the sūtras असिद्धवदत्राभात्, पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् et cetera, and others (2) succession, or being placed after, specifically with reference to indeclinables like एव, च et cetera, and others which are placed after a noun with which they are connectedition When an indecinable is not so connected, it is called भिन्नक्रम; confer, compare परिपन्थं च तिष्ठति (P.IV. 4.36), चकारो भिन्नक्रमः प्रत्ययार्थं समुच्चिनोति, Kāś. on P. IV. 4.36; also ईडजनोर्ध्वे च । चशब्दो भिन्नक्रमः

kramadīśvara	author of a grammar named संक्षिप्तसार who lived at the end of the 13th century.

kramapāṭha	recital of the Vedic Saṁhitā by means of separate groups of two words, repeating each word except the first of the Vedic verseline; see क्रम a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The various rules and exceptions are given in detail in Paṭalas ten and eleven of the Ṛk Prātiśākhya. The Vedic Saṁhitā or Saṁhitāpāṭha is supposed to be the original one and the Padapāṭha prepared later on, with a view to preserving the Vedic text without any change or modification of a letter, or accent; confer, compare न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः । पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III. 1.109, VI. 1.207 and VIII. 2.16, where Patañjali clearly says that grammar-rules are not to follow the Padapāṭha, but, the writer of the Padapāṭha is to follow the rules already laid down. The Jaṭāpāṭha, the Ghanapāṭha and the other recitals are later developments of the Padapāṭha as they are not mentioned in the Prātiśākhya works.

kriyākalāpa	a grammatical work on the conjugation of roots written by Vijayānanda.

kriyāguptaka	a grammar work quoted by वर्धमान in his गणरत्नमहोदधि.

kriyātipatti	literally over-extension or excess of action; the word is, however, used in grammar in the sense of non-happening of an expected action especially when . it forms a condition of the conditional mood ( लृङ् ); confer, compare कुताश्चिद्वैगुण्यादनभिनिर्वृत्तिः क्रियायाः क्रियातिपत्तिः Kāś. on P. III. 3.139; confer, compare also नान्तरेण साधनं क्रियायाः प्रवृत्तिरस्तीति साधनातिपत्तिश्चेत्कियातिपत्तिरपि भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.3.139.

kroṣṭrīya	an ancient school of grammarians who are believed to have written rules or Vārttikas on some rules of Pāṇini to modify them; the क्रोष्ट्रीय school is quoted in the Mahābhāṣya; confer, compare परिभाषान्तरमिति च मत्वा क्रोष्ट्रीयाः पठन्ति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.3.

klībatva	a word used in the sense of 'neuter gender' by grammarians later than पतञ्जलि and the Vārttikakāra; confer, compare समभागे क्लीबलिङ्गमर्धमेकदेशिना समस्यते Bhāṣā Vr. on P.II.2.2; पक्षे हि क्लीबत्वम् Kaiyaṭa's Pr. on II.1. 51; समाहारद्वन्द्वे क्लीबत्वप्रसङ्गात् Durgh. Vr. on P.II.4.l7.

kṣapaṇaka	a Jain grammarian quoted in the well-known stanza धन्वन्तरिः क्षपणकोमरसिंहशङ्कु which enumerates the seven gems of the court of Vikramāditya, on the strength of which some scholars believe that he was a famous grammarian of the first century B.C.

kṣamāmāṇikya	a Jain grammarian who wrote a small grammar work known as Aniṭkārikāvivaraṇa.

kṣitīśacandra(चक्रवर्तिन्)	or K. C. CHATTERJI a scholar of Sanskrit grammar who has written a work on technical terms in Sanskrit, who has edited several grammar works and is at present editing the Cāndra Vyākaraṇa and conducting the Sanskrit journal named Mañjūṣa at Calcutta.

kṣīrasvāmin	a grammarian of Kashmir of the 8th century who wrote the famous commentary क्षीरतरङ्गिणी on the Amarakośa and a commentary on the Nirukta of Yāska.

g	third letter of the guttural class of consonants, possessed of the properties घोष, संवृत, नाद and अल्पप्राण; some grammarians look upon the word क्ङित् (P.I.1.5) as made up of क् , ग् and ङ् and say that the Guna and Vṛddhi substitutes do not take place in the vowels इ, उ, ऋ, and लृ if an affix or so, marked by the mute letter ग् follows.

gaṅgādhara[GANGADHARA SHASTRI TELANG] (l)	a stalwart grammarian and Sanskrit scholar of repute who was a pupil of Bālasarasvatī of Vārāṇaśī and prepared in the last century a host of Sanskrit scholars in Banaras among whom a special mention could be made of Dr. Thebaut, Dr. Venis and Dr. Gaṅgānātha Jhā. He was given by Government of India the titles Mahāmahopādhyāya and C. I.E. His surname was Mānavallī but he was often known as गङाधरशास्त्री तेलङ्ग. For details, see Mahābhāṣya, D.E. Society Ed.Poona p.p.33, 34; (2)an old scholar of Vyākarana who is believed to have written a commentary on Vikṛtavallī of Vyādi; (3) a comparatively modern scholar who is said to have written a commentary named Induprakāśa on the Śabdenduśekhara; (4) author of the Vyākaraṇadīpaprabhā, a short commentary on the Vyākaraṇa work of Cidrūpāśramin. See चिद्रूपाश्रमिन्.

gajakumbhākṛti	a graphic description of the Jihvāmūlīya letter as found in script, given by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti.; confer, compare गजकुम्भाकृतिर्वर्ण उपध्मानीयसंज्ञो भवति Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti.'s commentary on Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.I.1. 18. see ( उपधानीय ).

gaṇa	a class of words, as found in the sūtras of Pāṇini by the mention of the first word followed by the word इति; exempli gratia, for example स्वरादि, सर्वादि, ऊर्यादि, भ्वादि, अदादि, गर्गादि et cetera, and others The ten gaṇas or classes of roots given by Pāṇini in his dhātupātha are given the name Daśagaṇī by later grammarians.

gaṇapāṭha	the mention individually of the several words forming a class or gaṇa, named after the first word said to have been written by Pāṇini himself as a supplementary work to his great grammar called Aṣṭaka or Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī., the Sikṣā,the Dhātupātha and the Lingānuśāsana being the other ones. Other grammarians such as शाकटायन, अापिशलि and others have their own gaṇapāthās. The gaṇapāthā is traditionally ascribed to Pāṇini; the issue is questioned, however, by modern scholars. The text of the gaṇapāṭha is metrically arranged by some scholars. The most scholarly and authoritative treatise on gaṇapāṭha is the Gaṇaratnamahodadhī of Vardhamāna.

gaṇaratnamahodadhi	a grammar work, consisting of a metrical enumeration of the words in the Gaṇapāṭha of Pāṇini, written by Vardhamāna, a Jain grammarian of the 12th century, who is believed to have been one of the six gems at the court of Lakṣmaṇasena of Bengal. Vardhamāna has written a commentary also, on his Gaṇaratnamahodadhi. Besides Vardhamāna's commentary, there are other commentaries written by गोवर्धन and गङ्गाधर.

gaṇasūtra	a statement of the type of a Sūtra in the Gaṇapāṭha of Pāṇini where mention of a word or words in the Gaṇapāṭha is made along with certain conditions; e. g. पूर्वपुरावरo, स्वमज्ञातिधनाख्यायाम् , in the सर्वादिगण, and क्त्वातोसुन्कसुनः, तसिलादय: प्राक्पाशपः in the स्वरादिगण. Some of the gaṇasūtras are found incorporated in the Sūtrapāṭha itself Many later grammarians have appended their own gaṇapāṭha to their Sūtrapāṭha.

gatinighāta	the grave ( अनुदात्त ) accent of the गति word before a verb with an acute ( उदात्त ) accent; confer, compare तिङिचोदात्तवति P. VIII.1.71.

gamaka	capable of conveying the sense; intelligible; the word is often used in grammatical works; confer, compare सापेक्षत्वेपि गमकत्वात्समास:; confer, compare also अवश्यं कस्याचिन्नञ्समासस्य असमर्थसमासस्य गमकस्य साधुत्वं वक्तव्यम् । असूर्यपश्यानि मुखानि Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 1. 1.

garīyas	involving a special effort.The word is frequently used by the Vārttikakāra and old grammarians in connection with something, which involves greater effort and longer expression and, hence, not commendable in rules of the Shastra works where brevity is the soul of 'wit'; confer, compare पदगौरवाद्योगवेिभागो गरीयान् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 121. The word गुरु is also sometimes used in a similar sense; confer, compare तद् गुरु भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1 Āhnika of the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya. l Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2.

garīyastva	greater effort or prolixity of expression which is looked upon as a fault in connection with grammar-works of the sūtra type where every care is taken to make the expression as brief as possible; confer, compare अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणाः Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 122. The word गौरव is often used for गरीयस्त्व.

gārgya	an ancient reputed grammarian and possibly a writer of a Nirukta work, whose views, especially in.connection with accents are given in the Pratisakhya works, the Nirukta and Panini's Astadhyayi. Although belonging to the Nirukta school, he upheld the view of the Vaiyakaranas that all words cannot be derived, but only some of them: cf Nirukta of Yāska.I. 12.3. cf, also Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 167, Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3.5, III. 14.22: Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 13; XIII. 12: P. VII. 3.99, VIII. 3.20, VIII. 4.69.

gālava	an ancient grammarian and niruktakara quoted by Panini; confer, compare P. VI 3.60, VII. I.74, VII. 3,99, VIII. 4.67, confer, compare also Nirukta of Yāska.IV. 3.

gāva	a technical term for the term अाङ्ग (pertaining to the base in the grammar of Panini); confer, compare वार्णात् गावं बलीयः Kat. Pari. 72.

gīrvāṇapadamañjarī	a grammatical work written by वरदराज, pupil of Bhattoji Diksita in the 17th century who wrote many works on grammar such as मध्यकौमुदी, लघुकौमुदी et cetera, and others

guṇa(1)	degree of a vowel; vocalic degree, the second out of the three degrees of a vowel viz. primary degree, guna degree and vrddhi degree exempli gratia, for example इ, ए and ऐ or उ, ओ and औ. अ is given as a guna of अ; but regarding अ also,three degrees can be stated अ, अ and आ. In the Pratisakhya and Nirukta ए is called गुण or even गुणागम but no definiti6n is given ; confer, compare गुणागमादेतनभावि चेतन R.Pr.XI.6;शेवम् इति विभीषितगुणः। शेवमित्यपि भवति Nir.X.17: (2) the properties of phonetic elements or letters such as श्वास,नाद et cetera, and others: confer, compareṚgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) Ch.XIII : (3) secondary, subordinate;confer, compare शेषः,अङ्गं, गुणः इति समानार्थाः Durgācārya's commentary on the Nirukta.on Nirukta of Yāska.I.12: (4) properties residing in a substance just as whiteness, et cetera, and others in a garment which are different from the substance ( द्रव्य ). The word गुण is explained by quotations from ancient grammarians in the Maha bhasya as सत्वे निविशतेsपैति पृथग्जातिषु दृश्यते । अाघेयश्चाक्रियाजश्च सोSसत्त्वप्रकृतिर्गुणः ॥ अपर आह । उपैत्यन्यज्जहात्यन्यद् दृष्टो द्रव्यान्तरेष्वपि। वाचकः सर्वलिङ्गानां द्रव्यादन्यो गुणः स्मृतः ; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.1.44;cf also शब्दस्पर्शरूपरसगन्धा गुणास्ततोन्यद् द्रव्यम् ,M.Bh.on V.1.119 (5) properties of letters like उदात्तत्व, अनुदात्तत्व, स्वरितत्व, ह्र्स्वत्व, दीर्घत्व, प्लुतत्व, अानुनासिक्य et cetera, and others; confer, compare भेदकत्वाद् गुणस्य । आनुनासिक्यं नाम गुणः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.1.. Vart, 13: (6) determinant cf भवति बहुव्रीहौ तद्गुणसंविज्ञानमपि Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.27; (7) technical term in Panini's grarnmar standing for the vowels अ, ए and ओ, confer, compare अदेङ्गुणः P.I.1.2. For the various shades of the meaning of the word गुण, see Mahabhasya on V.1.119. " गुणशब्दोयं बह्वर्थः । अस्त्येव समेष्ववयवेषु वर्तते ।...... चर्चागुणांश्च ।

guṇakarman	a term used by the ancient grammarians for the गौणकर्मन् or indirect object of a verb. having two objects.The word is found quoted in the Mahabhaya; confer, compare कथिते लादयश्चेत्स्युः षष्टीं कुर्यात्तदा गुणे । गुणे गुणकर्मणि । confer, compare also गुणकर्मणि लादिविधि: सपरे M.Bh. on I. 4.51.

guṇībhūta	subordinate, literally which has become subordinated, which has become submerged, and therefore has formed an integral part of another; e. g. an augment ( अागम ) with respect to the word to which it has been added;confer, compareयदागमास्तद्गुणी भूतास्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.20 Vart. 5; Par. Sek. Pari. 11.

gūḍhabhāvavṛtti	a commentary on Ramacandra's Prakriya Kaumudi by Krsnasesa of the famous Sesa family of grammarians. The date of this Krsnasesa is the middle of the sixteenth century. For details about Krsnasesa and the Sesa family see introduction to Prakriyakaumudi B. S. S. No. 78.

goṇikāputra	a grammarian whose wiew in connection with the correctness of the expressions नेताश्वस्य स्त्रुघ्नं and नेताश्वस्य स्त्रुघ्नस्य is given by the Mahabhasyakara in the words 'both expressions are justified' ( उभयथा गेणिकापुत्रः ). Nagesa has observed that गेोणिकापुत्र is nobody else but the Mahabhasyakara himself; confer, compare गोणिकापुत्रः भाष्यकार इत्याहुः । NageSa's Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on Mahabhasyapradipa on P. I. 4.5I.

gonardīya	literally inhabitant of Gonarda which was the name of a district. in the province of Oudh in the days of the Mahabhasyakara according to some scholars. Others believe that Gonarda was the name of the district named Gonda at present The expression गोनर्दीय अाह occurs four times in the Mahabhasya where it refers to a scholar of grammar in Patafijali's time; cf M.Bh. on I. 1.21 ; I. 1.29; III. I.92; VII. 2.101. As Kaiyata paraphrases the words गेानर्दीयस्त्वाह as भाष्यकारस्त्वाह, scholars say that गेीनर्दीय was the name taken by the Mahabhasyakara himself who was a resident of Gonarda. Hari Diksita, however, holds that गोनर्दीय was the term used for the author of the . Varttikas; confer, compare Brhacchabdaratna.

gopāla( देव )	known more by the nickname of मन्नुदेव or मन्तुदेव who lived in the eighteenth century and wrote several commentary works on well-known grammatical treatises such as the Vaiyakaranabhusanasara, Laghusabdendusekhara, Paribhasendusekhara et cetera, and others He is believed to have written a treatise on Ganasutras also; (2) a grammarian different from the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. मन्नुदेव who has written an explanatory work on the Pratisakhyas;.(3) a scholar of grammar, different from the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. who is believed to have written a gloss named Visamarthadipika on the Sarasvata Vyakarana at the end of the sixteenth century.

gopīcandra	known also by the name गेयींचन्द्र who .has written several commentary works on the grammatical treatises of the Samksipatasara or Jaumāra school of Vyakarana founded by Kramdisvara and Jumaranandin in the 12th century, the well-known among them being the संक्षिप्तसाटीका, संक्षितसारपरिभात्रासूत्रटीका and तद्धितपरिशिष्टटीका. He is believed to have lived in the thirteenth century A. D.

govardhana	a grammarian who has written a work on Katantra Grammar called कातन्त्रकौमुदी and also a commentary on the Ganaratnamahodadhi of Vardhamana. A gloss on the Unadisutras is also assigned to Govardhana who is likely to be the same as a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

gauṇamukhyanyāya	the maxim that the primary sense occurs to the mind earlier than the secondary sense, and hence words used in the primary sense should be always taken for grammatical operations in preference to words in a secondary sense. See the word गेोण.

gaurava	greatness of effort; prolixity as opposed to लाघव; confer, compare पर्यायशब्दानां लाघवगौरवचर्चा नाद्रियते Par.Sek.Par.115; confer, compare also पदगौरवाद्योगविभागो गरीयान् Par. Sek. Pari. 121.

ṅīp	feminine. affix ई which is anudatta (grave) added (a) to words ending in the vowel ऋ or the consonant न् (confer, compareP.IV.1.5), (b) to words ending with affixes marked with mute उ,ऋ or लृ; confer, compareP.IV.1.6 (c) to words ending with affixes marked with mute ट् as also ending with the affixes ढ, अण्, अञ्, द्वयसच् दघ्नच्,मात्रच्, तयप्, ठक्, ठञ्, कञ् and क्वरप् (confer, compareP.IV.1.15) and to certain other words under certain conditions; confer, compare P. IV. 1.16-24.

ṅyāppād	a popular name given by grammarians to the first pada of the fourth adhyaya of Panini's Astadyayi as the pada begins with the rule ङ्याप्प्रातिपदिकात् IV. I.I.

cakora	a grammarian who .wrote a commentary on the 'Sabdalingarthacandrika of Sujanapandita. चक्कनशर्मा a grammarian who is said to have written a work named Dhatusamgraha.

cakrapāṇi( शेष )	a grammarian of the Sesa family of the latter half of the 17th century who held views against Bhattoji Diksita and wrote प्रौढमनोरमाखण्डन, कारकतत्व and कारकविचार.

cakrin	a grammarian who has written a small disquisition on the correctness of the form जाग्रहीता. See जाग्रहीतेतिवाद.

caṅgadāsa	a grammarian who has written a work on the topic of the five vrttis. The work is named चङ्गवृति.

caṅgudāsa	or चाड्गुदास a scholar of grammar who has written an independent work on Sanskrit Vyakaana called वैयाकरणजीवातु. The treatise is also known as चाङ्गुसूत्र or चाङ्गु-व्याकरण.

caṇḍapaṇḍita	writer of a Prakrta grammar.He was known also as चन्द्र and hence identified by some with Candragomin.

caturtha	a term used by ancient grammarians for the fourth consonants which are sonant aspirates, termed झष् by Panini; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) IV. 2. Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 18, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.1 54. Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 176.

vaturthī	a term used by ancient grammarians for the dative case; confer, compare उतो त्वस्मै तन्वं विसस्रे इति चतुर्थ्याम्; Nirukta of Yāska.I. 9.३.

candra	a famous Buddhist Sanskrit grammarian whose grammar existing in the Tibetan script, is now available in the Devanagar script. The work consists of six chapters or Adhyayas in which no technical terms or sanjnas like टि, घु are found. There is no section on Vedic Grammar and accents. The work is based on Panini's grammar and is believed to have been written by Candra or Candragomin in the 5th centnry A. D. Bhartrhari in his Vakyapadiya refers to him; confer, compare स नीतो बहुशाखत्वं चन्द्राचार्यादिभिः पुनः Vakyapadiya II. 489. A summary of the work is found in the Agnipurana, ch. 248-258.

candrakīrti	a Jain grammarian of the twelfth century A.D. who has written a commentary named Subodhini on the Sarasvata Vyakaraha.

candrācārya	a grammarian mentioned by Bhartrhari in his Vakyapadiya as one who took a leading part in restoring the traditional explanation of Panini's Vyakarana which, by the spread of rival easy treatises on grammar, had become almost lost: confer, compare यः पतञ्जलिशिष्येभ्यो भ्रष्टो ब्याकरणागमः । काले स दाक्षिणात्येषु ग्रन्थमात्रे व्यवस्थित: ॥ पर्वतादागमं लब्ध्वा भाष्यबीजानुसारिभि: । स नीतो बहुशाखत्वं चन्द्राचार्यादिभिः पुनः ॥ Vakyapadiya II. 488-489. See चन्द्र and चन्द्रगोमिन्.

carkarīta	a term used by the ancient grammarians in connection with a secondary root in the sense of frequency; the term यङ्लुगन्त is used by comparatively modern grammarians in the same sense. The चर्करीत roots are treated as roots of the adadi class or second conjugation and hence the general Vikarana अ ( शप् ) is omitted after them.The word is based on the 3rd person. sing form चर्करीति from .the root कृ in the sense of frequency; exempli gratia, for example चर्करीति, चर्कर्ति, बोभवीति बोभोति; confer, compare चर्करीतं च a gana-sutra in the gana named ’adadi’ given by Panini in connection with अदिप्रभृतिभ्य; शपः Pāṇini. II.4.72; confer, compare also चर्करीतमिति यङ्लुकः प्राचां संज्ञा Bhasa Vr. on P. II. 4.72, The word चेक्रीयित is similarly used for the frequentative when the sign of the frequentative viz. य ( यङ् ) is not elidedition See चेक्रीयित.

cavarga	the group of consonants of the palatal class,.wiz.च् , छ् , ज् , झ् , and ञ्. The word च is used in the same sense in the Pratisakhya works.See the word च.

cākravarmaṇa	an ancient grammarian whose view is quoted by Panini in his Sutra ई 3 चाक्रवर्मणस्य P.VI.1.130.

cāṅgudāsa	the same as चङ्गु or चाङ्गु or चङ्गुदास,a grammarian who composed a compendium on grammar called वैयाकरणजीवातु and also a commentary on it.

cāṅgusūtra	a treatise on the grammar Written by चाडगुदास in the Sutra form,which was named वैयाकरणजीवातु by him.

cāndra	name of a treatise on grammar written by Candra, who is believed to have been the same as Candragomin. The Grammar is based upon that of Panini, but it does not treat Vedic forms and accents. See the word चन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. For details see pp. 375376 Patanjali Mahabhasya. Vol. VII, D.E. Society's Edition.

cārāyaṇa	an ancient grammarian referred to by Patanjali in the Mahabhasya as a scholar who had a line of pupils named after him; confer, compare कम्बलचारायणीयाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I. 1.73

cāritārthya	fulfilment of the object or the Purpose. The word is used in connection with a rule of grammar. See चरितार्थ.

cikīrṣita	desiderative formation; a term used by ancient grammarians for the term सन्नन्त of Panini on the analogy of the terms भवन्ती, वर्तमाना et cetera, and others confer, compare अा इत्याकांर उपसर्ग; पुरस्तात्, चिकीर्षितज उत्तरः, अाशु शोचयतीति आशुशुक्षणिः Nirukta of Yāska.VI. 1.

cu	the group of palatal consonants viz. च्,छ्,ज्,झ् and ञ्; cf चुट् P. I. 3. 7, चोः कुः VIII. 2. 30, कुहोश्चु: VII. 4 62.

curādi	a class or group of roots headed by the root चुर्, familiarly known as the tenth conjugation.

cullibhaṭṭi	a grammarian who is supposed to have written a gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the Sutras of Panini; confer, compare तत्र च वृतिः पाणिनिप्रणीतानां सूत्राणां विवरणं चुल्लिभट्टिनल्लूरादि( V. 1. निर्लूरादि-) विरचितम् , Nyasa, on the benedictory verse of Kasika: वृत्तौ भाष्ये तथा घातुनामपारायणादिषु at the very beginning.

cokkanātha	a southern grammarian of the seventeenth century who has composed in 430 stanzas a short list of the important roots with their meaning. The work is called धातुरत्नावली.

chpāda	a popular name given by grammarians to the first pada of the fifth Adhyaya of Painis Astadhyayi as the pada begins with the rule प्राक् क्रीताच्छः P. V. 1.1.

chucchukabhaṭṭa	a grammarian who wrote a short gloss called कातन्त्रलघुवृत्ति on the Katantrasutras.

j	third consonant of the palatal class of consonants, possessed of the properties नाद, घोष, अल्पप्राण and कण्ठसंवृत्तकारित्व. ज् at the beginning of affixes is mute in Panini's grammar.

jagaddhara	a poet and grammarian of Kasmira of the fourteenth century who wrote a commentary named बालबोधिनी on the Katantra Sutras.

jayakṛṣṇa	a famous grammarian of the Mauni family who lived in Varanasi in the seventeenth century. He wrote विभक्त्यर्थनिर्णय, स्फोटचन्द्रिका, a commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi called सुबोधिनी and a commentary on the Madhya Kaumudi named विलास. He wrote a commentary on the Laghukaumudi also.

jayadeva	a grammarian, ( of course different from well-known poet), to whom a small treatise on grammar by name इष्टतन्त्रव्याकरण is attributedition

jayāditya	one of the famous joint authors ( जयादित्य and वामन ) of the well-known gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the Sutras of Panini, popularly called काशिकावृत्ति. As the काशिकावृत्ति is mentioned by It-sing, who has also mentioned Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya, as a grammer treatise Written some 40 years before his visit, the time of काशिकावृत्ति is fixed as the middle of the 7th century A.D. Some scholars believe that जयादित्य was the same as जयापीड a king of Kasmira and बामन was his minister. For details, see pp. 386388 of the Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII published by the D.E. Society, Poona. See काशिका.

jayānanda	a Jain grammarian of the fourteenth century who wrote a commentary named उद्धार on the लिङ्गानुशासन of Hemacandra

jātābhīyāsiddhatva	invalidity of a grammatical operation prescribed by a rule in the अाभीय section (P. VI. 4.22 upto the end of the fourth pada ) which, although it has taken place, is to be looked upon as not having taken place when any other operation in the same section is to take effect. See आभीयासिद्व.

jāti	genus; class;universal;the notion of generality which is present in the several individual objects of the same kindeclinable The biggest or widest notion of the universal or genus is सत्ता which, according to the grammarians, exists in every object or substance, and hence, it is the denotation or denoted sense of every substantive or Pratipadika, although on many an occasion vyakti or an individual object is required for daily affairs and is actually referred to in ordinary talks. In the Mahabhasya a learned discussion is held regarding whether जाति is the denotation or व्यक्ति is the denotation. The word जाति is defined in the Mahabhasya as follows:आकृतिग्रहणा जातिर्लिङ्गानां च न सर्वभाक् । सकृदाख्यातनिर्गाह्या गोत्रं च चरणैः सह ॥ अपर आह । ग्रादुभीवविनाशाभ्यां सत्त्वस्य युगपद्गुणैः । असर्वलिङ्गां बह्वर्थो तां जातिं कवयो विदुः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV. 1.63. For details see Bhartphari's Vakyapadiya.

jātya	name of a variety of the Svarita or circumflex accent; the original svarita accent as contrasted with the svarita for the grave which follows upon an acute as prescribed by P. in VIII. 4.67, and which is found in the words इन्द्रः, होता et cetera, and others The jatya svarita is noticed in the words स्वः, क्व, न्यक्, कन्या et cetera, and others; .confer, compare उदात्तपूर्वं स्वरितमनुदात्तं पदेक्षरम्। अतोन्यत् स्वरितं स्वारं जात्यमाचक्षते पदे॥ जात्या स्वभावेनैव उदात्तानुदात्तसंगतिं विना जातो जात्यः । तं जात्यमाचक्षतै व्याडिप्रभृयः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) and commentary III. 4.

jinendrabuddhi	a reputed Buddhist Grammarian of the eighth century who wrote a scholarly commentary on the Kasikavrtti ofJayaditya and Vamana. The commentary is called न्यास or काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका and the writer is referred to as न्यासकार in many later grammar works Some scholars identify him with पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् the writer of the जैनेन्द्रव्याकरण, but this is not possible as पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् was a Jain Grammarian who flourished much earlier.

jumaranandin	a grammarian of the fourteenth century A. D. who ' revised and rewrote the.grammar संक्षिप्तसार and the commentary named रसवती on it, which were composed by क्रमदीश्वर in the thirteenth century. The work of जुमरनन्दिन् is known as जौमारव्याकरण.

jainendravyākaraṇa	name of a grammar work written by Pujyapada Devanandin, also called Siddhanandin, in the fifth century A.D. The grammar is based on the Astadhyay of Panini,the section on Vedic accent and the rules of Panini explaining Vedic forms being,of course, neglectedition The grammar is called Jainendra Vyakarana or Jainendra Sabdanusasana. The work is available in two versions, one consisting of 3000 sutras and the other of 3700 sutras. it has got many commentaries, of which the Mahavrtti written by Abhayanandin is the principal one. For details see Jainendra Vyakarana, introduction published by the Bharatiya Jnanapitha Varadasi.

jaumārasaṃskaraṇa	the revised version by Jumuranandin of the original grammar treatise in verse called संक्षिप्तसार written by KramadiSvara, The Jaumarasamskarana is the samc as.jaumara Vyakarana, which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

jñāpaka	literallyindirect or implicit revealer; a word very commonly used in the sense of an indicatory statement. The Sutras, especially those of Pinini, are very laconic and it is believed that not a single word in the Sutras is devoid of purpose. If it is claimed that a particular word is without any purpose, the object of it being achieved in some other way, the commentators always try to assign some purpose or the other for the use of the word in the Sutra. Such a word or words or sometimes even the whole Sutra is called ज्ञापक or indicator of a particular thing. The Paribhasas or rules of interpretation are mostly derived by indication(ज्ञापकसिद्ध) from a word or words in a Sutra which apparently appear to be व्यर्थ or without purpose, and which are shown as सार्थक after the particular indication ( ज्ञापन ) is drawn from them. The ज्ञापक is shown to be constituted of four parts, वैयर्थ्य, ज्ञापन, स्वस्मिञ्चारितार्थ्य and अन्यत्रफल. For the instances of Jñāpakas, see Paribhāșenduśekhara. Purușottamadeva in his Jñāpakasamuccaya has drawn numerous conclusions of the type of ज्ञापन from the wording of Pāņini Sūtras. The word ज्ञापक and ज्ञापन are used many times as synonyms although ज्ञापन sometimes refers to the conclusions drawn from a wording which is ज्ञापक or indicator. For instances of ज्ञापक, confer, compareM.Bh. on Māheśvara Sūtras 1, 3, 5, P. Ι.1. 3, 11, 18, 23, 51 et cetera, and others The word ऊठ् in the rule वाह ऊठ् is a well known ज्ञापक of the अन्तरङ्गपरिभाषा. The earliest use of the word ज्ञापक in the sense given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., is found in the Paribhāșāsūcana of Vyādi. The Paribhāșā works on other systems of grammar such as the Kātantra; the Jainendra and others have drawn similar Jñāpakas from the wording of the Sūtras in their systemanuscript. Sometimes a Jñāpaka is not regularly constituted of the four parts given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.;it is a mere indicator and is called बोधक instead of ज्ञापक्र.

jñāpakasamuccaya	a work giving a collection of about 400 Jñāpakas or indicatory wordings found in the Sūtras of Pānini and the conclusions drawn from them. It was written by Purușottamadeva, a Buddhist scholar of Pāņini's grammar in the twelfth century A. D., who was probably the same as the famous great Vaiyākaraņa patronized by Lakșmaņasena.See पुरुषेत्तमदेव.

ṭhit	marked with the mute letter ठ्. There is no affix or word marked with mute ठ् (at the end) in Panini's grammar, but to avoid certain technical difficulties, the Mahabhasyakara has proposed mute ठ् instead of 'ट् in the' case of the affix इट् of the first person. singular. perf Atm. and ऊठ् prescribed as Samprasarana substitute by P. VI. 4.132 e: g. प्रष्ठौहः, प्रष्ठौहा; confer, compare M.Bh. on III.4.79 and VI.4.19.

ṇatvapāda	a popular name given by grammarians to the fourth pada confer, compare Panini's Astadhyayi, as the pada begins with the rule रषाभ्यां नो णः समानपदे and mainly gives rules about णत्व i. e. the substitution of the consonant ण् for न्.

ṇilopa	elision of the affix णि (णिच् or णिङ् see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. ) before an ardhadhtuka affix without the augrnent इ ( इट् ) prefixed to it; confer, compare णेरनिटि P. VI. 4.51, and VI.4.52, 53, 54 also.

t	the first consonant of the dental class of consonants which has got the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, विवृतकण्ठत्व and अल्पप्राणत्व. When used as a mute letter by Panini, त् signifies the Svarita accent of the vowel of that affix or so, which is marked with it: e. g. कार्यम्, हार्यम्, पयस्यम् confer, compare P. VI.1.185. When appied to a vowel at its end, त् signifies the vowel of that grade only, possessed by such of its varieties which require the same time for their utterance as the vowel marked with त् , e. g. अात् stands for अा with any of the three accents as also pure or nasalised; अात् does not include अं or अ 3 confer, compare तपरस्तत्कालस्य P. I. 1. 70. The use of the indicatory mute त् for the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. purpose is seen also in the Pratis akhya works; confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 114 Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 234.

tatkāla	requiring the same time for utterance as for example one matra for short vowels, two for long ones and three for protracted ones, although those vowels are nasalised or pure, or acute, grave or circumflex. See the word तपर.

tattvavimarśinī	name of a commentary on the Kasikavrtti by a grammarian named Nandikeśvarakārikā.kārikābhāṣya by Upamanyu.in the beginning of the nineteenth century A. D.

tatpuruṣa	name of an important kind of compound words similar to the compound word तत्पुरुष id est, that is ( तस्य पुरुषः ), and hence chosen as the name of such compounds by ancient grammarians before Panini. Panini has not defined the term with a view to including such compounds as would be covered by the definition. He has mentioned the term तत्पुरुष in II.1.22 as Adhikara and on its strength directed that all compounds mentioned or prescribed thereafter upto Sutra II.2.22 be called तत्पुरुष. No definite number of the sub-divisions of तत्पुरुष is given;but from the nature of compounds included in the तत्पुरुष-अधिकार, the sub-divisions विभक्तितत्पुरुष confer, compare P.II.1.24 to 48, समानाधिकरणतत्पुरुष confer, compare P. II.1.49 to 72 (called by the name कर्मधारय; acc.to P.I. 2. 42), संख्यातत्पुरुष (called द्विगु by P.II.1.52), अवयत्रतत्पुरुष or एकदेशितत्पुरुषं confer, compare P.II.2.1-3, ब्यधिकरणतत्पुरुष confer, compare P. II 2.5, नञ्तत्पुरुष confer, compare P.II.2.6, उपपदतत्पुरुष confer, compare P. II.2.19, प्रादितत्पुरुष confer, compare P.II.2 18 and णमुल्तत्पुरुष confer, compareP.II.2.20 are found mentioned in the commentary literature on standard classical works. Besides these, a peculiar tatpurusa compound mentioned by'Panini in II.1.72, is popularly called मयूरव्यंसकादिसमास. Panini has defined only two out of these varieties viz. द्विगु as संख्यापूर्वो द्विगुः P.II. 1.23, and कर्मधारय as तत्पुरुषः समानाधिकरणः कर्मधारयः P. I.2.42. The Mahabhasyakara has described तत्पुरुष as उत्तरपदार्थप्रधानस्तत्पुरुषः: confer, compare M.Bh. on II.1.6, II.1.20, II.1.49, et cetera, and others, and as a consequence it follows that the gender of the tatpurusa compound word is that of the last member of the compound; confer, compare परवल्लिङ द्वन्द्वतत्पुरुषयोः P. II.4. 26; cf also तत्पुरुषश्चापि कः परवल्लिङं प्रयोजयति । यः पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानः एकदेशिसमासः अर्धपिप्पलीति । यो ह्युत्तरपदार्थप्रधानो दैवकृतं तस्य परवल्लिङ्गम्, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.4.26. Sometimes, the compound gets a gender different from that of the last word; confer, compare P.II.4.19-31, The tatpurusa compound is optional as generally all compounds are, depending as they do upon the desire of the speaker. Some tatpurusa compounds such as the प्रादितत्पुरुष or उपपदतत्पुरुष are called नित्य and hence their constitutent words, with the case affixes applied to them, are not noticed separately; confer, compare P.II.2.18,19, In some cases अ as a compound-ending ( समासान्त ) is added: exempli gratia, for example राजघुरा, नान्दीपुरम् ; confer, compare P. V.4.74; in some cases अच् ( अ ) is added: confer, compare P.V-4 75 o 87: while in some other cases टच् ( अ ) is added, the mute letter ट् signifying the addition of ङीप् ( ई) in the feminine gender; confer, compareP.V.4. 91-1 12. For details See p.p. 270-273 Mahabhasya Vol.VII published by the D. E. Society, Poona.

tadantavidhi	a peculiar feature in the interpretation of the rules of Panini, laid down by the author of the Sutras himself by virtue of which an adjectival word, qualifying its principal word, does not denote itself, but something ending with it also; confer, compare येन विधिस्तदन्तस्य P.I.1.72.This feature is principally noticed in the case of general words or adhikaras which are put in a particular rule, but which Occur in a large number of subsequent rules; for instance, the word प्रातिपदिकात्, put in P.IV.1.1, is valid in every rule upto the end of chapter V and the words अतः, उतः, यञः et cetera, and others mean अदन्ताद् , उदन्तात् , यञन्तात् et cetera, and others Similarly the words धातोः (P.III.1.91) and अङ्गस्य (P.VI. 4.1 ) occurring in a number of subsequent rules have the adjectival words to them, which are mentioned in subsequent rules, denoting not only those words,but words ending with them. In a large number of cases this feature of तदन्तविधि is not desirable, as it, goes against arriving at the desired forms, and exceptions deduced from Panini's rules are laid down by the Varttikakara and later grammarians; confer, compare Par. Sek. Pari. 16,23, 31 : also Mahabhasya on P.I.1.72.

taddhita	a term of the ancient prePaninian grammarians used by Panini just like सर्वनामन् or अव्यय without giving any specific definition of it. The term occurs in the Nirukta of Yaska and the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya ; confer, compare अथ तद्वितसमासेषु एकपर्वसु चानेकपर्वसु पूर्वे पूर्वमपरमपरं प्रविभज्य निर्ब्रूयात् । द्ण्डय्ः पुरुषः । दण्डमर्हतीति वा, दण्डेन संपद्यते इति वा Nirukta of Yāska.II.2; also confer, compare तिङ्कृत्तद्धितचतुथ्यसमासाः इाब्दमयम् Vaj Prati.I. 27. It is to be noted that the word तद्वित is used by the ancient grammarians in the sense of a word derived from a substantive ( प्रातिपादक ) by the application of suffixes like अ, यत् et cetera, and others, and not in the sense of words derived from roots by affixes like अन, ति et cetera, and others which were termed नामकरण, as possibly contrasted with the word ताद्धित used by Yaska in II. 5. Panini has used the word तद्धित not for words, but for the suffixes which are added to form such words at all places (e. g. in I. 1.38, IV.1.17, 76, VI.1.61 et cetera, and others). in fact, he has begun the enumeration of taddhita affixes with the rule तद्धिता: (P.IV.1. 76) by putting the term तद्धित for affixes such as ति, ष्यङ्, अण् et cetera, and others which are mentioned thereafter. In his rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च and in the Varttika समासकृत्तद्धिताव्यय(I.4.1Vart. 41) which are similar to V.Pr.1. 27 quoted a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the word तद्धित appears to be actually used for words derived from nouns by secondary affixes, along with the word कृत् which also means words derived from roots, although commentators have explained there the terms कृत् and तद्धित for कृदन्त and तद्धितान्त. The term तद्वित is evidently echoed in the Sutra तस्मै हितम् which, although it is not the first Sutra there were possibly long lists of secondary nouns with the senses of secondary suffixes, and तद्धित was perhaps,the first sense given there. The number of taddhita suffixes mentioned by Panini is quite a large one; there are in fact 1110 rules given in the taddhita section covering almost two Adhyayas viz. from P. IV. 1.76 to the end of the fifth Adhyaya. The main sub-divisions of taddhita affixes mentioned by commentators are, Apatyadyarthaka (IV. 1.92 to 178), Raktadyarthaka (IV.2.1 to 91), Saisika {IV.2. 92 to IV.3.133), Pragdivyatiya (IV. 3 134 to 168), Pragvahatiya (IV.4.1 to IV.4.74), Pragghitiya (IV.4.75 to IV.4.109), Arhiya (V.1.1 to 71),Thanadhikarastha (V. 1.72 to V. 1.1.114), Bhavakarmarthaka (V. 1.115 to V.1.136), Pancamika (V. 2.1 to V. 2.93), Matvarthiya (V. 2.94 to V. 2. 140), Vibhaktisamjaaka (V. 3.1 to V. 3.26) and Svarthika (V. 3.27 to V. 4.160). The samasanta affixes (V.4.68 to V.4.160) can be included in the Svarthika affixes.

tadbhāvita	produced or brought into being by some grammatical operation such as the vowel आ in दाक्षि, कारक्र, अकार्षीत् et cetera, and others by the substitution of वृद्धि, as contrasted with the original अा in ग्राम, विघान शाला, माला et cetera, and others; confer, compare किं पुनरिदं तद्भावितग्रहणं वृद्धिरित्येवं ये आकरैकारौकारा भाव्यन्ते तेषां ग्रहणमाहोस्विदादैज्मात्रस्य M.Bh. on I. 1.1.

tantrapradīpa	name of the learned commentary_written by मैत्रेयरक्षित, a famous Buddhist grammarian of the 12th century A. D. on the काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका ( न्यास ) of Jinendrabuddhi। The work is available at Present only in a manuscript form, and that too in fragments. Many later scholars have copiously quoted from this work. The name of the work viz. तन्त्रप्रदीप is rarely mentioned; but the name of the author is mentioned as रक्षित, मैत्रेय or even मैत्रेयरक्षित. Ther are two commentaries on the तन्त्रप्रदीप named उद्द्योतनप्रभा and आलोक,

tācchabdya(1)	use of a word for that word (of which the sense has been conveyed); the expression तादर्थ्या त्ताच्छब्द्यम् is often used by grammarians just like a Paribhasa; confer, compare अस्ति तादर्थ्यात्ताच्छब्द्यम् । बहुव्रीह्यर्थानि पदानि बहुव्रीहिरिति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.29; similarly तृतीयासमास;for तृतीयार्थानि पदानि M.Bh. on P.I.1.30 or समासार्थे शास्त्रं समासः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.2.43; (2) use of a word for that word of which there is the vicinity; confer, compare अथवा साहचर्यात् ताच्छब्द्यं भविष्यति। कालसहचरितो वर्णः। वर्णॊपि काल एव; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.2.27 where the letter उ is taken in the sense of time required for its utterance, the reason being that sound and time go together; confer, compare also M.Bh. on P.I.2.70, IV.3.48, V.2.79; (3) use of a word for that which resides there; confer, compare तात्स्थ्यात्ताच्छब्द्यं भविष्यति M.Bh. on V.4.50 Vart. 3. At all the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. places, the use of one word for another is by Laksana.

tāthābhāvya	name given to the grave (अनुदात्त) vowel which is अवग्रह id est, that is which occurs at the end of the first member of a compound and which is placed between two acute vowels id est, that is is preceded by and followed by an acute vowel; exempli gratia, for example तनूSनप्त्रे, तनूSनपत्: confer, compare उदाद्यन्तो न्यवग्रहस्ताथाभाव्यः । V.Pr.I.120. The tathabhavya vowel is recited as a kampa ( कम्प ) ; confer, compare तथा चोक्तमौज्जिहायनकैर्माध्यन्दिनमतानुसारिभिः'अवग्रहो यदा नीच उच्चयॊर्मध्यतः क्वचित् । ताथाभाव्यो भवेत्कम्पस्तनूनप्त्रे निदर्शनम्'. Some Vedic scholars hold the view that the ताथाभाव्य vowel is not a grave ( अनुदात्त ) vowel, but it is a kind of स्वरित or circumflex vowel. Strictly according to Panini "an anudatta following upon an udatta becomes Svarita": confer, compare P.VIII.4.66, V.Pr. IV. 1.138: cf also R.Pr.III. 16.

tārānātha	called तर्कवाचस्पति; a Bengali modern Sanskrit scholar and grammarian of the nineteenth century who has written a commentary called Sarala on the Siddhanta Kaumudi. He has edited many important Sanskrit works consisting of many kosas.

tās	conjugational sign or Vikarana (तासि) added to a root in the first future before the personal endings which become accented grave (अनुदात्त); confer, compare P.VI.1.186; it has the augment इ prefixed, if the root, to which it is added, is सेट्, confer, compare P. VI. 4. 62.

ti(1)	personal ending तिप् of the 3rd person. singular.; (2) common term for the krt affixes क्तिन् and क्तिच् as also for the unadi affix ति; see क्तिन् and क्तिच्; (3) feminine. affix ति added to the word युवन्. e. g. युवतिः confer, compare P. IV. 1.77; (4) taddhita affix. affix ति as found in the words पङ्क्ति and विंशति confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.1.59; (5) taddhita affix. affix added to the word पक्ष in the sense of 'a root,' and to the words कम् and शम् in the sense of possession (मत्वर्थे ); exempli gratia, for example पक्षतिः, कन्तिः, शान्तिः, confer, compare Kas, on P. V.2.25, 138; (6) a technical term for the term गति in Panini's grammar, confer, compare उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे; गतिश्च P. 1.4.59, 60. The term ति for गति is used in the Jainendra Vyakarana.

tiṅanta(1)	a word ending in तिङ्; a Verb; (2) a popular name given to the section which deals with verbs in books on grammar as contrasted with the term सुबन्त which is used for the section dealing with nouns.

tiṅartha	senses possessed by the personal endings of verbs, viz. कारक ( कर्ता or कर्म ) संख्या and काल. For details see Vaiyakaranabhusanasara. तिङ्निघात the grave accent for the whole word (सर्वेनिघात्) generally possessed by a verbal form when it is preceded by a word form which is not a verb; confer, compare तिङतिङ: P. VIII. 1.28.

timaṇṇā	a southern grammarian who wrote a short treatise on the pratyaharas like अण्, इण् et cetera, and others in the grammar of Panini.

tulyādhikaraṇa	having got the same substratum; denoting ultimately the same object; expressed in the same case the same as samanadhikarana in the grammar of Panini, confer, compare Kat. II.5.5.

tairovirāma	a kind of स्वरित, or a vowel with a circumflex accent which follows an acute-accented vowel characterized by avagraha i. e. coming at the end of the first member of a compound; exempli gratia, for example गेापताविति गॊSपतौ यज्ञपतिमिति यज्ञSपतिं. Here the vowel अ of प following upon the avagraha is called तैरोविरामस्वरित; confer, compare उदवग्रहस्तैरोविराम: Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 118,

tairovyañjana	a kind of svarita or circumflex-accented vowel which follows an acute-accented vowel, with the intervention of a consonant between the acute accented vowel and the circumflex vowel which (vowel) originally was grave. e. g. इडे, रन्ते, हव्ये, काम्ये; here the vowel ए is तैरोव्यञ्जनस्वरित; confer, compare स्वरो व्यञ्जनयुतस्तैरोव्यञ्जनः, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 117.

tolappadīkṣita	a southern grammarian who has written a gloss called प्रकाश on the Siddhāntakaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita.

taulvalyādi	a class of words headed by the word तौल्वलि, the taddhita affix in the sense of युवन् ( grandchild ) placed after which is not elided by P. II. 4. 60; exempli gratia, for example तौल्वलिः पिता, तौल्वलायनः पुत्रः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II. 4.61.

trā	taddhita affix. affix त्रा in the sense of something donated, as also to the words देव, मनुष्य, पुरुष, पुरु and मर्त्य ending in the accusative or the locative case; e. g. व्राह्मणत्रा करोति, देवत्रा वसतिः confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V.4.55,56. ’There is avagraha before the taddhita affix. affix त्रा. देवत्रेति देवSत्रा्; confer, compare V.Pr. V.9.

trika	literally triad; a term used in the Mahabhasya in connection with the Vibhakti affixes id est, that is case endings and personal endings which are in groups of three; confer, compare त्रिकं पुनर्विभक्तिसंज्ञम् M.Bh. on P.I.1,38: confer, compare also कस्यचिदेव त्रिकस्य प्रथमसंज्ञा स्यात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). om P.I.4.101 ; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.2.23, V.1.52, V.1.58.

tripathagā	name of a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara written by Raghavendracarya Gajendragadkar, a resident of Satara and a pupil of Nilakanthasastri Thatte. He lived in the second half of the eighteenth and first half of the nineteenth century and wrote comentaries on important grammar works.

tripādī	term usually used in connection with the last three Padas (ch. VIII. 2, VIII. 3 and VIII. 4) of Panini’s Ashtadhyayi, the rules in which are not valid by convention to rules in the first seven chapters and a quarter, as also a later rule in which (the Tripadi) is not valid to an earlier one; confer, compare पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P. VIII.2.1; (2) name of a critical treatise on Panini's grammar ("The Tripadi") written by Dr. H. E. Buiskool recently.

trimuni(1)	the famous three ancient grammarians Panini (the author of the Sutras), Katyayana (the author of the Varttikas), and Patanjali (the author of the Mahabhasya;) (2) the grammar of Panini, called so, being the contribution of the reputed triad of Grammarians.

trilaॊcana	a scholar of grammar who has written a small work named अव्ययशब्दवृत्ति on the uses of indeclinables.

tresvarya(1)	use of the three accents acute, grave and circumflex at the time of the recital of the Veda; त्रयः स्वरा एव त्रैस्वर्यम्; confer, compare चातुर्वर्ण्यादीनां स्वार्थॆ उपसंख्यानम् । त्रैलोक्यम् , त्रैस्यर्यम् Kas, on P. V. 1. 124. confer, compare also यद्येवं त्रैस्वर्ये न प्रकल्पते तत्र को दोषः। त्रैस्वर्येणाधीमहॆ इत्येतन्नोपपद्यते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.31.

tryambaka	a grammarian of the nineteenth century, who resided at Wai in Satara District and wrote a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara which is named त्र्यम्बकी after the writer.

tvan	taddhita affix. affix त्व before which there is observed the caesura or avagraha in the recital of the Padapatha. e: g. देवत्वमिति देवsत्वम् । confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V. 9.

thā(1)	taddhita affix. affix था in the sense of question or reason ( हेतु ) added to the pronoun किम् in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for example कथा देवा आसन् ; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.3.26; (2) taddhita affix. affix था (थाल् according to Panini) which gets caesura or avagraha after प्रत्न, पूर्व, विश्व, इम and ऋतु; exempli gratia, for example प्रत्नथेतिं प्रत्नSथा, पूर्वथेति पूर्वऽथा et cetera, and others: confer, compare Vij. Pr.V.12: (3) taddhita affix. affix थाल् in the sense of इव added to the words प्रत्न, पूर्व, विश्व and इम in Vedic Literature, exempli gratia, for example तं प्रत्नथा पूर्वथा विश्वथेमथा; cf Kas, on P. V.3.111: (4) taddhita affix. affix थाल् in the sense of mannar ( प्रक्रार) added to किन् , pronouns excepting those headed by द्वि, and the word बहु; exempli gratia, for example सर्वथा, confer, compare P V.3.23.

d(1)	the consonant द्, the vowel अ being added for facility of utterance or use; (2) a technical term used in the Jainendra Vyakarana for the term आत्मनेपद in the grammar of Panini.

dntya	produced at the teeth, dental; formed at the teeth by the tip of the tongue; exempli gratia, for example the letters लृ ल् ,स् and तवर्ग; confer, compare लृलसिता दन्ते V.Pr.I.69. According to Panini's grammar लॄ(long) does not exist. According to Taittirya Prtisakhya र् is partly dental and partly lingual; cf T.Pr.II.41, while व् is partly dental and partly labial; confer, compare T.Pr. II.43; confer, compare दन्त्या जिह्वाग्रकरणाः V. Pr.I. 76; confer, compare लुग्वा दुहदिहलिहगुहामात्मनेपदे दन्त्ये P. VII. 3.73.

dayāratna	a.Jain scholar who has written a grammar treatise on the Sarasvata Grammar called सारस्वतपरिभाषा.

darpaṇa	name of a commentary on Kondabhatta's Vaiyakaranabhusanasara, written by a grammarian named Harivallabha.

daśaka	a name given to the treatise on grammar written by व्याघ्रपाद which consisted of 10 chapters; confer, compare दशकं वैयाघ्रपदीयम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P V. 1.58. The word also means students reading the work दशक; confer, compare दशका वैयाघ्रपदीया: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.2.65.

daśagaṇī(1)	a section of grammatical treatises dealing with the ten conjugations of roots. e.g the first section of the second part ( उत्तरार्ध ) of the Siddhanta Kaumudi; (2) name of the dhatupatha of Panini which gives ten classes of roots; confer, compare भूवादयो दशगणीपरिपठिता गृह्यन्ते Nyasa on I.3.1.

daśadhuṣkaraṇa	the ten classes or conjugations of roots; धुष् was a term for धातु (root) in some ancient grammar works.

dākṣāyaṇa	name, by which व्याडि, the author of the grammar work संग्रह is referred to. The word दाक्षायण indicates that व्याडि was a descendant of दक्ष, and, as Panini is called दाक्षीपुत्र, critics say that Panini and Vyadi were relatives; confer, compare शोभना खलु दाक्षायणस्य दाक्षायणेन वा संग्रहस्य कृतिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II.3.66.

dānavijaya	a Jain grammarian, who wrote a small grammar treatise named शब्दभूषण.

daśagaṇī(1)	a section of grammatical treatises dealing with the ten conjugations of roots. e.g the first section of the second part ( उत्तरार्ध ) of the Siddhanta Kaumudi; (2) name of the dhatupatha of Panini which gives ten classes of roots; confer, compare भूवादयो दशगणीपरिपठिता गृह्यन्ते Nyasa on I.3.1.

daśadhuṣkaraṇa	the ten classes or conjugations of roots; धुष् was a term for धातु (root) in some ancient grammar works.

dākṣāyaṇa	name, by which व्याडि, the author of the grammar work संग्रह is referred to. The word दाक्षायण indicates that व्याडि was a descendant of दक्ष, and, as Panini is called दाक्षीपुत्र, critics say that Panini and Vyadi were relatives; confer, compare शोभना खलु दाक्षायणस्य दाक्षायणेन वा संग्रहस्य कृतिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II.3.66.

dānavijaya	a Jain grammarian, who wrote a small grammar treatise named शब्दभूषण.

dī	a technical term in the Jainendra Vyakarana for दीर्ध (long vowel) in Panini's grammar.

dīrghavidhi	a grammatical operation where a short vowel is turned into a long one: a rule of grammar prescribing the lengthening of a short vowel.

du	a technical term in the Jainendra Vyakarana for the term वृद्ध which is used in Panini's grammar and which is defined by Panini in the rule वृद्धिर्यस्याचामादिस्तद् वृद्धम् P. I. 1.73.

durgasiṃha	the famous commentator of the Katantra sutras, whose Vrtti on the sutras is the most popular one. It is called , कातन्त्रसूत्रवृत्ति or कातन्तवृत्ति or दौर्गसिंहीवृत्ति , also. A work on Paribhasas named परिभाषावृति, in which Paribhasas are explained and established as based on the Katantra Vyakarana sutras, is attributed to Durgasimha. It is doubtful whether this commentator Durgasimha is the same as Durgacarya, the famous commentator of Yaska's Nirukta. There is a legend that Durgasimha was the brother of Vikramaditya, the founder of the Vikrama Era. Besides the gloss on the Katantra sutras, some grammar works such as a gloss on the unadi sutras, a gloss ( वृत्ति ) on Kalapa-Vyakarana Sutras, a commentary on Karakas named षट्कारकरत्न, Namalinganusasana and Paribhasavrtti are ascribed to Durgasimha. Some scholars believe that the term अमरसिंह was only a title given to Durgasimha for his profound scholarship, and it was Durgasimha who was the author of the well-known work Amarakosa.

durgādāsa	a grammarian who wrote (a) a gloss on Bopadeva's Mugdhabodha, (b) a gloss named घातुदीपिका on Kavikalpadruma and (c) Sabdarnavakos

durgottama	a grammarian who wrote a work on genders called लिङ्गानुशासन and also a commentary on it.

durghaṭavṛtti	name of a grammar work explaining words which are difficult to derive according to rules of Panini. The work is written in the style of a running commentary on select sutras of Panini, devoted mainly to explain difficult formations. The author of it, Saranadeva, was an eastern grammarian who, as is evident from the number of quotations in his work, was a great scholar of the 12th or the 13th century.

durghaṭavṛttisaṃskaraṇa	a grammar work on the formation of difficult words attributed to शर्वरक्षित or सर्वरक्षित.

durdhaṭoddhāra	name.of a commentary by Kesavadatta-Sarman on the grammar work named संक्षिप्तसार.

durvalācārya	a grammarian who wrote a treatise on grammar दुर्वलीयव्याकरण, named after him. Besides this treatise, he has written commentaries on Nagesa's Laghumanjusa and Paribhasendusekhara.

dūṣakaradodbheda	name of a commentary, on the Paribhasendusekhara of Nagesa, believed to have been written by Gopalacārya Karhadkar, a grammarian of the 19th century and attributed to Bhimacarya. This commentary, which was written to criticize the commentary written by Visnusastri Bhat, was again criticized in reply by Visnusastri Bhat in his Ciccandrika ( चिच्चन्द्रिका ). See विष्णुशास्त्री भट.

dṛṣṭa	seen in use in Vedic Literature, or Classical Literature, or in the talk of cultured people; said in connection with words which a grammarian tries to explain; confer, compare दृष्टानुविधिश्छन्दसि भवति' Vyadi Pari. Patha 68.

dṛṣṭānuvidhi	taking place of an operation, or application of a rule of grammar in accordance with the words seen in use. See दृष्ट.

devanandin	called also पूज्यपाद or पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् believed to have lived in the fifth century A. D. and written the treatise on grammar, of course based om Panini Sutras, which is known as जैनेन्द्र-व्याकरण or जैनेन्द्रशब्दानुशासन. The writer of this grammar is possibly mentioned as जैनेन्द्र in the usually guoted verse of Bopadeva :इन्द्रश्चन्द्रः काशकृत्स्नापिशली शाकटायनः पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्र जयन्त्यष्टादेिशाब्दिकाः. देवनन्दिन् was a great Jain saint and scholar who wrote many works on Jain Agamas of which सर्वार्थसिद्धि, the commentary on the तत्त्वार्थाधिगमसूत्र, is well-known.

devaśarman	a grammarian who has written a disquisition on the philosophy of Vyakarana in verse, and added a commentary of his own on it which he has named as समन्वयप्रदीपसंकेत.

devanandin	a Jain grammarian of the eighth century who is believed to have written a grammar work, called सिद्धान्तसारस्वत-शब्दानुशासन. It is likely that देवनन्दिन् is the same as देवानन्दि-पूज्यपाद and the grammar work is the same as जैनेन्द्रशब्दानुशासन for which see देवनन्दिन् .

devīdīna	modern grammarian of the 19th century who has written a gloss on the Asādhyāyi of Panini.

devendra	a Jain grammarian of the 13th century who has written a commentary named लघुन्यास on the शब्दानुशासन of Hemacandra. He has written many works on the Jain Agamas, of which a commentary on the Uttaradhyanasutra can be specially mentionedition He is called देवेन्द्रसूरि also.

deśya(1)	taddhita affix. affix in the sense of almost similar; see देशीयर् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; (2) (words) current in popular use or language, although not sanctioned by rules of grammar; confer, compare देश्याः सूत्रनिबन्धाः क्रियन्ते M.Bh. on P. V. 3.55: confer, compare देश्या देष्टव्याः साधुत्वेन प्रतिपाद्या:, Kaiyata on V. 3.55; probably Kaiyata had a difficulty in explaining the word देश्य in the old way meaning ' current in use', as many words called bad words, introduced from other languages were current at his time which he was reluctant to term देश्य.

daiva	name of a system of grammar or a work on grammar the peculiarity of which is the omission of the एकशेष topic; confer, compare अनेकशेषं दैवं स्यात्

devendra	name given to a work on grammar, presumably the same as जैनेद्र-शब्दानुशासन written by पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन्. See जेनेन्द्रव्याकरण.

ghua	technical term in the Jainendra Vyakarana for the term उत्तरपद (the latter or the second member of-a compound word ) which is used in Panini's grammar.

dyotaka	indicative, suggestive; not directly capable of expressing the sense by denotation; the nipatas and upasargas are said to be 'dyotaka' and not 'vacaka' by standard grammarians headed by the Varttikakara; confer, compare निपातस्यानर्थकस्यापि प्रातिपदिकत्वम् P.I.2.45 Varttika 12; confer, compare Kaiyata also on the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; cf also निपाता द्योतकाः केचित्पृथगर्थाभिधायिनः Vakyapadiya II.194;, गतिवाचकत्वमपि तस्य ( स्थाधातोः ) व्यवस्थाप्यते, उपसर्गस्तु तद्योतक एव commentary on Vakyapadiya II. 190; confer, compare पश्चाच्छ्रोतुर्बोधाय द्योतकोपसर्गसंबन्ध: Par. Sek. on Pari. 50; cf also इह स्वरादयो वाचकाः चादयो द्योतका इति भेदः Bhasa Vr. om P.I.1.37.The Karmapravacaniyas are definitely laid down as dyotaka, confer, compare क्रियाया द्योतको नायं न संबन्धस्य वाचकः । नापि क्रियापदाक्षेपीं संबन्धस्य तु भेदकः Vakyapadiya II.206; the case affixes are said to be any way, 'vacaka' or 'dyotaka'; confer, compare वाचिका द्योतिका वा स्युर्द्वित्त्वादीनां विभक्तयः Vakyapadiya II. 165.

dravya	substance, as opposed to गुण property and क्रिया action which exist on dravya. The word सत्त्व is used by Yaska, Panini and other grammarians in a very general sense as something in completed formation or existence as opposed to 'bhava' or kriya or verbal activity, and the word द्रव्य is used by old grammarians as Synonymous with सत्त्व; confer, compare चादयोSसत्वे। चादयो निपातसंज्ञा भवन्ति न चेत्सत्वे वर्तन्ते, confer, compare Kas on P. I. 4.57; confer, compare S.K. also on P. I.4.57. (2)The word द्रव्य is also found used in the sense of an individual object, as opposed to the genus or generic notion ( अाकृति ); confer, compare द्रव्याभिधानं व्याडिः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2. 64. Vart. 45.(3)The word द्रव्य is found used in the sense of Sadhana or means in Tait. Prati. confer, compare तत्र शब्दद्रव्याण्युदाहरिष्यामः । शब्दरूपाणि साधनानि वर्णयिष्यामः Tai, Pr. XXII. 8.

dravyapadārthika	a grammarian who maintains that 'dravya' or 'individual object' is the sense of words; confer, compare न ह्याकृतिपदार्थिकस्य द्रव्ये न पदार्थो, द्रव्यपदार्थिकस्य वाकृतिर्न पदार्थः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.2.64 Vart. 53. See द्रव्य.

drutabodha	name of a treatise on grammar written for beginners by Bharatasena or Bharatamalla of Bengal in the sixteemth century.

dviḥ	doubled; the term is used in connection with reduplication in the Katantra and Haima grammars confer, compare Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. IV.1.1, Kat.III 8. 10.

kāryayoga	simultaneous occurrence of two grammatical operations resulting into a conflict and creating a doubt as to which of the two should take place first; confer, compareद्विकार्ययोगो हि विप्रतिषेधः M.Bh. on P.I.1.3 Vart. 6; I.1.12; et cetera, and others The term विप्रतिषेध occurring in the rule विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P. I.4.2 is evidently defined in this way by the word द्विकार्ययोग in the Mahabhsya.

dvikhaṇḍa	a compound expression or word separated into two by avagraha in the Padapatha; the word is misstated as दुखण्ड by some vedic reciters.

dvigupāda	a Popular name given by grammarians to the fourth quarter of the second Adhyaya of Panini's Astadhyayi which begins with the sutra द्विगुरेकवचनम् II. 4.1.

dvitīya	the second consonant in the five groups of consonants, surd aspirate, confer, compare T.Pr. I. 11: V. Pr.I. . 54, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 15; it is called द्वितीयतस्पर्श also.

dvis	double reduplicated; the word is frequently used in connection with doubling of consonants or words in the PratiSakhya Literature as also in the Katantra, Sakatayana and Haima grammars confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 1, XV. 5, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 101, R, T. 264; confer, compare also Kat. III. 8.10, Sak. IV. 1.43; Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. IV. 1.1.

dvaipad	group of two words; an expression consisting of two words; cf प्र वोचं नः सुमना द्वैपदाश्च Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VIII. 2. 10; X. 3; XI. 37 et cetera, and others

dvyac	a word possessed of two vowels in it; dissyllabic words; the word is frequently used in Panini's Astadhyayi and Patanjali's Mahabhasya, Kasika Vrtti and other works on Panini's grammar.

dharaṇīdhara	a grammarian of the sixteenth century at the court of Udayasimha who wrote a commentary on the sutras of Panini which was named वैयाकरणसर्वस्व as also a commentary on the Siksa of Panini.

dhamekīrti	a Jain scholar called by the name कीर्ति also, who was the author of धातुप्रत्ययपञ्जिक्रा and रूपावतार a well-known treatise on roots; confer, compare बोपदेवमहाग्राहग्रस्तो वामनदिग्गजः । कीर्तेरेव प्रसङ्गेन माधवेन समुद्धृतः । He is believed to have been the first grammarian who arranged the sutras of Panini according to the subject matter.

dhātu	a root; the basic word of a verbal form,defined by the Bhasyakara as क्रियावचनो धातुः or even as भाववचने धातु:, a word denoting a verbal activity. Panini has not defined the term as such, but he has given a long list of roots under ten groups, named dasagani, which includes about 2200 roots which can be called primary roots as contrasted with secondary roots. The secondary roots can be divided into two main groups ( l ) roots derived from roots ( धातुजधातवः ) and (2) roots derived from nouns ( नामधातवः ). The roots derived from roots can further be classified into three main subdivisions : (a) causative roots or णिजन्त, (b) desiderative roots or सन्नन्त, (c) intensive roots or यङन्त and यङ्लुगन्त: while roots derived from nouns or denominative roots can further be divided into क्यजन्त, काम्यजन्त, क्यङन्त, क्यषन्त, णिङन्त, क्विबन्त and the miscellaneous ones ( प्रकीर्ण ) as derived from nouns like कण्डू( कण्ड्वादि ) by the application of the affix यक् or from nouns like सत्य,वेद, पाश, मुण्ड,मिश्र, et cetera, and others by the application of the affix णिच्. Besides these, there are a few roots formed by the application of the affix अाय and ईय (ईयङ्). All these roots can further be classified into Parasmaipadin or Parasmaibhasa, Atmanepadin or Atmanebhasa and Ubhayapadin. Roots possessed of a mute grave ( अनुदात्त ) vowel or of the mute consonant ङ् added to the root in the Dhatupatha or ending in the affixes यड्, क्यङ् et cetera, and others as also roots in the passive voice are termed Atmanepadin: while roots ending with the affix णिच् as also roots possessed of a mute circumflex vowel or a mute consonant ञ़़् applied to them are termed Ubhayapadin. All the rest are termed Parasmaipadin. There are some other mute letters or syllables applied by Panini to the roots in his Dhatupatha for specific purposes; exempli gratia, for example ए at the end to signify prohibition of vrddhi to the penultimate अ in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अकखीत् confer, compare P. VII.2.5; इर् to signify the optional substitution of अ or अङ् for the affix च्लि of the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अभिदत्, अभैत्सीत् ; confer, compare P.III. 1.57; उ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) before क्त्वा exempli gratia, for example शमित्वा, शान्त्वा; confer, compare P.VII. 2. 56; ऊ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) exempli gratia, for example गोप्ता, गेीपिता, confer, compare P.VII.2.44; अा to signify the prohibition of the augment इट् in the case of the past passive voice. participle. exempli gratia, for example क्ष्विण्णः, स्विन्नः, confer, compare P. VII.2.16; इ to signify the addition of a nasal after the last vowel e. g. निन्दति from निदि, confer, compare P. VII.1.58: ऋ to signify the prohibition of ह्रस्व to the penultimate long vowel before णिच्, e. g. अशशासत्, confer, compare P.VII. 4.2;लृ to signify the substitution of अङ् for च्लि in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अगमत् confer, compare P. III.1.55: ओ to signify the substitution of न् for त् of the past passive voice.participle. exempli gratia, for example लग्नः, अापीनः, सूनः, दून: et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VIII. 2.45. Besides these,the mute syllables ञि, टु and डु are prefixed for specific purposes; confer, compare P. III.2.187, III.3.89 and III. 3.88. The term धातु is a sufficiently old one which is taken by Panini from ancient grammarians and which is found used in the Nirukta and the Pratisakhya works, signifying the 'elemental (radical)base' for nouns which are all derivable from roots according to the writers of the Nirukta works and the grammarian Siktaayana; confer, compare नाम च धातुजमाह निरुक्ते व्याकरणे शकटस्य च तोकम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.3.1. Some scholars have divided roots into six categories; confer, compare तत्र धातवः षोढा (a) परिपठिताः भूवादयः, (b) अपरिपठता अान्दोलयत्यादयः, (c) परिपठितापरिपठिताः ( सूत्रपठिताः ) स्कुस्कम्भस्तम्भेत्यादयः, (d) प्रत्ययधातवः सनाद्यन्ताः, (e) नामघातवः कण्ड्वादयः, (f) प्रत्ययनामधातवः होडगल्भक्ली. बप्रभृतयः; cf Sringara Prak. I. For details see M.Bh. on P.I.3.I as also pp 255, 256 Vol. VII Vyakarana-Mahabhasya published by the D.E. Society, Poona.

dhātukalpalatikā	a short treatise on the roots of the different conjugations written by a grammarian named Dhananjaya.

ghātukārikāvalī	a grammatical work in verse written by Varadarja, the pupil of Bhattoji Diksita who lived in the 17th century, Besides Karikvali, Varadarja wrote लघुकौमुदी and मध्यकौमुदी also.

dhātupāṭha(1)	name given in general to the several collections of roots given generally with their meanings by grammarians belonging to the various different schools of grammar. These collections are given as necessary appendices named खिल to their grammars by the well known grammarians of Sanskrit such as Panini, Sakatayana, and others; (2) a small treatise on roots written by Bhimasena of the 14th century.

dhātupārāyaṇa	a grammatical treatise dealing with roots written as a supplementary work by Jumaranandin to his grammar work called Rasavati,which itself was a thoroughly revised and enlarged edition of the रसवती a commentary written by Kramadisvara on his own grammar named संक्षिप्तसार.Jumaranandin is believed to have been a Jain writer who lived in the fifteenth century A.D.

ghātuprakāśa	a work dealing with roots Written as a supplementary work by Balarama-Pancanana to his own grammar named PrabodhaPrakasa.

dhātupratyayapañjikā	a work dealing with verbal forms written by Dharmakirti, a Jain grammarian of the eighth century.

dhātupradīpa	a work dealing with verbal forms written by Maitreya Raksita, a Buddhist writer and a famous grammarian belonging to the eastern part of India who lived in the middle of the twelfth century. He is believed to have written many scholarly works in connection with Panini's grammar out of which the Tantrapradipa is the most important one. The work Dhatupradipa is quoted by Saranadeva, who was a contemporary of Maitreya Raksita, in his Durghatavrtti on P. II. 4. 52.

ghātumañjarī	called also धातुसंग्रहृ attributed to a grammarian namcd Kasinatha.

dhātumālā	a work on roots in verseform attributed to a grammarian named Isvarakanta.

dhāturatnāvalī	a short list of the important roots from the Dhatuptha of Panini, given in verse by चोक्कनाथ a grammarian of the 17th century.

dhātuvṛtti	a general term applied to a treatise discussing roots, but specifically used in connection with the scholarly commentary written by Madhavacārya, the reputed scholar and politician at the court of the Vijayanagara kings in the fourteenth century, on the Dhatupatha ot Panini. The work is generally referred to as माधवीया-धातुवृति to distinguish it from ordinary commentary works called also धातुवृत्ति written by grammarians like Wijayananda and others.

dhātuvyākaraṇa	a grammar dealing with Verbs believed to have been written by Vangasena.

dhi(1)	a technical term used for sonant consonants in the Pratisakhya and old grammar works; confer, compare धि शेषः V. Pr.I.53, explained by Uvvata as वर्गाणां उत्तरास्त्रय: यरलवहकाराश्च धिः V.Pr. I.53; the term धि corresponds to हश् of Panini; (2) personal ending धि substituted for हि of the imperative 2nd singular. exempli gratia, for example जुहुधि, छिन्द्धि, भिन्द्धि, श्रुधि, रारन्धि et cetera, and others; confer, compareP.V.4.101-103.

dhu	a technical term in the Jainendra Vyakarana for धातु (a root) which is used freely by the ancient grammarians and Panini.

dhṛta or dhṛtapracaya	a kind of original grave vowel turned into a circumflex one which is called प्रचय unless followed by another acute or circumflex vowel. The Taittiriya Pratisakhya has mentioned seven varieties of this 'pracaya' out of which धृतप्रचय or धृत is one. For details see Bhasya on धृतः प्रचयः कौण्डिन्यस्य, T.Pr.XVIII.3.

dhve	Personal-ending of the second. person. Pl. Atmanepada in the present and perfect tenses. न् fifth consonant of the dental class of consonants which is possessed of the properties घोष, नादानुप्रदान, अल्पप्राणत्व, संवृतकण्ठत्व and अानुनासिक्य. In Panini's grammar the nasal consonant न् (a)is added as an augment prescribed\ \नुट् or नुम् which originally is seen as न्, but afterwards changed into अनुस्वार or परसवर्ण as required, as for example in पयांसि, यशांसि, निन्दति, वन्दति et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VII. 1.58-73, VII. 1.7983; VIII. 3.24; (b) is changed into ण् when it directly follows upon ऋ, ॠ, र् or ष् or even intervened by a vowel, a semivowel except ल् , a guttural consonant, a labial consonant or an anusvara; confer, compare P. VIII. 4.1.1-31. (c) is substituted for the final म् of a root, e. g. प्रशान्, प्रतान् confer, compare P. VIII. 2.64, 65.

naḍādi(1)	a class of words headed by the word नड to which the taddhita affix.affix आयन ( फक् ) is added in the sense of गोत्र ( grandchild and further descendants); e. g, नाडायनः, चारायणः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.1. 99; (2) a class of words headed by नड to which the affix ईय (छ) is added, together with the augment क placed after the word and before the affix, in the four senses prescribed in P. IV.2. 67-70; exempli gratia, for example नडकीयम् , प्लक्षकीयम् ; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 2. 91.

nadī	a technical term applied in Panini's grammar to words in the feminine gender ending in ई and ऊ excepting a few like स्त्री,श्री, भ्रू and others; it is optionally applied to words ending in इ and उ, of course in the feminine. gender, before case affixes of the dative, ablative, genitive and locative singular. The term was probably in use before Panini and was taken from the feminine. word नदी which was taken as a model. Very probably there was a long list of words like नद् ( नदट्) चोर ( चोरट् ) et cetera, and others which were given as ending in ट् and to which the affix ई (ङीप्) was added for forming the feminine base;the first word नदी so formed, was taken as a model and all words in the list and similar others were called नदी; confer, compare P. I 4. 3-6.

nandasundara	a Jain grammarian who wrote a gloss (अवचूरि) on the हैमशब्दानुशासनवृत्ति.

nandikeśvara	an ancient grammarian who has written a short work in verses on grammar in general, which is named नन्दकेश्वरकारिकासूत्र. There is a scholarly commentary upon it written by उपमन्यु.

nandikeśvarakārikā	a short treatise of 28 stanzas, attributed to an ancient grammarian नन्दिकेश्वर, which gives a philosophical interpretation of the fourteen sutras attributed to God Siva. The authorship of the treatise is assigned traditionally to the Divine Bull of God Siva. See नन्दिकेश्वर. The treatise is also named नन्दिकेश्वरकारिकासूत्र.

narendrasūri	an old grammarian believed to have been the original writer of the Sarasvata Vyakarana, on the strength of references to him in the commentary on the Sarasvata Vyakarana written by क्षेमेन्द्र as also references in the commentary on the Prakriykaumudi by Vitthalesa. He is believed to have lived in the tenth century A;D.

nalopa	elision of न्, which in Panini's grammar is sometimes taken as valid for certain grammatical operations,and otherwise for other operations; confer, compare नलोपः सुप्स्वरसंज्ञातुग्विधिषु कृति P.VIII.2.2.

nā(1)	taddhita affix. affix ना as also नाञ् prescribed respectively after वि and नञ् (negative particle न ) in the sense of separation; e. g. विना, नाना ; (2) case ending ना substituted for the inst. instrumental case. singular. affix टा (called also अाङ् in ancient grammars) in the masculine gender after words called घि i. e. words ending in इ or उ excepting such as are called नदी.

nāgeśa	the most reputed modern scholar of Panini's grammar, who was well-versed in other Sastras also, who lived in Benares in the latter half of the seventeenth and the first half of the eighteenth century. He wrote many masterly commentaries known by the words शेखर and उद्द्योत on the authoritative old works in the different Sastras, the total list of his small and big works together well nigh exceeding a hundredition He was a bright pupil of Hari Diksita, the grandson of Bhattoji Diksita. He was a renowned teacher also, and many of the famous scholars of grammar in Benares and outside at present are his spiritual descendants. He was a Maharastriya Brahmana of Tasgaon in Satara District, who received his education in Benares. For some years he stayed under the patronage of Rama, the king of Sringibera at his time. He was very clever in leading debates in the various Sastras and won the title of Sabhapati. Out of his numerous works, the Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on Kaiyata's Mahabhasyapradipa, the Laghusabdendusekhara on the Siddhanta Kaumudi and the Paribhasendusekhara are quite wellknown and studied by every one who wishes to get proficiency in Panini's grammar. For details see pp. 21-24 and 401-403, Vol. VII of the Patanjala Mahabhasya edition D. E. Society, Poona.

nāman	noun, substantive; one of the four categories of words given in the Nirukta and other ancient grammer works; confer, compare चत्वारि पदजातानि नामाख्याते चोपसर्गनिपाताश्च, Nirukta of Yāska.I.1. The word is defined as सत्त्वप्रधानानि नामानि by standard grammarians; confer, compare Nirukta of Yāska.I. 1.; confer, compare also सत्त्वाभिधायकं नाम, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIII.8; Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 49 and commentary thereon. Panini divides words into two categories only, viz. सुबन्त and तिङन्त and includes नामन् ,उपसर्ग and निपात under सुबन्त. The Srngarapraksa defines नामन् as follows-अनपेक्षितशब्दव्युत्पत्तीनि सत्त्वभूतार्थाभिधायीनि नामानि। तानि द्विविधानि। आविष्टलिङ्गानि अनाविष्टलिङ्गानि च । The word नामन् at the end of a sasthitatpurusa compound signifies a name or Samjna e. g. सर्वनामन्, दिङ्नामन् , छन्दोनामन्; confer, compare also. Bhasavrtti on संज्ञायां कन्थोशीनरेषु P. II.4. 20 and संज्ञायां भृत्. P. III. 2.46 where the author of the work explains the word संज्ञायां as नाम्नि. The word is used in the sense of 'a collection of words' in the Nirukta, confer, compare अन्तरिक्षनामानि, अपत्यनामानि, ईश्वरनामानि, उदकनामानि, et cetera, and others

nāmaliṅgānuśāsana	a treatise in which words with their genders are given. The term is usually used in connection with the great dictionary by अमरसिंह which is called नामालिङ्गानुशासन or अमरकोष.

nārāyaṇa(1)	name of a grammarian who wrote a commentary on the Mahabhsya-Pradipa; (2) a grammarian who is said to have written a gloss named Sabdabhusana on the Sutras of Panini as also some minor works named शब्दमञ्जरी, शब्दभेदनिरूपण, et cetera, and others

nārāyaṇavandya	a grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote a treatise on grammar named Saravali, and a treatise on roots named Dhatuparayana.

nāśa	elision, the word is used in grammar as a synonym of 'lopa.'

nighāta	toning down; the grave accent; the root निहन् in its various forms is used in the sense of toning down the voice and the word निघात is used in the sense of the grave accent (अनुदात्तस्वर) in the Vyakarana and Pratisakhya works; confer, compare also the words शेषनिघात, सर्वनिघात, et cetera, and others; confer, compare समानवाक्ये निघातयुष्मदस्मदादेशाः P. VIII. I.18 Vart. 5.

nityabalīyastva	possession of greater force; the word is used in connection with rules that are called नित्य. See नित्य (7).

nipātadyotakatva	the view that the nipatas and the upasargas too, as contrasted with nouns,pronouns and other indeclinables, only indicate the sense and do not denote it; this view, as grammarians say, was implied in the Mahabhasya and was prominently given in the Vakyapadiya by Bhartrhari which was followed by almost all later grammarians. See निपात.

nipātana	a word given, as it appears, without trying for its derivation,in authoritative works of ancient grammarians especially Panini;confer, compareदाण्डिनायनहास्तिनयनo P. VI.4.174, as also अचतुरविचतुरo V.4.77 et cetera, and others et cetera, and others The phrase निपातनात्सिद्धम् is very frequently used by Patanjali to show that some technical difficulties in the formation of a word are not sometimes to be taken into consideration, the word given by Panini being the correct one; confer, compare M.Bh.on I.1.4, III.1.22 et cetera, and others et cetera, and others; cf also the usual expression बाधकान्येव निपातनानि. The derivation of the word from पत् with नि causal, is suggested in the Rk Pratisakhya where it is stated that Nipatas are laid down or presented as such in manifold senses; cf Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)XII.9; cf also घातुसाधनकालानां प्राप्त्यर्थं नियमस्य च । अनुबन्घविकाराणां रूढ्यर्थ च निपातनम् M. Bh Pradipa on P. V.1.114: confer, comparealso Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.1.27.

nipātāvyayopasargavṛttia	short treatise explaining and illustrating the use of indeclinables, written by a grammarian named तिलक who probably lived in Kasmira.

nimitta(1)	the formal cause of a grammatical operation; confer, compare निमित्ताभावे नैमित्तिकस्याप्यभाव; given as a Paribhasa by many grammarians like Vyadi, Siradeva and others; confer, compare also प्रकृत्युपपदोपाधयो निमित्तं प्रत्ययेा निमित्ती M.Bh. on III.1.1 Vart. 2; (2) distinguishing sign यः प्रेक्षापूर्वकारी भवति स: अध्रुवेण निमित्तेन ध्रुवं निमित्तमुपादत्ते वेदिकां पुण्डरीकं वा, M.Bh. on I.1.26 Vart.5.

nimittāpāyaparibhāṣā	a popular name given by grammarians to the maxim निमित्तापाये नैमित्तिकस्याप्यपायः,. a thing, which is brought into existence by a cause, disappears on the disappearance of the cause. The maxim is not, of course, universally applicable. For details see Par. Sek. Pari. 56, Sira. Pari. 99.

niyata(1)	regulated in size or number; definitely fixed; the word नियत is used in grammar in connection with the nimitta or nimittin in a grammatical operation prescribed by a rule, which, or a part of which, is shown to be superfluous unless there is laid down a regulation; confer, compare शेषग्रहणं कर्तव्यम् । शेषनियमार्थम् \| प्रकृत्यर्थौ नियतौ प्रत्यया अनियतास्ते शेषेपि प्राप्नुवन्ति M.Bh. on I.3.12 Vart. 6; (2) The grave accent; cf उदात्तपूर्वं नियतं... स्वर्यते RPr.III.9.

niyatasvara(1)	an affix whose accent is definitely given by an indicatory mute letter applied to it; confer, compare M.Bh. on I.1.3; (2) the grave accent; a syllable with a grave accent; grave vowel; confer, compare नियतस्वरोदये R.Pr.XI.25; (3) name of a Samdhi when a visarga is changed into रेफ and then omitted and the preceding vowel is lengthened; cf ह्रस्वस्याकामनियता उभाविमौ R.Pr. IV.9; confer, compare also P. VIII.3.14 and VI.3.111.

niyama(1)	restriction; regulation; binding; the term is very frequently used by grammarians in connection with a restriction laid down with reference to the application of a grammatical rule generally on the strength of that rule, or a part of it, liable to become superfluous if the restriction has not been laid down; confer, compare M.Bh. on I. 1. 3, Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on I. 3.63, VI. 4.11; confer, compare also the frequently quoted dictum अनियमे नियमकारिणी परिभाषा; (2) limitation as contrasted with विकल्प or कामचार; confer, compare अनेकप्राप्तावेकस्य नियमो भवति शेषेष्वनियम; पटुमृदुशुक्लाः पटुशुक्लमृदव इति; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 2. 34 Vart. 2; (3) a regulating rule; a restrictive rule, corresponding to the Parisamkhya statement of the Mimamsakas, e. g. the rule अनुदात्तङित आत्मनेपदम् P. I.3.12; the grammarians generally take a rule as a positive injunction avoiding a restrictive sense as far as possible; confer, compare the dictum विधिनियमसंभवे विधिरेव ज्यायान्. Par. Sek. Pari. 100; the commentators have given various kinds of restrictions,. such as प्रयोगनियम,अभिधेयनियम,अर्थनियम, प्रत्ययनियम, प्रकृतिनियम, संज्ञानियम et cetera, and otherset cetera, and others; (4) grave accent or anudatta; confer, compare उदात्तपूर्वं नियतम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 9; see नियत (2).

nirukta	name of a class of works which were composed to explain the collections of Vedic words by means of proposing derivations of those words from roots as would suit the sense. The Nirukta works are looked upon as supplementary to grammar works and there must have been a good many works of this kind in ancient times as shown by references to the writers of these viz. Upamanyu, Sakatayana,Sakapuni,Sakapurti and others, but, out of them only one work composed by Yaska has survived; the word, hence has been applied by scholars to the Nirukta of Yaska which is believed to have been written in the seventh or the eighth century B. C. i. e. a century or two before Panini. The Nirukta works were looked upon as subsidiary to the study of the Vedas along with works on phonetics ( शिक्षा ), rituals ( कल्प ), grammar (व्याकरण) prosody (छन्दस्) and astronomy(ज्योतिष)and a mention of them is found made in the Chandogyopanisad. As many of the derivations in the Nirukta appear to be forced and fanciful, it is doubtful whether the Nirukta works could be called scientific treatises. The work of Yaska, however, has got its own importance and place among works subsidiary to the Veda, being a very old work of that kind and quoted by later commentators. There were some glosses and commentary works written upon Yaska's Nirukta out of which the one by Durgacarya is a scholarly one.It is doubtful whether Durgacarya is the same as Durgasimha, who wrote a Vrtti or gloss on the Katantra Vyakarana. The word निरुक्त is found in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of 'explained' and not in the sense of derived; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XV 6; V.Pr. IV. 19, 195.

niruktabhāṣya	a gloss on Yaska's Nirukta written by a modern scholar of grammar named Ugracarya in the eighteenth century A. D.

nirdiśyamānaparibhāṣā	a short form for the maxim निर्दिश्यमानस्यादेशा भवन्ति which means 'substitutes take the place of that or its part which has been actually stated or enunciated in the rule (of grammar)' Par. Sek. Pari. 12. For details see Par. Sek. Pari. 12.

nirdhāraṇa(1)	selection of one or some out of many; confer, compare जातिगुणाक्रियाभिः समुदायादेकदेशस्य पृथक्करणं निर्धारणम् । मनुष्याणां मनुष्येषु वा क्षत्रियः शूरतमः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II.2.10 as also on II.3.4l; (2) determined or definite sense to the exclusion of another, generally on the strength of the indeclinable एव which is expressed or understood. The word नेिर्धारण is used for अवधारण in this sense; confer, compare यत एवकारस्ततोन्यत्रावधारणम् a maxim used as a Paribhasa by some grammarians; cf; also धातोस्तन्निमित्तस्यैव । धात्ववधारणं यथा स्यात्तन्निमित्तावधारणं मा भूदिति Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VI. 1.81.

nirlūra	name of a grammarian who is believed to have written a gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the Sutras of Panini on the strength of a reference to him in the Nyasa of Jinendrabuddhi; confer, compare वृत्तिः पाणिनीयसूत्राणां विवरणं चुल्लिभट्टिनिर्लूरादिप्रणीतम् Nyasa on I.1.1.

nivāta	sometimes used for निघात or the grave accent.

nivṛttisthāna	places where the substitutes गुण and वृद्धि do not apply ; weak terminations; kit or nit affixes in Panini's grammar; confer, compare अथाप्यस्तेर्निवृत्तिस्थानेष्वादिलेापो भवति । स्तः सन्तीति । Nirukta of Yāska.II. 1. The word संक्रम is also used in this sense by ancient grammarians.

niṣedha	negation; prohibition; cf निषेधपञ्चसूत्रीयं स्वरार्था Bhasavrtti on P. II. 2.16; confer, compare निषेधाश्च बलीयांसः Par. Sek. Pari. 112. The word प्रतिषेध is used frequently in this sense in old grammar works such as the Mahabhasya, the word निषेध being comparatively a modern one.

niṣṭhita	also निःष्ठित completed, accomplished; used in connection with a grammatically formed word by applying affixes to the bases; confer, compare अङ्गवृत्ते पुनर्वृत्तावविधिर्निष्ठितस्य Siradeva Pari. 94, where Siradeva has explained the word निष्ठित as प्रयोगार्ह-अङ्ग.

nihata	struck down in tone, grave, possessed of a grave accent; confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 138.

nīca	a term used for the grave accent or for the vowel, accented grave; confer, compare स्वरितयोर्मध्ये यत्र नीचं स्यात् Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIX. 1. उन्नीचे मे नीचमुच्चात् Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 54, 55 confer, compare also Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 111.

nīcaiḥkara	constituting the grave accent, features of the grave accent; confer, compare अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता खस्येति नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य M.Bh.on I. 2.30.

nīlakaṇṭhadīkṣita	a famous grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote an independent work on the Paribhasas in Vyakarana named Paribhasavrtti. This Vrtti is referred to in the Paribhsendusekhara by Nagesabhatta and the views expressed in it are severely criticised in the commentary गदा.

nyasta	name given to अनुदात्त or the grave tone; confer, compare मात्रा न्यस्ततरैकेषामुभे व्यालि: समस्वरे Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 17 where Uvvata explains न्यस्ततरा as अनुदात्ततरा.

nyāyaratnamañjūṣā	a work dealing with Vyākarana Paribhāsas or maxims as found in Hemacandra's system of grammar, written bv Hemahamsaganin, a pupil of Ratnasekhara, in 1451. The author has written a commentary also on the work, named Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa..

nyāyasaṃhita	combined euphonically according to rules of grammar; confer, compare तद्वति तद्धिते न्यायसंहितं चेत् explained as व्याकरणशास्त्रोक्तसंधिमत् Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V. 8 commentary

nyāyya	proper; fully justified न्यायादनपेतम् confer, compare P.IV.4.92; correct; regular; confer, compare यञञ्भ्यामुक्तत्वादर्थस्य न्याय्योत्पत्तिर्न भविष्यति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.3.1 where Kaiyata however, explains the word differently. Kaiyata states that न्याय्य means a general rule; confer, compareउत्सर्गः पूर्वाचार्यप्रसिद्ध्या न्याय्य उच्यते Kaiyata on P. II. 3.1. By Pūrvācārya he possibly refers to the writers of the Prātiśākhyas and other similar works by ancient grammarians, where the word nyāya is used in the sense of 'a general rule '. See the word न्याय a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

nyāsa(1)	literally position, placing;a word used in the sense of actual expression or wording especially in the sūtras; confer, compare the usual expression क्रियते एतन्न्यास एव in the Mahābhāșya, confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.11, 1.1.47 et cetera, and others; (2) a name given by the writers or readers to works of the type of learned and scholarly commentaries on vŗitti-type-works on standard sūtras in a Śāstra; e. g. the name Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. is given to the learned commentaries on the Vŗtti on Hemacandra's Śabdānuśasana as also on the Paribhāşāvŗtti by Hemahamsagani. Similarly the commentary by Devanandin on Jainendra grammar and that by Prabhācandra on the Amoghāvŗtti on Śākatāyana grammar are named Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa.. In the same way, the learned commentary on the Kāśikāvŗtti by Jinendrabuddhi, named Kāśikāvivaranapaňjikā by the author, is very widely known by the name Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa.. This commentary Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. was written in the eighth century by the Buddhist grammarian Jinendrabuddhi, who belonged to the eastern school of Pānini's Grammar. This Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. has a learned commentary written on it by Maitreya Rakșita in the twelfth century named Tantrapradipa which is very largely quoted by subsequent grammarians, but which unfortunately is available only in a fragmentary state at present. Haradatta, a well-known southern scholar of grammar has drawn considerably from Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. in his Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta., which also is well-known as a scholarly work.

p(1)	first consonant of the labial class of consonants possessed of the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, and कण्ठविवृतत्व; ( 2 ) प् applied as a mute letter to a suffix, making the suffix accented grave (अनुदात्त).

pañcālapadavṛtti	the usage or the method of the Pañcālas; the eastern method of euphonic combinations, viz. the retention of the vowel अ after the preceding vowel ओ which is substituted for the Visarga; e. g. यो अस्मै; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II. 12; Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XI. 19. This vowel अ which is retained, is pronounced like a short ओ or अर्धओकार by the followers of the Sātyamugri and Rāņāyaniya branches of the Sāmavedins; confer, compare commentary on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XI. 19 as also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Āhnika 1.

patañjali	the reputed author of the Mahābhāșya, known as the Pātañjala Mahābhāșya after him. His date is determined definitely as the second century B.C. on the strength of the internal evidence supplied by the text of the Mahābhāșya itselfeminine. The words Gonardiya and Gonikāputra which are found in the Mahābhāșya are believed to be referring to the author himself and, on their strength he is said to have been the son of Goņikā and a resident of the country called Gonarda in his days. On the strength of the internal evidence supplied by the Mahābhāșya, it can be said that Patañjali received his education at Takșaśila and that he was,just like Pāņini, very familiar with villages and towns in and near Vāhika and Gāndhāra countries. Nothing can definitely be said about his birthplace, and although it might be believed that his native place was Gonarda,its exact situation has not been defined so far. About his parentage too,no definite information is available. Tradition says that he was the foster-son of a childless woman named Gonikā to whom he was handed over by a sage of Gonarda, in whose hands he fell down from the sky in the evening at the time of the offering of water-handfuls to the Sun in the west; confer, compareपतत् + अञ्जलि, the derivation of the word given by the commentators. Apart from anecdotes and legendary information, it can be said with certainty that Patañjali was a thorough scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who had studied the available texts of the Vedic Literature and Grammar and availed himself of information gathered personally by visiting the various schools of Sanskrit Grammar and observing the methods of explanations given by teachers there. His Mahābhāșya supplies an invaluable fund of information on the ways in which the Grammar rules of Pāņini were explained in those days in the various grammar schools. This information is supplied by him in the Vārttikas which he has exhaustively given and explainedition He had a remarkable mastery over Sanskrit Language which was a spoken one at his time and it can be safely said that in respect of style, the Mahābhāșya excels all the other Bhāșyas in the different branches of learning out of which two, those of Śabaraswāmin and Śańkarācārya,are selected for comparison. It is believed by scholars that he was equally conversant with other śāstras, especially Yoga and Vaidyaka, on which he has written learned treatises. He is said to be the author of the Yogasūtras which,hence are called Pātañjala Yogasūtras, and the redactor of the Carakasamhitā. There are scholars who believe that he wrote the Mahābhāșya only, and not the other two. They base their argument mainly on the supposition that it is impossible for a scholar to have an equally unmatching mastery over three different śāstras at a time. The argument has no strength, especially in India where there are many instances of scholars possessing sound scholarship in different branches of learning. Apart from legends and statements of Cakradhara, Nāgesa and others, about his being the author of three works on three different śāstras, there is a direct reference to Patañjali's proficiency in Grammar, Yoga and Medicine in the work of King Bhoja of the eleventh century and an indirect one in the Vākyapadīya of Bhartŗhari of the seventh century A. D. There is a work on the life of Patañjali, written by a scholar of grammar of the South,named Ramabhadra which gives many stories and incidents of his life out of which it is difficult to find out the grains of true incidents from the legendary husk with which they are coveredition For details,see Patañjala Mahābhāșya D.E.Society's edition Vol. VII pages 349 to 374. See also the word महाभाष्य.

pada	a word; a unit forming a part of a sentence; a unit made up of a letter or of letters, possessed of sense; confer, compare अक्षरसमुदायः पदम् । अक्षरं वा । V.Pr. VIII. 46, 47. The word originally was applied to the individual words which constituted the Vedic Samhitā; confer, compare पदप्रकृतिः संहिता Nir.I.17. Accordingly, it is defined in the Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya as ' अर्थः पदम् ' (Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III. 2) as contrasted with ' वर्णानामेकप्राणयोगः संहिता ' (V.Pr.I.158). The definition ' अर्थः पदम् ' is attributed to the ancient grammarian 'Indra', who is believed to have been the first Grammarian of India. Pāņini has defined the term पद as ' सुप्तिङन्तं पदम् ' P.I.4.14. His definition is applicable to complete noun-forms and verb-forms and also to prefixes and indeclinables where a case-affix is placed and elided according to him; confer, compare अव्ययादाप्सुपः P. II. 4. 82. The noun-bases before case affixes and taddhita affix. affixes, mentioned in rules upto the end of the fifth adhyāya, which begin with a consonant excepting य् are also termed पद by Pāņini to include parts of words before the case affixes भ्याम् , भिस्, सु et cetera, and others as also before the taddhita affix. affixes मत्, वत् et cetera, and others which are given as separate padas many times in the pada-pātha of the Vedas; confer, compare स्वादिष्वसर्वनामस्थाने P. I. 4. 17. See for details the word पदपाठ. There are given four kinds of padas or words viz. नाम, अाख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात in the Nirukta and Prātiśākhya works; confer, compare also पदमर्थे प्रयुज्यते, विभक्त्यन्तं च पदम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2. 64 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 19, वर्णसमुदायः पदम् M.Bh. on I.1.21 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5, पूर्वपरयोरर्थोपलब्धौ पदम् Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.I.1.20, पदशब्देनार्थ उच्यते Kaiyata on P.I.2.42 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2; confer, compare also पद्यते गम्यते अर्थः अनेनेति पदमित्यन्वर्थसंज्ञा Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on P.III. 1.92. The verb endings or affixs ति, तस् and others are also called पद. The word पद in this sense is never used alone, but with the word परस्मै or अात्मने preceding it. The term परस्मैपद stands for the nine affixes तिप्, तस्, ...मस्,while the term आत्मनेपद stands for the nine affixes त, आताम् ... महिङ्. confer, compare ल: परमैपदम्, तङानावात्मनेपदम्. It is possible to say that in the terms परस्मैपद and अात्मनेपद also, the term पद could be taken to mean a word, and it is very likely that the words परस्मैपद and अात्मनेपद were originally used in the sense of 'words referring to something meant for another' and 'referring to something meant for self' respectively. Such words, of course, referred to verbal forms, roughly corresponding to the verbs in the active voice and verbs in the passive voice. There are some modern scholars of grammar, especially linguists, who like to translate परस्मैपद as 'active voice' and आत्मनेपद as ' passive voice'. Pāņini appears, however, to have adapted the sense of the terms परस्मैपद and आत्मनेपद and taken them to mean mere affixes just as he has done in the case of the terms कृत् and तद्धित. Presumably in ancient times, words current in use were grouped into four classes by the authors of the Nirukta works, viz. (a) कृत् (words derived from roots)such as कर्ता, कारकः, भवनम् et cetera, and others, (b) तद्धित (words derived from nouns ) such as गार्ग्यः , काषायम् , et cetera, and others, (c) Parasmaipada words viz. verbs such as भवति, पचति, and (d) Ātmanepada words id est, that is verbs like एधते, वर्धते, et cetera, and othersVerbs करोति and कुरुते or हरति and हरते were looked upon as both परस्मैपद words and आत्मनेपद words. The question of simple words, as they are called by the followers of Pāņini, such as नर, तद् , गो, अश्व, and a number of similar underived words, did not occur to the authors of the Nirukta as they believed that every noun was derivable, and hence could be included in the kŗt words.

padakāra	literally one who has divided the Samhitā text of the Vedas into the Pada-text. The term is applied to ancient Vedic Scholars शाकल्य, आत्रेय, कात्यायन and others who wrote the Padapātha of the Vedic Samhitās. The term is applied possibly through misunderstanding by some scholars to the Mahābhāsyakāra who has not divided any Vedic Samhitā,but has, in fact, pointed out a few errors of the Padakāras and stated categorically that grammarians need not follow the Padapāțha, but, rather, the writers of the Padapāțha should have followed the rules of grammar. Patañjali, in fact, refers by the term पदकार to Kātyāyana, who wrote the Padapātha and the Prātiśākhya of the Vājasaneyi-Samhitā in the following statement--न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः। पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम्। यथालक्षणं पदं कर्तव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.1. 109; VI. 1. 207; VIII. 2.16; confer, compare also अदीधयुरिति पदकारस्य प्रत्याख्यानपक्षे उदाहरणमुपपन्नं भवति ( परिभाषासूचन of व्याडि Pari. 42 ) where Vyādi clearly refers to the Vārtika of Kātyāyana ' दीधीवेव्योश्छन्दोविषयत्वात् ' P. I. 1.6 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). I. The misunderstanding is due to passages in the commentary of स्कन्दस्वामिन् on the Nirukta passage I. 3, उब्वटटीका on ऋक्प्रातिशाख्य XIII. 19 and others where the statements referred to as those of Patañjali are, in fact, quotations from the Prātiśākhya works and it is the writers of the Prātiśākhya works who are referred to as padakāras by Patañ jali in the Mahābhāsya.

padacandrikā	a grammar work on the nature of words written by कृष्णशेष of the sixteenth century.

padapāṭha	the recital of the Veda text pronouncing or showing each word separately as detached from the adjoining word. It is believed that the Veda texts were recited originally as running texts by the inspired sages, and as such, they were preserved by people by oral tradition. Later on after several centuries, their individually distinct words were shown by grammarians who were called Padakāras. The पदपाठ later on had many modifications or artificial recitations such as क्रम, जटा, घन et cetera, and others in which each word was repeated twice or more times, being uttered connectedly with the preceding or the following word, or with both. These artificial recitations were of eight kinds, which came to be known by the term अष्टविकृतयः.

padaprabheda	lit, divisions of words: parts of speech. There are four parts of speech viz.नामन् , आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात given by ancient grammarians and the authors of the Prātiśākhya works, while there are given only two, सुबन्त and तिङन्त by Pāņini. For details see pp. 145, 146 Vol. VII. Mahābhāșya D. E. Society's edition.

padamañjarī	the learned commentary by Haradatta on the काशिकावृत्ति. Haradatta was a very learned grammarian of the Southern School, and the Benares School of Grammarians follow पदमञ्जरी more than the equally learned another commentary काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका or न्यास. In the Padamanjarī Haradatta is said to have given everything of importance from the Mahābhāșya; confer, compare अधीते हि महाभाष्ये व्यर्था सा पदमञ्जरी. For details see Mahābhāșya D. E. S. Ed. Vol. VII P. 390-391.

padavākyaratnākara	a disquisition on grammar dealing with the different ways in which the sense of words is conveyedition The work consists of a running commentary on his own verses by the author Gokulanātha Miśra who, from internal evidence, appears to have flourished before Koņdabhațța and after Kaiyața.

padavidhi	an operation prescribed in connection with words ending with case or verbal affixes and not in connection with noun-bases or root-bases or with single letters or syllables. पदविधि is in this way contrasted with अङ्गविधि ( including प्रातिपदिकविधि and धातुविधि ), वर्णविधि and अक्षरविधि, Such Padavidhis are given in Pāņini's grammar in Adhyāya2, Pādas l and 2 as also in VI.1.158, and in VIII. 1.16 to VIII.3.54 and include rules in connection with compounds, accents and euphonic combinations. When, however, an operation is prescribed for two or more padas, it is necessary that the two padas or words must be syntactically connectible; confer, compare समर्थः पदविधिः P. II.1.1.

padavirāma	pause between two words measuring two mātrās, or equal to the time required for the utterance of a long vowel; e. g. in इषे त्वोर्जे त्वा, the pause between इषे and त्वा is measured by two mātrās; confer, compare पदविरामो द्विमात्रः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXII.13.Some Prātiśākhya texts declare that the pause between two words is of one mātra as at avagraha; confer, compare R Pr. II.1 and Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 35-38.

padavyavasthāsūtrakārikāṭīkā	a short gloss on the पदव्यवस्थासूत्रकारिका written by Udayakīrti, a Jain grammarian

padādividhi	a grammatical operation specifically prescribed for the initial letter of a word.

padādhikāra	the topic concerning padas id est, that is words which are regularly formed, as contrasted with words in formation. Several grammatical operations, such as accents or euphonic combinations, are specifically prescribed together by Pāņini at places which are said to be in the Padādhikāra formed by sūtras VIII.1.16 to VIII.3.54.

padārtha	meaning of a word, signification of a word; that which corresponds to the meaning of a word; sense of a word. Grammarians look upon both-the generic notion and the individual object as Padārtha or meaning of a word, and support their view by quoting the sūtras of Pāņini जात्याख्यायामेकस्मिन् बहुवचनमन्यतरस्याम् I. 2.58 and सरूपाणामेकशेष एकविभक्तौ I. 2.64; confer, compare किं पुनराकृतिः पदार्थ अाहोस्विद् द्रव्यम् । उभयमित्याह । कथं ज्ञायते । उभयथा ह्याचार्येण सूत्राणि प्रणीतानि । अाकृतिं पदार्थे मत्वा जात्याख्यायामित्युच्यते \| द्रव्यं पदार्थे मत्वा सरूपाणामित्येकशेष अारभ्यते, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). in I. 1. first Āhnika. In rules of grammar the meaning of a word is generally the vocal element or the wording, as the science of grammar deals with words and their formation; confer, compare स्वं रूपं शब्दस्याशब्दसंज्ञा, P. I. 1. 68. The possession of vocal element as the sense is technically termed शब्दपदार्थकता as opposed to अर्थपदार्थकता; confer, compare सोसौ गोशब्दः स्वस्मात्पदार्थात् प्रच्युतो यासौ अर्थपदार्थकता तस्याः शब्दपदार्थकः संपद्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 1.44 V. 3. The word पदार्थ means also the categories or the predicaments in connection with the different Śāstrās or lores as for instance, the 25 categories in the Sāmkhyaśāstra or 7 in the Vaiśeșika system or 16 in the NyayaŚāstra. The Vyākaranaśāstra, in this way to state, has only one category the Akhandavākyasphota or the radical meaning given by the sentence in one strok

padmanābha	a grammarian who wrote a treatise on grammar known as the Supadma Vyākaraņa. He is believed to have been an inhabitant of Bengal who lived in the fourteenth century A. D. Some say that he was a resident of Mithilā.

para(l)	subsequent,as opposed to पूर्व or prior the word is frequently used in grammar in connection with a rule or an operation prescribed later on in a grammar treatise; confer, compare विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P. I. 4. 2; ( 2 ) occurring after ( something ); confer, compare प्रत्ययः परश्च P. III. 1.1 and 2; confer, compare also तत् परस्वरम् T.Pr. XXI.2.(3)The word पर is sometimes explained in the sense of इष्ट or desired, possibly on the analogy of the meaning श्रेष्ठ possessed by the word. This sense is given to the word पर in the rule विप्रातिषेधे परं कार्यं with a view to apply it to earlier rules in cases of emergency; confer, compare विप्रतिषेधे परं यदिष्टं तद्भवति M.Bh. on I.1.3.Vārt, 6; परशब्दः इष्टवाची M.Bh. on I. 2.5, I. 4.2. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7; II. 1.69 et cetera, and others

paratva	posteriority; mention afterwards; the word is frequently used in works on grammar in connection with a rule which is mentioned in the treatise after another rule; the posterior rule is looked upon as stronger than the prior one, and is given priority in application when the two rules come in conflict although technically they are equally strong: confer, compare परत्वादल्लोप: ; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.4 Vaart 7; 'परत्वाच्छीभाव: I. 1.11 et cetera, and others

paranimittaka	caused by something which follows; the term is used in grammar in connection with something caused by what follows; confer, compare परनिमित्तकोजादेश: पूर्वविधिं प्रति न स्थानिवत् S. K, on अचः परस्मिन्पूर्वविधौ P.I.1.57.

pararūpa	the form of the subsequent letter (परस्य रूपम्). The word is used in grammar when the resultant of the two coalescing vowels ( एकादेश ) is the latter vowel itself, as for instance ए in प्रेजते ( प्र+एजते ); confer, compare एङि. पररूपम् P.VI.1.94.

parasavarṇa	cognate of the latter vowel or consonant. The word is frequently used in grammar in connection with a substitute or आदेश which is specified to be cognate ( सवर्ण ) of the succeeding vowel or consonant: confer, compare अनुस्वरस्य यथि परसवर्ण: P.VIII. 4. 58.

parasparavyapekṣā	mutual expectancy possessed by two words, which is called सामर्थ्र्य in grammar. Such an expectancy is necessary between the two or more words which form a compound: confer, compare परस्परव्यपेक्षां सामर्थ्र्यमेके P.II.1.1, V.4; confer, compare also इह राज्ञ: पुरुष इत्युक्ते राजा पुरुषमपेक्षते ममायमिति पुरुषोपि राजानमपेक्षते अहृमस्य इति \| M.Bh. om II.1.1.

parasmaipada	a term used in grammar with reference to the personal affixs ति, त: et cetera, and others applied to roots. The term परस्मैपद is given to the first nine afixes ति, त:, अन्ति, सि, थ:, थ, मि, व: and म:, while the term आत्मनेपद is used in connection with the next nine त, आताम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare परस्मै परोद्देशार्थफलकं पदम् Vac. Kosa. The term परस्मैपद is explained by some as representing the Active_Voice as contrasted with the Passive Voice which necessarily is characterized by the Aatmanepada affixes. The term परस्मैभाष in the sense of परस्मैपद was used by ancient grammarians and is also found in the Vaarttika अात्मनेभाषपस्मैभाषयोरुपसंख्यानम् P. VI. 3.8 Vart.1 . The term परस्मैभाष as applied to roots, could be explained as परस्मै क्रियां (or क्रियाफलं) भाषन्ते इति परस्मैभाषाः and originally such roots as had their activity meant for another, used to take the परस्मैपद् affixes, while the rest which had the activity meant for self, took the अात्मनेपद affixes. Roots having activity for both, took both the terminations and were termed उभयपदिनः.

parasmaibhāṣa	literally speaking the activity or क्रिया for another; a term of ancient grammarians for roots taking the first nine personal affixes only viz. ति, तः... मसू. The term परस्मैपदिन् was substituted for परस्मैभाष later on,more commonly. See परस्मैपद a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The term परस्मैभाष along with अात्मनेभाष is found almost invariably used in the Dhaatupaatha attributed to Paanini; confer, compare भू सत्तायाम् \| उदात्त: परस्मैभाषः \| एघादय उदात्त अनुदात्तेत अात्मनभाषा: Dhatupatha.

parāṅgavadbhāva	behaviour as having become a part and parcel of another ; treatment of a word as a part of another. The term is used by Panini in connection with a word followed by and connected with a word in the vocative case of which it is looked upon as a part for purposes of accent, e. g. कुण्डेनाटन् , मद्राणां राजन् et cetera, and others Here the words अटन् and राजन् , being in the vocative case, are अाद्युदात्त, id est, that is अ ( at the beginning of अटन्) and अा (in राजन्) are acute and as a result all the other vowels in कुण्डेनाटन् and मद्राणां राजन् become अनुदात्त or grave; confer, compare सुबामन्त्रिते पराङ्गवत्स्वरे P.II.1.2.

parigaṇana	literally enumeration. The word is used in grammar treatises in the sense of a definite or complete enumeration' with a view to exclude those that are not included in the enumeration : cf परिगणनं कर्तव्यम् \| यङ्यक्यवलोपे प्रतिषेधः M.Bh. on I.1.4 Vaart. 1.

paribhāṣā	an authoritative statement or dictum, helping (1) the correct interpretation of the rules (sūtras) of grammar, or (2) the removal of conflict between two rules which occur simultaneously in the process of the formation of words, (पदसिद्धि), or (3) the formation of correct words. Various definitions of the word परिभाषा are given by commentators, the prominent ones beingपरितो व्यापृतां भाषां परिभाषां प्रचक्षते(न्यास);or, परितो भाष्यते या सा परिभाषा प्रकीर्तिता. The word is also defined as विधौ नियामकरिणी परिभाषा ( दुर्गसिंहवृत्ति ). परिभाषा can also be briefiy defined as the convention of a standard author. Purusottamadeva applies the word परिभाषा to the maxims of standard writers, confer, compare परिभाषा हिं न पाणिनीयानि वचनानि; Puru. Pari. 119; while Haribhaskara at the end of his treatise परिभाषाभास्कर, states that Vyaadi was the first writer on Paribhaasas. The rules तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य, तस्मादित्युत्तरस्य and others are in fact Paribhaasa rules laid down by Panini. For the difference between परिभाषा and अधिकार, see Mahabhasya on II.1.1. Many times the writers of Sutras lay down certain conventions for the proper interpretation of their rules, to which additions are made in course of time according to necessities that arise, by commentators. In the different systems of grammar there are different collections of Paribhasas. In Panini's system, apart from commentaries thereon, there are independent collections of Paribhasas by Vyadi, Bhojadeva, Purusottamadeva, Siradeva, Nilakantha, Haribhaskara, Nagesa and a few others. There are independent collections of Paribhasas in the Katantra, Candra, Sakatayana,Jainendra and Hemacandra systems of grammar. It is a noticeable fact that many Paribhasas are common, with their wordings quite similar or sometimes identical in the different systemanuscript. Generally the collections of Paribhasas have got scholiums or commentaries by recognised grammarians, which in their turn have sometimes other glosses or commentaries upon them. The Paribhaasendusekhara of Nagesa is an authoritative work of an outstanding merit in the system of Paninis Grammar, which is commented upon by more than twenty five scholars during the last two or three centuries. The total number of Paribhasas in the diferent systems of grammar may wellnigh exceed 500. See परिभाषासंग्रह.

paribhāṣāprakāśā	an independent treatise explaining the various Paribhasas in the system of Panini's grammar, written by Visnusesa of the famous SeSa family.

paribhāṣābhāskara(1)	a treatise on the Paribhasas in Panini's grammar written by Haribhaskara Agnihotri, son of Appajibhatta Agnihotri, who lived in the seventeenth century : (2) a treatise on Paniniparibhasas, as arranged by Siradeva, written by Sesadrisuddhi,

paribhāṣāvṛtti	a general name given to an explanatory independent work on Paribhasas of the type of a gloss on a collection of Paribhasas,irrespective of the system of grammar, whether it be that of Panini, or of Katantra, or of Jainendra or of Hemacandra. The treatises of Vyadi (Panini system), Durgasimha and BhavamiSra (Katantra system), Purusottamadeva and Siradeva (Panini system), Abhyankar (Jainendra system) and others are all known by the name Paribhasavritti.

paribhāṣenduśekhara	the reputed authoritative work on the Paribhasas in the system of Paanini's grammar written by Nagesabhatta in the beginning of the 18th century A.D. at Benares. The work is studied very widely and has got more than 25 commentaries written by pupils in the spiritual line of Nagesa. Well-known among these commentaries are those written by Vaidyanatha Payagunde ( called गदा ), by BhairavamiSra ( called मिश्री), by Raghavendraacaarya Gajendragadakara ( called त्रिपथगा ), by Govindacarya Astaputre of Poona in the beginning of the nineteenth century (called भावार्थदीपिका), by BhaskaraSastri Abhyankar of Satara (called भास्करी ), and by M. M. Vaasudevasaastri Abhyankar of Poona (called तत्त्वादर्श ). Besides these, there are commentaries written by Taatya Sastri Patawardhana,Ganapati Sastri Mokaate, Jayadeva Misra, VisnuSastri Bhat, Vishwanatha Dandibhatta, Harinaatha Dwiwedi Gopaalacarya Karhaadkar, Harishastri Bhagawata, Govinda Shastri Bharadwaja, Naarayana Shastri Galagali, Venumaadhava Shukla, Brahmaananda Saraswati, ManisiSeSaSarma,Manyudeva, Samkarabhatta, Indirapati, Bhimacarya Galagali, Madhavacarya Waikaar, Cidrupasraya, Bhimabhatta, LakSminrsimha and a few others. Some of these works are named by their authors as Tikaas, others as Vyaakhyaas and still others as Tippanis or Vivrtis.

parokṣā	literally behind the eyes; remote; । the term is found used by ancient grammarians and also referred to in the Mahaabhaasya as referring to the perfect tense called लिट् in Paanini's grammar: confer, compare ज्ञापकात्परोक्षायां ( लिटि ) न भविष्यति । M.Bh. on P. I. 2.28: confer, compare also न व्यथते: परोक्षायाम् Kaat. III.4.21.

parjanyavallakṣaṇapravṛtti	the application of a grammatical rule or operation like the rains which occur on dry land as also on the sea surface: confer, compare कृतकारि खल्वपि शास्त्रं पर्जन्यवत् । तद्यथा । पर्जन्यो यावदूनं पूर्णे च सर्वमभिवर्षति । M.Bh. on P.I. 1.29 ; VI. 1.127: cf also यथा पर्जन्यः यावदूनं पूर्णे वाभिवर्षति एवं लक्षणमपि दीर्घस्य दीर्घत्वम् । चिचीषति, बुभूषति। Vyaadi. Pari. 58, confer, compare कृतकारि शास्त्रं मेघवत् न चाकृतकारि दहनवत् Puruso. Pari. 86.

paryāya(l)	serial order or succession as opposed to simultaniety ; the word is used in grammar in connection with a rule which, as the objector for the sake of argument, would like to hold and would apply by succession with respect to the rule in conflict, either before it or after it id est, that is alternatively; confer, compare पर्यायः प्रसज्येत often found used in the Mahabhaasya as for example on I.4.1 et cetera, and others: confer, compare also तृजादयः पर्यायेण भवन्ति M.Bh. on P. I. 4.2. Vaart. 3; ( 2 ) alternative word,. synonym; confer, compare अभिज्ञावचने लृट् । वचनग्रहणं पर्यायार्थम् । अभिजानासि स्मरसि बुध्यसे चेतयसे इति । Kaas. on P. III.2.112.

pāṇini	the illustrious ancient grammarian of India who is wellknown by his magnum opus, the Astaka or Astaadhyaayi which has maintained its position as a unique work on Sanskrit grammar unparalleled upto the present day by any other work on grammar, not only of the Sanskrit language, but ofany other language, classical as well as spoken. His mighty intelligence grasped, studied and digested not only the niceties of accentuation and formation of Vedic words, scattered in the vast Vedic Literature of his time, but those of classical words in the classical literature and the spoken Sanskrit language of his time in all its different aspects and shades, noticeable in the various provinces and districts of the vast country. The result of his careful study of the Vedic Literature and close observation ofeminine.the classical Sanskrit, which was a spoken language in his days, was the production of the wonderful and monumental work, the Astaadhyaayi,which gives an authoritative description of the Sanskrit language, to have a complete exposition of which,several life times have to be spent,in spite of several commentaries upon it, written from time to time by several distinguished scholars. The work is a linguist's and not a language teacher's. Some Western scholars have described it as a wonderful specimen of human intelligence,or as a notable manifestation of human intelligence. Very little is known unfortunately about his native place,parentage or personal history. The account given about these in the Kathaasaritsaagara and other books is only legendary and hence, it has very little historical value. The internal evidence, supplied by his work shows that he lived in the sixth or the seventh century B. C., if not earlier, in the north western province of India of those days. Jinendrabuddhi, the author of the Kaasikavivaranapanjikaa or Nyasa, has stated that the word शलातुर् mentioned by him in his sUtra ( IV. 3.94 ) refers to his native place and the word शालातुरीय derived by him from the word शलातुर by that sUtra was, in fact his own name, based upon the name of the town which formed his native placcusative case. Paanini has shown in his work his close knowledge of, and familiarity with, the names of towns, villages, districts, rivers and mountains in and near Vaahika, the north-western Punjab of the present day, and it is very likely that he was educated at the ancient University of Taksasilaa. Apart from the authors of the Pratisaakhya works, which in a way could be styled as grammar works, there were scholars of grammar as such, who preceded him and out of whom he has mentioned ten viz., Apisali, Saakataayana, Gaargya, Saakalya, Kaasyapa, Bharadwaja, Gaalava, Caakravarmana Senaka and Sphotaayana. The grammarian Indra has not been mentioned by Paanini, although tradition says that he was the first grammarian of the Sanskrit language. It is very likely that Paanini had no grammar work of Indra before him, but at the same time it can be said that the works of some grammarians , mentioned by Panini such as Saakaatyana, Apisali, Gaargya and others had been based on the work of Indra. The mention of several ganas as also the exhaustive enumeration of all the two thousand and two hundred roots in the Dhaatupaatha can very well testify to the existence of systematic grammatical works before Paarnini of which he has made a thorough study and a careful use in the composition of his Ganapaatha and Dhaatupatha. His exhaustive grammar of a rich language like Sanskrit has not only remained superb in spite of several other grammars of the language written subsequently, but its careful study is felt as a supreme necessity by scholars of philology and linguistics of the present day for doing any real work in the vast field of linguistic research. For details see pp.151154 Vol. VII of Paatanjala Mahaabhsya, D. E. Society's Edition.

pāṇinisūtra	called also by the name अष्टक or पाणिनीय-अष्टक; name given to the SUtras of Paanini comprising eight adhyaayaas or books. The total number of SUtras as commented upon by the writers of the Kasika and the Siddhaantakaumudi is 3983. As nine sUtras out of these are described as Vaarttikas and two as Ganasutras by Patanjali, it is evident that there were 3972 SUtras in the Astaka of Paanini according to Patanjali. A verse current among Vaiyakarana schools states the number to be 3996; confer, compare त्रीणि सूत्रसहस्राणि तथा नव शतानि च । षण्णवतिश्च सूत्राणां पाणिनिः कृतवान् स्वयम् । The traditional recital by Veda Scholars who look upon the Astadhyayi as a Vedaanga, consists of 3983 Sutras which are accepted and commented upon by all later grammarians and commentators. The SUtras of Paanini, which mainly aim at the correct formation of words, discuss declension, conjugation, euphonic changes, verbal derivatives, noun derivatives and accents. For details see Vol.VII, Vyaakarana Mahaabhaasya, D. E. Society's edition pp. 152-162.

pāṇinisūtravārtika	name given to the collection of explanatory pithy notes of the type of SUtras written. mainly by Kaatyaayana. The Varttikas are generally written in the style of the SUtras, but sometimes they are written in Verse also. The total number of Varttikas is well-nigh a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. 5000, including Varttikas in Verse.There are three kinds of Varttikas; confer, compareउक्तानुक्तदुरुक्तानां चिन्ता यत्र प्रवर्तते । तं ग्रन्थं वार्तिकं प्राहुर्वार्तिकज्ञा मनीषिणः । Naagesa appears to have divided Varttikas into two classes as shown by his definition 'सूत्रेऽ नुक्तदुरुक्तचिन्ताकरत्वं वार्तिकत्वम् '. If this definition be followed, many of the Vaarttikas given in the Maahibhaasya as explaining and commenting upon the Sutras will not strictly be termed as Vaarttikaas, and their total number which is given as exceeding 5000, will be reduced to about 1400 or so. There are some manuscript copies which give this reduced number, and it may be said that only these Vārttikas were written by Kātyāyana while the others were added by learned grammarians after Kātyāyana. In the Mahābhāșya there are seen more than 5000 statements of the type of Vārttikas out of which Dr. Kielhorn has marked about 4200 as Vārttikas. At some places the Mahābhāșyakāra has quoted the names of the authors of some Vārttikas or their schools, in words such as क्रोष्ट्रीयाः पठन्ति, भारद्वाजीयाः पठन्ति, सौनागाः पठन्ति. et cetera, and others Many of the Vārttikas given in the Mahābhāșya are not seen in the Kāśikāvŗtti, while some more are seen in the Kāśikā-vŗtti, which, evidently are composed by scholars who flourished after Patańjali, as they have not been noticed by the Mahābhāșyakāra. It is very difficult to show separately the statements of the Bhāșyakāra popularly named 'ișțis' from the Vārttikas of Kātyāyana and others. For details see Vol. VII Mahābhāșya, D.E. Society's edition pp. 193-224.

pāṇinisūtravṛtti	a gloss on the grammer rules of Pāņini. Many glosses were written from time to time on the Sûtras of Pāņini, out of which the most important and the oldest one is the one named Kāśikāvŗtti, written by the joint authors Jayāditya and Vāmana in the 7th century A.D. It is believed that the Kāśikāvŗtti was based upon some old Vŗttis said to have been written by कुणि, निर्लूर, चुल्लि, श्वोभूति, वररुचि and others.Besides Kāśikā,the famous Vŗtti, and those of कुणि,निर्लूर and others which are only reported, there are other Vŗttis which are comparatively modern. Some of them have been printed, while others have remained only in manuscript form. Some of these are : the Bhāșāvŗtti by Purusottamadeva, Vyākaranasudhānidhi by Viśveśvara, Gūdhārthadīpinī by Sadāsivamiśra, Sūtravŗtti by Annambhatta, Vaiyākaraņasarvasva by Dharaņīdhara, Śabdabhūșaņa by Nārāyaņa Paņdita, Pāņinisūtravŗtti by Rāmacandrabhațța Tāre and Vyākaranadīpikā by Orambhațța. There are extracts available from a Sūtravŗtti called Bhāgavŗtti which is ascribed to Bhartŗhari, but, which is evidently written by a later writer (विमलमति according to some scholars) as there are found verses from Bhāravi and Māgha quoted in it as noticed by Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛttiin his vŗtti on Pari.76. Glosses based upon Pāņini Sūtras, but having a topical arrangements are also available, the famous ones among these being the Praķriyākaumudī by Rāmacandra Śeșa and the Siddhāntakaumudī by Bhațțojī Dĩkșita. The मध्यमकौमुदी and the लघुकौमुदी can also be noted here although they are the abridgments of the Siddhānta Kaumudī. There are Vŗttis in other languages also, written in modern times, out of which those written by Bōhtlingk, Basu and Renou are well-known.

pārokṣya	remoteness; literally being out of sight; in grammar, पारोक्ष्य is a condition for the use of the perfect tense ( लिट् ). See परोक्ष.

pit	marked with the mute letter प् which is indicative of a grave accent in the case of affixes marked with it, as for example, the affixes तिप् , सिप् and मिप् ; confer, compare अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III. 1.4. A Sarvadhātuka affix, marked with the mute consonant प्, in Pāņiņi's Grammar has been described as instrumental in causing many operations such as (a) the substitution of guņa; (cf P. VII. 3 84,9l). (b) the prevention of guņa in the case of a reduplicative syllable as also in the case of the roots भू and सू ( confer, compare P. VII. 3.87, 88 ); (c) the substitution of Vŗddhi, (confer, compare P. VII. 3.89, 90 ), (d) the augments इ and ई in the case of the roots तृह् and ब्रू respectively ( confer, compare P. VII. 3.92, 93, 94 ), and (e) acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix in the case of the roots भी, हृी, भृ and others ( confer, compare P. VI. 1.192 ). A short vowel (of a root) gets त् added to it when followed by a kŗt affix marked with प्: exempli gratia, for example, विजित्य, प्रकृत्य, et cetera, and others:(confer, compare P. VI. 1.71 ).

pitkaraṇa	marking an affix with the mute consonant प् for several grammatical purposes; see पित्; cfपित्करणानर्थक्यं चानच्कत्वात् P. III. I. 33 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).5. See पित्.

pitkṛta	a grammatical operation caused by an affix marked with the mute consonant प्: confer, compare यत्तु खलु पिति ङित्कृतं प्राप्नोति ङिति च पित्कृतं केन तन्न स्यात्, M. Bh, on III. 1.-3 Vart. 7. For details see पित्.

piśel[ PISCHELL, RICHARD]	a famous European Grammarian of the nineteenth century who wrote many articles on grammatical subjects and wrote a work entitled 'Prakrit Grammar.'

puṃs	masculine: a word used in grammar in the पुंलिङ्ग or the masculine gender; cf स्त्रीपुंनपुंसकेषु Br. De1. varia lectio, another reading, I. 40, confer, comparealso असरूपाणां युवस्थविरस्त्रीपुंसानां विशेषश्चाविवक्षितः सामान्यं च विवक्षितम् । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.68 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1; confer, compare पुंस्प्रवाद. and पौंस्नानि नामानि.

puñjarāja	a famous grammarian of the 12th century who wrote a learned commentaty on a part of the Vāky apadīya of Bhartŗhari in which he has quoted passages from famous writers and grammarians such as भामह, कुन्तक, वामन, हेमचन्द्र and others. The name is found written as पुण्यराज also.

puṇḍarīkākṣa	a grammarian of the fourteenth century who wrote a commentary named कातन्त्रपरिशिष्टटीका on the कातन्त्रव्याकरण.

puṇyanandana	a famous grammarian, who wrote a grammar work, named रूपमाला.

puṇyasundaragāṇi	a jain grammarian who has written a commentary work । on the धातुपाठ of हेमचन्द्र.

punaḥprasaṅgavijñāna	occurrence or possibility of the application of a preceding grammatical rule or operation a second time again, after once it has been set aside by a subsequent opposing rule or rules in conflict; confer, compare पुनःप्रसङ्गविज्ञानात् सिद्धम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 39; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 4.2 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7; confer, comparealso Puru. Pari. 40.

puruṣa	a grammatical term in the sense of 'person:' confer, compare करोतिः पचादीनां सर्वान् कालान् सर्वान् पुरुषान्सर्वाणि वचनान्यनुवर्तते, भवतिः पुनर्वर्तमानकालं चैकत्वं च. These persons or Purușas are described to be three प्रथम, मध्यम and उत्तम corresponding to the third second and first persons respectively in English Grammar; confer, compare also Nirukta of Yāska.VII. l and 2.

puruṣottamadeva	a famous grammarian believed to have been a Buddhist, who flourished in the reign of Lakșmaņasena in the latter half of the twelfth century in Bengal. Many works on grammar are ascribed to him, the prominent ones among which are the Bhāșāvŗtti and the Paribhāșāvŗtti, the Gaņavŗtti and the Jñapakasamuccaya and a commentary on the Mahābhāșya called Prāņapaņā of which only a fragment is available. Besides these works on grammar, he has written some lexicographical works of which Hārāvalī, Trikāņdaśeșa, Dvirūpakosa, and Ekaaksarakosa are the prominent ones. The Bhasavrtti has got a lucid commentary on it written by Srstidhara.

puruṣottamavidyāvāgīśa	a famous grammarian of Bengal, who wrote the grammar work Prayogaratnamala in the fifteenth century. The work betrays a deep study and scholarship of the writer in the Mantrasāstra.

puṣkaraṇa	a popular term used for the treatise on grammar by an ancient grammarian Apisali. confer, compare अापिशलं पुष्करणम् Kas on P. IV. 3. 15. It was called Puskarana probably because it was very extensive and widely read before Panini. For the reading दुष्करण for पुष्करण, and other details see Mahabhasya Vol. VII. pp. 132-133, D. E. Society's edition.

pūjārtha	lit for the sake of paying respect. The word is used by commentators in connection with references to ancient grammarians by Panini in his sutras, where the commentators usually say that the sutras citing the views of ancient grammarians imply merely an option, the name being quoted merely to show respect to the grammarian; confer, compare अापिशलिग्रहणं पूजार्थम् S.K. on P.VI.1.92.

pūjyapāda	originally a title, but mostly used in connection with the famous Jain grammarian देवनन्दिन् whose work on grammar called जैनेन्द्रव्याकरण is well-known: see देवनन्दिन्.

pūrvatrāsiddhavacana	the dictum of Panini about rules in his second, third and fourth quarters (Padas) of the eighth Adhyaya being invalid to (viz. not seen by) all the previous rules in the first seven chapters and the first quarter of the eighth as laid down by him in the rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् VIII.2.1. The rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् is taken also as a governing rule id est, that is अधिकार laying down that in the last three quarters also of his grammar, a subsequent rule is invalid to the preceding rule. The purpose of this dictum is to prohibit the application of the rules in the last three quarters as also that of a subsequent rule in the last three quarters, before all such preceding rules, as are applicable in the formation of a word, have been given effect to; confer, compare एवमिहापि पर्वेत्रासिद्धवचनं अादेशलक्षणप्रतिषेधार्थमुत्सर्गलक्षणभावार्थं च M.Bh. on P. VIII.2.1 Vart. 8.

pūrvatrāsiddhīya	an operation prescribed in the province of the rule पूर्वेत्रासिद्धम् id est, that is in the last three quarters of the eighth book of Panini's grammar.

pūrvanighāta	the grave accent for the preceding acute vowel as a result of the following vowel made acute, and the preceding , as a result, turned into grave by virtue of the rule अनुदात्तं पदमेकवर्जम् VI.1.198: confer, compare मतुब्विभक्त्युदात्तत्वं पूर्वनिघातस्यानिमित्तं स्यात् । अग्निमान् । वायुमान् । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.39 Vart. 16.

pūrvanipāta	placing first (in a compound); priority of a word in a compound, as in the case of an adjectival word, For special instructions in grammar about priority see P. II.2.30 to 38.

pūrvasūtra	literally previous rule: a rule cited erlier in a treatise. The word is however, frequently used in the Mahabhasya in the sense of 'a rule laid down by an earlier grammarian': confer, compareवर्ण वाहुः पूर्वसूत्रे M. Bh, Ahnika 1, पूर्वसूत्रे गोत्रस्य वृद्धमिति संज्ञा क्रियते M. Bh on I. 2.68; confer, compare also M.Bh. on P.IV.1.14 Vart. 3, VI.I. 163 Vart. 1, VII.1.18, VIII. 4.7.

pūrvāntasasvara	belonging to the previous vowel in syllabication; e. g. a consonant at the end of a word or the first in a consonant group ( संयोग ).

pṛthvīdharācārya	a grammarian of the Eastern school who wrote the treatise कातन्त्रविवरण on Katantra Grammar.

pṛṣodarādi	a group of words, with irregularity in the coalescence of the two constituent members, collected together by Panini and mentioned together with the word पृषोदर at the head; confer, compare पृषोदरादीनि यथोपदिष्टम् P.VI. 3. 109; confer, compare also येषु लोपागमवर्णविकारः शास्त्रेण न विहिताः, दृश्यन्ते च तानि, यथोपदिष्टानि साधूनि भवन्ति । पृषोदरम् , बलाहकः, जीमूतः, पिशाचः, वृसी, मयूरः,पयोपवसनानाम्, दूढ्यः et cetera, and others Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VI. 3.109.

pedubhaṭṭa	a grammarian.who has written a treatise named औणादिकपदार्णव on the Unadi sutras.

paurastyavaiyākaraṇa	a grammarian of the eastern school which is believed to have been started by जिनेन्द्रबुद्धि the writer of the gloss called न्यास on the Kasikavrtti. The school practically terminated with पुरुषोत्तमदेव and सीरदेव at the end of the twelfth century A.D. Such a school existed also at the time of Panini and Patanjali, a reference to which is found made in प्राचां ष्फ ताद्धतः P. IV. 1.17 and प्राचामवृद्धात्फिन् बहुलम् IV.1. 160 and प्राचामुपादेरडज्वुचौ च V.3.80 where the word is explained as प्राचामाचार्याणां by the writer of the Kasika.

pauṣkarasādi	an ancient grammarian who belonged to the dynasty of पुष्करसद्, whose views are quoted by the Varttikakara and the writers of the Pratisakhya works: cf चयो द्वितीयाः शारि पौष्करसादेः P. VIII. 4.48 Vart. 3; confer, compare also व्यञ्जनपरः पौष्करसादेर्न पूर्वश्च ञकारम् Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V: confer, compare also Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIII. 16; XIV. 2, XVII. 6.

prakalpakriya	a word in which a verbal activity has to be conjectured, as for example, the words गौः, अश्वः et cetera, and others Words which are not actually derived by rules of grammar are called प्रकल्पक्रिय as contrasted with प्रत्यक्षक्रिय.

prakṛti(1)	material cause: confer, compare. तदर्थे विकृते: प्रकृतौ । प्रकृतिरुपादानकारणं तस्यैव उत्तरमवस्थान्तरं विकृतिः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P.V.1.12; (2) original, as opposed to modified' ( विकृति ); the original base of a word which is used in language by the addition of affixes. There are mentioned three kinds of such original words in grammar, roots ( धातु ), noun bases ( प्रातिपदिक ) and affixes (प्रत्यय). प्रकृति is defined as शास्त्रप्रक्रियक्रियाव्यवहारे प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभागकल्पनय शब्दार्थभावनायां प्रत्ययात् प्रथममुपादानकारणामिव या उपादीयते तां प्रकृतिरिति व्यापदिशन्ति' in the Sringaraprakasa; confer, compare अपशब्दो ह्यस्य प्रकृति: । न चापशब्द: प्रकृतिः ， न ह्यपशब्दा उपदिश्यन्ते न चानुपदिष्टा प्रकृतिरस्ति । M.Bh. on Siva Sutra 2; confer, compare also कृत्प्रकृतिर्धातु: M.Bh. on P. VI. 2. 139 Vart. 2; पदप्रकृति: संहिता । पदप्रक्तीनि सर्वचरणानां पार्षदानि Nirukta of Yāska.I.17.

prakṛtipratyayavibhāga	division of a word (in use in a language) into the base and the affix, which is looked upon as the main function of grammar.

prakriyākaumudī	a well-known work on Sanskrit Grammar by रामचन्द्रशेष of the 15th century, in which the subject matter of the eight chapters of Panini's grammar is arranged into several different sections forming the different topics of grammar. It is similar to, and possibly. the predecessor of, the Siddhanta Kaumudi which has a similar arrangement. The work was very popular before the Siddhinta Kaumudi was written. it has got many commentaries numbering about a dozen viz. प्रक्रियाप्रसाद, प्रक्रियाप्रकाश, प्रक्रियाप्रदीप, अमृतस्तुति, प्रक्रियाव्याकृति,निर्मलदर्पण,तत्वचन्द्र, प्रक्रियारञ्जन, प्रक्रियाविवरण and others of which the Prasada of Vitthalesa and the Prakasa of Srikrsna are the wellknown ones.

prakriyākaumudīvṛtti	called also प्रक्रियाकौमुदीव्याख्या or even कृष्णपण्डिता ( वृत्ति ) written by a learned grammarian named Krsnapandita belonging to the famous Sesa family of grammarians.

prakriyākaumudīsāra	a commentary on Ramacandra's Prakriyakaumud by a grammarian named Kasinatha

prakriyāprasāda	name of the scholarly commentary on Ramacandra's Prakriyakaumudi, written by Vitthalesa, the grandson of Ramachandra.

pragṛhītapadā	a description of the Samhhita text of the Veda in which a pragrhya vowel preceding another vowel is held up ( प्रगृह्य ) id est, that is kept as it is, without any euphonic combination; confer, compare सहोदयास्ताः प्रग्रहीतपदाः सर्वत्रैव त्र्यक्षरान्तास्तु नैव Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II. 27.

pracaya(1)	a specific feature or quality ( धर्म ) of the grave (अनुदात्त) accent when a vowel, accented grave, is preceded by a स्वरित (circumflex . vowel) and is followed upon by another grave-accented vowel. These grave vowels in succession, id est, that is the grave vowels which are not followed by an acute or a circumflex vowel are uttered neither distinctly circumflex nor distinctly grave; cf also R. Pr, III.II-14. They are uttered like the acute, but slightly so; e. g. the vowels after मे and before ति in इमं मे गङ्गे' यमुने सरस्वति; confer, compare स्वरितात्संहितायामनुदात्तानां प्रचय उदात्तश्रुतिः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXI.10, 11 also confer, compare P.I.2.39, where the term एकश्रुति is used for the word प्रचय; (2) the connection of one word with many words; exempli gratia, for example राज्ञो गोश्चाश्वश्च पुरुषश्च where राज्ञः is connected with गौ, अश्व and पुरुष; confer, compare प्रचये समासप्रतिषेधो: वक्तव्य: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.1.1 Vart, 6.

pratiloma	literally regressive; a kind of Sandhi or euphonic combination, in which the consonant precedes and the vowel comes after it; e. g. हव्यवाडग्निः; confer, compare प्रतिलोमसंधिषु व्यञ्जनानि पूर्वाणि स्वरा उत्तरे; Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 4.

pratiṣiddha	a rule or operation which is prohibited or prevented from application by a specific negation of it by another rule or operation laid down to prohibit it. Generally the prohibited rule does not apply again; confer, compare सकृद्रतौ विप्रतिषेधे यद्वाधितं तद्वाधितमेव Par, Sek.Pari. 40; confer, compareनोत्सहते प्रतिषिद्धा सती बाधितुम् । M.Bh. on P. I. 1.43. The word प्रातिषिद्ध which is generally used in ancient works appears to be an earlier word as compared with निषिद्ध which is used by later grammarians.

pratyaya	affix, suffix, a termination, as contrasted with प्रकृति the base; confer, compare प्रत्याय्यते अर्थः अनेन इति प्रत्ययः; confer, compare also अर्थे संप्रत्याययति स प्रत्ययः M.Bh. on III. 1.l Vart. 8; The word प्रत्यय is used in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of 'following' or 'that which follows', e. g. स्पर्शे चोषः प्रत्यये पूर्वपद्यः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 30 which is explained by Uvvata as उषः इत्ययं ( शब्दः ) पूर्वपदावयवः सन् स्पर्शे प्रत्यये परभूते इति यावत्; रेफिसंज्ञो भवति; Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.30; confer, compare प्रत्येति पश्चादागच्छति इति प्रत्ययः परः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V. 7; cf also V. Pr, III. 8. Pratyaya or the suffix is generally placed after the base; cf, प्रत्ययः, परश्च P. III. I. 1,2; but sometimes it is placed before the base; e. g. बहुपटुः confer, compare विभाषा सुपो बहुच् पुरस्तात्तु P. V. 3.68. The conjugational signs (शप् , श्यन् et cetera, and others), the signs of tenses and moods ( च्लि, सिच् , स्य, ताम् et cetera, and others) and the compound endings(समासान्त) are all called pratyayas according fo Panini's grammar, as they are all given in the jurisdiction(अधिकार) of the rule प्रत्ययः III.1.1, which extends upto the end of the fifth chapter ( अध्याय ). There are six main kinds of affixes given in grammar सुप्प्रत्यय, तिङ्प्रत्यय, कृत्प्रत्यय , तद्धितप्रत्यय, धातुप्रत्यय (exempli gratia, for example in the roots चिकीर्ष, कण्डूय et cetera, and others) and स्त्रीप्रत्यय. The word प्रत्यय is used in the sense of realization, in which case the root इ in the word त्यय means'knowing' according to the maxim सर्वे गत्यर्था ज्ञानार्थाः; confer, compare मन्त्रार्थप्रत्ययाय Nirukta of Yāska.I.15.

pratyāhāra	literally bringing together; bringing together of several letters ( or words in a few cases, such as roots or nouns ) by mentioning the first and the last only for the sake of brevity; the term प्रत्याहार is generally used in connection with brief terms such as अण्, अक् , अच् , हल् and the like, created by Panini in his grammar by taking any particular letter and associating it with any mute final letter ( अनुबन्ध ) of the fourteen Sivasutras, with a view to include all letters beginning with the letter uttered and ending with the letter which precedes the ( mute ) letter. The practice of using such abbreviations was in existence before Panini, possibly in the grammar attributed to Indra. The term प्रत्याहार is not actually used by Panini; it is found in the Rk. Tantra; confer, compare प्रत्याहारार्थो वर्णोनुबन्धो व्यञ्जनम् R.T.I.3. The term appears to have come into use after Panini. Panini has not given any definition of the term प्रत्याहार. He has simply given the method of forming the Pratyaharas and he has profusely used them; confer, compare आदिरन्त्येन सहेता P. I. 1.71. The word कृञ् in P. III.1.40 and तृन् in P. II. 3.69 are used as Pratyaharas. For a list of the Pratyharas which are used by Panini see Kasika on the Maheswara Sutras.

pratyāhārasūtravicāra	a short treatise explaining the pratyharas अण् , अट्, अश् et cetera, and others in the grammar of Panini; one such work is written by a southern grammarian named तिमण्णा.

pratyudāharaṇa	counter instance. In order to explain the wording of a grammatical rule clearly, it is customary to give along with the instances of the rule (where the rule has been effectively employed), a few words which would have resulted into other faulty words by the application of the particular rule in case that rule had not been stated or a word or more of it had been omitted; confer, compare न केवलानि चर्चापदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः आत् ऐच् इति । किं तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः इत्येतत् समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). in Ahnika 1.

prathama	lit, premier, first; the word is used in connection with the personal affixes तिप् , तस्, झि ( अन्ति ) of verbal formanuscript. See the word पुरुष a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare अस्तिर्भवन्तीपरः प्रथमपुरुषः अप्रयुज्यमानोप्यस्तीति । वृक्षः प्लक्षः। Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 3.1 and 4. The word प्रथम is used in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of the first consonants of the five vargas or groups of consonants; confer, compare प्रथमैर्द्वितीयास्तृतीयैश्चतुर्थाः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 110 confer, compare प्रथमतृतीयादीनामादेशादित्वादेत्वाभावः, M.Bh. on P. VI. 4.120 Vart 3, also confer, compare Katantra I. 4.1 and Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. I. 3.35. The word is also used (in the feminine gender) in the sense of the case affixes सु ( स् ), औ, जस् ( अस् ) of the nominative case. The word is also used in the sense of the premier accent उदात्त (acute); confer, compare प्रथमभाविनः उदात्तभाविनः Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 8.

pradīpa	popular name of the famous commentary on the Mahabhasya of Patanjali written by the reputed grammarian Kaiyata in the eleventh century A. D. The cornmentary is a very scholarly and critical one and really does justice to the well-known compliment given to it, viz. that the Pradipa has kept the Mahabhasya alive which otherwise would have remained unintelligible and consequently become lost. The commentary प्रदीप is based on the commentary महाभाष्यदीपिका,or प्रदीपिका written by Bhartrhari, which is available at present only in a fragmentary form. The Pradipa is to this day looked upon as the single commentary on the Mahabhasya in spite of the presence of a few other commentaries on it which are all thrown into the back-ground by it.

pradīpavivaraṇa	called also उद्द्योत written by the well-known grammarian Nagesabhatta of Varanasi who flourished in the first half of the eighteenth century.

prabhācandra	a Jain grammarian who wrote a learned commentary named Nyasa on the Amoghavrtti of Amoghavarsa.

prayoga(1)	employment or use of a word in language and literature about which, laying down rules is looked upon as the purpose of grammar; confer, compare प्रयोगमूलत्वाद् व्याकरणस्मृतेः Kaiy.on P. V. 1.16, लोकतोर्थप्रयुक्ते शब्दप्रयोगे शास्त्रेण धर्मनियमो यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika I. Vart. 1; (2) use of speech; utterance; confer, compare मध्यमेन स वाक्प्रयोगः प्रणवात्मकः कर्तव्यः, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVIII. 4.

prayoganiyama	general rules or principles laid down regarding the use of words in language and literature such as (l) a word recognised as correct should always be used, confer, compare एवमिहापि समानायामर्थगतौ शब्देन चापशब्देन च धर्मनियमः क्रियते शब्देनैवार्थोभिधेयो नापशब्देनेति । एवंक्रियमाणमभ्युदयकारि भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. I. Ahnika l, (2) never a base alone or an affix alone should be used, but always a base with the necessary affix should be used; confer, compare यावता समयः कृतो न केवला प्रकृतिः प्रयोक्तव्या न केवलः प्रत्ययः M. Bh, on P. I. 2.64 Vart. 8, also on P. III. 1.94 Vart. 3; (3) when the sense is already expressed by a word, a word repeating the sense should not be used; confer, compare उक्तार्थानामप्रयोगः. Besides these, many minor regulations of the type of Paribhasas are laid down by grammarians. For details see Paribhashasamgraha Introduction.

prayogamukhamaṇḍana	known also by the name प्रयोगविवेक, an elementary treatise on syntax, attributed to वररुचि, who must, of course, have been different from the ancient grammarian वररुचि.

prayogaratnamālā	name of a recognised treatise on grammar written by पुरुषोत्तमविद्यावागीश of Bengal in the fourteenth century. The treatise explains many words which, although current in language and literature, cannot be easily formed by rules of grammar. The author has tried to form them by applying rules of grammar given in the grammatical systems of Panini and Katantra. The alphabet given in this treatise is according to the system of the Tantra Sastra which shows a scholarship of the author in that branch The grammar was studied much in Bengal and Assam.

pravartakopādhyāya	a grammarian who wrote an explanatory gloss named कैयटप्रकाशिका on the महाभाष्यप्रदीप written by Kaiyatabhatta.

pravāda	a grammatical explanation; detailed explanation by citing the gender, number, krt affix, taddhita affix.affix and the like: confer, compare लिङ्गसंख्यातद्धितकृतरूपभेदाः प्रवादाः । पाण्यादिशब्दानां प्रवादेषु प्रथमो (original) नकारो णत्वमाप्नोति स च प्राकृतः । Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIII. 9. The word is explained as a change in the form of a word, as for instance, by the substitution of स् for विसर्ग where विसर्ग is, in fact, expected; confer, compare कबन्धं पृथु इत्येतेषां पदानां प्रवादा रूपभेदा उदये परत्रावस्थिताः दिव इत्येतस्य उपचारं जनयन्ति । यथा दिवस्कबन्धम् , दिवस्पृथुः Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) IV. 22; confer, compare also प्रवादाः षडितः परे, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) IX. 18. In the Nirukta, the word is used in the sense of 'distinct mention'; confer, compare एवमन्यासामपि देवतानामादित्यप्रवादाः स्तुतयो भवन्ति ( deities are mentioned under the name of Aditya) Nir II.13; cf also वैश्वानरीयाः प्रवादाः Nir, VII. 23.

pravṛtta( I)	complete; confer, compare अथ य प्रवृत्त अथे अमिताक्षरेषु ग्रन्थेषु वाक्यपूरणा आगच्छन्ति पदपूरणास्ते, Nirukta of Yāska.I. 9; (2) which has preSented itself, which has become applicable; the word is used in connection with a grammatical rule or operation ; confer, compare एवं च कृत्वा धर्मशास्त्रं प्रवृत्तम् ; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.64 Vart.39; समुदाये व्राह्मणशब्दः प्रवृतेवयवेष्वपि वर्तते जातिहीने गुणहीने च । M.Bh. on II. 2.6; confer, compare दीर्घस्य यण् ह्रस्व इति प्रवृत्तं, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI.1.77; also confer, compare यद्यपि ङिच्चेत्ययमपवादः ... तातङि मन्थरं प्रवृत्तः परेण बाध्यते S. K. on P.VII.1.35.

prasakta	applicable, but not actually applied; the word is used in connection with a grammatical ’rule or operation that has become applicable, but has not been applied; confer, compare उत्सर्गस्य प्रसक्तस्यापवादो वाधको भवति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II.3 32, also प्रसक्तस्यादर्शनं लोपसंज्ञं भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). and S.K. on P.I.1. 60. The term प्रसक्त is opposed to the term अभिनिर्वृत्त.

prasaṅga	applicability; possibility of being applied; the word is used with respect to a grammatical rule or operation which is on the point of being applied or taking place; the word प्राति is also used in the same sense; confer, compare को हि शब्दस्य प्रसङ्गः यत्र गम्यते चार्थो न च प्रयुज्यते M.Bh.on P.I.1.60 confer, compare also द्वौ प्रसङ्गौ अन्यार्थां एकस्मिन् स विप्रतिषेधः,Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.4. 2; also confer, compare प्रसङ्गे सति सदृशतम आदेशः स्यात् S.K. on स्थानेन्तरतमः P. I.1.50.

prasāraṇa	a term used by ancient grammarians for संप्रसारण, i.e, the substitution of a corresponding vowel for a semivowel; exempli gratia, for example इ for य्, उ for व्, ऋ for र् and लृ for ल्: confer, compare रकि ज्यः प्रसारणम् P.I.1.4. Vart. 6.

prākṛtasarvasya	a treatise on the grammar of Prakrta Languages attributed to Markandeya

prākkītīya	name given to a group of tad, affixes छ, यत् and others prescribed in the different senses ( हित and others) given in rules upto तेन क्रीतम् P.V. 1.37 from तस्मै हितम् P. V. 1.5.

prācīnamata	the view or doctrine of the former or rather older grammarians. The word is used in many commentary books and the meaning of the word is to be decided according to the context. For example in the works of Ramacandra, the author of the Prakriyakaumudi and his followers, the word refers to the view given by the writers of the Kasikavrtti and the commentaries thereon in the works of Bhattoji and his pupils, it refers to the writer of the Prakriyakaumudi in addition to the writers of the Kasika, while in the works of Nagesa it refers to the writings of Bhattoji and his pupils. For details see Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. V1I pp. 23-24 D. E. Society's Edition.

prācyāvaiyākaraṇa	an eastern grammarian; the term प्राच्य (eastern) being a relative term, the east is to be taken with respect to the place in the context. The word प्राचां occurs many times in Panini's Sutras and the term प्राक् may refer to countries east of the river शरावती or सरस्वती in the Punjab. See प्राग्देश a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. प्राचां is understood by some commentators as referring to time, in which case, the word may refer to ancient grammarians आपिशलि, शाकटायन, इन्द्र and others who lived before Panini; confer, compare प्राचीनवैयाकरणतन्त्रे वाचनिकानि ...Par. Sek. Pari. 1. The word प्राचीन is, of course, mostly used in the sense of ancient, rather than the word प्राच्. For specific peculiarities of the eastern grammarians see pp. 148-149 Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's Edition.

prāṇapaṇā	a gloss on the Mahabhasya of Patanjali, written by the famous easterm grammarian Purusottamadeva of the 12th century A. D., of which only a fragment of a few pages is available. As the legend goes, the name प्राणपणा was given to the gloss as it was accompanied by an oath on the part of the author that his life was at stake if he did even the slightest injustice to the author of the Mahabhasya.

prātipadika	literallyavailable in every word. The term प्रातिपादिक can be explained as प्रतिपदं गृह्णाति तत् प्रातिपदिकम् cf P.IV. 4. 39. The term प्रातिपदिक, although mentioned in the Brahmana works, is not found in the Pratisakhya works probably because those works were concerned with formed words which had been actually in use. The regular division of a word into the base ( प्रकृति ) and the affix ( प्रत्यय ) is available, first in the grammar of Panini, who has given two kinds of bases, the noun-base and the verb-base. The noun-base is named Pratipadika by him while the verb-base is named Dhatu. The definition of Pratipadika is given by him as a word which is possessed of sense, but which is neither a root nor a suffix; confer, compare अर्थवदधातुरप्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम् . P.I. 2.45. Although his definition includes, the krdanta words,the taddhitanta words and the compound words, still, Panini has mentioned them separately in the rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च P. I. 2.45 to distinguish them as secondary noun-bases as compared with the primary noun-bases which are mentioned in the rule अर्थवदधातुरप्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम्, Thus,Panini implies four kinds of Pratipadikas मूलभूत, कृदन्त, तद्धितान्त and समास, The Varttikakara appears to have given nine kinds-गुणवचन, सर्वनाम, अव्यय, तद्धितान्त, कृदन्त, समास, जाति, संख्या and संज्ञा. See Varttikas 39 to 44 on P. I. 4. 1. Later on, Bhojaraja in his SringaraPrakasa has quoted the definition अर्थवदधातु given by Panini, and has given six subdivisions.: confer, compare नामाव्ययानुकरणकृत्तद्धितसमासाः प्रातिपदिकानि Sr. Prak. I. page 6. For the sense conveyed by a Pratipadika or nounbase, see प्रातिपदिकार्थ.

prātipadikārtha	denoted sense of a Pratipadika or a noun-base. Standard grammarians state that the denotation of a pratipadika is five-fold viz. स्वार्थ, द्रव्य, लिङ्ग, संख्या and कारक. The word स्वार्थ refers to the causal factor of denotation or प्रवृत्तिनिमित्त which is of four kinds जाति, गुण, क्रिया and संज्ञा as noticed respectively in the words गौः, शुक्लः, चलः and डित्ः. The word द्रव्य refers to the individual object which sometimes is directly denoted as in अश्वमानय, while on some occasions it is indirectly denoted through the genus or the general notion as in ब्राह्मणः पूज्य:, लिङ्ग the gender, संख्या the number and कारक the case-relation are the denotations of the case-terminations, but sometimes as they are conveyed in the absence of a case-affix as in the words पञ्च, दश, and others, they are stated as the denoted senses of the Pratipadika, while the case-affixes are said to indicate them; confer, compare वाचिका द्योतिका वा स्युः शब्दादीनां विभक्तयः Vakyapadiya.

prātiśākhya	a work on Vedic grammar of a specific nature, which is concerned mainly with the changes, euphonic and others, in the Pada text of the Samhita as compared with the running text, the Samhita itselfeminine. The Pratisakhya works are neither concerned with the sense of words, nor with their division into bases and affixes, nor with their etymology. They contain, more or less,Vedic passages arranged from the point of view of Samdhi. In the Rk Pratisakhya, available to-day, topics of metre, recital, phonetics and the like are introduced, but it appears that originally the Rk Pratisakhya, just like the Atharva Pratisakhya, was concerned with euphonic changes, the other subjects being introduced later on. The word प्रातिशाख्य shows that there were such treatises for everyone of the several Sakhas or branches of each Veda many of which later on disappeared as the number of the followers of those branches dwindledition Out of the remaining ones also, many were combined with others of the same Veda. At present, only five or six Pratisakhyas are available which are the surviving representatives of the ancient ones - the Rk Pratisakhya by Saunaka, the Taittiriya Pratisakhya, the Vajasaneyi PratiSakhya by Katyayana, the Atharva Pratisakhya and the Rk Tantra by Sakatayana, which is practically a Pratisakhya of the Sama Veda. The word पार्षद or पारिषद was also used for the Pratisakhyas as they were the outcome of the discussions of learned scholars in Vedic assemblies; cf परिषदि भवं पार्षदम्. Although the Pratisakhya works in nature, are preliminary to works on grammar, it appears that the existing Pratisakhyas, which are the revised and enlarged editions of the old ones, are written after Panini's grammar, each one of the present Prtisakhyas representing, of course, several ancient Pratisakhyas, which were written before Panini. Uvvata, a learned scholar of the twelfth century has written a brief commentary on the Rk Pratisakhya and another one on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. The Taittiriya PratiSakhya has got two commentaries -one by Somayarya, called Tribhasyaratna and the other called Vaidikabharana written by Gopalayajvan. There is a commentary by Ananta bhatta on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. These commentaries are called Bhasyas also.

prādi	a group of words beginning with प्र, which are all prefixes or upasargas e. g, प्र, परा, अप et cetera, and others cf कुगतिप्रादयः P. II. 2. 18.

prepsu	desiderative adjective; a word formed by adding the affix उ in the sense of ' an agent ' to a desiderative root by the rule सनाशंसभिक्ष उः P.III.2.168. The term प्रेप्सु was used for such nouns by ancient grammarians.

preṣaṇī	a term used by ancient grammarians for the imperative mood or लोट् of Panini.

prauḍhamanoramā	popularly called मनोरमा also; the famous commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita written by the author himself to explain fully in a scholarly manner the popular grammar written by him; , the word प्रौढमनेारमा is used in contrast with बालमनोरमा another commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi by Vasudevadiksita. On account of the difficult nature of it, it is usual to read the प्रौढमनेारमा upto the end of the Karaka-prakarana only in the Sanskrit PathaSalas before the study of the Sabdendusekhara and the Paribhsendusekhara is undertaken.

prauḍhamanoramākhaṇḍana(1)	a grammatical work written by a grammarian named Cakrapani of the Sesa family of grammarians. The work is meant to refute the arguments of Bhattoji Diksita in his Praudhamanorama; (2) a grammar work written by the famous poet and rhetorician Jagannātha in refutation of the doctrines and explanations given in the Praudhamanorama by the stalwart Grammarian Bhattoji Diksita. The work is not a scholarly one and it has got a tone of banter. It was written by Jagannatha to show that he could also write works on Grammar and the bearded pedant Bhattoji should not be proud of his profound scholarship in Grammar. The work of Jagannatha was named मनोरमाकुचमर्दन possibly by his followers or even by himselfeminine.

prauḍhamanoramāṭīkā	a commentary on Bhattoji DikSita's Praudhamanorama written by Bhattoji's grandson Hari Diksita. The commentary is called लघुशब्दरत्न or simple शब्दरत्न which is an abridgment of the author's work बृहच्छब्दरत्न. The Laghusabdaratna is widely studied along with the Praudhamanorama in the Pathasalas.

plākṣāyaṇa	an ancient Vedic scholar who presumably wrote a work on Vedic grammar (of the type of the Pratisakhya works).For a difference of view he is quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya: confer, compareन प्लाक्षिप्लाक्षायणयेाः T.Pr. IX.6.

pluta	protracted, name given to vowels in the protracted grade. The vowels in this grade which are termed protracted vowels are possessed of three matras and in writing they are marked with the figure 3 placed after them. In pronunciation they take a longer time than the long or दीर्घ vowels; confer, compare ऊकालोज्झ्रस्वदीर्घप्लुतः P. I.2.27. The word is derived from प्लु (प्रु also) I Atmane to go, and explained as प्लवते इति, The word प्लवते is often found for प्लुतो भवति in the Pratisakhya works; cf also मात्रा ह्रस्वरतावदवग्रहान्तरं, द्वे दीर्धस्तिस्रः प्लुत उच्यते स्वरः । अधः स्विदासी३दुपरि स्विदासी३द् अर्थे प्लुतिर्भीरिव विन्दती३त्रिः ll Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.16.

phak(1)	taddhita affix.affix फ marked with mute क् for effecting the वृद्धि substitute for the initial vowel of the word to which it is appliedition The initial letter फ् of all the affixes beginning with फ् in Panini's grammar is always changed into आयन्. The taddhita affix. affix फक् is affixed (1) in the sense of गोत्रापत्य grandchild and his issues, to the words नड and others as also to the words ending with the affixes यञ् and इञ् and words शरद्वत्, दर्भ, द्रोण et cetera, and others exempli gratia, for example नाडायनः, शालङ्कायनः, दाक्षायणः प्लाक्षायणः, द्रोणायनः, वैदः, अौर्वः et cetera, and others; cf P.IV. 1.99-103; (2) as a caturarthika affix in the four senses mentioned in P. IV. 2.67-70 to the words पक्ष and others e. g. पाक्षायणः, तौषायणः; confer, compare P.IV. 2.80.

phañ	taddhita affix. affix फ marked with ञ् causing the Vrddhi substitute for the initial vowel of the word, applied in the sense of grandchildren and their issues to words अश्व and others, as also to the word भर्ग; exempli gratia, for exampleआश्वायन, अाश्मायनः, भार्गायणः confer, compare अश्वादिभ्यः फञ् and भर्गात् त्रैगर्ते; confer, compare P.IV.1.110 and 111.

phala(1)	fruit or benefit of an action which goes to the agent; confer, compare फलव्यापारयोर्धातुः Vaiyakarana-bhusana. A root which is given as Ubhayapadin in Panini's Grammar takes the Atmanepada affixes when the fruit of the activity is meant for the agent, while otherwise it takes the Parasmaipada affixes; (2) The word फल also means the result of a grammatical operation or grammatical injunction.

phin	taddhita affix. affix आयनि in the sense of offspring added according to the Eastern grammarians to words not beginning with आ, ऐ or औ, exempli gratia, for example ग्लुचुकायनिः,confer, compare IV.1.160.

barnel[ BURNELL., Dr.]	a European Sanskrit scholar who has written a learned booklet 'Aindra School of Sanskrit Grammarians' which discusses the problem of the Aindra grammar. See ऐन्द्र.

balīyastva	relative superiority in strength possessed by rules of grammar or by operations based on rules of grammar. This Superiority is decided generally on any one or more of the four recognised criteria such as परत्व, नित्यत्व, अन्तरङ्गत्व and अपवादत्व. The phrase अन्तरङ्गबलीयस्त्वात् very frequently occurs in the varttikas and in the Mahabhasya; confer, compare M.Bh. on P. III. 1.67, VI.i.17, 85 Vart. 15, VI. 4.62 and VII.1.1.

bahiraṅga	a rule or operation which is बहिरङ्ग (literally external); the word बहिरङ्ग is used in grammar in connection with a rule or operation, the cause ( निमित्त )of which occurs later in place or time than the cause of the other which is called अन्तरङ्ग. For the various kinds of बहिरङ्गत्व see the word अन्तरङ्ग where the kinds of अन्तरङ्गत्व are given.

bahula	literally variously applicable; the word is used in the rules of Panini in connection with a grammatical rule or affix or the like that is seen necessarily applied in some cases, optionally applied in a few other cases and not at all applied in the other cases still. The word बहुलम् is used by Panini in all such cases. See P. II. 1.32, 57; II. 3.62; II.4.39, 73, 76, 84, III. 1.34 et cetera, and others; confer, compare the usual explanation of बहुलम् given by grammarians in the lines क्वचित्प्रवृत्तिः क्वचिदप्रवृत्तिः क्वचिद्विभाषा क्वचिदन्यदेव । विधेर्विधानं बहुधा समीक्ष्य चतुर्विधं बाहुलकं वदन्ति Com. Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III.18.

bahulapāda	name given by grammarians to the third pada of the third adhyaya of the Astdhyayi.

bahuvrīhi	a compound similar in meaning to the word बहुव्रीहि ( possessed of much rice ) which, in sense shows quite a distinct object than those which are shown by the constituent members of the compound; a relative or adjective compound. There are various kinds of the Bahuvrihi compound such as समानाधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, व्यधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, संख्याबहुव्रीहि, दिग्बहुव्रीहि, सहबहुव्रीहि, नञ्बहुव्रीहि, and अनेकपदबहुव्रीहि which depend upon the specific peculiarity noticed in the various cases. Panini in his grammar has not given any definition of बहुव्रीहि, but has stated that a compound other than those already given viz. अव्ययीभाव, द्वन्द्व and तत्पुरुष, is बहुव्रीहि and cited under Bahuvrihi all cases mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; cf शेषो बहुव्रीहिः II. 3.23-28; also confer, compare अन्यपदार्थप्रधानो बहुव्रीहिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 1.6; II. 1.20; II. 1.49.

bahvapekṣa	literally depending on many; the word is used in the sense of depending on many causal factors ( निमित्तानि ) and given as the definition of a kind of बहिरङ्ग by some grammarians; confer, compare अल्पापेक्षमन्तरङ्गं बह्वपेक्षं बहिरङ्गम् . This kind of अन्तरङ्गबहिरङ्गत्व, cited by Kaiyata is, however, disapproved by Nagesabhatta; confer, compare बहुिरङ्गान्तरङ्गाशब्दाभ्यां बह्वपेक्षत्वाल्पापेक्षत्वयोः शब्दमर्यादया अलाभाच्च । तथा सति असिद्धं बह्वपेक्षमल्पापेक्षे इत्येव वदेत् । Par. Sek. on Pari. 50.

bādhakatva	the same as बाध ; sublation; setting aside; this sublation is described to be of two types(1) complete sublation when the rule set aside, is for ever set aside and cannot, by the maxim called तक्रकौण्डिन्यन्याय, be applied again; confer, compare दधि ब्राह्मणेभ्यो दीयतां तक्रं कौण्डिन्यायेति सत्यपि संभवे दधिदानस्य तक्रदानं निवर्तकं भवति । confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.47; VI. 1.2. VI. 2.1. et cetera, and others; ( 2 ) temporary sublation when the rule set aside, can be applied, if possible after the special rule has been applied; confer, compare सर्वथा अनवकाशत्वादेव बाधकत्वे स्वस्य (अनवकाशशास्त्रस्य) पूर्वप्रवृत्तिरित्येव बाधः । तत्र बाधके प्रवृत्ते यद्युत्सर्गप्राप्तिर्भवति तदा भवत्येव यथा तत्रैव याडादयः Par.Sek.on Pari.57, The sublation or बाधकत्व is not only in the case of सामान्यविशेषभाव and अनवकाशत्व as given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., but a rule or operation which is पर (cited later), or नित्य, or अन्तरङ्ग sets aside the rule or operation which is पूर्व,or अनित्य,or बहिरङ्ग respectively. This बाध्यबाधकभाव occupies a very important position in respect of the application of grammar rules for arriving at the correct forms (इष्टरूपसिद्धि) and grammarians have laid down a number of Paribhasas in the field of बाध्यबाधकभाव.

bālaṃbhaṭṭa( बाळंभट्ट )	surnamed Payagunda or Payagunde, who has written a commentary on the commentary Mitaksara on the याज्ञवल्क्यस्मृति. Some scholars say that he was also a great grammarian and identical with वैद्यनाथ पायगुंडे who has written the commentary काशिका or गदा on the Paribhasendusekhara, the Cidasthimala on the Laghusabdendusekhara and commentaries on the Vaiyakaranabhusana,Sabdakaustubha and Bhasyapradipoddyota. Other scholars believe that Balambhatta was the son of Vaidyanatha and that he wrote only the commentary on Mitaksara called Balambhatti after him. (2) There was also a comparatively modern grammarian of Tanjore who has written small grammar works बालबोधिनी and बालरञ्जनी.

bālabodhinī	name of a grammatical work ascribed to Balambhatta of Tanjore.

bālamanoramā	name of a commentary on the Siddhanta-kaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita by Vasudeva Diksita, a grammarian of Tanjore. There is also another commentary called Balamanorama written by Anantadeva on the Siddhantakaumudi.

bālarañjanī	name of a grammar work written by Balambhatta of Tanjore. See बालंभट्ट (2).

bāhulaka	the application of a grammatical rule as a necessity to arrive at some forms in literature especially in the Vedic Literature as also in the works of standard writers, which cannot be explained easily by the regular application of the stated rules; confer, compare सुप्तिङुपग्रहलिदनराणां कालहलच्स्वरकर्तृयङां च । व्यत्ययमिच्छति शास्त्रकृदेषां सोपि च सिध्यति बाहुलकेन M.Bh. on P. III. 1.85; also confer, compare बाहुलकं प्रकृतेस्तनुदृष्टेः प्रायसमुच्चयनादपि तेषाम् । कार्यसशेषविधेश्च तदुक्तं नैगमरूढिभवं हि सुसाधु M.Bh. on P. III.3.1. In many sutras, Panini has put the word बहुलम् to arrive at such forms; e.g see P.II.1.32,57; II.3.62. II.4.39,73,76,84 et cetera, and others

bidādi	a class of words headed by the word बिद to which the affix अ (अञ्) is added in the sense of a grandchild and further descendants; exempli gratia, for example बैदः, और्वः, काश्यप:, कौशिकः et cetera, and others The words in this class are mostly names of sages. In the case of such words as are not names of sages, the affix अ is added in the sense of the offspring and not any descendant. exempli gratia, for example पौत्रः, दौहित्रः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.1.104.

buiskūla[ BUISKOOL H. E. )	A European grammarian who has written an essay on the last three Padas of Panini's Astadhyayi (त्रिपादी) under the title 'The Tripadi'.

buddhisāgara	writer of a grammar work who lived in the 11th century.

bṛhacchabdaratna	a learned commentary on the commentary मनोरमा of भट्टोजीदीक्षित; the commentary was written by हरिदीक्षित the grandson of Bhattoji. The work is called बृहच्छब्दरत्न in contrast with the लघुशब्दरत्न of the same author (हरिदीक्षित) which is generally studied at the Pathasalas all over the country. The work बृहच्छब्दरत्न is only in a Manuscript form at present. Some scholars believe that it was written by Nagesabhatta, who ascribed it to his preceptor Hari Diksita, but the belief is not correct as proved by a reference in the Laghusabdaratna, where the author himself remarks that he himself has written the बृहच्छब्दरत्न, and internal evidences show that लबुशब्दरत्न is sometimes a word-forword summary of the बृहच्छब्दरत्न. confer, compareविस्तरस्तु अस्मत्कृते बृहच्छब्दरत्ने मदन्तेवासिवृतलधुशब्देन्दुशेखरे च द्रष्टव्यः Laghusabdaratna. For details see Bhandarkar Ins. Journal Vol. 32 pp.258-60.

bṛhatsaṃjñā	the same as महत्संज्ञा or महती संज्ञा; a bigger terminology as contrasted with लघुसंज्ञा brief terminology such as टि, घु, भ et cetera, and others for which (latter) Panini is very particular. The bigger terms such as सर्वनाम, अात्मनेपद, परस्मैपद and others are evidently borrowed by Panini from the ancient grammarians who lived before him.

bṛhadvyākaraṇasiddhāntamañjūṣā	a grammar work written by Ramanatha Chobhe.

belavalakara[ SHRIPAD KRISHNA BELVALKAR ]	a well-known Sanskrit scholar of the present day who has been the General Editor of the Mahabharata published by the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Poona. He has written a book on grammar reviewing very briefly the various systems of Sanskrit grammar, which is named "Systems of Sanskrit Grammar".

bopadeva	a great Sanskrit scholar and grammarian belonging to Devagiri in the greater Maharastra who was supported by Hemadri of Devagiri. He resided at सार्थग्राम on the river Varada in the first half of the thirteenth century. He wrote a short treatise on Sanskrit Grammar, which has a number of peculiar abbreviations for the usual well-known grammatical termanuscript. His grammar had a wide spread in Bengal and it is today a very common text on Grammar Bengal. On this account some scholars believe that he lived in Bengal. He was the son of Kesava and pupil of Dhanesa. He is also the author, of the well-known work कविकल्पद्रुम on which he has written a commentary named कामधेनु or काव्यकामधेनु.

bhakti(1)	name given to two of the five divisions of a Saman which are प्रस्तावभक्ति, उद्गीथ, प्रतिहार, उपद्रव and निधानभाक्ति; (2) the vowel portion surrounding, or placed after, the consonant र् or ल् which (consonant) is believed to be present in the vowel ऋ or ऌ respectively forming its important portion, but never separately noticed in it. The vowels ऋ and ऌ are made up of one matra each. It is contended by the grammarians that the consonants र् and ल् forming respectively the portion of ऋ and ऌ, make up halfa-matra, while the remaining half is made up of the भाक्ति of the vowel surrounding the consonant or situated after the consonant. The word which is generally used for this 'bhakti is 'ajbhakti' instead of which the word स्वरभक्ति is found in the Pratisakhya works; confer, compare यत्तद्रेफात्परं भक्तेस्तेन व्यवहितत्वान्न प्राप्नेति \| ...... यच्चात्र रेफात्परं भुक्तेर्न तत् क्वचिदपि व्यपवृक्तं दृश्यते \| Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VIII. 4.1 Vart 2; confer, compare स्वरभक्तिः पूर्वभागक्षराङ्गं Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 17; also confer, compare रेफात्स्वरोपहिताद् व्यञ्जनोदयाद् ऋकारवर्णी स्वरभक्तिरुत्तरा ) Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 13.

bhakṣyaniyama	restriction regarding edibles of a particular kindeclinable The word is quoted to illustrate the नियमविधि or restrictive rule in grammar. Although the restriction in the instance पञ्च पञ्चनखा भक्ष्याः is of the kind of परिसंख्या and called परिसंख्या, and not नियम, by the Mimamsakas, the grammarians call it a niyamavidhi. There is no परिसंख्याविधि according to grammarians; they cite only two kinds of vidhi viz. simple vidhi or apurva vidhi and niyamavidhi.

bhaṭṭojī	surnamed Diksita; a stalwart grammarian of the Panini system who flourished in the first half of the seventeenth century and wrote many independent books and commentaries such as the Siddhantakaumudi, the Praudhamanorama, the Vaiyakaranasiddhantakarika, the Sabdakaustubha and others. The most reputed work out of these, however, is the Siddhantakaumudi which is very popular even today and which has almost set aside other works of its kind such as the Prakriyakaumudi and others. Bhattoji was a Telagu Brahmana, as generally believed, and although he belonged to the South, he made Varanasi his home where he prepared a school of learned Grammarians. Although he carried on his work silently in Varanasi, he was envied by the reputed rhetorician of his time Pandita Jagannātha, who criticised his work ( Bhattojis work ) named Manorama very severely. See प्रौढमनोरमा a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The Siddhāntakaumudi has got many commentaries of which the Tattvabodhini written by Bhattoji's pupil Jnanendrasarasvati is appreciated much by learned grammarians.

bhatva	the nature or quality of being called भ which causes many grammatical operations which are given together by Panini in VI. 4.129 to 179. See the word भ a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

bharatamalla	a grammarian of Bengal who lived in the sixteenth century and who wrote उपसर्गवृत्ति, दुतबोध and other works on grammar.

bhartṛhari	a very distinguished Grammarian who lived in the seventh century A. D. He was a senior contemporary of the authors of the Kasika, who have mentioned his famous work viz. The Vakyapadiya in the Kasika. confer, compare शब्दार्थसंबन्धोयं प्रकरणम् \| वाक्यपदीयम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.3.88. His Vyakarana work "the Vakyapadiya" has occupied a very prominent position in Grammatical Literature. The work is divided into three sections known by the name 'Kanda' and it has discussed so thoroughly the problem of the relation of word to its sense that subsequent grammarians have looked upon his view as an authority. The work is well-known for expounding also the Philosophy of Grammar. His another work " the Mahabhasya-Dipika " is a scholarly commentary on Patanjali's Mahabhasya. The Commentary is not published as yet, and its solitary manuscript is very carelessly written. Nothing is known about the birth-place or nationality of Bhartrhari. It is also doubtful whether he was the same person as king Bhartrhari who wrote the 'Satakatraya'.

bhavadeva	a scholar of grammar who has written a commentary on the Brhacchabdaratna of Hari Diksita.

bhāgavata hariśāstrī	a modern scholar of grammar who has written a commentary named Vakyarthacandrika on the Paribhasendusekhara of Nagesa; he lived in the first half of the eighteenth century.

bhāṇḍārakara[ Sir Ramakrishna Gopal Bhandarkar 1837-1925 A. D. ]	a well-known scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who has written learned articles on many grammatical topics. He was a distinguished Professor of Sanskrit in the latter half of the nineteenth century. He was one of the pioneers of Sanskrit studies in India.

bhāradvāja(1)	an ancient grammarian quoted by Panini in his rules to show differences of opinion; confer, compare ऋतो भारद्वाजस्य VII. 2.63; (2) name of a country in the days of Panini confer, compare कृकणपर्णाद्भारद्वाजे P. IV. 2.145,

bhāraddhājīya	scholars and grammarians belonging to or following the Bharadwaja School of Grammar whose views are often quoted in the Mahabhasya; भारद्वाजीयाः पठन्ति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.20 Vart. 1, I.1.56 Vart.11 : I.2.22 Vart.3; I.3.67 Vart. 4, III.1.38 Vart. 1, III 1.48 Vart. 3; III 1.89 Vart. 1, IV.1.79, VI.4. 47 and VI.4.155.

bhāvadeva	a grammarian who has written a commentary on the Bŗhacchabdaratna of Hari Dīkșita; possibly the same as भवदेव.See भवदेव.

bhāvavikāra	kinds of verbal activity which are described to be six in number viz. production, existence, transformation, growth, decay and destruction. These six modes of existence first mentioned by Vāŗșyayani and quoted by Yāska are explained philosophically by Bhartŗhari as a mere appearance of the Śabdabrahman or Sattā when one of its own powers, the time factor ( कालशक्ति ) is superimposed upon it, and as a result of that superimposition, it (id est, that is the Śabdabrahman) appears as a process; confer, compare षड् भावाविकारा भवन्ति इति वार्ष्यायणि: \| जायते अस्ति विपरिणमते वर्धते अपक्षीयते विनश्यति इति । Nir.I.2; confer, compare also Vākyapadiya III.30.

bhāvaśarman	the author of the कातन्त्रपरिभाषावृत्ति, a work on the Paribhāșās in grammar which are utilized in explaining the rules of the कातन्त्रव्याकरण by Śarvavarman.

bhāvasena	a grammarian of the Kātantra school who wrote the works Kātantrarūpamālā and Kaumāra Vyākaraņa.

bhāṣāṃmañjarī	a small treatise on grammar written by Vyaṅkaṭa Subbā Shastrī.

bhāṣāvṛtti	a short gloss on the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini in the l2th century by Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva, a reputed scholar belonging to the Eastern school of grammarians which flourished in Bengal and Behar in the 10th, 11th and 12th centuries, The gloss is very useful for beginners and it has given a clear explanation of the different sūtras without going into difficult niceties and discussions. The treatise does not comment upon Vedic portions or rules referring to Vedic Language because, as the legend goes, king Lakṣmaṇa Sena, for whom the gloss was written, was not qualified to understand Vedic Language; confer, compare वैदिकभाषानर्हत्वात् Com. on Bhāṣāvṛtti by Sṛṣṭidhara. There is a popular evaluation of the Bhāṣāvṛtti given by the author himself in the stanza "काशिकाभागवृत्त्योश्चेत्सिद्धान्तं बोद्धुमस्ति धीः ! तदा विचिन्त्यतां भ्रातर्भाषावृत्तिरियं मम " at the end of his treatise; for details see पुरुषोत्तमदेव.

bhāṣāvṛttiṭīkā	a learned commentary on Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva's Bhāṣavṛtti by Sṛṣṭidhara a learned grammarian of the sixteenth century.

bhāskaraśāstrī	surnamed Abhyankar (1785-1870) a great grammarian in the line of the pupils of Nāgeśa who was educated at Poona and lived at Sātārā. He taught many pupils, a large number of whom helped the spread of Vyākaraṇa studies even in distant places of the country, such as Vārāṇasi and others. For details see Vyākaraṇa The Volume of the introduction in Marathi to the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya, written by K. V. Abhyankar and published by the O. E. Society, Poona. pp. 27-29, D. E. Society's Edition.

bhīmasena	called भीमदास also, who flourished in the fourteenth century and wrote a treatise on grammar called भैमव्याकरण.

bhūta	literally what has become or happened, The word is used in books on grammar in the sense of past tense in general, which has been subdivided into (a) unseen past (परीक्षभूत or लिट् ), (b) past, not of today (अनद्यतनभूत or लङ् ) and (c) past in general (सामान्यभूत or लुङ्),confer, compare भूते P.III.2.84, परोक्षे लिट् P.III.2.116 and अनद्यतने लङ् P.III.2.111.

bhūtapūrvagati	literally denotation of something which formerly was existing; a consideration of that form of a word which was formerly present. The word is used frequently by commentators when they try to apply a rule of grammar to a changed wording under the plea that the wording required by the rule was formerly there; confer, compareभूतपूर्वगत्या (पकारलोपे कृतेपि ) दाप् भविष्यति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.20 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 9; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.56, VII.1.9 and VII.3.103; confer, comparealso सांप्रतिकाभावे भूतपूर्वगतिः Par. Śeḵ. Pari. 76.

bhūpāda	name popularly given by Śiradeva and other grammarians to the third pāda of the first adhyāya of Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyi as it begins with the Sūtra भूवादयो धातव: P.I.3.1.

bhaimavyākaraṇa	a grammar treatise written by भौमसेन in the fourteenth century A. D.

bhairavamiśra	one of the reputed grammarians of the latter half of the eighteenth century and the first half of the nineteenth century who wrote commentaries on several prominent works on grammar. He was the son of भवदेव and his native place was Prayāga. He has written the commentary called Candrakalā on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara, Parikṣā on the Vaiyākaraṇabhũṣanasāra, Gadā called also Bhairavī or Bhairavīgadā on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and commentaries (popularly named Bhairavī) on the Śabdaratna and Lingānuśāsana. He is reported to have visited Poona, the capital of the Peśawas and received magnificent gifts for exceptional proficiency in Nyāya and Vyākaraṇa. For details see pp. 24 and 25 Vol. VII . Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya D. E. Society's Edition.

bhoja	the well-known king of Dhārā who was very famous for his charities and love of learning. He flourished in the eleventh century A.D. He is said to have got written or himself written several treatises on various śāstras. The work Sarasvatīkaṇṭhābharaṇa which is based on the Astādhyāyi of Pāṇini, but which has included in it the Vārttikas and Paribhāṣās also, has become in a way a Vyākaraṇa or a general work in grammar and can be styled as Bhoja-Vyākaraṇa.

bholānātha	a grammarian who has written a commentary named Saṁdarbhāmṛta on Bopadeva's Mugdhabodha.

bhautapūrvya	the consideration that a thing was such and such a one formerly, and hence liable to undergo grammatical operations on that ground; confer, compare कृत एत्त्वे भौतपूर्व्यात्\| भिस ऐस्\| Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.VII. 1. 9.

maṇḍūkagati	literallythe gait of a frog; jump; the continuation of a word from a preceding Sūtra to the following Sūtra or Sūtras in the manner of a frog by omitting one or more Sūtras in the middle; the word मण्डूकप्लुति is also used in the same sense especially by later grammarians; confer, compare अथवा मण्डूकगतयोधिकाराः \| यथा मण्डूका उत्प्लुत्योत्प्लुत्य गच्छन्ति तद्वदधिकाराः \|\| Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.3 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).2, II. 3.32, II. 4.34, VI.1.16, VI.3.49,VII. 2.117.

matuppāda	a conventional name given by grammarians to the third pāda of the eighth Adhyāya of Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. as the pāda begins with the sūtra मतुवसोरु संबुद्धौ छन्दसि P. VIII. 3.1.

matonmajjā	name of a commentary on Koṇḍabhaṭṭa's Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa written by a grammarian named वनमालिन्.

madhyakaumudī	called also मध्यमकौमुदी a work on grammar which is an abridgment, to a certain extent, of Bhaṭṭojī's Siddhāntakaumudī. The treatise was written by Varadarāja, a pupil of Bhaṭṭojī for facilitating the study of the Siddhānta-kaumudi.

madhyapatita	literally fallen in the middle; the word is used generally in the sense of an augment which is inserted in the middle of a word. Sometimes an affix too, like अकच् or a conjugational sign like श्रम्, is placed in the middle of a word. Such a middling augment is technically ignored and a word together with it is taken as the original word for grammatical operations; exempli gratia, for example उच्चकै:, नीचकै: et cetera, and others cf तन्मध्यपतितस्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यते Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 89.

madhyamakaumudī(1)	name of a treatise on grammar by Rāmaśarman; (2) the same as मध्यकौमुदी.

mantudeva	known also as मन्नुदेव, a famous grammarian of the eighteenth century who has written a commentary named दर्पणा on the Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāra of Koṇḍabhaṭṭa and a commentary named दोषोद्धरण on Nāgeśa's Paribhāṣenduśekhara.

mahādeva	a grammarian of the Kātantra school who has written a gloss on the कातन्त्रवृत्ति of दुर्गसिंह.

mahānanda	a grammarian of the eighteenth century who has written a gloss on Koṇḍabhaṭṭṭa's Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣanasāra.

mahābhāṣya	literally the great commentary. The word is uniformly used by commentators and classical Sanskrit writers for the reputed commentary on Pāṇini's Sūtras and the Vārttikas thereon by Patañjali in the 2nd century B. C. The commentary is very scholarly yet very simple in style, and exhaustive although omitting a number of Pāṇini's rules. It is the first and oldest existing commentary on the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini, and, in spite of some other commentaries and glosses and other compendia, written later on to explain the Sutras of Panini, it has remained supremely authoritative and furnishes the last and final word in all places of doubt: confer, compare the remarks इति भाष्ये स्थितम्, इत्युक्तं भाष्ये, इत्युक्तमाकरे et cetera, and others scattered here and there in several Vyaakarana treatises forming in fact, the patent words used by commentators when they finish any chain of arguments. Besides commenting on the Sutras of Paanini, Patanjali, the author, has raised many other grammatical issues and after discussing them fully and thoroughly, given his conclusions which have become the final dicta in those matters. The work, in short, has become an encyclopedic one and hence aptly called खनि or अकर. The work is spread over such a wide field of grammatical studies that not a single grammatical issue appears to have been left out. The author appears to have made a close study of the method and explanations of the SUtras of Paanini given at various academies all over the country and incorporated the gist of those studies given in the form of Varttikas at the various places, in his great work He has thoroughly scrutinized and commented upon the Vaarttikas many of which he has approved, some of which he has rejected, and a few of which he has supplementedition Besides the Vaarttikas which are referred to a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., he has quoted stanzas which verily sum up the arguments in explanation of the difficult sUtras, composed by his predecessors. There is a good reason to believe that there were small glosses or commentaries on the SUtras of Paanini, written by learned teachers at the various academies, and the Vaarttikas formed in a way, a short pithy summary of those glosses or Vrttis. . The explanation of the word वृत्तौ साधु वार्तिकम् given by Kaiyata may be quoted in support of this point. Kaiyata has at one place even stated that the argument of the Bhaasyakaara is in consonance with that of Kuni, his predecessor. The work is divided into eighty five sections which are given the name of lesson or आह्लिक by the author, probably because they form the subject matter of one day's study each, if the student has already made a thorough study of the subject and is very sharp in intelligence. confer, compare अह्ला निर्वृत्तम् आह्लिकम्, (the explanation given by the commentatiors).Many commentary works were written on this magnum opus of Patanjali during the long period of twenty centuries upto this time under the names टीका, टिप्पणी, दीपिका, प्रकाशिका, व्याख्या, रत्नावली, स्पूर्ति, वृत्ति, प्रदीप, व्याख्यानं and the like, but only one of them the 'Pradipa' of कैयटीपाध्याय, is found complete. The learned commentary by Bhartrhari, written a few centuries before the Pradipa, is available only in a fragment and that too, in a manuscript form copied down from the original one from time to time by the scribes very carelessly. Two other commentaries which are comparatively modern, written by Naarayanasesa and Nilakantha are available but they are also incomplete and in a manuscript form. Possibly Kaiyatabhatta's Pradipa threw into the background the commentaries of his predecessors and no grammarian after Kaiyata dared write a commentary superior to Kaiyata's Pradipa or, if he began, he had to abandon his work in the middle. The commentary of Kaiyata is such a scholarly one and so written to the point that later commentators have almost identified the original Bhasya with the commentary Pradipa and many a time expressed the two words Bhasya and Kaiyata in the same breath as भाष्यकैयटयोः ( एतदुक्तम् or स्पष्टमेतत् ).

mahābhāṣyadīpikā	a very learned old commentary on the Mahabhasya of Patanjali written by the reputed grammarian Bhartrhari or Hari in the seventh century A. D. The commentary has got only one manuscript preserved in Germany available at present, of which photostat copies or ordinary copies are found here and there. The first page of the manuscript is missing and it is incomplete also, the commentary not going beyond the first seven Aahnikas. For details see page 383 Vol. VII Vyaakarana Mahabhasya D. E. Society's edition.

mahābhāṣyapradīpa	a very scholarly commentary on Patanjali's MahabhaSya written by Kaiyatabhatta in the eleventh century, The commentary has so nicely explained every difficult and obscure point in the Mahabhasya, and has so thoroughly explained each sentence that the remark of later grammarians that the torch of the Mahabhasya has been kept burning by the Pradipa appears quite apt and justifiedition Kaiyata's commentary has thrown much additional light on the original arguments and statements in the Mahabhasya. There is a learned commentary on the Pradipa written by Nagesabhatta which is named vivarana by the author but which is well known by the name 'Uddyota' among students and teachers of Vyakarana. For details see pp. 389, 390 Vol VII, Patanjala Mahabhasya, D. E. Society's Edition.

mahābhāṣyapradīpaṭīka	name given to each of the various commentaries on the Pradipa of Kaiyata written by grammarians, out of which the commentaries of चिन्तामणि,रामचन्द्रसरस्वती, नारायण, नित्यानन्दपर्वतीय and one or two more are available in a manuscript form and those too quite incomplete.

mahābhāṣyapradīpavivaraṇa(1)	original name of the learned commentary on the 'Pradipa' of Kaiyata written by Nagesabhatta, a stalwart and epoch-making grammarian of the 18th century. The commentary is known popularly by the name 'Uddyota' or Pradipoddyota; (2) name of the commentary on Kaiyata's Pradipa by Nityaananda Parvatiya. The commentary is also known by the name दीपप्रभा.

mahābhāṣyalaghuvṛtti	name given to the short gloss on the Mahabhasya written by the famous eastern grammar-scholar Maitreya-Raksita of the twelfth century.

mahābhāṣyavyākhyā	name given to each of the explanatory glosses on the Mahabhasya written by grammarians prominent of whom were Purusottamadeva, Narayana Sesa, Visnu, Nilakantha and others whose fragmentary works exist in a manuscript form. महामिश्र name of a grammarian who wrote a commentary on Jinendrabuddhi's Nyasa. The commentary is known by the name Vyakaranaprakasa. महाविभाषा a rule laying down an option for several rules in a topic by being present in every rule: confer, compare महाविभाषया वाक्यमपि. विभाषा (P.II.1.11) and समर्थानां प्रथमाद्वा (P. IV.1.82) are some of the rules of this kindeclinable

mahāsaṃjñā	a long term, as contrasted with the very short terms टि, घु, भ, इत् and others introduced by Panini in his grammar for the sake of brevity. These long terms such as सर्वनाम, अब्यय,परस्मैपद, अात्मनेपद, and many others were widely in use at the time of Panini and hence he could not but pick them up in his grammar in spite of his strenuous attempts at brevity. The commentators, however, find out a motive for his doing this viz. that appropriate words only could be understood by those terms and not others; confer, compareमहासंज्ञाकरणेन तदनुगुणानामेव अत्र संनिवेशात् । S.K. on सर्वादीने सर्वनामानि P. I.1.27.

mahīdhara	a grammarian of the sixteenth century who, besides many small treatises on other subjects, wrote a commentary on the SarasvataPrakriya Vyakarana.

maheśanandin	a Jain Grammarian who has written a work on the karaka topic of grammar, named षट्कारक.

mādhava	the well-known epoch-making scholar of the 14th century who has written a number of treatises in various Saastras. His धातुवृम्त्ति is a well-known work in grammar

mārkaṇḍeya	an old grammarian, who wrote a grammar of Praakrta languages which is known by the name प्राकृतसर्वस्व.

mārdava	softness of the voice characterizing the pronunciation of a grave vowel: cf मार्दवं स्वरस्य मृदुता स्निग्धता ; also confer, compare अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता खस्येतिं नीचैःकरााणे शब्दस्य M.Bh. on P.I.2.29, 30; confer, compare also, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXII.10।

māhendra	name of very ancient,prePaninian grammar ascribed to इन्द् of which some references only are available. The grammar work is also referred to as ऐन्द्र: confer, compare यान्युञ्जह्यार् महेन्द्राद् व्यासो व्याकरणार्णवात् \| पदरत्नानि किं तानि सन्ति पाणिनिगेाष्पदे Devabodha's commentary on the Mahabharata. For details see p. 124-27 Vol. VII Mahaabhaasya, D. E. Society's Edition.

miśra	roots taking personal endings of both the Padas; Ubhayapadin roots: this term मिश्र is given in Bopadeva's grammar.

miśrī	a popular name given to the commentary written by मैरवमिश्र on the Paribhaasendusekhara in popular use by grammarians.

mukhyaviśeṣya	the principal word in a sentence which comes last in the technical expression of the import or शाब्दबोध. It is described as primary and not subordinated to any other thing ( अन्याविशेषणीभूत). This मुख्यविशेष्य is, in a way,the crucial point in the various theories of import; exempli gratia, for example according to the grammarians the verbal activity is the principal word while,according to the Mimaamsakas the bhaavanaa is the principal word.and according to the Naiyayikas it is the subject that is the principal word.

mugdhabodha	literally instructions to the ignorant: a treatise on grammar similar to the Astadhyayi of Panini but much shorter, written by Bopadeva or Vopadeva an inhabitant of the greater Maharastra in the Vardha district, in the thirteenth century. After the fall of the Hindu rulers in Bengal, treatises like भाषावृत्ति and others written by eastern grammarians fell into the back-ground and their place was taken up by easier treatises written by Bopadeva and others.Many commentaries were written upon the Mugdhabodha, of which the Vidyanivsa is much known to grammarians

munitraya	the popular and honorific term for the three prominent grammarians of the Paninian system of grammar wiz. पाणिनि, कात्यायन and पतञ्जलि who were the pioneers of that system; confer, compare मुनित्रयं नमस्कृत्य Siddhanta-Kaumud beginning.

meghavijaya	a Jain grammarian of the seventeenth century who has written a grammar work, similar to the Siddhanta Kaumudi, on the Sabdanusasana of Hemacandra. The grammar work is called हैमकौमुदी, or चन्द्रप्रभा also.

metreyarakṣita	a recognised scholar of Paninis' grammar who belonged to the Eastern part of India and fourished in the beginning of the twelfth century. As it appears from the name Maitreya Raksita he appears to have been a Buddhist grammarian. Subsequent writers in their works refer to him by the name Raksita alone, as also by the name Maitreya, but very rarely by the name Maitreya Raksita.He wrote many works on grammar of which the 'tantrapradipa'a learned commentary on Jinendrabuddhi's Nyasa on Kasika was a reputed one, which, although available in a fragmentary manuscript form today, has been profusely quoted by prominent grammarians after him.

mokṣeśvara	a grammarian of the fourteenth century who has written a commentary on the Katantra Vrtti of Durgasimha. He has written a commentary on the Akhyatavrtti of the Katantra school as also a short treatise dealing with the krt affixes called Krdvrtti.

yaḍlugantaśiromaṇi	a grammar work dealing with the frequentative roots written by Pandita Sesakrsna.

yañ(1)	short term ( प्रत्याहृार ) formed by the letter य of हृयवरट् and the mute letter ञ्ज of इभञ् including serni-vowels and the third and the fourth consonants excepting घ् , ढ् and ध् of the five consonant groups: confer, compare अतो दीर्घो याञि P. VII. 3. 10l ; (2) taddhita affix. affix added (a) in the sense of गोत्र (grand-children and their descendants) to words of the गर्ग class and some other words under specific conditions, exempli gratia, for example गार्ग्यः: वात्स्य:, काप्यः et cetera, and others, confer, compare गर्गादिभ्यो यञ् and the following P.IV. 1. 105-108: (b) in the sense of collection to केदार, गणिका, केश and अश्व, confer, compare P.IV.2.40 and the Varttika.thereon and IV. 2.48; (c) in the Saiska senses to the word द्वीप, confer, compare P.IV.3.10: (d) to the word कंसीय e. g. कांस्यम् confer, compare P.IV.3.168, and (e) to the words अभिजित्, विदभृत् and others when they have the taddhita affix. affix अण् added to them : exempli gratia, for example अाभजित्य: confer, compare P. V. 3. 118.

yadyoga	a connection with the word (pronoun) यत् by its use in the same sentence and context, which prevents the anudatta ( grave ) accent for the verb in the sentence; confer, compareनिपातैर्यद्यदिहृन्तकुविन्नेच्चेच्चण्कच्चिद्यत्रयुक्तम् P. VIII. 1.30; cf also the usual expression यद्योगादानघात: found in commentary wor

yavamadhya	literally having the centre bulging out like the Yava grain; name given to a variety of the Gayatri which has 7 letters in the first and third (last) feet and 10 letters in the second id est, that is the middle foot; the name is also given to a Mahabrhati having the first and the last feet consisting of 8 letters and the middle one consisting of 12 syllables: cf R.Pr.XVI.18 and 48.

yaśa:kavi	a grammarian, the author of a treatise named Bhasanusasana. यश:सागर a Jain grammarian, the author of a work named Samasasobha.

yāska	a reputed ancient Niruktakara or etymologist, of the 6th century B.C. or even a few centuries before that, whose work, the Nirukta, is looked upon as the oldest authoritative treatise regarding derivation of Vedic words. Yaska was preceded by a number of etymologists whom he has mentioned in his work and whose works he has utilisedition Yaska's Nirukta threw into the back-ground the older treatises on etymology, all of which disappeared gradually in the course of time.

yukta(1)	proper, appropriate, justified; the word is very frequently used in the Mahabhasya and other grammar works; (2) the sense of the original base which is connected with the sense of the affix; confer, compare अथवा युक्तः प्रकृत्यर्थः प्रत्ययार्थेन संबद्धः, Ks. on P. I. 2.51 ; (3) connected with; confer, compare उकारश्चेतिकरणेन युक्त: Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 29; तथायुक्तं चानीप्सितम् P. I. 4.50.

yugapatprasaṅga	simultaneous possibility of the application of two rules or operations, when in grammar no option re : their application is admissible as it is admissible according to Mimamsa rules re : two operations enjoined by Vedic behests. In Grammar, only one of such rules applies, the priority of application being based upon the criteria of परत्व, नित्यत्व, अन्तरङ्गत्व and अपवादत्व: confer, compare शब्दपरविप्रतिषेधो नाम भवति यत्रोभयोर्युगप्रसङ्ग: \| M.Bh. on VI. 1.158 Vart, 12.

yugapadadhikaraṇavacanatā	denotation of two or more things by one single member by virtue of their being put together in a dvandva compound of two or more words; the grammarians advocate this doctrine stating that in a dvandva compound such as घटपटौ or घटपटम् , the word घट has the capacity of expressing the sense of both घट and पट, which in a sentence घटः पटश्च, it does not possess. Similarly पट also has the capacity of conveying the sense of both पट and घट. Possibly this theory is advocated by grarnmarians, on the analogy of words like पितरौ or मातरौ for मातापितरौ, द्यावा for द्यावापृथिवी and so on; confer, compare सिद्धं तु युगपदधिकरणवचने द्वन्द्ववचनात् P. II 2.29 Vart. 2. For details see Vyakaranamahabhasya on चार्थे द्वन्द्वः P. II. 2.29.

yuvan	literally young person; masculine; the word is given as a technical term in grammar in the sense of one, who is the son of the grandson or his descendant, provided his father is alive; the term is also applied to a nephew, brother, or a paternal relative of the grandson or his descendant, provided his elderly relative, if not his his father, is alive; it is also applied to the grandson, in case respect is to be shown to him: confer, compare P. IV. 1.163-167. The affixes prescribed in the sense of युवन् are always applied to a word ending with a taddhita affix. affix applied to it in the sense of an offspring (अपत्य) or grandson (गोत्र), in spite of the ruling that in the sense of grandson or his descendant (गोत्र), one affix only इञ् or अण् or the like is added to the base; exempli gratia, for example गार्ग्यस्यापत्यं गार्ग्यायण:, दाक्षेरपत्यं दाक्षाय्ण: गार्ग्ये जीवति तस्य भ्राता सपिण्डो वा गाम्यार्यण: तत्रभवान् गार्ग्यः; गार्ग्यायणो वा.

yuvapratyaya	taddhita affix. affix फक् ( अायन ), फिञ् ( अायनि ) or any other in the sense of युवन् which is to be applied to a base ending with an affix in the sense of offspring ( अपत्यप्रत्ययान्त ) or with an affix in the sense of a grandson ( गोत्रप्रत्ययान्त ). The affix is not applied when a female offspring is meant.

yenanāprāptanyāya	a term used by grammarians and commentators very frequently for the maxim "येन नाप्राप्ते यो वेधिरारभ्येत स तस्य बाधको भवति " Par. Sek. on Pari. 57. The term अपवादन्याय is used in the Mahabhasya which is the same as येननाप्राप्तन्याय of later grammarians.

yoga(1)	a rule of grammar; the word योग in this sense is very fre-quently found used in the Mahabhasya; cf the frequent statements अयं येगः शक्योsकर्तुम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1. 6, 62, et cetera, and others or कान्यस्य योगस्य प्रयोजनानि Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.31 Vart. 6, I.1. 57 et cetera, and others; (2) grammatical connection; cf शास्त्रकृतो योगश्च Nirukta of Yāska.I.2: cf also षष्ठी स्थानेयेागा P.I.1.49.

yogavāha	a technical term used for phonetic elements or letters which are mentioned in the alphabet of Panini, viz., the Mahesvara sutras in contrast with the term अयोगवाह which is used by grammarians for the phonetic elements अनुस्वार, विसर्ग and others which are not mentionedition ,See अयोगवाह; confer, compare also M. Bh on Siva sutra 5.

yogavibhāga	division of a rule which has been traditionally given as one single rule, into two for explaining the formation of certain words, which otherwise are likely to be stamped as ungrammatical formations. The writer of the Varttikas and the author of the Mahabhasya have very frequently taken recourse to this method of योगविभाग; confer, compare P.I.1.3 Vart. 8, I.1.17 Vart.1,I.1.61, Vart. 3; I. 4.59 Vart. 1, II. 4. 2. Vart.2, III.1.67 Vart. 5, III.4.2. Vart. 6, VI.I. I Vart. 5, VI.1.33 Vart.1 et cetera, and others Although this Yogavibhaga is not a happy method of removing difficulties and has to be followed as a last recourse, the Varttikakara has suggested it very often, and sometimes a sutra which is divided by the Varttikakara into two,has been recognised as a couple of sutras in the Sutrapatha which has come down to us at present.

yogāṅga	a part or portion of the rule of the grammarian: confer, compare सति च योगाङ्गे योगविभागः करिष्यते M.Bh. on P.I.1.30, II.1.4 et cetera, and others

yojaka	causal instrument or causal agent; the word is used in the sense of प्रयोजक in the Jainendra grammar; confer, compare.]ain.I.2.125.

r(1)	second letter of the यण् class ( semi-vowels ) which has got the properties नादभागित्व, घोषवत्त्व,' संवृतत्व and अल्पप्राणता i. e. it is a sonant, inaspirate consonant. Regarding its स्थान or place of production, there is a difference of opinion : generally the consonant र् is looked upon as a cerebral or lingual letter (मूर्धन्य); cf ऋटुरषाणां मूर्धा， S.K.also Pāṇini. Siksa; but it is called by some as दन्त्य or दन्तमूलीय: cf रेफस्तु दस्त्ये दन्तमूले वा RT. 8, by others as दन्तमूलीय and and by still others as वर्स्त्य gingival. In the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya it is described as दन्तमूलीय: cf रो दन्तमूल I. 68, while in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya it is said to be produced by the touch of the middle part of the tip of the tongue just a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the root of the teeth;confer, compare रेफे जिह्वाग्रमध्येन प्रत्यग्दन्तमूलेभ्यः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II. 41; (2) substitute र् (रेफ ) for the final letter of the word अहन्, as also for the final of अम्रस्, ऊधस्, अवस् and भुवस् optionally with रु, which ( रु) is dropped before vowels, and changed to ओ before अ and soft consonants, while it is changed into visarga before hard consonants and surds.exempli gratia, for example अम्नरेव, अम्र एवः ऊधरेव, ऊधएव: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VIII, 2-70: (3) the consonants र् (technically) called र् in Panini's grammar ) which is substituted for the consonant स् and for the consonant न् of the word अहन् when the consonant स् or न् stands at the end of a word. This substitute रु, unlike the substitute र् is liable to be changed into visarga, or the consonant य्, or the vowel उ by P. VIII.3.15, 17, VI.1.113, 114.

rakta	literally coloured id est, that iscoloured by nasalization: a term used by ancient grammarians for a nasaIized letter ( अनुनासिक ); cf रक्तसंज्ञो नुनासेकः R.Pr.r.17on which Uvvata comments :-अनुनासिको वणो . रक्त इत्युच्यते; also confer, compare अरक्तसंध्येत्यपवाद्यते पदं R. Pr, XI. 18, where unnasalized अा is stated as अरक्तसंधि and illustrated by the commentator by quoting the passage मन्द्रमावरेण्यम् as contrasted with अभ्र औ अषः ।

rakṣita	named मैत्रेयरक्षित or मैत्रेय also; a famous grammarian of the Eastern school of grammarians which flourished in Bihar and Bengal in the ninth, tenth, eleventh and twelfth centuries, claiming मैत्रयरक्षित, पुरुषोत्तमदेव, सीरदेव and others as prominent grammar scholars among others. See the word मैत्रेयरक्षिiत.

radhunātha	a grammarian of the seventeenth century, who was a pupil of Bhattoji Diksita and who wrote a small gloss ( लधुभाष्य ) on the topic named ' पञ्चसंधि ' of the Siddhantakaumudfeminine.

raṅganātha	a grammarian,son of नारायणयज्वा, who wrote a commentary named मकरन्द on Haradatta's Padamanjari.

ratnapāṇi	a grammarian of the eighteenth century who wrote a short treatise on the Karaka relations named षट्कारकविवरण.

ratnārṇava	name of a commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi written by Krsnamitra, a famous grammarian and Naiyayika who lived in the eighteenth century and wrote many commentary works on books in the Vyakarana and Nyāya Sastras.

ratneśa	a grammarian who wrote a grammar work named लक्षणसंग्रहृ,

ranu[RENOU,LOUIS]	a sound Sanskrit scholar of France of the present time who has written some treatises and many articles on Sanskrit grammar out of which his works on the Terminology of Sanskrit Grammar, Kasika and Durghatavrtti reguire a special mention.

rapratyāhārakhaṇḍana	a small article showing that the short term र for the consonants र् and ल् need not be advocated as done by the learned old grammarians.The treatise was Written by Vaidyanatha Paya-gunde, the prominent pupil of Nagesabhatta.

ramānāthaśarma	a grammarian of the Katantra school who lived in the fifteenth century and wrote a commentary named Manorama on the Katantradhatuvrtti and Sabdasadhyaprayoga.

rasavatī	name of a commentary on his own work ' Sanksiptasara Vyakarana' by KramadiSvara,a sound scholar of grammar in the thirteenth century A.D.

rājārāmaśāstrī( कार्लेकर )	a reputed scholar of Sanskrit grammar who resided at Varanasi and established a school of Sanskrit Grammarians there in the nineteenth century. He wrote a treatise on grammar named शब्दव्युत्पत्तिकौमुदी.

rādhākṛṣṇa( गोस्वामी )	a grammarian who wrote two elementary graumar treatises (1) अव्ययार्थे and (2) वैयाकरणसर्वस्वसूची.

rāmakiṃkasarasvatī	a grammarian who wrote a small grammar treatise named अायुबोधव्याकरण which is different from the well-known अाशुबोध of तारानाथतर्कवाचस्पति.

rāmakṛṣṇa	a grammarian who wrote a treatise on Karaka relations known by the name शाब्दबोधप्रक्रिया.

rāmakṛṣṇabhaṭṭa	a grammarian of the 17th century who wrote वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरत्नाकर, a commentary on the different portions of the Siddhānta Kaumudi

rāmacandra(1)	रामन्वन्द्राचार्य (son of कृष्णाचार्य) the well-known author of the Prakriyakaumudi. He belonged to the Sesa family and the latter half of the fifteenth century is assigned as his date. He is believed to have been a resident of Andhra. His work, the Prakriyakaumudi, was a popular grammar treatise for some time before Bhattoji's SiddhantaKaumudi got its hold, and it had a number of commentaries written upon it especially by his descendants and members of his family which became well-known as the Sesa family of grammarians. The Prakriyakaumudi is named कृष्णर्किकरप्राक्रिया also. (2) There was a grammarian named Ramacandra who wrote a small treatise on grammar named विदग्धबोध. (3) There was another grammarian of the same name who was a pupil of Nagesabhatta of the eighteenth century and who wrote a small commentary called वृतिसंग्रह on Panini's Astadhyayi. (4) There was also another Ramacandra who was a scholar of Vedic grammar and who wrote the commentary named ज्योत्स्ना on the Vjasaneyi-Pratisakhya.

rāmacandra dīkṣita	a grammarian who wrote (l) Unadikosa, ( 2 ) Manidipika, a commentary on the Unadisutras, and (3) Sabdabhedaniruipana.

rāmatarkavāgīśa	a learned grammarian who held the titles महामहोपाध्याय and भट्टाचार्य, He was an advocate of the Mugdhabodha School and wrote commentaries on (1) the Mugdhabodha, (2) the Kavikalpadruma, (3) the Amarakosa and (4) the Unadi sutras. He also wrote a short gloss on case-relations, his treatise on the subject being named कारकटिप्पणी,

rāmadāsa(चक्रवर्ती )	a follower of the Katantra school of grammar who wrote (l) चन्द्रिका, a commentary on Katantraparisista and ( 2 ) कातन्त्रव्याख्यासार

rāmanātha( चोबे )	a grammarian of the nineteenth century who wrote (l) शब्देन्दुशेखरटीका, (2) वैयाकरणभूषणटीका and (3) वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तमञ्जूषाटीका.

rāmanātha( विद्यावाचस्पति )	a Sanskrit scholar of the 17th century who studied Vyakarana,. Dharma, Alamkara and other Sastras and wrote a grammar work कातन्त्ररहस्य, besides many books on other Sastras.

rāmabhadra dīkṣita	son of यज्ञराम दीक्षित, a grammarian of Tanjore of the seventeenth century who wrote a commentary on the Paribhasavrtti of Siradeva named परिभाषावृत्तिव्याख्या. He has also written the ' life of Patanjali' ( पतञ्जलिचरित ) and many miscellaneous works, such as उणादिमणिदीपिका and others.

rāmarāma	a grammarian who has written a commentary on the Kavikalpadruma of Bopadeva.

rāmasiṃhṛvarmā	possibly the same king of Sringaberapura who patronised Nagesabhatta. He is said to have written some Small comments on " the Ramayana and a small grammar work named धातुरत्नमञ्जरी.

rāmānand	a grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote a commentary on Bopadeva's Mugdhabodha. He was possibly the same as Ramarama (see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.) and Ramānandatirtha who wrote the Katantrasamgraha, although different from the well-known रामानन्दतर्थि of the sixteenth century who was a sanyasin and who wrote many philosophical and religious booklets.

rāmāśrama	a grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote a commentary named Siddhantacandrika on the Sarasvata Vyakarana.

rāmeśvara	a grammarian who wrote a small compendium on grammar named शुद्धाशुबोध.

rudradeva	a grammarian who has written a commentary on the Vaiyākaraņa-Siddhānta-Bhūșaņa of Koņdabhațța.

rūpanārāyaṇa	a grammarian of Bengal of the fifteenth century who wrote short comments on some sections of the Supadma Vyākaraņa under the names सुपद्मषट्कारक and सुपद्मसमाससंग्रह्.

rūpamālā(1)	an elementary work on Sanskrit grammar composed by Vimalasarasvatī, in which the Sūtras of Pāņini are arranged in different topics many of which are called माला, such as अजन्तमाला, हलन्तमाला, छान्दसमाला, अव्ययमाला and so on.(2) the name रूपमाला is also found given to a work giving collections of formed words written by Puņyanandana.

rūpātideśa	the actual replacement of the original in the place of the substitute by virtue of the rule स्थानिवदादेशोनल्विधौ P. I. 1. 56; one of the two kinds of स्थानिवद्भाव wherein the word-form of the original ( स्थानी ) is put in the place of the substitute (आदेश); the other kind of स्थानिवद्भाव being called कार्यातिदेश by means of which grammatical operations caused by the original ( स्थानी ) take place although the substitute (आदेश) has been actually put in the place of the original. About the interpretation of the rule द्विर्वचनेचि P. I.1.59, the grammarians accept the view of रूपातिदेश; confer, compare रूपातिदेशश्चायं नियतकालस्तेन कृते द्विर्वचने पुन: आदेशरूपमेवावतिष्ठते \| पपतुः पपुः \| अातो लोप इटि च इत्याकारलोपे कृते तस्य स्थानिवद्भावात् एकाचो द्बे० इति द्विर्वचनं भवति Kāś on P.I.1.59; confer, compare also रूपातिदेशश्चायम् \| द्विर्वचनेचि इत्यत्रास्य भाष्ये पाठात् \| Pari. Bhaskara Pari. 97. For details see Mahābhāșya on P.VII.1.95 96.

rūpāvatāra	a well-known work on word formation written by धर्मकीर्ति a Jain grammarian of the twelfth century. Scholars believe that this work was the first work of the form of topics which was taken as a model by the authors of the Prakriyākaumudī and the Siddhāntakaumudī.

repha	the consonant र्; generally the word रेफ is used for र and not रकार; confer, compare वर्णात्कार: । रादिफं: P.III.3.108 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3,4. The consonant र is described as one pronounced like the tearing of a piece of cloth and resembling a snarl or a growl: confer, compare रिफ्यते विपाटथते वस्त्रादिपाटनध्वनिवदुच्चार्यते इति रेफ: \|

l(1)	a consonant of the dental class which is a semi-vowel ( यण् ) with liquid contact in the mouth, and which is inaspirate ( अल्पप्राण ),voiced ( घोष ) and both nasalised and unnasalised; (2) name in general ( लकार ) given to the personal endings applied to roots in the ten tenses and moods which take different substitutes ति, त:, अन्ति et cetera, and others and have various modifications and augments in the different tenses and moods; (3) substituted as a semi-vowel ( यण् ) for the vowel ऌ followed by any other vowel in the euphonic combinations; (4)applied at the beginning of nontaddhita affixes as a mute letter indicating the acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix; confer, compare लिति; P. VI. 1.193; ( 5 ) substituted for त्, थ्, द्, घ् or न् before ल्， confer, compare P.VIII.4. 60; (6) substituted under certain conditions for the consonant र् (a) of the root कृप्, (b) of prefixes प्र and परा before the root अय्, (c) of the root गॄ in frequentative forms and optionally before affixes beginning with a vowel, and (d ) of the word परि before घ and अङ्क; confer, compare P. VIII. 2. 18 to 22. _ ल (1) consonant ल्; see ल् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.' (2) a general term usually used by ancient grammarians to signifyलोप (elision or disappearance) of a letter or a syllable or a word; confer, compare सर्वसादेर्द्विगोश्च ल: \| सवार्तिक:, द्वितन्त्र: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.IV.2.60; (3) taddhita affix. affix ल added to the word क्लिन्न when चिल् and पिल् are substituted for the word क्लिन्न; e.g, चिल्लः, पिल्ल: confer, compare P. V. 2.33 Vārt 2.

lakṣaṇā	implication; potentiality of implication; this potentiality of words viz. लक्षणा is not recognised by grammarians as a potentiality different from the अभिधाशक्ति or the power of denotation. Later grammarians, however, like the Ālamkārikas, have used the word in the sense of potentiality of implication as different from that of denotation; confer, compare अन्त्यशब्द लक्षणा न च Paribhāşenduśekhara.

lakṣmaṇasūri	a grammarian who has written a booklet on the six dialects, which is named षड्भाषाचन्द्रिका.

lakṣmīnṛsiṃha	a grammarian of the eighteenth century who has written (1) Siddhāntakaumudīvilāsa, a commentary on the Siddhāntakaumudī and (2)Triśikhā, a commentary on Nāgeśa's Paribhāşenduśekhara.

lakṣya	literally target; illustration; example of a grammatical rule; confer, compare लक्ष्ये लक्षणं सकृदेव प्रवर्तते Paribhāşā; also लक्ष्यानुसारि व्याख्यानमेव शरणम् Paribhāşenduśekhara; confer, compare also शब्दो लक्ष्य: सूत्रं लक्षणम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.1 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 14.

laghukaumudī	known as लघुसिद्धान्तकौमुदी also, an abridged work based upon the Siddhāntakaumudi of Bhațțojī Dīkşita, written by Bhațțojī's pupil Varadarāja. The work is very valuable and helpful to beginners in grammar. It has got the same topics as the Siddhāntakaumudī, but arranged differently. The work, named सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी is the same as लघुसिध्दान्तकौमुदी. Possibly सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी was the original name given by the author.

laghunyāsa(1)	short writing, brief putting in, brief expression; confer, compare सोयमेवं लघुना न्यासेन सिद्धे et cetera, and others; (2) the word is given as a name to a grammatical work, written by देवेन्द्रसूरि on the शब्दानुशासन of Hemacandra, possibly in contrast with the बृहन्न्यास written by Hemacandra himself or with Kāśikāvivaranapańjikā popularly called न्यास written by Jinendrabuddhi on the Kāśikāvŗti of Jayāditya and Vāmana. See न्यास.

laghuprakriyā	name of a grammar treatise based on the Sabdānuśāsana of Hemacandra written by Vinayavijaya where the sūtras of Hemacandra are arranged in different topics as in the Siddhāntakaumudī of Bhoțțojī.

laghuśabdaratna	name of a commentary on Bhațțoji's Manoramā by his grandson Hari Dīkşita, which is generally read together with the Manoramā, by students upto the end of the Kāraka Chapter after they have completely read and mastered the Siddhāntakaumudī. The commentary is called लघुशब्दरत्न which dlfferentiates it from the बृहच्छब्दरत्न written by the same author viz. Hari Dīkşita.

lac	taddhita affix. affix ल applied optionally with the affix मतुप् to words ending in अा and meaning a detachable or undetachable part of an animal, ; as also to words mentioned in the group headed by the word सिध्म,as also to words वत्स and अस showing affection and strength respectively ; e. g. चूडाल:, सिध्मल:, वत्सल:, et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. V. 2. 96-98.

lalitāvṛtti	name given to the Paribhāșāvŗtti written by Purușottamadeva, a famous grammarian of the Eastern branch of Pāņini's system which prevailed in Bengal from the eighth to the end of the twelfth century A.D. See पुरुषोत्तमदेव.

lasārvadhātuka	a personal ending substituted for ल् which in certain cases gets the grave accent in, spite of the general rule that affixes ( which include personal endings ) are acute; confer, compare तास्यनुदात्तेन्डिद्दुपदेशाल्लसार्वधातुकमह्न्विङोः P. VI. 1. 186.

lāghava	brevity of expression; expressing in as few words as possible; brevity of thought and conception. About brevity of expression,rules or sūtras of the ancient Sūtrakāras are noteworthy especially those of the grammarian Pāņini, whose brevity of expression is aptly extolled in the familiar expression अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणा: Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 122; confer, compare also in contrast पर्यायशब्दानां लाघवगौरवचर्चा नाद्रियते Par.Śek.Pari.115.

lālavihārin	a grammarian of the nineteenth century who wrote a gloss on Nāgeśa's Paribhāșenduśekhara.

liṅganirṇayabhūṣaṇa	a work on genders by a southern grammarian अण्णौयाचार्य.

lībiś[ LIEBICH, BRUNO ]	a European grammarian belonging to Breslau who lived in the last quarter of the nineteenth and the first quarter of the twentieth century. He made a critical study of Sanskrit grammar and edited \| the Cāndra Vyākaraņa and the Kșīratarańgiņī.

luk(1)	disappearance (लुच्यते इति लुक्); a term used by Pāņini for the disappearance of an affix or its part under specified conditions as prescribed by a grammar rule with the mention of the word लुक्; exempli gratia, for example प्रत्ययस्य लुक्श्लुलुप: P. I.1.61 ; (2) augment ल् added to the root ला in the sense of melting (an oily thing); confer, compare घृतं विलालयति. See Kās, on P.VII.3. 39.

lugvikaraṇa	a term used by grammarians especially in the Mahābhāșya; (confer, compare M.Bh. on P.I. 2.4, I.2.12, II.4. 77 et cetera, and others) for such roots as have their Vikaraņa (conjugational sign) dropped by a rule with the mention of the word लुक्;exempli gratia, for example the roots of the second conjugation as contrastedition with other roots; confer, compare लुग्विकरणालुग्विकरणयोरलुग्विकरणस्य Par.Śek. Pari.90.

luptanirdiṣṭa	supposed to be mentioned although not seen or heard in a particular rule, for the sake of bringing about some grammatical operation with a view to arriving at some desired forms; confer, compare ल्रान्तस्येत्यत्र वकारोऽपि निर्दिश्यते \| किं वकारो न श्रूयते \| लुप्तनिर्दिष्टो वकारः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.3. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 10; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.3.7, III. 1.44 et cetera, and others; also confer, compare क्ङिति च P. I. 1.5 where the consonant ग् is supposed to be present in the word क्ङिति .

laiṅga	a grammatical operation or a rule of grammar concerning gender; confer, compare यदि तर्हि कृत्स्नः पदार्थोभिधीयते लैङ्गाः सांख्याश्र्च विधयो न सिध्यन्ति M.Bh.on P.II.2.24 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 8, 9.

lopa	disappearance of a word or part of a word enjoined in grammar for arriving at the required forms of a word; confer, compare अदर्शनं लोपः P. I.1.52: confer, compare अदर्शनमश्रवणमनुच्चारणमनुपलब्धिरभावो वर्णविनाश इत्यनर्थान्तरम् । एतैः शब्दैर्योर्थोभिधीयते तस्य लोप इतीयं संज्ञा भवति Kāś. on P.I.1. 52. This disappearance in the case of an affix is tantamount to its notional presence or imaginary presence, as operations caused by it do take place although the word element has disappeared; confer, compare प्रत्ययलोपे प्रत्ययलक्षणम् । प्रत्यये लुप्तेपि तद्धेतुकं कार्ये भवति Kāś. on P. I.1.62.

lopabalīyastva	the superior strength or superiority of elision as a grammatical operation in contrast with other operations, by virtue of which the elision, which is prescribed, takes place first and then other operations get a scope for their application; confer, compare सर्वविधिभ्यो लोपविधिर्बलीयान् Par.Śek. Pari. 93.

lohitādi(1)	a class of words headed by लोहित to which the affix क्यव् ( य ) is added in the sense of 'becoming', to form a denominative root-base which gets the verb-endings of both the padas; e. g. लोहितायति, लोहितायते; निद्रायति, निद्रायते; the class लोहितादि is considered as अाकृतिगण so that similar denominative verb-bases could be explained; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III.1. 13; (2) a class of words headed by लेहित, to which the feminine. affix ष्फ ( अायनी ) is added after they have got the taddhita affix यञ् added to them in the sense of 'a grandchild'; e. g. लौहित्यायनी, कात्यायनी et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 1.18.

vaṅgasena	a grammarian who wrote a grammatical work on verbs named अाख्यातप्रकरण.

vanamālin	a grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote a commentary named मतोन्मजा on Kondabhatta's vaiyakaranabhusana and a grammar work named सिद्धान्ततत्वविवेक.

varadarāja	a scholar of grammar and a pupil of Bhattoji Diksita who flourished in the end of the seventeenth century and wrote abridgments of the Siddhanta-kaumudi for beginners in grammar named लघुसिद्धान्तकौमुदी and मध्यसिद्धान्तकौमुदी as also धातुकारिकावली and गीर्वाणपदमञ्जरी. The work under the name सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी, which is the shortest abridgment, is, in fact, the लघुसिद्धान्तकौमुदी itselfeminine. It is possible that the auother first prepared the सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी and then, he himself or a pupil of his, put additional necessary matter and prepared the Laghusiddhanta-kaumudi.

vararuci(1)	a reputed ancient grammarian who is identified with Katyayana, the prominent author of the Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini. Both the names वररुचि and कात्यायन are mentioned in commentary works in connection with the Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini, and it is very likely that Vararuci was the individual name of the scholar, and Katyayana his family name. The words कात्य and कात्यायन are found used in Slokavarttikas in the Mahabhasya on P.III.2.3 and III.2.118 where references made are actually found in the prose Varttikas (see कविधेो सर्वत्र प्रसारणिभ्यो ड: P.III. 2. 3 Vart and स्मपुरा भूतमात्रे न स्मपुराद्यतने P.III.2.118 Vart. 1)indicating that the Slokavarttikakara believed that the Varttikas were composed by Katyayana. There is no reference at all in the Mahabhasya to Vararuci as a writer of the Varttikas; there is only one reference which shows that there was a scholar by name Vararuci known to Patanjali, but he was a poet; confer, compare वाररुचं काव्यं in the sense of 'composed' ( कृत and not प्रोक्त ) by वररुचि M.Bh. on P. IV. 2.4. ( 2 ) वररुचि is also mentioned as the author of the Prakrta Grammar known by the name प्राकृतप्रकाश or प्राकृतमञ्जरी, This वररुचि, who also was कात्यायन by Gotra name, was a grammarian later than Patanjali, who has been associated with Sarvvarman, (the author of the first three Adhyayas of the Katantra Sutras), as the author of the fourth Adhyaya. Patanjali does not associate वररुचि with Kityayana at alI. His mention of वररुचि as a writer of a Kavya is a sufficient testimony for that. Hence, it appears probable that Katyayana, to whom the authorship of the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya and many other works allied with Veda has been attributed, was not associated with Vararuci by Patanjali, and it is only the later writers who identified the grammarian Vararuci,who composed the fourth Adhyaya of the Katantra Grammar and wrote a Prakrit Grammar and some other grammar' works, with the ancient revered Katyayana, the author of Varttikas, the Vijasaneyi Pratisakhya and the Puspasutra; (3) There was a comparatively modern grammariannamed वररुचि who wrote a small treatise on genders of words consisting of about 125 stanzas with a commentary named Lingavrtti, possibly written by the author himselfeminine. (4) There was also another modern grammarian by name वररुचि who wrote a work on syntax named प्रयोगमुखमण्डन discuss＾ ing the four topics कारक, समास, तद्धित and कृदन्त.

varavarṇinī	name of a commentary on the Paribhsendusekhara written by Guruprasada Sastri, a reputed grammarian of the present cenutry.

varga	name given to the different classes of consonants which are headed by an unaspirate surd; e. g. कवर्ग, चवर्ग, टवर्ग, तवर्ग and पवर्ग. The several consonants in each group or class, are, in their serial order, named वगेप्रथम, वर्गद्वितीय et cetera, and others On the analogy of these five classes, the semivowels are called by the name यवर्ग and sibilants, are called by the name शवर्ग,

varṇapāṭha	serial mention or enumeration of letters in the fourteen Siva Sutras. The word is also used in the sense of the alphabet given in the Pratisakhya and grammar works; confer, compare एवं तर्हि वर्णपाठ एव उपदेश: करिष्यते M.Bh. on P. I. 1.69.

varṇaprakāśa	a minor work upon letters and their nature by a grammarian named Ghanasyama.

varṇarāśi	the collection of letters as mentioned in works on grammar and Pratisakhyas; confer, compare इति वर्णराशिः क्रमश्च Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 10.

varṇavikāra	change of one letter into another ( in the formation of a word ) the discussion of which is looked upon as one of the features of grammar; confer, compare लोपागमवर्णविकारज्ञो हृि सम्यग्वेदान्परिपालायिष्यति.M.Bh. Ahnika 1.

varṇavivekacandrikā	a minor grammar work on the nature of letters by a grammarian named काशिनाथ.

varṇārthavattva	the theory or view that individual letters are severally possessed of different senses. For instance, the difference in the meanings of the words कूप, यूप, and सृप is due to the difference in their initial letter. The theory is not acceptable to the Vaiyakaranas nor the theory वर्णानर्थवत्व given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. They follow the theory of संघातार्थवत्त्व i. e. sense given by a group of words together. See M.Bh, on Siva Sutra 5, Varttikas 9 to 15.

varṇāśraya	a grammatical operation depending upon a single letter id est, that is an operation caused by a letter singly; cf, वर्णाश्रये नास्ति प्रत्ययलक्षणम् \|ParSek.Pari.21; confer, comparealso वर्णाश्रयः प्रत्ययो वर्णविचालस्यानिमित्तम् । दाक्षि:l M.Bh.onP. I.1.39 Vart.10.

varṇikuberanātha	or वर्णिकुवेरानन्द an old writer on grammar who has written a work named शब्दविवरण on the meanings of words. The work forms a part of his bigger work दानभागवत. Both the works are incomplete. The शब्दविवरण is based mostly upon ancient grammar works of Patanjali Vararuci, Varttikakara, Sarvavarman, Bhartrhari and others.

varṇaukadeśa	a part or a portion of a combined letter id est, that isसंयुक्तस्वर or संयुक्तव्यञ्जन. The diphthongs or संयुक्तस्वरs are divisible into two Svaras, for instance ऐ into अा and ए, औ into अा and ओ. Similarly double consonants like क्कू, च्च्, क्म्, क्त् et cetera, and others are also divisible. Regarding the point raised whether the individual parts can be looked upon as separate letters for undergoing or causing a grammatical operation,the decision of the grammarians is that they cannot be looked upon as separate, when they are completely mixed as the dipthongs; confer, compareनाक्यपवृक्तस्यावयवस्य तद्वधिर्यथा द्रव्येषु Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 3, 4 Vart. 6.

varta	a term used by ancient grammarians and later on by commentators for compound words confer, compare वर्तनं वर्तः समास: Nyasa on Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. II.4.15.

vartamānā	a term used by ancient grammarians for the present tense, along with the term वर्तमान also; confer, compare यदा हि बुद्धिकर्म तदा वर्तमाना भाबष्यति, M.Bh. on P. III.3.133 Vart.8.

vardhamāna(1)	a long vowel;(2)name of a famous ]ain grammarian, disciple of Govindasuri, who lived in the beginning of the twelfth century A.D.and wrote a metrical work on ganas or groups of words in grammar, named गणरत्नमहोदधि, and also a commentary on it. The work consists of 8 chapters and has got some commentaries besides the well-known one by the author himselfeminine. He also wrote two other works on grammar कातन्त्रविस्तर and क्रियागुप्तक as also a few religious books.

varṣa	name of an ancient scholar of grammar and Mimamsa, cited by some as the preceptor of कात्यायन and Panini. If not of Panini, he may have been a preceptor of Katyayana

vākyapadī	name of a work on the denotation of words in verse-form with a comentary of his own written by a grammarian named गङ्गादास. The name वाक्यपदी is confounded with वाक्यपदीय of Bhartrhari through mistake.

vākyapadīya	a celebrated work on meanings of words and sentences written by the famous grammarian Bhartrhari ( called also Hari ) of the seventh century. The work is looked upon as a final authority regarding the grammatical treatment of words and sentences,for their interpretation and often quoted by later grammarians. It consists of three chapters the Padakanda or Brahmakanda, the Vakyakanda and the Samkirnakanda, and has got an excellent commentary written by Punyaraja and Helaraja.

vākyaparisamāpti	completion of the idea to be expressed in a sentence or in a group of sentences by the wording actually given, leaving nothing to be understood as contrasted with वाक्यापरिसमाप्ति used in the Mahabhasya: confer, compare वाक्यापरिसमाप्तेर्वा P.I.1.10 vart. 4 and the Mahabhasya thereon. There are two ways in which such a completion takes place,singly and collectively; cf प्रत्येकं वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः: illustrated by the usual example देवदत्तयज्ञदत्तविष्णुमित्रा भोज्यन्ताम् where Patanjali remarks प्रत्येकं ( प्रत्यवयवं) भुजिः परिसमाप्यते; cf also समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः where Patajali remarks गर्गा: शतं दण्ड्यन्ताम् \| अर्थिनश्च राजानो हिरण्येन भवन्ति न च प्रत्येकं दण्डयन्ति \| Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P.I.1.1Vart.12: cf also M.Bh. on P.I.1.7, I.2.39, II.2.l et cetera, and others वाक्यप्रकाश a work on the interpretation of sentences written with a commentary upon it by उदयधर्ममुनि of North Gujarat who lived in the seventeenth century A.D.

vākyasaṃskārapakṣa	the grammarian's theory that as the individual words have practically no existence as far as the interpretation or the expression of sense is concerned, the sentence alone being capable of conveying the sense, the formation of individual words in a sentence' is explained by putting them in a sentence and knowing their mutual relationship. The word गाम् cannot be explained singly by showing the base गो and the case ending अम् unless it is seen in the sentence गाम् अानय; confer, compare यथा वाक्यसंस्कारपक्षे कृष्णादिसंबुद्धयन्त उपपदे ऋधेः क्तिनि कृते कृष्ण ऋध् ति इति स्थिते असिद्धत्वात्पूर्वमाद्गुणे कृते अचो रहाभ्यामिति द्वित्वं .. Pari. Bhaskara Pari. 99The view is put in alternation with the other view, viz. the पदसंस्कारपक्ष which has to be accepted in connection with the गौणमुख्यन्याय; cf पदस्यैव गौणार्थकत्वस्य ग्रहेण अस्य ( गौणमुख्यन्यायस्य) पदकार्यविषयत्वमेवोचितम् \| अन्यथा वाक्यसंस्कारपक्षे तेषु तदनापत्तिः Par. Sek. on Pari. 15, The grammarians usually follow the वाक्यसंकारपक्ष.

vākyārtha	the meaning of a sentence, which comes as a whole composite idea when all the constituent words of it are heard: confer, compare पदानां सामान्ये वर्तमानानां यद्विशेषेSवस्थानं स वाक्यार्थ:, M.Bh. on P.I.2.45 Vart. 4. According to later grammarians the import or meaning of a sentence ( वाक्यार्थ ) flashes out suddenly in the mind of the hearer immediately after the sentence is completely uttered, The import is named प्रतिभा by Bhartrhari, confer, compare Vakyapadiya II.45; confer, compare also वाक्यार्थश्च प्रतिभामात्रविषय: Laghumanjusa. For details and the six kinds of vakyartha, see Vakyapadiya II.154.

vājapyāyana	an ancient grammarian who holds the view that words denote always the jati i.e they always convey the generic sense and that the individual object or the case is understood in connection with the statement or the word,as a natural course,when the purpose is not served by taking the generic sense; confer, compare अाकृत्यभिधानाद्वा एकं शब्दं विभक्तौ वाजप्यायन अाचार्यो न्याय्यं मन्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.2.64 Vart. 35.

vāḍava	possibly the same as Kunaravadava; an ancient grammarian quoted in the Mahabhasya; confer, compare तत्र सौर्थभगवतोक्तमनिष्टिज्ञो वाडव: पठति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VIII. 2. 106 Vव्रrt 3.

vāṇī	speech; utterance; the same as वाच् which is believed to be of four kinds as cited by the grammarians and explained by Bhartrhari; the four kinds are based upon the four places of origin, the three first places belonging to the inarticulate speech and the fourth belonging to the articulate one: cfचत्वारि वाक्परिमिता पदानि तानि विदुर्ब्राह्मण य मनीषिणः \| गुहा त्रीणि निहिता नेङ्गयन्तिं तुरीयं वाचेी मनुष्या वदन्ति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I Ahnika l and the Pradipa and Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.thereon.

vādanakṣatramālā	a work on grammatical debates et cetera, and others by Appaya Diksita, a well-known scholar and a senior contemporary of Jagannatha in the seventeenth century.

vādighaṭamudgara	name of a commentary on the Sarasvata Vykarana by a grammarian Jayanta.

vāmana	name of one of the joint authors of the well-known gloss or वृति upon the Sutras of Panini, who lived in the seventh century A. D. It cannot be ascertained which portion of the Kasika was written by Vamana and which by his colleague जयादित्य, There was another famous scholar of Kashmir by name Vamana who flourished in the tenth century and who wrote an independent grammar treatise विश्रान्तविद्याधर, together with उणादसूत्रवृत्ति and लिङ्गानुशासन.

vāraṇāvateśa	a grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote a gloss named अमृतस्त्रुति on the Prakriya-kaumudi.

vāraruca	a work attributed to वररुचि: confer, compare वाररुचे काव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P. IV.3.101 cf also वाररुनो ग्रन्थ: S.K.on P.IV.3. 101 This work possibly was not a grammar work and its author also was not the same as the Varttikakara Katyayana. See वरुरुचि a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The name वाररुचव्याकरण was given possibly to Katyayana's Prakrit Grammar, the author of which was वररुचि surnamed Katyayana. For details see p.395 Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's Edition.

vārarucakārikā	an ancient grammarwork in verse believed to have been written by an ancient scholar of grammar, who, if not the same as Katyayana who wrote the Varttikas, was his contemporary and to whom the authorship of the Unadi Sutras is ascribed by some scholars. See वररुचि.

vārttikakāra	believed to be Katyayana to whom the whole bulk of the Varttikas quoted in the Mahabhasya is attributed by later grammarians. Patafijali gives the word वार्तिककार in four places only (in the Mahabhasya on P.I.1.34, III.1.44: III.2.118 and VII.1.1) out of which his statement स्यादिविधिः पुरान्तः यद्यविशेषणं भवति किं वार्तिककारः प्रातिषेधेनं करोति in explanation of the Slokavarttika स्यादिविधिः...इति हुवता कात्यायनेनेहृ, shows that Patanjali gives कात्यायन as the Varttikakara (of Varttikas in small prose statements) and the Slokavarttika is not composed by Katyayana. As assertions similar to those made by other writers are quoted with the names of their authors ( भारद्वाजीयाः, सौनागाः, कोष्ट्रियाः et cetera, and others) in the Mahabhasya, it is evident that the Varttikas quoted in the Mahabhasya(even excluding the Slokavarttikas) did not all belong to Katyayana. For details see pp. 193-200, Vol. VII, Vyakarana Mahabhasya, D. E. Society's Edition.

vārṣyāyaṇi	an ancient grammarian quoted in the Mahabhasya and the Nirukta in connection with the six-fold division of bhava or verbal activity; confer, compare षड् भावविकारा भवन्तीति वाप्यार्यणि: l जायते अस्ति विपरिणमते वर्धते अपक्षीयते विनश्यतीति Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3.

vāvidhi	वाविधान also, laying down an option regarding a grammatical operation; confer, compare स्वस्तियोगे चतुर्थी कुशालार्थेराशिषि वाविधानात् P.II.3.16 Vart.1 ; confer, compare also अविशेषेण अयादनिां वाविधिमुक्त्वा सार्वधातुके नित्यमिति वक्ष्यामि M.Bh.on P.III. 1.31 Vart, 2; confer, compare also M.Bh. on P. III.1.94.

vikaraṇa	an affix placed between a root and the personal ending, for showing the specific tense or mood or voice to convey which, the personal ending is applied; e. g. the conjugational signs शप् , श्यन् , श्रु, श, श्नम्, उ, श्ना and यक्, आम् , as also स्य, तास् , सिप् , अाम् and च्लि with its substitutes. Although the term विकरण is used by ancient grammarians and freely used by the Mahabhsyakara in connection with the affixes, mentioned in the sutras of Panini, such as शप् , श्यन् and others, the term is not found in the Sutras of Panini. The vikaranas are different from the major kinds of the regular affixes तिङ्, कृत्य and other similar ones. The vikaranas can be called कृत्; so also, as they are mentioned in the topic (अधिकार) of affixes or Pratyayas,they hold the designation ' pratyaya '. For the use of the word विकरण see M.Bh. on P. I.3. 12, III, 1.31 and VI. 1.5. The term विकरण is found . in the Yājñavalkya Siksa in the sense of change, ( confer, compare उपधारञ्जनं कुर्यान्मनोर्विकरणे सति ) and possibly the ancient grammarians used it in that very sense as they found the root कृ modified as करु or कुरु, or चि as चिनु, or भू as भव before the regular personal endings तिप् , तस् et cetera, and others

vikarṣa(1)	a fault in the utterance of a vowel with its proper accent (acute,grave or circumflex) which results from the proper accent being mixed with another in the utterance: confer, compareविकर्षो नामाश्लिष्टता Uvvata ' on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 18: (2) protraction of the accent especially of the circumflex accent.

vikṛta	mutilated, changed in nature e. g. the word राम into रम् in रामौ which is equivalent to राम् + औ. For technical purposes in grammar a word, although mutilated a little by lopa, agama or varnavikara, is looked upon as the original one for undergoing operations cf एकदेशविकृतमनन्यवत् Par. Sek. Pari. 37.

vikrama(1)	name given to a grave vowel placed between two circumflex vowels, or between a circumflex and an acute, or between an acute and a circumflex; confer, compare स्वरितयोर्मध्ये यत्र नीचं स्यात्, उदात्तयोर्वा अन्यतरतो वा उदात्तस्वरितयोः स विक्रम: T.Pr. XIX.I ; (2) name given to a grave vowel between a pracaya vowel and an acute or a circumflex vowel: confer, compare प्रचयपूर्वश्च कौण्डिन्यस्य T.Pr.XIX.2: (8) repetition of a word or पद as in the Krama recital of the Veda words; (4) name given to a visarjaniya which has remained intact, as for instance in यः प्रणतो निमिषतः ; confer, compare R.Pr. I.5; VI.1 ; the word विक्रम is sometimes used in the sense of visarjaniya in general: cf also अनिङ्गयन् विक्रममेषु कुर्यात् R.Pr. XIII.11.

vijayagaṇin	a.Jain grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote a commentary on the Haimalaghuprakriya.

vijayānand	called also विद्यानन्द, a grammar scholar of the Katantra school who wrote (l) Katantradhatuvrtti (2) Katantrottara and (3) Kriyakalapa.

viṭhṭhala	or विठ्ठलेश grandson of रामचन्द्रशेष the author of the प्राक्रियाकौमुदी. He was aTelagu Brahmana of Andhra who lived in the beginning of the sixteenth century and wrote a commentary named प्रसाद on the Prakriya-Kaumudi and two small works अव्ययार्थनिरूपण and पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति.

vidyāvinoda	grandson of Rameswarabhatta of Pratisthana who wrote a grammar of the Prakrta dialects.

vidvatprabodhinī	name of a commentary on the Sarasvata-prakriya by a grammarian named Rama.

vidhibalīyastva	the superior strength of an injunctive rule; the term is very frequently used by grammarians in speaking about the relative strength of rules; cf the term लेापाविधिबलीयस्त्व. M.Bh. on P.VII.2.3.

vinayavijaya	a.]ain grammarian who has written a gloss on हेमलधुप्रक्रिया.

vināma	cerebralization; confer, compare the word नति; the word was used in ancient grammar works in the sense of णत्व ( change of न् into ण् ): confer, compare अग्रहणं चेन्नुङ्विधिलादेशविनामेषु ऋकारग्रहणम्: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.VIII.4.1 Vart. 2.

vipariṇāma	change; confer, compare कार्यविपरिणामाद्वा सिद्धम् \| कार्यस्य संप्रत्ययस्य विपरिणामः कार्यविपरिणामः M.Bh. on I.1.56 Vart. 14. The word is very frequently used in connection with a change of the case of a word in a grammar rule which becomes necessary for interpretation; confer, compare विभक्तिविपरिणामाद्वा सिद्वम् as also अर्थाद्विभक्तिविपरिणामो भवति । M.Bh. on P.I.3.9,12:V.3.60, VI.1 . 4, VII.3.50.

viprarājendra	a grammarian who has written पाणिनिसूत्रविवरण, a gloss on the Sūtras of Pāṇini.

vibhakti	literally division, separation; separation of the base id est, that is that factor which shows the base separately। The word विभक्ति is generally used in the sense of case affixes; but in Pāṇini's grammar the term विभक्ति is applied also to personal endings applied to roots to form verbs; confer, compareविभक्तिश्च । सुप्तिङौ विभक्तिसंज्ञौ स्तः S.K.on Pāṇ. I.4.104. The term is also applied to taddhita affix.affixes which are applied to pronouns, किम् and बहु, ending in the ablative or in the locative case or in other cases on rare occasions. Such affixes are तस् (तसिल् ), त्र, (त्रल्), ह, अत्, दा, ऋहिल्, दानीम्, था ( थाल् ) and थम् given in P.V.3.1 to V.3.26.The case affixes are further divided into उपपदविभक्ति affixes and कारकविभक्ति affixes. For details see P.II.3.1 to 73.

vibhaktyartha	literally the sense of a case-affix, as also of a personal affix; the term is applied to the Kāraka Prakarana or Kāraka chapter or topic in grammar where senses of the विभक्ति affixes are fully discussed and illustrated; confer, compare विभक्त्यर्था: a chapter in the Siddhānta-kaumudi of Bhaṭṭojī Dīkṣita.

vibhaktyarthaprakāśa	a work on syntax of words written by a grammarian named Kamalākarabhaṭṭa.

vibhāga(1)	lit, division, splitting; the splitting of a sentence into its constituent parts viz. the words; , the splitting of a word into its constituent parts viz. the base, the affix, the augments and the like: (2) understanding or taking a thing separately from a group of two or more; confer, compareअवश्यं खल्वपि विभज्योपपदग्रहणं कर्तव्यं यो हि बहूनां विभागस्तदर्थम् ! सांकाश्यकेभ्यश्च पाटलिपुत्रकेभ्यश्च माथुरा अभिरूपतराः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.V.3.57: (3) splitting of a Saṁhitā text of the Vedas into the Pada text: confer, compare अथादावुत्तरे विभागे ह्रस्वं व्यञ्जनपरः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.III.l, where विभाग is explained as पदविभाग by the commentator confer, compare also R.Pr.XVII.15; (4) the capacity of the Kārakas (to show the sense) confer, compare कारकशक्तिः विभागः Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on Kāś.I.2.44.

vimalakīrti	a Jain grammarian of the sixteenth century who wrote a short metrical work on the padas of roots, known by the name पदव्यवस्थासूत्रकारिका.

vimalamati	an old grammarian who is believed to have written a gloss named भागवृत्ति on Pāṇini's Sūtras to which the grammarians Purusottamadeva, Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛttiand others of the twelfth century refer. Some scholars say that भागवृत्ति was written by भर्तृहरि; but it is not feasible, as there is a reference to Māghakāvya in भागवृति. In books on grammar,. especially of the Eastern School in the 11th and the 12th century, there are several quotations from the Bhāgavṛtti. See भागवृत्ति.

vimalasarasvatī	a grammarian who wrote a small grammar work named रूपमाला

vivakṣā	intention or desire, generally of the speaker with regard to the sense to be conveyed by his words; the words वक्तुर्विवक्षा are often used by grammarians in this sense: confer, compare विवक्षातः कारकाणि (Paribhāṣā)confer, compare also कथम् । विवक्षातः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.66-67, I.2.64 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 53, IV.1.3: confer, compare also विवक्षाधीना शब्दव्युत्पत्तिः Durgh. Vr. II.2.8; confer, compare also इतिकरणो विवक्षार्थ: Kāś. on P.II. 2.27, IV.2.21, IV.2.55,57, et cetera, and others

viśrambha	relaxation, a characteristic of the grave accent as contrasted with अायाम which characterizes the acute accent; confer, compare उदात्तश्चानुदात्तश्च स्वरितश्च त्रयः स्वराः । आयामविश्रम्भाक्षेपैस्त उच्यन्तेSक्षराश्रयाः । विश्रम्भः अधोगमनं गात्राणाम् Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on R.Pr.III.1.विश्रम्भ is the same as अन्ववसर्ग which is explained in the Mahābhāṣya as अन्ववसर्गो गात्राणां शिथिलता. Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.2.29,30.

viśrāntavidyādhara	name of a grammar work of a general type which once occupied a prominent position and was studied as a text book of grammar, representing an independent system. The work is referred to by Hemacandra and Haribhadra. It is attributed to Vāmana who may be the same as one of the joint writers of the Kāśikāvṛtti. In that case the date of the work is the 7th century A. D.;confer, compare the popular verse परेत्र पाणिनीयज्ञाः केचित्कालपकोविदा: । एकेकं विश्रान्तविद्याः स्युरन्ये संक्षिप्तसारकाः quoted in Vol.VII p. 388 Vyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya D.E. Society's edition.

viśvakarmaśāstrī	name of a grammarian who wrote a commentary सत्प्रकियाव्याकृति on the Prakriyā-kaumudī.

viśvanāthadaṇḍibhaṭṭa	a well-known grammarian of the nineteenth century who wrote several commentary works of which the commentaries on the two Śekharas of Nāgeśa are well-known to scholars.

viśvarūpa	a grammarian of the sixteenth century who has written a small grammar treatise called विश्वरूपनिबन्ध.

viśveśvaratīrtha	a grammarian who has written a gloss on the Siddhāntakaumudī.

viṣṇupaṇḍita	a grammarian belonging to the famous Śeṣa family of grammarians, who has written a small treatise on Paribhāṣā or maxims of interpretation which he has named परिभाषाप्रक्राश.

viṣṇubhadṛ( विष्णुशास्त्री भट )	a scholar of grammar of the latter half of the nineteenth century who has written learned commentaries on the works of Nāgeśa Bhaṭṭa, two of which viz. चिच्चन्द्रिका and विष्णुभट्टी are well known to scholars.

viṣṇumiśra	a scholar of the Supadma system of grammar who has written a commentary named मकरन्द on the सुपद्मव्याकरण and also a commentary on the सुपद्मसमाससंग्रह.

vihita	prescribed by a rule; that for which a vidhi or injunction has been laid down. The word is very frequently used by grammarians with respect to an affix prescribed after a base.

vuñ	(ID taddhita affix. affix अक causing vṛddhi to the vowel of the first syllable of that word to which it is added, as prescribed, (a) to the words denoting an offspring as also to the words उक्ष, उष्ट्र et cetera, and othersin the sense of 'a group'; e. g. अोपगवकम् , औष्ट्रकम् , कैदारकम् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P.IV.2.39, 40; (b) to the words राजन्य and others in the sense of 'inhabited country' ; e. g. राजन्यकः देवनायकः et cetera, and others, confer, compare P. IV.2.53, (c) to the words headed by अरीहण such as द्वुघण, खदिर्, मैत्रायण, काशकृत्स्न et cetera, and others in the quadruple senses; exempli gratia, for example अारीहणकम् , द्रौबणकम् , confer, compare P.IV.2.80, (d) to the word धन्व meaning a desert, to words with य् or र for their penultimate, to words ending in प्रस्थ, पुर and वह as also to words headed by धूम, नगर, अरण्य कुरु, युगन्धर et cetera, and others, under certain conditions in the miscellaneous senses; e. g. सांकाश्यकः,पाटलिपुत्रकः, माकन्दकः, आङ्गकः, वाङ्गकः, धौमकः, नागरकः, अारण्यकः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.IV.2.121-130,134,135, 136; (e) to the words शरद् , आश्वयुजी, ग्रीष्म, वसन्त, संवत्सर,अाग्रहायणी and others in the specific senses given: confer, compare P. IV. 3.27, 45, 46, 49, 50; (f) to words denoting descendence or spiritual relation, words meaning families and warrior clans, words कुलाल and others, words meaning clans, and students learning a specific Vedic branch in specific senses prescribed : e. g. आचार्यक, मातामहक, ग्लौचुकायनक, कालालक, काठक, कालापक et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV. 3.77, 99, 118, 126; (g) to the words शाकल, उष्ट्र, उमा and ऊर्णा in the specially given senses; exempli gratia, for example शाकलः, संघः, औप्ट्रकः, औमम् और्णम्, confer, compareP.IV.3.188,157,158; (h) to words with य् as the penultimate, and a long vowel preceding the last one, to words in the dvandva compound, and to the words मनोज्ञ, कल्याण and others in the sense of 'nature' or 'profession';e.g रामणीयकम् गौपालपशुपालिका, गार्गिका, काठिका etc; confer, compare P. V.1.132,133,134: (2) kṛt affix अक added to the roots निन्द् हिंस् and others, and to the roots देव् and कृश् with a prefix before,in the sense of a habituated,professional or skilled agent; exempli gratia, for example. निन्दकः, परिक्षेपकः, असूयकः, परिदेवकः, आक्रोशकः et cetera, and others confer, compare P.III.2. 146, 147.

vṛt	a word signifying the end of a particular group of words; the word frequently occurs in the Dhātupāṭha of Pāṇini but not necessarily at the end of each class or group therein; exempli gratia, for example टुओश्चि गतिवृद्धयोः । वृत् \| अयं वदतिश्च उदात्तौ परस्मैभाषौ \| Dhātupāṭha at the end of the First Conjugation. Similarly वृत् is used at the end of the fourth, fifth, and sixth conjugations.

vṛtta(1)	arrived at or accomplished,as a result of वृत्ति which means a further grammatical formation from a noun or a verb; resultant from a vṛtti; confer, compare यावता कामचारो वृत्तस्य ये लिङ्गसंख्ये ते अतिदेक्ष्येते, न पुनः, प्राग्वृत्तेर्ये M Bh. on P.I.2.51; cf also युक्तंपुनर्यद् वृत्तनिमित्तको नाम अनुबन्धः स्यात्; (2) \| employment, the same as प्रयोग, confer, compare वृत्ताद्वा । वृत्तं प्रयेागः । Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.on P. I. 3.9; (3)behaviour, treatment confer, compare नकारस्योष्मवद् वृत्ते Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) X.13; (4) manner of Veda writing, metrical form, metre; confer, compare तद् वृत्तं प्राहुश्छन्दसाम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVII.22.

vṛtti(1)	treatment, practice of pronunciation; (2) conversion of one phonetic element into another; confer, compare R.Pr.I.95;(3) position of the padas or words as they stand in the Saṁhhitā text, the word is often seen used in this way in the compound word पदवृत्ति; आन्पदा: पदवृत्तयः R.Pr. IV.17: (4) modes of recital of the Vedic text which are described to be three द्रुत, मध्य and विलम्बित based upon the time of the interval and the pronunciation which differs in each one; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.4. 109, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 4; also I.l.69 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).ll ; ( 5 ) nature confer, compare गुर्वक्षराणां गुरुवृत्ति सर्वम् R.Pr.XVIII.33; (6) interpretation of a word; (7) verbal or nominal form of a root; confer, compare अर्थनित्यः परीक्षेत केनचिद् वृत्तिसामान्येन Nirukta of Yāska.II.1; (8)mode or treatment followed by a scientific treatise; cf का पुनर्वृत्तिः । वृत्तिः शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः \| M.Bh. in Āhnika l on वृत्तिसमवायार्थ उपदेश: Vārttika 10; (9) manner of interpretation with the literal sense of the constituents present or absent, described usually as two-fold जहत्स्वार्था and अजहत्स्वार्था, \| but with a third kind added by some grammarians viz. the जहदजहत्स्वार्था; (10) a compound word giving an aggregate sense different from the exact literal sense of the constituent words; there are mentioned five vṛittis of this kind; confer, compare परार्थाभिधानं वृत्तिः । कृत्तद्धितसमासैकदेशधातुरूपाः पञ्च वृत्तयः \| वृत्त्यर्थावबोधकं वाक्यं विग्रहः S. K. at the end of the Ekaśeṣaprakaraṇa; ( 11 ) interpretation of a collection of statements; the word was originally applied to glosses or comments on the ancient works like the Sūtra works, in which the interpretation of the text was given with examples and counterexamples where necessary: confer, compare वृत्तौ भाष्ये तथा नामधातुपारायणादिषु; introductory stanza in the Kāśikā.Later on, when many commentary works were written,the word वृत्ति was diferentiated from भाष्य, वार्तिक, टीका,चूर्णि, निर्युक्ति, टिप्पणी, पञ्जिका and others, and made applicable to commentary works concerned with the explanation of the rules with examples and counter-examples and such statements or arguments as were necessary for the explanation of the rules or the examples and counter examples. In the Vyākaraṇa-Śāstra the word occurs almost exclusively used for the learned Vṛtti on Pāṇini-sūtras by Vāmana and Jayāditya which was given the name Kāśikā Vṛtti; confer, compare तथा च वृत्तिकृत् often occurring in works on Pāṇini's grammar.

vṛticandrikā	name of a grammar work written by a grammarian Kāśinātha who also is believed to have written वर्णविवेकचन्द्रिका and वैयाकरणसर्वस्व.

vṛttidīpikā	a treatise on the different ways in which the meaning is conveyed by words according to the conventions of grammarians,written by a grammarian Krisnabhatta surnamed Mauni.

vṛttisamavāya	serial arrangement of letters in a specific way ( as for instance in the Mahesvara Sutras) for the sake of grammatical functions; confer, compare वृत्तिसमवायार्थं उपदेशः \| वृत्तिः शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः। समवायॊ वर्णानामानुपूर्व्येण सांनवेशः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Ahnika I.

vṛddha(1)	a term used in Paninis grammar for such words or nouns ( प्रातिपदिक ) which have for their first vowel a vrddhi vowel, i. e. either अा or ऐ or अौ: exempli gratia, for example शाला, माला et cetera, and others; confer, compare वृद्धिर्यस्य अचामादिस्तद् वृद्धम् ; (2) a term applied to the eight pronouns headed by त्यत् for purposes of the addition of taddhita affix. affixes prescribed for the Vrddha words, such as छ by वृद्धाच्छ: P. IV.2.114: (3) a term applied to words having ए or ओ as the first vowel in them, provided such words denote districts of Eastern India, e. g. गोनर्द, भोजकट et cetera, and others confer, compare एङ् प्राचां देशे, P.I.1.73, 74 and 75; (4) a term used in the Pratisakhya works for a protracted vowel ( प्लत ) which has three matras; cf तिस्रॊ वृद्धम् Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya.44.

vṛddhi(1)	a technical term used by Panini to denote the vowels अा, ऐ and औ: a vowel belonging to the third grade out of the three grades of vowels which are known as zero, normal and long grades; cf , वृद्धिरादैच् P I. 1.1: (2) lengthening completely of a vowel which is called प्लुति in grammar: the term is used in the Rk Tantra Pratisakhya in this sense.

vṛddhipāda	name given to the first pada of Panini's Astadhyayi by grammarians, as the beginning of the pada is made by the Sutra वृद्धिरादैच्.

vṛṣan( वृषा ),	a term used in ancient grammar works for a word of the masculine gender as contrasted with येषा.

vaidikīprakriyā	name of that section of Bhattoji's Siddhantakaumudi which deals with Vedic peculiarities noticed by Panini in his sutras. There is a well-known commentary upon this section named सुबोधिनी written by Jayakrisna a famous grammar scholar of the Maunin family.

vaidikaprakriyāṭīkā(1)	a commentary on the sutras of Panini dealing with the Vedic words and their peculiarities written by a grammarian named Murari; (2) a commentary on the section of Bhattoji's Siddhantakaumudi named वैदिकीप्रक्रिया written by Jayakrsna Maunin and named Subodhini.

vaidyanātha	Vaidyanatha Payagunde, a famous grammarian of the eighteenth century, who was one of the chief pupils of Nagesa and who prepared a line of pupils at Varanasi. He has written learned commentaries on standard works on grammar, the principal ones being the Prabha on the Sabdakaustubha, the Bhavaprakasika on the Brhaccabdendusekhara, the Cidasthimala on the LaghuSabdendusekhara, the Kasika or Gada on the Paribhasendusekhara and an independent short treatise named Rapratyaya-khandana

vaiyādhikaraṇya	Iit. possession of separate residences, as contrasted with सामानाधिकरण्य: absence of apposition; use in different cases, non-agreement in case.

vaiyarthya	absence of any purpose or utility; the word is used many times in the case of a rule, or a word or two of it, in whose case वैयर्थ्य or absence of utility is shown, and, with a view to prevent its being looked upon as a serious fault, something is deduced and the purpose is shown; cf सूत्रवैयर्थ्यप्रसङ्गात् and व्यर्थं सज्ज्ञापयति used in grammar treatises.

vaiyākaraṇa	literally a student of grammar; व्याकरणमधीते वैयाकरण: cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV, 2.59. The word is used in the sense of 'a scholar of Grammar;'or, 'a person who has obtained proficiency in Grammar.' The word is used several times in this sense in the Mahabhasya. cf Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.3; I.4.2, II. 1.53, II.2.29, II.3.18, II.4.56, III.2.115 et cetera, and others The word is also used in the sense of 'pertaining to grammar' or 'found in grammar.'

vaiyākaraṇajīvātu	a term used for the grammar treatise written by Cangudasa which is also called Cangusutra or Canguvyakarana.

vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa	a well-known work on the grammatical interpretation of words written by Kondabhatta as an explanatory work (व्याख्यान) on the small work in verse consisting of only 72 Karikas written by his uncle Bhattoji Diksita. The treatise is also named Brihadvaiyakaranabhusana. A smaller work consisting of the same subjectmatter but omitting discussions, is written by the author for facilitating the understanding of students to which he has given the name Vaiyakarahabhusanasara. This latter work has got three commentary works written on it named Kasika, Kanti and Matonmajja and one more scholarly one Sankari, recently written by Shankar Shastri Marulkar.

vaiyākaraṇaśābdamālā	वैयाकरणशब्दरत्नमाला a treatise on the use of words written as a helpful guide to Sanskrit writers, by a grammarian named Somayajin in 1848 A.D.

vaiyākaraṇaśābdabodha	import of a sentence according to the grammarians, in which verbal activity occupies a predominant place, and the residing place of the subject as also that of the verbal activity is identical in the active voice, while the object and the verbal activity have got the same place of residence in the passive voice. The other auxiliaries of activity such as the instrument, location and the like, are connected with the verbal activity. The import of the sentence चैत्रः पचति, in short, can be expressed as चैत्रकर्तृका वर्तमानकालिकां पाकक्रिया.

vaiyākaraṇasarvasva	a small treatise on grammar written by a scholar of grammar named Kasinatha who has also written a few more small works वर्णविवेकचन्द्रिका, वृत्तिचन्द्रिका,धातुमञ्जरी etc

vaiyākaraṇasiddhāntakaimudī	an extremely popular work on the subject of Sanskrit grammar written for the use of students, which, although difficult at a few places, enables the students by its careful study to get a command over the subject. and enable him to read other higher works on grammar. The work is based on the Astadhyayi of Panini without omitting a single Sutra. The arrangement of the Sutras is, entirely different, as the author, for the sake of facility in understanding, has divided the work into different topics and explained the Sutras required for the topic by bringing them together in the topic. The main topics or Prakaranas are twelve in number, viz. (1) संज्ञापरिभाषा, (2) पञ्चसंधि, (3) सुबन्त or षड्लिङ्ग, (4) स्त्रीप्रत्यय, (5) कारक, (6) समास, (7) तद्धित, (8) तिङन्त, (9) प्रक्रिया, (10) कृदन्त, (11) वैदिकी and (12) स्वर which are sometimes styled as व्याकरणद्वादशी. The work is generally known by the term सिद्धान्तकौमुदी, or even कौमुदी, and it has got a large number of scholarly and ordinary commentaries as also commentaries on commentaries, all numbering a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. twelve, and two abridgments the Madhyakaumudi and the Laghukaumudi. The work was written by the reputed scholar Bhattoji Diksita of Varanasi in the seventeenth century. See Bhattoji Diksita.

vaiyāghrapadya	name of a treatise of grammar written in ten chapters by an ancient grammarian व्याघ्रपाद्; confer, compare दशकं वैयाघ्रपद्यम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P. IV 2.65. For details, see Vyakaranamahabhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's Ed. pp. 133, 134.

vaivacana	a term used for the Pragrhya vowel, possibly the same as द्वैवचन , which means a specific feature of द्विवचन or the dual number. The term is used in some Siksa works.

vyaktipadārthavāda	the same as द्रव्यपदार्थवाद; the view that a word denotes the individual object and not the generic nature. The oldest grammarian referred to as holding this view, is व्याडि who preceded Patanjali.

vyaṅkaṭasubbāśāsrī	a grammarian who has written a grammar treatise named भाषामञ्जरीव्याकरण.

vyañjanasaṃdhi	a junction or coalescence of two consonants as distinguished from स्वरसंधि. In Panini's system of grammar the name हृल्संधि is given to व्यञ्जनसंधि and the Siddhantakaumudi has given a separate section for it.

vyatikara(1)	confusion of one numberaffix for another number-affix (वचन), as noticed in the statements. e. g. अक्षीणि मे दर्शनीयानि; पादा मे सुकुमारंतरा: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I. 4. 21; (2) any confusion, say confusion of one grammatical element for another; confer, compare हृि: परस्मैपदानां यथा स्यात्, स्व आत्मनेपदानां, व्यतिकरो मा भूत् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.4.1 Vart, 2.

vyartha(l)	useless, serving no purpose, superfluous; the word is usually used in the sense of useless or futile in connection with a rule or its part, which serves no purpose, its purpose or object being served otherwise; such words or rules have never been condemned as futile by commentators, but an attempt is made invariably by them to deduce something from the futile wording and show its necessity; confer, compare व्यर्थे सज्ज्ञापयति a remark which is often found in the commentary literature; confer, compare अन्यथा अन्तरङ्गत्वाद्दीर्घे कृत एव प्रत्ययप्राप्त्या तद्यर्थता स्पष्टैव । Par. Sek. Pari. 56; (2) possessed of various senses such as the words अक्षा: माषा: et cetera, and others: confer, compare व्यर्थेषु च मुक्तसंशयम् । M.Bh.on P.I.2.64 Vart. 52. The word व्यर्थ possibly stands for विविधार्थ in such cases. It appears that the word व्यर्थ in the sense of futile was rarely used by ancient grammarians; the word अनर्थक appears to have been used in its placcusative case. See Mahabhasya in which the word व्यर्थ does not occur in this sense while the word अनर्थक occurs at several places.

vyavasthā	literally definite arrangement; restriction regarding the application of a rule, especially when it seems to overlap, as done by the Varttikakara, and later on by the Paribhashas laid down by grammarians regarding the rules of Panini: confer, compare स्वाभिधेयापेक्षावधिनियमो व्यवस्था S. K. on P. I.1.34; confer, compare also लक्ष्यानुसाराह्यवस्था Par. Sek. Pari. 99, 108.

vyākaraṇacandrikā	a short treatise on grammar written by Krsnacarya.

vyākaraṇadarśana	the science of Vyakarana with the element of Sphota introduced in it and brought consequently on a par with the other Darsanas by the stalwart grammar-scholar Bhartrhari of the 7th century A. D. For details see Sarvadarsanasangraha ' Paninidarsanam ' and page 385 Vol. VII. of the Vyakarana Mahabhasya edited by the D. ESociety, Poona.

vyākaraṇadīpa	a small treatise on grammar by Cidrupasraya.

vyākaraṇadīpikā	name of a short gloss or Vrtti on the Sutras of Panini written by a modern scholar of grammar Orambhatta of Varanasi.

vyākaraṇaprakāśa	name of the commentary written by Mahamisra on Jinendrabuddhi's great work 'Kasikavivaranapanjika' or Nyasa.

vyākaraṇamahābhāṣyapradīpa	the original name of the learned commentary on Patanjali's Mahabhasya by Kaiyatabhatta the well-known grammarian of Kashmir of the eleventh century. See प्रदीप and कैयट.

vyākaraṇamahābhāṣyapradīpoddyota	the wellknown scholarly commentary by the stalwart grammarian Nagesabhatta on the Mahabhasyapradipa of Kaiyata. See उद्द्योत and नागेश.

vyākaraṇaratnāvalī	a short work on grammar written by विद्यारत्न गौरमॊदन. व्याकरणसंग्रह a small grammar work written by a grammar scholar Gangadhara which is based upon the Mugdhabodha of Bopadeva.

vyākaraṇāntara	a term used by scholars of the Paniniyan system of grammar with respect to grammar works of other systems such as the Katantra, the Sakatyana, and others; confer, compare श्रन्थिग्रन्थिदाम्भिस्वञ्जीनां लिटः कित्वं व्याकरणान्तरे S.K. on अश्नॊतेश्च P. VII.4.72.

vyāghrapād	name of an ancient grammarian who is quoted in the Pratisakhya works and the Mahabhasya His grammar work was called dasaka' possibly on account of its consisting of 10 chapters; confer, compare माध्यन्दिनिर्वष्टि गुणं त्विगन्ते नपुसंके व्याघ्रपदां वरिष्ठ: KaS. on P.VII.194; confer, compare also दशक्रा वैयाघ्रपदीया: Kas, , on P.IV.2.65.

vyāghrabhūti	name of an old grammarian later than Patanjali who is quoted by later grammarians; confer, compare व्याघ्रभूत्यादयस्त्वेनं नेह पेठुरिति स्थितम् Siddhantakaumudi on अात्मनेपदेष्वनतः P. VII. 1. 5.

byāḍi	name of an ancient grammarian with a sound scholarship in Vedic phonetics, accentuation,derivation of words and their interpretation. He is believed to have been a relative and contemporary of Panini and to have written a very scholarly vast volume on Sanskrit grammar named Samgraha which is believed to have consisted of a lac of verses; confer, compare* संग्रहो व्याडिकृतो लक्षसंख्ये ग्रन्थ: NageSa's Uddyota; confer, compare also इह पुरा पाणिनीये अस्मिन्व्याकरणे ब्याड्युपरचितं लक्षग्रन्थपरिमाणं निबन्धनमासीत् Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari. Tika. The work is not available at present. References to Vyadi or to his work are found in the Pratisakhya works, the Mahabhasya, the Varttikas, the Vakyapadiya and many subsequent treatises. A work on the Vyakarana Paribhasas, believed to have been written by Vyadi, is available by the name परिभाषासूचन which from its style and other peculiarities seems to have been written after the Varttikas, but before the Mahabhasya. Vyadi is well-known to have been the oldest exponent of the doctrine that words denote an individual object and not the genus. For details see pp. 136-8, Vol. 7 Vyakarana Mahabhasya DE. Society's Edition.

vyāpya	literally that which is occupied; the word refers to a kind of an object where the object is occupied by the verbal activity of the transitive root; the word अाप्य is also used in this sense: confer, compare कर्म निर्वर्त्ये विकार्यं प्राप्यं च ग्रस्य प्रकृत्युच्छेदो गुणान्तरं वोत्पद्यते तद्विकार्यम् SrinagaraPrakasa 2, The term is used as a technical term instead of the term कर्म in the Hemacandra, Candra and other systems of grammar: confer, compare Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. II.2.3;Candra I.1.23.

vyāśraya	resting on, or applying to, different words or elements of words or parts of words; the word is used in connection with a grammatical operation which affects one part of the word, as distinguished from another operation which affects another part ;confer, compare आभीयं कार्यं समानाश्रयमासिद्धम्। व्याश्रयं सिद्धं भवति । M.Bh. on P.III.1. 44, VI. 4.22 Vart.12, VI.4.42 et cetera, and others

vyutpattipakṣa	the view that every word is derived from a suitable root as contrasted with the other view viz. the अव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष. The grammarians hold that Panini held the अव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष,id est, that is the view that not all words in a language can be derived but only some of them can be so done, and contrast him (id est, that isPanini) with an equally great grammarian Sakatayana who stated that every word has to be derived: confer, compare न्यग्रोधयतीति न्यग्रोध इति व्युत्पत्तिपक्षे नियमार्थम् ! अव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष विध्यर्थम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P.VII.3.6.

vyutpattivāda(l)	name given to a topic in grammar which deals with the derivation of words as suitable to the sense: (2) name given to treatises discussing the derivation and interpretation of words.

vhiṭne[ WHITNEY, WILLIAM DWIGHT, 1827-1894]	a sound scholar of Vedic grammar who has, besides some books on Linguistic studies, written a work on Vedic Grammar and edited the Atharvaveda Pratisakhya.

ś(1)	a sibilant letter of the palatal class, possessed of the properties, श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष and कण्ठविवृतत्व; (2) the initial indicatory ( इत् ) letter श् of a non-taddhita affix in Panini's grammar, which is dropped; (3) substitute for च्छ् when followed by an affix beginning with a nasal consonant; e.g प्रश्न:, confer, compare P.VI.4.19;(4) substitute for स् when followed by श् or any palatal letter;exempli gratia, for example वृक्षश्छादयति वृक्षश्शेते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P. VIII. 4.40.

śaṃkarabhaṭṭa	name of a grammarian of the eighteenth century who wrote a commentary, called शांकरी after him, on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara.

śaṃkaraśāstrī( मारुलकर )	a modern scholar of grammar who lived in Poona and did the work of teaching and writing commentaries. He has written a commentary mamed शांकरी on the Vaiyakaranabhusanasara of Kondabhatta.

śakti	potentiality of expressing the sense which is possessed by words permanently with them: denotative potentiality or denotation; this potentiality shows the senses,which are permanently possessed by the words, to the hearer and is described to be of one kind by ancient grammarian as contrasted with the two (अभिघा and लक्षणा) mentioned by the modern ones. It is described to be of two kinds-(a) स्मारिका शक्ति or recalling capacity which combines चैत्रत्व with पाक, and अनुभाविका शक्ति which is responsible for the actual meaning of a sentence. For details see Vakyapadiya III.

śabarasvāmin	a grammarian to whom a metrical treatise on genders named लिङ्गानुशासन is ascribedition This शवरस्वामिन् was comparatively a modern grammarian who was given the title बालयोगीश्वर. This लिङ्गानुशासन has a commentary written by हृर्षवर्धन Evidently these grammarians शबरस्वामिन् and हृर्षवर्धन are different from the famous author of the मीमांसाभाष्य and the patron of the poet Bana respectively.

śabda	literally "sound" in general; confer, compare शब्दं कुरु शब्दं मा कार्षीः \| ध्वनिं कुर्वनेवमुच्यते \| M.Bh. in Ahnika I; confer, compare also शब्दः प्रकृतिः सर्ववर्णानाम् \| वर्णपृक्तः: शब्दो वाच उत्पत्तिः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIII.1, XXIII.3.In grammar the word शब्द is applied to such words only as possess sense; confer, compare प्रतीतपदार्थको लोके ध्वनि: शब्द: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). in Ahnika 1: confer, comparealso येनोच्चरितेन अर्थः प्रतीयते स शब्दः Sringara Prakasa I; confer, compare also अथ शब्दानुशासनम् M.Bh. Ahnika 1. In the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya, शब्द् is said to be constituted of air as far as its nature is concerned, but it is taken to mean in the Pratisakhya and grammar works in a restricted sense as letters possessed of sense, The vajasaneyiPratisakhya gives four kinds of words तिडू, कृत्, तद्धित and समास while नाम, आख्यात, निपात and उपसर्ग are described to be the four kinds in the Nirukta. As शब्द in grammar, is restricted to a phonetic unit possessed of sense, it can be applied to crude bases, affixes, as also to words that are completely formed with case-endings or personal affixes. In fact, taking it to be applicable to all such kinds, some grammarians have given tweive subdivisions of शब्द, vizप्रक्रुति, प्रत्यय,उपत्कार, उपपद, प्रातिपदिक, विभक्ति, उपसर्जन, समास, पद, वाक्य, प्रकरण and प्रबन्ध; confer, compare Sringara Prakasa I.

śabdakaustubha	a treatise on grammar, critically explaining and discuss ing the meaning of Panini's Sutras in the order of the author himselfeminine. the work is written by Bhattoji Diksita and is mainly based on the Mahabhasya.

śabdakaustubhaguṇa	a short gloss on Bhatoji's Sabdakaustubha written by a grammarian named इन्द्रदत्तोपाध्याय

śabdaprayoga	use of a word in the spoken language which forms in a way the basis of grammar.

śābdabodhaprakriyā	a grammar treatise on the denotation and relation of words written by a grammarian ramed Ramakrsna.

śabdabhedanirūpaṇa	name of a small grammatical work written by Ramacandra Diksita

śabdamañjarī	name of a short grammar work written by Narayana Pandita.

śabdaratnadīpa	a commentary on the Laghusabdaratna written by a grammarian named Kalyanamalla.

śabdarūpa	the actual form of a word as a collection of letters or वर्णसमूह or वर्णानुपूर्वीं irrespective of the sense. In grammar it is the शब्दरूप that is mainly considered and not the meaning of the word; confer, compare स्व रूपं शब्दस्याशब्दसंज्ञा, P.I.1.68.

śabdavivaraṇa	a grammar work on the meaning of words and how it is conveyed, written by a grammarian named वर्णिकुबेरानन्द The work forms a part of his bigger work दानभागवत. See वर्णिकुबेरानन्द,

śabdavyutpattikaumudī	a small treatise on the derivation of words written by a grammarian named RajaramaSastrin.

śabdaśāstra	the sciene of words.The term is generally applied to grammar, although strictly speaking the Mimamsa Sastra is also a science of words.

śabdasattvaprakāśa	a work on grammar said to have been written by a grammarian named इन्द्रदत्त.

śabdsādhyaprayoga	a grammar work on the formation of words written by a grammarian named रमानाथशर्मा.

śabdasudhā	name of a grammar work by a grammarian named अनन्तभट्ट.

śabdānuśāsana	literally science of grammar dealing with the formation of words, their accents, and use in a sentence. The word is used in connection with standard works on grammar which are complete and self-sufficient in all the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.mentioned features. Patanjali has begun his Mahabhasya with the words अथ शब्दानुशासनम् referring possibly to the vast number of Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini, and hence the term शब्दानुशासन according to him means a treatise on the science of grammar made up of the rules of Panini with the explanatory and critical varttikas written by Katyayana and other Varttikakaras.The word शब्दानुशासन later on, became synonymons with Vyakarana and it was given as a title to their treatises by later grammarians, or was applied to the authoritative treatise which introduced a system of grammar, similar to that of Panini. Hemacandra's famous treatise, named सिद्धहैमचन्द्र by the author,came to be known as हैमशब्दानुशासन. Similarly the works on grammar written by पाल्यकीर्तिशाकटायन and देवनन्दिन् were called शाकटायनशब्दानुशासन and जैनेन्द्र' शब्दानुशासन respectively.

śabdāmṛta	a work, explanatory of the Sutras of Panini, written by a grammarian named विप्रराजेन्द्र.

śabdārtharahasya	a grammatical work on the interpretation of words by Ramanatha Vidyavacaspati.

śabdārthasaṃbandha	the connection between a word and its sense which is a permanently established one. According to grammarians,words, their sense and their connection, all the three, are established for ever: confer, compare सिद्धे शव्दार्थसंबन्ध P. I.1. . Varttika 1,and the Bhasya thereon सिद्ध शब्द: अर्थः संबन्धश्चेति \| Later grammarians have described twelve kinds of शब्दार्थसंबन्ध viz. अभिधा,विवक्षा, तात्पर्य, प्रविभाग, व्यपेक्ष, सामर्थ्य अन्वय, एकार्थीभाव, दोषहान, गुणोपादान, अलंकारयेाग and रसावियोग: confer, compare Sringaraprakasa.I.

śaraṇadeva	a prominent grammarian of the Eastern school of Panini's system of grammar who lived in the thirteenth century and wrote works on Panini's grammar. His work named दुर्घटवृत्ति which ex. plains according to Panini's rules, the Varttikas thereon, and the Jnapakas deduced from them,the various words difficult to be explained, is much appreciated by scholars of grammar. He has quoted from a large number of classical works, and referred to many works of the Eastern grammarians who followed the Kasika school.

śarvavarmā	a reputed grammarian who is believed to have been a contemporary of the poet Gunadhya in the court of Satavahana. He wrote the Grammar rules which are named the Katantra Sutras which are mostly based on the Sutras of Panini. In the grammar treatise named 'the Katantra Sutra' written by Sarvavarman the Vedic section and all the intricacies and difficult elements are carefully and scrupulously omitted by him, with a view to making his grammar useful for beginners and students of average intelligence.

śaśidevavṛtti	name of a work on grammar by शशिदेव which is mentioned by Al Beruni.

śākaṭāyana(1)	name of an ancient reputed scholar of Grammar and Pratisakhyas who is quoted by Panini. He is despisingly referred to by Patanjali as a traitor grammarian sympathizing with the Nairuktas or etymologists in holding the view that all substantives are derivable and can be derived from roots; cf तत्र नामान्याख्यातजानीति शाकटायनो नैरुक्तसमयश्च Nir.I.12: cf also नाम च धातुजमाह निरुक्ते व्याकरणे शकटस्य च तोकम् M. Bh on P.III.3.1. Sakatayana is believed to have been the author of the Unadisutrapatha as also of the RkTantra Pratisakhya of the Samaveda ; (2) name of a Jain grammarian named पाल्यकीर्ति शाकटायन who lived in the ninth century during the reign of the Rastrakuta king Amoghavarsa and wrote the Sabdanusana which is much similar to the Sutrapatha of Panini and introduced a new System of Grammar. His work named the Sabdanusasana consists of four chapters which are arranged in the form of topics, which are named सिद्धि. The grammar work is called शब्दानुशासन.

śākaṭāyanavyākaraṇa	the treatise on grammar written by sakatayana। See शाकटायन.

śākaṭāyanaśabdānuśāsana	name of the treatise on grammar written by पाल्यकीर्ति-शाकटायन.

śākala	a word frequently used in the Mahabhasya for a grammatical operation or injunction ( विधि ) which forms a specific feature of the grammar of शाकल्य, viz. that the vowels इ, उ,ऋ, and लृ remain without phonetical combination and a shortening of them, if they are long;confer, compareइकोsसवर्णे शाकल्यस्य ह्रस्वश्च P.VI. 1. 127; शाकल्यस्य इदं शाकल्यम् ।; confer, compare also M.Bh. on P.VI.1.77 VI.1.125,VI. 1.27;VI.2.52, VII.3.3 and VIII. 2.108; (2) pupils of शाकल्य; confer, compare शाकल्यस्य छात्राः शाकलाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. IV.I.18;(3) a village in the Vahika district; confer, compare शाकलं नाम वाहीकग्राम: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.2.104 Vart. 3.

śākalya	name of an ancient grammarian and Vedic scholar who is supposed to have revised the Vedic texts and written their Pada-pātha. He is often quoted by Pāṇini and the writers of the Prātiśākhya works: confer, compare शाकल्यस्य संहितामनुप्रावर्षत् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.4.84; also on P.I.1.18, IV.1.18; confer, compare also उपचारं लक्षणतश्च सिद्धं अाचार्या व्यालिशाकल्यगार्ग्या: R.Pr.XIII.12.

śāntanava	an ancient scholar of grammar who wrote a treatise known as the Phit sutras on accents.

śābdabodha	verbal interpretation; the term is generally used with reference to the verbal interpretation of a sentence as arising from that of the words which are all connected directly or indirectly with the verb-activity. It is defined as पदजन्यपदार्थोपस्थितिजन्यबोध:. According to the grammarians, verbal activity is the chief thing in a sentence and all the other words (excepting the one which expresses verbal activity) are subordinated to the verbal activity and hence are connected with it; confer, compare पदज्ञानं तु करणं द्वारे तत्र पदार्थधीः \| शाब्दबोधः फलं तत्र शक्तिधीः सहकारिणी \| मुक्तावली III.81.

śālāturīya	name of the great grammarian Panini given to him on account of his being an inhabitant of शलातुर् an old name of the modern Lahore or a name of a place near Lahore; confer, compare P IV.3.14

śāstrakṛt	the originator or the founder of a Sastra or system of particular thoughts. The word was used by ancient grammarians for Panini, the founder of the great system of grammar, or of grammar in general; confer, compare व्यत्ययमिच्छति शास्त्रकृदेषां सोपि च सिध्यति बाहुलकेन M.Bh. on P. III. 1. 85

śāstrakṛta	brought about by a rule; brought about by the science of grammar; confer, compare शास्त्रकृतो योमश्च Nir.I. 2; confer, compare also क्वचिच्च संनिपातकृतमानन्तर्यं शास्त्रकृतमनानन्तर्यम् M.Bh. on P. VII. 3.54, VIII.2.38.

śāstrātideśa	supposition of the original in the place of the substitute merely for the sake of the application of a grammatical rule as contrasted with रूपातिदेश, the actual restoration of the original form; confer, compare किं पुनरयं शास्त्रातिदेशः । तृचो यच्छास्त्रं तदतिदिश्यते । आहोस्विद्रूपातिदेशः तृचो यद्रूपं तदतिदिश्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VII.1.95.

śāstrārtha	the purpose of a rule of grammar; confer, compare अतोत्राप्यवयवेन शास्त्रार्थ: संप्रतीयते M.Bh. on P.VI.1.84 Vart. 5: confer, compare also, तद्यथा । लोके वसन्ते ब्राह्मणोग्नीनादधीतेति सकृदाधाय कृतः शास्त्रार्थ इति पुनः प्रवृत्तिर्न भवति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI.1. 84 Vart. 3; VI.4.104 Vart. 3.

śikṣā	general name given to a work on Phonetics. Although there are many such works which are all called शिक्षा, the work, which is often referred to, by the word, is the Siksa named पाणिनीयशिक्षा, about the authorship of which, however, there is a doubt whether it was the work of Panini or of somebody belonging to his school. The Siksa works are helpful, no doubt, for the study of grammar, but no topic belonging to Siksa is given by Panini which apparently means that these works do not come under the subject or province of Grammar. The reason why the Siksa topics are not given by Panini, is worth consideration. These Siksa works are not specifically related to a particular Veda and it cannot be said whether they preceded or succeeded the Pratisakhya works.

śiṭ	a term for सर्वनामन् (a pronoun) in the works of ancient grammarians; confer, compare स्वाङ्गशिटामदन्तानाम् Phit Sutra 29, where शिट् is explained as सर्वनामन् in the gloss.

śiromaṇibhaṭṭācārya	a grammarian who wrote the grammatical works कारकविवेक, तद्धितकोश and तिङन्तशिरोमणि.

śivabhaṭṭa	a grammarian, who wrote a commentary named कुङ्कुमविकास on the Padamanjari of Haradatta. He was the grandson of Nilakantha Diksita who was also a grammarian and who wrote an independent work on the Paribhasas, named the Paribhasavrtti.

śivarāma( चक्रवर्ती )	a grammarian who wrote a commentary on the Katantraparisista called the Siddhantaratnankura.

śivarāmendra( सरस्वती )	a grammarian who wrote (1) a gloss on the sutras of Panini, (2) a commentary named सिद्धान्तरत्नाकर on the Siddhantakaumudi, and (3) a commentary on the Mahabhasya named Mahabhasyaprakasa.

śivasūtra	name given to the fourteen small sutras giving the alphabet which Panini took as the basis of his grammar. The Sivasutras have got a well-known explanation in Verse, named नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका on which there is a commentary of the type of Bhasya by उपमन्यु. The origin of the Sivasutra given by the writer of the Karika is summed up in the stanza नृत्तावसाने नटराजराजो ननाद ढक्कां नवपञ्चवारम् । उद्धर्तुकामः सनकादिसिद्धानेतद् विमर्शे शिवसूत्रजालम् \| Nand. 1.

śiṣṭa(1)	cultured and learned people who want to speak correctly and who therefore have studied gra mmar; confer, compare के पुनः शिष्टा: \| वैयाकरणाः \| कुत एतत् \| शास्त्रपूर्विका हि शिष्टिवैयाकरणाश्च शास्त्रज्ञा: \| Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI. 1.109; (2) enjoined, prescribed; confer, compare विपर्ययो ध्रुवशिष्टेSपरेषाम् \| R.Pr.VI.120.

śiṣyahitā(वृत्ति)	a work on grammar written by उग्रभूति of which a mention is made by Al Beruni in his work. शी (1) case affix (ई) substituted for the nominative case. plural affix जस् (अस् ) in the declension of the pronouns, when the affix जस् is preceded by the vowel अ; exempli gratia, for example सर्वे, विश्वे; confer, compare kas. on P VII.1.17; (2) case affix (ई ) substituted for औ of the nominative case. and the acc. dual after feminine. bases ending in आ, as also after bases in the neuter gender; exempli gratia, for example खट्वे रमे; कुण्डे, वने; confer, compare Kas on P. VII.1.18, 19.

śuddhāśubodhasūtrārthavyākaraṇa	a gloss on the Asubodha-grammar, written by a grammarian named Ramesvara.

śūrasiṃha	name of a grammarian who wrote a gloss named दीपिका on the Sarasvata Vyakarana.

śeṣa(l)	any other senses than what are given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare शेषे P.IV.2.92: (2) surname of a reputed family of grammarians belonging to Southern India which produced many grammarians, from the fifteenth century to the eighteenth century. Ramacandra Sesa was the first grammarian in the family who wrote the Prakriyakaumudi in the fifteenth century. His descendants developed the system of studying grammar by the study of topics as given in the Prakriya Kaumudi and wrote several works of the nature of glosses and comments.

śeṣakṛṣṇa	one of the prominent grammarians belonging to the Sesa family, who was the son of नरससिंहशेत्र. He wrote a gloss on the Prakriyakaumudi and two small works Prakrtacandrika and Padacandrika. Two other minor grammar works viz. the Yanlugantasiromani and Upapadamatinsutravyakhyana are ascribed to शेषकृष्ण who may be the same as शेषकृष्ण the son of नरसिंह, or another, as there were many persons who had the name Krsna in the big family.

śeṣacakrapāṇi	a grammarian of the Sesa family who wrote a small treatise on case-relations named कारकतत्त्व.

śeṣaśarbhan	also known by the name मनीषिशेषशर्मन्, a grammarian who has written सर्वमङ्गला, a commentary on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara.

śeṣaśāstrī	a grammarian who wrote a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara of Nagesabhatta.

śeṣādri	a grammarian of the seventeenth century who has written a work, Paribhasabhaskara, on the Paribhasas of the Panini system; the treatise is written in the manner of Siradeva's Paribhasavrtti which has been taken as a basis by him.

śaunaka	a great ancient Vedic scholar who is believed to have written the Rk. Pratisakhya, which is said to be common for the two main branches of the Rgveda but which at present represents, in fact, all the different branches of the Rgveda.

śtip'	the syllable ति applied to the Vikarana-ending form of a root to denote a root for a grammatical operation. The specific mention of a root with श्तिप् added, shows that the root of the particular class or conjugation shown, is to be taken and not the same root belonging to any other conjuga-tion; confer, compare इक्श्तिपौ धातुनिर्देशे; exempli gratia, for example अस्यतिवक्तिख्यातिभ्योऽङ् P.III. 1. 52. Although operations prescribed for a primary root are applicable to a frequentative root when the frequentative sign य has been omitted, operations prescribed for a root which is stated in a rule with ति ( श्तिप् ) added to it, do not take place in the frequentative roots;confer, compare श्तिपा शपानुबन्धेन ... पञ्चैतानि न यङ्लुकि.

śravaṇa	hearing of a phonetic element or a word in the actual speech; audition; confer, compare तस्य चोदात्तस्वरितपरत्वे श्रवणं स्पष्टम् S. K. on P.I.2.32. In many technical grammatical terms, affixes and substitutes, there is sometimes a portion of them which is not a vital part of the word, but it is for the sake of causing certain prescribed grammatical operations. The letters or syllables which form such a portion are called इत् and they are only for the sake of grammatical operations (कार्यार्थ ), as contrasted with the other ones which are actually heard (श्रुत्यर्थ or श्रवणार्थ ).

śrīkaṇokta	a grammarian who has written a small treatise on corrupt words or ungrammatical words, which is named अपशब्दखण्डन.

śrīdhara	a grammarian of the last century who has written a commentary named श्रीधरी after him, on the Paribhasendusekhara.

śrīnivāsa	a grammarian who has written a commentary on the Paribhasabhaskara of Haribhaskara.

śrīmaṇikaṇṭha	a famous grammarian who held the titles महामहोपाध्याय, प्रगल्भतर्कसिंह and भट्टाचार्य and who has written a systematic work on caserelations named कारकखण्डनमण्डन; the work is also known by the name षट्कारकखण्डनमण्डन.

śrīmānaśarmā	a famous grammarian of Eastern India who has written a short scholarly gloss named Vijaya on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara. For details refer to Paribhasasamgraha.

śruta	literally what is actually heard; the word is used in connection with such statements as are made by the authoritative grammarians, Panini and the Varttikakara by their actual utterance or wording, as contrasted with such dictums as can be deduced only from their writings. confer, compare श्रुतानुभितंयोः श्रौतः संबन्धो बलीयान्. Par. Sek Pari. 104.

śrutakevalin	a term of a very great honour given to such Jain monks as have almost attained perfection; the term is used in connection with Palyakirti Sakatayana, the Jain grammarian शाकटायन, whose works शाकटायनशब्दानुशासन and its presentation in a topical form named शाकटायनप्रक्रिया are studied at the present day in some parts of India. See शाकटायन a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

ślokavārtika	Varttika or supplementary rule to Panini's rules laid down by scholars of grammar immediately after Panini, composed in verse form. These Slokavarttikas are quoted in the Mahabhasya at various places and supposed to have been current in the explanations of Panini's Astadhyayi in the days of Patanjali. The word is often used by later commentators.

śvastanī	a term of ancient grammarians for the first future called लुट् by Panini; confer, compare परिदेवने श्वस्तनी भविष्यन्त्यर्थे । इयं नु कदा गन्ता यैवं पादौ निदधाति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 3.15.

śvobhūtivṛtti	a grammatical work of the type of a gloss on the Sutras of Panini written by an ancient grammarian श्वोभूति mentioned in the Mahabhasya; confer, compare स्तोष्याम्यहं पादिकमौदवाहिं ततः श्वेाभूते शातनीं पातनीं च Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.57. Possibly the grammarian श्वोभूति is referred to in the word श्वोभूत in the verse.

ṣaṭkāraka(1)	the six Karakas or instruments of action, which are differently connected with the verbal activity, viz. कर्तृ, कर्म, करण, संप्रदान, अपादान and अधिकरण; for details see कारक a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare तत्र शक्तिमतो द्रव्यस्य कारकाख्यायामवान्तरव्यापारनिबन्धना षडुपाख्या भवन्ति \|कर्ता कर्म करणं संप्रदानमपादानमधिकरणं चेति \| Sringara Prakasa IV; (2) a work of the name (षट्कारक) written by a Jain grammarian Mahesanandin.

ṣaṭkārakakhaṇḍanamaṇḍana	known also as कारकखण्डनमण्डन a grammar-work on consonant is at the end of the word; e. g. भ्रष्टा, स्रष्टा, यष्टुम् सम्राट् et cetera, and others cf P. VIII.2.36 (5) substitute for a visarjaniya preceded by a vowel except अ and followed by a consonant of the guttural or the labial class which does not begin a different word, as also before the words पाश, कल्प, क, काभ्य et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VIII. 3.39: confer, compare also P. VIII 3.41, 43, 44, 45 and 48 for some specified cases; (6) substitute for स् when placed near a consonant of the cerebral class or near the consonant ष्; e. g. वृक्षष्षण्डे , वृक्षष्टकार: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VIII. 4.41.

ṣaṭkāraka(1)	the six Karakas or instruments of action, which are differently connected with the verbal activity, viz. कर्तृ, कर्म, करण, संप्रदान, अपादान and अधिकरण; for details see कारक a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare तत्र शक्तिमतो द्रव्यस्य कारकाख्यायामवान्तरव्यापारनिबन्धना षडुपाख्या भवन्ति \|कर्ता कर्म करणं संप्रदानमपादानमधिकरणं चेति \| Sringara Prakasa IV; (2) a work of the name (षट्कारक) written by a Jain grammarian Mahesanandin.

ṣaṭkārakakhaṇḍanamaṇḍana	known also as कारकखण्डनमण्डन a grammar-work on the six case-relations written by a scholar of grammar named श्रीमणिकण्ठ.

ṣaṭkārakabālabodhinī	a short work in verses on the six case-relations written by a grammarian Prabhudasa who has added his own commentary to it.

ṣaṭkārakalakṣaṇa	a small work in verses on the six case-relations ascribed to Amarasimha, but very likely the author was Amaracandra a Jain grammarian of the fifteenth century. The work is also named षट्कारकविवरण.

ṣaṭkārakavivecana	a small treatise on the six case-relations written by a grammarian Bhavananda who held the title Siddhāntavagisa.

ṣaḍikaprastāva	a popular name given by grammarians to the topic of grammar which deals with the abbreviated popular forms of proper nouns which are names of persons, as for example the form षडिक for षडङ्गुलिदत्त; confer, compare ठाजादावूर्ध्वं द्वितीयादचः P. V. 3.83.

ṣaḍgavac	literally a collection of six cows; secondarily 'a collection of six animals or quadrupeds'. The word षड्गव was prescribed by later grammarians as a tad-affix by means of a Vartika when they saw the the word षड्गव used in language after the word अश्व et cetera, and others e. g. अश्वषड्गवम्; confer, compare प्रकृत्यर्थस्य षट्त्वे षङ्गवच् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V.2.29.

ṣaḍbhāṣācandrikā	a work on six dialects written by a Jain grammarian लक्ष्मणसूरि.

ṣaṣ( षट् )	a technical term used in Panini's grammar for such numeral words ( संख्थाशब्द ) as end with ष् or न् e. g. षष्, पञ्चन्, सप्तन् et cetera, and others; confer, compare ष्णान्ता षट् P. I. 1.24.

ṣaṣṭhī	the sixth case; the genitive case. This case is generally an ordinary case or विभक्ति as contrasted with कारकविभक्ति. A noun in the genitive case shows a relation in general, with another noun connected with it in a sentence. Commentators have mentioned many kinds of relations denoted by the genitive case and the phrase एकशतं षष्ठ्यर्थाः (the genitive case hassenses a hundred and one in all),. is frequently used by grammarians confer, compare षष्ठी शेषे P. II. 3.50; confer, compare also बहवो हि षष्ठ्यर्थाः स्वस्वाम्यनन्तरसमीपसमूहविकारावयवाद्यास्तत्र यावन्त: शब्दे संभवन्ति तेषु सर्वेषु प्राप्तेषु नियमः क्रियते षष्ठी स्थानेयोगा इति । Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I. 1.49. The genitive case is used in the sense of any karaka when that karaka ; is not to be considered as a karaka; confer, compare कारकत्वेन अविवक्षिते शेषे षष्ठी भविष्यति. A noun standing as a subject or object of an activity is put in the genitive case when that activity is expressed by a verbal derivative , and not by a verb itself; confer, compare कर्तृकर्मणोः कृति P. II. 3 .65. For the senses and use of the genitive case, confer, compare P. II. 3.50 to 73.

ṣpha	feminine affix अायनी, termed also तद्वित (l) added, according to the Eastern school of grammarians, to words ending with the taddhita affix. affix यञ् ( prescribed by rules like गर्गादिभ्यो यञ् IV.1.105) e. g. गार्ग्यायणी, वात्स्यायनी as contrasted with गांर्गी or वात्सी according to the Western school of Panini; (2) added to form feminine bases of the words from लोहित to कत to which यञ् has already been added as also to the words कौरव्य and माण्डूक. e. g. लौहित्यायनी, बाभ्रव्यायणी, कात्यायनी, कौरव्यायणी, माण्डूकायनी confer, compare P. IV. 1.17-19.

sa(1)	short term for समास used by ancient grammarians ; the term is found used in the Jainendra Vyakarana also ; confer, compare ति्त्रक्कारकाणां प्राक् सुवुप्तत्तेः कृद्भिः सविधि: Jain.. Pari. 100; confer, compare also राजाsसे ; ( 2 ) Unadi affix स placed after the roots वॄ, तॄ, वद् , हन् and others; confer, compareUnadiSutras 342-349; (3) taddhita affix. affix स in the quadruple senses (चातुरर्थिक) applied to the words तृण and others. exempli gratia, for example तृणसः; confer, compare P. IV.2.80; (4) taddhita affix. affix स applied to the word मृद् when praise is intended e. g. मृत्सा, मृत्स्नाः; also confer, compare P. V. 4.41; (5) substitute for the preposition सम् before the words हित and तत; confer, compare समो हितततयोर्वा लोपः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI.1.144 Vart. I.

saṃkrama(1)	joining with a subsequent word after omitting a word or two occurring between; cf, गलत्पदमतिक्रम्य अगलता सह संधानं संक्रम:; e. g. शूद्रे अर्ये for शूर्द्रे यदर्ये where यत् is passed over in the krama and other recitals; cf Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 77, 165, 194; (2) a term used in ancient grammars for such affixes and others which do not allow the substitution of guna or vrddhi for the preceding vowel; the term is also used for the letters क्, ग् and ङ् when they are mute, serving only the purpose of preventing guna or vrddhi; confer, compare मृजेरजादौ संक्रमे विभाषा वृद्धिमारभन्ते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.3. Vart. 10.

saṃkṣiptasāra	name of a complete grammar-work written by क्रमदीश्वर for facility of study. This grammar appears to have been written before the time of कैयटं or हेमचन्द्र, as can be seen from the popular stanza परेत्र पाणिनयिज्ञा: केचित् कालापकोविदा; ।\| एके विश्रान्तविद्याः स्युरन्ये संक्षिप्तसारका; ll

saṃgama	combination of things coming one after another; confer, compare उदात्तपूर्वोप्यनुदात्तसंगमः where the term is used with respect to a combination of grave syllables; confer, compare also व्यञ्जनसंगमं संयोगं विद्यात्, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVIII. 19.

saṃghāta(1)	aggregate, collection ; the word is often used in grammar in connection with letters ( वर्ण ); confer, compare वर्णसंघात; पदम् confer, compare also संघातस्यैकार्थ्यात् सुबभावो वर्णात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva sutra 5 Vart. 13; the word is also used in connection with a collection of words; confer, compare संघातस्य समाससंज्ञा प्राप्नोति । ऋद्धस्य राज्ञ पुरुष: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.4.13 Vart. 8; (2) effort made in the utterance of a word; cf संघातो नाम प्रयत्नः स बाह्याभ्यन्तरत्वेन द्विधा । अनन्तभट्टभाप्य on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 9. confer, compare also स संघातादीन् वाक् Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I.9.

saṃcaya	a collection or a group: confer, compare वर्णसंचय which means अक्षरसमाम्नाय or alphabet.

saṃjñā	a technical term; a short wording to convey ample sense; a term to know the general nature cf things; convention; confer, compare वृद्धिशब्द; संज्ञा; अादेच: संज्ञिन: M.Bh. on P.1-1.1. There are two main divisions of संज्ञा-कृत्रिमसंज्ञा or an artificial term such as टि, घु, or भ which is merely conventional, and अकृत्रिमसंज्ञा which refers to the literal sense conveyed by the word such as अव्यय, सर्वनाम and the like. Some grammar works such as the Candra avoid purely conventional terms, These samjhas are necessary for every scientific treatise. In Panini's grammar, there are the first two chapters giving and explaining the technical terms whose number exceeds well-nigh a hundredition

saṃjñāvidhi	a rule laying down the definition of a संज्ञा or a technical term as contrasted with कार्यविधि or a rule laying down a grammatical operation: confer, compare संज्ञाविधौ वृद्धिरादैच् अदेङ्गुणः इति M.Bh. on Siva Sutra 3, 4.

saṃdarbhāmṛta	name of a commentary on the Mugdhabodha Vyakarana of Bopadeva, written by a grammarian, named Bholanatha.

saṃdeha	ambiguity; doubt regarding the wording of a rule or its interpretation or regarding the correctness of a word. It is looked upon as the main purpose of grammar to solve doubts regarding the correctness of words; confer, compare व्याख्यानतो विशेषप्रतिप्रत्तिर्नहि संदेहादलक्षणम् Pari. Sekh.Pari.1.

saṃnidhi	juxtaposition; coming together phonetically very close: confer, compare पदानामविलम्बितेनोच्चारणम् Tarka Samgraha; अव्यवधानेन अन्वयप्रतियोग्युपस्थितिः Tattvacintamani 4; the same as संनिकर्ष which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

saṃnipātaparibhāṣā	the maxim or canvention that an operation which is based upon, or is caused or occasioned by, a relationship between two things cannot break their relation : in short, such an operation as results in breaking the relationship between two things on which it is based, cannot take placcusative case. This dictum is many times followed in grammar in Preventing the application of such rules as are likely to spoil the formation of the correct word; many times, however, this dictum has to be ignored; For details see Pari. Sek. Pari. 86; also\| Mahabhasya on P. I. 1.39.

saṃneiyoga	occurrence together of two or more words in one sentence or in one grammatical rule; confer, compare संनियोगशिष्टानामन्यतरापाये उभयोरप्यपाय: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV 1.36 Vart. 4; confer, compare also एष एव न्यायो यदुत संनियोगशिष्टानामन्यतरापाये उभयोरप्यभावः। तद्यथा देवदत्तयज्ञदत्ताभ्यामिदं ! कर्तव्यमिति देवदत्तापाये यज्ञदत्तोपि न करोति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on V. 1.64 and 76.

saṃnihita(1)	present by implication; taken as granted; confer, compare अपि च ऋकारग्रहणे लृकारग्रहणं संनिहितं भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.9. Vart. 5; (2) nearby, at hand; confer, compare इह सर्वेषु साधनेषु संनिहितेषु कदाचित् पचतीत्येतद् भवति, कदाचिन्न भवति ! Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 3.1. Vart. 2; I. 4.23 Vart. 15.

saṃprasāraṇa	literally extension; the process of changing a semi-vowel into a simple vowel of the same sthana or place of utterance; the substitution of the vowels इ, उ, ऋ and लृ for the semi-vowels य्, व् , र् and ल् respectively; cf इग्यणः संप्रसारणम् P. 1.1.45. The term संप्रसारण is rendered as a 'resultant vowel' or as 'an emergent vowel'. The ancient term was प्रसारण and possibly it referred to the extension of य् and व्， into their constituent parts इ +अ, उ+अ et cetera, and others the vowel अ being of a weak grade but becoming strong after the merging of the subseguent vowel into it exempli gratia, for example confer, compare सर्वत्र प्रसारणिभ्यो ड: P. III. 2.8 Vart.1. For the words taking this samprasarana change, see P. VI. 1 .13 to .19. According to some grammarians the term संप्रसारण is applied to the substituted vowels while according to others the term refers to the operation of the substitution: confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.15. The substitution of the samprasarana vowel is to be given preference in the formation of a word; , confer, compare संप्रसारणं तदाश्रयं च कार्यं बलवत् Pari. Sek. Pari. 1 19. संप्रसारणबलीयस्त्व the relative superior strength of the samprasarana change in comparison with other operations occurring simultaneotisly. The phrase न वा संप्रसारणबलीयस्त्वात् is often used in the Mahabhasya which is based upon the dictum of the superior strength of the samprasarana substitution, which is announced by the writer of the Varttikas; P. VI. 1.17 Vart, 2. , See संप्रसारण.

saṃbandhapāda	name given by convention by grammarians to the fourth pada of the third adhyaya of Panini's Astadhyayi ， which begins with the sutra धातुसंबन्धे प्रत्ययाः P. III. 4.1.

saṃbuddhi(1)	a term used in Panini's grammar for the case-affix of the vocative singular; confer, compare एकवचनं संबुद्धिः P. II. 3, 49; the vocative is, however, not looked upon as a separate case, but the designation संबोधन is given to the nominative case, having the sense of संबोधनः (2) the word is also used in the general sense of संबोधन i. e. addressing or calling: confer, compare एकश्रुति दूरात्संबुद्धौः किमिदं पारिभाषिक्याः संबुद्धेर्ग्रहणमेकवचनं संबुद्वि: (II. 3.49) आहोस्विदन्वर्थग्रहणं संबोधनं संबुद्वि: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.33.

saṃyoga	connection in general; the word is used as a technical term in the grammar of Panini, in the sense of two or more consonants coming closely together unseparated by any vowel: confer, compareहलोनन्तराः संयोगः cf P. I. 1.7; cf also अनन्तरं संयोगः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 48.

saṃvādacintāmaṇi	name of a small treatise on roots and their meanings written by : a grammarian named इन्द्रदत्तोपाध्याय who has also written a commentary on the Sabdakaustubha called कौस्तुभगुण and सिद्धान्तकौमुदीगूढफक्किकाप्रकाश,

saṃskāra(1)	preparation such as (a)that of a word by placing the affix after the base and accomplishing all the necessary changes, or (b) that of a sentence by placing all words connected mutually by syntax and then explaining their formation; these two views are respectively called the पदसंस्कारपक्ष and the वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष; (2) grammatical formation; confer, compare स्वरसंस्कारयोश्छन्दसि नियम: । संस्कारो लोपागमवर्णविकारप्रकृतिभावलक्षण: Uvvata on V.Pr. I.1; confer, compare also तद्यत्र स्वरसंस्कारौ प्रादेशिकेन गुणेन अन्वितौ स्याताम् et cetera, and others Nir.I.

saṃskṛtamañjarī	a short handbook on declension and case-relations written by a grammarian named Sadhusundara, who lived in the beginning of the eighteenth century.

sakṛdgati	or सकृद्गतिन्याय the maxim or convention of the non-application of a grammatical rule of Operaton any longer when, on conflict with another, it has been once set aside. The maxim is सकृद्वतौ विप्रतिषेधे यद्बाधितं तद्वाधितमेव Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P. I. 1. 56, I.4. 2, VI.3.42 et cetera, and others cf also Par. Sek. Pari. 40.

sakṛdgati	or सकृद्गतिन्याय the maxim or convention of the non-application of a grammatical rule of Operaton any longer when, on conflict with another, it has been once set aside. The maxim is सकृद्वतौ विप्रतिषेधे यद्बाधितं तद्वाधितमेव Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P. I. 1. 56, I.4. 2, VI.3.42 et cetera, and others cf also Par. Sek. Pari. 40.

saṇ	taddhita affix. affix सण् prescribed after the word पर्शु in the sense of collection; e. g. पार्श्र्वम् : confer, compare पर्श्वा: सण् P,IV,2.43 Vart, 3 for which there is an alfernative reading पर्श्वा णस् वक्तव्यः; for facility of grammatical operations णस् is recommended with preference in the Mahabhasya , cf एवं तर्हि णस् वक्तव्य; M.Bh. on P. IV.2.43 Vart. 3; (2) सण् is given as a technical term for संयोग in the Pratisakhya works: confer, compare सयुक् सण् । संयुक्तं व्यञ्जनं संयोगसंज्ञं भवति R.T.27.

sattā	existence, supreme or universal existence the Jati par excellence which is advocated to be the final sense of all words and expressions in the language by Bhartrhari and other grammarians after him who discussed the interpretation of words. The grammarians believe that the ultimate sense of a word is सत्ता which appears manifold and limited in our everyday experience due to different limitations such as desa, kala and others. Seen from the static viewpoint, सत्ता appears as द्रब्य while, from the dynamic view point it appears as a क्रिया. This सत्ता is the soul of everything and it is the same as शव्दतत्त्व or ब्रह्मन् or अस्त्यर्थ; confer, compare Vakyapadiya II. 12. The static existence, further, is . called व्यक्ति or individual with reference to the object, and जाति with reference to the common form possessed by individuals.

satsaptamī	the locative case prescribed by the rule यस्य च भावेन भावलक्षणम् P. II.3.37 as scen in गोषु दुह्यमानासु गतः; confer, compare लुकि इति नैषा परसप्तमी । का तर्हि । सत्सप्तमी । लुकि सति इति . M, Bh. on P.I.2.49 Vart. 2. On account of the frequent occurrence of the word सति in a large number of examples of this locative absolute, the term सतिसप्तमी is used by modern grammarians for the better word सत्सप्तमी in the Mahabhasya: confer, compare M.Bh. on P,VI.4.23 as also on P.VIII. 3.61...

sadāśiva-agnihotrī	name of a modern grammarian of the seventeenth century who has written a gloss on Pratisakhya works called प्रातिशाख्यदीपिका.

sadāśiva-paṇḍita	a grammarian of the seventeenth century who has written a commentary on the Sutras of Panini and a brief commentary on the Mahabhasya called गूढार्थदीपिनी or गूढार्थदीपिका which is incomplete.

sadāśivabhaṭṭa(घुले)	a prominent grammarian of the latter half of the eighteenth century who was a resident of Nagpur and whose gloss on the Laghusabdendusekhara by name सदाशिवभट्टी is well known to scholars.

sannatara	graver, comparatively more grave; a term used in connection with a grave accent which is followed by a vowel with an acute or circumflex accent; exempli gratia, for example the vowel इ of सरस्वति in इमं मे गङ्गे यमुने सरस्वति शुतुद्रि; confer, compare सन्नं दृष्ट्वा सन्नतर इत्येतद् भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.33.

saptama	the seventh of the vowels stated in the alphabet; a word used for the vowel r ( ऋ ) by ancient grammarians: confer, compare ओजा ह्रस्वा: सप्तमान्ताः स्वराणाम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.14.

saptamī(1)	the seventh case; the locative case; a term used for the locative case by ancient grammarians and Panini; confer, compare न सप्तम्यामन्त्रितयोः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III 139; confer, compare ईदूतौ च सप्तम्यर्थे P. I. 1. 19. or सप्तम्यास्त्रल् P. V. 3. 10; cf also द्वितीयादयः शब्दाः पूर्वाचार्यः सुपां त्रिकेषु स्मर्यन्ते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II. 3.2: ( 2 ) the seventh of the moods and tenses; the optative mood; confer, compare Kat. III. 1, 20; Hemacandra III. 3. 7.

saptādhyāyī	a term used for the first seven chapters or books of Panini's grammar; confer, compare येन्ये सप्ताध्याय्यां स्वरास्ते न संगृहीताः । स्युः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI 1.' 158 Vart. 1.

samantabhadra	a Jain scholar of great repute who is believed to have written, besides many well-known religious books such as आप्तमीमांसा गन्धहस्तिभाष्य et cetera, and others on Jainism, a treatise on grammar called Cintamani Vyakarana.

samarthapāda	name given by Siradeva and other grammarians to the first pada of the second adhyaya of Paninis Astadhyayi which begins with the sutra समर्थः पदविधिः P.II.1.1.

samāsa	placing together of two or more words so as to express a composite sense ; compound composition confer, compare पृथगर्थानामेकार्थीभावः समासः। Although the word समास in its derivative sense is applicable to any wording which has a composite sense (वृत्ति), still it is by convention applied to the समासवृत्ति only by virtue of the Adhikarasutra प्राक् कडारात् समास: which enumerates in its province the compound words only. The Mahabhasyakara has mentioned only four principal kinds of these compounds and defined them; confer, compare पूर्वपदार्थ प्रधानोव्ययीभावः। उत्तरपदार्थप्रधानस्तत्पुरुषः। अन्यपदार्थप्रधानो बहुव्रीहिः । उभयपदार्थप्रधानो द्वन्द्वः । M.Bh. on P.II.1.6; confer, compare also M.Bh. on P.II.1.20, II.1.49,II.2.6, II.4.26, V.1.9. Later grammarians have given many subdivisions of these compounds as for example द्विगु, कर्मधारय and तत्पुरुष (with द्वितीयातत्पुरुष, तृतीयातत्पुरुष et cetera, and othersas also अवयवतत्पुरुष, उपपदतत्पुरुष and so on) समानाधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, व्यधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, संख्याबहुवीहि, समाहारद्वन्द्व, इतरेतरद्वन्द्व and so on. समासचक्र a short anonymous treatise on compounds which is very popular and useful for beginners. The work is attributed to वररुचि and called also as समासपटल. The work is studied and committed to memory by beginners of Sanskrit ] studies in the PathaSalas of the old type.

samāsavāda(l)	a short treatise on compounds by गोविन्दचक्रवर्तिन् ; (2) a small compendium on compounds written by a grammarian named सार्वभौम.

samudāya	aggregate, totality, collection of individual members: confer, compare समुदाये प्रवृत्ताः शब्दाः क्वचिदवयवेष्वपि वर्तन्ते also confer, compare समुदाये व्याकरणशब्दः अवयवे नोपपद्यते M.Bh. Ahnika 1 Vart, 14: confer, compare also समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः।Par.Sek.Pari.108.

samupasthāpana	simultaneous presentation of different grammatical operations; confer, compare वसुसंप्रसारणादीनामाभाच्छास्त्रीयाणामेव असिद्धत्वादन्तरङ्गयोर्युगपत्समुपस्थानं नास्तीति परिभाषा न प्रवर्तते \| Kas,on P. VI.4.22.

samupasthita	presenting themselves simultaneously; the word is used in connection with two grammatical operations which present themselves simultaneously.

samūha	aggregate, group or collection; one of the prominent senses in which the taddhita affix. affixes अण् and others are prescribedition These affixes are called सामूहिक; exempli gratia, for example काकम् (काकानां समूहः ) similarly भैक्षम्, राजकम्, कैदार्यम्, जनता, मायूरम्, पाश्या, रथ्या et cetera, and others confer, compare P. IV. 2.37 to 51.

sayuk	connected, the word was used by ancient grammarians in the sense of संयुक्त: confer, compare सयुक् सण् R.T. 27.

sarasvatīkaṇṭhābharaṇa	called also सरस्वतीसूत्र, name of a voluminous grammar work ascribed to king Bhoja in the eleventh century. The grammar is based very closely on Panini's Astadhyayi, consisting of eight chapters or books. Although the affixes, the augments and the substitutes are much the same, the order of the Sutras is considerably changedition By the anxiety of the author to bring together, the necessary portions of the Ganapatha, the Unadiptha and the Paribhasas, which the author' has included in his eight chapters, the book instead of being easy to understand, has lost the element of brevity and become tedious for reading. Hence it is that it is not studied widely. For details see pp. 392, 393 Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's edition.

sarvanāman	pronoun: literally standing for any noun. There is no definition as such given, of the word pronoun, but the words, called pronouns, are enumerated in Panini's grammar one after another in the class or group headed by सर्व ( सर्व, विश्व, उभ, उभय, words ending in the affixes डतर and डतम, अन्य et cetera, and others)which appear to be pronouns primarily. Some words such as पूर्व, पर, अवर, दक्षिण, उत्तर, अपर, अधर, स्व, अन्तर etc are treated as pronouns under certain conditions. In any case, attention has to be paid to the literal sense of the term सर्वनामन् which is an ancient term and none of these words when standing as a proper noun, is to be treated as a pronoun: confer, compare सर्वादीनि सर्वनामानि P. I.1. 27, confer, compare also संज्ञोपसर्जनीभूतास्तु न सर्वादयः: M.Bh. on P. I. 1. 27 Vart. 2; ( 2 ) The word सर्वनामन् means also a common term, a general term; confer, compare एकश्रुतिः स्वरसर्वनाम, यथा नपुंसकं लिङ्गसर्वनाम Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI. 4.174 Vart 4.

sarvanāmasthāna	a term used in Panini's grammar, for the first five case affixes सु, औ, अस्, अम् and औ as also for the nominative case. and acc. plural afix इ ( शि ) of the neuter gender. The term appears to be an old one, which was used, by a specific mention, for the first five case-affixes which caused a special change in the base before them in the case of many words; confer, compare शि सर्वनामस्थानम् । सुडनपुंसकस्य P.I.1.42-48. For details see Vyakaranamahabhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's edition p. 239 footnote.

sarvanighāta	grave accent ( अनुदात्त ) for the whole word, generally for a verbal form or a word in the vocative case, if preceded by another word which is not a verb. The term is used in contrast with शेषनिघात the grave accent for the remaining vowels of a word when a particular vowel is definitely fixed as an acute or an independent Svarita or circumflex; confer, compare P.VIII. 1.28 to 74.

sarvapadādeśa	a substitute for the entire word and not for a part of it. This doctrine of सर्वपदादेशं everywhere is advocated by grammarians in consonance with their doctrine of शब्दनित्यत्व; confer, compare सर्वे सर्वपदादेशा दाक्षीपुत्रस्य पाणिनेः \| एकदेशविकारे हि नित्यत्वं नोपपद्यते ॥ M.Bh. on P. I. 1. 20, VII.;.27.

sarvapratiṣedha	a general prohibition of every grammatical operation that presents itself; confer, compare नान्त:पादमिति सर्वप्रतिषेधः \| M.Bh. on P.VI.1.115.

sarvamaṅgalā	a commentary on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara written by a grammarian of the nineteenth century named शेषशर्मन् or मनीषिशेषशर्मन्. The work is incomplete.

sarvarakṣita	spelt as शर्बरक्षित also; a Buddhist grammarian who is believed to have redacted or revised the grammar work Durghatvrtti of Saranadeva.

sarvavarman	spelt as शर्वबर्मन् also, the reputed author of the Katantra Vyakarana. He is believed to have been a contemporary of the poet Gunadbya at the Satavahana court, and to have revised and redacted the Katantra Sutras already existing for the benefit of his patron. With him began the Katantra school of grammar, the main contribution to which was made by दुर्गसिंहृ who wrote a scholarly gloss on the Katantra Sutras. For details see कातन्त्र,

sarvādi	literally a group or a class of words beginning with the word सर्व as the first word in the list; the term is used in general as a synonymous term with Sarvanaman; confer, compare संज्ञोपसर्जनीभूतास्तु न सर्वादयः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.I.1.27. सर्वादेश a substitute for the entire wording instead of the final letter as prescribed by the rule अलेान्त्यस्य P.I.1.52; confer, compare अनेकाल्शीत्सर्वस्य P.I.1.55.

sarvānudātta	the grave accent for the entire word. See सर्वनिधात. सर्वान्त्य final of all those that are denoted or enumerated; confer, compare यदेव सर्वान्त्यमर्थादेशनं तस्यैव विषये स्यात् । M.Bh. on P. IV.2.67.

sādhusundara	a scholar of grammar who was a pupil of साधुकीर्तिप्रवर and who wrote a short work on grammar named उक्तिरत्नाकर.

sāpekṣa	with an expectancy in sense; although in grammar expectancy is at the root of, and forms a sort of a connecting link for, the various kinds of relations which exist between the different words of a sentence which has to give a composite sense, yet, if a word outside a compound is connected with a word inside a compound, especially with a second or further member, the sense becomes ambiguous; and expectancy in such cases is looked upon as a fault; e. g. अप्रविष्टविषयो हि रक्षसाम् Raghu XI. When, however, in spite of the fault of expectancy the sense is clear, the compound is admissible; confer, compare यदि सविशेषणानां वृत्तिर्न वृत्तस्य वा विशेषणं न प्रयुज्यते इत्युच्यते देवदत्तस्य गुरुकुलम् देवदत्तस्य गुरुपुत्रः,अत्र वृत्तिर्न प्राप्नोति। अगुरुकुलपुत्रादीनामिति वक्तव्यम् I Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P II.1.1 ; confer, compare also the expression सापेक्षत्वेपि गमकत्वात्समास: often used by commentators.

sāpya	furnished with अाप्य or object; a transitive root;the term is used in the Sakatayana, Haimacandra and Candra grammars; confer, compare Candra I.4.100, Hema. III.3.21, Sakat. IV. 3.55.

sāmānya	literally resemblance in any one or many respects. In the Nirukta the word is used in the sense of resemblance between the word to be derived, and any form of a root; the term refers there to grammatical resemblance and may therefore mean grammatical consideration in general; confer, compare अविद्यमाने सामान्येप्यक्षरवर्णसामान्य त् निर्ब्रूयात् Nir.II.1.

sāmānyaviśeṣabhāva	the relationship between the general and the particular, which forms the basis of the type of apavada which is explained by the analogy of तक्रकौण्डिन्यन्याय; the word also refers to the method followed by the Sutras of Panini, or any treatise of grammar for the matter of that, where a general rule is prescribed and, for the sake of definiteness some specific rules laying down exceptions, are given afterwards: confer, compare किंचित्सामान्यविशेषवल्लक्षणं प्रवर्त्यं येनाल्पेन यत्नेन महतः शद्बौघान् प्रतिपद्येरन् l Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnik 1.

sāyaṇa,sāyaṇācārya	the celebrated Vedic scholar and grammarian of Vijayanagar who flourished in the 14th century and wrote, besides the monumental commentary works on the Vedas, a grammatical work on roots and their forms known by the name माधवीया धातुवृत्ति. As the colophon of the work shows, the Dhatuvrtti was written by Sayanacarya, but published under the name of Madhava, the brother of Sayanacarya: confer, compare इति महामन्त्रिणा मायणसुतेन माधवसहोदरेण सायणाचार्येण विरचितायां माधवीयायां धातुवृत्तौ...Madhaviya Dha tuvrtti at the end; cf also तेन मायणपुत्रेण सायणेन मनीषिणा । व्याख्येया माधवी चेयं धातुवृत्तिर्विरच्यते । Mad. Dhatuvrtti at the beginning.

sāraṅgakavi	name of a grammarian, the writer of प्रयुक्ताख्यातमञ्जरीसारसंग्रह.

sārapradīpikā	name of a commentary by Jagannatha on the Sarasvata grammar.

sārasatvarī	name of a grammar work written by Kavicandra.

sārasvata	name of a grammar work which was once very popular on account of its brevity, believed to have been written in the sutra form by an ancient grammarian named Narendra who is said to have composed 700 sutras under the inspiration of Sarasvati.The exposition of these Sutras by a reputed grammarian named Anubhutisvarupacarya who possibly flourished in the thirteenth century A. D., is known by the name सारस्वतप्रक्रिया which has remained as a text book on grammar to the present day in some parts of India. This प्रक्रिया is popularly known as सारस्वतव्याकरण. The technical terms in this grammar are the current popular ones.

sārasvataparibhāṣā	a grammar work of the Sarasvata school written by Dayaratna in explanation of the technical rules giving conventions and maximanuscript.

sārasvataprakriyā	the popular name given to the gloss by Anubhutisvarupacarya on Narendra's grammar rules. See सारस्वत a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

sārasvatabhāṣya	a critical gloss on the Sarasvata grammar by a grammarian named Kasinatha.

sārasvatasiddhāntacandrikā	a work on the Sarasvata Vyakarana by a grammarian named Ramasrama.

sārāvalī	or सारावली-व्य्याकरण an inindependent treatise on grammar by Naryana Vandyopadhyaya.

sārāsāraviveka	name of a commentary on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara written by बालशास्त्री रानडे, the stalwart grammarian of the nineteenth century at Varanasi.

sārvadhātuka	a term used in Panini's grammar for affixes applied to verbs, such as the personal endings and those krt affixes which are marked with.the mute letter श्; confer, compare तिङ् शित्सार्वधातुकम् P. III. 4. 113. The term was taken into his grammar by Panini from ancient grammar works and thence in their grammars by other grammarians; confer, compare सार्वधातुकमिति पूर्वाचार्यप्रसिद्धा संज्ञेयं निरन्वया, स्वभावान्नपुंसकलिङ्गमिति। Trilok-commentary on Kat. III. 1.34, The term सार्वधातुका also was used by ancient grammarians before Panini; confer, compare अापिशलास्तुरुस्तुशम्यमः सर्वधातुकासु च्छन्दसीति पठन्ति. Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VII. 3.95.

sārvabhauma	a grammarian of the eighteenth century who wrote a very brief critical work on compounds named समासवाद.

siṃhāvalokitanyāya	the analogy of the backward look peculiar to a lion, who, as he advances, does always look back at the ground coveredition The word is used in grammar with reference to a word taken back from a rule to the preceding rule which technically is called अपकर्षः confer, compare वक्ष्यमाणं विभाषाग्रहणमिह सिंहावलोकितन्यायेन संबध्यते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III.3.49.

siddhakāṇḍa	the chapter or portion of Panini's grammar which is valid to the rules inside that portion, as also to the rules enumerated after it. The word is used in connection with the first seven chapters and a quarter of the eighth chapter of Panini's Astadhyayi, as contrasted with the last three guarters called त्रिपादी, the rules in which are not valid to any rule in the preceding portion, called by the name सपासप्ताध्यायी or सपादी as also to any preceding rule in the Tripadi itSelf confer, compare पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P, VIII.2.1. सिद्धनन्दिन् an ancient Jain sage who is believed to have written an original work on grammar.

siddhahemacandra	a title given to his grammar by Hemacandra himself, which subsequently came to be called हैमशब्दानुशासन or हैमव्याकरण. For details see हेमचन्द्र.

siddhāntakaumudī	a critical and scholarly commentary on the Sutras of Panini, in which the several Sutras are arranged topicwise and fully explained with examples and counter examples. The work is exhaustive, yet not voluminous, difficult yet popular, and critical yet lucid. The work is next in importance to the Mahabhasya in the system of Panini, and its study prepares the way for understanding the Mahabhasya. It is prescribed for study in the courses of Vyakarana at every academy and Pathasala and is expected to be committed to memory by students who want to be thorough scholars of Vyakarana.By virtue of its methodical treatment it has thrown into the back-ground all kindred works and glosses or Vrttis on the Sutras of Panini. It is arranged into two halves, the first half dealing with seven topics ( 1 ) संज्ञापरिभाषा, ( 2 ) पञ्त्वसंधि, ( 3 ) षड्लिङ्ग, ( 4 ) स्त्रीप्रत्यय, ( 5 ) कारक, ( 6 ) समास, ( 7 ) तद्धित, and the latter half dealing with five topics, ( 1 ) दशगणी, ( 2 ) द्वादशप्राक्रिया ( 3 ) कृदन्त ( 4 ) वैदिकी and ( 5 ) स्वर. The author भट्टोजीदीक्षित has himself written a scholarly gloss on it called प्रौढमनेरमा on which, his grandson, Hari Diksita has written a learned commentary named लघुशब्दरत्न or simple शब्दरत्न. The Siddhāntakaumudi has got a large number of commentaries on it out of which, the commentaries प्रौढमनेरमा, बालमनोरमा, (by वासुदेवदीक्षित) तत्त्वबोधिनी and लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर are read by almost every true scholar of Vyakarana. Besides these four, there are a dozen or more commentaries some of which can be given below with their names and authors ( I ) सुबेाधिनी by जयकृष्णमौनि, ( 2 ) सुबोधिनी by रामकृष्णभट्ट ( 3 ) वृहृच्छब्देन्दुशेखर by नागेश, ( 4 ) बालमनेारमा by अनन्तपण्डित, ( 5 ) वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरहृस्य by नीलकण्ठ, ( 6 ) रत्नार्णव, by कृष्णमिश्र ( 7 ) वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरत्नाकर by रामकृष्ण, ( 8 ) सरला by तारानाथ,(9) सुमनोरमा by तिरुमल्ल,(10)सिद्वान्तकौमुदीव्याख्या by लक्ष्मीनृसिंह, (11 )सिद्धान्तकौमुदीव्याख्या by विश्वेश्वरतीर्थ, (12) रत्नाकर by शिवरामेन्द्रसरस्वती and (13) प्रकाश by तोलापदीक्षित. Although the real name of the work is वैयाकरणसिद्धान्ततकौमुदी, as given by the author, still popularly the work is well known by the name सिद्धान्तकौमुदी. The work has got two abridged forms, the Madhyakaumudi and the Laghukaumudi both written by Varadaraja, the pupil of Bhattoji Diksita.

siddhāntakaumudīgūḍhaphakkikāprakāśa	a small gloss on Bhattoji's Siddhantakaumudi, explaining its difficult lines and passages, written by a grammarian named इन्द्रदत्तोपाध्याय.

siddhāntakaumudīvādārtha	an explanatory work, discussing the difficult sentences and passages of the Siddhantakaumudi, written by a grammarian named Ramakrisna. सिद्धान्तरत्न a gloss on the Sarasvatisutra written by a grammarian natmed Jinacandra. सिद्धान्तरत्नाङ्कुर name of a commentary on the Katantraparisista by Sivaramacakravartin.

siddhāntasārasvata	an independent work on grammar believed to have been written by Devanandin. सिद्धान्तिन् a term used in connection with the writer himself of a treatise when he gives a reply to the objections raised by himself or quoted from others,the term पूर्वपाक्षिन् being used for the objector. सिद्धि formation of a word: establishment of the correct view after the removal of the objection; e. g. संज्ञासिद्वि, कार्यसिाद्व, स्वरसिद्धि. सिप् (1) the personal ending ( सि ) of the second person singular (मध्यमपुरुषैकवचन ) substituted for the affix ल्; of the ten tenses and moods लट्, लिट्, लृट् and others; confer, compare P.III.4.78: (2 Vikarana affix स् added to a root before the affixes of लेट् or Vedic Subjunctive. सिम् a technical term used in the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya for the first eight vowels of the alphabet, viz. अ, आ, इ, ई, उ, ऊ, ऋ and ऋ: confer, compare सिमादितोष्टौ स्वराणाम् V. Pr.. I.44.

sīradeva	a prominent grammarian of the Eastern part of India who lived in the twelfth century A. D. He was a very sound scholar of Panini's grammar who wrote a few glosses on prominent works in the system. His Paribhasavrtti is a masterly independent treatise among the recognised works on the Paribhasas in which he has quoted very profusely from the works of his predecessors, such as the Kasika, Nyasa, Anunyasa and others. The reputed scholar Maitreya Raksita is more often guoted than others.

su(l)	case affix ( सु ) of the nominative singular and ( सु ) of the locative plural; confer, compare P. IV. 1.2: (2) Unadi affix सु ( क्सु ) applied to the roots इष्: e.g, इक्षु: confer, compare इषः क्सुः Unadi 437. सुक् augment सुक् added according to some grammarians to any word optionally with असुक्, which is prescribed in the case of the words अश्व, वृष, क्षीर and लवण before the affix क्यच् ( य ) in the sense of desire. e. g. दधिस्यति, मधुस्यति et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VII. 1 51 Varttika.

suc(l)	taddhita affix. affix स् applied to fद्व, त्रि, चतुर् and to एक optionally, in the sense of 'repetition of the activity' e. g. द्विः करोति et cetera, and others cf Kas, on P. V. 4. 18, 19; (2) Unadi affix स्, see सु a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. सुजनपण्डित a grammarian who wrote a small treatise on genders named लिङार्थचन्द्रिका सुट् (1) short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the first five case-affixes which are called सर्वनामस्थान also, when they pertain to the masculine or the feminine gender: confer, compare सुडनपुंसकस्य I.1.43; (2)augment स् prefixed to the root कृ and to the root कॄ when preceded by certain prepositions and as seen in the words कुस्तुम्बुरु and others as also in the words अपरस्पर गोष्पद, आस्पद, अाश्चर्य, अपस्कर, विप्किर, हरिश्चन्द्र, प्रस्कण्व्, मल्कर, कास्तीर, अजास्तुन्द, कारस्कर and words in the class of words headed by पारस्कर, under certain conditions; confer, compare P. VI. 1.135-57: (3) augment स् prefixed to the case-affix अाम् after a pronoun; e. g. सर्वेषाम् confer, compare P. VII. I.52;(4) augment स् prefixed to the consonant त् or थ् pertaining to लिङ् affixes, e. g. कृषीष्ट confer, compare P. III. 4.107.

sup(l)	locative case affix सु: (2) short term for case-affixes, as formed by the syllable सु (the nominative case. singular. affix) at the beginning and the final consonant प् of सुप्, the locative plural case-affix in the rule स्वौजसमौट्...ङ्योस्सुप् P. IV. 1.2. These case afixes are called 'vibhakti' also. These सुप् affixes are elided after an indeclinable word; confer, compare अव्ययादाप्सुप: P. II. 4.82; in Veda स्, शे ( ए ), या, डा, ड्या, याच् and अाल् as seen, are substituted for these case affixes, which sometimes are even dropped or assimilated with the previous vowel of the base: e. g. सन्तु पन्थाः, आर्द्रे चर्मन् et cetera, and others cf, P. VII. 1.39. These caseaffixes are as a rule, grave-accented (अनुदात्त) excepting in such cases as are mentioned in P. VI.1. 166 to 184 and 19l.

supadmavyākaraṇa	an independent work on grammar written by a scholar of grammar named पद्मनाभ, who fourished in Mithila in the fifteenth century A. D.

supadmavyākaraṇaṭīkā	a commentary written by a scholar of grammar named विष्णुमिश्र on the Supadmavyakarana, which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

supsupsamāsa	a popular name given to a compound formed of two nouns, which cannot be ordinarily explained by the rules of grammar laid down in definite terms by Panini in II.1.5I to II. 2.29. The so called irregular compounds are explained as formed in accordance with the rule सह सुपा II. 1.4 wherein the word पद presents it self by अनुवृत्ति from सुबामन्त्रिते पराङ्गवत् स्वरे II. . 2, the rule सह सुपा as a result being explained as सुप् सुपा सह समस्यते. As these compounds cannot be put under the topics of अव्ययीभाव, तत्पुरुष and others mentioned by Panini in II. 1.5 to II. 2.29 they are called सुप्सुप्समास or केवलसमास.

subanta	name given to a word formed with the addition of a case-affix and hence capable of being used in a sentence by virtue of its being called a पद by the rule सुप्तिङन्तं पदम् The ancient grammarians gave four kinds of words or padas viz. नाम, अाख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात which Panini has brought under two heads सुबन्त including नाम, उपसर्ग and निपात and तिङन्त standing for आख्यातः confer, compare सुप्तिङन्तं पदम् P. I. 4. 14.

sumanoramā	name of a commentary written by a Southern grammarian तिरुमल्ल on Bhattoj's Siddhantakaumudi

sūtrapāṭha	the text of Panini's Sutras handed down by oral tradition from the preceptor to the pupil. Although it is said that the actual text of Panini was modified from time to time, still it can be said with certainty that it was fixed at the time of the Bhasyakara who has noted a few different readings only. The Sutra text approved by the Bhasyakara was followed by the authors of the Kasika excepting in a few cases. It is customary with learned Pandits and grammarians to say that the recital of the Sutras of Panini was originally a continuous one in the form of a Samhitatext and it was later on, that it was split up into the different Sutras, which explains according to them the variation in the number of Sutras which is due to the different ways of splitting the Sutrapatha.

sūtrabheda(l)	splitting up of a grammatical rule ( योगविभाग ); (2) change in the wording of a rule; confer, compare स एष सूत्रभेदेन लृकारोपदेशाः प्लुत्याद्यर्थ: सन् प्रत्याख्यायेत सैषा महतो वंशस्तम्बाल्लट्वानुकृष्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 2 Vart. 5.

senaka	name of an ancient grammarian quoted by Panini in the rule गिरेश्च सेनकस्य P. V. 4.112.

somayājin	a modern grammarian of the nineteenth century who wrote a short grammatical work as a hand-book for scholars who aspired to be poets. The work was called वैयाकरणशब्दमाला.

saunāga	name of a school of ancient grammarians who composed Varttikas in explanation of the sutras of Panini; confer, compare सौनागाः पठन्ति P. III. 2.56 Vart. 1, IV. 1.74 Vart. 1. confer, compare एतदेव सौनागैर्विस्तरतरकेण पठितम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 2.18 Vart. 4.

sauryabhagavān	an ancient grammarian quoted in the Mahabhasya: confer, compare तत्र सौर्यभगवतेाक्तमनिष्टिज्ञो वाडवः पठति \| इष्यत एव चतुर्मात्रः पटतः: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VIII. 2.106 Vart. 3.

sthānivadbhāva	behaviour of the substitute like the original in respect of holding the qualities of the original and causing grammatical operations by virtue of those qualities. By means of स्थानिवद्भाव,the substitute for a root is,for instance, looked upon as a root; similarly, a noun-base or an affix or so, is looked upon like the original and it can cause such operations or be a recipient of such operations as are due to its being a root or a noun or an affix or the like. This स्यानिवद्भाव cannot be, and is not made also, a universally applicable feature; and there are limitations or restrictions put upon it, the chief of them being अल्विधौ or in the matter of such operations as are caused by the 'property of being a single letter' (अल्विधौ). There are two views regarding this 'behaviour like the original' : (l) supposed behaviour which is only instrumental in causing operations or undergoing them which is called शास्त्रातिदेदा and (2) actual restoration to the form of the original under certain conditions only as prescribed which is called रूपातिदेश. The रूपातिदेश is actually resorted to by some grammarians in the case of the reduplication of roots; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on द्विवेचनेचि P.I.1.59 and M.Bh. on P.I.1.59.See the word रूपातिदेश also. For details see Vol. VII p.p. 241243, Vyākarana Mahabhasya D.E. Society's Edition.

sthāneyogā	a variety of the genitive case when it is connected in sense with the Pratipadika by the relationship of स्थान or place, as contrasted with the relationships of the kind of विषयविषयिभाब, अवयवावयविभाव and others. As grammar is a Science of words,in those places where one word is mentioned for another by the use of the genitive case it should be understood that the word mentioned is to be substituted for the other;cf the rule of Panini for that purpose षष्ठी स्थानेयोगा explained by Bhattoji Diksita as अानिर्धारितसंबन्धविशेषा षष्ठी स्थानेयोगा बोध्या; confer, compare S.K. on P.I.1.49. In some grammars the sthanin and adesa are expressed in the same case, Viz. the nominative case.

spardha	a word used in the sense of 'a conflict of two rules' ( विप्रतिषेध ) in some grammars such as those of Jainendra, Sakatayana and Hemacandra; cf Jain. I.2.39,Sak. I.1.46 and Hema. VII.4. l l9.

spha	a short technical term used in the jainendra Vyakarana instead of the संयेाग in Panini's grammar.

sphoṭa	name given to the radical Sabda which communicates the meaning to the hearers as different from ध्वनि or the sound in ordinary experience.The Vaiyakaranas,who followed Panini and who were headed by Bhartihari entered into discussions regarding the philosophy of Grammar, and introduced by way of deduction from Panini's grammar, an important theory that शब्द which communicates the meaning is different from the sound which is produced and heard and which is merely instrumental in the manifestation of an internal voice which is called Sphota.स्फुटयतेनेन अर्थः: इति स्फोटः or स्फोटः शब्दो ध्वनिस्तस्य व्यायमादुपजायते Vakyapadiya; confer, compare also अभिव्यक्तवादको मध्यमावस्थ आन्तर: शब्द: Kaiyata's Pradipa. For, details see Vakyapadiya I and Sabdakaustubha Ahnika 1. It is doubtful whether this Sphota theory was. advocated before Panini. The word स्फोटायन has been put by Panini in the rule अवङ् स्फोटायनस्य only incidentally and, in fact, nothing can be definitely deduced from it although Haradatta says that स्फोटायन was the originator of the स्फोटवाद. The word स्फोट is not actually found in the Pratisakhya works. However, commentators on the Pratisakhya works have introduced it in their explanations of the texts which describe वर्णोत्पत्ति or production of sound; confer, compare commentary on R.Pr.XIII.4, T.Pr. II.1. Grammarians have given various kinds of sphota; confer, compare स्फोटो द्विधा \| व्यक्तिस्फोटो जातिस्फोटश्च। व्यक्तिस्पोटः सखण्ड अखण्डश्च । सखण्ड। वर्णपदवाक्यभेदेन त्रिधा। अखण्ड: पदवाक्यभेदेन द्विधा ! एवं पञ्च व्यक्तिस्फोटाः\| जातिस्फोट: वर्णपदवाक्यभेदेन त्रिधा। इत्येवमष्टौ स्फोटः तत्र अखण्डवाक्यस्फोट एव मुख्य इति नव्याः । वाक्य जातिस्फोट इति तु प्राञ्चः॥; confer, compare also पदप्रकृतिः संहिता इति प्रातिशाख्यमत्र मानम् । पदानां प्रकृतिरिति षष्ठीतत्पुरुषे अखण्डवाक्यस्फोटपक्षः । बहुव्रीहौ सखण्डबाक्यस्फोट:\|\|

sphoṭatattvānirūpaṇa	a work on the Sphota theory by the famous grammarian Krsnasesa of the Sesa family of grammarians.

sphoṭavāda	a general name given to treatises discussing the nature of Sphota written by the Vaiyakaranas who defend and establish the theory of Sphota and by the Naiyayikas who criticise the theory. Famous among these works are (l) स्फोटवाद by a stalwart Grammarian Kondabhatta, the author of the Vaiyakaramabhusana and (2) स्फोटवाद by NageSa, the reputed grammarian of the eighteenth century.

sphoṭasiddhānta	the doctrine of Sphota, as advocated by the grammarians and criticised by others. See the word स्फोट,

sphīṭasiddhi(1)	name of a short treatise on the nature of Sphota, written by a grammarian named Bharata MiSra; (2) name of a short disquisition on Sphota by MandanamiSra.

ṭāyana	स्फोan ancient grammarian referred to by Panini in the rule अवङ् स्फोटायनस्य P.VI.1.123, Great grammarians like Haradatta observe that this स्फोटायन was the first advocate of the Sphota theory and hence he was nicknamed स्फोटायन; confer, compare स्फोटः अयनं परायणं यस्य स स्फोटायन: स्फोटप्रतिपादनपरो वैयाकरणाचार्यः \| Padamajari on P. VI.1.123.

smṛti	an authoritative dictum of an ancient grammarian before the famous author of the Varttika;confer, compare तथा च स्मृतिः श्तिपा शापानुबन्धेन निर्दिष्ट्ं etc, Siradeva Pari. 68.

sva(1)	personal-ending of the second person singular. Atmanepada in the imperative mood; cf थास: से \| सवाभ्यां वामौ \| P.III.4.80, 91 ; (2) a term used in the sense of स्ववर्गीय (belonging to the same class or category) in the Pratisakhya works; cf स्पर्श: स्वे R.T.25; confer, compare also कान्त् स्वे Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 1. 55;confer, comparealso R, Pr.IV.1 ; and VI.1 ;(3) cognate, the same as सवर्ण defined by Panini in तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवर्णम् P. P.I.1.9; the term is found used in the Jain grammar works of Jainendra, Sakatayana and Hemacanda cf ]ain. I.1.2 SikI. 1.2; Hema. I.1.17.

svara(l)	vowel, as contrasted with a consonant which never stands by itself independently. The word स्वर is defined generally :as स्वयं राजन्ते ते स्वराः ( Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on pan. The word स्वर is always used in the sense of a vowel in the Pratisakhya works; Panini however has got the word अच् (short term or Pratyahara formed of अ in 'अइउण्' and च् at the end of एऔच् Mahesvara sutra 4 ) always used for vowels, the term स्वर being relegated by him to denote accents which are also termed स्वर in the ancient Pratisakhyas and grammars. The number of vowels, although shown differently in diferent ancient works, is the same, viz. five simple vowels अ,इ,उ, ऋ, लृ, and four diphthongs ए, ऐ, ओ, and अौ. These nine, by the addition of the long varieties of the first four such as आ, ई, ऊ, and ऋ, are increased to thirteen and further to twentytwo by adding the pluta forms, there being no long variety for लृ and short on for the diphthongs. All these twentytwo varieties have further subdivisions, made on the criterion of each of them being further characterized by the properties उदात्त, अनुदIत्त and स्वरित and निरनुनासिक and सानुनासिक. (2) The word स्वर also means accent, a property possessed exclusively by vowels and not by consonants, as they are entirely dependent on vowels and can at the most be said to possess the same accent as the vowel with which they are uttered together. The accents are mentioned to be three; the acute ( उदात्त ), the grave अनुदात्त and the circumflex (स्वरित) defined respectively as उच्चैरुदात्तः, नीचैरनुदात्तः and समाहारः स्वरितः by Panini (P. I. 2.29, 30,3l). The point whether समाहार means a combination or coming together one after another of the two, or a commixture or blending of the two is critically discussed in the Mahabhasya. (vide Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.31). There are however two kinds of svarita mentioned by Panini and found actually in use : (a) the independent स्वरित as possessed by the word स्वर् (from which possibly the word स्वरित was formed) and a few other words as also many times by the resultant vowel out of two vowels ( उदात्त and अनुदात्त ) combined, and (b) the enclitic or secondary svarita by which name, one or more grave vowels occurring after the udatta, in a chain, are called cf P. VIII. 2.4 VIII. 2.6 and VIII 4.66 and 67. The topic of accents is fully discussed by the authors of the Pratisakhyas as also by Panini. For details, see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 1.19; T.Pr. 38-47 Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 108 to 132, II. I.65 Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. Adhyaya l padas 1, 2, 3 and Rk. Tantra 51-66; see also Kaiyata on P. I. 2.29; (3) The word स्वर is used also in the sense of a musical tone. This meaning arose out of the second meaning ' accent ' which itself arose from the first viz. 'vowel', and it is fully discussed in works explanatory of the chanting of Samas. Patanjali has given Seven subdivisions of accents which may be at the origin of the seven musical notes. See सप्तस्वर a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

svarabhakti	a vowel part; appearance of a consonant as a vowel; the character of a vowel borne by a consonant. Many times a semivowel which consists of one letter has to be divided especially for purposes of metre, as also for accentuation into two letters or rather, has to be turned into two letters by inserting a vowel before it or after it, for instance य् is to be turned into इय् e. g, in त्रियम्बकं यजामहे, while र् or रेफ is to be turned into र् ऋ as for instance in कर्हि चित् which is to be uttered as कर् ऋ हृि चित्. This prefixing or suffixing of a vowel is called स्वरभक्तिः confer, compare स्वरभक्तिः पूर्वभागक्षराङ्गं द्राघीयसी सार्धमात्रेतरे च \| अधोनान्या ( Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 32.35; confer, compare also न संयोगं स्वरभाक्तिर्विहृान्ति Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 35; confer, compare also रेफात् खरोपहिताद् व्यञ्जनोदयाद् ऋकारवर्णा स्वरभक्तिरुत्तरा: Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 46. In Panini's grammar, however, the word अज्भाक्त, which means the same is used for स्वरभक्ति; cf ऋति ऋ वा लृति लृ वा इत्युभयत्रापि विधेयं वर्णद्वयं द्विमात्रम् \| अाद्यस्य मध्ये द्वौ ; रेफौ तयोरेकां मात्रा । अभितेाज्भक्तेरपरा। S. K. on VI. 1.101.

svaravivṛtti( 1 )	the same as स्वरविराम which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; ( 2 ) a short treatise on Vedic accents written by a modern Vedic scholar and grammrian named Indradattopadhyaya.

svarasaṃdhi	euphonic combination of two vowels, a detailed description of which . forms a small topic in the Prtisakhya and grammar works; wide Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) chapters II. 1-26; T Pr. chapters 9 and 10 Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III and अच्सन्धिप्रकणम् in the Siddhantakaumudi.

svarita	the circumflex accent, the accent between the acute (.उदात्त) and the grave ( अनुदात्त); for details see स्वर.

svaritakaraṇa	marking or characterizing by.a svarita accent, as is supposed to have been done by Panini when he wrote down his sutras of grammar as also the Dhatupatha, the Ganapatha and other subsidiary appendixes. Although the rules of the Astadhyayi are not recited at present with the proper accents possessed by the various vowels as given by the Sutrakara, still, by convention and traditional explanation, certain words are to be believed as possessed of certain accents. In the Dhatupatha, by oral tradition the accents of the several roots are known by the phrases अथ स्वरितेतः, अथाद्युदाताः, अथान्तेादात्ताः, अथानुदात्तेत: put therein at different places. In the sutras, a major purpose is served by the circumflex accent with which such words, as are to continue to the next or next few or next many rules, have been markedition As the oral tradition, according to which the Sutras are recited at present, has preserevd no accents, it is only the authoritative word, described as 'pratijna' of the ancient grammarians, which now is available for knowing the svarita. The same holds good in the case of nasalization ( अानुनासिक्य ) which is used as a factor for determining the indicatory nature of vowels as stated by the rule उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत्; confer, compare प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः S. K. on P. I.3.2.

svaritapratijñā	the conventional dictum that a particular rule or part of a rule, is marked with the accent स्वरित which enables the grammarians to decide that that rule or that part of a rule is to occur in each of the subsequent Sutras, the limit of continuation being ascertained from convention. It is possible that Panini in his original recital of the Astadhyayi recited the words in the rules with the necessary accents; probably he recited every word, which was not to proceed further, with one acute or with one circumflex vowel, while, the words which were to proceed to the next rule or rules, were marked with an actual circumflex accent ( स्वरित ), or with a neutralization of the acute and the grave accents (स्वरितत्व), that is, probably without accents or by एकश्रुति or by प्रचय; cf स्वरितेनाधिकार: P. I.3.II and the Mahabhasya thereon.

svarūpavidhi	an operation prescribed for the verbal form of the word and not for such words as possess the meaning of the word; .cf अस्ति कश्चित्पुरुषारम्भः। क: \| स्वरूपविधिर्नाम \| हन्तेरात्मनेपदमुच्यमानं हृन्तेरेत्र स्यादूधेर्न स्यात् \| M.Bh. on P.I.1.56 Vart. 1. In grammar there is a general dictum that in connection with words of a Sutra, unless they are technical terms, the word-forms are to be understood, and not those shown by the sense of the word: confer, compare स्वं रूपं शब्दस्याशब्दसंज्ञा P. I.1.68. This rule has some exceptions; for example in the rule नदीभिश्च P.II.1.20 the various rivers are to be understood and not the word नदी.

svastha	literally remaining in its own form without admitting any cuphonic change for thc final letter; an ancient term for 'pragrhya' of Panini.

hṛradatta	name of a reputed grammarian of Southern India who wrote a very learned and scholarly commentary, named पदमञ्जरी, on the Kasikavrtti which is held by grammarians as the standard vrtti or gloss on the Sutras of Panini,and studied especially in the schools of the southern grammarians. Haradatta was a Dravida Brahmana, residing in a village on the Bank of Kaveri. His scholarship in Grammar was very sound and he is believed to have commented on many grammarworks.The only fault of the scholar was a very keen sense of egotism which is found in his work, although it can certainly be said that the egotism was not ill-placed and could be justified: confer, compare एवं प्रकटितोस्माभिर्भाष्ये परिचय: पर:। तस्य निःशेषतो मन्ये प्रतिपत्तापि दुर्लभः॥ also प्रक्रियातर्कगहने प्रविष्टो हृष्टमानसः हरदत्तहरिः स्वैरं विहरन् ! केन वार्यते \| Padamajari, on P. I-13, 4. The credit of popularising Panini's system of grammar in Southern India goes to Haradatta to a considerable extent.

hari	a short form used for भर्तृहरि, the stalwart grammarian Bhartrhari,by later grammarians and commentators in their references to him. See the word भर्तृहरि a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

harikṛṣṇa	a scholar of grammar who wrote a short treatise on the nature and function of prepositions named उपसर्गवाद.

haritādi	a class of words headed by the word इरित to which the taddhita affix फक् ( अायन ) is added in the sense of a descendant after the affix अ ( अञ् ) has already been added to them by P. IV. 1. 104, the word so formed possessing the sense of the great grandchild (युवापत्य) of the individuals denoted by इरित and others; e. g. हारितायनः; confer, compare इह् तु गोत्राधिकारेपि सामर्थ्याद् यूनि प्रत्ययोभिघीयते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P, IV.1.100

haridatta	a grammarian who wrote a commentary on the Unadi Sutras, called उणादिसूत्रटीका.

hareidīkṣita	a reputed grammarian of the Siddhantakaumudi school of Panini who lived in the end of the seventeenth century. He was the grandson of Bhattoji Diksita and the preceptor of Nagesabhtta. His commentary named लधुशब्दरत्न, but popularly called शब्दरत्न on Bhattoji Diksita's Praudhamanorama, is widely studied by pupils along with the Praudhamanorama in the Vyakaranapathasalas. There is a work existing in a manuscript form but recentlv taken for printing, mamed 'Brhatsabdaratna ' which has been written by Haridiksita, although some scholars beiieve that it was written by Nagesa who ascribed it to his preceptor. For details see लधुशब्दरत्न.

harināthadvivedī	a grammarian of the nineteenth century who has written a commentary named अकाण्डताण्डव on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara.

haribhāskara( अग्निहोत्री )	a grammarian of the Deccan who lived in the seventeenth century at Nasik and wrote commentaries on grammarworks out of which his treatise on Paribhasas ( परिभाषाभास्कर ) written independently but based upon Siradeva's Paribhasavrtti, deserves a special notice and mention.

harirāma( इरिराम केशव काळे )	a modern grammarian who has written a commentary named Ksika on Kondabhatta's Vaiyakaranabhusanasara. He lived in the second half of the eighteenth century and the commentary Kasika was written by him in 1797, He is said to have been a pupil of the great grammarian BhairavamiSra.

harivallabha	a grammarian who has written commentaries named दर्पणा on the Vaiyakaranabhusanasara of Kondabhatta, and Laghubhusanakanti on the Sabdakaustubha of Bhattoji Diksita.

hariśātri( भागवत )	a grammarian of the nineteenth century who has written Vakyarthacandrika, a commentary on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara.

harṣavardvanasvāmin	a fairly old grammarian who wrote an extensive metrical compendium on genders named लिङ्गानुशासन on which a commentary was written by a grammarian named शबरस्वासिन्. These grammarians were,of course, different from the reputed king इर्षवर्धन and the ; Mimamsaka शाबरस्वामिन्.

hal	a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for consonants, made up of the first letter ह् in हयवरट् and the last letter ल् in हृल्. The term is universally used for the word व्यञ्जन in Panini's grammar; confer, compare हलोनन्तराः संयोगः P.I. 1.7. हलन्ताच्च I. 2.10 et cetera, and others

huṣkaraṇa	the use of the sign-word हुष्, put in the grammar of Apisali according to some grammarians who read हुष्करण for पुष्करण in the Kasikavrtti on P. IV.3.115.

hṛdayahāriṇī	name of a commentary written by a grammrian named दण्डनाथ on the Sarasvatikanthabharana of Bhojarja.

hemacandra	a Jain sage and scholar of remarkable erudition in the religious works of the Jainas as also in several Shastras. He was a resident of Dhandhuka in Gujarat, who, like Sankarācārya took संन्यासदीक्षा at a very early age and wrote a very large number of original books and commentaries, the total number of which may well nigh exceed fifty, during his long life of eighty-four years ( 1088 to ll 2 ). He stayed at AnhilavalaPattana in the North Gujarat and was patronised with extreme reverence by King Kumarapala who in fact, became his devoted pupil. Besides the well-known works on the various Shastras like Kavyanusasana, Abhidhanacintamani, Desinamamla, Yogasastra, Dvyasrayakavya, Trisastisalakapurusacarita and others which are well-known, he wrote a big work on grammar called सिद्धहेमचन्द्र by him,but popularly known by the name हेमव्याकरण or हैमशब्दानुशासन The , work consists of eight books or Adhyayas, out of which the eighth book is devoted to prakrit Grammar, and can be styled as a Grammar of all the Prakrit dialects. The Sanskrit Grammar of seven chapters is based practically upon Panini's Astadhyayi, the rules or sutras referring to Vedic words or Vedic affixes or accents being entirely omittedThe wording of the Sutras is much similar to that of Panini; at some places it is even identical. The order of the treatment of the subjects in the सिद्धहैम. शब्दानुशासनमृत्र is not, however, similar to that obtaining in the Astadhyayi of Panini. It is somewhat topicwise as in the Katantra Vyakarana. The first Adhyaya and a quarter of the second are devoted to Samjna, Paribhasa and declension; the second pada of the second Adhyaya is devoted to karaka, while the third pada of it is devoted to cerebralization and the fourth to the Stripratyayas.The first two Padas of the third Adhyaya are devoted to Samasas or compound words, while the last two Padas of the third Adhyaya and the fourth Adhyaya are devoted to conjugation The fifth Adhyaya is devoted to verbal derivatives or krdanta, while the sixth and the seventh Adhyayas are devoted to formations of nouns from nouns, or taddhita words. On this Sabda nusasana, which is just like Panini's Astadhyayi, the eighth adhyaya of Hemacandra being devoted to the grammar of the Arsa language similar to Vedic grammar of Panini, Hemacandra has himself written two glosses which are named लधुवृति and वृहृदवृत्ति and the famous commentary known as the Brhannyasa. Besides these works viz the हैमशब्दानुशासन, the two Vrttis on it and the Brhannyasa, he has given an appendix viz the Lingnusasana. The Grammar of Hemacandra, in short, introduced a new system of grammar different from, yet similar to, that of Panini, which by his followers was made completely similar to the Paniniya system by writing works similar to the Siddhantakaumudi, the Dhatuvrtti, the Manorama and the Paribhasendusekhara. हेमहंसगणि a grammarian belonging to the school of Hemacandra, who lived in the fifteenth century and wrote a work on Paribhasas named न्यायसंग्रह, on which he himself wrote a commentary called न्यायार्थमञ्जूषा and another one called by the name न्यास.

helārāja	a learned grammarian who wrote a commentary on the third Kanda of the Vakyapadiya of Bharthari to which he has given the name प्रकीर्णप्रकाश.

haimakaumudī	an exhaustive commentary on the Sabdanusasana of Hemacandra written by a Jain grammarian Meghavijaya in the seventeenth century which is similar to the Siddhāntakaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita,

haimadhātuvyākhyā	written by a Jain grammarian named पुण्यसुंदर which is similar to the Madhaviya Dhatuvrtti,

hemalaghuprakriyāvṛtti	a topicwise work based on Hemacandra's Sabdanu-sasana written by Vinayavijaya, a Jain scholar of grammar.

haimavyākaraṇa	a treatise on grammar written by हेमचन्द्र, called by the name हेमशब्दानुशासन. See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

haimaśābdānuśāsana	a treatise on grammar written by Hemacandra. See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

haimaśabdānuśāsanalaghunyāsa	a short commentary on Hemacandra's Sabdanusasana written by Devendrassuri. हैमशब्दनुशासनवृत्ति a short gloss called अवचूरि also, written by a Jain grammarian नन्दसुन्दर on the हैमशब्दानुशासन.

hyastanī	imperfect tense; a term used by ancient grammarians for the affixes of the immediate past tense, but not comprising the present day, corresponding to the term लङ् of Panini. The term is found in the Katantra and Haimacandra grammars; confer, compare Kat. III. 1.23, 27; confer, compare Hema. III. 3.9.

Vedabase Search

2316 results


graha	as crocodiles	SB 10.50.25-28

grāha	by a crocodile	SB 3.18.6

graha	by being seized	SB 10.26.6

grāha	crocodiles	SB 8.7.18

graha	influential planets like the moon	SB 3.11.13

grāha	like crocodiles	CC Madhya 9.1

grāha	of sharks	MM 13

graha	planetary system	SB 3.7.33

graha	planets	SB 1.19.30

		SB 4.9.20-21

graha	seized	SB 12.6.70

graha	the asteroids	SB 2.6.13-16

graha	the controlling planets	SB 10.53.12

		SB 11.23.42

grāha	the crocodiles	CC Adi 2.1

graha	the influential planets	SB 2.5.11

graha	the mouth	SB 11.27.46

graha	the nine planets (Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune and Pluto)	SB 4.12.25

graha	the planets	SB 2.8.15

graha-ādayaḥ	the different planets	SB 5.23.3

graha-ādayaḥ	the different planets	SB 5.23.3

graha-ādibhyaḥ	from demons and so on	SB 6.8.37

graha-ādibhyaḥ	from demons and so on	SB 6.8.37

graha-gaṇa	all planets	CC Adi 13.90

graha-gaṇa	all planets	CC Adi 13.90

graha-grasta-prāya	exactly like one haunted by a ghost	CC Antya 2.18

graha-grasta-prāya	exactly like one haunted by a ghost	CC Antya 2.18

graha-grasta-prāya	exactly like one haunted by a ghost	CC Antya 2.18

graha-grastaḥ	being caught by an eclipse	SB 6.1.63

graha-grastaḥ	being caught by an eclipse	SB 6.1.63

graha-grastaḥ	haunted by a ghost	SB 7.7.35

graha-grastaḥ	haunted by a ghost	SB 7.7.35

grāha-grastam	when attacked by the crocodile	SB 8.1.31

grāha-grastam	when attacked by the crocodile	SB 8.1.31

graha-gṛhītaḥ	haunted by a ghost	SB 5.5.31

graha-gṛhītaḥ	haunted by a ghost	SB 5.5.31

graha-mardam	clashes of the stars	SB 1.14.17

graha-mardam	clashes of the stars	SB 1.14.17

graha-nakṣatra-ādīnām	such as the planets and stars	SB 5.23.2

graha-nakṣatra-ādīnām	such as the planets and stars	SB 5.23.2

graha-nakṣatra-ādīnām	such as the planets and stars	SB 5.23.2

graha-ṛkṣa	the stars and planets	SB 5.18.32

graha-ṛkṣa	the stars and planets	SB 5.18.32

graha-ṛkṣa-tārā-mayam	consisting of all the planets and stars	SB 5.23.9

graha-ṛkṣa-tārā-mayam	consisting of all the planets and stars	SB 5.23.9

graha-ṛkṣa-tārā-mayam	consisting of all the planets and stars	SB 5.23.9

graha-ṛkṣa-tārā-mayam	consisting of all the planets and stars	SB 5.23.9

graha-śańkitā	fearing some bad planet	SB 10.7.11

graha-śańkitā	fearing some bad planet	SB 10.7.11

graha-tārakam	and the planets and stars like Aśvinī	SB summary

graha-tārakam	and the planets and stars like Aśvinī	SB summary

graha-ulka-vat	like a falling star	SB 6.12.3

graha-ulka-vat	like a falling star	SB 6.12.3

graha-ulka-vat	like a falling star	SB 6.12.3

graha-upaśamanaḥ	nullifying planets	SB 5.22.12

graha-upaśamanaḥ	nullifying planets	SB 5.22.12

graha-vat	as if haunted by a ghost	SB 7.13.41

graha-vat	as if haunted by a ghost	SB 7.13.41

grahaḥ	a ghost	SB 5.26.36

grāhaḥ	accepting	SB 3.31.30

grāhaḥ	became a crocodile	SB 8.4.3-4

grāhaḥ	crocodile	SB 8.2.27

grahāḥ	planets	SB 5.21.11

grahaḥ	the acceptance	SB 10.16.56

grahāḥ	the controlling planets	SB 11.23.53

grahāḥ	the luminous planets	SB 7.8.32

grahāḥ	the planets	SB 10.20.8

grahāḥ	the planets (such as the moon)	SB 10.73.27

grahāḥ	the plates known as soma plates	SB 3.13.36

grāhaḥ	whose conception	SB 10.40.23

grahaiḥ	among the planets	SB 9.10.44

grahaiḥ	by other planets	SB 11.23.53

grahaiḥ	by the acquiring	SB 4.7.31

grahaiḥ	by the planets	SB 10.86.19

grahaiḥ	by the seven planets	SB 10.68.14-15

grāhaka nāhi	there is no customer	CC Madhya 17.144

grāhaka nāhi	there is no customer	CC Madhya 17.144

grāhaka nāhi	there was no customer	CC Madhya 25.169

grāhaka nāhi	there was no customer	CC Madhya 25.169

grāhake	to the customers	CC Antya 19.98

graham	a fiend	SB 5.13.3

graham	a full pot	SB 9.3.12

		SB 9.3.26

grāham	a taker	SB 10.62.13

graham	as one of the planets	SB 8.9.26

graham	taking	SB 10.31.5

graham	the full pot	SB 9.3.24

grahān	all the planets of the solar system	SB 4.12.34

grahān	and evil demons named Grahas	SB 6.8.24

grahān	planets	SB 3.17.14

grahān	shares	SB 4.13.30

grahān	the good and evil stars	SB 2.10.37-40

grāhān	things	BG 16.10

grahaṇa	accept	CC Adi 7.149

grahaṇa	acceptance	CC Madhya 6.70

grahaṇa	accepting	CC Antya 6.270

		CC Madhya 6.150

grahaṇa	by being forcibly held	SB 10.37.31

grahaṇa	eclipse	CC Adi 13.92

grahaṇa kare	chants	CC Antya 3.140

grahaṇa kare	chants	CC Antya 3.140

grahaṇa-ādibhiḥ	beginning with chanting	SB 6.3.22

grahaṇa-ādibhiḥ	beginning with chanting	SB 6.3.22

grahaṇa-āturam	afflicted because of being captured	SB 7.8.29

grahaṇa-āturam	afflicted because of being captured	SB 7.8.29

grahāṇām	of the planets	SB 5.22.2

grahaṇam	the acceptance	CC Antya 1.184

grahaṇāya	acceptable	SB 3.4.18

grahaṇāya	to take up	SB 3.1.44

grahaṇe	acceptance	CC Adi 4.204

grahaṇe	for the taking	SB 10.53.24

grahaṇe	in controlling	SB 11.25.18

grahaṇe	in the control	SB 3.25.26

grahaṇe	taking	CC Madhya 10.107

grahaṇe	when capturing	CC Madhya 14.197

grahaṇera	of the lunar eclipse	CC Adi 13.103

grahasya	of a planet	SB 11.23.53

grāhāt	from the crocodile	SB 11.4.18

		SB 8.3.33

grahāt	from the mouth of a crocodile	SB 8.1.30

grahatvam	a position as one of the chief planets	SB 5.24.1

grahatvam	planethood	SB 6.6.37

grāhayām āsa	he made him learn	SB 5.9.5

grāhayām āsa	he made him learn	SB 5.9.5

grāhayām āsa	made to accept	SB 1.3.41

grāhayām āsa	made to accept	SB 1.3.41

grāhayām āsa	taught	SB 7.5.18

grāhayām āsa	taught	SB 7.5.18

grāhayāmi	I shall give	CC Adi 3.83

grāhayan	just to disseminate	SB 3.4.31

grāhayantau	making others take to	SB 10.45.32

grāhayitum	to cause the acceptance of	SB 12.10.29

grahebhyaḥ	from the Graha demons	SB 6.8.27-28

grāheṇa	by the crocodile	SB 2.7.15

		SB 8.2.32

grāheṇa	with endeavor	BG 17.19

grahīṣyanti	will accept	SB 4.13.33

grahīṣyati	he will accept	SB 4.14.12

grahīṣye	I shall give	SB 9.3.12

grāhitaḥ	taught	SB 7.5.26

grahītum	in order to arrest	SB 4.28.22

grahodaye	constellation of stellar influence	SB 1.12.12

grāhya	perceptible	CC Madhya 17.134

grāhyā	should be accepted	NBS 33

grāhyaḥ	am to be obtained	SB 11.14.21

grāhyaḥ	obtainable	CC Madhya 20.138

		CC Madhya 25.136

grāhyaiḥ	with the objects of the senses	SB 10.3.14

grāhyam	accessible	BG 6.20-23

grāhyam	perceivable	SB 11.28.37

grāhyam	perceived	CC Madhya 17.136

grāhyam	should be accepted (remnants of food)	CC Antya 16.25

		CC Madhya 19.50

		CC Madhya 20.58

grāhyam	that which is accessible, namely sense gratification	SB 10.48.11

grāhyam	to be accepted	CC Madhya 24.313

graiṣma-vāsantikān	for four months, beginning with Caitra, on the fifteenth of May	SB 5.9.5

graiṣma-vāsantikān	for four months, beginning with Caitra, on the fifteenth of May	SB 5.9.5

grāma	a village	CC Antya 1.40

grāma	in a village	SB 7.13.1

grāma	of the villages	SB 10.41.7

grāma	the place	CC Madhya 16.267

grāma	the village	CC Antya 3.163

		CC Madhya 1.166

		CC Madhya 18.30

grāma	to the village	CC Madhya 18.35

grāma	towns	SB 11.18.24

grāma	village	CC Adi 13.30

		CC Adi 14.52

		CC Adi 5.181

		CC Madhya 1.226

		CC Madhya 18.27

grāma	villages	CC Antya 4.210

		CC Madhya 16.219

		CC Madhya 4.97

		CC Madhya 7.117

		MM 17

		SB 1.6.11

		SB 10.67.3

		SB 10.71.21

		SB 5.5.30

		SB 7.2.14

grāma haite	from the village	CC Antya 6.52

grāma haite	from the village	CC Antya 6.52

grāma-ādi	of villages, etc.	SB 4.18.32

grāma-ādi	of villages, etc.	SB 4.18.32

grāma-antara haite	from different villages	CC Madhya 7.102

grāma-antara haite	from different villages	CC Madhya 7.102

grāma-antara haite	from different villages	CC Madhya 7.102

grāma-antara haite	from other villages	CC Antya 6.55

grāma-antara haite	from other villages	CC Antya 6.55

grāma-antara haite	from other villages	CC Antya 6.55

grāma-antare	in a different village	CC Madhya 18.31

grāma-antare	in a different village	CC Madhya 18.31

		CC Madhya 18.44

grāma-antare	in a different village	CC Madhya 18.44

grāma-bhitara	inside a village	CC Antya 12.18

grāma-bhitara	inside a village	CC Antya 12.18

grāma-madhye	within the village	CC Madhya 4.47

grāma-madhye	within the village	CC Madhya 4.47

grāma-nivāsinaḥ	very much attached to materialistic enjoyment	SB 9.19.2

grāma-nivāsinaḥ	very much attached to materialistic enjoyment	SB 9.19.2

grāma-sambandha	neighborhood relationship	CC Adi 17.148

grāma-sambandha	neighborhood relationship	CC Adi 17.148

grāma-sambandhe	in a village relationship	CC Adi 17.48

grāma-sambandhe	in a village relationship	CC Adi 17.48

grāma-sambandhe	in our neighborhood relationship	CC Adi 17.148

grāma-sambandhe	in our neighborhood relationship	CC Adi 17.148

grāma-sevā	to live in a village and serve the people therein	SB 7.15.38-39

grāma-sevā	to live in a village and serve the people therein	SB 7.15.38-39

grāma-siṃhā	lions of the village (dogs)	SB 10.83.34

grāma-siṃhā	lions of the village (dogs)	SB 10.83.34

grāma-siṃhāḥ	the dogs	SB 3.17.10

grāma-siṃhāḥ	the dogs	SB 3.17.10

grāma-siṃhān	dogs	SB 3.18.10

grāma-siṃhān	dogs	SB 3.18.10

grāma-vāsāḥ	village residents	SB 12.3.33

grāma-vāsāḥ	village residents	SB 12.3.33

grāmaḥ	all kinds of	SB 1.7.44

grāmaḥ	the totality	SB 10.85.22

grāmaḥ	the village neighborhood	SB 11.25.25

grāmāḥ	villages	SB 1.14.20

		SB 10.24.24

grāmakam	of the name Grāmaka	SB 4.25.52

grāmam eyāya	wanted to come back to the capital	SB 9.7.17

grāmam eyāya	wanted to come back to the capital	SB 9.7.17

grāmān	and villages	SB 11.23.32

		SB 11.27.51

grāmān	villages	SB 1.12.14

		SB 4.18.31

		SB 5.26.27

		SB 6.14.34

		SB 8.18.32

grāmaṇyaḥ	the Yakṣas	SB 12.11.47-48

grāmaṇyaḥ	Yakṣas	SB 5.21.18

grāmāt	from one's mundane home	SB 10.90.50

grāme	for household life	SB 10.84.38

grāme	in householder life	SB 11.12.22-23

grāme	in the locality	CC Madhya 25.18

		SB 2.3.18

grāme	in the town	CC Madhya 16.252

		CC Madhya 25.234

grāme	in the village	CC Adi 13.33

		CC Antya 3.156

		CC Madhya 18.26

		CC Madhya 24.266

		CC Madhya 4.57

		CC Madhya 4.93

		CC Madhya 7.121

		CC Madhya 9.326

		CC Madhya 9.8

		SB 5.26.32

grāme	in Vārāṇasī	CC Adi 7.67

grāme	to a village	CC Madhya 9.39

grāme	to the village	CC Adi 17.56

		CC Madhya 4.132

		CC Madhya 5.104

grāme	to the villages	CC Madhya 7.104

grāme grāme	from village to village	CC Madhya 17.117

grāme grāme	from village to village	CC Madhya 17.117

grāme grāme	in each and every village	CC Adi 7.166

grāme grāme	in each and every village	CC Adi 7.166

grāme-grāme	every village	CC Madhya 1.103

grāme-grāme	every village	CC Madhya 1.103

grāme-grāme	in every village	CC Madhya 16.111

grāme-grāme	in every village	CC Madhya 16.111

		CC Madhya 7.82

grāme-grāme	in every village	CC Madhya 7.82

grāme-grāmera	from village to village	CC Antya 6.173

grāme-grāmera	from village to village	CC Antya 6.173

grāmera	of the village	CC Madhya 19.109

		CC Madhya 19.244

		CC Madhya 4.125

		CC Madhya 4.37

		CC Madhya 4.48

		CC Madhya 4.55

		CC Madhya 4.67

		CC Madhya 4.83

		CC Madhya 7.106

		CC Madhya 9.8

grāmera	of the villages	CC Madhya 17.47

		CC Madhya 4.85

		CC Madhya 4.89

grāmera	of this town	CC Adi 17.213

grāmera	to the village	CC Madhya 5.103

grāmera	village	CC Madhya 15.101

grāmera bāhire	outside the city	CC Madhya 19.245

grāmera bāhire	outside the city	CC Madhya 19.245

grāmera loka	all the people in the village	CC Madhya 18.29

grāmera loka	all the people in the village	CC Madhya 18.29

grāmera loka	all the people of the village	CC Madhya 7.103

grāmera loka	all the people of the village	CC Madhya 7.103

grāmera loka	the inhabitants of the village	CC Madhya 5.53

grāmera loka	the inhabitants of the village	CC Madhya 5.53

grāmera loka	the villagers	CC Madhya 24.266

grāmera loka	the villagers	CC Madhya 24.266

grāmeṣu	and villages	SB 10.20.48

grāmeṣu	in the villages	SB 3.17.9

grāmī	from the villages	CC Madhya 25.173

grāmī	of the village	CC Adi 10.81

grāmīke	to the inhabitants of the village	CC Madhya 18.27

grāmiṇām	of common men	SB 4.29.14

grāmya	conventional	SB 3.28.3

grāmya	material	SB 4.28.55

grāmya	of material attachment	SB 6.11.21

grāmya	ordinary sense gratification	SB 11.8.39

grāmya	relating to sense gratification	SB 11.8.17

grāmya	worldly	SB 3.5.12

grāmya-buddhīnām	who are obsessed with temporary material consciousness	SB 6.15.11

grāmya-buddhīnām	who are obsessed with temporary material consciousness	SB 6.15.11

grāmya-īha-uparamaḥ	not taking part in so-called philanthropic activities	SB 7.11.8-12

grāmya-īha-uparamaḥ	not taking part in so-called philanthropic activities	SB 7.11.8-12

grāmya-īha-uparamaḥ	not taking part in so-called philanthropic activities	SB 7.11.8-12

grāmya-karmaṇā	by material activities for sense gratification	SB 5.14.31

grāmya-karmaṇā	by material activities for sense gratification	SB 5.14.31

grāmya-kathā	ordinary talks of common men	CC Antya 6.236

grāmya-kathā	ordinary talks of common men	CC Antya 6.236

grāmya-kathā-vighātaḥ	due to which there is no chance of talking of worldly matters	SB 5.12.13

grāmya-kathā-vighātaḥ	due to which there is no chance of talking of worldly matters	SB 5.12.13

grāmya-kathā-vighātaḥ	due to which there is no chance of talking of worldly matters	SB 5.12.13

grāmya-kavira	of a poet who writes poetry concerning man and woman	CC Antya 5.107

grāmya-kavira	of a poet who writes poetry concerning man and woman	CC Antya 5.107

grāmya-paśoḥ	of an animal like a hog, pig or dog	SB 6.15.16

grāmya-paśoḥ	of an animal like a hog, pig or dog	SB 6.15.16

grāmya-sukha-icchayā	by desire for material happiness	SB 4.2.22

grāmya-sukha-icchayā	by desire for material happiness	SB 4.2.22

grāmya-sukha-icchayā	by desire for material happiness	SB 4.2.22

grāmya-sukhe	in sense gratification	SB 6.11.5

grāmya-sukhe	in sense gratification	SB 6.11.5

grāmya-upabhogena	by material sense gratification	SB 5.14.2

grāmya-upabhogena	by material sense gratification	SB 5.14.2

grāmya-vaidagdhyayā	expert in fulfilling one's material desires	SB 5.2.17

grāmya-vaidagdhyayā	expert in fulfilling one's material desires	SB 5.2.17

grāmya-vārtā	common topics	CC Antya 13.132

grāmya-vārtā	common topics	CC Antya 13.132

grāmya-vārtā	of mundane topics	CC Madhya 4.179

grāmya-vārtā	of mundane topics	CC Madhya 4.179

grāmya-vārtā	ordinary news	CC Antya 6.236

grāmya-vārtā	ordinary news	CC Antya 6.236

grāmya-vārtā	ordinary talks	CC Madhya 22.120

grāmya-vārtā	ordinary talks	CC Madhya 22.120

grāmya-vat	like a village personality	SB 10.15.19

grāmya-vat	like a village personality	SB 10.15.19

grāmya-vyavahāre	in ordinary dealings	CC Madhya 20.100

grāmya-vyavahāre	in ordinary dealings	CC Madhya 20.100

grāmyāḥ	materialistic men	SB 10.20.22

grāmyaḥ	ordinary living being	SB 3.3.5

grāmyāḥ	village girls	SB 10.47.42

grāmyāḥ	who are rustic	SB 10.39.24

grāmyaiḥ	material	SB 6.1.64

grāmyaiḥ samam	together with village persons	SB 10.15.19

grāmyaiḥ samam	together with village persons	SB 10.15.19

grāmyam	material or bodily	SB 9.18.40

grāmyān	ordinary	SB 10.89.63

grāmyān	sensual	SB 4.25.36

grāmyān bhogān	engagement in sex	SB 10.3.40

grāmyān bhogān	engagement in sex	SB 10.3.40

grāmyāṇām	of ordinary householders	SB 3.24.29

grāmyāni	related to sense gratification	SB 11.8.18

grāmyasya	of ordinary men of this material world	SB 9.11.17

grāmyeṣu	among worldly men	SB 10.26.2

grantha	a literature	CC Antya 5.95

grantha	book	CC Adi 8.39

		CC Adi 8.40

		CC Antya 18.11

		CC Antya 4.220

		CC Antya 4.221

grantha	books	CC Antya 4.219

		CC Antya 4.222

		CC Madhya 1.45

grantha	dramatic literature	CC Antya 1.123

grantha	great literature	CC Adi 8.78

grantha	of the book	CC Adi 1.105

		CC Adi 12.55

		CC Adi 13.49

		CC Adi 17.328

grantha	of the great literature	CC Madhya 25.147

grantha	scripture	CC Antya 4.224

grantha	scriptures	CC Madhya 1.36

		CC Madhya 10.112

grantha	the book	CC Adi 8.46

		CC Antya 20.72

		CC Madhya 1.43

		CC Madhya 16.213

grantha	the size of the book	CC Madhya 25.17

grantha	the transcendental literature	CC Madhya 1.44

grantha	this book	CC Antya 20.74

		CC Madhya 2.85

grantha	verses	CC Antya 4.226

grantha bāḍaya	increases the volume of the book	CC Antya 10.51

grantha bāḍaya	increases the volume of the book	CC Antya 10.51

grantha haya	the book becomes	CC Antya 18.10

grantha haya	the book becomes	CC Antya 18.10

grantha sāra	the essence of all Vedic literature	CC Antya 4.230

grantha sāra	the essence of all Vedic literature	CC Antya 4.230

grantha-ārambhe	in the beginning of the book	CC Adi 13.6

grantha-ārambhe	in the beginning of the book	CC Adi 13.6

grantha-artha-āsvāda	understanding of the whole contents of the book	CC Madhya 25.262

grantha-artha-āsvāda	understanding of the whole contents of the book	CC Madhya 25.262

grantha-artha-āsvāda	understanding of the whole contents of the book	CC Madhya 25.262

grantha-kartā	author	CC Madhya 25.49

grantha-kartā	author	CC Madhya 25.49

grantha-sāra	the essence of all scriptures	CC Antya 4.229

grantha-sāra	the essence of all scriptures	CC Antya 4.229

grantha-sūtra	the synopsis of the pastimes	CC Antya 1.12

grantha-sūtra	the synopsis of the pastimes	CC Antya 1.12

grantha-vivaraṇa	the description in the book	CC Antya 20.140

grantha-vivaraṇa	the description in the book	CC Antya 20.140

granthaḥ	book	CC Antya 20.157

granthaḥ	the word grantha	CC Madhya 24.18

granthaḥ	this great literature	CC Madhya 25.143-144

granthān	unnecessary literatures	SB 7.13.8

granthana	writing in the book	CC Adi 8.45

granthe	in his book (Śrī Caitanya-candrodaya-nāṭaka)	CC Antya 6.262

granthe	in scriptures	CC Antya 4.226

granthe	in the book	CC Antya 20.95

granthe	in the scripture	CC Adi 17.312

granthe	in verses	CC Madhya 1.37

granthera	a book	CC Adi 13.16

granthera	of Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛta	CC Adi 8.77

granthera	of the book	CC Antya 1.130

granthera	of the scripture	CC Adi 17.311

granthera	of this book	CC Adi 1.20

granthi	knot	SB 1.2.15

granthi	the bondage	SB 11.24.29

granthi	the knots	SB 3.26.2

granthi-hīna	without any knot	CC Madhya 24.16

granthi-hīna	without any knot	CC Madhya 24.16

granthiḥ	knots	SB 1.2.21

		SB 11.20.30

granthilā	full of knots	CC Antya 1.163

granthilena	recorded	CC Adi 13.16

granthim	hard knot	SB 8.24.47

granthim	knot	SB 3.24.4

granthim	the knot	SB 3.24.18

		SB 4.11.30

granthīn	knots	SB 8.24.53

granthīn	the knots (of desire)	SB 11.23.31

granthyaḥ	the knots	SB 10.39.14

grasa	kindly drive away	SB 5.18.8

grasa	kindly drive away	SB 5.18.8

grāsa	morsel	CC Antya 6.323

grāsa-śeṣe	remnants of food	CC Antya 14.49

grāsa-śeṣe	remnants of food	CC Antya 14.49

grāsaḥ	food	SB 11.8.3

grāsam	food	SB 11.8.2

		SB 11.8.9

grasamānaḥ	devouring	BG 11.30

grasāmi tapasā	I do withdraw also by the same energy	SB 2.9.24

grasāmi tapasā	I do withdraw also by the same energy	SB 2.9.24

grasan	devouring	SB 6.12.27-29

grasan	eating	SB 10.76.4

grasan	swallowing	SB 10.59.7

grasana-āśayā	expecting to swallow all the cowherd boys	SB 10.12.16

grasana-āśayā	expecting to swallow all the cowherd boys	SB 10.12.16

grasane	in the throat	SB 3.13.36

grasantam	swallowing	SB 12.9.21

grasantam	while devouring	SB 3.3.6

grasantam	who is devouring	SB 6.9.44

grasanti	eat	SB 5.26.33

grasanti	takes away	SB 12.4.14

grasasi	You swallow up	SB 12.8.41

grasatā	swallowing	SB 6.9.13-17

grasatām	among other conditioned souls, who devour one another	SB 7.9.16

grasatām	while devouring	SB 3.12.16

grasate	He devours	SB 6.12.12

grasate	is devouring	SB 10.17.23

grasate	is swallowing	SB 10.34.6

grasate	seizes	SB 12.4.15-19

grasate	takes away	SB 12.4.15-19

grasate	takes away	SB 12.4.15-19

grasati	he swallows	SB 11.9.21

grasati	seizes	SB 12.4.15-19

grasati	takes away	SB 12.4.15-19

grāse-grāse	morsel by morsel	CC Antya 6.95

grāse-grāse	morsel by morsel	CC Antya 6.95

grāseka anne	one morsel of food	CC Madhya 3.80

grāseka anne	one morsel of food	CC Madhya 3.80

graset	one should eat	SB 11.8.2

		SB 11.8.9

grasiṣṇu	devouring	BG 13.17

grasiṣyase	You will wind up	SB 3.21.19

grasitā	will swallow	SB 10.12.24

grasta	covered	SB 6.8.34

grasta-dehaḥ	the body being so diseased	SB 9.3.14

grasta-dehaḥ	the body being so diseased	SB 9.3.14

grasta-dehasya	of a person overcome	SB 7.6.7

grasta-dehasya	of a person overcome	SB 7.6.7

grasta-gandhā	deprived of its fragrance	SB 12.4.14

grasta-gandhā	deprived of its fragrance	SB 12.4.14

grasta-hṛdayaḥ	My heart is controlled	SB 9.4.63

grasta-hṛdayaḥ	My heart is controlled	SB 9.4.63

grasta-tejasaḥ	having lost all their personal strength	SB 6.9.20

grasta-tejasaḥ	having lost all their personal strength	SB 6.9.20

grastaḥ	attacked	SB 3.21.55

grastaḥ	overcome	SB 1.13.21

grastāḥ	seized	SB 10.34.27

grastaḥ	seized	SB 10.34.6

		SB 10.45.39

grastam	attacked by	SB 3.19.35

grastam	being embraced	SB 4.28.8

grastam	encaged	SB 6.2.36-37

grastam	seized	SB 10.34.7

		SB 11.8.41

		SB 11.8.42

		SB 12.8.2-5

grastam	that which has been seized	SB 10.68.28

grastān	captured	CC Madhya 9.1

grastān	lost	SB 8.14.4

grastān	seized	SB 11.7.71

grastāni	devoured	SB 6.9.44

grastāyām	when seized	SB 4.28.13

graste	being seized	SB 10.16.20

grasyamānasya	for one who is being seized	SB 11.23.27

grasyate	is seized	SB 11.21.20

grathita	recorded	CC Adi 13.15

grathitam	as composed	SB 5.12.3

grathitam	hard knot	SB 4.22.39

grathitam	tied tightly	SB 5.25.8

grāva-agra	by the edges of the stones	SB 12.13.2

grāva-agra	by the edges of the stones	SB 12.13.2

grāva-śakṛt	stones and stool	SB 5.5.30

grāva-śakṛt	stones and stool	SB 5.5.30

grāva-vṛndāni	the stones	CC Antya 1.167

grāva-vṛndāni	the stones	CC Antya 1.167

grāvabhiḥ	by stones	SB 4.5.18

grāvāṇaḥ	stones	SB 3.19.18

grāvāṇam	the rock	SB 10.67.14-15

grāvasu	in the stones of gold ore	SB 7.7.21

grāvṇā	a rock	SB 10.67.14-15

grāvṇaḥ	a magnetic stone	SB 5.18.38

grīṣma-kāla	of the summer season	CC Madhya 4.169

grīṣma-kāla	of the summer season	CC Madhya 4.169

grīṣma-kāle	in the summer	CC Madhya 4.165

grīṣma-kāle	in the summer	CC Madhya 4.165

grīṣmaḥ	summer	SB 10.18.2

grīṣme	in the summer	SB 11.18.4

grīṣme	in the summer season	SB 4.23.6

grīvā	neck	CC Antya 14.65-66

grīva	neck	SB 4.24.49

		SB 7.8.19-22

grīvā	of the neck	CC Madhya 14.194

grīva	on whose necks	SB 10.58.50-51

grīvā	the neck	CC Antya 9.26

		SB 2.1.28

grīvā phirāya	turns his neck	CC Antya 9.24

grīvā phirāya	turns his neck	CC Antya 9.24

grīvaḥ	the neck	SB 8.8.32

grīvaḥ	wearing on his neck	SB 10.56.16

grīvam	and neck	BG 6.13-14

grīvam	neck	SB 11.14.36-42

grīvam	on His neck	SB 10.56.37

		SB 10.73.1-6

grīvam	on the neck	SB 3.23.31

grīvam	whose throat	SB 12.9.22-25

grīvasya	whose neck	SB 7.2.7-8

grīvāyām	up to the neck	SB 2.5.39

kaustubha-ābharaṇa-grīvam	His neck is decorated by the Kaustubha jewel	SB 4.8.48

ācarita-agrya	simply preaching His activities	SB 4.22.24

ācārya-anugrahāt	by the mercy of the spiritual master	SB 9.1.40

āḍāila-grāme	in the village known as Āḍāila	CC Madhya 19.61

kańka-nyagrodhaka-ādayaḥ	Kańka, Nyagrodhaka and the others	SB 10.44.40

ugrasena-ādayaḥ	headed by King Ugrasena	SB 10.66.7

nigraha-ādi	repulses to the opposite party	CC Madhya 6.177

saundarya-ādi-guṇa-grāma	the transcendental qualities, headed by beauty	CC Madhya 21.104

udgrāha-ādi prāya	unnecessary argument	CC Antya 7.100

ugrasena-ādibhiḥ	headed by Ugrasena	SB 10.79.29

mṛt-grahaṇa-ādinā	by smearing with earth and so on	SB 11.27.10

nigraha-ādīni	controlling, etc.	SB 1.3.22

pura-grāma-vraja-ādiṣu	in all the towns, villages and pasturing grounds	SB 10.4.31

pura-grāma-vraja-ādiṣu	in towns, cities and villages here and there	SB 10.6.2

sugrīva-ādyaiḥ	named Sugrīva and so on	SB 10.70.14

vasudeva-ugrasena-ādyaiḥ	headed by Vasudeva and Ugrasena	SB 10.82.22

kṛṣṇa-rāma-ugrasena-ādyaiḥ	by Kṛṣṇa, Balarāma, Ugrasena and the others	SB 10.84.59

agra-bhuk	one who eats before	SB 1.15.11

agra-jāḥ	born before you	SB 2.6.13-16

agra-jāḥ	born prior to you	SB 2.7.41

daṃṣṭra-agra	the tips of the tusks	SB 3.13.40

agra-daṃṣṭrayā	by the tip of His tusk	SB 3.18.2

daṃṣṭra-agra	on the ends of His tusks	SB 3.18.6

agra-jam	his elder brother (King Dhṛtarāṣṭra)	SB 3.20.2

mārga-agra	the ultimate goal	SB 3.25.6

sva-nāsā-agra	the tip of one's nose	SB 3.28.12

agra-bhuk	the enjoyer of the first oblations	SB 4.14.28

agra-jān	the elder brothers	SB 4.22.6

eka-agra	perfect attention	SB 4.24.79

agra-jaḥ	elder	SB 4.28.11

eka-agra-manāḥ	with full attention	SB 4.29.82

agra-daṃṣṭre	on the end of the tusk	SB 5.18.39

lakṣmaṇa-agra-jam	the elder brother of Lakṣmaṇa	SB 5.19.1

lakṣmaṇa-agra-jaḥ	Lord Śrī Rāmacandra, the elder brother of Lakṣmaṇa	SB 5.19.7

agra-jasya	of the elder brother	SB 6.11.15

agra-pūjāyām	the first to be worshiped	SB 7.14.35

nāsa-agra	the tip of the nose	SB 7.15.32-33

nistriṃśa-agra-āhataḥ	because of being cut by the tip of the sword	SB 9.2.7

agra-dagdhām	which was previously burnt (by the monkey soldier Hanumān)	SB 9.10.16

agra-bhuk	enjoying in spite of your elder brother's being present	SB 9.22.11

agra-jam	to His elder brother, Lord Balarāma	SB 10.15.4

sa-agra-jaḥ	together with His elder brother, Balarāma	SB 10.15.41

agra-pātaiḥ	with the striking	SB 10.29.45-46

agra-jāya	to His elder brother (Lord Balarāma)	SB 10.34.32

agra	forward	SB 10.36.10

agra-nīḥ	coming forward	SB 10.37.1-2

agra-jaḥ	His elder brother (Lord Balarāma)	SB 10.38.23

agra-jaḥ	Your elder brother	SB 10.41.12

agra-jaḥ	His elder brother, Lord Balarāma	SB 10.41.52

agra-jaḥ	His elder brother	SB 10.42.13

agra-jaḥ	His elder brother	SB 10.43.17

agra-jaḥ	elder brother	SB 10.43.30

agra-jaḥ	His elder brother, Lord Balarāma	SB 10.45.2

agra-jaḥ	the first-born	SB 10.52.22

agra-ja	of His elder brother	SB 10.57.22

agra-jaḥ	My elder brother	SB 10.57.38-39

agra-hastā	in her hand	SB 10.60.8

agra-jaḥ	older brother	SB 10.60.18

agra-jaḥ	an elder brother	SB 10.80.25-26

agra-saram	who came first	SB 10.87.24

sva-nāsa-agra	on the tip of one's own nose	SB 11.14.32-33

dhārmika-agra-gaṇya	on the top of the list of religious persons	CC Madhya 16.218

keśa-agra	from the tip of a hair	CC Madhya 19.139

keśa-agra	of the tip of a hair	CC Madhya 19.140

bāla-agra	the tip of a hair	CC Madhya 19.141

mukuṭa-agra	of the tops of the helmets	CC Madhya 21.72

mṛṇāla-agra-bhujaḥ	those who eat the tops of the stems	CC Antya 1.92

agra-bhājaḥ	possessing ends	CC Antya 1.159

sa-agra-jātam	with his elder brother, Śrī Sanātana Gosvāmī	CC Antya 2.1

sa-agra-jātam	with his elder brother, Śrī Sanātana Gosvāmī	CC Antya 3.1

agra	the chief	CC Antya 10.4

agracārī	moving impetuously	SB 5.22.8

nāsa-agraḥ	the tip of his nose	SB 4.14.44

agraḥ	the front	SB 10.36.10

āgraha	with great enthusiasm	CC Madhya 1.119

āgraha kariñā	showing great eagerness	CC Madhya 1.124

āgraha	eagerness	CC Madhya 7.51

āgraha kariya	with great eagerness	CC Madhya 9.306

mahā-āgraha	great eagerness	CC Madhya 12.55

āgraha	persistence	CC Madhya 15.155

yatna-āgraha vinā	without sincere endeavor	CC Madhya 24.171

āgraha kariyā	with great eagerness	CC Madhya 25.26

āgraha	the eagerness	CC Madhya 25.47

āgraha karila	expressed their eagerness	CC Madhya 25.162

āgraha karila	expressed his ardent desire	CC Antya 5.110

kariyā āgraha	with great eagerness	CC Antya 6.294

āgraha kariyā	with great eagerness	CC Antya 8.13

āgraha kari'	with great eagerness	CC Antya 8.13

āgraha kariyā	with eagerness	CC Antya 8.14

āgraha kariyā	with great eagerness	CC Antya 8.17

āgraha kariyā	with great attention	CC Antya 10.38

āgraha kene kara	why are you eager	CC Antya 11.24

āgraha kariyā	with great attention	CC Antya 11.86

āgraha	insistence	CC Antya 12.129

āgraha kariyā	with great eagerness	CC Antya 12.136

asat-āgrahaḥ	having unsuitable obstinacy	SB 5.9.6

tat-guṇa-agrahaḥ	are not touched by the material qualities	SB 10.3.14

āgrahaḥ	too much attachment to (or agrahaḥ

asat-āgraham	bodily concept of life	SB 3.27.9

agrahaṇa	ignorance	SB 10.27.4

agrahaṇa	inability to realize	SB 11.22.57

prabhura āgrahe	by the eagerness of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu	CC Madhya 7.55

āgrahe	the insistence	CC Antya 1.111

tāńra āgrahe	by his eagerness	CC Antya 5.110

sabāra āgrahe	due to the eagerness of all of them	CC Antya 8.86

agrāhiṣam	could accept	SB 4.9.32

agrahīṣṭa	accepted	SB 4.30.11

agrahīṣyat	would accept	SB 3.16.23

agrahīt	accepted	SB 3.19.1

agrahīt	he took	SB 4.2.11

agrahīt	arrested	SB 4.5.17

agrahīt	received	SB 6.18.12-13

agrahīt	usurped	SB 7.4.15

agrahīt	captured	SB 7.7.6

agrahīt	captured	SB 7.8.25

agrahīt	captured	SB 8.2.27

agrahīt	delivered	SB 9.3.24

agrahīt	he caught	SB 9.5.1

agrahīt	accepted	SB 9.10.50

agrahīt	took	SB 9.14.6

agrahīt	took charge of	SB 9.14.13

agrahīt	married	SB 9.24.39

agrahīt	took up	SB 10.1.35

agrahīt	captured	SB 10.4.23

agrahīt	seized	SB 10.43.6

agrahīt	He took	SB 10.80.20-22

agrahīt	took	SB 10.83.11

agrahīt	has taken	SB 11.23.37

agrahīt	accepted	CC Adi 6.74

agrāhyaḥ	not confined in a body made of material nature	SB 10.10.32

agrāhyaḥ	not to be taken hold of	SB 10.86.47

agrāhyam	difficult to understand	SB 5.26.38

agrāhyam	beyond the grasp of direct perception	SB 11.7.23

hasta-agrāhye	when the destination is out of the reach of His hands	SB 10.8.30

patākā-agraiḥ	by the foremost signs	SB 1.11.13

agraiḥ	by the foremost	SB 2.9.15

prācīna-agraiḥ	keeping the kuśa grass facing toward the eastern side	SB 4.24.10

prāk-agraiḥ	with the points facing east	SB 4.29.49

sa-tāla-agraiḥ	with the tops of the palm trees	SB 10.15.38

tīkṣṇa-agraiḥ	sharp-pointed	SB 10.63.10-11

agraiḥ	excellent	SB 10.75.11

agraja-vat	like your older brothers	SB 9.18.42

agraja-śāsanam	the order of the elder brother	CC Madhya 10.145

bharata-agrajaḥ	the elder brother of Mahārāja Bharata	SB 6.8.15

agrajaḥ	older brother	SB 10.8.34

saha-agrajaḥ	together with His brother Balarāma	SB 10.22.29

gada-agrajaḥ	Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa, the elder brother of Gada	SB 10.41.32

gada-agrajaḥ	Kṛṣṇa, the elder brother of Gada	SB 10.47.40

gada-agrajaḥ	Kṛṣṇa, the elder brother of Gada	SB 10.52.40

sa-agrajaḥ	and with His elder brother	SB 10.57.10

gada-agrajaḥ	Lord Kṛṣṇa, the elder brother of Gada	SB 10.59.10

agrajāḥ	brothers	CC Madhya 21.13

rūpasya agrajaḥ	the elder brother of Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī	CC Madhya 24.348

agrajam	the eldest brother	SB 1.15.4

agrajam	His eldest brother	SB 9.10.35-38

saha-agrajam	who was playing with His elder brother, Balarāma	SB 10.11.14

sa-agrajam	together with His elder brother	SB 10.23.20-21

gada-agrajam	Lord Kṛṣṇa, the elder brother of Gada	SB 10.69.26

agrajān	all his elder brothers, beginning from Yadu	SB 9.19.23

agrajān te	all the brothers born before You	SB 10.3.22

agrajāya	to your elder brother	SB 9.22.11

eka-agram	with one attention	BG 6.11-12

agram	at the tip	BG 6.13-14

agram	the front part	SB 4.20.22

indra-senā-agram	the front of Indra's army	SB 6.10.19-22

agram	the front portion of the snake	SB 8.7.4

agrāṇām	the fronts	SB 10.70.7-9

agraṇīḥ	the foreman	SB 1.12.21

agraṇīḥ	foremost	SB 3.1.30

anuga-agraṇīḥ	one of the principal associates	SB 4.2.20

agraṇīḥ	the chief	SB 4.5.4

agraṇīḥ	the foremost	SB 4.9.45

agraṇīḥ	foremost	SB 4.21.38

agraṇīḥ	taking the lead	SB 6.10.33

agraṇīḥ	and chariot driver	SB 8.11.26

agranīḥ	the foremost devotee	SB 8.22.28

agraṇīḥ	the leader, who goes first	SB 8.24.50

vīra-yūtha-agraṇīḥ	Bhīṣmadeva, the foremost of all warriors	SB 9.22.20

agranīḥ	the leader	SB 10.84.20

āgranthayaḥ	having tightly tied	SB 10.33.7

mahat-tama-agraṇyaḥ	the best of the saintly persons (Yudhiṣṭhira)	SB 7.11.1

karṇa-agraṇyaḥ	those headed by Karna	SB 10.68.7

agraṇyām	among those advancing in pious life	SB 11.16.22

agrasam	have hidden	SB 4.18.7

āgrasantaḥ	swallowing up	SB 12.9.12

agrasat	swallowed	SB 6.9.19

agrasat	swallowed	SB 10.11.48

agrasīt	took away	SB 8.20.8

agrasīt	swallowed	SB 10.34.5

agrasīt	devoured	SB 10.55.13

agrasīt	swallowed	SB 11.1.22

agrāt	from the front portion, or palm	SB 4.25.28

kumuda-agrāt	from the top of Kumuda Mountain	SB 5.16.24

nakha-agrāt	the tips of whose nails	SB 7.9.15

kara-agrāt	from the hand	SB 8.12.23

agrataḥ	in the presence of	SB 1.13.2

agrataḥ	first	SB 3.17.18

agrataḥ	before him	SB 3.19.7

agrataḥ	first of all	SB 3.20.18

agrataḥ	in front	SB 4.7.9

agrataḥ	in front	SB 4.10.24

agrataḥ	after dividing first among the others	SB 6.19.19-20

agrataḥ	first of all	SB 6.19.24

agrataḥ	in front	SB 7.8.19-22

agrataḥ	at first	SB 8.7.18

agrataḥ agrataḥ	going forward face to face	SB 8.10.10-12

agrataḥ agrataḥ	going forward face to face	SB 8.10.10-12

śīra-agrataḥ	from the front portion of the plow	SB 9.13.18

agrataḥ	previously	SB 10.1.24

agrataḥ	in front	SB 10.6.21

agrataḥ	in front	SB 10.11.29

agrataḥ	forward	SB 10.30.26

agrataḥ	before	SB 10.41.8

agrataḥ	before himself	SB 10.44.39

agrataḥ	in front of	SB 10.47.14

agrataḥ	in front	SB 10.53.5

agrataḥ	first	SB 10.70.13

agrataḥ	before Him	SB 10.70.14

agrataḥ	in front	SB 10.77.17-18

agrataḥ	first, before others	SB 11.8.16

agrataḥ	in front	SB 11.13.20

agrataḥ	first of all	SB 11.17.33

agrataḥ	in front	SB 12.11.47-48

agrataḥ	in progressive order	SB 12.12.7

agrataḥ	first	CC Madhya 1.203

eka-agrayā	with full attention	SB 8.17.2-3

āgrayaṇaiḥ	with performances of the Vedic sacrifice for tasting the first grains of the new harvest	SB 10.20.48

manaḥ-agrayānam	more quick than the mind, inconceivable to mental speculation	SB 8.5.26

agre	in the beginning	BG 18.37

agre	in the beginning	BG 18.38

agre	in the beginning	BG 18.39

agre	previously	SB 1.2.25

agre	before	SB 1.2.30

agre	before creation	SB 1.10.21

agre	before them	SB 1.19.12

agre	before the creation	SB 2.9.33

agre	in the previous birth	SB 3.1.30

agre	at first	SB 3.5.5

agre	prior to the creation	SB 3.5.23

agre	in the beginning	SB 3.7.21

agre	previously	SB 3.9.29

agre	in the beginning	SB 3.10.13

agre	at first	SB 3.12.2

agre	hereinbefore	SB 3.12.11

agre	in the beginning	SB 3.13.30

jihvā-agre	on the tip of the tongue	SB 3.33.7

agre	before	SB 4.23.36

agre	formerly	SB 4.28.52

agre	in front	SB 4.29.53

agre	in front	SB 4.29.54

puccha-agre	at the end of the tail	SB 5.23.5

agre	in the beginning, before the creation	SB 6.4.47

agre	in front	SB 6.11.5

agre	in the beginning	SB 8.1.14

agre	in the beginning	SB 8.6.10

agre	in front	SB 8.10.27

dvijān agre	first the brāhmaṇas	SB 9.4.33-35

agre	in the beginning	SB 10.3.14

kapittha-agre	on the top of a kapittha tree	SB 10.11.43

tṛṇa-rāja-agre	into the top of a palm tree	SB 10.15.32

agre	ahead	SB 10.41.10

agre	in the front	SB 10.62.29-30

agre	in the beginning	SB 10.87.37

agre	in Satya-yuga	SB 11.17.11

agre	before the creation	CC Adi 1.53

agre	before	CC Adi 4.117

ratha-agre	in front of the car	CC Madhya 1.134

agre	before	CC Madhya 8.190

jihvā-agre	on the tongue	CC Madhya 11.192

śrī-ratha-agre	in the front of the car	CC Madhya 13.1

agre	in front	CC Madhya 13.191

ratha-agre	in front of the car	CC Madhya 16.49

jihvā-agre	on the tongue	CC Madhya 19.72

agre nṛtya	dancing before the Deity	CC Madhya 22.122

agre	before the creation	CC Madhya 24.76

agre	before the creation	CC Madhya 25.113

agre	before (before the creation of this cosmic manifestation)	CC Madhya 25.133

ratha-agre	the front of the ratha, or chariot	CC Antya 1.72

agre	in front	CC Antya 1.145

ratha-agre	in front of the car	CC Antya 4.106

jihvā-agre	on the tip of the tongue	CC Antya 16.27

agrecaraḥ	going forward	SB 1.15.15

eka-agreṇa	with full attention	BG 18.72

sva-daṃṣṭra-agreṇa	by the edge of His tusks	SB 3.14.3

agreṇa	by the point	SB 5.8.21

viṣāṇa-agreṇa	by the point of the horns	SB 9.19.4

agreṇa	with the tips	SB 10.36.2

agreṇa	with the front	SB 10.41.37

agreṇa	with the tip	SB 10.65.24-25

agreṇa	with the tip	SB 10.65.26

agreṇa	with the tip	SB 10.68.41

agreṇa	with the tip of a blade	SB 10.78.28

agreṇa	with the front end	SB 10.79.5

prāk-agreṣu	facing east	SB 8.9.14-15

agrete	in front	CC Adi 17.291

agrete	in front	CC Madhya 1.189

agrete	in front	CC Madhya 6.10

ratha-agrete	in front of the car	CC Madhya 13.206

agrete	in front	CC Madhya 14.208

tāńhāra agrete	before him	CC Madhya 15.121

sabāra agrete	in front of all the devotees	CC Madhya 16.255

agrete	in front	CC Antya 11.50

nija-agrete	in front of himself	CC Antya 11.53

vibudha-agrya	of the devotees (who are the best of the learned)	SB 3.15.26

dvija-agrya	O best of the brāhmaṇas	SB 3.22.11

agrya	by the foremost	SB 4.20.15

ācarita-agrya	simply preaching His activities	SB 4.22.24

agrya	first	SB 10.74.18

vipra-agryaḥ	the best of brāhmaṇas	SB 10.80.15

vaiṣṇava-agryaḥ	the foremost of devotees of Lord Viṣṇu	SB 11.2.53

dvija-agryāḥ	O most eminent of brāhmaṇas	SB 12.12.56

agryaiḥ	choicest	SB 3.23.19

bāla-vyajana-chatra-agryaiḥ	protected by beautifully decorated umbrellas and the best of cāmaras	SB 8.10.16-18

agryam	very beautiful	SB 4.12.19

dhiṣṇya-agryam	the transcendental airplane	SB 4.12.29

agryam	excellent	SB 6.19.26-28

vimāna-agryam	excellent airplane	SB 8.10.16-18

agryām	the best of all	SB 9.2.35-36

agryām	principally	SB 9.22.11

agryam	excellent	SB 10.64.30

kula-agryān	most of all the families (the brāhmaṇas)	SB 1.16.21

agryāt	from the best	SB 10.76.9-11

dvija-āgryatām	the status of being the best of the twice-born	SB 11.23.22

dukūla-agrye	dressed with a dhotī	SB 4.21.17

agrye	excellent	SB 10.83.28

agrye	in the best	SB 11.11.43-45

agryebhyaḥ	excellent	SB 10.82.10

eka-agryeṇa	with full attention	SB 5.2.2

vimāna-agryeṣu	in the best of airplanes	SB 3.16.34

agryeṣu	excellent	SB 10.86.27-29

nistriṃśa-agra-āhataḥ	because of being cut by the tip of the sword	SB 9.2.7

ajuṣṭa-grāmya-viṣayau	for sex life and to beget a child like Me	SB 10.3.39

mańgala-bhūyiṣṭha-pura-grāma-vraja-ākarāḥ	whose many cities, towns, pasturing grounds and mines became auspicious and very neat and clean	SB summary

āmāra grāmete	in My village	CC Madhya 4.28

āmi jarā-grasta	I am invalid because of old age	CC Antya 1.11

sāmagrī āna	bring more ingredients	CC Antya 2.73

pāka-sāmagrī ānaha	please bring everything necessary for cooking	CC Antya 2.55

pāka-sāmagrī ānaha	bring all cooking ingredients	CC Antya 2.58

cit-ānanda kṛṣṇa-vigraha	the transcendental form of Kṛṣṇa, which is completely spiritual	CC Madhya 25.35

ananugrahāḥ	not merciful	SB 4.12.36

samagra-ańgam	all the limbs	SB 3.28.18

anuga-agraṇīḥ	one of the principal associates	SB 4.2.20

anugraḥ	not ferocious	CC Madhya 8.6

anugraha-iṣitam	to bestow benediction	SB 1.10.27

anugraha-arthāya	for the sake of obliging	SB 1.12.16

prajā-anugraha	doing good to the living being	SB 1.19.19

anugraha-dṛṣṭi	merciful glance	SB 2.7.28

anugraha-bhājanaḥ	object of favor	SB 3.4.14

anugraha	to show His grace	SB 3.17.31

anugraha	to bestow blessings	SB 3.28.17

kṛta-anugraha	manifested by His grace	SB 4.7.24

anugraha	to bestow mercy	SB 4.9.17

anugraha	mercy	SB 4.14.33

anugraha	by kindness	SB 4.20.20

mat-anugraha-arthaḥ	thinking that to achieve My mercy is the aim of life	SB 5.5.15

anugraha-artham	to show His causeless mercy	SB 6.4.33

bhūta-anugraha-kātarāḥ	very much anxious to bestow benedictions upon the fallen conditioned souls	SB 6.5.39

anugraha-artham	to show favor	SB 8.24.15

anugraha-arthāya	for the purpose of giving special mercy	SB 10.10.7

anugraha-īkṣitam	due to the merciful glance	SB 10.15.52

anugraha	of the favoring	SB 10.51.42

anugraha	compassion	SB 10.78.33

anugraha	of bestowing benedictions	SB 10.86.51

anugraha	merciful	CC Adi 7.55

anugraha	mercy	CC Madhya 6.116

anugraha	mercy	CC Madhya 6.122

anugraha	mercy	CC Antya 7.168

anugraha	of the blessing	CC Antya 8.32

anugraha-kātaram	eager to show mercy	CC Antya 10.1

tat-anugrahaḥ	His causeless mercy	SB 2.10.4

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 3.4.12

anugrahaḥ	causeless mercy	SB 3.9.34

anugrahaḥ	causeless mercy	SB 3.9.38

anugrahaḥ	merciful	SB 3.14.36

anugrahaḥ	a favor	SB 3.16.12

anugrahaḥ	favor	SB 3.16.16

anugrahaḥ	favor	SB 3.22.7

anugrahaḥ	giving assistance	SB 3.26.29

anugrahaḥ	the manifester	SB 3.27.16

anugrahaḥ	favor	SB 4.7.13

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 4.21.25

anugrahaḥ	causeless mercy	SB 4.22.42

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 4.24.58

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 4.26.22

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 5.5.24

parihīṇa-bhagavat-anugrahaḥ	being without the favor of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.24.26

anugrahaḥ	a favor	SB 6.17.20

anugrahaḥ	favor	SB 6.17.29

anugrahaḥ	whose benediction	SB 7.4.3

mahat-anugrahaḥ	compassion by the Supreme	SB 7.9.42

anugrahaḥ ca	and false ego or the demigods	SB 7.9.48

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 8.22.16

mat-anugrahaḥ	should be considered to have received My special mercy	SB 8.22.26

tvat-anugrahaḥ	Your causeless mercy	SB 8.23.2

anugrahaḥ	favor	SB 9.5.9

anugrahaḥ	compassion	SB 9.24.58

anugrahaḥ ca	and the maintainer	SB 10.2.28

sat-anugrahaḥ	who are always kind and merciful to the devotees	SB 10.2.31

anugrahaḥ kṛtaḥ	this was a great favor done by him to you	SB 10.10.40

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 10.16.34

anugrahaḥ	as mercy	SB 10.16.34

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 10.40.28

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 10.41.48

anugrahaḥ	benefit	SB 10.43.37

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 10.47.27

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 10.51.54

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 10.73.9

anugrahaḥ	the mercy (by which one's senses can act)	SB 10.85.10

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 11.3.48

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 12.6.3

anugrahaḥ	mercy	MM 25

anugraham	special benediction	SB 1.6.10

anugraham	kindness	SB 1.11.10

anugraham	doing good to	SB 1.19.23

anugraham	benediction	SB 2.2.12

anugraham	favor	SB 3.14.11

mahat-anugraham	the mercy of the Lord	SB 3.31.15

anugraham	mercy	SB 4.6.49

anugraham	mercy	SB 4.21.36

anugraham	favor	SB 10.16.59

anugraham	mercy	SB 10.24.36

anugraham	benefit	SB 10.27.16

anugraham	mercy	SB 10.28.8

ati-anugraham	an act of extreme kindness	SB 10.38.7

anugraham	mercy	SB 10.88.9

anugrahāṇām	of those who are specifically favored	SB 3.5.51

yat-anugrahaṇe	to receive her favor	SB 3.15.21

anugrahaṇīya-śīlāḥ	trained to get favors	SB 1.19.13

mat-anugrahasya	which has shown mercy to me	SB 10.14.2

anugrahāt	by the favor of	SB 1.1.8

tat-anugrahāt	by his mercy	SB 1.3.44

anugrahāt	by the mercy of	SB 1.6.24

anugrahāt	by the causeless mercy	SB 1.6.31

anugrahāt	mercy of	SB 1.7.44

anugrahāt	by the mercy of	SB 1.14.9

anugrahāt	by the mercy	SB 1.18.1

anugrahāt	by the mercy of	SB 2.8.9

anugrahāt	by the mercy of	SB 2.9.29

anugrahāt	by causeless mercy	SB 2.9.32

anugrahāt	by mercy	SB 3.16.19

tvat-anugrahāt	by Your mercy	SB 3.25.8

bhavat-anugrahāt	by Your grace	SB 3.25.30

anugrahāt	by mercy	SB 4.30.17

anugrahāt	by the mercy or by drinking the breast milk	SB 5.2.21

anugrahāt	by the mercy	SB 5.17.22-23

anugrahāt	the mercy	SB 6.12.11

ācārya-anugrahāt	by the mercy of the spiritual master	SB 9.1.40

mat-anugrahāt	by my special favor	SB 10.10.20-22

anugrahāt	from the mercy	SB 10.10.37

hareḥ anugrahāt	by the mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 10.11.24

anugrahāt	by the mercy	SB 10.16.65-67

anugrahāt	because of the mercy	SB 11.24.11

anugrahāt	by causeless mercy	CC Adi 1.52

anugrahāt	by the mercy	CC Adi 2.1

anugrahāt	by causeless mercy	CC Madhya 25.109

anugrahataḥ	by the mercy of	SB 2.10.12

anugrahataḥ	by the mercy	SB 10.87.17

mat-anugrahāya	just to show me favor	BG 11.1

anugrahāya	due to being compassionate towards them	SB 3.5.3

sat-anugrahāya	for the sake of the devotees	SB 3.9.2

sat-anugrahāya	to show Your causeless mercy	SB 3.9.11

anugrahāya	for showing mercy	SB 3.20.25

anugrahāya	for bestowing mercy	SB 3.21.20

anugrahāya	just to show mercy	SB 4.22.16

anugrahāya	for the matter of showing you mercy	SB 4.24.27

tat-anugrahāya	to show His mercy	SB 5.17.14

anugrahāya	to show favor	SB 5.19.9

anugrahāya	just to show favor	SB 6.15.18-19

anugrahāya	for the special favor	SB 7.8.56

anugrahāya	to show mercy	SB 8.24.27

anugrahāya	just to show mercy	SB 9.24.61

anugrahāya	for the purpose of showing mercy	SB 10.14.20

anugrahāya	to show mercy	SB 10.33.36

anugrahāya	for the benediction	SB 10.34.14

anugrahāya	for showing mercy	SB 10.86.24

anugrahāya	for showing mercy	SB 12.8.32

anugrahāya	to show favor	CC Adi 3.111

anugrahāya	for showing favor	CC Adi 4.34

anugraheṇa	by causeless mercy	SB 1.5.26

anugraheṇa	by the mercy	SB 3.9.21

tvat-para-anugraheṇa	by compassion like Yours	SB 4.7.29

anugraheṇa	by the mercy of	SB 4.8.13

anugraheṇa	by the mercy of	SB 4.22.46

bhagavat-anugraheṇa	by the special mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.9.3

yat-anugraheṇa	by the mercy of that elephant	SB 8.2.22

anugraheṇa	by the mercy	SB 10.80.43

anugrahītaḥ	shown mercy	SB 10.52.1

anugrāhya	being very merciful	SB 9.8.27

anujagrāha	showed His favor	SB 5.24.22

anujagrāha	showed mercy	CC Madhya 19.120

anya-grāmī	inhabitants from different villages	CC Madhya 7.103

anya grāma	other villages	CC Madhya 9.8

aparigrahaḥ	free from the feeling of possessiveness	BG 6.10

aparigrahaḥ	without being dependent (on the family)	SB 7.15.30

aparigrahaḥ	without accepting any charity from anyone else	SB 9.2.11-13

aparigraheṇa	by nonacceptance	SB 4.22.23

vyagrā api	although zealous	CC Madhya 1.211

nirgranthāḥ apira	of the words nirgranthāḥ api	CC Madhya 24.153

apratigrahaḥ	without accepting charity from others (the kṣatriyas may execute the five other occupational duties prescribed for the brāhmaṇas)	SB 7.11.14

arbhaka-grahāḥ	like evil stars for children	SB 10.6.24

yakṣma-graha-arditaḥ	being oppressed by a disease that brings about gradual destruction	SB 6.6.23

āriṭ-grāme	in the village known as Āriṭ-grāma	CC Madhya 18.3

mat-anugraha-arthaḥ	thinking that to achieve My mercy is the aim of life	SB 5.5.15

anugraha-artham	to show His causeless mercy	SB 6.4.33

anugraha-artham	to show favor	SB 8.24.15

anugraha-arthāya	for the sake of obliging	SB 1.12.16

anugraha-arthāya	for the purpose of giving special mercy	SB 10.10.7

kṛta-āsana-parigrahaḥ	after accepting a sitting place	SB 8.16.3

asat-āgraham	bodily concept of life	SB 3.27.9

asat-grahaiḥ	revealing the cosmic manifestation	SB 4.7.37

asat-graham	an incorrect conception of life	SB 4.29.1a-2a

asat-āgrahaḥ	having unsuitable obstinacy	SB 5.9.6

asat-graha	by the bad philosophy	SB 7.5.3

asat-grahāt	because of accepting the temporary body or bodily relations as real (thinking 'I am this body, and everything belonging to this body is mine')	SB 7.5.5

asat-grāhaḥ	material conception of life	SB 7.5.11

niranugrahaḥ asi	you have no mercy in your heart	SB 5.12.7

asthi-granthi	joints of the bones	CC Antya 14.65-66

aśubha-grahaḥ	an unfavorable, inauspicious planet	SB 5.22.14

panasa-udumbara-aśvattha-plakṣa-nyagrodha-hińgubhiḥ	with panasas (jackfruit trees), udumbaras, aśvatthas, plakṣas, nyagrodhas and trees producing asafoetida	SB 4.6.17

ati-anugraham	an act of extreme kindness	SB 10.38.7

ātma-vinigrahaḥ	self-control	BG 13.8-12

ugrasena-ātmajāt	from the son of Ugrasena	SB 10.3.28

ātmārāmāḥ ca munayaḥ ca nirgranthāḥ ca bhajaya	the ātmārāmas, great sages and nirgranthas (the learned and the fools) are all eligible to engage in the transcendental loving service of the Lord	CC Madhya 24.303

atyāgraha kare	strongly urging to accept the invitation	CC Adi 7.57

augrasenayaḥ	the sons of Ugrasena	SB 9.24.24

augraseninā	by the son of Ugrasena (Kaṃsa)	SB 10.2.3

avagraha	being too much attached	SB 4.7.27

avagraha	scarcity of rain	CC Madhya 10.1

avagrahaḥ	undertaking	SB 3.9.6

avagrahaḥ	misconception	SB 3.25.10

avagrahau	taking the path of	SB 4.27.25

avidyā-granthi	the bondage of ignorance	SB 5.19.20

avyagra	unagitated	SB 10.53.29

avyagra-dhiyaḥ	with undivided attention	SB 10.68.21

avyagraḥ	without agitation	SB 10.52.29

avyagraḥ	free from distraction	SB 11.29.28

bahu-yoga-grantha-sammatam	approved by all yogic processes and their scriptures	SB 5.10.15

bahu-grantha	of many different types of scriptures	CC Madhya 22.118

mahā-baka-grastam	swallowed by the great duck	SB 10.11.49

bāla-vyajana-chatra-agryaiḥ	protected by beautifully decorated umbrellas and the best of cāmaras	SB 8.10.16-18

bāla-grahaḥ	the witch, whose business was to kill small babies	SB 10.6.7

bāla-grahāḥ ca	and those attacking children	SB 10.6.24

bāla-agra	the tip of a hair	CC Madhya 19.141

baladeva-parigrahāḥ	the consorts of Lord Baladeva	SB 10.67.12

śaibya-sugrīva-meghapuṣpa-balāhakāḥ	named Śaibya, Sugrīva, Meghapuṣpa and Balāhaka	SB 10.89.48-49

śaibya-sugrīva-meghapuṣpa-balāhakaiḥ	named Śaibya, Sugrīva, Meghapuṣpa and Balāhaka	SB 10.53.5

bālaka-mārikā-graham	a witch very expert in killing small babies	SB 10.6.8

bhagavat-anugraheṇa	by the special mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.9.3

parihīṇa-bhagavat-anugrahaḥ	being without the favor of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.24.26

bhāgavata-sandarbha-granthera	of the book called Bhāgavata-sandarbha	CC Adi 3.80

agra-bhājaḥ	possessing ends	CC Antya 1.159

anugraha-bhājanaḥ	object of favor	SB 3.4.14

ātmārāmāḥ ca munayaḥ ca nirgranthāḥ ca bhajaya	the ātmārāmas, great sages and nirgranthas (the learned and the fools) are all eligible to engage in the transcendental loving service of the Lord	CC Madhya 24.303

bhakti-grantha	of books on devotional service	CC Madhya 1.33

bhakti-grantha	books on devotional service	CC Madhya 1.42

bhańga-udagrā	being strong enough for breaking	CC Antya 1.155

bharata-agrajaḥ	the elder brother of Mahārāja Bharata	SB 6.8.15

bhāva-grahaṇera	of accepting the mood	CC Adi 4.53

bhāva-grāhī	one who accepts the purpose	CC Antya 10.18

bhavat-anugrahāt	by Your grace	SB 3.25.30

sarva-graha-bhayam-karaḥ	who is fearful to all evil planets	SB 10.6.24

hṛdaya-granthi-bhedakam	mystic yoga, which can loosen the knots of material attachment in the heart	SB 9.12.2

bhoga-sāmagrī	cooking materials	CC Adi 10.25

bhoga-sāmagrī	ingredients for eatables to be offered	CC Madhya 4.58

bhoga-sāmagrī	ingredients for preparing food	CC Antya 2.74

mṛṇāla-agra-bhujaḥ	those who eat the tops of the stems	CC Antya 1.92

agra-bhuk	one who eats before	SB 1.15.11

agra-bhuk	the enjoyer of the first oblations	SB 4.14.28

agra-bhuk	enjoying in spite of your elder brother's being present	SB 9.22.11

bhūta-grāmaḥ	the aggregate of all living entities	BG 8.19

bhūta-grāmam	all the cosmic manifestations	BG 9.8

bhūta-grāmam	the combination of material elements	BG 17.5-6

bhūta-grāmaḥ	the aggregate creations	SB 3.6.8

bhūta-grāma	to other living entities	SB 3.29.24

bhūta-anugraha-kātarāḥ	very much anxious to bestow benedictions upon the fallen conditioned souls	SB 6.5.39

bhūta-grāmeṣu	among all species of life	SB 7.10.20

bhūta-grāma	all the living entities	CC Adi 3.32

mańgala-bhūyiṣṭha-pura-grāma-vraja-ākarāḥ	whose many cities, towns, pasturing grounds and mines became auspicious and very neat and clean	SB summary

sańgrāmajit bṛhatsenaḥ	Sańgrāmajit and Bṛhatsena	SB 10.61.17

anugrahaḥ ca	and false ego or the demigods	SB 7.9.48

anugrahaḥ ca	and the maintainer	SB 10.2.28

bāla-grahāḥ ca	and those attacking children	SB 10.6.24

ātmārāmāḥ ca munayaḥ ca nirgranthāḥ ca bhajaya	the ātmārāmas, great sages and nirgranthas (the learned and the fools) are all eligible to engage in the transcendental loving service of the Lord	CC Madhya 24.303

ātmārāmāḥ ca munayaḥ ca nirgranthāḥ ca bhajaya	the ātmārāmas, great sages and nirgranthas (the learned and the fools) are all eligible to engage in the transcendental loving service of the Lord	CC Madhya 24.303

ātmārāmāḥ ca munayaḥ ca nirgranthāḥ ca bhajaya	the ātmārāmas, great sages and nirgranthas (the learned and the fools) are all eligible to engage in the transcendental loving service of the Lord	CC Madhya 24.303

caitanya-rasa-vigrahaḥ	the form of all transcendental mellows	CC Madhya 17.133

candra-grahaṇa	lunar eclipse	CC Adi 13.20

cāri-lakṣa grantha	400,000 verses	CC Antya 4.231

chala-grahaḥ	the gambling	SB 11.16.31

bāla-vyajana-chatra-agryaiḥ	protected by beautifully decorated umbrellas and the best of cāmaras	SB 8.10.16-18

cit-ānanda kṛṣṇa-vigraha	the transcendental form of Kṛṣṇa, which is completely spiritual	CC Madhya 25.35

su-vyagra-cittāḥ	are busily engaged	SB 10.8.30

agra-dagdhām	which was previously burnt (by the monkey soldier Hanumān)	SB 9.10.16

daṃṣṭra-agra	the tips of the tusks	SB 3.13.40

sva-daṃṣṭra-agreṇa	by the edge of His tusks	SB 3.14.3

daṃṣṭra-agra	on the ends of His tusks	SB 3.18.6

ugra-daṃṣṭrāt	ferocious teeth	SB 7.9.15

agra-daṃṣṭrayā	by the tip of His tusk	SB 3.18.2

agra-daṃṣṭre	on the end of the tusk	SB 5.18.39

ugra-daṃṣṭrīm	Ugradaṃṣṭrī	SB 5.2.23

ugra-daṇḍa	by the very fearful chastisement	SB 7.4.21

ugra-daṇḍaḥ	who would sternly punish	SB 4.5.8

kumbhakarṇa-daśa-grīvau	known as Kumbhakarṇa and the ten-headed Rāvaṇa (in their next birth)	SB 7.10.36

daśa-grīvaḥ	the ten-faced Rāvaṇa	CC Madhya 9.211-212

sāmagrī dekhiyā	seeing these ingredients	CC Antya 10.149

deśa-grāma	villages and towns	CC Madhya 18.220

ye deśa-grāme	in which country or village	CC Antya 3.164

ugra-dhanvā	equipped with furious weapons	SB 1.7.17

ugra-dhanvā	powerful bowman	SB 4.10.8

ugra-dhanvā	bearing the very fearful bow known as Śārńga	SB 6.8.21

ugra-dhanvan	O great warrior Vidura	SB 3.22.21

ugra-dharmāt	from unnecessary religious principles	SB 6.8.16

dhārmika-agra-gaṇya	on the top of the list of religious persons	CC Madhya 16.218

dhiṣṇya-agryam	the transcendental airplane	SB 4.12.29

avyagra-dhiyaḥ	with undivided attention	SB 10.68.21

kugrāma diyā diyā	going through village pathways	CC Antya 6.185

kugrāma diyā diyā	going through village pathways	CC Antya 6.185

anugraha-dṛṣṭi	merciful glance	SB 2.7.28

ugra-dṛṣṭyā	and fierce glance	SB 7.2.3

ugrasena-duhitaraḥ	the daughters of Ugrasena	SB 9.24.25

duḥkha-grāmāt	from all miseries	SB 1.3.29

dui-grantha	of the two scriptures	CC Madhya 6.97

dui grantha	the two books	CC Madhya 11.143

dukūla-agrye	dressed with a dhotī	SB 4.21.17

dūra-grahaṇa	the ability to perceive things far, far away	SB 5.5.35

dūra-grāme	in distant villages	CC Madhya 15.86

durāgrahāṇām	undesirable eagerness	SB 3.5.44

duravagraha	with wicked obstinacies	SB 6.9.36

duravagraha	O stubborn one	SB 10.29.31

duravagrahaḥ	addiction to unwanted things	SB 4.19.35

duravagrahāḥ	unbreakable	SB 10.58.43

duravagrāhya	difficult to attain	SB 7.1.20

durnigraham	difficult to curb	BG 6.35

dvija-agrya	O best of the brāhmaṇas	SB 3.22.11

dvija-āgryatām	the status of being the best of the twice-born	SB 11.23.22

dvija-agryāḥ	O most eminent of brāhmaṇas	SB 12.12.56

dvijān agre	first the brāhmaṇas	SB 9.4.33-35

ei grāme vasi	I reside in this village	CC Madhya 4.28

ei grāme	in this village	CC Madhya 18.173

eka-agram	with one attention	BG 6.11-12

eka-agreṇa	with full attention	BG 18.72

eka-agra	perfect attention	SB 4.24.79

eka-agra-manāḥ	with full attention	SB 4.29.82

eka-agryeṇa	with full attention	SB 5.2.2

eka-agrayā	with full attention	SB 8.17.2-3

eka grāsa	one morsel	CC Madhya 3.76

eka-grāsa	one palmful	CC Madhya 3.94

eka grāma	to one village	CC Madhya 4.11

eka-grāmera	of one village	CC Madhya 4.92

eka grāsī	one morsel	CC Madhya 15.242

eka-grāsa	one small quantity	CC Madhya 15.243

eka eka grāsa	one morsel	CC Antya 6.79

eka eka grāsa	one morsel	CC Antya 6.79

eka grāsa	one morsel	CC Antya 6.80

eka grāsa	one morsel	CC Antya 6.322

ekāgra-manasā	the mind being completely fixed upon the lotus feet of the Lord	SB 7.9.7

ekeka grāme	one village after another	CC Madhya 4.90

gada-agrajaḥ	Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa, the elder brother of Gada	SB 10.41.32

gada-agrajaḥ	Kṛṣṇa, the elder brother of Gada	SB 10.47.40

gada-agrajaḥ	Kṛṣṇa, the elder brother of Gada	SB 10.52.40

gada-agrajaḥ	Lord Kṛṣṇa, the elder brother of Gada	SB 10.59.10

gada-agrajam	Lord Kṛṣṇa, the elder brother of Gada	SB 10.69.26

gadāgraja	of Kṛṣṇa	SB 4.23.12

gadāgraja	O Gadāgraja	SB 10.60.40

gadāgrajaḥ	Lord Kṛṣṇa, the deliver from all evils	SB 2.3.19

gadāgrajaḥ	Kṛṣṇa	SB 10.59.16

gadāgrajaḥ	Lord Kṛṣṇa	SB 10.63.21

gala-grahaṇa-niśceṣṭaḥ	because of Kṛṣṇa's grasping the neck of the demon Tṛṇāvarta, the demon choked and could not do anything	SB 10.7.28

gāńṭhuli-grāme	in the village known as Gāńṭhuli	CC Madhya 18.29

dhārmika-agra-gaṇya	on the top of the list of religious persons	CC Madhya 16.218

gata-vigrahe	without any enemy	SB 3.15.32

ghara-grāma	house and village	CC Antya 3.161

govardhana-grāma	to the village known as Govardhana	CC Madhya 18.17

yakṣma-graha-arditaḥ	being oppressed by a disease that brings about gradual destruction	SB 6.6.23

vipra-graha	brāhmaṇa ghosts	SB 6.8.25

kṛṣṇa-graha	by Kṛṣṇa, who is like a strong influence (like a graha, or planetary influence)	SB 7.4.37

asat-graha	by the bad philosophy	SB 7.5.3

kāma-graha-grastaḥ	being haunted by the ghost of lusty desire	SB 9.19.4

sa-grahā	with the stars	SB 10.6.12

sarva-graha-bhayam-karaḥ	who is fearful to all evil planets	SB 10.6.24

hasta-graha	taking of their hands	SB 10.65.4-6

gūḍha-grahā	which covered the stars	CC Antya 1.136

rasa-grahaḥ	one who has relished the mellow	SB 1.5.19

sat-grahaḥ	devotee of	SB 1.12.25

guṇa-grahaḥ	the power of seeing	SB 2.10.21

guṇa-grahaḥ	and the objects of hearing	SB 2.10.22

rasa-grahaḥ	which perceives taste	SB 3.26.41

aśubha-grahaḥ	an unfavorable, inauspicious planet	SB 5.22.14

śamala-grahaḥ	accepting the sinful activities	SB 5.26.36

sa-grahāḥ	with the planets	SB 7.3.5

asat-grāhaḥ	material conception of life	SB 7.5.11

svatva-grahaḥ	the wife is accepted as being identical with one's self	SB 7.14.11

pārṣṇi-grahāḥ	grasping him from behind	SB 8.2.28

phala-grahāḥ	gainers of the actual result	SB 8.6.22-23

hasta-grāhaḥ	he who accepted my hand	SB 9.18.19

hasta-grāhaḥ	husband	SB 9.18.22

bāla-grahaḥ	the witch, whose business was to kill small babies	SB 10.6.7

arbhaka-grahāḥ	like evil stars for children	SB 10.6.24

bāla-grahāḥ ca	and those attacking children	SB 10.6.24

pārṣṇi-grāhaḥ	as the rear guard	SB 10.66.12-14

chala-grahaḥ	the gambling	SB 11.16.31

navīna-grahaḥ	new ecstatic influence	CC Antya 1.145

asat-grahaiḥ	revealing the cosmic manifestation	SB 4.7.37

surā-grahaiḥ	and the acceptance of ritual cups of wine	SB 11.5.11

asat-graham	an incorrect conception of life	SB 4.29.1a-2a

vitta-graham	as a money-grabbing ghost	SB 5.26.36

sa-grāham	with the crocodile	SB 8.3.33

bālaka-mārikā-graham	a witch very expert in killing small babies	SB 10.6.8

pārṣṇi-grāham	for help	SB 10.57.14

viparyaya-graham	the misidentification	SB 10.77.32

dūra-grahaṇa	the ability to perceive things far, far away	SB 5.5.35

tat-rūpa-grahaṇa-nimittam	the reason why Lord Kṛṣṇa (Keśava) assumed the form of Nṛsiṃha	SB 5.18.7

nāma-grahaṇa	by the chanting of the name	SB 10.6.24

gala-grahaṇa-niśceṣṭaḥ	because of Kṛṣṇa's grasping the neck of the demon Tṛṇāvarta, the demon choked and could not do anything	SB 10.7.28

kaca-grahaṇa	grabbing the hair (of Draupadī)	SB 11.1.2

mṛt-grahaṇa-ādinā	by smearing with earth and so on	SB 11.27.10

candra-grahaṇa	lunar eclipse	CC Adi 13.20

pāṇi-grahaṇa	marriage	CC Adi 15.4

rāma-nāma-grahaṇa	chanting the holy name of Lord Rāmacandra	CC Madhya 9.26

sannyāsa grahaṇa kaila	he also accepted the renounced order of life	CC Madhya 10.104

karena grahaṇa	accepts	CC Madhya 18.131

viṣaya-grahaṇa	accepting sense objects	CC Antya 2.118

koṭi-nāma-grahaṇa	chanting ten million names	CC Antya 3.124

karibe grahaṇa	will accept	CC Antya 7.135

nā kare grahaṇa	he does not accept	CC Antya 8.81

nāma-grahaṇam	chanting the holy name	SB 6.2.14

nāma-grahaṇam	the chanting of the holy name	SB 6.2.33

sakala-grahāṇām	of all the planets	Bs 5.52

tattva-grahaṇāya	for accepting the real purpose of Vedic knowledge	SB 5.11.3

kariye grahaṇe	I chant	CC Antya 7.83

nāma-grahaṇe	in chanting the name	CC Antya 20.36

bhāva-grahaṇera	of accepting the mood	CC Adi 4.53

asat-grahāt	because of accepting the temporary body or bodily relations as real (thinking 'I am this body, and everything belonging to this body is mine')	SB 7.5.5

tat-pāda-grahau	grasping their feet	SB 3.15.35

śakra-pārṣṇi-grāheṇa	who was helping Lord Indra	SB 6.18.23

pārṣṇi-grāheṇa	attacking from the rear	SB 7.2.6

guṇa-grāhī	accepting good qualities	CC Adi 8.62

bhāva-grāhī	one who accepts the purpose	CC Antya 10.18

tattva-grāma	the sum total of the creative elements	SB 1.3.10

bhūta-grāma	to other living entities	SB 3.29.24

mańgala-bhūyiṣṭha-pura-grāma-vraja-ākarāḥ	whose many cities, towns, pasturing grounds and mines became auspicious and very neat and clean	SB summary

pura-grāma-vraja-ādiṣu	in all the towns, villages and pasturing grounds	SB 10.4.31

pura-grāma-vraja-ādiṣu	in towns, cities and villages here and there	SB 10.6.2

kalāpa-grāma	in the village Kalāpa (nearby Badarikāśrama)	SB 10.87.7

śambhala-grāma	in the village Śambhala	SB 12.2.18

bhūta-grāma	all the living entities	CC Adi 3.32

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.80

guṇa-grāma	very much qualified	CC Adi 16.31

guṇa-grāma	glories	CC Adi 17.69

kulīna-grāma-vāsi	the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 1.131

kuliyā-grāma	to the place known as Kuliyā	CC Madhya 1.151

rāma-keli grāma	to the village of the name Rāmakeli	CC Madhya 1.166

nānā-grāma haite	from various villages	CC Madhya 3.157

eka grāma	to one village	CC Madhya 4.11

yājapura-grāma	the village of Yājapura-grāma	CC Madhya 5.3

nija-grāma	his own village	CC Madhya 7.101

anya grāma	other villages	CC Madhya 9.8

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 10.89

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	residents of the village known as Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 11.91

puruṣottama-grāma	the place known as Puruṣottama, Jagannātha Purī	CC Madhya 14.232

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 16.16-17

sei grāma haite	from the village known as Pichaldā	CC Madhya 16.200

rāmakeli-grāma	to the village of Rāmakeli	CC Madhya 16.260

yei grāma	which villages	CC Madhya 17.47

govardhana-grāma	to the village known as Govardhana	CC Madhya 18.17

yamunā-pāre grāma	his residence on the other side of the Yamunā	CC Madhya 18.82

deśa-grāma	villages and towns	CC Madhya 18.220

saundarya-ādi-guṇa-grāma	the transcendental qualities, headed by beauty	CC Madhya 21.104

ghara-grāma	house and village	CC Antya 3.161

nānā-grāma	various villages	CC Antya 6.91

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 12.9

bhūta-grāmaḥ	the aggregate of all living entities	BG 8.19

bhūta-grāmaḥ	the aggregate creations	SB 3.6.8

indriya-grāmaḥ	his senses	SB 6.2.40

indriya-grāmaḥ	the group of senses	SB 9.19.17

indriya-grāmaḥ	the senses	SB 10.4.38

indriya-grāmaḥ	all the senses	SB 11.7.9

indriya-grāmaḥ	the group of senses	CC Antya 2.119

indriya-grāmam	the full set of senses	BG 6.24

bhūta-grāmam	all the cosmic manifestations	BG 9.8

indriya-grāmam	all the senses	BG 12.3-4

bhūta-grāmam	the combination of material elements	BG 17.5-6

kalāpa-grāmam	the place named Kalāpa-grāma	SB 9.12.6

kalāpa-grāmam	the village known as Kalāpa	SB 9.22.11

indriya-grāmam	the senses	SB 10.3.33

duḥkha-grāmāt	from all miseries	SB 1.3.29

kalāpa-grāme	in the village Kalāpa	SB 12.2.37

kuliyā-grāme	in that village known as Kuliyā-grāma	CC Madhya 1.153

rāmakeli-grāme	to this village named Rāmakeli	CC Madhya 1.213

ei grāme vasi	I reside in this village	CC Madhya 4.28

ekeka grāme	one village after another	CC Madhya 4.90

nija-grāme	to his own village	CC Madhya 7.100

yei grāme	in whatever village	CC Madhya 7.106

yei grāme	to whichever village	CC Madhya 7.120

yei grāme	in any village	CC Madhya 7.131-132

sei grāme	in that village	CC Madhya 9.285

dūra-grāme	in distant villages	CC Madhya 15.86

prati-grāme	in each village	CC Madhya 16.152

rāmakeli-grāme	in the village known as Rāmakeli	CC Madhya 16.211

ye-grāme	in whatever village	CC Madhya 17.58

āriṭ-grāme	in the village known as Āriṭ-grāma	CC Madhya 18.3

sei grāme	in that village	CC Madhya 18.26

gāńṭhuli-grāme	in the village known as Gāńṭhuli	CC Madhya 18.29

sei grāme	to that village	CC Madhya 18.36

ei grāme	in this village	CC Madhya 18.173

rāmakeli-grāme	in Rāmakeli	CC Madhya 19.3

āḍāila-grāme	in the village known as Āḍāila	CC Madhya 19.61

vārāṇasī-grāme	in the city of Vārāṇasī	CC Madhya 25.173

sei grāme	in that village	CC Antya 1.40

pāṇihāṭi grāme	to the village called Pāṇihāṭi	CC Antya 2.54

ye deśa-grāme	in which country or village	CC Antya 3.164

sei grāme	in the village	CC Antya 3.167

pānihāṭi-grāme	in the village known as Pānihāṭi	CC Antya 6.43

pāṭhāilā grāme	he sent to the nearby village	CC Antya 6.52

kulīna-grāmera	of the village of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.82

eka-grāmera	of one village	CC Madhya 4.92

kulīna-grāmera	of the village known as Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 13.44

kulīna-grāmera	of the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 10.123

bhūta-grāmeṣu	among all species of life	SB 7.10.20

kuliyā-grāmete	in that place known as Kuliyā-grāma	CC Madhya 1.152

āmāra grāmete	in My village	CC Madhya 4.28

kulīna-grāmī jana	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.48

anya-grāmī	inhabitants from different villages	CC Madhya 7.103

kulīna-grāmī	the inhabitants of the village known as Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 14.248

kulīna-grāmī	the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 16.49

kulīna-grāmī	one of the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 16.69

kulīna-grāmī	residents of the village known as Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 1.15

kulīna-grāmī	the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 10.12

kulīna-grāmī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 10.140-141

kulīna-grāmīra	the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.83

kulīna-grāmīre	unto the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 15.98

ajuṣṭa-grāmya-viṣayau	for sex life and to beget a child like Me	SB 10.3.39

saba grāmya-lokera	of all the people of the village	CC Madhya 18.6

bahu-yoga-grantha-sammatam	approved by all yogic processes and their scriptures	SB 5.10.15

bhakti-grantha	of books on devotional service	CC Madhya 1.33

bhakti-grantha	books on devotional service	CC Madhya 1.42

dui-grantha	of the two scriptures	CC Madhya 6.97

dui grantha	the two books	CC Madhya 11.143

bahu-grantha	of many different types of scriptures	CC Madhya 22.118

cāri-lakṣa grantha	400,000 verses	CC Antya 4.231

kaḍacā-granthana	compiling the notebooks	CC Antya 14.9

koṭi-granthe	in millions of books	CC Madhya 17.231

sva-granthe	in his own book	CC Madhya 19.118

nija-granthe	in his own book	CC Madhya 24.347

koṭi-granthe	in millions of books	CC Madhya 25.263

pūrva-granthe	in the previous chapter	CC Antya 1.10

nija-granthe	in his own book	CC Antya 16.86

sva-granthe	in his book	CC Antya 17.71

bhāgavata-sandarbha-granthera	of the book called Bhāgavata-sandarbha	CC Adi 3.80

se granthera	of that scripture	CC Adi 17.311

rasāmṛta-sindhu-granthera	of the book known as Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu	CC Madhya 19.133

hṛdaya-granthi	the knot in the heart	SB 5.5.14

hṛdaya-granthi	the knot of false conceptions within the heart	SB 5.10.15

avidyā-granthi	the bondage of ignorance	SB 5.19.20

hṛdaya-granthi-bhedakam	mystic yoga, which can loosen the knots of material attachment in the heart	SB 9.12.2

asthi-granthi	joints of the bones	CC Antya 14.65-66

pīyūṣa-granthi	pīyūṣagranthi	CC Antya 18.106

hṛdaya-granthiḥ	the knot in the heart	SB 5.5.9

hṛdaya-granthim	the knot of the hearts	SB 5.5.8

hṛdaya-granthim	the knot within the heart	SB 5.25.8

hṛdaya-granthim	the knot of the heart (false identification with the material body)	SB 11.3.47

hṛdaya-granthīnām	of those whose knots within the heart	SB 5.9.20

hṛdaya-granthiṣu	which (desire for material enjoyment) is in the cores of the hearts of all conditioned souls	SB 7.10.3

eka grāsa	one morsel	CC Madhya 3.76

pañca-grāsa	five morsels	CC Madhya 3.76

eka-grāsa	one palmful	CC Madhya 3.94

eka-grāsa	one small quantity	CC Madhya 15.243

mādhukarī grāsa	and practicing the mādhukarī system	CC Madhya 20.92

eka eka grāsa	one morsel	CC Antya 6.79

eka grāsa	one morsel	CC Antya 6.80

eka grāsa	one morsel	CC Antya 6.322

eka grāsī	one morsel	CC Madhya 15.242

āmi jarā-grasta	I am invalid because of old age	CC Antya 1.11

nānā-roga-grasta	infected with so many diseases	CC Antya 20.94

sarpa-grastaḥ	one who is bitten by the snake	SB 1.13.46

mṛtyu-grastaḥ	although in imminent danger of death	SB 8.6.21

karma-grastaḥ	one who is under the laws of karma	SB 8.24.2-3

kāma-graha-grastaḥ	being haunted by the ghost of lusty desire	SB 9.19.4

kāliya-grastaḥ	seized by Kāliya	SB 10.17.17

vṛtra-grastam	swallowed by Vṛtrāsura	SB 6.12.30

yakṣma-grastām	infected with tuberculosis	SB 6.13.12-13

kāla-grastam	devoured by time	SB 7.8.42

jarā-grastam	very old and invalid	SB 9.3.20

varuṇa-grastam	having been attacked with dropsy by Varuṇa	SB 9.7.17

mahā-baka-grastam	swallowed by the great duck	SB 10.11.49

yoga-grathitāni	bearing the complete meaning of mystic yoga	SB 5.10.18

su-grīva	a nice neck	SB 8.8.41-46

siṃha-grīva	having the neck of a lion	CC Adi 3.30

maṇi-grīvaḥ	His neck decorated with the Kaustubha jewel	SB 4.30.5

kakut-grīvaḥ	their humps moving with their necks	SB 10.13.30

daśa-grīvaḥ	the ten-faced Rāvaṇa	CC Madhya 9.211-212

kaustubha-ābharaṇa-grīvam	His neck is decorated by the Kaustubha jewel	SB 4.8.48

kumbhakarṇa-daśa-grīvau	known as Kumbhakarṇa and the ten-headed Rāvaṇa (in their next birth)	SB 7.10.36

gūḍha-grahā	which covered the stars	CC Antya 1.136

guṇa-grahaḥ	the power of seeing	SB 2.10.21

guṇa-grahaḥ	and the objects of hearing	SB 2.10.22

guṇa-sarga-sańgrahaḥ	combination of different material elements	SB 4.17.30

guṇa-vigrahaḥ	the incarnation of the material qualities	SB 5.17.22-23

guṇa-vigrahaḥ	the universe, which is a result of the modes of nature	SB 6.4.48

tat-guṇa-agrahaḥ	are not touched by the material qualities	SB 10.3.14

guṇa-grāhī	accepting good qualities	CC Adi 8.62

guṇa-grāma	very much qualified	CC Adi 16.31

guṇa-grāma	glories	CC Adi 17.69

saundarya-ādi-guṇa-grāma	the transcendental qualities, headed by beauty	CC Madhya 21.104

vyagra ha-ilā	became very much agitated	CC Antya 14.35

vyagra haile	if becoming agitated	CC Madhya 3.214

nānā-grāma haite	from various villages	CC Madhya 3.157

sei grāma haite	from the village known as Pichaldā	CC Madhya 16.200

vyagra hañā	with anxiety	CC Madhya 14.50

nirgrantha hañā	becoming indifferent to the mystic yoga process	CC Madhya 24.167

nirgranthāḥ hañā	being liberated saintly persons	CC Madhya 24.222

nirgrantha hañā	becoming nirgrantha	CC Madhya 24.226

hareḥ anugrahāt	by the mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 10.11.24

hasta-grāhaḥ	he who accepted my hand	SB 9.18.19

hasta-grāhaḥ	husband	SB 9.18.22

hasta-agrāhye	when the destination is out of the reach of His hands	SB 10.8.30

agra-hastā	in her hand	SB 10.60.8

hasta-graha	taking of their hands	SB 10.65.4-6

hayagrīva	Hayagrīva (horse-headed)	SB 7.2.4-5

hayagrīvaḥ	Hayagrīva	SB 6.6.29-31

hayagrīvaḥ	Hayagrīva	SB 6.10.19-22

hayagrīvaḥ	Hayagrīva	SB 8.10.19-24

hayagrīvaḥ	the great demon named Hayagrīva	SB 8.24.8

hayagrīvaḥ	Lord Hayagrīva	CC Madhya 20.242

hayagrīvam	by the name Hayagrīva	SB 8.24.57

hayagrīvasya	of Hayagrīva	SB 8.24.9

panasa-udumbara-aśvattha-plakṣa-nyagrodha-hińgubhiḥ	with panasas (jackfruit trees), udumbaras, aśvatthas, plakṣas, nyagrodhas and trees producing asafoetida	SB 4.6.17

hṛdaya-granthim	the knot of the hearts	SB 5.5.8

hṛdaya-granthiḥ	the knot in the heart	SB 5.5.9

hṛdaya-granthi	the knot in the heart	SB 5.5.14

vyagra-hṛdayā	whose mind was agitated	SB 5.8.4

hṛdaya-granthīnām	of those whose knots within the heart	SB 5.9.20

hṛdaya-granthi	the knot of false conceptions within the heart	SB 5.10.15

hṛdaya-granthim	the knot within the heart	SB 5.25.8

hṛdaya-granthiṣu	which (desire for material enjoyment) is in the cores of the hearts of all conditioned souls	SB 7.10.3

hṛdaya-granthi-bhedakam	mystic yoga, which can loosen the knots of material attachment in the heart	SB 9.12.2

hṛdaya-granthim	the knot of the heart (false identification with the material body)	SB 11.3.47

anugraha-īkṣitam	due to the merciful glance	SB 10.15.52

vyagra ha-ilā	became very much agitated	CC Antya 14.35

indra-senā-agram	the front of Indra's army	SB 6.10.19-22

indriya-grāmam	the full set of senses	BG 6.24

indriya-grāmam	all the senses	BG 12.3-4

indriya-sańgrahaḥ	five senses and the mind	SB 4.28.57

indriya-grāmaḥ	his senses	SB 6.2.40

indriya-grāmaḥ	the group of senses	SB 9.19.17

indriya-grāmam	the senses	SB 10.3.33

indriya-grāmaḥ	the senses	SB 10.4.38

indriya-grāmaḥ	all the senses	SB 11.7.9

indriya-grāmaḥ	the group of senses	CC Antya 2.119

anugraha-iṣitam	to bestow benediction	SB 1.10.27

agra-ja	of His elder brother	SB 10.57.22

jāgradbhiḥ	and waking consciousness	SB 10.47.31

jagrāha	took up	SB 1.10.17

jagrāha	caught hold of	SB 3.14.30

jagrāha	caught	SB 3.19.11

jagrāha	took up	SB 3.19.13

jagrāha	kept	SB 4.1.5

jagrāha	assumed the responsibility for	SB 6.9.6

jagrāha	accepted	SB 6.9.7

jagrāha	caught	SB 6.11.9

jagrāha	brought under her control	SB 6.18.27-28

jagrāha	grasped	SB 8.7.4

jagrāha	took	SB 8.19.28

jagrāha	seized	SB 9.2.5-6

jagrāha	took	SB 10.1.30

jagrāha	took hold of	SB 10.33.10

jagrāha	He seized	SB 10.37.30

jagrāha	He seized	SB 10.50.30

jagrāsa	swallowed	SB 6.12.27-29

jāgrat	waking	SB 7.15.61

jāgrat	being awake	SB 11.13.27

jāgrat	waking condition	SB 12.4.20-21

jāgrat	within waking consciousness	SB 12.7.19

jāgrataḥ	or one who keeps night watch too much	BG 6.16

jāgrataḥ	of one who keeps awake	CC Antya 8.67-68

jāgrati	are awake	BG 2.69

jāgrati	become manifest	SB 4.31.16

jāgrati	are awakened	SB 6.6.16

agra-jāḥ	born before you	SB 2.6.13-16

agra-jāḥ	born prior to you	SB 2.7.41

agra-jaḥ	elder	SB 4.28.11

lakṣmaṇa-agra-jaḥ	Lord Śrī Rāmacandra, the elder brother of Lakṣmaṇa	SB 5.19.7

sa-agra-jaḥ	together with His elder brother, Balarāma	SB 10.15.41

agra-jaḥ	His elder brother (Lord Balarāma)	SB 10.38.23

agra-jaḥ	Your elder brother	SB 10.41.12

agra-jaḥ	His elder brother, Lord Balarāma	SB 10.41.52

agra-jaḥ	His elder brother	SB 10.42.13

agra-jaḥ	His elder brother	SB 10.43.17

agra-jaḥ	elder brother	SB 10.43.30

agra-jaḥ	His elder brother, Lord Balarāma	SB 10.45.2

agra-jaḥ	the first-born	SB 10.52.22

agra-jaḥ	My elder brother	SB 10.57.38-39

agra-jaḥ	older brother	SB 10.60.18

agra-jaḥ	an elder brother	SB 10.80.25-26

agra-jam	his elder brother (King Dhṛtarāṣṭra)	SB 3.20.2

lakṣmaṇa-agra-jam	the elder brother of Lakṣmaṇa	SB 5.19.1

agra-jam	to His elder brother, Lord Balarāma	SB 10.15.4

agra-jān	the elder brothers	SB 4.22.6

jana-sańgrahaḥ	the enlightenment of the people in general	SB 10.84.15

kulīna-grāmī jana	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.48

jarā-grastam	very old and invalid	SB 9.3.20

āmi jarā-grasta	I am invalid because of old age	CC Antya 1.11

agra-jasya	of the elder brother	SB 6.11.15

sa-agra-jātam	with his elder brother, Śrī Sanātana Gosvāmī	CC Antya 2.1

sa-agra-jātam	with his elder brother, Śrī Sanātana Gosvāmī	CC Antya 3.1

ugra-jāteḥ	who am born in an asuric family	SB 7.9.8

agra-jāya	to His elder brother (Lord Balarāma)	SB 10.34.32

jihvā-agre	on the tip of the tongue	SB 3.33.7

jihvā-agre	on the tongue	CC Madhya 11.192

jihvā-agre	on the tongue	CC Madhya 19.72

jihvā-agre	on the tip of the tongue	CC Antya 16.27

jñāna-vigraham	the embodiment of knowledge	SB 10.40.6

kaca-grahaṇa	grabbing the hair (of Draupadī)	SB 11.1.2

kaḍacā-granthana	compiling the notebooks	CC Antya 14.9

sannyāsa grahaṇa kaila	he also accepted the renounced order of life	CC Madhya 10.104

kakut-grīvaḥ	their humps moving with their necks	SB 10.13.30

kāla-grastam	devoured by time	SB 7.8.42

kalāpa-grāmam	the place named Kalāpa-grāma	SB 9.12.6

kalāpa-grāmam	the village known as Kalāpa	SB 9.22.11

kalāpa-grāma	in the village Kalāpa (nearby Badarikāśrama)	SB 10.87.7

kalāpa-grāme	in the village Kalāpa	SB 12.2.37

kāliya-grastaḥ	seized by Kāliya	SB 10.17.17

kāma-graha-grastaḥ	being haunted by the ghost of lusty desire	SB 9.19.4

kańka-nyagrodhaka-ādayaḥ	Kańka, Nyagrodhaka and the others	SB 10.44.40

kapittha-agre	on the top of a kapittha tree	SB 10.11.43

kara-agrāt	from the hand	SB 8.12.23

āgraha kene kara	why are you eager	CC Antya 11.24

sarva-graha-bhayam-karaḥ	who is fearful to all evil planets	SB 10.6.24

kāraṇa-vigrahāya	to one whose body emanates from the Supreme Person, the cause of all causes	SB 5.12.1

atyāgraha kare	strongly urging to accept the invitation	CC Adi 7.57

pratigraha nāhi kare	he did not accept charity from anyone	CC Adi 10.50

nā kare grahaṇa	he does not accept	CC Antya 8.81

karena grahaṇa	accepts	CC Madhya 18.131

āgraha kari'	with great eagerness	CC Antya 8.13

karibe grahaṇa	will accept	CC Antya 7.135

āgraha karila	expressed their eagerness	CC Madhya 25.162

āgraha karila	expressed his ardent desire	CC Antya 5.110

āgraha kariñā	showing great eagerness	CC Madhya 1.124

āgraha kariya	with great eagerness	CC Madhya 9.306

āgraha kariyā	with great eagerness	CC Madhya 25.26

sańgraha kariyā	collecting	CC Madhya 25.215

sāmagrī kariyā	making all arrangements	CC Antya 2.46

kariyā āgraha	with great eagerness	CC Antya 6.294

āgraha kariyā	with great eagerness	CC Antya 8.13

āgraha kariyā	with eagerness	CC Antya 8.14

āgraha kariyā	with great eagerness	CC Antya 8.17

āgraha kariyā	with great attention	CC Antya 10.38

āgraha kariyā	with great attention	CC Antya 11.86

āgraha kariyā	with great eagerness	CC Antya 12.136

kariye grahaṇe	I chant	CC Antya 7.83

karma-grastaḥ	one who is under the laws of karma	SB 8.24.2-3

ugra-karmāṇaḥ	engaged in painful activities	BG 16.9

karṇa-agraṇyaḥ	those headed by Karna	SB 10.68.7

bhūta-anugraha-kātarāḥ	very much anxious to bestow benedictions upon the fallen conditioned souls	SB 6.5.39

anugraha-kātaram	eager to show mercy	CC Antya 10.1

kaustubha-ābharaṇa-grīvam	His neck is decorated by the Kaustubha jewel	SB 4.8.48

kaviḥ nyagrodhaḥ	Kavi and Nyagrodha	SB 10.90.33-34

rāma-keli grāma	to the village of the name Rāmakeli	CC Madhya 1.166

āgraha kene kara	why are you eager	CC Antya 11.24

keśa-agra	from the tip of a hair	CC Madhya 19.139

keśa-agra	of the tip of a hair	CC Madhya 19.140

khala-nigraheṇa	by killing one disturbing demon	SB 6.13.8-9

koṭi-granthe	in millions of books	CC Madhya 17.231

koṭi-granthe	in millions of books	CC Madhya 25.263

koṭi-nāma-grahaṇa	chanting ten million names	CC Antya 3.124

kṛṣṇa-graha	by Kṛṣṇa, who is like a strong influence (like a graha, or planetary influence)	SB 7.4.37

kṛṣṇa-rāma-ugrasena-ādyaiḥ	by Kṛṣṇa, Balarāma, Ugrasena and the others	SB 10.84.59

kṛṣṇa-vigraha	the form of Lord Kṛṣṇa	CC Adi 5.14

cit-ānanda kṛṣṇa-vigraha	the transcendental form of Kṛṣṇa, which is completely spiritual	CC Madhya 25.35

kṛṣṇera vigraha	the form of Lord Kṛṣṇa	CC Antya 6.294

kṛta-anugraha	manifested by His grace	SB 4.7.24

kṛta-āsana-parigrahaḥ	after accepting a sitting place	SB 8.16.3

kṛta-vigrahaḥ	battling	SB 10.60.35

anugrahaḥ kṛtaḥ	this was a great favor done by him to you	SB 10.10.40

kugrāma diyā diyā	going through village pathways	CC Antya 6.185

kula-agryān	most of all the families (the brāhmaṇas)	SB 1.16.21

kulīna-grāmī jana	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.48

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.80

kulīna-grāmera	of the village of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.82

kulīna-grāmīra	the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.83

kulīna-grāma-vāsi	the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 1.131

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 10.89

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	residents of the village known as Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 11.91

kulīna-grāmera	of the village known as Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 13.44

kulīna-grāmī	the inhabitants of the village known as Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 14.248

kulīna-grāmīre	unto the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 15.98

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 16.16-17

kulīna-grāmī	the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 16.49

kulīna-grāmī	one of the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 16.69

kulīna-grāmī	residents of the village known as Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 1.15

kulīna-grāmī	the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 10.12

kulīna-grāmera	of the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 10.123

kulīna-grāmī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 10.140-141

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 12.9

kuliyā-grāma	to the place known as Kuliyā	CC Madhya 1.151

kuliyā-grāmete	in that place known as Kuliyā-grāma	CC Madhya 1.152

kuliyā-grāme	in that village known as Kuliyā-grāma	CC Madhya 1.153

kumbhakarṇa-daśa-grīvau	known as Kumbhakarṇa and the ten-headed Rāvaṇa (in their next birth)	SB 7.10.36

kumuda-agrāt	from the top of Kumuda Mountain	SB 5.16.24

kuśāgraḥ	Kuśāgra	SB 9.22.7

cāri-lakṣa grantha	400,000 verses	CC Antya 4.231

śālagrāma-lakṣaṇa	characteristics of the śālagrāma-śilā	CC Madhya 24.335

lakṣmaṇa-agra-jam	the elder brother of Lakṣmaṇa	SB 5.19.1

lakṣmaṇa-agra-jaḥ	Lord Śrī Rāmacandra, the elder brother of Lakṣmaṇa	SB 5.19.7

ugra-locanam	having powerful eyes	SB 6.9.13-17

loka-sańgraham	the people in general	BG 3.20

loka-sańgraham	the people in general	BG 3.25

loka-sańgrahaḥ	benefit for the people in general	SB 10.78.31-32

loka-sańgraham	to instruct the people in general	SB 10.80.30

loka-sańgraham	for the benefit of the general populace	SB 10.89.59

saba grāmya-lokera	of all the people of the village	CC Madhya 18.6

mādhukarī grāsa	and practicing the mādhukarī system	CC Madhya 20.92

mahā-baka-grastam	swallowed by the great duck	SB 10.11.49

mahā-āgraha	great eagerness	CC Madhya 12.55

mahat-anugraham	the mercy of the Lord	SB 3.31.15

mahat-anugrahaḥ	compassion by the Supreme	SB 7.9.42

mahat-tama-agraṇyaḥ	the best of the saintly persons (Yudhiṣṭhira)	SB 7.11.1

eka-agra-manāḥ	with full attention	SB 4.29.82

manaḥ-agrayānam	more quick than the mind, inconceivable to mental speculation	SB 8.5.26

manaḥ-nigrahaḥ	the subduing of the mind	SB 11.23.45

manaḥ-nigraha	by the attempt to subdue the mind	SB 11.29.2

ekāgra-manasā	the mind being completely fixed upon the lotus feet of the Lord	SB 7.9.7

mańgala-bhūyiṣṭha-pura-grāma-vraja-ākarāḥ	whose many cities, towns, pasturing grounds and mines became auspicious and very neat and clean	SB summary

maṇi-grīvaḥ	His neck decorated with the Kaustubha jewel	SB 4.30.5

maṇigrīvau	the other was Maṇigrīva	SB 10.9.23

maṇigrīvau	and Maṇigrīva	SB 10.10.23

mārga-agra	the ultimate goal	SB 3.25.6

bālaka-mārikā-graham	a witch very expert in killing small babies	SB 10.6.8

mat-anugrahāya	just to show me favor	BG 11.1

mat-anugraha-arthaḥ	thinking that to achieve My mercy is the aim of life	SB 5.5.15

mat-anugrahaḥ	should be considered to have received My special mercy	SB 8.22.26

mat-anugrahāt	by my special favor	SB 10.10.20-22

mat-anugrahasya	which has shown mercy to me	SB 10.14.2

mat-parigraham	My own family	SB 10.25.18

śaibya-sugrīva-meghapuṣpa-balāhakaiḥ	named Śaibya, Sugrīva, Meghapuṣpa and Balāhaka	SB 10.53.5

śaibya-sugrīva-meghapuṣpa-balāhakāḥ	named Śaibya, Sugrīva, Meghapuṣpa and Balāhaka	SB 10.89.48-49

sāmagrī-milane	by mixing with other ingredients	CC Madhya 23.47

mṛṇāla-agra-bhujaḥ	those who eat the tops of the stems	CC Antya 1.92

mṛt-grahaṇa-ādinā	by smearing with earth and so on	SB 11.27.10

mṛtyu-grastaḥ	although in imminent danger of death	SB 8.6.21

mukta-vigrahe	free from anger	SB 4.11.29

mukuṭa-agra	of the tops of the helmets	CC Madhya 21.72

saptagrāma-mulukera	of the place known as Saptagrāma	CC Antya 6.17

ātmārāmāḥ ca munayaḥ ca nirgranthāḥ ca bhajaya	the ātmārāmas, great sages and nirgranthas (the learned and the fools) are all eligible to engage in the transcendental loving service of the Lord	CC Madhya 24.303

sańgrāma-mūrdhani	in the midst of battle	SB 1.15.30

nā kare grahaṇa	he does not accept	CC Antya 8.81

pratigraha nāhi kare	he did not accept charity from anyone	CC Adi 10.50

nakha-agrāt	the tips of whose nails	SB 7.9.15

nāma-grahaṇam	chanting the holy name	SB 6.2.14

nāma-grahaṇam	the chanting of the holy name	SB 6.2.33

nāma-grahaṇa	by the chanting of the name	SB 10.6.24

rāma-nāma-grahaṇa	chanting the holy name of Lord Rāmacandra	CC Madhya 9.26

koṭi-nāma-grahaṇa	chanting ten million names	CC Antya 3.124

nāma-grahaṇe	in chanting the name	CC Antya 20.36

nānā-grāma haite	from various villages	CC Madhya 3.157

nānā-grāma	various villages	CC Antya 6.91

nānā-roga-grasta	infected with so many diseases	CC Antya 20.94

nandigrāmāt	from His residence, known as Nandigrāma	SB 9.10.35-38

sva-nāsā-agra	the tip of one's nose	SB 3.28.12

nāsa-agraḥ	the tip of his nose	SB 4.14.44

nāsa-agra	the tip of the nose	SB 7.15.32-33

sva-nāsa-agra	on the tip of one's own nose	SB 11.14.32-33

navīna-grahaḥ	new ecstatic influence	CC Antya 1.145

nigraha-ādīni	controlling, etc.	SB 1.3.22

nigraha	in destruction	SB 7.2.39

manaḥ-nigraha	by the attempt to subdue the mind	SB 11.29.2

nigraha-ādi	repulses to the opposite party	CC Madhya 6.177

nigrahaḥ	repression	BG 3.33

nigrahaḥ	subduing	SB 1.17.10-11

nigrahaḥ	the subduing	SB 10.50.29

manaḥ-nigrahaḥ	the subduing of the mind	SB 11.23.45

nigraham	subduing	BG 6.34

nigraham	punishment	SB 8.22.21

nigraham	punishment	SB 10.16.59

nigrahaṇāya	to subdue	SB 10.70.27

nigrahāya	for the purpose of subduing	SB 10.14.20

nigrahāya	for the subjugation	SB 10.16.33

nigrahāya	for the chastisement	SB 10.27.5

nigrahāya	for the punishment	SB 10.84.18

nigrahāya	for the subduing	SB 10.90.44

khala-nigraheṇa	by killing one disturbing demon	SB 6.13.8-9

nigrahera	of chastisement	CC Antya 8.32

nigrahītā	molester	SB 1.12.26

agra-nīḥ	coming forward	SB 10.37.1-2

nija-grāme	to his own village	CC Madhya 7.100

nija-grāma	his own village	CC Madhya 7.101

nija-granthe	in his own book	CC Madhya 24.347

nija-agrete	in front of himself	CC Antya 11.53

nija-granthe	in his own book	CC Antya 16.86

nijagrāha	sufficiently punished	SB 1.16.4

nijagrāha	sufficiently punished	SB 1.16.5

tat-rūpa-grahaṇa-nimittam	the reason why Lord Kṛṣṇa (Keśava) assumed the form of Nṛsiṃha	SB 5.18.7

niranugrahaḥ	without mercy	SB 4.26.5

niranugrahaḥ asi	you have no mercy in your heart	SB 5.12.7

niranugrahe	the merciless	SB 10.38.41

nirgrantha-śabde	by the word nirgrantha	CC Madhya 24.16

nirgrantha	called nirgrantha	CC Madhya 24.17

nirgrantha	nirgrantha	CC Madhya 24.162

nirgrantha hañā	becoming indifferent to the mystic yoga process	CC Madhya 24.167

nirgrantha	without education	CC Madhya 24.187

nirgrantha	down to the illiterate	CC Madhya 24.203

nirgrantha	foolish, uneducated	CC Madhya 24.204

nirgrantha hañā	becoming nirgrantha	CC Madhya 24.226

nirgrantha-śabde	by the word nirgrantha	CC Madhya 24.227

nirgrantha	nirgrantha	CC Madhya 24.293

nirgranthāḥ	freed from all bondage	SB 1.7.10

nirgranthāḥ	without interest in any material desire	CC Madhya 6.186

nirgranthāḥ	without interest in any material desire	CC Madhya 17.140

nirgranthāḥ	without interest in any material desire	CC Madhya 24.5

nirgranthāḥ	nirgranthāḥ	CC Madhya 24.147

nirgranthāḥ apira	of the words nirgranthāḥ api	CC Madhya 24.153

nirgranthāḥ hañā	being liberated saintly persons	CC Madhya 24.222

nirgranthāḥ	the word nirgranthāḥ	CC Madhya 24.302

ātmārāmāḥ ca munayaḥ ca nirgranthāḥ ca bhajaya	the ātmārāmas, great sages and nirgranthas (the learned and the fools) are all eligible to engage in the transcendental loving service of the Lord	CC Madhya 24.303

nirgranthāḥ	without interest in any material desire	CC Madhya 25.159

nirgranthe	by the word nirgrantha	CC Madhya 24.175

nirvyagraḥ	free from agitation	SB 10.81.29-32

gala-grahaṇa-niśceṣṭaḥ	because of Kṛṣṇa's grasping the neck of the demon Tṛṇāvarta, the demon choked and could not do anything	SB 10.7.28

niṣparigrahāḥ	free from greed	SB 11.26.27

nistriṃśa-agra-āhataḥ	because of being cut by the tip of the sword	SB 9.2.7

nṛ-turańga-vigrahaḥ	assuming the form of half-horse, half-man	SB 5.18.6

agre nṛtya	dancing before the Deity	CC Madhya 22.122

panasa-udumbara-aśvattha-plakṣa-nyagrodha-hińgubhiḥ	with panasas (jackfruit trees), udumbaras, aśvatthas, plakṣas, nyagrodhas and trees producing asafoetida	SB 4.6.17

nyagrodha	O nyagrodha(banyan tree)	SB 10.30.5

nyāgrodha-potam	a young banyan tree	SB 12.9.20

nyagrodha-parimaṇḍala	nyagrodha-parimaṇḍala	CC Adi 3.43

nyagrodha-parimaṇḍala	nyagrodha-parimaṇḍala	CC Adi 3.43

nyagrodhāḥ	and the banyan tree	SB 5.16.12

nyagrodhaḥ	Nyagrodha	SB 9.24.24

kaviḥ nyagrodhaḥ	Kavi and Nyagrodha	SB 10.90.33-34

kańka-nyagrodhaka-ādayaḥ	Kańka, Nyagrodhaka and the others	SB 10.44.40

tat-pāda-grahau	grasping their feet	SB 3.15.35

pāka-sāmagrī ānaha	please bring everything necessary for cooking	CC Antya 2.55

pāka-sāmagrī ānaha	bring all cooking ingredients	CC Antya 2.58

pākera sāmagrī	the ingredients for cooking	CC Madhya 9.182

valī-palita-vigrahaḥ	whose body had loose skin and white hair	SB 9.3.14

panasa-udumbara-aśvattha-plakṣa-nyagrodha-hińgubhiḥ	with panasas (jackfruit trees), udumbaras, aśvatthas, plakṣas, nyagrodhas and trees producing asafoetida	SB 4.6.17

pañca-grāsa	five morsels	CC Madhya 3.76

pāṇi-grahaṇa	marriage	CC Adi 15.4

pāṇihāṭi grāme	to the village called Pāṇihāṭi	CC Antya 2.54

pānihāṭi-grāme	in the village known as Pānihāṭi	CC Antya 6.43

tvat-para-anugraheṇa	by compassion like Yours	SB 4.7.29

para-parigraham	the wife of another person	SB 7.7.8

yamunā-pāre grāma	his residence on the other side of the Yamunā	CC Madhya 18.82

parigrahaḥ	sense of proprietorship over possessions	BG 4.21

parigrahaḥ	possessing	SB 3.28.4

parigrahaḥ	captivated	SB 4.27.3

parigrahaḥ	accepting	SB 5.5.28

kṛta-āsana-parigrahaḥ	after accepting a sitting place	SB 8.16.3

parigrahaḥ	the acceptance	SB 10.58.39

baladeva-parigrahāḥ	the consorts of Lord Baladeva	SB 10.67.12

parigrahaḥ	acceptance	SB 10.78.22

parigrahaḥ	the acceptance	SB 10.87.48

parigrahaḥ	attachment to possession	SB 11.9.1

parigraham	and acceptance of material things	BG 18.51-53

parigraham	arrangement of	SB 1.13.6

urukrama-parigraham	the wives of the all-powerful	SB 1.15.20

para-parigraham	the wife of another person	SB 7.7.8

mat-parigraham	My own family	SB 10.25.18

sva-parigraham	Their devotees	SB 10.34.27

parigraham	acceptance	SB 10.70.34

parigraham	family	SB 11.30.48

parigrahān	acceptance	SB 10.48.13-14

parigrahān	the personal associates	SB 10.82.27

parigrahe	in devotional service to the Lord	SB 3.4.24

parigrāhī	he who had accepted the gift	SB 10.64.17

parihīṇa-bhagavat-anugrahaḥ	being without the favor of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.24.26

nyagrodha-parimaṇḍala	nyagrodha-parimaṇḍala	CC Adi 3.43

nyagrodha-parimaṇḍala	nyagrodha-parimaṇḍala	CC Adi 3.43

śakra-pārṣṇi-grāheṇa	who was helping Lord Indra	SB 6.18.23

pārṣṇi-grāheṇa	attacking from the rear	SB 7.2.6

pārṣṇi-grahāḥ	grasping him from behind	SB 8.2.28

pārṣṇi-grāham	for help	SB 10.57.14

pārṣṇi-grāhaḥ	as the rear guard	SB 10.66.12-14

pārṣṇigrāhaḥ	a very good assistant	SB 9.6.13

ugra-paruṣam	not a gentle person	SB 8.7.33

paryagrahīt	embraced	SB 10.80.18

udagra-pāt	arched instep	SB 4.21.16

agra-pātaiḥ	with the striking	SB 10.29.45-46

patākā-agraiḥ	by the foremost signs	SB 1.11.13

pāṭhāilā grāme	he sent to the nearby village	CC Antya 6.52

phala-grahāḥ	gainers of the actual result	SB 8.6.22-23

pīyūṣa-granthi	pīyūṣagranthi	CC Antya 18.106

panasa-udumbara-aśvattha-plakṣa-nyagrodha-hińgubhiḥ	with panasas (jackfruit trees), udumbaras, aśvatthas, plakṣas, nyagrodhas and trees producing asafoetida	SB 4.6.17

nyāgrodha-potam	a young banyan tree	SB 12.9.20

prabhura āgrahe	by the eagerness of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu	CC Madhya 7.55

prācīna-agraiḥ	keeping the kuśa grass facing toward the eastern side	SB 4.24.10

pragrahiṇam	who was managing the reins of the horses	SB 10.1.34

prajā-anugraha	doing good to the living being	SB 1.19.19

prāk-agraiḥ	with the points facing east	SB 4.29.49

prāk-agreṣu	facing east	SB 8.9.14-15

prati-grāme	in each village	CC Madhya 16.152

pratigraha nāhi kare	he did not accept charity from anyone	CC Adi 10.50

pratigraha	acceptance of alms	CC Adi 12.50

pratigraha	acceptance of gifts	CC Madhya 22.116

rāja-pratigraha	taking from the King	CC Antya 9.117

pratigrahaḥ	taking charity from others	SB 8.19.17

pratigrahaḥ	acceptance of charity	SB 11.17.40

pratigraham	accepting charity	SB 11.17.41

pratigrahīṣyanti	will accept religious charity	SB 12.3.38

pratijagrāha	accepted	SB 6.5.44

pratijagrāha	accepted	SB 9.18.23

pratijagrāha	took hold of	SB 10.67.18

pratyagra	Pratyagra	SB 9.22.6

pratyagrahīt	He accepted	SB 10.81.35

udgrāha-ādi prāya	unnecessary argument	CC Antya 7.100

puccha-agre	at the end of the tail	SB 5.23.5

agra-pūjāyām	the first to be worshiped	SB 7.14.35

mańgala-bhūyiṣṭha-pura-grāma-vraja-ākarāḥ	whose many cities, towns, pasturing grounds and mines became auspicious and very neat and clean	SB summary

pura-grāma-vraja-ādiṣu	in all the towns, villages and pasturing grounds	SB 10.4.31

pura-grāma-vraja-ādiṣu	in towns, cities and villages here and there	SB 10.6.2

puruṣottama-grāma	the place known as Puruṣottama, Jagannātha Purī	CC Madhya 14.232

pūrva-granthe	in the previous chapter	CC Antya 1.10

tṛṇa-rāja-agre	into the top of a palm tree	SB 10.15.32

rāja-pratigraha	taking from the King	CC Antya 9.117

kṛṣṇa-rāma-ugrasena-ādyaiḥ	by Kṛṣṇa, Balarāma, Ugrasena and the others	SB 10.84.59

rāma-keli grāma	to the village of the name Rāmakeli	CC Madhya 1.166

rāma-nāma-grahaṇa	chanting the holy name of Lord Rāmacandra	CC Madhya 9.26

rāmakeli-grāme	to this village named Rāmakeli	CC Madhya 1.213

rāmakeli-grāme	in the village known as Rāmakeli	CC Madhya 16.211

rāmakeli-grāma	to the village of Rāmakeli	CC Madhya 16.260

rāmakeli-grāme	in Rāmakeli	CC Madhya 19.3

rasa-grahaḥ	one who has relished the mellow	SB 1.5.19

rasa-grahaḥ	which perceives taste	SB 3.26.41

caitanya-rasa-vigrahaḥ	the form of all transcendental mellows	CC Madhya 17.133

rasāmṛta-sindhu-granthera	of the book known as Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu	CC Madhya 19.133

ratha-agre	in front of the car	CC Madhya 1.134

śrī-ratha-agre	in the front of the car	CC Madhya 13.1

ratha-agrete	in front of the car	CC Madhya 13.206

ratha-agre	in front of the car	CC Madhya 16.49

ratha-agre	the front of the ratha, or chariot	CC Antya 1.72

ratha-agre	in front of the car	CC Antya 4.106

nānā-roga-grasta	infected with so many diseases	CC Antya 20.94

tat-rūpa-grahaṇa-nimittam	the reason why Lord Kṛṣṇa (Keśava) assumed the form of Nṛsiṃha	SB 5.18.7

ugra-rūpaḥ	fierce form	BG 11.31

rūpasya agrajaḥ	the elder brother of Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī	CC Madhya 24.348

sa-grahāḥ	with the planets	SB 7.3.5

sa-grāham	with the crocodile	SB 8.3.33

sa-sugrīvaḥ	with Sugrīva	SB 9.10.42-43

sa-grahā	with the stars	SB 10.6.12

sa-tāla-agraiḥ	with the tops of the palm trees	SB 10.15.38

sa-agra-jaḥ	together with His elder brother, Balarāma	SB 10.15.41

sa-agrajam	together with His elder brother	SB 10.23.20-21

sa-agrajaḥ	and with His elder brother	SB 10.57.10

sa-vigraha	with form	CC Adi 2.25

sa-agra-jātam	with his elder brother, Śrī Sanātana Gosvāmī	CC Antya 2.1

sa-agra-jātam	with his elder brother, Śrī Sanātana Gosvāmī	CC Antya 3.1

saba grāmya-lokera	of all the people of the village	CC Madhya 18.6

sabāra agrete	in front of all the devotees	CC Madhya 16.255

sabāra āgrahe	due to the eagerness of all of them	CC Antya 8.86

nirgrantha-śabde	by the word nirgrantha	CC Madhya 24.16

nirgrantha-śabde	by the word nirgrantha	CC Madhya 24.227

sāgram	a little more than	SB 3.20.15

saha-agrajam	who was playing with His elder brother, Balarāma	SB 10.11.14

saha-agrajaḥ	together with His brother Balarāma	SB 10.22.29

śaibya-sugrīva-meghapuṣpa-balāhakaiḥ	named Śaibya, Sugrīva, Meghapuṣpa and Balāhaka	SB 10.53.5

śaibya-sugrīva-meghapuṣpa-balāhakāḥ	named Śaibya, Sugrīva, Meghapuṣpa and Balāhaka	SB 10.89.48-49

sakala-grahāṇām	of all the planets	Bs 5.52

śakra-pārṣṇi-grāheṇa	who was helping Lord Indra	SB 6.18.23

śālagrāma	śālagrāma-nārāyaṇa-śilā	CC Adi 13.86

śālagrāma-lakṣaṇa	characteristics of the śālagrāma-śilā	CC Madhya 24.335

śālagrāmam	the village known as Śālagrāma	SB 5.8.30

śālagrāme	unto Lord Viṣṇu in the form of the śālagrāma	CC Madhya 15.54-55

śālagrāme samarpiyā	after offering to the śālagrāma-śilā	CC Madhya 18.134

śālagrāmera	of Lord Śālagrāma	CC Madhya 15.204

samagra-ańgam	all the limbs	SB 3.28.18

samagra	complete	SB 10.53.18-19

samagra	all	CC Adi 10.163

samagrahīt	perfectly chanted	SB 6.2.13

samagrahīt	married	SB 9.24.37

samagrahīt	seized	SB 10.44.36

samagralakṣaṇam	possessing all good qualities	SB 6.19.26-28

samagram	in total	BG 4.23

samagram	completely	BG 7.1

samagram	all	BG 11.30

samagram	in sum total	SB 3.4.18

samagram	the whole	CC Madhya 23.23

samagrān	all	BG 11.30

samagraṇīḥ	the very best	SB 9.15.33

samagreṇa	all	SB 3.32.27

sāmagrī	ingredients	CC Adi 8.52

bhoga-sāmagrī	cooking materials	CC Adi 10.25

sāmagrī	ingredients	CC Adi 10.26

sāmagrī	ingredients of the foods	CC Adi 10.28

sāmagrī	ingredients, paraphernalia	CC Adi 17.38

bhoga-sāmagrī	ingredients for eatables to be offered	CC Madhya 4.58

sāmagrī	paraphernalia	CC Madhya 7.38

pākera sāmagrī	the ingredients for cooking	CC Madhya 9.182

sāmagrī	items	CC Madhya 16.193

sāmagrī-milane	by mixing with other ingredients	CC Madhya 23.47

sāmagrī kariyā	making all arrangements	CC Antya 2.46

pāka-sāmagrī ānaha	please bring everything necessary for cooking	CC Antya 2.55

pāka-sāmagrī ānaha	bring all cooking ingredients	CC Antya 2.58

sāmagrī āna	bring more ingredients	CC Antya 2.73

bhoga-sāmagrī	ingredients for preparing food	CC Antya 2.74

sāmagrī	articles	CC Antya 6.55

sāmagrī dekhiyā	seeing these ingredients	CC Antya 10.149

sāmagrī	of ingredients	CC Antya 12.134

sāmagrye	with food	CC Madhya 16.111

śamala-grahaḥ	accepting the sinful activities	SB 5.26.36

śālagrāme samarpiyā	after offering to the śālagrāma-śilā	CC Madhya 18.134

śambhala-grāma	in the village Śambhala	SB 12.2.18

bahu-yoga-grantha-sammatam	approved by all yogic processes and their scriptures	SB 5.10.15

saṃśānta-vigraham	the grave and saintly Lord Śiva	SB 4.6.34

bhāgavata-sandarbha-granthera	of the book called Bhāgavata-sandarbha	CC Adi 3.80

sańgraha	to receive	SB 4.20.26

sańgraha kariyā	collecting	CC Madhya 25.215

sańgrahaḥ	the accumulation	BG 18.18

sańgrahaḥ	is the accumulation of	SB 2.7.51

sańgrahaḥ	perception	SB 3.26.35

guṇa-sarga-sańgrahaḥ	combination of different material elements	SB 4.17.30

indriya-sańgrahaḥ	five senses and the mind	SB 4.28.57

loka-sańgrahaḥ	benefit for the people in general	SB 10.78.31-32

jana-sańgrahaḥ	the enlightenment of the people in general	SB 10.84.15

sańgrahaḥ	complete control	SB 11.20.21

yoga-sańgrahaḥ	the essence of spiritual practice	SB 11.23.60

sańgrahaḥ	the survey	SB 11.29.23

loka-sańgraham	the people in general	BG 3.20

loka-sańgraham	the people in general	BG 3.25

sańgraham	who accepts	SB 4.14.21

sańgraham	collection	SB 4.24.45-46

loka-sańgraham	to instruct the people in general	SB 10.80.30

loka-sańgraham	for the benefit of the general populace	SB 10.89.59

sat-sańgrahāya	understood only by pure devotees	SB 6.9.45

sańgrāhayan	instructing	SB 10.82.3-6

sańgrahe	aggregate	SB 4.21.35

sańgrahe	or in protection	SB 7.2.39

sańgraheṇa	in summary	BG 8.11

sańgraheṇa	by total absorption	SB 3.8.25

sańgraheṇa	in summary	SB 4.8.5

sańgrahī	a collector	SB 11.8.11

sańgrāhitaḥ	was made to accept	SB 3.31.18

sańgrāma-mūrdhani	in the midst of battle	SB 1.15.30

sańgrāma	fight	CC Madhya 5.120

sańgrāmajit bṛhatsenaḥ	Sańgrāmajit and Bṛhatsena	SB 10.61.17

subhadra-sańgrāmajitau	Subhadra and Sańgrāmajit	SB 11.30.16

sańgrāmam	fighting	BG 2.33

sańgrāme ulbaṇe	in the great blazing fire of battle	SB 6.14.6

sańgrāme	in the battlefield	SB 8.11.7

sańgrāme	battle	SB 10.50.43

sāńgrāmika-upetam	equipped with all kinds of weapons required for fighting with all different types of enemies	SB 8.10.16-18

sańgrasana	to devour us altogether	SB 10.12.19

varṇa-sańgrathane	in the sense of tying together words	CC Madhya 24.18

sańgrathya	after stringing	CC Antya 10.21

sannyāsa grahaṇa kaila	he also accepted the renounced order of life	CC Madhya 10.104

śānta-vigraham	having a peaceful personality	SB 4.2.2

saptagrāma-mulukera	of the place known as Saptagrāma	CC Antya 6.17

saptagrāme	in the village named Saptagrāma	CC Madhya 16.217

ugra-śaraḥ	with sharpened arrows	SB 4.17.35

agra-saram	who came first	SB 10.87.24

guṇa-sarga-sańgrahaḥ	combination of different material elements	SB 4.17.30

sarpa-grastaḥ	one who is bitten by the snake	SB 1.13.46

sarva-graha-bhayam-karaḥ	who is fearful to all evil planets	SB 10.6.24

agraja-śāsanam	the order of the elder brother	CC Madhya 10.145

sat-grahaḥ	devotee of	SB 1.12.25

sat-anugrahāya	for the sake of the devotees	SB 3.9.2

sat-anugrahāya	to show Your causeless mercy	SB 3.9.11

sat-sańgrahāya	understood only by pure devotees	SB 6.9.45

sat-anugrahaḥ	who are always kind and merciful to the devotees	SB 10.2.31

satya-vigraha	the form of the Lord as truth	CC Madhya 9.277

saundarya-ādi-guṇa-grāma	the transcendental qualities, headed by beauty	CC Madhya 21.104

se granthera	of that scripture	CC Adi 17.311

se-vigrahe	about that form of the Lord	CC Madhya 6.166

sei grāme	in that village	CC Madhya 9.285

sei grāma haite	from the village known as Pichaldā	CC Madhya 16.200

sei grāme	in that village	CC Madhya 18.26

sei grāme	to that village	CC Madhya 18.36

sei grāme	in that village	CC Antya 1.40

sei grāme	in the village	CC Antya 3.167

indra-senā-agram	the front of Indra's army	SB 6.10.19-22

anugrahaṇīya-śīlāḥ	trained to get favors	SB 1.19.13

siṃha-grīva	having the neck of a lion	CC Adi 3.30

rasāmṛta-sindhu-granthera	of the book known as Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu	CC Madhya 19.133

śīra-agrataḥ	from the front portion of the plow	SB 9.13.18

uttama-śloka-vigrahau	incarnations of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 4.19.33

śrī-vigraha	the form	CC Madhya 6.166

śrī-vigraha	the form of the Lord	CC Madhya 6.167

śrī-ratha-agre	in the front of the car	CC Madhya 13.1

śrī-vigraha	of the transcendental form of the Lord	CC Madhya 25.114

su-grīva	a nice neck	SB 8.8.41-46

su-vyagra-cittāḥ	are busily engaged	SB 10.8.30

subhadra-sańgrāmajitau	Subhadra and Sańgrāmajit	SB 11.30.16

sugrīva	Sugrīva	SB 9.10.16

sugrīva	by the monkey named Sugrīva	SB 9.10.19

śaibya-sugrīva-meghapuṣpa-balāhakaiḥ	named Śaibya, Sugrīva, Meghapuṣpa and Balāhaka	SB 10.53.5

sugrīva	King Sugrīva	SB 10.67.2

sugrīva-ādyaiḥ	named Sugrīva and so on	SB 10.70.14

śaibya-sugrīva-meghapuṣpa-balāhakāḥ	named Śaibya, Sugrīva, Meghapuṣpa and Balāhaka	SB 10.89.48-49

sa-sugrīvaḥ	with Sugrīva	SB 9.10.42-43

sugrīvaḥ	the monkey king Sugrīva	SB 11.12.3-6

surā-grahaiḥ	and the acceptance of ritual cups of wine	SB 11.5.11

śuṣka-vigrahaḥ	useless quarreling	SB 11.17.20

ugrasena-sutaḥ	the son of Ugrasena	SB 10.1.30

sva-daṃṣṭra-agreṇa	by the edge of His tusks	SB 3.14.3

sva-nāsā-agra	the tip of one's nose	SB 3.28.12

sva-parigraham	Their devotees	SB 10.34.27

sva-nāsa-agra	on the tip of one's own nose	SB 11.14.32-33

sva-granthe	in his own book	CC Madhya 19.118

sva-granthe	in his book	CC Antya 17.71

svarūpa-tucchīkṛta-vigrahāya	who has completely removed all the contradictions of the scriptures by manifesting his true self	SB 5.12.1

svarūpa-vigraha	personal form	CC Adi 5.27-28

svatva-grahaḥ	the wife is accepted as being identical with one's self	SB 7.14.11

sa-tāla-agraiḥ	with the tops of the palm trees	SB 10.15.38

mahat-tama-agraṇyaḥ	the best of the saintly persons (Yudhiṣṭhira)	SB 7.11.1

tāńhāra agrete	before him	CC Madhya 15.121

tāńra āgrahe	by his eagerness	CC Antya 5.110

ugra-tapasā	by severe austerities	SB 3.33.14

tat-anugrahāt	by his mercy	SB 1.3.44

tat-anugrahaḥ	His causeless mercy	SB 2.10.4

tat-pāda-grahau	grasping their feet	SB 3.15.35

tat-anugrahāya	to show His mercy	SB 5.17.14

tat-rūpa-grahaṇa-nimittam	the reason why Lord Kṛṣṇa (Keśava) assumed the form of Nṛsiṃha	SB 5.18.7

tat-guṇa-agrahaḥ	are not touched by the material qualities	SB 10.3.14

tattva-grāma	the sum total of the creative elements	SB 1.3.10

tattva-grahaṇāya	for accepting the real purpose of Vedic knowledge	SB 5.11.3

agrajān te	all the brothers born before You	SB 10.3.22

tīkṣṇa-agraiḥ	sharp-pointed	SB 10.63.10-11

tṛṇa-rāja-agre	into the top of a palm tree	SB 10.15.32

svarūpa-tucchīkṛta-vigrahāya	who has completely removed all the contradictions of the scriptures by manifesting his true self	SB 5.12.1

nṛ-turańga-vigrahaḥ	assuming the form of half-horse, half-man	SB 5.18.6

tvat-anugrahāt	by Your mercy	SB 3.25.8

tvat-para-anugraheṇa	by compassion like Yours	SB 4.7.29

tvat-anugrahaḥ	Your causeless mercy	SB 8.23.2

udagra-pāt	arched instep	SB 4.21.16

bhańga-udagrā	being strong enough for breaking	CC Antya 1.155

udgrāha	argument	CC Madhya 9.47

udgrāha-ādi prāya	unnecessary argument	CC Antya 7.100

udgrāhe	to establish the conclusion	CC Madhya 9.43

udgranthayaḥ	without attachment, free from material bondage	SB 3.15.47

udgrathayanti	root out	SB 4.22.39

udgrathita	untied	SB 10.81.40

udgrāyudhaḥ	Udgrāyudha	SB 9.21.27

panasa-udumbara-aśvattha-plakṣa-nyagrodha-hińgubhiḥ	with panasas (jackfruit trees), udumbaras, aśvatthas, plakṣas, nyagrodhas and trees producing asafoetida	SB 4.6.17

ugra-rūpaḥ	fierce form	BG 11.31

ugra-karmāṇaḥ	engaged in painful activities	BG 16.9

ugra-dhanvā	equipped with furious weapons	SB 1.7.17

ugra-vīryaḥ	awfully powerful	SB 2.7.22

ugra	very hard	SB 3.9.13

ugra	terribly	SB 3.21.45-47

ugra-dhanvan	O great warrior Vidura	SB 3.22.21

ugra	strong, pungent	SB 3.26.45

ugra-tapasā	by severe austerities	SB 3.33.14

ugra	terrible	SB 4.5.2

ugra-daṇḍaḥ	who would sternly punish	SB 4.5.8

ugra	ferocious	SB 4.7.28

ugra-dhanvā	powerful bowman	SB 4.10.8

ugra	severe	SB 4.14.3

ugra-śaraḥ	with sharpened arrows	SB 4.17.35

ugra	severe	SB 4.23.4

ugra-daṃṣṭrīm	Ugradaṃṣṭrī	SB 5.2.23

ugra	fierce	SB 5.6.8

ugra	terrible	SB 6.1.6

ugra-dharmāt	from unnecessary religious principles	SB 6.8.16

ugra-dhanvā	bearing the very fearful bow known as Śārńga	SB 6.8.21

ugra-locanam	having powerful eyes	SB 6.9.13-17

ugra-dṛṣṭyā	and fierce glance	SB 7.2.3

ugra-daṇḍa	by the very fearful chastisement	SB 7.4.21

ugra-jāteḥ	who am born in an asuric family	SB 7.9.8

ugra-daṃṣṭrāt	ferocious teeth	SB 7.9.15

ugra	ferocious	SB 7.9.16

ugra-vegam	very fierce and potent poison	SB 8.7.19

ugra-paruṣam	not a gentle person	SB 8.7.33

ugra	fierce	SB 10.6.14

ugra	and terrible	SB 10.17.6

ugra	mighty	SB 10.17.7

ugra	terrible	SB 10.18.27

ugra	and fearsome	SB 10.44.36

ugra	terrible	SB 10.66.32-33

ugra	fearsome	SB 10.79.3-4

ugra	terrible	SB 12.9.12

ugra	ferocious	CC Madhya 8.6

ugrāḥ	terrible	BG 11.30

ugraḥ	dreadful	SB 1.3.39

ugraḥ	very cruel	SB 5.26.13

ugraḥ	Ugra	SB 6.6.17-18

ugraḥ	terrible	SB 8.10.50

ugraḥ	Lord Śiva	SB 9.10.10

ugraḥ	ferocious	CC Madhya 8.6

ugraiḥ	severe	BG 11.48

ugram	terrible	BG 11.20

ugram	severe	SB 5.18.22

ugram	severe	SB 6.5.4-5

ugram	very fierce	SB 9.10.6-7

ugram	terrible	SB 10.26.11

ugrasena-duhitaraḥ	the daughters of Ugrasena	SB 9.24.25

ugrasena-sutaḥ	the son of Ugrasena	SB 10.1.30

ugrasena-ātmajāt	from the son of Ugrasena	SB 10.3.28

ugrasena-ādayaḥ	headed by King Ugrasena	SB 10.66.7

ugrasena	by King Ugrasena	SB 10.68.13

ugrasena-ādibhiḥ	headed by Ugrasena	SB 10.79.29

vasudeva-ugrasena-ādyaiḥ	headed by Vasudeva and Ugrasena	SB 10.82.22

kṛṣṇa-rāma-ugrasena-ādyaiḥ	by Kṛṣṇa, Balarāma, Ugrasena and the others	SB 10.84.59

vasudeva-ugrasenābhyām	by Vasudeva and Ugrasena	SB 10.84.67-68

ugrasenaḥ	Ugrasena	SB 1.11.16-17

ugrasenaḥ	Ugrasena	SB 9.22.35

ugrasenaḥ	Ugrasena	SB 9.24.20

ugrasenaḥ	Ugrasena	SB 10.44.33

ugrasenaḥ	King Ugrasena	SB 10.68.21

ugrasenaḥ	King Ugrasena	SB 10.68.34

vivasvān ugrasenaḥ	Vivasvān and Ugrasena	SB 12.11.38

ugrasenam	unto King Ugrasena	SB 3.2.22

ugrasenam	unto Ugrasena	SB 10.1.69

ugrasenam	King Ugrasena	SB 10.36.34

ugrasenam	Ugrasena	SB 10.45.12

vasudeva-ugrasenayoḥ	of Vasudeva and Ugrasena	SB 11.31.15

ugraśravāḥ	Sūta Gosvāmī	SB 3.20.7

ugrāya	unto the ferocious	SB 3.14.35

ugreṇa	yet burning	SB 10.63.28

sańgrāme ulbaṇe	in the great blazing fire of battle	SB 6.14.6

sāńgrāmika-upetam	equipped with all kinds of weapons required for fighting with all different types of enemies	SB 8.10.16-18

urukrama-parigraham	the wives of the all-powerful	SB 1.15.20

uttama-śloka-vigrahau	incarnations of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 4.19.33

vaiṣṇava-agryaḥ	the foremost of devotees of Lord Viṣṇu	SB 11.2.53

valī-palita-vigrahaḥ	whose body had loose skin and white hair	SB 9.3.14

vārāṇasī-grāme	in the city of Vārāṇasī	CC Madhya 25.173

varṇa-sańgrathane	in the sense of tying together words	CC Madhya 24.18

varuṇa-grastam	having been attacked with dropsy by Varuṇa	SB 9.7.17

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.80

kulīna-grāma-vāsi	the residents of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 1.131

ei grāme vasi	I reside in this village	CC Madhya 4.28

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 10.89

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	residents of the village known as Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 11.91

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 16.16-17

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 12.9

vasudeva-ugrasena-ādyaiḥ	headed by Vasudeva and Ugrasena	SB 10.82.22

vasudeva-ugrasenābhyām	by Vasudeva and Ugrasena	SB 10.84.67-68

vasudeva-ugrasenayoḥ	of Vasudeva and Ugrasena	SB 11.31.15

agraja-vat	like your older brothers	SB 9.18.42

ugra-vegam	very fierce and potent poison	SB 8.7.19

vibudha-agrya	of the devotees (who are the best of the learned)	SB 3.15.26

vigraha	in the body	SB 7.9.41

vigraha	as well as for fighting	SB 8.6.28

vigraha	about a conflict	SB 10.56.40-42

vigraha	person	CC Adi 1.69-70

vigraha	form	CC Adi 1.76

sa-vigraha	with form	CC Adi 2.25

vigraha	identity	CC Adi 2.28

kṛṣṇa-vigraha	the form of Lord Kṛṣṇa	CC Adi 5.14

svarūpa-vigraha	personal form	CC Adi 5.27-28

vigraha	form	CC Madhya 6.152

śrī-vigraha	the form	CC Madhya 6.166

śrī-vigraha	the form of the Lord	CC Madhya 6.167

vigraha	the transcendental form	CC Madhya 6.264-265

satya-vigraha	the form of the Lord as truth	CC Madhya 9.277

vigraha	form	CC Madhya 17.131

cit-ānanda kṛṣṇa-vigraha	the transcendental form of Kṛṣṇa, which is completely spiritual	CC Madhya 25.35

śrī-vigraha	of the transcendental form of the Lord	CC Madhya 25.114

vigraha	that Personality of Godhead	CC Madhya 25.115

kṛṣṇera vigraha	the form of Lord Kṛṣṇa	CC Antya 6.294

vigrahaḥ	form	SB 3.31.3

guṇa-vigrahaḥ	the incarnation of the material qualities	SB 5.17.22-23

nṛ-turańga-vigrahaḥ	assuming the form of half-horse, half-man	SB 5.18.6

guṇa-vigrahaḥ	the universe, which is a result of the modes of nature	SB 6.4.48

valī-palita-vigrahaḥ	whose body had loose skin and white hair	SB 9.3.14

vigrahaḥ	a fight	SB 9.14.5

vigrahaḥ	any conflict for whom	SB 10.51.51

kṛta-vigrahaḥ	battling	SB 10.60.35

śuṣka-vigrahaḥ	useless quarreling	SB 11.17.20

vigrahaḥ	conflict	SB 12.3.7

vigrahaḥ	whose form	CC Adi 2.107

vigrahaḥ	whose form	CC Madhya 8.137

caitanya-rasa-vigrahaḥ	the form of all transcendental mellows	CC Madhya 17.133

vigrahaḥ	whose form	CC Madhya 20.154

vigrahaḥ	whose form	CC Madhya 21.35

vigrahaḥ	having a body	CC Madhya 23.79-81

vigrahaḥ	whose form	Bs 5.1

vigrahaiḥ	and his body	SB 6.10.10

vigrahaiḥ	by such animals whose bodies	SB 8.10.10-12

vigrahaiḥ	and quarrel	SB 12.3.20

vigraham	a form	SB 1.9.10

vigraham	form	SB 2.10.47

vigraham	enmity	SB 3.31.29

śānta-vigraham	having a peaceful personality	SB 4.2.2

saṃśānta-vigraham	the grave and saintly Lord Śiva	SB 4.6.34

vigraham	transcendental form	SB 4.7.24

vigraham	having form	SB 4.12.5

vigraham	separation	SB 4.13.8-9

vigraham	the personified form	SB 6.16.33

vigraham	the bodies	SB 9.15.32

vigraham	battle	SB 10.37.23

jñāna-vigraham	the embodiment of knowledge	SB 10.40.6

vigraham	whose bodies	SB 10.59.16

vigraham	war	SB 10.69.31

vigraham	warfare	SB 10.79.30

vigraham	quarrel	SB 11.23.48

vigraham	who is the form	CC Adi 2.95

vigraham	who is the form	CC Madhya 20.151

vigraham	the form of the Lord	CC Madhya 24.112

vigraham	the form of the Lord	CC Madhya 24.144

vigraham	the form of the Lord	CC Madhya 25.156

vigrahān	whose bodies	SB 4.31.3

vigrahasya	of the form	SB 2.1.38

vigrahasya	whose form	Bs 5.32

vigrahāt	from this fighting	SB 8.11.44

vigrahāt	by a quarrel	SB 11.7.3

uttama-śloka-vigrahau	incarnations of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 4.19.33

vigrahāya	the forms	SB 4.30.23

kāraṇa-vigrahāya	to one whose body emanates from the Supreme Person, the cause of all causes	SB 5.12.1

svarūpa-tucchīkṛta-vigrahāya	who has completely removed all the contradictions of the scriptures by manifesting his true self	SB 5.12.1

gata-vigrahe	without any enemy	SB 3.15.32

mukta-vigrahe	free from anger	SB 4.11.29

vigrahe	in the form	SB 11.15.15

se-vigrahe	about that form of the Lord	CC Madhya 6.166

vigrahe	in form	CC Madhya 9.155

vigrahe	in the transcendental form	CC Madhya 20.164

vigrahera	of the Deity	CC Madhya 20.247

vigrahera	of the Deity	CC Antya 20.111

vimāna-agryeṣu	in the best of airplanes	SB 3.16.34

vimāna-agryam	excellent airplane	SB 8.10.16-18

yatna-āgraha vinā	without sincere endeavor	CC Madhya 24.171

ātma-vinigrahaḥ	self-control	BG 13.8-12

vinigrahaḥ	control	BG 17.16

vinigrahāt	from the punishment I am now suffering	SB 8.22.3

viparyaya-graham	the misidentification	SB 10.77.32

vipra-graha	brāhmaṇa ghosts	SB 6.8.25

vipra-agryaḥ	the best of brāhmaṇas	SB 10.80.15

vīra-yūtha-agraṇīḥ	Bhīṣmadeva, the foremost of all warriors	SB 9.22.20

ugra-vīryaḥ	awfully powerful	SB 2.7.22

viṣāṇa-agreṇa	by the point of the horns	SB 9.19.4

viṣaya-grahaṇa	accepting sense objects	CC Antya 2.118

ajuṣṭa-grāmya-viṣayau	for sex life and to beget a child like Me	SB 10.3.39

vitta-graham	as a money-grabbing ghost	SB 5.26.36

vivasvān ugrasenaḥ	Vivasvān and Ugrasena	SB 12.11.38

mańgala-bhūyiṣṭha-pura-grāma-vraja-ākarāḥ	whose many cities, towns, pasturing grounds and mines became auspicious and very neat and clean	SB summary

pura-grāma-vraja-ādiṣu	in all the towns, villages and pasturing grounds	SB 10.4.31

pura-grāma-vraja-ādiṣu	in towns, cities and villages here and there	SB 10.6.2

vṛtra-grastam	swallowed by Vṛtrāsura	SB 6.12.30

vyagra	revolving	SB 3.19.6

vyagra	eager	SB 4.29.39-40

vyagra-hṛdayā	whose mind was agitated	SB 5.8.4

su-vyagra-cittāḥ	are busily engaged	SB 10.8.30

vyagrā api	although zealous	CC Madhya 1.211

vyagra	agitated	CC Madhya 3.173

vyagra haile	if becoming agitated	CC Madhya 3.214

vyagra	in great anxiety	CC Madhya 14.48

vyagra hañā	with anxiety	CC Madhya 14.50

vyagra ha-ilā	became very much agitated	CC Antya 14.35

vyagraiḥ	filled with	SB 4.7.20

vyagrān	busily engaged	SB 12.3.1

vyagratā	eagerness	CC Madhya 3.173

vyagrāyām	very busy	SB 10.9.22

bāla-vyajana-chatra-agryaiḥ	protected by beautifully decorated umbrellas and the best of cāmaras	SB 8.10.16-18

yājapura-grāma	the village of Yājapura-grāma	CC Madhya 5.3

yakṣma-graha-arditaḥ	being oppressed by a disease that brings about gradual destruction	SB 6.6.23

yakṣma-grastām	infected with tuberculosis	SB 6.13.12-13

yamunā-pāre grāma	his residence on the other side of the Yamunā	CC Madhya 18.82

yat-anugrahaṇe	to receive her favor	SB 3.15.21

yat-anugraheṇa	by the mercy of that elephant	SB 8.2.22

yatna-āgraha vinā	without sincere endeavor	CC Madhya 24.171

ye-grāme	in whatever village	CC Madhya 17.58

ye deśa-grāme	in which country or village	CC Antya 3.164

yei grāme	in whatever village	CC Madhya 7.106

yei grāme	to whichever village	CC Madhya 7.120

yei grāme	in any village	CC Madhya 7.131-132

yei grāma	which villages	CC Madhya 17.47

bahu-yoga-grantha-sammatam	approved by all yogic processes and their scriptures	SB 5.10.15

yoga-grathitāni	bearing the complete meaning of mystic yoga	SB 5.10.18

yoga-sańgrahaḥ	the essence of spiritual practice	SB 11.23.60

vīra-yūtha-agraṇīḥ	Bhīṣmadeva, the foremost of all warriors	SB 9.22.20

DCS with thanks

704 results


grah	verb (class 6 parasmaipada) (in astron.) to calculate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) (in astron.) to observe (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to abstract (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to accept (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to admit (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to apprehend (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to approve (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to arrest (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to captivate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to capture (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to catch (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to claim (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to consider as (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to eclipse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to follow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to gain (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to gain over (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to grasp (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to imprison (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to keep (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to lay hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to lay the hand on (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to learn (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to obey (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to observe (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to obtain (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to overpower (esp. said of diseases and demons and the punishments of Varuṇa) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to perceive to receive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to receive into the mind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to recognise (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to seize (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to sense to stop (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take (by the hand) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take away (by robbery) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take captive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take for (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take possession of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take prisoner (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to understand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to win (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 106/72933

grah	noun (masculine) [gramm.] root grah Frequency rank 34764/72933

graha	noun (masculine neuter) a crocodile (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a house (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a planet (as seizing or influencing the destinies of men in a supernatural manner) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) any ladle or vessel employed for taking up a portion of fluid (esp. of Soma) out of a larger vessel (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) as much as can be taken with a ladle or spoon out of a larger vessel (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) booty (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Krampf Lähmung ladleful (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of particular evil demons or spirits who seize or exercise a bad influence on the body and mind of man (causing insanity etc) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of the 8 organs of perception (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Rāhu or the dragon's head (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) spoil (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) spoonful (esp. of Soma) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the number "nine" (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the place of a planet in the fixed zodiac (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Verhalten [einer Körperfunktion] [gramm.] the verb grah Frequency rank 550/72933

graha	adjective holding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) laying hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) obtaining (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) perceiving (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) recognising (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51715/72933

grahabhītijit	noun (masculine) name of a perfume (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51724/72933

grahacārakathana	noun (neuter) name of Liṅgapurāṇa, 1.57 Frequency rank 51716/72933

grahadaśādinirūpaṇa	noun (neuter) name of Garuḍapurāṇa, 1.60 Frequency rank 51721/72933

grahanāśana	noun (masculine) (a pigeon) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a kind of plant Frequency rank 51722/72933

grahapati	noun (masculine) Calotropis gigantea (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the moon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) [rel.] name of Śiva Frequency rank 16751/72933

grahapīḍā	noun (feminine) an eclipse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 23916/72933

grahapūjā	noun (feminine) worship of the planets (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51723/72933

graharāja	noun (masculine) the moon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the planet Jupiter (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51725/72933

grahasaṃkhyāvarṇana	noun (neuter) name of Liṅgapurāṇa, 1.61 Frequency rank 51726/72933

grahayajña	noun (masculine) a sacrifice offered to the planets (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21243/72933

grahaṇa	noun (neuter) a prisoner (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a word mentioned or employed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) acceptance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) acceptation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) acknowledgement (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) acquirement of any science (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) agreement (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) an organ of sense (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) assent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) assuming (a shape) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) attraction (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) catching (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) choosing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) comprehension (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) demoniacal possession (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) devoting one's self to (in comp.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) echo (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) eclipse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) employing (a word or expression) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) gaining (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) holding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) including (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) marrying (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) meaning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) mentioning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) mentioning with praise (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) obtaining (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) perceiving (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) purchasing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) putting on (clothes) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) receiving (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) receiving instruction (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizure (as by a demon causing diseases) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizure of the sun or moon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) service (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking by the hand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking captive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking or drawing up (any fluid) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the hand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the taking up of sound (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) understanding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) undertaking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 723/72933

grahaṇikā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 15687/72933

grahaṇī	noun (feminine) an imaginary organ supposed to lie between the stomach and the intestines (the small intestines or that part of the alimentary canal where the bile assists digestion and from which vital warmth is said to be diffused) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 1754/72933

grahaṇīdoṣa	noun (masculine) a kind of disease (" constipation") (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 34766/72933

grahaṇīdoṣacikitsita	noun (neuter) name of Aṣṭāṅgahṛdayasaṃhitā, Cik. 10 Frequency rank 51718/72933

grahaṇīgajakesarin	noun (masculine) a kind of alchemical preparation Frequency rank 51717/72933

grahaṇīhara	noun (neuter) cloves (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51720/72933

grahaṇīkapāṭa	noun (masculine) a kind of mixture (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 34765/72933

grahaṇīruj	noun (feminine) a kind of disease (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51719/72933

grahi	noun (masculine) anything that holds or supports (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) [gramm.] the root grah Frequency rank 19281/72933

grahin	adjective one who takes, keeps Frequency rank 51714/72933

grahotpatti	noun (feminine) name of Suśrutasaṃhitā, Utt. 37 Frequency rank 51731/72933

grahāgama	noun (masculine) demoniacal possession (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51727/72933

grahāgresara	noun (masculine) the moon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51728/72933

grahāhvaya	noun (masculine) the plant Bhūtāṅkuśa (bhūta graha?) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51730/72933

grahāṅga	noun (neuter) name of a varga Frequency rank 51729/72933

grahītukāma	adjective wishing to grasp Frequency rank 23917/72933

grahītṛ	adjective a purchaser (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who notices or hears (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who perceives or observes (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who receives (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who takes or seizes (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 10934/72933

graiveya	noun (masculine neuter) a chain worn round the neck of an elephant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 16753/72933

graiveya	noun (neuter) a necklace (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51762/72933

graiveyaka	noun (neuter) a chain worn round the neck of an elephant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a necklace (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 34778/72933

graiṣma	adjective relating to the summer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) sown in summer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 34780/72933

graiṣmika	adjective Frequency rank 21248/72933

graiṣmī	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 34779/72933

granth	verb (class 1 parasmaipada) to arrange (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be strung together or composed (a literary work) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to compose (a literary work) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to connect in a regular series (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to fasten (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to string words together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to tie or string together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 4422/72933

grantha	noun (masculine) granthĄ (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a knot (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a section (of) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) binding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) book in prose or verse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) composition (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) literary production (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) property (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) stringing together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) text (opposed to artha "meaning") (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the book or sacred scriptures of the Sikhs containing short moral poems by Nānak Shāh and others (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) treatise (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) tying (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) verse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) wealth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 2034/72933

granthakartṛ	noun (masculine) a book-maker (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) author (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51694/72933

granthakāra	noun (masculine) author Frequency rank 27896/72933

granthakṛt	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 34761/72933

granthay	verb (class 10 parasmaipada) Frequency rank 27897/72933

granthi	noun (masculine) a bell (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a complaint (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a joint of the body (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a knot (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) bunch or protuberance of any kind (esp. if produced by tying several things together) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Cynodon dactylon Pers. (G.J. Meulenbeld (1974), 551) Cyperus rotundus Linn. (G.J. Meulenbeld (1974), 551) crookedness (lit. and fig.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) difficulty (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) doubt (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) knot of a cord (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) knot tied in the end of a garment for keeping money (Pañcat.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of several plants and bulbous roots (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) swelling and hardening of the vessels (as in varicocele) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the joint of a reed or cane (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the root of Piper longum Linn. (G.J. Meulenbeld (1974), 551) tie (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 1604/72933

granthi	noun (neuter) a kind of poisonous plant Frequency rank 34760/72933

granthibheda	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 23914/72933

granthibhedaka	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 51702/72933

granthidala	noun (masculine) a kind of perfume (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51697/72933

granthidalā	noun (feminine) a kind of bulbous root (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51696/72933

granthidūrvā	noun (feminine) a kind of Dūrvā grass (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51698/72933

granthika	noun (masculine) a kind of disease of the outer ear (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a kind of plant or substance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a name assumed by Nakula (when master of the horse to king Virāṭa) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a relater (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) an astrologer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) narrator (?) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 27899/72933

granthika	noun (masculine neuter) a kind of resin (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) bdellium (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Capparis aphylla (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51695/72933

granthika	noun (neuter) granthiparṇaka (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a kind of disease of women (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a kind of poisonous plant pepper (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 9167/72933

granthikā	noun (feminine) a kind of plant Frequency rank 27898/72933

granthila	noun (masculine) a kind of perfume (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Capparis aphylla (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Flacourtia sapida (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 14152/72933

granthila	noun (neuter) green or undried ginger (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51708/72933

granthila	adjective knotted (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) knotty (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 14870/72933

granthilā	noun (feminine) a kind of Cyperus name of two kinds of Dūrvā grass (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) snuhī Frequency rank 21242/72933

granthimant	adjective bound (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) tied (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51704/72933

granthimant	noun (masculine) Heliotropium indicum (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51703/72933

granthimocaka	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 51705/72933

granthimūla	noun (neuter) garlic (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51707/72933

granthimūlā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 51706/72933

granthin	noun (masculine) Name einer mediz. Substanz Frequency rank 51693/72933

granthin	adjective one who reads books (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) strung together (?) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) well-read (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 16750/72933

granthinikā	noun (feminine) a kind of bulbous plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51699/72933

granthiparṇa	noun (neuter) -parṇaka (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Artemisia vulgaris Linn. (G.J. Meulenbeld (1974), 552) Polygonum aviculare Linn. (G.J. Meulenbeld (1974), 552) Frequency rank 23913/72933

granthiparṇa	noun (masculine) a kind of perfume (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51701/72933

granthiparṇī	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 27901/72933

granthipattra	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 51700/72933

granthiphala	noun (masculine) Feronia elephantum (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the plant Sākuruṇḍa Vanguiera spinosa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 27902/72933

granthita	adjective Frequency rank 27900/72933

granthivīsarpa	noun (masculine) a kind of erysipelas (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) [medic.] a kind of visarpa Frequency rank 34762/72933

granthyapacyarbudagalagaṇḍacikitsita	noun (neuter) name of Suśrutasaṃhitā, Cik. 18 Frequency rank 51709/72933

granthyarbudaślīpadāpacīnāḍīpratiṣedha	noun (masculine) name of Aṣṭāṅgahṛdayasaṃhitā, Utt. 30 Frequency rank 51710/72933

granthyarbudaślīpadāpacīnāḍīvijñānīya	noun (masculine) name of Aṣṭāṅgahṛdayasaṃhitā, Utt. 29 Frequency rank 51711/72933

gras	verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to cause to disappear (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to eat (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to eclipse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to pronounce indistinctly (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to seize with the mouth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to stop (a lawsuit) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to swallow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 1296/72933

grasana	noun (neuter) a kind of partial eclipse of the sun or moon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) jaws (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) swallowing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the mouth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 12031/72933

grasana	noun (masculine) name of a Daitya; the general of Tāraka Frequency rank 8103/72933

grasiṣṇu	adjective accustomed to swallow or absorb (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 23915/72933

grasta	adjective affected by (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) eaten (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) eclipsed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) inarticulately pronounced (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) involved in (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) possessed (by a demon) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seized (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) slurred (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) surrounded or absorbed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) swallowed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taken (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) tormented (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 34763/72933

grasta	noun (neuter) inarticulate pronunciation of the vowels (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51712/72933

grastatva	noun (neuter) the being refuted (by arguments) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51713/72933

grastayantra	noun (neuter) a kind of alchemical apparatus Frequency rank 17882/72933

grathana	noun (neuter) (in dram.) intimation of the issue of a plot (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) becoming obstructed or clogged with knotty lumps (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) binding-stringing together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) thickening (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) tying (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21241/72933

grathay	verb (class 10 ātmanepada) Frequency rank 51692/72933

grathita	noun (neuter) a tumor with hard lumps or knots (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the being strung (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 23912/72933

grāha	noun (masculine) a prisoner (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a rapacious animal living in fresh or sea water (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) any large fish or marine animal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) conception (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) disease (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) fiction (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Gangetic alligator (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) grasping (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) hippopotamus (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) laying hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) morbid affection (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) notion of (in comp.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) paralysis (of the thigh) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizure (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the handle (of a sword &c;) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) water elephant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) whim (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 2868/72933

grāhaka	noun (masculine) a hawk (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) falcon (catching snakes) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Marsilea quadrifolia (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a demon causing diseases (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 34775/72933

grāhaka	adjective a purchaser (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who eclipses (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who receives (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who seizes (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) perceiver (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 4766/72933

grāhakatā	noun (feminine) der Zustand, ein grāhaka zu sein Frequency rank 51754/72933

grāhavant	adjective containing or abounding with large marine animals (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 17885/72933

grāhay	verb (class 10 ātmanepada) to cause to marry (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to cause to take or seize or lay hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to deliver (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to make acquainted with (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 3421/72933

grāhaṇa	noun (neuter) making someone take something taking Frequency rank 27906/72933

grāhika	adjective insisting upon with tenacity (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51755/72933

grāhikā	noun (feminine) caṣaka ifc. the taking hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one of the 3 folds which lead off the feces from the body (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 23922/72933

grāhin	noun (masculine) Feronia elephantum Frequency rank 34774/72933

grāhin	adjective holding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) ifc. seizing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) laying hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 2355/72933

grāhiphala	noun (masculine) Feronica elephantum (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51758/72933

grāhitā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 51757/72933

grāhiṇī	noun (feminine) a great kind of lizard (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a variety of Mimosa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a variety of the Alhagi plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 34776/72933

grāhiṇīya	adjective Frequency rank 51756/72933

grāhya	adjective (in astron.) to be observed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) meant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be accepted as a rule or law (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be acknowledged or assented to (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be admitted in evidence (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be attended to or obeyed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be captured or imprisoned (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be chosen or taken account of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be clasped or spanned (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be considered (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be insisted upon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be overpowered (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be perceived or recognised or understood (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be picked or gathered (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be put (as confidence) in (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be received in a friendly or hospitable manner (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be received or accepted or gained (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be seized or taken or held (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be taken in marriage (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be understood in a particular sense (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be undertaken or followed (a vow) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21246/72933

grāhya	noun (neuter) poison (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the objects of sensual perception (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 9364/72933

grāhyagandhaka	noun (masculine) mustard Frequency rank 72843/72933

grāma	noun (masculine neuter) a number of tones (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) an inhabited place (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) any number of men associated together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) class (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) collection or number (in general) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) community (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) gamut (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) hamlet (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) ifc. a multitude (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) inhabitants (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) multitude (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) people (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) race (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) scale (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the collective inhabitants of a place (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the old women of a family (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) troop (esp. of soldiers) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 926/72933

grāmadeśādhipa	noun (masculine) [rel.] a form of Śiva Frequency rank 51734/72933

grāmajā	noun (feminine) a kind of bean (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51732/72933

grāmaka	noun (masculine) a small village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a town (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21245/72933

grāmamṛga	noun (masculine) a dog (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51735/72933

grāmasiṃha	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 34768/72933

grāmavāstavya	noun (masculine) the inhabitant of a village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) villager (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51736/72933

grāmayājaka	adjective offering sacrifices or conducting the ceremonies for every member of a community including unworthy persons (doing it out of avarice) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 34767/72933

grāmaśūkara	noun (masculine) a domestic pig Frequency rank 51737/72933

grāmaṇa	adjective coming from Grāmaṇī (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 27903/72933

grāmaṇi	noun (masculine) a village barber (chief person of a village) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) chief (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) chief (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) leader of a troop or army (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) lord of the manor (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) pre-eminent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) squire (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) superintendent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the leader or chief of a village or community (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 17883/72933

grāmaṇya	adjective coming from a village Frequency rank 19282/72933

grāmaṇīya	noun (masculine) name of a people (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51733/72933

grāmecara	noun (masculine) a villager (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) householder (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51740/72933

grāmeruka	noun (neuter) (a substance) Frequency rank 51742/72933

grāmeyaka	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 34770/72933

grāmeyikā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 51741/72933

grāmika	noun (masculine) a villager (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 23919/72933

grāmin	adjective pertaining to a village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) rustic (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) surrounded by a village or community or race (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21244/72933

grāmya	noun (masculine) a domesticated animal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a villager (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 16752/72933

grāmya	adjective allowed in a village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) cultivated (a plant) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) living (in villages) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) prepared in a village (as food) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) relating to a musical scale (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) relating to the sensual pleasures of a village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) relating to villages (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) rustic (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) tame (an animal) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) used or produced in a village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) vulgar (speech) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 3908/72933

grāmya	noun (neuter) food prepared in a village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) rustic or homely speech (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) sensual pleasure (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) sexual intercourse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the Prākṛt and the other dialects of India as contra-distinguished from the Sanskṛt (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 15688/72933

grāmyacaṭaka	noun (masculine) a kind of bird Frequency rank 51747/72933

grāmyadharma	noun (masculine) a villager's duty (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) sexual intercourse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 15689/72933

grāmyakarkaṭī	noun (feminine) Benincasa cerifera (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51743/72933

grāmyakola	noun (masculine) a domestic pig (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51744/72933

grāmyakośātakī	noun (feminine) name of a cucurbitaceous plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51745/72933

grāmyakroḍa	noun (masculine) a domestic pig (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51746/72933

grāmyakukkuṭa	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 34771/72933

grāmyasukha	noun (neuter) sexual intercourse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) sleep (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51750/72933

grāmyatā	noun (feminine) rustic or vulgar speech (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51748/72933

grāmyavallabhā	noun (feminine) Beta bengalensis (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51749/72933

grāmyā	noun (feminine) indigo plant Frequency rank 23920/72933

grāmāntīya	noun (neuter) place near a village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51738/72933

grāmī	noun (feminine) a group of villages Frequency rank 23918/72933

grāmīyaka	noun (masculine) the member of a community (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51739/72933

grāmīṇa	adjective produced in or peculiar to a village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) rude (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) rustic (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) vulgar (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 14871/72933

grāmīṇā	noun (feminine) Beta Bengalensis Frequency rank 34769/72933

grāsa	noun (masculine) (in geom.) a piece cut out by the intersection of 2 circles (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a mouthful (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) amount of obscuration (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) an eclipse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) destruction (of external objects) food (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) inarticulate pronunciation of the gutturals (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) lump (of rice etc. of the size of a peacock's egg) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) morsel bitten (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) nourishment (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) slurring (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the act of eclipsing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the erosion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the first contact with an eclipsed disk (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the quantity eclipsed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a "mouthful" of metals etc. swallowed by mercury a flaw in a jewel Frequency rank 1358/72933

grāsaka	adjective verschlingend Frequency rank 51751/72933

grāsamāna	noun (neuter) the quantity of a dravya that mercury can absorb after the dīpana-Saṃskāra Frequency rank 12032/72933

grāsana	noun (neuter) (mercurys) swallowing another substance Frequency rank 51752/72933

grāsapramāṇa	noun (neuter) a kind of process applied to mercury (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the size of a morsel (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 23921/72933

grāsay	verb (class 10 parasmaipada) img/alchemy.bmp Frequency rank 17884/72933

grāsinī	noun (feminine) name of a goddess Frequency rank 34773/72933

grāsājīrṇa	noun (neuter) "diarrhea" caused by a grāsa Frequency rank 27904/72933

grāsāntara	noun (neuter) [medic.] Frequency rank 27905/72933

grāsārthin	adjective (alchem.) Quecksilber, das Amalgame bilden kann Frequency rank 51753/72933

grāsīkṛ	verb (class 8 ātmanepada) Frequency rank 19283/72933

grāvan	noun (masculine) grāva-stŁt (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a mountain (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a stone for pressing out the Soma (originally 2 were used) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a stone or rock (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) cloud (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 11624/72933

grāvastut	noun (masculine) one of the 16 priests (called after the hymn RV 10.9) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 34772/72933

grīva	noun (masculine) a corridor (?) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the neck (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 9828/72933

grīvā	noun (feminine) nape (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) neck (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the back part of the neck (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 2135/72933

grīṣma	noun (masculine) the hot season Frequency rank 2611/72933

grīṣmaka	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 34777/72933

grīṣmapuṣpī	noun (feminine) the plant Karuṇī (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51759/72933

grīṣmasaṃdara	noun (masculine) a kind of plant Frequency rank 72844/72933

grīṣmasundarā	noun (masculine feminine) Mollugo cerviana Seringe Frequency rank 21247/72933

grīṣmavarṣā	noun (feminine) a kind of mahauṣadhī Frequency rank 51760/72933

grīṣmodbhavā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 51761/72933

agra	adjective anterior (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) best (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) chief (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) first (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) foremost (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) projecting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) prominent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) supernumerary (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 20433/72933

agra	noun (neuter) a measure of food given as alms (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a weight equal to a pala (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) aim (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) foremost point or part (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) front (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) goal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) multitude (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) point (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) sharpness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) summit (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) surface (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the beginning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the climax or best part (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the nearest end (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the sun's amplitude (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) tip (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) top (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) uppermost part (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 345/72933

agraka	noun (neuter) agra Frequency rank 26113/72933

agrakara	noun (masculine) finger (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) first ray (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the fore part of the hand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 22821/72933

agraga	noun (masculine) a leader (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 26114/72933

agragaṇya	adjective principal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be counted or regarded as the foremost (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41721/72933

agragāmin	adjective preceding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking the lead (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41722/72933

agraja	noun (masculine) a Brahman (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) an elder brother (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the first-born (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 3898/72933

agrajā	noun (feminine) an elder sister (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 31401/72933

agrajanman	noun (masculine) a Brahman (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a member of one of the three highest castes (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) an elder brother (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Brahmā (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the first-born (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 11879/72933

agraṇī	noun (feminine) leader [wrong declension class!] Frequency rank 18715/72933

agratā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 41723/72933

agratas	indeclinable (with gen.) before (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) before (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) first (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) in front (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) in presence of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) in the beginning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 1450/72933

agrathita	adjective Frequency rank 41724/72933

agranthi	adjective Frequency rank 41725/72933

agranthita	adjective Frequency rank 41726/72933

agrabhuj	adjective having the precedence in eating (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of the sun (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 31402/72933

agramahiṣī	noun (feminine) the principal queen (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 22822/72933

agrayāyin	noun (masculine) a Ieader (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41727/72933

agrayodhin	noun (masculine) a champion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the foremost man or leader in a fight (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41728/72933

agrarūpa	noun (neuter) [medic.] prāgrūpa, a prodrome Frequency rank 41729/72933

agravakra	noun (neuter) a kind of surgical knife Frequency rank 41730/72933

agravarti	noun (feminine) [medic.] a kind of varti whose tip is wrapped with a thread Frequency rank 41731/72933

agraśas	indeclinable from the beginning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 31403/72933

agrasena	noun (masculine) name of Janamejaya's son (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41732/72933

agrasta	adjective Frequency rank 31404/72933

agraha	adjective Frequency rank 41733/72933

agraha	noun (masculine) a houseless man (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) non acceptance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) not an eclipse Frequency rank 17459/72933

agrahaṇa	noun (neuter) Frequency rank 8539/72933

agrahaṇīya	adjective not understandable unseizable Frequency rank 31405/72933

agrahāra	noun (masculine) royal donation of land to Brāhmans (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 22823/72933

agrāmya	adjective not rustic (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) not tame (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) townmade (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) wild (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 12312/72933

agrāmyatā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 41734/72933

agrāsana	noun (neuter) seat of honour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41735/72933

agrāha	adjective not grasping (?) Frequency rank 41736/72933

agrāhin	adjective not holding (said of a leech and of tools) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) not taking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 26115/72933

agrāhya	adjective not to be conceived or perceived or obtained or admitted or trusted (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be rejected (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 6959/72933

agrāhyaka	adjective impalpable (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) not to be perceived (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41737/72933

agrima	adjective being in front (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) eldest (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) furthest advanced (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) occurring further on or below (in a book) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) preceding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) principal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) prior (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the foremost (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 15380/72933

agriya	noun (neuter) the best part (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the first-fruits (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41738/72933

agrībhū	verb (class 1 ātmanepada) Frequency rank 41739/72933

agrīya	adjective best (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41740/72933

agrīva	adjective having no neck Frequency rank 41741/72933

agre	indeclinable first in presence of Frequency rank 3604/72933

agreṇa	indeclinable before (in time) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) in front (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41742/72933

agretana	adjective occurring further on (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) subsequently (in a book) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 22824/72933

agredidhiṣu	noun (feminine) a married woman whose elder sister is still unmarried (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 31406/72933

agredidhiṣu	noun (masculine) a man who at his first marriage takes a wife that was married before (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41743/72933

agrevadha	noun (masculine) hitting or killing whatever is in front (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of Śiva Frequency rank 41744/72933

agresara	adjective best (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) going in front (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) preceding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 16354/72933

agropaharaṇīya	noun (masculine) name of Suśr Sū. 6 Frequency rank 22825/72933

agryā	noun (feminine) gorocanā Triphala (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 31407/72933

agrya	adjective best (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) foremost (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) principal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) proficient (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) topmost (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) well versed in (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 1656/72933

agryatā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 41745/72933

aṅgagraha	noun (masculine) spasm (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41766/72933

aṅgāragranthika	noun (masculine) Name einer mediz. Substanz Frequency rank 41788/72933

acyutāgraja	noun (masculine) Balarāma (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Indra (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41855/72933

atigraha	noun (masculine) act of taking over or beyond surpassing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who takes or seizes to an extraordinary extent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 42034/72933

atīsāragrahaṇīdoṣanidāna	noun (neuter) name of Aṣṭāṅgahṛdayasaṃhitā, Nid. 8 Frequency rank 42292/72933

atyugra	noun (neuter) Asa Foetida (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 31618/72933

atyugragranthā	noun (feminine) name of a plant Frequency rank 42340/72933

atyugratama	adjective extremely terrible Frequency rank 42341/72933

anaṅguligrāhin	adjective not sticking to the fingers Frequency rank 42569/72933

ananugraha	noun (masculine) Fehlen von anugraha Frequency rank 31723/72933

anavagraha	adjective not to be intercepted (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) resistless (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 42763/72933

anigraha	noun (masculine) non-refutation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) non-restraint (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) not owning one's self refuted (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 20558/72933

anigraha	adjective unrestrained (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) without a handle Frequency rank 31843/72933

anigrahasthāna	noun (neuter) (in phil.) occasion of non-refutation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 42940/72933

anirgrantha	adjective Frequency rank 42971/72933

anugra	adjective gentle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) mild (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) not harsh or violent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 31891/72933

anugrahā	noun (feminine) [rel.] name of a Śakti Frequency rank 22983/72933

anugrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to favour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to follow in taking or plundering (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to foster (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to oblige (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to receive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to treat with kindness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to uphold (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to welcome (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 2351/72933

anugraha	noun (masculine) assistance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) conferring benefits (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) facilitating by incantations (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) favour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) kindness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of the eighth or fifth creation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) promoting or furthering a good object (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) rear-guard (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) showing favour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 1362/72933

anugrahaka	adjective Frequency rank 43077/72933

anugrahaṇa	noun (neuter) Frequency rank 16399/72933

anugrahītṛ	adjective Frequency rank 43078/72933

anugraheśa	noun (masculine) [rel.] a form of Śiva Frequency rank 43079/72933

anugrāhaka	adjective facilitating (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) favourable (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) favouring (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) furthering (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) gracious (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) kind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 7911/72933

anugrāhin	adjective favourable (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) gracious (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 22984/72933

anugrāhyatā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 31892/72933

anudgrāhin	adjective Frequency rank 43145/72933

anusaṃgrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to favour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to oblige (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to salute by laying hold of the feet (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 43363/72933

anusaṃgraha	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 43364/72933

anekāgra	adjective engaged in various pursuits (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 20602/72933

anaikāgrya	noun (neuter) diversity Frequency rank 43410/72933

apagrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to disjoin (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take away (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to tear off (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 32093/72933

aparigraha	adjective destitute of attendants or of a wife (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) destitute of possession (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 18824/72933

aparigraha	noun (masculine) deprivation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) destitution (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of Śiva non-acceptance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) not including (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) poverty (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) renouncing (of any possession besides the necessary utensils of ascetics) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 14656/72933

aparigrahavant	adjective without possession Frequency rank 43665/72933

aparigrāhin	adjective not greedy Frequency rank 43666/72933

apigrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to close (the mouth, nose etc.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 43785/72933

apragraha	adjective jemand, der keine Essensvorräte hat (nīvārādisaṃgraharahita) Frequency rank 32193/72933

apratigraha	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 43860/72933

apratigrahaṇa	adjective not accepting Frequency rank 43861/72933

apratigrahaṇa	noun (neuter) not accepting (a girl into marriage) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) not marrying (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 43862/72933

apratigrāhya	adjective unacceptable (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 23081/72933

aprāpyagrahaṇa	noun (neuter) perception of an object though the senses are not in any direct connection with it (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 43997/72933

abhigrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to accept (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to fold (the hands) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to lay together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to receive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to set (as a blossom) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take up (from the soil) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 16441/72933

abhigraha	noun (masculine) a vow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) attack (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) authority (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) challenge (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) defiance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) onset (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) plundering (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) robbing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizing taking hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 32287/72933

abhigrahaṇa	noun (neuter) robbing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 44119/72933

abhigrāhaka	adjective Frequency rank 44120/72933

abhigrāhay	verb (class 10 ātmanepada) to make someone catch someone Frequency rank 44121/72933

abhinigraha	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 44171/72933

abhipragrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) Frequency rank 44212/72933

abhyagra	adjective constant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) fresh (as blood) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) having the point turned or directed towards (acc.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) near (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) perpetual (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) quick (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 44451/72933

abhyugra	adjective Frequency rank 44504/72933

amlāgrimavetasa	noun (masculine) amlavetasa Frequency rank 44745/72933

ayogra	noun (neuter) a pestle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 44790/72933

arasagrāhitā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 44839/72933

alaṃgrāsa	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 26663/72933

avagrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) (in Gr.) to separate (as words or parts of a word) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to divide (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to impede (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to keep back from (abl.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to let go (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to let loose (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to perceive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to stop (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 11922/72933

avagraha	noun (masculine) a form of knowlege (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a herd of elephants (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) an elephant's forehead (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) an imprecation or term of abuse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) an iron hook with which elephants are driven (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) drought (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) impediment (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) nature (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) obstacle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) original temperament (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) restraint (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) separation of the component parts of a compound (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) separation of the stem and certain suffixes and terminations (occurring in the Pada text of the Vedas) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the mark or the interval of such a separation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the syllable or letter after which the separation occurs (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 13344/72933

avagrahaṇa	noun (neuter) disrespect (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the act of impeding or restraining (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 45103/72933

avagrāha	noun (masculine) a bucket (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) drought (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) impediment (used in imprecations) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) obstacle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 45104/72933

avigraha	adjective (said of a word) the not occurring in a separate form (but only in a compound) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) bodiless (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) indisputable (as the Dharma) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 23238/72933

avigrahatva	noun (neuter) the state of being bodiless Frequency rank 45340/72933

avyagra	adjective cool (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) deliberate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) not in danger (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) safe (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) steady (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) unconfused (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) undisturbed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) unoccupied (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 3529/72933

aśvagrīva	noun (masculine) name of a son of Citraka (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of an Asura (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 17627/72933

aṣṭāṅgasaṃgraha	noun (masculine) name of a text Frequency rank 32820/72933

asadāgraha	adjective Frequency rank 45761/72933

asadgraha	noun (masculine) caprice (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) idle or childish desire (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 26814/72933

asamagra	adjective incomplete (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) partial (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) unentire (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 18947/72933

asaṃgraha	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 45825/72933

asaṃgrāhya	adjective Frequency rank 26830/72933

ākhugrāvan	noun (masculine) ākhupāṣāṇa Frequency rank 46213/72933

āgranthana	noun (neuter) Frequency rank 46241/72933

āgrayaṇa	noun (neuter) oblation consisting of first-fruits at the end of the rainy season (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 16536/72933

āgrayaṇa	noun (masculine) a form of Agni (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the first Soma libation at the Agniṣṭoma sacrifice (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 46242/72933

āgrayaṇaka	noun (neuter) oblation consisting of the first-fruits (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 46243/72933

āgrayaṇeṣṭi	noun (feminine) oblation of the first-fruits (in harvest) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 46244/72933

āgrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to hold in (as horses) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 32997/72933

āgraha	noun (masculine) affection (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) favour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) insisting on (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) obstinacy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) strong or obstinate inclination for (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) whim (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 32998/72933

āgrahaṇa	noun (neuter) Frequency rank 46245/72933

āgrahāyaṇa	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 46246/72933

āgrahāyaṇī	noun (feminine) a kind of Pākayajña (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of the constellation Mṛgaśiras (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the day of full moon in the month Agrahāyaṇa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 23340/72933

āgrahāyaṇika	adjective containing a full moon of Agrahāyaṇa (as a month or half a month or a year) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to be paid (as a debt) on the day of full moon of the month Agrahāyaṇa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 46247/72933

āgrahārika	adjective one who appropriates to himself an agrahāra or an endowment of lands or villages conferred upon Brāhmans (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 46248/72933

indriyanigraha	noun (masculine) [rel.] name of a Tīrtha Frequency rank 46950/72933

ugra	noun (neuter) a particular poison (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) anger (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the root of Aconitum Ferox (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) wrath (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 20902/72933

ugra	adjective acrid (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) angry (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) cruel (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) ferocious (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) fierce (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) formidable (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) high (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) hot (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) huge (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) impetuous (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) mighty (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) noble (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) passionate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) powerful (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) pungent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) savage (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) sharp (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) strong (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) terrible (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) violent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) wrathful (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 790/72933

ugrā	noun (feminine) Artemisia Sternutatoria (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a form of Devī a woman of the caste of Ugra Coriandrum Sativum (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of an attendant of Devī (K.R. von Kooji (1972), 50) Frequency rank 10046/72933

ugra	noun (masculine) a group of asterisms (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a son of Dhṛtarāṣṭra (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a twice-born man who perpetrates dreadful deeds (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a Dānava (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a mixed tribe (from a Kṣatriya father and Śūdra mother) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a particular Rudra (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of Rudra or Śiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of the Malabar country (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the Guru of Narendrāditya (who built a temple called Ugreśa) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the tree Hyperanthera Moringa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 5817/72933

ugrakāṇḍa	noun (masculine) a sort of gourd (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Momordica Charantia (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 33317/72933

ugragandha	noun (neuter) Asa Foetida (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 47032/72933

ugragandha	noun (masculine) garlic (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the plant Michelia Champaca (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 23441/72933

ugragandhā	noun (feminine) Artemisia Sternutatoria (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a medicinal plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Ligusticum Ajowan (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) orris root (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Pimpinella Involucrata (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the common caraway (Carum.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 11549/72933

ugragandhikā	noun (feminine) a species of caraway (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 47033/72933

ugracaṇḍā	noun (feminine) name of a goddess (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 27071/72933

ugratā	noun (feminine) anger (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) passion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) violence (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 33318/72933

ugratara	adjective Frequency rank 27072/72933

ugratārā	noun (feminine) name of a goddess (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 47034/72933

ugradhanvan	noun (masculine) name of Indra (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 23442/72933

ugrabhairavī	noun (feminine) name of a goddess Frequency rank 33319/72933

ugrayāyin	noun (masculine) name of a son of Dhṛtarāṣṭra Frequency rank 33320/72933

ugraretas	noun (masculine) a form of Rudra (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 47035/72933

ugravīrya	noun (neuter) Asa Foetida Frequency rank 47036/72933

ugraśṛṅgaka	noun (masculine) a kind of poison Frequency rank 33321/72933

ugraśravas	noun (masculine) name of a man (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 17703/72933

ugrasena	noun (masculine) name of a Gandharva name of a son of Āhuka name of several princes (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 6396/72933

ugrasenī	noun (feminine) name of the wife of Akrūra (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 33322/72933

ugrasūladhṛk	noun (masculine) a form of Bhairava Frequency rank 47037/72933

ugrāyudha	noun (masculine) name of a prince (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a son of Dhṛtarāṣṭra Frequency rank 13399/72933

ugreśa	noun (masculine) name of a sanctuary built by Ugra (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of Śiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the mighty or terrible lord (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 47038/72933

udagra	adjective advanced (in age) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) enraptured (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) excited (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) fierce (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) haughty (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) having the top elevated or upwards (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) high (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) increased (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) intense (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) large (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) long (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) loud (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) over-topping (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) projecting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) tall (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) towering or pointing upwards (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) vast (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 6983/72933

udagratara	adjective Frequency rank 47255/72933

udgrathana	noun (neuter) the act of winding round (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 27138/72933

udgranth	verb (class 9 parasmaipada) to fasten (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to tie into bundles (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to tie up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to truss (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to wind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 27139/72933

udgranthi	adjective free (from worldly ties) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) untied (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 47315/72933

udgrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to allow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to bespeak (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to break off (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to cause (the rain) to cease (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to concede (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to discontinue (speaking) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to draw out (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to elevate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to erect (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to grant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to intercept (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to keep above (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to lift up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to preserve (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to raise (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to save (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to set up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take away (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take away from (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take out (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to tear away (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 19041/72933

udgrahaṇa	noun (neuter) describing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) lifting up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) recovering (a debt) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the act of taking out (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 47317/72933

udgrāha	noun (masculine) (in music) the introductory part of a piece (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a Sandhi rule (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) objection (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) reception (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) replying in argument (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 47318/72933

udgrāhay	verb (class 10 parasmaipada) to cause to take up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to describe (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to set forth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 33439/72933

udgrīva	adjective having the neck turned upwards (as a vessel) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who raises or lifts up the neck (in trying to see anything) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 47319/72933

upagrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to accept (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to approve (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to become master of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to collect a fluid (by holding a vessel under) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to comprehend (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to conciliate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to draw near (to one's self) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to hold under (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to obtain (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to propitiate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to put under (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to renew (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to seize (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to seize from below (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to subdue (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to support (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take as one's ally (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take possession of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take up again (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 9335/72933

upagraha	noun (masculine) a handful (of Kuśa grass) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a kind of demon causing diseases (supposed to preside over the planets) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a kind of Sandhi or peace (purchased by the cession of everything) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a prisoner (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) adding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) addition (of a sound) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) alteration (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) an e used as Nidhana at the end of a Sāman (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) change (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) coaxing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) conciliation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) confinement (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) propitiation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizure (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the Pada or voice of a verb (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 12406/72933

upagrahaṇa	noun (neuter) capture (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) comprehending (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) holding under (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) learning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizure (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) supporting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the act of seizing from below (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the taking any one prisoner (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 47472/72933

upagrāhin	adjective grasping Frequency rank 47473/72933

upagrāhaka	adjective Frequency rank 47474/72933

upagrāhitṛ	adjective Frequency rank 47475/72933

upasaṃgrah	verb (class 9 parasmaipada) to greet respectfully (by embracing the feet) Frequency rank 6988/72933

upasaṃgraha	noun (masculine) a pillow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) bringing together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) clasping (a woman) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) collecting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) cushion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) embrace (esp. of the feet of a revered person) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) embracing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) joining (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) polite address (performed by touching the feet of the addressed person with one's hands) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) respectful salutation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the act of clasping round (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 17727/72933

upasaṃgrahaṇa	noun (neuter) embracing (e.g. the feet) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) respectful salutation (by embracing the feet) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the act of clasping round (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 15572/72933

upodgrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to bring near (to the mouth) after (others have done so) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to know (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to perceive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 47764/72933

uṣṭragrīvī	noun (feminine) a kind of weapon Frequency rank 47851/72933

uṣṭragrīva	noun (masculine) hemorrhoids (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) [medic.] a kind of bhagaṃdara Frequency rank 20970/72933

ṛjugranthi	noun (masculine) [medic.] a kind of bandage [medic.] a kind of suture Frequency rank 47891/72933

ekāgra	adjective absorbed in (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) celebrated (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) closely attentive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) fixing one's attention upon one point or object (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) having one point (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) intent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) known (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one-pointed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) undisturbed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) unperplexed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 4028/72933

ekāgrīkṛ	verb (class 8 parasmaipada) Frequency rank 48014/72933

ekāgrībhū	verb (class 1 parasmaipada) Frequency rank 33656/72933

aikāgrya	noun (neuter) intentness or concentration on one object (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 13421/72933

augrya	noun (neuter) dreadfulness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) fierceness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) horribleness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 48160/72933

kacagrahaṇa	noun (neuter) seizing the hair (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 48261/72933

kaṭugranthi	noun (neuter) the root of long pepper Frequency rank 27341/72933

kaṇṭhagraha	noun (masculine) clinging to the neck (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) embrace (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) embracing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 33761/72933

kaṇṭhagrahaṇa	noun (neuter) embrace (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 48400/72933

kandagranthin	noun (masculine) a kind of plant Frequency rank 48493/72933

kambugrīva	noun (neuter) a shell (śaṅkha) Frequency rank 48618/72933

kambugrīva	noun (masculine) name of a tortoise (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 27395/72933

kambugrīvā	noun (feminine) Andropogon Aciculatus [rel.] name of Devī Frequency rank 27396/72933

karagraha	noun (masculine) marriage (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking the hand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 27398/72933

karagrāhin	adjective bridegroom (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking the hand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 48629/72933

karīragranthila	noun (masculine) Capparis Aphylla Frequency rank 48692/72933

kavalagraha	noun (masculine) 1 karṣa a gargle (G.J. Meulenbeld (0), 209) a weight (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the taking a mouthful of water for swallowing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) water for rinsing the mouth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 14091/72933

kimagraṇya	adjective having which leader? Frequency rank 17792/72933

kīdṛgrūpa	adjective of what shape? (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 49515/72933

kucāgra	noun (neuter) a nipple (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 49555/72933

kuñjaragraha	noun (masculine) an elephantcatcher (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 49571/72933

kuśāgra	noun (masculine) name of a prince [<- Bṛhadratha <- Caidyoparicara] Frequency rank 23748/72933

kuśāgrīya	adjective penetrating (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) sharp as the point of Kuśa grass (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 49837/72933

kuśāgrīyamati	adjective intelligent Frequency rank 49838/72933

kṛmigranthi	noun (masculine) a disease of the eyes (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a kind of disease of the joints (saṃdhi) Frequency rank 19190/72933

kṛṣṇaśigru	noun (masculine) the plant Moringa pterygosperma (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 50041/72933

ketugrahavallabha	noun (masculine neuter) vaiḍūrya Frequency rank 50077/72933

kṣemogratīrtha	noun (masculine) name of a king Frequency rank 50732/72933

gaganagrāsa	noun (masculine) a preparation of mercury Frequency rank 23845/72933

gaṇāgraṇī	noun (feminine) leader name of Gaṇeśa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) [rel.] name of Devī Frequency rank 21186/72933

gadāgraja	noun (masculine) name of Kṛṣṇa ("elder brother of Gada") (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 16738/72933

gadāgraṇī	noun (feminine) consumption (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51041/72933

garuḍāgraja	noun (masculine) name of Aruṇa (charioteer of the sun) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 51149/72933

galagraha	noun (masculine) a fish-sauce (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) begun but immediately interrupted study (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) compression of the throat (a kind of disease) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Kehlkrampf name of certain days in the dark fortnight (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizing by the throat (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) throttling (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 9594/72933

galagrāha	noun (masculine) a crocodile of the Ganges (the long-nosed alligator) Frequency rank 51205/72933

gṛhāvagrahaṇī	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 51491/72933

gograha	noun (masculine) booty (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21227/72933

gauḍagrāvan	noun (masculine) gauḍapāṣāṇa Frequency rank 51633/72933

caṇḍogrā	noun (feminine) name of one of the 8 Nāyikās of Durgā (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21271/72933

citragrīva	noun (masculine) name of a pigeon-king (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 12037/72933

chinnagranthanikā	noun (feminine) a kind of plant Frequency rank 52573/72933

chinnagranthinikā	noun (feminine) a kind of bulbous plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 28041/72933

jāgrant	noun (masculine neuter) waking Frequency rank 6224/72933

jāgra	noun (masculine) waking state (?) Frequency rank 52864/72933

jāgr	noun (masculine) [gramm.] root jāgṛ Frequency rank 52865/72933

jāgrata	noun (masculine) a kind of Soma Frequency rank 52866/72933

tantuvigrahā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 53278/72933

tarkasaṃgraha	noun (masculine) name of a manual of the Vaiśeshika branch of the Nyāya phil. by Annambhaṭṭa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 35328/72933

tārāgraha	noun (masculine) one of the 5 lesser planets exclusive of the sun and moon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 28194/72933

tīkṣṇāgratva	noun (neuter) Frequency rank 53622/72933

tṛṇagranthi	noun (feminine) name of a plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 53740/72933

tṛṇagrāhin	noun (masculine) sapphire or another gem (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 24131/72933

trihalikāgrāma	noun (masculine) name of a Tīrtha (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 54027/72933

tryailokyagrasanātmaka	noun (masculine) a form of Śiva Frequency rank 54079/72933

tvagruja	noun (masculine) a kind of plant Frequency rank 54094/72933

daṇḍagrahaṇa	noun (neuter) becoming an ascetic (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 54151/72933

dantagrāhin	adjective an den Zähnen ziehend Frequency rank 54205/72933

dantagrāhitā	noun (feminine) the state of injuring the teeth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 54206/72933

daśagrīva	noun (masculine) name of a demon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a son of Damaghosha (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of an enemy of Vṛṣa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 2435/72933

dāmagranthi	noun (masculine) a name assumed by Nakula (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 28333/72933

dīrghagranthi	noun (masculine) Scindapsus Officinalis (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 54521/72933

dīrghagrīva	noun (masculine) a camel (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a kind of curlew (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a people (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 54522/72933

durabhigrahā	noun (feminine) Alhagi Maurorum (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Mucuna Pruritus (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21460/72933

durabhigraha	noun (masculine) Achyranthes Aspera (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 54612/72933

durāgraha	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 54620/72933

durgraha	noun (masculine) Achyranthes aspera Linn. cramp (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) insisting upon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) monomania (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) obstinacy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) spasm (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the evil demon of illness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) whim (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21464/72933

durgraha	adjective difficult to be seized or caught or attained or won or accomplished or understood (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 15760/72933

durgrāha	adjective Frequency rank 54667/72933

durgrāhya	adjective Frequency rank 35734/72933

durnigraha	adjective difficult to be restrained or conquered (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 35746/72933

dṛḍhagranthi	noun (masculine) a bamboo (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 54864/72933

dṛḍhagrāhin	adjective pursuing an object with untiring energy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizing firmly (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 54865/72933

devagrāma	noun (masculine) name of a village at the Narmadā Frequency rank 54922/72933

dravayasaṃgrahaṇīya	noun (masculine) name of Suśrutasaṃhitā, Sū. 38 Frequency rank 55104/72933

dvijāgrya	noun (masculine) a chief or respectable Brāhman (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 8621/72933

dhanurgraha	noun (masculine) an archer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) bearing a bow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a son of Dhṛtarāṣṭra (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the art of managing a bow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 24297/72933

dhātusaṃgraha	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 55399/72933

dhūmanasyakavalagrahacikitsita	noun (neuter) name of Suśrutasaṃhitā, Cik. 40 Frequency rank 55511/72933

dhvajagrīva	noun (masculine) name of a Rakṣas (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 55560/72933

nandigrāma	noun (masculine) name of a village near Daulatābād (where Bharata resided during Rāmas exile) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 10391/72933

navagrahākṛtivijñānīya	noun (masculine) name of Suśrutasaṃhitā, Utt. 27 Frequency rank 55741/72933

nābhigranthi	noun (masculine) Name eines Körperteils (?) the intestines near the navel Frequency rank 36190/72933

nāmagrahaṇa	noun (neuter) Frequency rank 55881/72933

nāmagrāha	noun (masculine) naming (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 55882/72933

nāsāgra	noun (neuter) the tip of the nose (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 19504/72933

nigrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to attract (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to catch (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to close (as the eyes) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to contract (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to curb (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to depress (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to draw near (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to hold (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to hold down (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to hold fast (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to keep or hold back (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to lower (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to punish (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to restrain (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to seize (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to stop (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to suppress (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to tame (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 2045/72933

nigraha	noun (masculine) (esp. in Nyāya phil.) an occasion for refutation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a boundary (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a place or occasion for being caught hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a weak point in an argument or fault in a syllogism (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) any punishment or chastisement (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) anything for catching hold of. a handle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) arresting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) aversion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) binding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) blame (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) catching (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) coercion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) confinement (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) cure (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) defeat (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) destruction (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) disgust (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) dislike (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) holding fast (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) ill-will (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) imprisonment (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) keeping down or back (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) limit (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of Śiva and ViṣṇuKṛṣṇa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) overthrow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) reprimand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) restraining (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) subjugation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) suppression (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) suppression of an illness i.e. healing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 1896/72933

nigrahaṇa	adjective holding down (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) suppressing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 18054/72933

nigrahaṇa	noun (neuter) capture (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) fight (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) imprisonment (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) punishment (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) subduing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) suppression (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) war (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 19508/72933

nigrahasthāna	noun (neuter) Frequency rank 15813/72933

nigrahītṛ	noun (masculine) one who keeps back or prevents (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who seizes or lays hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 55968/72933

nigrāhay	verb (class 10 parasmaipada) to cause to be apprehended or seized (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 55969/72933

nibandhasaṃgraha	noun (masculine) name of Ḍalhaṇas commentary on Suśr Frequency rank 56029/72933

niragraha	adjective Frequency rank 56071/72933

niranugraha	adjective ungracious (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) unkind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 28663/72933

niravagraha	adjective headstrong (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) independent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) self-willed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) unrestrained (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 15820/72933

nirgrantha	adjective a fool (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a gambler (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a saint who has withdrawn from the world and lives either as a hermit or a religious mendicant wandering about naked (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) free from all ties or hindrances (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) idiot (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) manslaughter (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) murder (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) poor (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) without possessions (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 18068/72933

nirgranthika	adjective Frequency rank 56183/72933

nirgrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) Frequency rank 56184/72933

nirvyagra	adjective calm (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) unconfused (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 36370/72933

niśāgrāva	noun (masculine) haridrāśman Frequency rank 56383/72933

niṣparigraha	adjective having no property (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 9867/72933

niṣparigraha	noun (masculine) an ascetic without family or dependants (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21604/72933

nīlagrīva	noun (masculine) name of a prince (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of Śiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 13037/72933

nīlaśigru	noun (masculine) Moringa Pterygosperma (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 56677/72933

naiyagrodha	adjective belonging to or made of the Indian fig-tree (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 56774/72933

naiyagrodha	noun (neuter) the fruit of the Indian fig-tree (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 56775/72933

nyagrodha	noun (masculine) a fathom (measured by the arms extended) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a monastery and a village (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Ficus Indica (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Mimosa Suma (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a Brāhman (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a son of Kṛṣṇa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a son of Ugrasena (also ūdhaka) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Prosopis Spicigera (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the Banyan or Indian fig-tree (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 3216/72933

nyagrodhā	noun (feminine) Salvinia Cucullata or some other plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21622/72933

nyagrodhavarga	noun (masculine) [medic.] nyagrodhādi Frequency rank 28803/72933

nyagrodhādi	noun (masculine) name of a gaṇa Frequency rank 7699/72933

nyagrodhādika	noun (masculine) nyagrodhādi Frequency rank 56814/72933

nyagrodhādya	noun (masculine) [medic.] nyagrodhādi Frequency rank 56815/72933

nyagrodhikā	noun (feminine) Salvinia cucullata Roxb. Frequency rank 56816/72933

patadgraha	noun (masculine) a receptacle for alms (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a spittoon (?) the rear of an army (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 57010/72933

parigrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) (in Ved. gram.) to enclose (iti) between a word twice repeated (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to accept (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to adopt (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to assist (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to catch (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to clutch (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to conform to (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to conquer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to embrace (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to enfold (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to envelop (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to excel (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to fence round (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to follow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to grasp (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to hedge round (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to marry (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to master (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to occupy on both sides (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to overpower (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to put on (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to receive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to seize (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to surpass (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to surround (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take (a wife) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take (food) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take (in war) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take by the hand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take hold of on both sides (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take or carry along with one (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take possession of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take prisoner (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to wear (as a dress or ornament) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 2745/72933

parigraha	noun (masculine) a curse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a house (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a wife (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) abode (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) accepting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) acquisition (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) admittance (into one's house) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) an eclipse of the sun (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) assistance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) assuming (a form etc.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) attaining (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) attendants (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) beginning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) choice (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) claim on (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) commission or performance of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) comprehending (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) conception (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) concern with (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) constraint (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) control (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) dominion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) enclosing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) family (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) favour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) fencing round (esp. the Vedi or sacrificial altar by means of three lines or furrows) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) force (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) foundation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) getting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) gift or present (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) grace (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) help (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) homage (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) hospitable reception (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) household (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) imprecation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) laying hold of on all sides (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) marriage (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) marrying (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) oath (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) occupation with (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) origin (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) possession (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) property (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) punishment (opp. to anugraha) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) putting on (a dress etc.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) receiving or anything received (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) relation to (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) retinue (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) reverence (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) root (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) selection (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) sum (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) summing up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) surrounding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking (a wife) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the double mention of a word both before and after iti (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the form which precedes iti (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the rear or reserve of an army (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the seraglio of a prince (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) totality (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) understanding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) undertaking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) wrapping round (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 1832/72933

parigrahaka	adjective grasping (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) undertaking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 57234/72933

parigrahaṇa	noun (neuter) putting on (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) wrapping round (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 57235/72933

parigrahatā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 57236/72933

parigrahavant	adjective Frequency rank 57237/72933

parigrāhin	adjective grasping Frequency rank 36645/72933

paryagra	noun (neuter) size (?) Frequency rank 57511/72933

pāṇigraha	noun (masculine) marriage (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking (the bride) by the hand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 36792/72933

pāṇigrahaṇa	noun (neuter) Frequency rank 12119/72933

pāṇigrahaṇaka	adjective relating to marriage Frequency rank 57668/72933

pāṇigrahaṇika	adjective relating to marriage Frequency rank 36793/72933

pāṇigrāha	noun (masculine) hand taking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) husband (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 18130/72933

pāṇisaṃgraha	noun (masculine) clasping the hand (in confirmation of a promise) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 57677/72933

pāpagraha	noun (masculine) an inauspicious planet (as Mars) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 57774/72933

pāragrāmika	adjective hostile (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) inimical (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 36829/72933

pārṣṇigrahaṇa	noun (neuter) attacking or threatening an enemy in the rear (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 57879/72933

pārṣṇigrāha	noun (masculine) a commander in the rear of an army (applied also to hostile planets) an enemy in the rear Frequency rank 29001/72933

pitṛgraha	noun (masculine) a particular demon causing diseases (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 36898/72933

punargrahaṇa	noun (neuter) repeatedly taking up (with a ladle etc.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) repetition (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 58176/72933

puṣpāgra	noun (neuter) a pistil (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 58323/72933

puṣpitāgrā	noun (feminine) name of a metre (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 58336/72933

puṃstvavigraha	noun (masculine) Andropogon Schoenanthus Frequency rank 58354/72933

pṛthugrīva	noun (masculine) name of a Rākṣasa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 19636/72933

pṛṣṭhagranthi	noun (masculine) a hump on she back (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a kind of swelling (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 58409/72933

pragranth	verb (class 9 parasmaipada) to connect (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to join (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to string together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 58621/72933

pragras	verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to devour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to eat up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to swallow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 37108/72933

pragrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to accept (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to befriend (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to draw up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to favour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to further (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to grasp (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to hold (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to hold or stretch forth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to keep separated or isolated (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to offer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to present (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to promote (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to receive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to seize (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to stop (horses) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to tighten (reins) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 1824/72933

pragraha	adjective niyamavant Frequency rank 37109/72933

pragraha	noun (masculine) a companion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a guide (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a particular manner of fighting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a ray of light (like all words meaning "rein" or "bridle") (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a rein (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a rope (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) beginning of an eclipse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) binding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) breaking (a horse) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) bridle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Cassia Fistula (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) clutching (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) cord (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) favour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) friendly reception (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) halter (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) holding in front (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) kindness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) leader (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) obstinacy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) ruler (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) satellite (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) stretching forth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) string (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) stubbornness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taming (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the arm (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the cord or string suspending a balance (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the seizure of the sun or moon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) thong (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 6800/72933

pragrahaṇa	noun (masculine neuter) a check (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a leader (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a means for taming or breaking in (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a rein (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) authority (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) bridle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) commencement of an eclipse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) dignity (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) guide (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) holding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) offering (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) restraint (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) stretching forth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the being a leader or guide (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the seizure of the sun and moon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 24677/72933

pragrahavant	adjective (ifc.) having ... as a rein Frequency rank 37110/72933

pragrīva	noun (masculine neuter) a painted turret (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a stable (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a summer-house (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a window (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a wooden balustrade or fence round a building (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) balcony (projecting like a neck) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) lattice (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) pleasure-house (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the top of a tree (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 58622/72933

pratigrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to accept (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to acquiesce in (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to answer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to appropriate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to approve (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to assent to (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to drink (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to encounter (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to gain (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to grasp (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to marry (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to oppose (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to receive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to receive (a friend or guest) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to receive (an enemy) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to receive (anything agreeable as a good word or omen) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to reply (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to seize (in astrol. to eclipse) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take (as a present or into possession) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take eat (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take as a wife (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to take hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to win over (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 1020/72933

pratigraha	noun (masculine) a chamber-vessel or any similar convenience for sick persons (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a gift (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a grasper (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a spittoon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) acceptance of gifts (as the peculiar prerogative of Brāhmans) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) accepting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) favour (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) friendly reception (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) grace (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) marrying (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of the objects or functions corresponding to the 8 Grahas (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) present (esp. a donation to a Brāhman at suitable periods) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) receiving (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) receiving with the ear i.e. hearing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking a wife (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the reserve of an army (a detachment posted with the general 400 yards in the rear of a line) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the sun near the moon's node (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 2856/72933

pratigrahin	adjective a receiver (opp. to dātṛ) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who receives (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 29142/72933

pratigrahītṛ	adjective accepting marrying taking Frequency rank 19658/72933

pratigrāsa	noun (masculine) img/alchemy.bmp Frequency rank 29143/72933

pratigrāhin	adjective accepting receiving Frequency rank 29144/72933

pratigrāha	noun (masculine) a spittoon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) accepting gifts (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 58745/72933

pratigrāhaka	adjective one who receives or accepts (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 29145/72933

pratigrāhay	verb (class 10 ātmanepada) to give to offer Frequency rank 18183/72933

pratisaṃgrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to accept (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to find (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to meet with (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to receive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21817/72933

pratyagra	noun (masculine) name of a son of Vasu Uparicara and prince of the Cedis (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 59050/72933

pratyagra	adjective fresh (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) new (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) pure (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) repeated (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 9655/72933

pratyagraha	noun (masculine) name of a son of Vasu and king of the Cedis (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 59051/72933

pratyugra	adjective Frequency rank 59120/72933

prāggrīva	adjective having the neck turned eastward (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 59585/72933

prāgra	noun (neuter) summit (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the highest point (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 29277/72933

prāgrūpa	noun (neuter) previous symptom (of disease) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 8479/72933

prāgrya	adjective chief principal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) most excellent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 59591/72933

prāṇanigraha	noun (masculine) restraint of breath (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 59611/72933

phalegrahi	adjective bearing fruit (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) fruitful (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) successful (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 29346/72933

balāsagrathita	noun (neuter) a kind of ophthalmia (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 19736/72933

bālagranthi	noun (masculine) a kind of plant Frequency rank 60181/72933

bālagraha	noun (masculine) a kind of demon (said to cause 9 kinds of possession) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 24844/72933

bālagrahapratiṣedha	noun (masculine) name of Aṣṭāṅgahṛdayasaṃhitā, Utt. 3 Frequency rank 60182/72933

bālāgra	noun (neuter) a dove-cot (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 37643/72933

bisagranthi	noun (masculine) a particular disease of the eyes (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 60277/72933

brahmagranthi	noun (masculine) name of a particular joint of the body (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of the knot which ties together the 3 threads forming the sacred cord (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21927/72933

bharatāgraja	noun (masculine) name of Rāma (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 17054/72933

bhāragrāma	noun (masculine) name of a village Frequency rank 60666/72933

bhārgavāgraṇī	noun (feminine) name of a plant Frequency rank 60688/72933

maṇḍalāgra	noun (neuter) a bent or rounded sword a surgeon's circular knife (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) scimitar Frequency rank 9903/72933

madanāgraja	noun (masculine) a kind of plant Frequency rank 61284/72933

madhuraśigruka	noun (masculine) a kind of plant Frequency rank 61367/72933

madhuśigru	noun (masculine) Moringa Pterygosperma (Rubriflora) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 9904/72933

madhuśigruka	noun (masculine) Moringa Pterygosperma (Rubriflora) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 24970/72933

madhyamagrāma	noun (masculine) (in music) the middle scale (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 61403/72933

manograhaṇa	noun (masculine) the act of seizing or captivating the mind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 61439/72933

manogrāhin	adjective captivating the mind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) fascinating (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 61440/72933

mayūragrīva	noun (neuter) a kind of blue vitriol (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 21988/72933

mayūragrīvaka	noun (neuter) a kind of blue vitriol (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) tuttha a kind of tuttha Frequency rank 21989/72933

mayūragrīvika	noun (neuter) blue vitriol mayūragrīva Frequency rank 61524/72933

mahāgraha	noun (masculine) name of Rāhu (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of the planet Saturn (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 15996/72933

mahāgrāma	noun (masculine) name of a people (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of the ancient capital of Ceylon (said to be the of Ptolemy and the modern Māgama) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 38103/72933

mahāgrāsa	noun (masculine) name of Śiva Frequency rank 21998/72933

mahāgrīva	noun (masculine) a camel (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a people (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of one of Śiva's attendants (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of Śiva Frequency rank 38104/72933

mālāgranthi	noun (feminine) a kind of Dūrvā grass Frequency rank 62134/72933

muhurmuhurgrāsa	noun (neuter) Frequency rank 62399/72933

mṛdugranthi	noun (masculine) a species of grass (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 62489/72933

mūtragranthi	noun (masculine) a knot or induration at the neck of the bladder (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 25103/72933

mūtragraha	noun (masculine) [medic.] mūtrakṛcchra Frequency rank 62689/72933

mūlagranthi	noun (feminine) a species of Dūrvā grass (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 62724/72933

yavāgraja	noun (masculine neuter) Ptychotis Ajowan (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) [medic.] yavakṣāra Frequency rank 15142/72933

yājñavalkyoktagrahaśāntinirūpaṇa	noun (neuter) name of Garuḍapurāṇa, 1.101 Frequency rank 62992/72933

yoṣidgrāha	noun (masculine) one who takes the wife of a deceased man (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 63142/72933

raktagranthi	noun (masculine) a kind of Mimosa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a particular form of urinary disease (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 63175/72933

raktaśigru	noun (masculine) red-flowering Śigru (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 38611/72933

rasagraha	adjective apprehending flavours (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) having a taste for enjoyments (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 63446/72933

rasasaṃgraha	noun (masculine) Rasendrasārasaṃgraha name of various wks (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 63480/72933

rasāgraja	noun (neuter) an ointment prepared from the calx of brass (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 38691/72933

rasāgrya	noun (neuter) rasāñjana Frequency rank 29885/72933

rasendrasārasaṃgraha	noun (masculine) name of a text Frequency rank 63508/72933

rikthagrāha	noun (masculine) an inheritor (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) heir (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 63674/72933

rudragranthi	noun (masculine) (Haṭhayoga:) name of a granthi Frequency rank 63736/72933

rūpābhigrāhita	adjective caught in the act (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) caught redhanded (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 63955/72933

latāgra	noun (neuter) coral Frequency rank 64053/72933

lohitagrīva	noun (masculine) name of Agni (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 64361/72933

vacograha	noun (masculine) the ear (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 64442/72933

vajravigrahā	noun (feminine) [rel.] name of Devī Frequency rank 64479/72933

vajrāgra	noun (neuter) Frequency rank 64488/72933

vanaśigru	noun (masculine) a kind of plant Frequency rank 39044/72933

valmīkāgra	noun (neuter) name of a peak of Rāmagiri (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 64824/72933

vahnikāgra	noun (neuter) coral Frequency rank 64932/72933

vaṃśāgra	noun (neuter) the point or end of a bamboo cane (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the shoot of a bamboo (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 39160/72933

vāggraha	noun (masculine) a kind of disease Frequency rank 39168/72933

vāgrodha	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 65023/72933

vājigrīva	noun (masculine) name of a prince (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 25332/72933

vāyugrasta	adjective affected by wind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) flatulent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) gouty (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) mad (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 65160/72933

vālāgra	noun (neuter) the point of a hair (as a measure Rāgas 8 Rāgas 64 Paramāṇus) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 22213/72933

vigrathita	adjective bound up (as a wound) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) having knots or tubercles (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) hindered (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) impeded (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) tied together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 39286/72933

vigranth	verb (class 9 parasmaipada) to connect (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to tie or bind together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to wind round (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 25368/72933

vigrantha	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 65435/72933

vigrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) (in gram.) to analyse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to contend with (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to distribute (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to divide (esp. to draw out fluids at several times) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to fight against (acc.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to hold apart (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to isolate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to lay hold of (acc. or loc.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to observe (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to perceive (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to quarrel (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to receive in a friendly manner (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to seize (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to separate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to spread out (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to stretch out or apart (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to wage war (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to welcome (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 6544/72933

vigraha	noun (masculine) (in gram.) independence (of a word) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) (in Sāṃkhya) an element (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) an ornament (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) analysis (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) contest (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) decoration (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) discord (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) distribution (esp. of fluids) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) division (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) figure (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) form (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) isolation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) keeping apart or asunder (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of one of Skanda's attendants (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of Śiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one of the 6 Guṇas or measures of policy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) quarrel (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) resolution (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) resolution of a compound word into its constituent parts (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) separate i.e. individual form or shape (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) separation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) strife (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the body (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the separation or analysis of any word capable of separation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) war with (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 1481/72933

vigrahin	adjective a minister of war (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) corporeal possessing a body waging war (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 30162/72933

vigrahavant	adjective having a body Frequency rank 12210/72933

vigrahasiddhi	noun (feminine) a kind of siddhi Frequency rank 65436/72933

viḍgraha	noun (masculine) constipation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) stoppage or obstruction of the feces (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 65539/72933

vinigrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to impede (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to keep back (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to lay hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to restrain (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) to seize (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 18456/72933

vinigraha	noun (masculine) an antithesis which implies that when two propositions are antithetically stated peculiar stress is laid on one of them (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) checking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) controlling (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) disjunction (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) division (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) limitation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) mutual opposition (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) restraining (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) restriction (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) separation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) stopping (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) subduing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) [medic.] constipation Frequency rank 10491/72933

viśvagranthi	noun (masculine) a kind of plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 66137/72933

viṣṇugranthi	noun (masculine) a particular joint of the body (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 66253/72933

vedāgraṇī	noun (feminine) name of Sarasvatī (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 66592/72933

vedāgrahāra	noun (masculine) name of a country/a people (???) Frequency rank 66593/72933

vaiyagrya	noun (neuter) absorption in (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) devotion to (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) perplexity (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 66719/72933

vyagra	adjective being in motion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) bewildered (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) distracted (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) eagerly occupied (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) excited (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) exposed to dangers (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) intent on (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) not attending to any one particular point (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) tottering (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) unsteady (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 5872/72933

vyagratā	noun (feminine) Frequency rank 66785/72933

vraṇagranthi	noun (masculine) a scar (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) cicatrix (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 39843/72933

śatagranthi	noun (masculine) a kind of Dūrvā grass Frequency rank 67155/72933

śamyāgrāha	noun (masculine) (prob.) one who plays the cymbals (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 67240/72933

śārdulavigrahā	noun (feminine) Mucuna Pruritus Frequency rank 67487/72933

śālagrāma	noun (masculine neuter) a sacred stone worshipped by the Vaiṣṇavas and supposed to be pervaded by the presence of Viṣṇu (it is a black stone which contains a fossil ammonite and is chiefly found near the above village in the Gaṇḍaki) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 12241/72933

śālagrāma	noun (masculine neuter) name of a Tīrtha at the Narmadā name of a village situated on the river Gaṇḍakī and regarded as sacred by the Vaiṣṇavas (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of Viṣṇu as worshipped at Śālagrāma or as identified with the Śālgrām stone (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 10795/72933

śālagrāmatīrthamahātmyavarṇana	noun (neuter) name of Skandapurāṇa, Revākhaṇḍa, 188 Frequency rank 67495/72933

śālagrāmamūrtilakṣaṇa	noun (neuter) name of Garuḍapurāṇa, 1.45 Frequency rank 67496/72933

śāligrāma	noun (masculine neuter) name of a place Frequency rank 30499/72933

śāstrasaṃgraha	noun (masculine) name of a work (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of the 1st chapter of Kāmasūtra Frequency rank 67538/72933

śikhigrīva	noun (masculine) a kind of plant Frequency rank 67562/72933

śikhigrīva	noun (neuter) cumbaka kāntaloha blue vitriol (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 22404/72933

śigru	noun (masculine feminine neuter) Moringa concanensis Nimmo ex Dalz. et Gibs. (G.J. Meulenbeld (1974), 603) Moringa moringa Millsp. (G.J. Meulenbeld (1974), 603) Moringa pterygosperma Gaertn. (a kind of horse-radish śobhāñjana) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a man (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a people (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) [geogr.] name of a river Frequency rank 2220/72933

śigru	noun (neuter) any potherb or vegetable (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the seed of the above tree (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 9962/72933

śigruka	noun (masculine feminine neuter) śigru (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) any potherb Frequency rank 9963/72933

śigrupattraka	noun (neuter) a kind of plant Frequency rank 67572/72933

śigrubīja	noun (neuter) the seed of the Moringa tree (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 67573/72933

śigrumūlaka	noun (neuter) Frequency rank 30518/72933

śigruvallī	noun (feminine) a kind of siddhauṣadhī Frequency rank 67574/72933

śirograha	noun (masculine) disease or affection of the head (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 40020/72933

śuṣkavigraha	noun (masculine) a useless contest (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 67924/72933

śṛṅgagrāhikā	noun (feminine) "taking by the horns" i.e. in a direct manner (instr. "directly") (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) (in logic) taking singly (all the particulars included under a general term) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 67938/72933

śaigrava	noun (neuter) the fruit of Moringa Pterygosperma (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 40133/72933

śyāmagranthi	noun (feminine) a kind of Dūrvā grass (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 68118/72933

śūlagraha	noun (masculine) name of Śiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 68279/72933

śvagraha	noun (masculine) name of a demon hostile to children (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 68325/72933

śvetaśigru	noun (masculine) a white-flowering variety of Moringa Pterygosperma (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 40263/72933

ṣaḍgranthi	noun (neuter) the root of long pepper (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 68478/72933

ṣaḍgrantha	noun (masculine) a kind of Karañja (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a variety of the Caesalpinia Bonducella (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 40281/72933

ṣaḍgranthā	noun (feminine) a kind of aromatic root (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Curcuma Zedoaria (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Galedupa Piscidia (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 8881/72933

ṣaḍgranthikā	noun (feminine) Curcuma Zedoaria (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 68479/72933

sagraha	adjective eclipsed (as the moon) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) filled with crocodiles (as a river) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seized by the demon Rāhu (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taken up by means of ladles or other vessels (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) von einem Geist besessen Frequency rank 40313/72933

sagrāsa	adjective mercury ready to form amalgames (?) Frequency rank 68600/72933

sagrīva	adjective with the neck Frequency rank 68601/72933

satyamugra	adjective truly powerful (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 68674/72933

sanigraha	adjective furnished with a handle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 68769/72933

samagra	adjective all (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) complete (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) each (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) entire (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) every (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) fully provided with (instr. or comp.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who has everything or wants nothing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) whole (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 3016/72933

samagraka	adjective entire total Frequency rank 25695/72933

samagray	verb (denominative parasmaipada) Frequency rank 68880/72933

samāgrah	verb (class 9 parasmaipada) to grasp to seize Frequency rank 30743/72933

samudagra	adjective Frequency rank 25717/72933

samparigrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to accept to accomplish to embrace to perform to receive to receive in a friendly manner to take in or understand thoroughly to undertake Frequency rank 40485/72933

samparigraha	noun (masculine) property (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) receiving with kindness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 69239/72933

sampragrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to accept to hold forth or stretch forth together to receive to seize or take hold of together to take hold of Frequency rank 20227/72933

sarvagranthi	noun (masculine neuter) the root of long pepper (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 69441/72933

sahasugrīva	adjective Frequency rank 69677/72933

saṃgrathana	noun (neuter) repairing or restoring by tying together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) tying together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 69783/72933

saṃgranth	verb (class 9 parasmaipada) Frequency rank 69784/72933

saṃgras	verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to consume to devour to swallow up Frequency rank 69785/72933

saṃgrah	verb (class 6 parasmaipada) to abridge to apprehend to assemble to attack (as an illness) to carry off to check to clasp to clench to close to collect to compile to comprehend to conceive to concentrate (the mind) to constrain to contain to contract to draw together to draw together (a bow in order to unstring it) to encourage to favour to force to gather together to govern to grasp to gripe to hold in to include to keep together to make narrower to marry to mention to name to protect to receive (kindly or hospitably) to restrain to seize on to seize or hold together to shut (as the mouth) to snatch to support to take to take in marriage to take or lay hold of to understand Frequency rank 2080/72933

saṃgraha	noun (masculine) (in phil.) agglomeration (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Aṣṭāṅgasaṃgraha a guardian (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a place where anything is kept (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a store-room (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) accumulation (as of stores) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) amount (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) assembling (of men) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) bringing together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) check (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) collecting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) complete enumeration or collection (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) conglomeration (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) constipation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) control (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) elevation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) entertaining (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) gathering (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) grasping (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) guarding (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) holding together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) inclusion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) marriage (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) mentioning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of Shiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) narrowing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) obtainment (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) perception (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) propitiation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) receptacle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) reception (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) restraint (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) ruler (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) sum (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking (in the sense of eating or drinking food) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the fetching back of discharged weapons by magical means (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) velocity (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) winning (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 1548/72933

saṃgrahin	noun (masculine) a collector (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) procurer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 20258/72933

saṃgrahaṇī	noun (feminine) [medic.] grahaṇī (?) Frequency rank 25778/72933

saṃgrahaṇa	noun (neuter) accumulating (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) acquisition (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) adultery (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) attraction (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) compiling (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) complete enumeration (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) encasing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) gathering (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) inlaying (of a jewel) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) obtaining (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) propitiation (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) receiving (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) restraining (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) sexual intercourse with (comp.) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) stopping (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) suppressing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) winning over (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 5954/72933

saṃgrahaṇa	adjective grasping (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) seizing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 69786/72933

saṃgrahaṇikā	noun (feminine) [medic.] grahaṇī Frequency rank 69787/72933

saṃgrahaṇīkapāṭa	noun (masculine) name of an alchemical preparation Frequency rank 69788/72933

saṃgrahītṛ	adjective one who lays hold of (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) one who wins over or propitiates (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 40619/72933

saṃgrāma	noun (masculine neuter) an assembly of people (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) army (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) battle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) combat (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) conflict (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) fight (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) host (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) hostile encounter with (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of various men (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) troop (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) war (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 914/72933

saṃgrāmajit	noun (masculine) name of a warrior Frequency rank 30878/72933

saṃgrāhin	adjective accumulating (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) astringent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) collecting (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) constipating (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) gathering (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) grasping (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) propitiating (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) winning over (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 4704/72933

saṃgrāhin	noun (masculine) Wrightia Antidysenterica (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 69789/72933

saṃgrāha	noun (masculine) grasping (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) laying hold of. forcible seizure (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the fist or clenching the fist (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the handle of a shield (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 69790/72933

saṃgrāhaka	noun (masculine) a charioteer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a gatherer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) collector (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) compiler (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 69791/72933

saṃgrāhaka	adjective astringent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) constipating (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) drawing or attracting to one's self (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) obstructing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) putting together (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) summing up (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 17361/72933

saṃgrāhay	verb (class 10 parasmaipada) to cause to grasp or take hold of or receive or comprehend or understand to communicate (with acc. of thing and acc. or dat. of person) to impart to wish to collect Frequency rank 16249/72933

saṃgrāhika	adjective Frequency rank 69792/72933

saṃdhivigrahaka	noun (masculine) a minister presiding over the above (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 69896/72933

saṃnigrah	verb (class 9 ātmanepada) to check to curb to hold down to keep under to lay hold of to overcome to restrain to seize to subdue to suppress Frequency rank 17366/72933

saṃnigraha	noun (masculine) punishment (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) restraint (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 69918/72933

sāgra	adjective entire (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) having a surplus (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) more than (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) whole (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) with the tip or point (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 4750/72933

sāgraha	adjective insisting on anything (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) persistent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) with pertinacity (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 70235/72933

sāmagrī	noun (feminine) (esp.) a complete collection or assemblage of implements or materials (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a means for (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) apparatus (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) baggage (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) completeness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) effects (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) entirety (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) furniture (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) goods and chattels (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) totality (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 8049/72933

sāmagrya	noun (neuter) Frequency rank 13849/72933

sārasaṃgraha	noun (masculine) name of a text Frequency rank 40816/72933

sāṃgrāmika	adjective martial (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) relating to war (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) warlike (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 12731/72933

sāṃgrāhika	adjective constipating (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) obstructing (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 12283/72933

siddhagraha	noun (masculine) name of a demon causing a particular kind of seizure or madness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 70551/72933

siddhamārgāgra	noun (masculine) name of Viṣṇu Frequency rank 70560/72933

sirāgraha	noun (masculine) [medic.] a kind of vātavyādhi (Austrocknen von sirās, die zum Kopf führen) Frequency rank 70616/72933

sugranthi	noun (neuter) the root of Piper Longum (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 70770/72933

sugranthi	noun (masculine) a kind of perfume (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 70771/72933

sugraha	adjective easy to be learnt or understood (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) easy to be obtained (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) having a good handle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 70772/72933

sugrīva	noun (masculine) a conch (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a goose (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a hero (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a kind of pavilion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a piece of water (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a serpent of Pātāla (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) a sort of weapon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a divine being (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a monkey-king (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a mountain (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of one of the four horses of Kṛṣṇa or Viṣṇu (the other three being Balāhaka) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of the father of the ninth Arhat of the present Avasarpiṇī (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of Śiva or Indra (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the countenance of a friend (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 775/72933

sugrīvā	noun (feminine) name of a daughter of Tāmrā name of an Apsaras (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 31028/72933

sugrīva	adjective handsome-necked (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) having a beautiful neck (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 70773/72933

sugrīvī	noun (feminine) name of a daughter of Dakṣa and wife of Kaśyapa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a daughter of Tāmrā Frequency rank 22651/72933

suparigraha	adjective Frequency rank 70935/72933

suvigraha	adjective having a beautiful body or figure (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41055/72933

sogra	adjective Frequency rank 41096/72933

sodagra	adjective Frequency rank 71467/72933

sopagraha	adjective Frequency rank 71475/72933

skandhagrahapratiṣedha	noun (masculine) name of Suśrutasaṃhitā, Utt. 28 Frequency rank 71607/72933

sūcyagra	noun (neuter) as much land as is pierced by the point of a needle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the point of a needle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) very little (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41169/72933

stanāgra	noun (neuter) a nipple (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41174/72933

sruvapragrahaṇa	adjective appropriating all (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking all to one's self (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) taking with a ladle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 72006/72933

svabhyagra	adjective very imminent or impending or near at hand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) very swift (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 72107/72933

svayaṃgraha	noun (masculine) forcible seizure (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) the taking for one's self (without leave) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 41306/72933

svayaṃgrāha	adjective one who takes forcibly (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) voluntary (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 72117/72933

svayaṃgrāha	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 31211/72933

hanugraha	noun (masculine) lock-jaw (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 18679/72933

hayagrīva	noun (masculine) name of a Daitya (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a form of Viṣṇu (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a Muni (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a Rājarṣi (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a Rākṣasa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a Tantra deity (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of a wicked king of the Videhas (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) name of the supposed author of the Chāndogya Upanishad and various other writers (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 9293/72933

hayagrīvapūjāvidhi	noun (masculine) name of Garuḍapurāṇa, 1.34 Frequency rank 72315/72933

hṛdayagraha	noun (masculine) seizure or spasm of the heart (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 72645/72933

hṛdgrantha	noun (masculine) Frequency rank 72659/72933

hṛdgraha	noun (masculine) spasm of the heart (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 15367/72933

hrasvagrīva	noun (masculine) [rel.] name of Śiva Frequency rank 72763/72933

hrasvaśigruka	noun (masculine) a species of Moringa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988)) Frequency rank 72776/72933

Ayurvedic MedicalDictionary Dr. Potturu with thanks

Purchase Kindle edition


abhaya	vetiver grass, Andropogon muricatum.
abhiṣangajvara	fever due to evil spirits or fear, grief , anger etc; viral fevers and fever caused by stress and anxiety are grouped under this heading .
ādāna	to suck or extract; ādānakāla the first half of the year (uttarāyana or northern solstice); it includes śiśira (winter); vasanta (spring) and grīṣma (summer).
āḍhaka	a weight measurement equal to 3 kilograms and 73 grams.
āḍhaki	Plant pigeon pea, redgram, Cajanus cajan , C. indicus.
adhimāṃsa	polyp; an abnormal growth of tissue projecting from a mucous membrane.
agastya	swamp-pea, hummingbird tree, Sesbania grandiflora.
agnimantha	Plant migraine tree; Premna integrifolia; Premna latifolia and Clerodendrum phlomidis too are considered as agnimantha.
aileyaka	Plant citraka; elavāluka; a fragrant bark.
ajalambana	antimony; a chemical element with symmetalloid, it is found in nature mainly as the sulfide mineral stibnite.bol Sb (Latin: stibium). A lustrous gray
ajāmoda	goat’s delight; Plant bishop’s weed, ajowan caraway; dried aromatic fruits of Apium leptophyllum; A. graveo; Trachyspermum roxburghianum.
ākāśa	space; one of the five gross element
alaulya	non-greedy.
alobha	absence of greed, benevolent.
āluka	1. kind of ebony; 2. white yam, edible underground root with more starch.
āmagrahaṅi	(āma.grahaṅi) sprue associated with indigestion.
ambu	1. water; 2. kind of grass; ambuprasāda Plant kataka tree, Strychnos potatorum, useful in cleaning the water.
āmragandha	Plant Limnophila aromatica; Limnophila gratioloides; ricepaddy herb.
aṅga	a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to some areas of Bihar and Bengal.
anila	windy; anilagraha one of the vāta diseases.
aṇutalia	penetrating oil; a medicinal preparation applied into nostrils to improve the perception of senses and in several diseases that affect the head including grey hair, facial paralysis.
ap	water; one of the five gross elements.
arbuda	tumour; growth; big lump
arjaka	Plant clove basil, Ocimum gratissimum.
arśovartma	a form of trachoma; an infectious disease caused by the Chlamydia trachomatis, a micro-organism which produces a characteristic roughening of the inner surface of the eyelids. Al called granular conjunctivitis.
asātmya	unwholesome or disagreeing; unsuitable for oneself; incompatible.
aśmaka,assaka	a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to Telangana region of Andhra Pradesh.
aṣṭāṅga	eight branches of ayurveda : kāya, bāla, śalya, śalākya, graha, agada, rasāyana, vajīkaraṇa.
aṣṭāngsangraha	an eloborate medical compendium authord by Vagbhata, 5th Century synthesizing both Carakasamhita and Suśrutasamhita.
atidīrgha	gigantism; excess growth.
atihrasva	dwarfism, retracted growth.
atipatita	1. complete fracture of bone; 2. transgressed.
avanti	a geographical region of ancient India corresponding to Malwa region of north India.
āvāpa	1. addition of herbs to smelted metals; 2. ingredients which are added latter to the recipe in small quantities.
āyurvedasamgraha	a text on human medicine written by Siddhanti Subrahmanyasastry in the 19th Century
bāhlīka	geographical region of Bactria in northwest India.
bālagraha	specific disorders of children; children’s seizures.
bālagrahacikitsa	a treatise on paediatrics authored by Devendramuni in 13th Century , partly available now
bhadra	Plant mountain knot-grass, Aerva lanata.
bhāra	weight; buden; a weight measurement equal to 96 kilograms.
bhūtṛṇa	Plant kind of fragrant grass, earth grass, broad leaved turpentine grass; Cymbopogon citratus.
bījavara	Plant 1. best of the grains; 2. green gram, Vigna radiata.
bilvādilehya	a semi-solid preparation from bael fruit and ten other ingredients; indicated in problems of digestive system.
brāhmi	Plant water hyssop, thyme leaved gratiola, Bacopa monnieri syn. Herpestis monnieria. Indian pennywart. see Centella asiatica.
bṛhati	1. a lethal point in the area between back of the body and breast; 2. great duct; 3. Indian nightshade, poison berry; dried root of Solanum indicum.
cakrika	1. disc; 2. horse gram.
cālmogra	Plant Hydnocarpus winghtiana; leathery-leaved tree with fruits yielding hydnocarpus oil used to treat leprosy. (tuvaraka)
camari	large long-haired wild and domestiated ox of Tibet; Bos grunniens; yak.
campa	geographical region of Vietnam.
caṇaka	Plant Bengal gram, chickpea, Cicer arietinum.
carmakīla	corn; outgrowth of skin.
caturāmla	Plant four citrous fruits that iclude plums (badari), pomegranate (dāḍima), kokam or butter tree (vṛkṣāmla) and common sorrel (amlavetasa).
caturbhadrakam	Plant four gentle herbs : nāgaram (dry ginger), ativiṣa (aconite), musta (nut grass or Cyperus rotundus), guḍūci (Tinospora cardifolia).
caturbīja	Plant aggregate of four kinds of aromatic seeds; methi (funegreek), candrasūra (garden cress), kālājāji (small fennel), yavāni (Bishop’s weed)
catvara	1. cross-way; a leveled spot of ground prepared for a sacrifice; 2. barber.
chāgakarṇa	1. goat’s ear; 2. Plant teak tree, Tectonia grandis.
chedi	a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to Bundelkhand region in Madhya Pradesh.
chinnaśvāsa	Cheyne-stokes respiration; an abnormal pattern of breathing characterized by deeper and faster breathing, followed by a gradual decrease that results in a temporary stop in breathing called an apnea.
cillaṭa	animal living in the ground or earth. ex: musk shrew.
cirabilva	Plant Indian elm, jungle cork tree, dried fruit of Holoptelea integrifolia.
cyavanaprāśa	rejuvenating and anti-aeging preparation with the main ingredient of myrobalan, invented by sage Cyavana. It contains 48 ingredients and indicated in debility, gout, respir diseases, loss of appetite et Century
dāḍima	Plant pomegranate; Punica granatum.
ḍalhaṇa	author of Nibandha saṅgraha, a commentary on Suśrutasamhita (12th Century ).
danta	teeth, dantabhanjana loss of teeth, dantacala loose tooth, danta grāhi chilling of teeth due to cold beverages; dantakapālika tartar forming flakes; krimidanta dental caries, dantaharṣa morbid sensitiveness of teeth, intolerance to cold; dantamāmsas gums; dantanāḍi dental sinus; dantapuppuṭa gum boil, gingivitis; dantaśalāka toothpick, dantaśarkara tartar, dantaśaṭha bad for teeth ex: citrus; dantaśūla toothache, dantavaidarbha loose teeth due to injury; dantavardhana extra tooth; dantaveṣṭa pyorrhoea alveolaris, formation of pus in teeth.
darbha	Plant ritual grass; cotton grass; thatch grass; Imperata cylindrical.
dhānā	Plant grain, coriander.
dhātri	wet nurse; foster-mother; midwife; dhātriphala Plant 1. fruit of phillanthus emblica; 2. Baringtonia tree that grows in mangroves.
dhyāmaka	Plant rusa grass, Andropogon schoenanthus, syn. Cymbopogon martini.
drākṣāriṣṭa	fermented stuff made from grapes and other medicinal herbs, useful in respiratory and digestive disorders.
drākṣāsava	medicinal liquor made from grapes; weakwine made from grapes, which calms vāta and pitta.
droṇa	a weight measurement equal to 12 kilograms and 228 grams.
droṇi	1. a weight measurement equal to 49 kilograms and 152 grams; 2. a trough used in pancakarma.
duhkha	grief, suffering.
dūrva	Plant creeping cynodon; bermuda grass; conch grass; roots of Cynodon dactylon.
elavāluka	Plant seeds of Prunus avium, sweet cherry; a fragrant bark.
galagraha	difficulty in swallowing; compression of throat.
gandha	smell; fragrance.
gāndhāra	a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to present day Pakistan and Afghanistan.
ganḍīra	Plant 1. root of Coleus forskohlii; a pot herb or a species of cucumber; 2. fox grape, Cayratis cornosa.
garuḍaphala	Plant chaulmugra, Hydnocarpus pentandra, H. wightiana, H. laurifolia.
garutmantam	emerald, a gemstone of the mineral beryl coloured green by trace amounts of chromium and sometimes vanadium.
gavedhu	Plant job’s tears, Coix lachrymal; wild wheat; a grain grown in east Asia.
gilāyu	benign growth in the throat, tonsillitis.
graha	1. planet; 2. disease affecting children; seizures.
grahaṇi	malabsorption syndrome.
grāhi	1. absorbent; that counters purging; 2. astringent.
grāmya	1. cultivated, domesticated; 2. venereal disease.
granthi	boil; small lump; cyst.
granthiparṇi	Plant 1. smooth angelica, Angelica glauca; 2. knod grass; Leonotis nepetaefolia.
grāsa	swallowing; lower metals swallowed by mercury.
grasana	swallowing, jaws.
grāsāntare	medicine taken between two boluses of food.
grāse	medicine taken with a bolus of food.
gṛdhrasi	sciatica disease; lumbago; group of symptoms including pain that is caused by general compression or irritation of one of five spinal nerve roots that give rise to sciatic nerve, or by compression or irritation of the left or right or both sciatic nerves radiating into lower limbs.
grīṣma	summer season
grīva	neck; nape; grīvastambha stiff neck; cervical spondylosis.
gulpha	ankle joint; gulphagraha stiffness of ankle-joint.
gundra	Plant kind of cyperus; lesser Indian reed, grass used for making mats, Typha australis; T. angustata.
hanu	jaw, chin; hanumokṣaṇa, hanusthambha, hanugraha lock jaw (temporo-mandibular dislocation)
hariṇa	deer; greenish.
hintāla	Plant mangrove date palm; marshy date tree; Phoenix or Elate paludosa; queen sago, Cycas circinalis.
hṛvera,hṛbera	Plant andropogon grass; black vetiver; roots of Colius vettiveroides.
itkaṭa	Plant a kind of reed/grass; Sesbania bispinosa.
jāhaka	hedgehog; a spiny insectivore that emits a pig-like grunt while hunting.
jarjarīkaraṇa	disintegration.
jātī	Plant jasmine, leaves of Jasminum officinale, J. grandiflorum, J. aurum.
jātīphala	Plant nutmeg; endosperm of dried seeds of Myristica fragrans.
jātyādighrita	medicated ghee with jasmine as main ingredient for wound healing.
jīmūtaka	Plant Lepeocercis serrata; Indian blue stem grass, musta.
jiñgini	Plant wodier tree, Lannea coromandical, L. grandis.
kabala	mouthwash; gargle; bolus; kind of fish; kabalagraha hold mouthful; medicine to treat the diseases that affect head and sensory organs.
kādamba	duck; a kind of goose with dark-grey wings.
kākamāci	Plant garden night shade; Solanum nigrum, S. dulcamara.
kālāntaraprāṇahara	a group of vital points that kill later.
kalyāṇakārika	medical compendium compiled by Ugraditya (7th Century ) in south India, an adherent of Jainism.
kāmbalika	1. barley-water, 2. gruel, sour milk mixed with whey and vinegar.
kambhoja	1. a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to present day Afghanistan; 2. Plant ironweed plant, Veronia anthelminthica.
kānjika	sour gruel, fermented rice water, water of boiled rice in a state of spontaneous fermentation.
kapālabhāti	aggressive form of prānāyāma , forcibly expelling air from lungs as the diaphragm and abdominal muscles contract.
kapiśa	Plant grapes, grape wine
kapotābha	1. colour of lead-grey, pigeon coloured; 2. a kind of rat.
karambhaka	Plant groats or hulled grains of cereals like oats, wheat or barley.
karṣa	a weight measurement equal to 12 grams.
kāśa	Plant wild thatch grass; Saccharum spontaneum.
kasamarda	Plant Cassia occidentalis; negro coffee, stinking weed.
kāśi	a geographical region and a city in ancient India corresponding to present day Varanasi.
kāsīsa	green vitreol, ferrous sulphate.
kaṭigraha	lumbago, painful condition of the lower back.
kattṛṇa	Plant lemon grass, fragrant grass, Cymbopogon citratus, C. martini.
kesari,kesaridhal	Plant white pea, grass pea, Lathyrus sativus.
ketaki,kaitaka	Plant screw pine, dried underground roots of Pandanus tectorius, P. fascicularis. P. odoratissimus.
khalekapotanyāya	field-pigeon hypothesis, grain pigeon analogy to explain the formation of dhātu.
khalva	a mill or stone for grinding drugs.
khāri	a weight measurement equal to 196 kilograms and 608 grams.
kikkisa	striae gravidarum; stretch marks on the abdomen during and following pregrancy.
kimpuruṣa	mongreal being; a cross breed.
kirātatikta	Plant chireta, whole plant of Swertia chirata; Andrographis paniculata is used in southeastern India as kirātatikta.
kiṭibha	psoriasis; a chronic skin condition that causes skin cells to grow too quickly resulting in thick, white, silvery, or red patches of skin.
kokilākṣa	Plant starthorn, long-leaved barleria, Asteracantha longifolia; syn. Hygrophila auriculata, H. spinosa.
kopana	irritating, aggravating factor.
kosala	a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to awadh region in Uttar Pradesh.
kotha	gangrene, sore, putrefaction.
kṛcchrasādhya	disease curable with great difficulty.
kriyākāla	duration of an action, rise and falls of humors in the body: accumulation (sancaya), aggravation (prakopa), flow (prasara), translocation (sthānasamsraya), manifestation (vyaktībhāva), becoming chronic and incurable (bheda).
kṛkara	1. kind of partridge bird, 2. one of five vital breaths; 3. kind of pepper; 3. fragrant oleander tree.
kṛsara	dish consisting of green grams and grain.
kṛṣnamusali	Plant golden eye-grass, Curculigo orchioides.
kṛṣnasarṣapa	Plant blakc mustad, Brasica nigra.
kṛtagnata	gratefullness.
kruśara	rice boiled with sesamum or green gram and seasoned with spices, salt and ghee.
kṣāradvaya	natron, a kind of soda ash (sarjika) and alkali prepared from the ashes of burnt green barley (yava).
kṣudrakuṣṭa	group of minor skin diseases.
kuḍava	a measurement equal to 192 grams.
kukūla	conflagration of fire made of chaff.
kulaka	1. green snake; 2. anthill; 3. kind of ebony; 4. sort of gourd; 5. Strychnos nuxvomica; 6. paṭola.
kulattha	horse gram, dry seeds of Vigna unquiculata, syn. Dolichos biflorus
kulmāṣa	sour gruel; half-ripe barley; an inferior kind of grain.
kuluttha	Plant cowpea, horse gram, Vigna unguiculata; Macrotyloma uniflorum.
kumāra	children in the age-group of one to sixteen years.
kuru	a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to Haryana.
kuruvinda	1. ruby; 2. a fragrant grass; 3. Plant kind of barley; 4. cinnabar.
kuśa	Plant saved gram, salt reed grass, sacrificial grass, dried root stock of Desmostachya bipinnata.
lagana	chalazion; meibomian gland lipogranuloma or a cyst in the eyelid caused by inflammation of a blocked meibomian gland. It differs from stye (hordeola), which is subacute and painless.
lāja	flakes, fried or parched grain.
lobha	greed, avarice.
lohitākṣa	1. reddish eye; 2. lethal points at axilla and groin; 3. a kind of snake; 4. Indian cuckoo.
mādhvi,mādhvika	mead, a kind of intoxicating drink, alcoholic beverage made from grapes.
magadha	a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to present day Bihar.
maha	great, big, tangible, fortified mahabhūta gross element or proto element.
mahābhaiṣajya	great medicine i.e. food.
mahākuṣṭha	group of major skin diseases (seven).
mahāsugandha	(maha.sugandha) strong or great fragrants; crocus (kunkuma), eagle wood (agaru), camphor (karpura), musk (kastūri), sandal (candana).
mahat	great being, vast
malla	a geographical region in ancient India correspondin to northeast Uttar Pradesh.
māṃsārbuda	malignant growth, cancer.
māṃsi	Plant spikenard, Nordostachys grandiflora.
maṇḍa	1. rice preparation (gruel); 2. cream of milk, 3. decoction; 4. frog; 5. castor oil plant.
mandajvara	low grade fever.
manḍalāgra	round pointed; manḍalāgraśastra surgeon’s circular knife.
mānika	a weight measurement equal to 384 grams.
manolaya	disintegration of mind.
marakata	emerald; a gemstone, and a variety of the mineral beryl colored green by trace amounts of chromium and sometimes vanadium.
mardana	1. rubbing, massaging, 2. grinding, rubbing, washing ores and metallic substances with extracts of plants.
marīca	black pepper, Piper nigrum.
māṣa	1. a weight measurement equivalent to 1 gram; 2. black gram, Vigna mungo.
māṣa,rājamāṣa	Plant black grams, beans, Phaseolus mungo, P. radiatus, syn. Vigna mungo.
māṣaparṇi	Plant green gram, Vogel-tephrosis, Terambus labialus. syn. Glycine labialis.
matsya	a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to part of Rajasthan.
mayūrāsana	peacock pose; a yogic posture raising the body like a horizontal stick on the support of forearm on the ground.
methi	Plant fenugreek, Trigonella foenum-graecum.
mudga	Plant mung beans, green gram,Vigna radiata; Phaseolus radiatus is old name.
mukhamaṇḍika	one of the grahas, the disease with symptoms of cirrhosis of liver.
munja	Plant a grass variety; Saccharum munja.
murā	Plant a fragrant plant; Selinum candollei.
mūrva	Plant bowstring hemp, a controversial plant. several plants like Marsdenia tenacissima, M. volubilis; elephant creeper or Argyreia nervosa; Clematis triloba, Maerua arenaria, Bauhinia vahlii; Chenomorpha fragrans are considered as mūrva.
mūṣikāparni	Plant water mass azolla; green edible leaves of Merremia emarginata; Silvinia cucullata too is similar to it.
musta	Plant nutgrass, dried rhizome of Cyperus rotundus. Now used as a substitute for ativiṣa, Aconitum heterophyllum.
mūtragranthi	tumour in bladder.
navadhānya	new grain.
netra	eye; netraadhimāṃsa pterygium, a benign growth of the conjunctiva.
nibandhasamgraha	a commentary on Suśrutasamhita by Ḍalḥaṇa in 12th Century
nicula	Plant freshwater mangrove or Indian oak, Barringtonia acutangula.
nigraha	restraining, binding; cure, keeping down.
nigrāha	chastisement; subjugation.
nirguṇḍi	Plant five leaved chaste tree, Indian privet, roots and leaves of Vitex negundo; nirguṇḍitaila oilbased preparation with nirgunḍi as main ingredient used in vraṇa.
nisarga	1. favour or grant, giving away, bestowing; 2. natural state or condition or a character.
nīvāra	Plant wild rice; Hygroryza aristata.
nyagrodha	Plant banyan tree, Ficus bengelensis, F. indica.
odana	porridge, boiled rice, grain mashed and cooked with milk or water.
pala	a weight measurement, eight tolas or 48 grams.
palala	sweetmeat made from ground sesame seeds and sugar.
palam	a weight measurement equal to 48 grams.
pālitya,palita	graying of scalp hair.
panasa	Plant jackfruit, Artocarpus heterophyllus syn. A.integrifolia.
pāñcāla	a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to Punjab region.
pañcamahābhūta	five gross elements (prithvi, ap, tejas, vayu and ākāṣ) that make up the animate and inanimate world.
pañcatvagrahaṇa	die, demise.
pañcavalkala	Plant nyagrodha (Ficus indica), udumbara (F. hispida), asvatha (F. religiosa), plakṣa (F. lacor), pārīśa (Thespesia populnea).
pandara	gangrenous stomatitis.
panka	mud; pankaja one which grows in mud, lotus.
paramada	alcoholism; highest degree of intoxication.
pārijāta	Plant 1. night-flowering coral jasmine, Nyctanthes arbortristis; 2. Indian coral tree, Erythrina indica; 3. fragrance.
paripelava	1.very delicate; 2. Plant coco-grass.
parpaṭi	crust, hardened exterior, black sulfide of mercury prepared into a thick film (kajjali) and adding different ingredients one after the other in triturition in a khalva, ex: pancāmṛta parpati.
patala	Plant fragrant padri tree, Stereospermum chelonoides.
pāṭalā	Plant rose flower fragrant, trumpet flower tree, yellow snake tree, stembark of Stereospermum suaveolens, syn. Bignonia suaveolens.
pātālayantra	underground apparatus.
peya	beverage, rice is fried in oil and later boiled in water, one of the eight varieties of rice preparations, thin gruel.
phenaka	1. ground rice boiled in water; kind of pastry. 2. samudraphena.
piṇyāka	oil cake of sesamum; flour of grain remaining after extracting oil.
poṭagala	Plant elephant grass, Typha elephantina.
pothaki	trachoma; an infectious disease caused by the bacteria Chlamydia trachoma, which produces a characteristic roughening of the inner surface of the eyelids. Also called granular conjunctivitis.
prakopa	abnormal increase, aggravation, vitiation, excitation.
prakṣepa	ingredients, adding to ex: fine powder of drug to leha or āsavāriṣṭa.
prāsāda	castle; a grand residence.
prasṛti	a handful used as measure ex: 100 gm of grain.
prastha	a weight measurement equal to 768 grams.
prasūti	birth, parturition; prasūti tantra obstetrics, care of pregrant women.
pṛṣṭha	dorsal, back; pṛṣṭhagraha lumbago.
pṛthvi	earth, tangible element, one of the five gross elements, solidity.
puṇḍarīka	1. Plant fragrant mango, 2. kind of serpent, 3. kind of rice, 4. lotus flower, 5. sugarcane; 6.an obstinate skin disease, one of mahākuṣṭas.
pūtana	one of the seizing planets (grahas), the condition similar to hypokalemia, lesser-than-normal potassium level in the blood leading to constipation, fatigue, muscle spasms, paralysis et Century
rasagrahana	extraction.
rasāla	1. curds mixed with sugar and spices; 2. mango tree; 3. sugar cane; 4. kind of grass.
rasapaṅka	mercurial mud; black sulfide of mercury or kajjali ground with liquids.
rasapiṣṭi	grinded mercurial; twelve parts of mercury and one part of sulphur are grounded in a mortar in sunshine, milk may also be mixed.
rāśi	volume, quantity, collection, mass rāśipuruṣa aggregation of ingredients making the human body.
revati	1. one of the seizing planets (graha), 2. bloodlessness, vit. B deficiency; 3. star Zeta Piscium.
rohitaka	Plant 1. rohida, a tree species grown in desert and dry regions of northwest India, Tecomella undulate; 2. rohituka tree, Aphanamixis polystachya.
roma	hair, wool, feather of a bird; romaharṣa thrill, pilomotor reflex; romasanjanana herb that promotes hair growth.
roṣaṇa	angry, annoyed.
sādhāraṇarasa	group of nine non-herbal substances used in rasaśāstra; kampilla, gauripāshāna, navāsāra, kapardika, agnijāra, girisindhūra, hingula, mṛdārṣṛnga.
śādvala	a geographical region or grassy region, lawn.
sadyahprāṇahara	quickly destroying, killing instantaneously; a group of vital points on the body.
śāka	Plant teak, heartwood of Tectona grandis
śākuni	one of the nine seizing planets (graha), impetigo, a skin disease.
śalabhāsana	locust pose, grasshopper pose; one of the yogic postures with upper and lower limbs lifted lying on the abdomen.
sāligrāmanighaṇṭu	glossary compiled by Lala Saligram in the 19th century.
samādhi	integration, liberation.
śamīdhānya	legumes, ex: green gram.
samsāra	cycle of birth and dealth; transmigration; passing; wordly illusion.
samsarjana	conciliating, postoperative management, graduated readministration of diet to rekindle digestive fire.
samuccaya	one of tantrayuktis, aggregation, assemblage.
samudraphala	Plant freshwater mangrove, Barringtonia acutangula.
samyoga	1. conjuction; 2. combination, ratios of ingredients of prepared food, one of the āhāravidhiviśeṣayatana; 3. two humors increased.
sandhānīya	healing, causing to grow together, drug promoting union of fractured bone fragments.
sandhiviṣleṣat	lack of grip in joints.
sangraha	collection, gathering.
sangrāhika	obstructing, constipating.
santāpa	1. rise in body temperature; hyperpyrexia; 2. grief.
saptala	Plant 1. green spurge, Euphorbea dracanuloides; 2. soap nut, shikakai, Acacia sinuata, A. concinna.
śāra	Plant munj grass, Saccharum bengelense, S. arundinaceum.
sarpa	snake, serpent. sarpakāya serpitine body; a person with serpent traits like irritability, laborious, cowardly, angry, double-dealing and hasty in eating and sexual intercourse.
sarvaṇgasundari	a commentary on Aṣṭāngasangraha by Aruṇadatta in 12th Century
śaśilekha	commentary on Aṣṭāngasamgraha by Indu.
śaṣkuli	1. auditory canal; 2. rice gruel or barley water.
ṣaṣṭikadhānya	grain harvested in sixty days, ex. millets.
śatapuṣpa	Plant dill seeds, Anethum sowa, syn. Peucedanum graveolens.
śatapūtana	one of the grahas/seizing planets, hypocalcimia and resulting disease.
sātmya	affinity, wholesome or agreeable; suitable for oneself, accustoming.
saugandhika	1. sweet-scented; fragrant; 2. sulphur; 3. person with sexual impotence; 4. white or blue water-lily; 5. a king of fragrant grass; 6. an Ocimum species.
sauvīra	1. antimony; 2. rice gruel; 3. bigger variety of jujube fruit.
śibikā	palanquin; bier i.e. a stand on which a corpse is placed to lie to be carried to the burial ground.
śigru	Plant drumstick, Moringa pterygosperma, M. oleifera
śikatāmeha	lithuria; urine with gravels.
śikatāvartma	granular conjunctivitis.
śimbi	Dolichos lablab; beans; Mucuna pruritis; Phaseolus trilobus; wild gram.
śiva	favourable, gracious, friendly.
skandāpasmāra	one of the nine seizing planets (grahas), rabies.
skandhagraha	polio.
śmaśāna	cemetary, crematorium, burial ground.
sneha	unctuous, oil, oily, snehavarga ghṛta, taila, vasa, majja; edible fats and oils; unctuous group, snehakalpa medicated ghṛta, snehaphala sesame seed, sneha picu unctous tampon, pāna intake of unctous substance.
sobhānjana	Go to śigru
sodhana	1. purification, removal of harmful metabolic substances from the body; cleansing measures; 2. purification of metalic substances, ores by boiling, triturating in various herbal juices, and grinding.
śrotonjana	antimony sulphide, ingredient of collyrium.
sthūlaila	greater or Nepal cardamom, Amomum subulatum.
sthūlaśarīra	gross body.
sugandha	fragrant, frangrance.
sugandhapancaka	cubeb (kankola), (poka), cloves (lavanga), nutmeg (jāji), green camphor.
śuka	parrot or green parakeet.
śūka	sting, spike; śūkadhānya grain with sting, ex: rice, wheat.
śukta	1. vinegar, fermented liquors. 2. treacle, 3. honey, 4. fermented rice gruel and watery substance above the curds are kept in a new and clean vessel underneath a bushel of paddy for three days.(Dalhana).
śukti	1. oyster shell, 2. a weight measurement equal to 24 grams.
surabhi	fragrant, sweet-smelling; an alcoholic drink.
surasa	1.holy basil; 2. gum-myrrh, resin, fragrant grass; 3. five leaved chaste tree (Vitex negundo)
surasena,saurasena	a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to Braj region of Uttar Pradesh.
sūrpa	a weight measurement equal to 24 kilograms and 576 grams
suvarcala	Plant linseed, Ruta graveolens; common flax; clammyweeds plant; Hydrocotyle rotundifolia.
svanigraha	self-control, one of the traits of mind/manas.
śvetadūrva	Plant white Bermuda grass.
śyāmaka	Plant Indian barnyard millet; dark coloured grain, which reduces fat; Panicum sumatrense.
tāmra	1. copper; 2. fourth layer of skin, stratum granulosum.
tanḍulodaka	liquid obtained by mixing 48 grams of rice with 385 ml of water keeping for two hours and decanted later.
tārkṣya	emerald; a gemstone with a variety of the mineral beryl colored green by trace amounts of chromium and sometimes vanadium.
tej	fire, one of the five gross elements.
timira	1. darkness of eyes; 2. myopia; 3. early cataract. 4. Plant Egyptian grass or crowfoot grass, Dactyloctenium aegyptium.
togara	Plant Indian mulberry, great morinda, Morinda citrifolia. M. pubescens.
tola	a weight measurement equal to 12 grams
trika	sacral region; trikagraha arthritis of sacro-iliac region.
tula	a weight measurement equal to 4 kilograms and 800 grams.
tuṣāmbu	sour rice or barley gruel, decanted liquid obtained from a mixture of equal quantity of crushed barley and warm water kept overnight.
tuvaraka	Plant chaulmoogra, Hydnocarpus laurifolia, H. wightiana, H. pentandra.
udvartana	rubbing and cleansing the body with frangrant unguents; an item in daily regimen; kneading the body.
ugra	pungent, ferocious, strong.
ugragandha	strong-smelling; ex: garlic, asafoetida, orris root.
ukhala	a kind of grass.
ulumba	green grain (just harvested wheat or barley) roasted on fire and taken as food.
urugraha	paralysis of the thigh.
uṣṭragrīvabhagandara	tortuous fistula in ano.
vāgbhaṭa	author of Aṣṭānga hṛdaya and Aṣṭānga saṃgraha, belongs to Sindhu (now in Pakistan) region during 4-5th centuries.
vaidyasārasamgraha	1. a text written by Channaraja in the 16th Century about human medicine; 2. an text written by Nanjaraja in the 18th Century about human medicine; 3. another text written by Hosapandita Bheemarao in the 19th Century
vakram	greenstick fracture of bone; bone is bent due to fracture on one side.
vakula	Plant bakula tree, bullet wood tree, Mimusops elengi, fragrant flower of spanish cherry.
valīpalita	winkles and grey hair.
vaṇgasena	author of Cikitsāsārasangraha.
vānīra	a sort of cane or reed growing near water.
vankṣaṇa	groin, the pubic and iliac regions, the thigh joint.
vankṣanāha	groin, the pubic and iliac regions, the thigh joint.
vankṣanāha	tension of groin.
vardhamāna	growing, increasing; vardhamānapippali rejuvenating therapy with long peppers.
vasuka	1. Plant various plants: Calatropis gingantea, Agati grandiflora, Adhatoda vasika, Borreria articularis, Indigofera enneaphylla, Osmanthus fragrans and Chenopodium; Spermacoce hispida; 2. a kind of salt.
vatsa	a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to Ganga Yamura confluence region.
vāyu	air, wind, one of the five gross elements.
vedāṅga	vedic auxiliary disciplines; phonetics (śikṣa), ritual (kalpa), grammar (vyākaraṇa), etymology (nirukti), meter (chandas) and astrology (jyotiṣa).
veśavāra	1.ginger (sunṭhi), pepper (marīca), long pepper (pippali), coriander (dhānyaka),black cumin (ajāji), pomegranate (dāḍima), piper chaba (pippalimūlam) together are known as veśavāra; 2. boneless meat minced, steamed and added with spices, ghee et Century
vidāri	1. retropharyngeal abscess after bursting, 2. gangrenous stomatitis; 3. eruption in axilla or groin; 4. inflammatory oedema in the ear.
vidārika	lymphnode enlargement in groin and axilla, dermatitis of the external ear, otitis media.
videha	a geographical region in ancient India corresponding to southern Nepal; Mithila region.
vikaṇṭaka	having no thorns or having spreading thorns; camel thorn bush or marsh barbel; Alhagi maurorum or Hygrophila auriculata; Foacourtia indica.
vilepi	semisolid preparation of rice, rice gruel.
viroṣa,viroṣana	1. loosing weight due to excessive intake of kaṭu, tikta, kaṣāya food; 2. angry.
vīrudh	Plant medicinal plant, herb that grows again after cutting; a creeper.
virūdhaka	grain or vegetables that begin to sprout.
viṣamagrāhi	instrument difficult to handle, one of the yantradoṣas.
viṣkirā	gallinaceous birds that can’t fly ex: peacock, hen, eat split grains.
viṭapa	lethal point (marma) between groin and scrotum, damage can lead to impotence.
vṛīhi	Plant grain of rice, ordinary variety of rice ripeinin in the rainy season; Oryza sativa.
vrudhi	1. growth (testicle), (gut), 2. Plant Habenaria intermedia, syn. H. arietina.
vyākaraṇa	grammar, one of the vedāngas.
yāśa	Plant ground prickle; khorassan thorn; Fagonia cretica.
yavāgu	thick rice gruel; gruel made from barley.
yavāsa	fodder, grass, pasturage.
yuva	age-group of sixteen to thirtyfour years.

Wordnet Search

"gr" has 652 results.


gr	nipuṇa, pravīṇa, abhijña, vijña, niṣṇāta, śikṣita, vaijñānika, kṛtamukha, kṛtin, kuśala, saṅkhyāvat, matimat, kuśagrīyamati, kṛṣṭi, vidura, budha, dakṣa, nediṣṭha, kṛtadhī, sudhin, vidvas, kṛtakarman, vicakṣaṇa, vidagdha, catura, prauḍha, boddhṛ, viśārada, sumedhas, sumati, tīkṣṇa, prekṣāvat, vibudha, vidan, vijñānika, kuśalin yaḥ prakarṣeṇa kāryakṣamaḥ asti। arjunaḥ dhanurvidyāyāṃ nipuṇaḥ āsīt।
gr	śiṣṭa, bhadra, madra, ācāravat, vinīta, sabhya, śiṣṭācārasevin, agrāmya, āryavṛtta, suvṛtta, yaśasya, sabheya, anīca, arhat, ādṛtya, ārya, āryamiśra, āryaka, ārṣeya, uḍḍāmara, kulya, guru, mānya, sat, sajjana, sādhu, sujana, praśrayin, praśrita, sudakṣiṇa yaḥ sādhuvyavahāraṃ karoti। rāmaḥ śiṣṭaḥ puruṣaḥ asti।
gr	agrajaḥ, pūrvajaḥ, agriyaḥ, jyeṣṭhaḥ jyeṣṭhabhrātā। śyāmasya agrajaḥ adhyāpakaḥ asti।
gr	grahadaśā manuṣyasya jīvanakāle vividhānāṃ grahāṇāṃ niścitaḥ bhogakālaḥ। mama grahadaśā samīcīnā vartate।
gr	grahaḥ, khagaḥ, khecaraḥ, vihagaḥ, bhraman, tārā, tārakā, tārakam, jyotiḥ, jyotiṣkaḥ khagolīyapiṇḍaḥ yaḥ sūryaṃ paritaḥ paribhramati। pṛthvī sūryamālāyāḥ tṛtīyaḥ grahaḥ asti।
gr	agrajā, jyeṣṭha-bhaginī, attikā vayasā adhikā bhaginī। mama agrajā adhyāpikā asti।
gr	bṛhaspatiḥ, guruḥ, graharājaḥ khagolīyapiṇḍaḥ yaḥ sauramālāyāḥ pañcamaḥ grahaḥ yaḥ pṛthivyāḥ dūre asti। bṛhaspatiḥ sauramālāyāḥ mahattamaḥ grahaḥ asti।
gr	rājyam, prāntaḥ, kṣetram, maṇḍalam, cakram, deśaḥ, pradeśaḥ, nirgaḥ, rāṣṭram, grāmaśatam, kṣatram, janapadaḥ deśasya tadbhāgaḥ yasya prajāyāḥ bhāṣā tathā ca ācāravicārapaddhatiḥ bhinnā svatantrā ca asti। adhunā bhāratadeśe navaviṃśarājyāni santi।
gr	budbudaḥ, ḍimbikā, sphāraḥ, gaṇḍaḥ, phenāgram dravapadārthe jātaḥ vāyuyuktaḥ vartulākāravikāraḥ। mānavasya jīvanaṃ budbudam iva asti ।
gr	anugrāhin, upakārin, anukūla, anugrahaśīla, upakāraśīla, hitabuddhi, suśīla, dakṣiṇa, sujana yaḥ anugṛhṇāti। anugrāhiṇaḥ puruṣasya jīvanaṃ śāntiyuktam asti।
gr	agraḥ, śiraḥ, śikharam kasyapi vastunaḥ sūcivat agrabhāgaḥ। duryodhanaḥ śrīkṛṣṇāya akathayat nāhaṃ dadāmi sūcyāḥ agreṇa tulyāṃ bhūmim api pāṇḍavebhyaḥ।
gr	stanāgram, stanamukham, stanamukhaḥ, stanaśikhā, kucāgram, cūcukaḥ, cūcukam, stanavṛntaḥ, stanavṛntam, pippalakam, narmmaṭhaḥ, vṛntam striyāḥ stanasya agrabhāgam। asyāḥ goḥ stanāgre vraṇaḥ jātaḥ।
gr	vyagratā bahuṣu kāryeṣu sahabhāgitvam। vyagratāyāḥ kāraṇāt ahaṃ na amilam।
gr	graivam, graiveyam, graiveyakam grīvām abhitaḥ vastrasya kaṭhinaḥ avayavaḥ। saḥ graivam ūrdhvaṃ kṛtvā gacchati।
gr	sādhanam, upacāraḥ, sādhanasāmagrī, sāmagrī, sāhityam, upāyaḥ, kāraṇam, upakaraṇam, karaṇam, dvāram, karmasādhanam, kāryasādhakam yasya sāhāyyena kāryasya siddhiḥ jāyate। vāhanaṃ yātrāyāḥ sādhanam asti।
gr	sagranthimūlam granthiyuktaṃ mūlam। naikeṣu kṣupeṣu sagranthimūlam asti।
gr	aṇḍagranthiḥ, vṛṣaṇaḥ, muṣkaḥ, koṣaḥ, koṣakaḥ, kośaḥ, muñcakaḥ, tīkṣṇam purūṣasya aṇḍakośasya saḥ granthī yasmāt śukravindavaḥ niḥsaranti। aṇḍagrantheḥ vikārāt saḥ pitā na bhavati।
gr	akṣakāsthi, grīvāsthi grīvāyāḥ pārśve vartamānā urasaḥ upari vartamāne dve dhanuṣākāre asthinī। tasya dakṣiṇam akṣakāsthi bhagnam।
gr	sūtragranthanasādhanam sūtragrathanasya sādhanam। tāntavacakram ekaṃ sūtragranthanasādhanam।
gr	upacāraḥ, upacaryā, cikitsā, rukpratikriyā, nigrahaḥ, vedanāniṣṭhā, kriyā, upakramaḥ, śamaḥ rogasya dūrīkaraṇārthe kṛtā prakriyā। asya rogasya upacāraḥ kathaṃ bhavati।
gr	phaladātā, phalagrāhī, phalegrāhī, phaladaḥ saḥ vṛkṣaḥ yasy